1'^..^  >^ 


^^m 


OF     _,, 

Califc 


M--^     t^ 


.^««***'*^ 


^\  'm  v^. '  />' 


^^m 


^Ui^^j/:^^-  "i?!* 


^^^*^  ^S^^^^ 


J 


\ 


:\ 


i  r.i.n.i         t^ 


J 


.-i.,>'1^1v, 


■■■"'^i 


/'/////  ';^_ 


/..../Wii^>^4..    rS['n-i...JA'.        \\V<i-l\A^..^.t'''^    ^-._. 


n  X   s     p 


^<5t:" 


THE  FIRST  SIX  BOOKS 


OF 


CJSAR'S  COMMENTARIES 


ON    THE 


GALLIC  ¥AR, 

ADAPTED    TO 

.BULLIONS'  LATIN  GRAMMAR; 


WITH  AN    INTRODUCTIONj    ON    THE    IDIOMS  OF    THE    LATIN 

LANGUAGE;^ COPIOUS    EXPLANATORY  NOTES;    AND 

AN    I^i)-EX    OF    PROPER    NAMES,    ETC. 


By  Rev.  PETER  BULLIONS,  D.  D., 

PB0FES30B   OP  LANGUAGES  IN  THE   ALBANY   ACADEMY;   AND  AUTHOR 

OF  THE  SEKIES  OF  GRAMMARS,  GREEK,  LATIN  AND 

ENGLISH,  ON  THE  SAME  PLAN. 


THIRD  EDITION. 

NEW-YORK: 
PUBLISHED  BY  PRATT,  WOODFORD  &  Co. 

No.     Sa    WALL    STREET, 


1845. 


Entered  according  to   Act  of  Congress,   in  the   year    1845,   by 

PETER  BULLIONS, 
in  the   Clerk's   Office   of  the   Southern  District   of  New- York. 


E3)UCATI0S  LIBS^ 


PREFACE. 


Cjesar  is  usually,  and  with  great  propriety,  among  the  first  books 
put  into  the  hands  of  pupils  commencing  the  study  of  Latin.  In 
adapting  a  portion  of  this  work,  as  well  as  the  Latin  Reader,  to  his 
Latin  Grammar,  the  chief  object  of  the  Editor  has  been  to  lead  the 
student,  in  the  beginning  of  his  course,  to  a  minute  and  thorough 
acquaintance  with  the  principles  of  the  language.  The  text  of  Ou- 
dendorp  has  been  generally  followed.  For  the  sake  of  convenience, 
and  also  because,  with  many,  Caesar  is  the  first  book  studied  after 
the  Grammar,  the  Introduction  on  the  Latin  Idioms  prefixed  to  the 
Latin  Reader  has  been  prefixed  here  also.  To  this  as  well  as  to 
the  Grammar  reference  is  constantly  made  at  the  foot  of  the  page, 
for  the  purpose  of  explaining  and  illustrating  principles  as  they 
occur;  and  if  the  pupil  will  only  take  the  pains  to  examine  these 
references  as  he  proceeds,  he  will  gradually,  and  with  comparative- 
ly little  l^or,  become  so  familiar  with  the  grammatical  structure 
and  idioms  of  the  language  that  his  future  progress  will  be  much 
more  rapid  and  pleasant  than  it  can  be  without  such  a  course  of 
training. 

To  the  text  copious  notes  have  been  added,  for  the  purpose  of  ex- 
plaining more  particularly  some  constructions  of  the  language, — aid- 
ing the  pupil  in  the  selection  of  an  appropriate  term,  or,  in  giving 
variety  to  his  expression, — and,  in  some  cases,  of  assisting  him  to 
apprehend  more  clearly  the  meaning  of  the  author.  These,  together 
with  the  references  to  the  Introduction  and  Grammar  above  speci- 
fied, contain  such  and  so  much  assistance  as  an  industrious  and  intel- 
ligent pupil,  at  this  stage  of  his  progress,  in  preparing  his  les- 
sons, may  be  supposed  to  need  from  his  teacher;  so  that  by  a  proper 
use  of  this  work,  both  the  teacher  will  be  relieved  in  a  great  mea- 
sure  from  that  labor,  and  interruption  of  other  duties  which  the  ren- 


ivi57'?0f)9 


> 


IV  PREFACE. 

dering  of  this  assistance  would  require,  and  the  pupil  will  have 
always  at  hand  the  assistance  needed.  These  notes  are  taken  chiefly 
from  Dymock's  Csesar,  Glasgow  edition.  A  few  have  been  added 
from  other  sources. 

The  Vocabulary  or  index  at  the  end  of  the  work  is  abridged  from 
the  same  author,  and  contains  various  and  important  information 
respecting  the  persons  and  places  mentioned  in  the  text,  and  also 
respecting  many  things  belonging  to  the  antiquities  and  polity  of  the 
Romans  and  their  method  of  conducting  military  operations.  In 
this  part  several  wood  cuts  have  been  introduced  to  aid  the  pupil  in 
forming  correct  ideas  of  some  of  the  engines  and  operations  of  war, 
as  they  existed  in  the  days  of  Caesar. 

The  map  of  Ancient  Gaul  has  been  prepared  with  special  refer- 
ence to  this  work,  and  exhibits  the  divisions  of  that  country,  with 
the  names  of  nations,  tribes,  and  towns,  mentioned  by  Caesar,  as 
they  existed  in  his  time,  so  far  as  their  position  can  be  ascertained 
from  authentic  sources.  The  modern  names  of  the  same  places 
will  be  found,  generally,  by  consulting  the  Index. 

A  correct  pronunciation  as  it  regards  quantity  should  be  attended 
to  from  the  beginning.  In  order  to  aid  the  pupil  in  forming  correct 
habits  in  this  too  much  neglected  part  of  study,  the  quantity  of  the 
penult  syllable  has  been  marked  in  all  words  of  more  than  two  syl- 
lables, except  where  the  penult  vow^l  is  followed  by  two  conso- 
nants or  a  double  consonant,  in  which  case  it  is  always  long;  or 
where  the  penult  vowel  is  followed  by  another  vowel,  in  which  case 
it  is  almost  always  short;  or  when  the  syllable  being  common,  that 
is,  either  short  or  long,  there  is  no  danger  of  the  quai^ity  being 
given  wrong.  In  words  of  two  syllables  there  is  little  danger  of 
wrong  pronunciation,  and  if,  in  words  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
the  quantity  of  the  penult  is  correctly  given,  there  is  little  danger 
of  error  elsewhere. 

With  a  view  to  render  the  work  as  full  as  was  deemed  necessary, 
and  at  the  same  time  to  bring  the  price  so  low  as  to  make  it  more 
generally  accessible,  only  the  first  six  books  of  the  Commentaries 
on  the  Gallic  war  have  been  taken.  These  contain  all  that  portion 
of  this  author  usually  read  in  academies  and  schools,  and  to  have 
taken  more  would  only  have  increased  the  size  and  the  price  of  the 
book  without  any  corresponding  benefit  to  the  purchaser. 

The  Editor  takes  this  opportunity  to  renew  his  grateful  acknow- 
ledgements to  the  many  learned  men,  and  instructors  of  youth,  for 


PREFACE.  V 

the  favor  with  which  his  humble  labors  have  been  received  by  them, 
and  for  the  many  important  suggestions  communicated,  by  which  he 
has  been  enabled  to  add  essentially  to  their  value  and  usefulness. 
A  Greek  Reader  adapted  to  the  Greek  Grammar  is  now  preparing, 
and  will  be  published  as  speedily  as  possible. 

Albany  Academy,  ) 
February  26,  1845.   J 


( 


NOTICE. 

In  the  text,  the  references  to  the  Grammar  generally  will  be 
found  at  the  places  indicated,  in  all  the  editions.  Those  marked 
§  140,  1,  1st,  2d,  3d,  4th,  will  be  found  in  editions  previous  to  the 
last  of  1844,  at  §  145,  Obs.  5,  1st,  2d,  3d,  4th:  And  those  marked 
§  140,  2,  3,  4,  5,  will  be  found  under  §  140,  Obs.  1,  2d,  3d,  4th, 
and  5  th. 


» 


INTRODUCTION 


SENTENCES. 

1.  A  sentence  is  such  an  assemblage  of  words  as  makes 
complete  sense;  as,  Man  is  mortal. 

2.  Sentences  are  of  two  kinds,  simple  and  compound. 

3.  A  simple  sentence  contains  but  one  subject  and  one 
verb ;  as,  Life  is  short.     Time  Jlies. 

4.  A  compound  sentence  contains  two  or  more  simple  sen- 
tences combined ;  as,  Life^  which  is  short,  should  he  well 
employed. 

5.  In  the  combining  of  words  to  form  a  sentence,  observe 
carefully  the  following 

General  Principles  of  Syntax. 

1.  In  every  sentence  there  must  be  a  verb  in  the  indica- 
tive, subjunctive,  imperative,  or  infinitive  mood,  and  a  sub- 
jectj  expressed  or  understood. 

2.  Every  adjective,  adjective  pronoun,  or  participle,  must 
have  a  substantive  expressed  or  understood  with  which  it 
agrees,  §  98  and  §  146.* 

3.  Every  relative  must  have  an  antecedent  or  word  to 
which  it  refers,  and  with  which  it  agrees,  ^  99. 

4.  Every  nominative  has  its  own  verb  expressed  or  under- 
stood, of  which  it  is  the  subject,  ^^  100,  101,  102.  Or  is 
placed  after  the'  substantive  verb  in  the  predicate,  ^  103. 

5.  Every  finite  verb ;  i.  e.,  every  verb  in  the  indicative, 
subjunctive  or  imperative  mood,  has  its  own  nominative, 
expressed  or  understood,  §§  101,  102,  and  when  the  infini- 
tive has  a  subject  it  is  in  the  accusative,  §  145.  The  infini- 
tive without  a  subject  does  not  form  a  sentence  or  proposi- 
tion, ^  143. 

6.  Every  oblique  case  is  governed  by  some  word,  express- 
ed or  understood,  in  the  sentence  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

•  The  references  are  to  the  sections  in  the  Latin  Grammar, 


f 


8  INTBODIJCTION. 

Resolution  or  Analysis. 

Every  simple  sentence  consists  of  two  parts,  the  subject 
and  the  predicate,  ^  94,  6.  7.  8.  In  analyzing  a  sentence, 
it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  between  the  Grammatical  sub- 
ject and  predicate,  and  the  Logical  subject  and  predicate. 

The  G-rammatical  subject  is  the  name  or  thing  spoken  of, 
without,  or  separated  from,  all  modifying  words  or  clauses, 
and  which  stands  as  the  nominative  to  the  verb,  or  the  ac- 
cusative before  the  infinitive. 

The  Logical  subject  is  the  same  word  in  connection  with 
the  qualifying  or  restricting  expressions,  which  go  to  make 
up  the  full  and  precise  idea  of  the  thing  spoken  of. 

The  Grammatical  predicate  is  the  word  or  words  contain- 
ing the  simple  affirmation  made  respecting  the  subject. 

The  Logical  predicate  is  the  grammatical  predicate  com- 
bined with  all  those  words  or  expressions  that  modify  or 
restrict  it  in  any  way ;  thus : 

In  the  sentence,  "An  inordinate  desire  of  admiration 
often  produces  a  contemptible  levity  of  deportment;"  the 
Grammatical  subject  is  ^^  desire ;^^  the  Logical  ^^An  inordi' 
note  desire  of  admiration^  The  Grammatical  predicate  is 
^^ produces^''"'  the  Logical,  ^''produces  often  a  contemptible 
lecity  of  deportment. ^^ 

In  Latin  and  English,  the  general  arrangement  of  a  sen- 
tence is  the  same,  i.  e.,  the  sentence  commonly  begins  with 
the  subject  and  ends  with  the  predicate.  But  the  order  of 
the  words  in  each  of  these  parts,  is  usually  so  different  in 
Latin,  from  what  it  is  in  English,  that  one  of  the  first  diffi- 
culties a  beginner  has  to  encounter  with  a  Latin  sentence, 
is  to  know  how  "  to  take  it  in,"  or  to  arrange  it  in  the  proper 
order  of  the  English.  This  is  technically  called  constrU' 
ing  or  giving  the  order.  To  assist  in  this,  some  advan- 
tage may  be  found  by  carefully  attending  to  the  following 

Directions  for  Beginners. 
Direct.  I.  As  all  the  other  parts  of  a  sentence  depend 
upon  the  two  leading  parts,  namely,  the  subject  or  NOMI- 
NATIVE, and  the  predicate  or  VEKB;  the  first  thing  to  be 
done  with  every  sentence,  is  to  find  out  these.  In  order  to 
this. 


INTRODUCTION.-  9 

1.  Look  for  the  leading  verb,  which  is  always  in  the 
present,  imperfect,  perfect,  pluperfect,  or  future  of  the  indic- 
ative, or  in  the  imperative  mood,*  and  usually  at  or  near 
the  end  of  the  sentence. 

2.  Having  found  the  verb,  observe  its  number  and  person; 
this  will  aid  in  finding  its  nominative,  which  is  a  noun  or 
pronoun  in  the  same  number  and  person  with  the  verb,  com- 
monly before  it,  and  near  the  beginning  of  the  sentence, 
though  not  always  so,  §  151.  R.  I.  with  exceptions. 

Direct.  II.  Having  thus  found  the  nominative  and  verb, 
and  ascertained  their  meaning,  the  sentence  may  be  resolved 
from  the  Latin  into  the  English  order,  as  follows : 

1.  Take  the  Vocative,  Exciting,  Introductory,  or  connect- 
ing words,  if  there  are  any. 

2.  The  NOMINATIVE. 

3.  Words  limiting  or  explaining  it,  i.  e.,  words  agreeing 
with  it,  or  governed  by  it,  or  by  one  another,  where  they 
are  found,  till  you  come  to  the  verh. 

4.  The  VERB. 

5.  Words  limiting  or  explaining  it,  i.  e.,  words  which 
modify  it,  are  governed  by  it,  or  depend  upon  it. 

6.  Supply  everywhere  the  words  understood. 

7.  If  the  sentence  be  compound,  take  the  parts  of  it  seve- 
rally as  they  depend  one  upon  another,  proceeding  with  each 
of  them  as  above. 

Direct.  III.  In  arranging  the  words  for  translation,  in  the 
subordinate  parts  of  a  sentence,  observe  the  following 

Rules  for  construing. 
I.  An  oblique  case,  or  the  infinitive  mood,  is  put  after  the 
word  that  governs  it. 

Exc.  The  relative  and  interrogative  are  usually  put  before  the  gov- 
erning word,  unless  that  be  a  preposition;  if  it  is,  then  after  it. 

n.  An  adjective,  if  no  other  word  depend  upon  it  or  be 
coupled  with  it,  is  put  before  its  substantive ;  but  if  another 
word  depend  upon  it,  or  be  governed  by  it,  it  is  usually 
placed  after  it. 

•  All  the  other  parts  of  the  verb  are  generally  used  in  subordinate 
clauses.  So,  also,  is  the  pluperfect  indicative.  In  oblique  discourse, 
the  leading  verb  is  in  the  infinitive,  §  141.  Rule  VI. 


10  INTRODUCTION. 

III.  The  participle  is  usually  construed  after  its  substan- 
tive, or  the  word  with  which  it  agrees. 

IV.  The  relative  and  its  oiause,  should,  if  possible,  come 
immediately  after  the  antecedent. 

V.  When  a  question  is  asked,  the  nominative  comes  after 
the  verb ;  (in  English  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  verb.) 
Interrogative  words,  however,  such  as  quis,  quotus,  guantus, 
uter,  &c.,  come  before  the  verb. 

VI.  After  a  transitive  active  verb,  look  for  an  accusative, 
and  after  a  preposition,  for  an  accusative  or  ablative,  and 
arrange  the  words  accordingly. 

VII.  Words  in  apposition  must  be  construed  as  near 
together  as  possible. 

VIII.  Adverbs,  adverbial  phrases,  prepositions  with  their 
cases,  circumstances  of  time,  place,  cause,  manner,  instru- 
ment, &c.,  should  be  placed,  in  general,  after  the  words 
which  they  modify.  The  case  absolute  commonly  before 
them,  and  often  j&rst  in  the  sentence. 

IX.  The  words  of  different  clauses  must  not  be  mixed 
together,  but  each  clause  translated  by  itself,  in  its  order, 
according  to  its  connection  with,  or  dependence  upon,  those 
to  which  it  is  related. 

X.  Conjunctions  should  be  placed  before  the  last  of  two 
words,  or  sentences  connected. 


I 


LATIN    IDIOMS.* 


PARTICULAR  DIRECTIONS   AND  MODELS  FOR  TRANS- 
LATION. 

[The  following  explanations  and  directions  are  intended  chiefly  for  reference.  But 
it  will  be  of  great  advantage  for  the  pupil  to  become  familiar  with  them  by  going  through 
them  two  or  three  times,  in  course,  simultaneously  with  his  reading  lessons.] 

1.  Before  translating,  every  sentence  should  be  read 
over  till  it  can  be  read  correctly  and  with  ease,  paying  spe- 
cial attention  to  the  quantity  and  pronunciation.  The  words 
should  then  be  arranged  according  to  the  preceding  general 
directions,  and  translated  as  they  are  arranged,  separately 
or  in  clusters,  as  may  be  found  convenient ;  always  remem- 
bering to  place  adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns  with  their 
substantives  before  translating.  The  sense  and  grammati- 
cal construction  being  thus  ascertained,  the  translation  may 
then  be  read  over  without  the  Latin,  and  due  attention  paid 
to  the  English  idiom.  The  whole  sentence,  whether  simple 
or  compound,  may  then  be  analyzed  as  directed  §  152,  and 
last  of  all,  every  word  parsed  separately  as  directed,  ^  153. 

2.  In  order  to  arrange  and  translate  with  ease,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  be  familiar  with,  and  readily  to  distinguish  the  dif- 
ferent cases,  genders,  and  numbers  of  nouns,  pronouns, 
adjectives,  and  participles,  and  to  translate  them  correctly 
and  promptly,  in  these  cases  and  numbers,  &c. ;  and  also  to 
distinguish  and  correctly  translate  the  verb  in  its  various 
moods,  tenses,  numbers,  persons,  &;c.  This  can  be  acquired 
only  by  continual  practice  and  drilling,  which  should  be  kept 
up  till  the  utmost  readiness  is  attained. 

3.  The  English  prepositions  used  in  translating  the  dif- 
ferent cases  in  Latin,  for  the  sake  of  convenience,  may  be 
called  SIGNS  of  those  cases ;  and  in  translating  these,  the 
English  definite  or  indefinite  article  is  to  be  used  as  the  sense 
requires.     The  signs  of  the  cases  are  as  follows : 

Nom.   (No  sign.)  Ace.    (No  sign.) 

Gen.    Of.  Voc.    0.  or  no  sign. 

Dat.     To  ox  for.  Abl.    With,  from,  in,  hy,  he.    * 

*  A  Latin  idiom,  strictly  speaking,  is  a  mode  of  speech  peculiar 
to  the  Latin  language.  It  is  here  used  in  a  more  extended  sense,  to 
denote  a  mode  of  speech  difierent  from  the  English,  or  which,  if  ren- 
dered word  for  word,  and  with  the  ordinary  signs  of  cases,  moods, 
tenses,  &c.,  would  not  make  a  correct  English  sentence. 


J2  INTRODUCTION. 

In  certain  constructions  the  idiom  of  the  English  language 
requires  the  oblique  cases  in  Latin  to  be  translated  in  a  man- 
ner different  from  the  above.  The  chief  of  these  construc- 
tions are  the  fallowing : 


mUf..      ..Tkea^^e. 


1.  The  genitive  denoting  the  place  where,  R.  XXXVI.,  is 

translated  at;  as,  Romce,  "  At  Rome." 

2.  Denoting  ^r2ce,  sometimes /or;  as,  Vendidit  pluris, 
"He  sold  it  for  Tnore;^''  or  without  a  sign;  as,  Constttit 
pluris,  " It  cost  ?«ore. 

5,  the  BatweM^, 

1.  After  a  verb  of  taking  away,  R.  AAlX. ;  the  dative  is 
translated /roTTz ;  as,  Eripuit  memorti,  "He  rescued  me 
from  death 'j"*^  Eripttur  morti,  "He  is  rescued  from 
death:'  R.  XXXII-III.  See  §  123,  Exp. 

2.  Denoting  the  doer  after  a  passive  verb,  R.  XXXtlL,  it 
is  translated  />2/;  as,  Vix  audior  ulli ,  "I  am  scarcely  heard 
by  any  one:' 

3.  Denoting  the  possessor,  R.  XV.,  Obs.  1,  it  is  transla- 
ted as  the  genitive  ;  as,  jE  z  in  mentem  venit,  "  It  came  into 
the  mind  to  him,''  i.  e»,  of  Mm,  or  into  his  mind. 

4.  After  verbs  signifying  "  to  be  present,"  at;  as,  Ad- 
fuit  precihus,  He  was  present  at  prayers.  §  1 12,  R.  I. 

6.   The  Ablative. 

1.  The  ablative  denoting  a  property  or  quality  of  another 
substantive, R.  VII.,  is  translated  q/*;  as,  Vir  mird  mag- 
nitu  dine,  "A  man  of  wonderful  size.'' 

2.  The  place  where,  R.  XXXVI.  Exc,  commonly  at^ 
sometimes  in.    ' 

3.  After  the  comparative  degree,  ^  120,  R.  XXIV.,  than; 
as,  Dulcior  melle,  "  Sweeter  than  honey." 

^.  Denoting  the  material  of  which  a  thing  is  made,  §  128, 
Obs.  2,  of;  as,  Factus  ebore,  "Made  of  ivory:' 

5.  After  dignus  and  words  denoting  origin;  also  after 
opus  and  usus,  signifying  need,  of;  as.  Dignus  honors, 
"Worthy  of  honor" 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  13 

6.  Denoting  time  how  long-,  sometimes  in ;  as,  U 7io  die 
fecit,  "He  did  it  in  rnie  day ;  "  sometimes  without  a  sign; 
as,   tfno  die   ahfuit,  "  He  was  absent  o?2e  <^ay.'' 

7.  Time  when,  at,  on;  as,  Solis  oc€asu,  ^^  At  the  set- 
ting of  the  sun ;  "  Idtbus  Aprtlis,  "  On  the  ides  of  April." 

8.  After  verbs  of  depriving,  §  125,  of;  as,  Euni  veste 
spolidvit,  "He  stripped  him  of  his  garment." 

Cases  without  Signs. 

7.  When  the  genitive,  dative,  or  ablative,  is  governed  by 
an  intransitive  verb  which  is  translated  by  a  transitive  verb 
in  English,  (^  38,  Obs.  4»^)  or  by  an  adjective  denoting  like- 
ness, the  sign  of  the  case  is  omitted;  as, 

1.  Gen.  Miserere  met,  Pity  we. 

^.  Dat.   Prafuit  exercttui,     He  commanded  the  army. 

3.  "      Placuit  r  eg  i  ,  It  pleased  the  king. 

4.  Abl.    Utitur  fr  aud  e  ,  He  uses  deceit. 

5.  ''      Potitus  est  imp  erio  ,     Re  ohiained  the  government . 

6.  Dat.  Similis  patri,  hike  his  father. 

Obs.  But  when  rendered  by  an  intransitive  verb  in  Eng- 
lish, the  sign  of  the  case  must  be  used ;  as, 

7.  Insidiantur  nobis  ,  They  lie  in  wait /or  tis. 

8.  When  a  verb  governs  two  datives,  by  R.  XIX.,  the 
dative  of  the  end  or  design  is  sometimes  rendered  without 
the  sign;  as, 

1.  Est  mihi  voluptdti,  It  is  to  me  [for]  a  pleasure  ;  i.  e., 

It  is  [or  brings]  a  pleasure  to  me. 

9.  The  ablative  absolute,  R.  LX.,  (See  No.  109,)  and 
frequently  time  how  long,  R.  XL.,  are  without  the  sign;  as, 

1.  Bellofinito,  T^e  M>ar  being  ended. 

2.  S <ix  menslhu^  abfuit,         He  was  absent  six  months. 

10.  When  the  ablative  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  the 
English  of  that  preposition  takes  the  place  of  the  sign  of 
the  ablative,  and  no  other  will  be  used;  thus, 

1.  Ah exercitu,  Fromt\\e  army.  4.  C u m dignitdte,  With  dignit3^ 

2.  E  X  urbe,       Out  of  the  city.   5.  P  r  o  castris,     Before  the  camp 

3.  In  agro,       /?i  the  field.  6.  T  enus  pube,    t/jp  fo  the  middle 

^ ,  11.  In  order  to  specify  more  particularly,  the  English  idiom 
sometimes  requires  the  possessive  pronouns,  my,  thy,  his, 
her,  its,  our,  your  their,  (not  expressed  in  Latin  unless  con- 
trasted with  others,)  to  be  supplied  before  a  noun,  and  espe- 

2 


14  INTRODUCTION. 

cially  if  they  refer  to  the  subject  of  the  sentence.  The 
sense  will  shew  when  this  is  to  be  done  and  what  pronoun 
is  to  be  used;  as, 

1.  Filius  simUis  patri,  A  son  like  ^is  father. 

2.  Reverere  parentesy  Reverence  yowr  parents. 

12.  Nouns  in  apposition,  {^  97,  R.  I.,)  must  be  brought 
as  near  together  as  possible,  and  the  sign  of  the  case,  when 
used,  prefixed  to  the  first  only ;  as, 

1.  Nom.  Cicero  Orator,  Cicero  the  orator. 

2.  Gen.    Ciceronis  oratoris,  Of  Cicero  the  orator. 

3.  Dat.     Ciceroni  oratori,  To  Cicero  the  orator, 

4.  Abl.     Cicerone  oratore,  With  Cicero  the  orator. 

13.  The  noun  in  apposition  is  Sometimes  connected  with 
the  noun  before  it  by  the  words  as,  being,  &c. ;  as, 

1.  Misit  me  c  omit  em  ,         He  sent  me  as  a  companion. 

2.  Hie  puer  venit ,  He  came,  when  [or  being]  a  boy. 

Adjectives  and  Substantives. 

14.  In  translating  an  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun  and 
a  substantive  together,  the  adjective  is  commonly  placed 
first,  and  the  sign  of  the  case  is  prefixed  to  it,  and  not  to  the 
noun,  §  98,  R.  II. ;  as, 

1.  Nom.  .^Itus  mons,  A  high  mountain. 

2.  Gen.  .dlti  montis,  Of  a  high  mountain. 

3.  Dat.  .^Ito  monti,  To  [for]  a  high  mountain. 

4.  Abl.  jilto  monte,  With  a  high  mountain. 

15.  When  two  or  more  adjectives,  coupled  by  a  conjunc- 
tion belong  to  one  substantive,  they  may  be  placed  either 
before  or  after  it;  as, 

1.  Jupiter  optimus  et  maxtmus,  Jupiter  th*e  best  and  greatest;  or 
Optimus  et  maxlmus  Jupiter,  The  best  and  greatest  Jupiter. 

2.  Viri  sapientis  et  docti,  Of  a  man  wise  and  learned;  or 
Sapientis  et  docti  viri,  Of  a  wise  and  learned  man. 

16.  The  adjective  must  be  placed  after  its  substantive 
when  the  former  has  a  negative  joined  with  it,  or  another 
word  in  the  sentence  governed  by  it,  or  dependent  upon  it. 
iSo  also  solus;  as, 

1.  Dux  perltus  belli,  A  general  skilled  in  war. 

2.  Filius  simXlis  patri,  A  son  like  his  father.  ' 

3.  Poeta  dignus  honore,  A  poet  worthy  of  honor. 

4.  Homines  soli  sapiunt,  Men  alone  are  wise. 

5.  .Avis  tarn parum  decora,  A  bird  so  little  beautiful. 

6.  Littore  non  molli  neque  arenoso,  With  a  shore  not  soft  nor  sandy. 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  15 

17.  The  adjectives  primus,  medius,  ultimus,  extremus, 
infimus,  imus,  summus,  supremus,  reltquus,  cceter,  or  ccBte- 
rus,  and  some  others  describing  a  part  of  an  object,  are 
translated  as  substantives,  with  the  sign  of  the  case  prefixed, 
and  of  before  the  substantive  following,  ^  98,  Obs.  9 ;  a,s, 

1.  Media   node,  In  the  middle  of  the  night. 

2.  jld   sum  mum   montem.  To  the  top  of  the  in.o\inta.m. 

18.  When  these  adjectives  (No.  17,)  describe  the  whole 
and  not  a  part  only,  they  are  translated  as  No.  11. ;  as, 

Summum  bonum,  The  chief  good. 

Supremus  dies,  The  last  day. 

19.  An  adjective  without  a  substantive  usually  has  a  sub- 
stantive understood,  but  obvious  from  the  connexion,  <}  98, 
Obs.  5.  Masculine  adjectives,  (if  plural,)  commonly  agree 
with  homineSy  or,  if  possessives,  with  amid,  cives,  or  milites, 
understood;  and  neuters,  with  factum,  negotium,  verbum, 
tempus,  &c. ;  as, 

1.  Boni  (homines)  sunt  rari,  Good  men  are  rare, 

2.  Ccesar  misit  suos  (milttes,)         Caesar  sent  his  soldiers. 

3.  Codes    transndvit    ad    suos      Codes  swam  over  to  his  fellow- 

(cives,)  ,  citizens. 

4.  Labor  vincit  omnia  (negotia)  Labor  overcomes  all  things. 

5.  In  posterum  (tempus,)  In  time  to  come, — for  the  future. 

6.  In  eo  (loco)  ut.  In  such  a  situation  that. 

20.  Adjectives  commonly  used  without  a  substantive,  (but 
still  belonging  to  a  substantive  understood,)  may  be  regard- 
ed as  substantives.  They  are  such  as  mortdles,  boni,  maliy 
superi,  inferi,  Grcecus,  Romdnus,  &c.  (See  §  98,  Obs.  5,)  ;  as, 

1.  Mali  oderunt   bonos,  The  wicked  hdiie  the  good. 

2.  Grce  cos  Romdni  vicerunt,  The  Romans  conquered  the  Greeks. 

21.  Adjective  words  when  partitives,  or  used  partitively, 
take  the  gender  of  the  noun  expressing  the  whole,  and 
govern  it  in  the  genitive  plural,  (if  a  collective  noun,  in  the 
genitive  singular,)  §  107,  Rule  X.  In  this  case  verbs  and 
adjectives  agree  with  the  partitive  as  if  it  were  a  noun;  as, 

1.  All  quis  philosophorumSome  one  of  the  philosophers  has 

dixit,  said. 

2-   Una   musdrum  veniet,  O ne  of  the  muses  will  coxae . 

3.  Multi  nob  ilium  juvenum,  Many  noble  ijoung  men. 

22.  The  comparative  degree  not  followed  by  an  ablative, 
or  the  conjunction  quam,  (than)  is  usually  translated  by  the 
positive  with  too  or  rcdktr  prefixed.  For  explanation  see 
§  120,  Obs.  .5.;  as, 


16  INTRODUCTION. 

1.  Iracundior  est.  (scil.        He  is  ioo  {or  rather)    passionate. 

cequo,) 

2.  JE  grius  ferebat,  He  took  it  rather  ill. 

3.  jiltius  voldvit,  He  Aew  too  high. 

Obs.  In  a  comparison,  eo  or  ia7ito  with  a  comparative  in 
one  clause,  and  quo  or  quanto  in  the  other,  may  be  rendered 
"  the  ;"  (See  No.  44.  7.  8.)  as, 

4.  Quo  plures,  eo  feliciores,         The  more  the  happier. 

23.  The  superlative  degree  expressing  comparison,  is 
usually  preceded  by  the  article  the  in  English,  {§  25,)  as, 

1.  D  0  ctisslmus  Romanorum,  The  most  learned  of  the  Romans. 

2.  Fortissimus  miles  in  ex-     The  bravest  soldier  in  the  army. 

ercUu, 

24.  When  the  superlative  does  not  express  comparison, 
but  only  eminence  or  distinction,  it  is  translated  with  the 
article  a  or  a7i  prefixed  in  the  singular,  and  without  an  arti- 
cle in  the  plural ;  or  by  the  positive,  with  very,  eminently y 
&c.,  prefixed,  {^25,);  as, 

1.  Homo  doctisslmus.  A  most  learned  (or  a  very  learned) 

man. 

2.  Homines  doctissimi,  Most   learned    (or   very   learned) 

men. 

25.  Alius  repeated  with  a  different  word  in  the  same  clause, 
renders  that  clause  double,  and  requires  it  to  be  translated 
as  in  the  following  examples  : 

1.  Alius  alia  via,  One  by  one  way,  another  by  another. 

2.  Aliud  aliis  videtur,       One  thing  seems  good  to  some,  another  to 

others,  i.  e.  Some  think  one  thing, 
and  some  another.  (See  other  varie- 
ties. §  98. Obs.  11.) 

The  same  usage  occurs  with  words  derived  from  alius. 
See  Gr.  §  98,  Obs.  12. 

26.  The  distributive  numeral  adjectives  are  usually  trans- 
lated by  the  cardinal  number  indicated,  with  "  each,"  or 
"  to  each,"  annexed  ;  sometimes  by  repeating  the  cardinal 
thus,  "one  by  one;"  "two  by  two,"  &c.,  ^  24,  11;  as, 

1 .  Consules  bin  as  naves  habe-      The  consuls  had  each  two  ships,  or, 

bant,  had  two  ships  each. 

2.  Qua  singuli  carri  duceren-    Where  wagons  could  be  led  one  by 

tur.  one. 

3.  Tigna  bina  ,  Beams  two  by  two,  or  in  pairs. 

4.  Singitlis  singulas  par-    He  distributed  equal  parts,  one  to 

tes  destribuit  cequdles  each. 

5.  Singulis  mensibus  hoc  fecit,  This  he  did  every  (or  each)  month. 

6.  Plures  sing  III  iuxoreshabent,T\i^y  have  each  many  wives. 


'■-,'mfu^l^,m'v.^m!'iy''.  ''•^^^'«^:rm>*m}m':'S!s^*iH'Vf^^^v-W 


LATIN   IDIOMS.  17 

Pr07lOU7lS. 

27.  1st.  The  adjective  pronoun,  hie,  hsc,  hoc,  with  a  noun 
following,  is  used  as  an  adjective,  and  means,  in  the  singu- 
lar, "  this^'"' — in  the  plural,  "  these^ — Ille,  ilia,  illud, — isj 
ea,  id, — iste,  ista,  istud,  with  a  noun,  in  the  singular,  mean 
*'  that,'" — in  the  plural,  "  those:' 

2d.  Without  a  noun  following  they  are  all  used  substan- 
tively, and  mean,  in  the  singular,  he,  she,  it ;  in  the  plural, 
they;   thus, 

1.  Hie  vir,  This  man.  4.  Hie  fecit,  i/ie  did  it. 

2.  IllafemXna,  That  woman.         5.  Ilia  venit,  She  came. 

3.  Eaurhs,  That  city.  6.  E  a  (Dido)  condtdit  earn,  She 

built  it,  (Carthage.) 

Obs.  In  sentences  containing  an  enumeration  of  particu- 
lars, the    same    pronoun  is    sometimes    used  in  successive 
clauses,  but  they  require  to  be  translated  differently,  (^  98, 
Obs.  12,);  thus, 
7.  Hie,      \  hie,      ) 

^-  ^*'         i    "  one  "  "  the  one  "  ^^'        >    ''  another,"  ''the 

9.  Ille,      (        °^^'        tne  one.     .^^^^     ?  other." 

10.  Mter,  >  -alter,  ) 

When  antithesis  or  contrast  is  stated,  hie  is  translated 
"  this,"  and  refers  to  the  nearer  antecedent,  ille,  "  that,'" 
and  refers  to  the  more  distant ;  as, 

Jl.  Hie  minor  natu  est,  ill  e  major,  This  is  the  younger,  that,  the 

older. 

28.  Is,  ea,  id,  followed  by  ut,  or  the  relative,  qui,  qum, 
quod,  in  the  next  clause,  means  "  such,''''  and  implies  com- 
parison. The  relative  after  it  may  be  translated,  that  I, 
that  thou,  that  he,  that  they,  &c.,  according  as  the  antece- 
dent requires,  or  it  may  be  translated  as,  and  its  verb  by  the 
infinitive  (§  31,  Obs.  2.);  thus, 

1.  Is  homo  erat  ut,  S^c.,  He  was  such  a  man  that,  &c. 

2.  Neque  i s  sum  qui  terrear,       I  am  not  such  that  I  may  be  fright- 

ened. Or  better  thus,  I  am 
not  such  a  one  as  to  be  fright- 
ened. 

Obs.  The  adverb  eo  with  ut  following  it  means  "so  far," 
"  to  such  a  degree,"  "  to  such  a  point,"  "  in  such  a  state ;"  as, 

3.  jE  0  pervenit  ut,  '^  He  came  so  far,  (i.  e.  made  such 

progress,)  that;" 


18  INTRODUCTION. 

Possessive  Pronouns^ 

29.  The  possessive  pronoun  is  equivalent  in  meaning  to 
the  genitive  of  the  substantive  pronoun,  and  may  often  be 
30  translated ;  as, 

1.  Beneficio  suo  popullque  Ro-     By  the  kindness  of  himself  and  of 

mdni,  the  Roman  people. 

2.  Cum  me  a  nemo  scripta  legat,  Since  no  one  reads  the  writings  of 

vulgo  recitdre  timentis,  me,  fearing  to  recite  them  pub- 

licly. 

30.  The  possessives,  siius,  sua,  suum,  in  Latin,  agrees  in 
gender,  number,  and  case,  with  the  noun  denoting  the  object 
possessed,  but  in  English  must  be  translated  by  a  pronoun 
denoting  the  possessor ;  thus, 

1.  Pater  diligit  suo  s  liberos,  A  father  loves  his  children. 

2.  Parentes  dittgunt  suam.  soholem,  Parents  love  ^^eir  offspring. 

3.  Frater  diligit  suam  sororem,         A  brother  loves  his  sister. 

4.  Soror  diligit  suum  fratrem,  A  sister  loves  her  brother. 

Ohs.  In  the  first  sentence,  "  suos,^^  agrees  vi^ith  "  liberos,^^ 
but  must  be  translated  "  Az>,"  denoting  "  pater,''''  the  pos- 
sessor. In  the  second,  suam,  though  singular,  to  agree  with 
soholem,  must  be  translated  "  their,'^  so  as  to  denote  the  pos- 
sessors, '■'■  parentes,^^  &c. 

Usage  of  Sui,  Suus ; — Hie,  Iste,  Hic,  Is. 

31.  The  reflexive,  sui,  and  its  possessive,  suus,  generally 
refer  to  the  subject  of  the  leading  verb*  in  the  sentence ; 
ille,  iste,  hic,  is,  never  refer  to  that  subject,  but  to  some 
other  person  or  thing  spoken  of;  thus, 

1.  C  at  o  occidit  s  e,  Cato  killed  himself. 

2.  Pater  diligit  suo  s  liberos,  A  father  loves  his  (own)  children. 

3.  P ar ent es  diltgunt  suam      Parents     love    their     (own)    off- 

soholem,  spring. 

4.  Dicit  se  valere,  He  says  that  he  is  well. 

Obs.  In  the  second  and  third  sentence,  suos,  "his,"  and 
rua7n,  "their,"  referring  to  some  other  person  than  pater  or 
parentes,  would  be  made  by  the  genitive  of  ille,  iste,  hic,  is. 
In  the  first  and  fourth,  se  would  be  made  eum.  For  the  dif- 
ference between  these  words  usually  translated  "  he,"  see 
Gr.  §  28,  Obs.  3. 


I 


•  See  Gr.  §  28,  Obs.  3,  1st.,  with  note. 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  ,  19 

Mate.  If  a  second  subject  and  verb  be  introduced,  the 
reflexive  governed  by  that  verb  will  belong  to  the  new  sub- 
ject, unless  the  whole  clause  refer  to  the  words,  wishes,  or 
actions,  of  the  first  subject ;  as, 

5.  Scipio  civitatibus  Italice  reddi'  Scipio  restored  to  the  States  of 
dit  omnia  quae,  sua  recog-  Italy,  all  the  things  which  they 
noscebant,  recognised  as  their  own. 

Usage  of  Ipse. 

•32.  Ipse  renders  the  word  with  which  it  is  joined  em- 
phatic, whether  expressed  or  understood,  and  is  equal  to  the 
English,  myself,  thyself,  hiinself,  themselves,  &c.,  annexed 
to  it  ;  sometimes  to  the  word  very  prefixed.  With  numbers 
it  denotes  exactness,  and  sometimes  it  is  used  by  itself  as 
a  reflexive  instead  of  sui,  ^  28,  Obs.  3,  2d. ;  as, 

1.  Ipse  faciam,  (i.  e.  ego  ipse,)  I  will  do  it  myself. 

2.  Ip  s  e  frueris  otio,  (i,  e.  tuipse,)      Thou  thyself  enjoy  est  ease. 

3.  Jaculo  cadit  ip  s  e,  (i.  e.  ille  ipse,)  He  himself  falls  by  a  dart. 

4.  Ccesar  ip  s  e  venit,  Csesar  himself  came. 

5.  Tempus  ip  sum  convenit.  The  very  time  was  agreed  on. 

6.  Ad  ip  s  a  s  portas,  To  the  very  gates. 

7.  Decern  ipsi  dies,  Ten  ttj/ioZe  days. 

8.  Precdtus  est  ut  ip  sum.  liberdret,  He  begged  that  he  would  lib- 

erate him. 

9.  Donum  ipsi  datum,  A  present  given  to  him. 

33.  When  joined  with  the  personal  pronouns,  used  in  a 
reflexive  sense,  and  in  an  oblique  case,  it  sometimes  agrees 
with  them  in  case,  but  more  commonly  with  the  subject  of 
the  verb  in  the^  nominative  or  accusative.  It  is  always,  how- 
ever, to  be  translated  with  the  oblique  case,  to  which  it  adds 
the  force  of  the  word  self,  or  simply  of  emphasis ;  thus, 

1.  Se  ipseinterfecit  (or  se  ipsum,)  He  slew  himseZ/. 

1.  Noscete  ipse  {ovte  ipsum,)  Know  Wiyself. 

2.  Mihi  ipse  (or  ip s i,)  faveo,     I  favor  lay self . 

3.  JLgam.  per  me  ip  s  e,  I  will  do  it  Wijself. 

4.  Virtus  est  per  se  i  p  s -a  lauda-     Virtue   is   to  be   praised   for  it- 

bllis,  self. 

5.  Se  ipsos  omnes  naturd  dill-  All    men     naturally    love    them- 

gimt.  selves. 

RELATIVE  AND  ANTECEDENT. 

General  Principle. 

34.  Every  sentence  containing  a  relative  and  its  antece- 
dent, is  a  compound  sentencpj  of  which  the  relative  with  its 


20  INTRODUCTION. 

clause  forms  one  of  the  parts,  and  is  used  further  to  describe 
or  limit  its  antecedent  word  in  the  other  part.  That  word 
may  be  the  subject,  or  belong  to  the  predicate,  or  to  some 
circumstance  connected  with  either.  But  to  whichsoever 
of  these  it  belongs,  the  relative  and  its  clause  must  all  be 
translated  together,  and  in  immediate  connexion  with  its 
antecedent  word.     Hence  the  following 

General  Rule  of  Arrangement. 

35.  The  relative  with  its  clause  should  be  placed  imme- 
diately after,  or  as  near  as  possible  to  the  antecedent,  and, 
unless  unavoidable,  another  substantive  should  not  come 
between  them;  thus, 

Latin  Arrangement. 

1.  TJrhi  immtnet  mons,  qui  ad  Arcadiam  procurrit. 
Here  ^^qui^"*  with  its  clause,  ^^ ad  Arcadiam  procurrit,''^ 
belongs  to,  and  further  describes  the  antecedent  subject, 
*'  moTis.''''  As  then  the  subject  with  all  that  belongs  to  it 
must  be  taken  before  the  verb,  (Gr.  ^  152,  Direct.  2,  2d,  3d,) 
the  above  sentence  should  be  arranged  for  translation,  thus  : 
Mons  qui  procurrit  ad  Arcadiam^immznet  urhi,  A  moun- 
tain,  which  extends  to  Arcadia,  hangs  over  the  city. 

Or,  the  English  order  may  be  inverted,  thus  :  TJrhi  imml- 
net  mons,  qui  procurrit  ad  Arcadiam,  Over  the  city  hangs 
a  mountain,  which,  &c. 

But  not,  Mons  imminet  urhi,  qui,  &c.,  because  this  arrange- 
ment would  place  ^^urhV  between  the  antecedent,  ^'- mons,^'' 
and  the  relative,  '■^  qui,''^  and  so  lead  to  a  false  translation. 
The  following  sentence  also  affords  an  example : 

2.  ProxzmeurbemEiurdtas  Jluvius  deldbitur,ad  cu- 
jus  ripas  Spartdni  se  exerc^re  solebant.  Arrange,  Proxime 
urhem  delahltur,  &c..  Close  to  the  city  flows  ;  or,  Eurotas 
Jluvius,  ad  cujus  ripas,  &c. 

36.  When  another  noun  necessarily  comes  between  the 
relative  and  its  antecedent,  there  is  more  danger  of  ambi- 
guity in  English  than  in  Latin,  as  the  gender  and  number 
of  the  Latin  relative  will  generally  direct  to  the  proper  an- 
tecedent, to  which  in  English  we  are  directed  chiefly  by  the 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  21 

sense.  The  following  sentence  affords  an  example  of  this 
kind:  Ad  Byzantium  fugit,  opptdum  Tiaturd  munltum  et 
arte,   quod   copid  abundat. 

37.  The  antecedent  in  Latin  is  often  understood  when 
the  English  idiom  requires  it  to  be  supplied.  It  is  gene- 
rally understood,  and  should  be  supplied  in  the  proper  case  : 

1st.  When  it  is  intentionally  left  indefinite,  or  is  obvious 
from  the  gender  and  number  of  the  relative,  and  the  con- 
nexion in  which  it  stands,  as  in  No.  19 ;  as, 

1.  Sunt  (homines)  quos  juvat,  There  are  men  whom  it  delights. 

2.  Hie  est  (id)   quodqucerimus,     That  which  we  seek  is  here. 

"  Hie  sunt,  (ea)  quce   qucerlmus  Those  things  which  we   seek  are 

here. 

3.  (Is)  qui  cito  dat,  bis  dat,  (He)    who   gives  promptly,  gives 

twice . 
Note.  In  the  preceding  sentences  the  antecedent  supplied  is  in 
parentheses. 

2d.  The  antecedent  is  usually  understood  before  the  rela- 
tive, when  it  is  expressed  after  it,  and  in  the  same  case, 
(§  99,  Obs.  1,  2d.);  as, 

4.  (Par  s)  quce  pars  terrenafuit,  The  part  which  was  earthy. 

5.  (Locus)    in  quern  locum,  venit,  The  place  into  which  he  came. 
"  jipud  J.ctium   (locum)  qui  lo-  At  Actium  a. place  which  is,  &c. 

cus  est,  4rc. 

Note.  1.  When  the  antecedent  word  is  expressed  in  the 
relative  clause,  as  in  the  examples  Nos.  4,  and  5,  or  is 
repeated,  as  in  the  following.  No.  6,  (§  99,  Obs.  1,  3d.,)  it 
is  omitted  in  translating;  as, 

6  Erant  omnino  duo  itinera,  qui-  There  were  only  two  ways  by 
bus  it  in  erib  u  s  domo  ex-  which  they  could  go  from 
Irepossent.  home. 

Note  2.  Quisquis,  quidquid,  or  quicquid,  (and  also  quicun- 
que.)  qucecunque,  quodcunque,)  "whoever,  whatever,"  used  as* 
a  relative  without  an  antecedent,  includes  a  general  or  indefi- 
nite antecedent,  in  such  case  as  the  construction  requires, 
and  is  equivalent  to  omnis,  or  quivis  qui, — omne,  or  quidvis 
quod;  as, 

7.  Fortunam.  quce  cun  que  (i.e.  They    would    hazard    whatever 

qu  amv  is  fortunam  quae)        fortune     (i- ^-    o,ny    fortune 
accldat  experiantur ,  which)  might  happen. 

8.  Quid  quid     tetig^rat    aurum  Whatever  (i.e.  every  thing  which) 

fi?hat,  he  had  touched  became  gold. 


'¥ 


22  INTRODUCTION. 


Note  3.  When  the  antecedent  is  a  proposition,  or  clause 
of  a  sentence,  ^  99,  Exp.,  the  relative  is  put  in  the  neuter 
gender,  and  sometimes  has  id  before  it  referring  to  the  same 
clause ;  as, 

9.  Servi,  quod  (or  id  quod)  nun-     The  slaves,  which  never  had  been 

quam  ante  factum,    manu-         done  before,  vv^ere  set  free  and 
missi  et  milUes  facti  sunt;        made  soldiers. 

38.  In  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  a  relative,  with  or 
without  quum,  or  other  conjunctive  term,  and  referring^ to 
some  word,  clause,  or  circumstance,  in  a  preceding  sentence, 
usually  has  the  antecedent  word  repeated,  or,  if  evident, 
understood;  and  instead  of  who  or  which,  may  be  rendered 
this,  that,  these,  those,  or,  and  this,  and  that,  &c.,  according 
as  the  closeness  of  the  connexion  may  require,  (§  99,  Obs. 
8,);  as, 

1.  Quce  urbs  quum  infest aretur,  ^nd  since  (or  because)  this  city 

w^as  infested. 
*'  Q  w  i  legdti  quum  missi  essent,  When  these  ambassadors  had  been 

sent. 

2.  Qu  (B    contentio    cuncta  per-  This  contention  threw  all  things 

miscuit,  into  confusion. 

3.  Quibus  nunciis  acceptis,  TAese  tidings  being  received. 

4.  Quod  quum  ille  cerneret.  And  when  he  saw  this. 

5.  Quo  facto,  TWs  being  done  (or  accomplished) 

6.  Qu  (B  dum  omnia  contempla-  And  while  they  were  contemplat- 

bantur,  '  ^  ing  alHAese  things. 

7.  Quod  quum  impetrdsset,  And  when  he  had  obtained  this. 

8.  A  quo  consilio  quum  revocd- When  he  recalled  him  from  this 

ret.  design. 

9.  Quo  ictu  ille  extinctus  est,       And  by  this  blow  he  was  killed. 

Note.  To  this  construction  belongs  quod,  (apparently  for 
propter  or  ad  quod,  ^  128,)  in  the  beginning  of  a  sentence, 
referring  to  something  previously  stated,  and  meaning,  "  07i 
account  of,  with  respect  to,  or  as  to,  this  thing  ;  "  as, 

10.  Quod  diis  gratias  habeo,        On  account  of  this,  (for  this  thing, 

wherefor,)  I  give  thanks  to  the 
gods. 

11.  Quod  dicSret  se  venturum,    As    to   what    (as    to    that    thing 

which)  he  said,  that  he  would 
come. 

39.  When  the  antecedent  word  is  not  repeated,  as  in  No. 
38,  the  relative,  with  or  without  quum,  or  other  conjunctive 
term,  may  be^iendered  he,  she,  it,  they,  or  and  he,  and  she, 
&c.,  according  as  the  antecedent  word  requires,  (^  99,  Obs. 
8,);  as, 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  23 

1.  Qui  quum  admitterSret ,  And  when  he  admitted. 

2.  Q  uce  quum  vidisset,  And  when  she  had  seen. 

Qu  CB  quum  visa  esset,  When  she  had  been  (or  was)  seen. 

3.  Quam  quum  dare  nollet.  And  when  he  would  not  give  it. 

4.  Quit  us  quum  occurrisset,       When  he  had  met  them. 

5.  Qui  (qua;  pi.  qui,  quce,)  res-  And  he,  (she,  they)  replied. 

pondit, 

6.  Qui    (or  quce)    quum  odes-     And  when  they  were  present. 

sent. 

7.  Quern  Meledger  interfecit,  And  Meleager  slew  him. 

8.  Quam  quum.  duceret ,  And -when  he  was  leading  her. 

9.  Ad  quern  quum  venissent,  And  when  they  had  come  to  him. 
10.  Qu  emut  vidit,  As  soon  as,  (or  when)  he  saw  Aim. 

40.  When  the  relative  in  any  case  is  followed  by  the 
subjunctive  mood,  and  the  two  clauses,  viz:  the  antecedent 
and  relative,  involve  a  comparison;  or  the  latter  expresses 
the  purpose,  object,  or  design,  of  something  expressed  by  the 
former,  the  relative  is  better  translated  by  the  conjunction 
that  and  the  personal  pronoun ;  thus,  that  I,  that  thou,  that 
he,  that  they,  «&c.,  as  the  antecedent  word  may  require,  (See 
Gr.  ^  141,  R.  II.  and  Explanation,); 

1.  Missus  sum  qui  te  adducerem,  I    have   been  sent  that  I  might 

bring  you. 

2.  Neque  is  qu  i facias  id,  You  are  not  such  a   person  that 

you  should  do  that. 

3.  Quis  est  tarn  lynceus  qui,  S^c.    Who  is  so  sharp  sighted  that  he. 

4.  Misit   legdtos  qui   cognosce-     He    sent  ambassadors    that    they 

rent,  might  find  out. 

5.  Fruges  mandavit  qu  as  disse-    She  gave  him  fruits  that  he  might 

minaret,  scatter  them. 

41.  In  the  expressions,  quippe  qui,  ut  qui,  utpote  qui,  the 
relative  is  better  translated  by  the  personal  pronoun  which 
represents  the  antecedent,  [^  141,  Obs.  4,) ;  as, 

1.  Quippe  qui  nunquam  legerim,  For,    (or   because)  /have  never 

read  them. 

42.  After  dignus,  indignus,  idoneus,  and  the  like,  in  the 
predicate,  the  relative  and  subjunctive  mood  may  be  ren- 
dered by  the  infinitive,  {^  141,  Obs.  2.  1st.);  as, 

1 .  Dignus  qui  ametur,  Worthy  to  he  loved. 

2.  Si  dignum  qui  numer  e  tur  If  you  shall  elect  a  person  worthy 

crearitis,  to  he  reckoned,  &c. 

43.  Sometimes  the  natural  order  of  the  sentence  is  in- 
verted, so  that  the  relative  clause  stands  first  and  the  ante- 
cedent follows  it.  In  translating,  the  antecedent  clause 
should  generally  be  placed  first ;  as. 


24  INTRODUCTION. 

1.  Qui  bonis  non  recte  uiUur,  ei   Good  things  become   evil  to  htm 
bona  malafiunt,  who  does   not  use  good  things 

well. 
2    Qui  cito  dot,  (is)  bis  dat,       He  gives  twice  who  gives  quickly. 

Correlative  Adjectives. 

44.  The  demonstratives,  tot,  so  many,  and  totidem,  just 
so  many;  tantus,  as  great,  so  great,  as  much,  so  much; 
talis,  such ;  are  followed  by  their  relatives,  quot,  quantus^ 
qualis,  signifying  as,  to  denote  comparison ;  as, 

1.  Tot  homines  quot,  As  many  men  as. 

2.  Toil  dem  naves  quot,  Just  so  many  ships  as 

3.  T  antusexercitus  quantus,  As  great  (or  so  great)  a,u  dLimj  as. 

4.  T  al  is  homo  qua  I  is,  Such  b.  rasLH  as . 

So  also  the  correlative  adverbs. 

5.  Toties  quoties,       As  often  as. 

6.  Tarn  qiiam,  So  as. 

7.  Eo  quo  By  so  much  as. 

8.  Tanto  quanto,       By  so  much as;  or 

In  proportion       — <—  as. 

45.  Instead  of  the  relative  in  such  sentences,  the  conjunc- 
tions ac,  atque,  (^  149,  Obs.  6,)  ut,  and  the  relative  qui, 
qucB,  quod,  are  sometimes  used  and  may  generally  be  trans- 
lated, "  as,"  or  "  that." 

1.  Honos  talis  paucis  est  deldtus     Such   honor    has   been   bestowed 

a  c  mihi,  upon  few  persons,  as  upon  me. 

2.  Cumtotidem  navtbus  atque     He  returned   with  just   as  many 

profectus  erat,  rediit,  ships  as  he  had   departed  with. 

3.  Nulla  est  tanta  vis  qua  non     No  power  is  so  great  as  (or,  that 

frangi  possit ,  rO  cannot  be  broken. 

46.  When  the  relative  only  is  expressed  in  sentences  im- 
plying comparison,  the  demonstrative  (No.  44,)  must  be  sup- 
plied and  the  sentence  translated  as  above ;   as, 

1.  Crocodtlus  parit  (tanta)  ova  The  crocodile  lays  (as  large)  eggs 

quanta  anseres,  as  geese  lay. 

2.  (Tot)    millia   quot    unquam  As  many  thousands  as  ever  came 

ventre  Mycenis,  from  Mycenae. 

47.  Sometimes,  as  in  No.  43,  the  natural  order  of  the 
sentence  is  inverted,  so  that  the  relative  clause  stands  first 
and  the  antecedent  follows  it.  In  translating,  the  antece- 
dent clause  should  be  placed  first ;  as, 

1.  Quot  homines  1 0 1  causa y       ") 

arrange  >  As  many  causes  as  there  are  men. 

Tot  causa  quot  homines,  N 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  2d 

48.  The  relatives,  quot^  quoties,  quantus,  qualis,  used  eV 
terrogatively,  or  in  an  exclamation,  or  indefinitely,  in  the 
indirect  interrogation,  and  without  implying  comparison, 
have  no  reference  to  an  antecedent  term  either  expressed 
or  understood,  and  are  translated  respectively,  "  how  many," 
"how  often,"  "how  great,"  or  "how  much,"  "what,''  or 
"of  what  kind;"  as, 

1.  Inter.  Quoi  annos  habet ?        How  many   years   has  he?  i.    e. 

how  old  is  he  ? 

2.  Indef.  Nescio  quot ,  ,  I  know  not  how  many. 

3.  E3:cl.  Cum    quanta    gravi-  With  how  much  gTSLYiiy. 

tate! 

4.  Indef.  Dace  quales  sint,  Tell  us  of  what  kind  they  are. 

THE  VERB  AND  ITS  SUBJECT. 
General  Pi'inciple. 

49.  Every  finite  verb  (§  95,  5,)  has  its  own  subject,  ex- 
pressed or  understood,  in  the  nominative  case. 

Ohs.  The  subject  of  the  verb  is  the  person  or  thing  spoken 
of,  and  may  be  a  noun,  a  'pranxmn,  a  verb  in  the  infinitive 
Tnood,  a  clause  of  a  sentence,  or  any  thing  which,  however 
expressed,  is  the  subject  of  thought  or  speech.  (§  101, 
Exp.) 

General  Rule  of  Arrangement. 

50.  The  subject  and  all  the  words  agreeing  with  it,  gov- 
erned by  it,  connected  with  it,  or  dependent  upon  it,  must 
be  arranged  in  the  order  of  their  connection  and  dependence, 
and  translated  before  the  verb. 

1.  Canis  latrat,  The  dog  barks. 

2.  E  go  Scribo,  J  write. 

d.  Lude  r  e  est  jucundum,  To  play  is  pleasant. 

4.  Dulce  estpropatridmori,  To  die  for  one's  country  is  sweet. 

5.  Totus  Gr  <2  c  drum  exer-  The  whole  army  of  the  Greeks  hB.di 

cltus  Aulide  conven&rat,  assembled  at  Aulis. 

6.  Vir  sapit   qui   pauca    lo-  The  man  who  speaks  little  is  wise. 

qui  tur, 

51.  When  the  subject  of  a  verb  is  the  infinitive,  either 
alone  or  with  its  subject;  or  a  clause  of  a  sentence,  con- 
nected by  ut,  quod,  or  other  conjunctive  term,  the  English 
pronoun,  it,  is  put  with  the  verb  referring  to  that  infi- 
nitive or  clause  following  it,  and  which  is  its  proper  subr 
ject;  as, 

3 


26  introductiojV. 

1.  Facile  est  jubere,  lit  is  easy  to  command. 

2.  Nuntiatum  est  classem  devinci.  It   was   announced  that  the  fleet 

was  conquered. 

3.  Semper  acctdit  ut  ahsis,  It  always  happens  that   you  are 

absent. 

4.  Qui  Jit  ut  metuas,  How  happens  it  that  you  fear. 

5.  Nunquam     Romdnis  placuisse  That  it  never  had  pleased  the  Ro- 

imp eratorem    a    suis      mans,  that  a  commander  should 
militlbus  inte rfi  c i,       be  killed  by  his  own  soldiers. 

52.  The  verb  must  always  be  translated  in  its  proper 
tense,  and  in  the  same  person  and  number  with  its  nomina- 
tive. (See  paradigms  of  the  verb,  <^§  54-70.)  But  when  it 
has  two  or  more  nouns  or  pronouns  in  the  singular,  taken 
together,  or  a  collective  noun  expressing  many  as  individu- 
als, as  its  subject,  the  verb  must  be  translated  in  the  plural; 
as, 

1.  Et  pater  et  mater  v  enerunt ,  Both  his  father  and  mother  have 

come. 

2.  Turba  quoquoversum   ruunt,    The  crowd  rush  in  every  direc- 

tion. 

63.  The  nominative  to  a  verb  in  the  first  or  second  per- 
son, being  evident  from  the  termination,  is  seldom  express- 
ed in  Latin;  but  must  be  supplied  in  translating;  as, 

1,  Scribo,  J  write.  3.  Scribimus,     We  write. 

2.  Legis,     Thou  readest.  4.  Legitis,         You  read. 

54.  When  the  verb  in  the  third  person  has  no  nominative 
expressed,  it  refers  to  some  noun  or  pronoun  evident  from 
the  connection ;  and,  both  in  translating  and  parsing,  the 
pronoun  ille,  or  is,  in  the  7wminative  case,  and  in  the  gender 
and  number  of  the  noun  or  pronoun  referred  to,  must  be 
supplied;  as, 

1.   {Ille)  scribit,       (He)  writes.  2.   (Illi)  scribunt,    (They)  write. 

55.  When  the  same  word  is  the  subject  of  several  verbs 
closely  connected  in  the  same  construction,  it  is  expressed 
with  the  first  and  understood  to  the  rest,  both  in  Latin  and 
English ;  thus, 

1.  C (B  s  ar  venit,  vidit,  et  vicit,     Casar  came,  saw,  and  conquered. 

2.  Dicttur   C  (2  sdrem    venisse,  It  is  said  that  C<Esar  came,  saw, 

vidisse,  et  vicisse,  and  conquered. 

Interrogative  Sentences. 

56.  A  question  is  made  in  Latin  in  four  ^iflerent  ways, 
as  follows : 


"^fp^ 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  27 

1st.  By  an  interrogative  pronoun;  as,  Quis  venit  ? 
^^Who  comes?"  Quern  rnisitV^  ^^  Whom  did  he  send?" 
Cujus  pecus  hoct  "  Whose  flock  is  this?"  &c. 

2d.  By  an  interrogative  adverb;  as,  Unde  venit? 
"  Whence  came  he  ?  "    Cu7'  venit  ?    "  Why  did  he  come  ?  " 

3d.  By  the  interrogative  particles,  numy  an^  and  the  en- 
clitic, ne.  Thus  used  these  particles  have  no  corresponding 
English  word  in  the  translation;  they  merely  indicate  a 
question ;  as,  Num  venit,  or  an  venit,  or  venitn£  ^  "  Has  he 
come?  "  Num  videtur?  "Does  it  seem?  " 

4th.  By  simply  placing  an  interrogation  mark  at  the  end 
of  the  question ;  as,  Vis  me  hocfacere  ?  "  Do  you  wish  me 
to  do  this?" 

57.  The  interrogative  pronoun  or  adverb,  in  all  cases,  is 
translated  before  the  verb  ;  as, 

1.  Quis  fecit  ?  Who  did  it  ?  or  who  has  done  it  f 

2.  Quern   misit  ?  Whom  did  he  send  ? 

3.  Quant  0  constUii  i  How  much  did  it  cost  ? 

4.  Qua  I  is  fuit  ?  What  sort  of  a  man  was  he  ? 

This  is  true  also  of  the  indirect  question,  i.  e.,  when  the 
substance  of  a  question  is  stated  but  not  in  the  interroga- 
tive form;  as, 

5.  Nescio  quant o  constitSrit ,       I  know  not  how  much  it  cost. 

6.  Docuit  quam  firma  res  esset  He  shewed  them  how  firm  a  thing 

Concordia,  agreement  was. 

Note.  When  the  verb  in  the  direct  or  indirect  question 
comes  under  §  103,  R.  V.,  the  predicate,  or  nominative  after 
the  verb,  is  translated  ^rst,  and  the  subject  or  nominative, 
in  the  direct  question  after  the  verb,  as  in  Ex.  4 ;  but  in  the 
indirect,  before  it,  as  in  Ex.  6.  Thus,  in  Ex.  4,  qualis  is 
the  predicate,  and  ille  understood,  the  subject;  in  Ex.  6, 
7'es  is  the  predicate,  and  concordia  the  subject. 

58.  In  all  forms  of  interrogation  not  made  by  an  inter- 
rogative pronoun,  as  in  No.  57,  the  nominative  or  subject  is 
translated  after  the  verb  in  English,  in  the  simple  forms, 
and  after  the  first  auxiliary  in  the  compound  forms ;  as, 

1.  Videsne?  Seest  thou?  or  dost  thou  see? 

2.  Jtn  venisti  ?  Hast  thou  come  ?  or  have  you  come  ? 

3.  Scribetne?  Will /le  write  ? 

4.  Num.  ibimtcs?  Shall  i«e  go? 

5.  Nonne  fecit?  Has /le  not  done  (it?) 


38  INTRODUCTION. 

6.  jln  egisset  melius?  Would  he  have  done  better  ? 

7.  Nosne  aUmus  ?  Shall  vie  support  ? 

8.  Nonne  Dei  est?  Does  it  not  belong  to  God? 

9.  Iste  estfrater?  Is  that  -youx  brother? 

59.  When  a  sentence  not  interrogative  is  introduced  hynec 
or  neque,  not  followed  by  a  corresponding  conjunction,  (See 
No.  124,)  in  a  connected  clause,  the  verb  will  be  translated 
by  an  auxiliary,  and  the  English  nominative  will  stand  after 
the  first  auxiliary ;  as, 

1.  Neque  hoc  intelltgo,  Neither  do  /understand  this. 

2.  Nee  venisset,  Neither  vrould  he  have  come. 

3.  Nee  adeptus  sum,  Nor  have  /attained. 

The  object  of  the  verb. 

60.  In  translating,  the  object  of  a  transitive  verb  in  the 
accusative  is  arranged  after  the  verb,  and  as  near  to  it  as 
possible.  That  object  may  be  a  nou7i,  a  pronoun^  an  infini- 
tive moodi  or  a  clause  of  a  sentence^  (§  116,  Exp.);  as, 

1.  Romulus  condidit  urb  em  ,       Romulus  built  a  city. 

2.  Vocdvit  e  am  Romam,  He  called  it  Rome. 

3.  Disce  die  e  r e   vera,  Learn  to  speak  the  truth. 

4.  Obtulit    ut    captivos    re-  He  offered  that  they  should  redeem 

dimer ent ,  the  captives. 

61.  The  interrogative  or  relative  pronoun  is  always  trans- 
lated before  the  verb  that  governs  it ;  as, 

1.  Quern  mittemus  ?  Whom  shall  we  send? 

2.  C ui  dedisti  ?  To  whom  did  ye  give  it  ? 

3.  Deus  quern  colimus,  God  whom  we  worship. 

4.  C ui  omnia  debemus,  To  whom  we  owe  all  things. 

62.  When  a  transitive  verb  governs  two  cases,  the  imme- 
diate object  in  the  accusative,  according  to  the  natural  order, 
is  usually  translated  first,  and  after  that  the  remote  object 
in  the  genitive,  §  122 ;  dative,  §  123  ;  accusative,  ^  124 ;  or 
ablative,  §  125;  as, 

1.  Jtrguit  m  e  furti,  He  accuses  me  of  theft. 

2.  Compdro  Vir g  iliumHomcro,  I  compare  Virgil  to  Homer. 

3.  Poscimus  te  p  a  c  em ,  We  beg  peace  of  thee. 

4.  Onerat  naves  auro,  He  loads  the  ships  with  gold. 

Note.  The  accusative  of  the  person  after  verbs  of  asking, 
is  translated  by  of  ox  from;  as, 

5.  Pyrrhum  auxiliumpoposcerunt,  They  demanded  aid  o/  (or  from) 

Pyrrhus. 


P  W  W  »  *,"«PP!^ff«S||» 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  29 

63.  But  when  the  remote  object  is  a  relative^  or  when  the 
immediate  object  is  an  infinitive^  or  a  clause  of  a  sentence, 
or  a  noun  further  described  by  other  words,  the  remote  object 
must  be  translated  first ;  as, 

1.  C ui  librum  dediimis,  To  whom  we  gave  the  book.  . 

2.  Da  mihi  failure,  Give  me  to  deceive . 

''   Dixit  e  i  confiteor  meum  pecca  He  said  to  him,  I  confess  my  fault. 
turn, 

3.  Eum  rogaverunt,  ut  ipsos  defen-  They  entreated  him,  that  he  would 

deret,  defend  them. 

4.  Docuitillos  quamjirma esset ,  He  shewed  them  how  firm  it  was. 

5.  Civitdtem,    antea  solicitdtam,  He  supplies   with  arms,    the  city 

ar mis  ornat,  already  excited. 

64.  When  a  verb,  which  in  the  active  voice  governs  two 
cases,  is  used  in  the  passive  form,  that  which  was  the  im- 
mediate object  in  the  accusative,  becomes  the  subject  in  the 
nominative,  and  the  remote  object  in  its  own  case  immedi- 
ately follows  the  verb.  Thus,  the  examples  No.  62,  may 
be  arranged  and  translated  as  follows,  §  126. 

1 .  Jlrguor  furti,  I  am  accused  of  theft. 

2.  Vir  gilius  compardtur  Ho-  Virgil  is  compared  to  Homer. 

mere, 

3.  Pax  poscltur  te,  Peace  is  begged  of  thee. 

4.  Nav  e  s  onerantur  auru,  The  ships  are  loading  with  gold. 

So  also  the  participles. 

5.  Accusdtus  fu  rti,  Accused  of  theft. 

6.  Compardtus  Home  r  o  ,  Compared  to  Homer, 

7.  Onerdta  aur  o  ,  Loaded  with  gold. 

8 .  Nuddta  hominib  us  ,  Stripped  of  men, 

9.  Ereptus  mor  ti,  Saved /row  death 

Impmsonal    Verbs. 

65.  The  impersonal  verb  has  no  nominative  before  it  in 
Latin.  It  is  translated  by  placing  the  pronoun  it  before  it 
in  English ;  as,  (§  85,  2.) 

1.  Decet,        lit  becomes.  4.  Pugndtur,     /Hs  fought. 

2.  Constat,     It  is  evident.  5.  Itur,  It  is  gone. 

3.  Tonat,       It  thunders.  6.  CurrUur,      It  is  run. 

66.  Impersonal  verbs  governing  the  dative  or  accusative 
in  Latin,  may  be  translated  in  a  personarl  form  by  making 
the  word  in  the  dative  or  accusative  the  nominative  to  the 
English  verb,  taking  care  always  to  express  the  same  idea, 
0  85,  6,  and  M13  ;  thus. 


30 


INTRODUCTION. 


1.  Placet  mihi  , 

2.  Licet  tibi, 

3.  Decet  eum , 

4.  Pvdet  no  s  , 

5.  Tcedet  v  o  s  , 

6.  Favetur,  il  li  s  , 

7.  Nocetur  ho  s  t i  , 

8.  MisSret  me  tui, 


Impersonally.  Personalli/. 

It  pleases  me  ;  I  am  pleased. 

It  is  permitted  to  you;  You  are  permitted 
It  becomes  him  ;  He  ought. 

It  shames  us  ;  We  are  ashamed. 

It  wearies  you  ;  You  are  wearied. 

Favor  is  done  to  them;  They  are  favored. 
Hurt  is   done   to  the  The  enemy  is  hurt. 

enemy; 


9.  PcenUet  e  o  s 
10.  Pceniiet    me 
cdsse. 


pe- 


lt mo\es  me  to  pity 

of  you ; 
It  repents  them  ; 
It  repents  me,  i.  e., 


I  pity  you. 

They  repent. 
/   repent    of    having 
sinned. 


67.  When  the  doer  of  an  action  denoted  by  an  imper- 
sonal verb,  or  by  a  passive  verb  used  impersonally,  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  ablative  with  a,  (§  85,  6,)  the  verb  may  be 
translated  personally  in  the  active  voice,  and  the  doer,  in  the 
ablative,  be  made  its  English  subject  or  nominative;    as, 

Impersonally.  Personally. 


1.  Pugndtur  a  me  ,      It  is  fought  by  me ; 

2.  CurrUur  ate,  It  is  run  by  thee ; 

3.  Favetur  a  nobis  II  is  favored  by  us ; 

4.  Favetur  tibi  a  no-  It  is  favored  to  you 

bis  ,  hy  us ; 


I  fight. 

Thou  runnest. 

We  favor. 

We     favor     you;     or 

you  are  favored  hy  us. 


Note.  The  doer  in  the  ablative  w^ith  a,  is  frequently  un- 
derstood, (especially  when  no  definite  person  or  thing  is  in- 
tended,) and  must  be  supplied  as  the  context  requires;  as, 

5.  Ubi  perventum  est  {ab  illis,)      When  it  was  come  by  them,  i.  e., 

when  they  came. 

6.  Descendltur  (ab  hominibus,)      Men  (or  people,)  go  down. 

7.  Conveniebdtur{ab  hominibus,)     People  assembled. 

68.  Some  verbs,  hot  impersonal,  are  used  impersonally, 
when  used  before  the  infinitive  of  impersonal  verbs,  (^  113, 
Obs.  1,) ;  as. 

Impersonally.  Personally. 

1.  Potest      credi   It  can  be  trusted  to  you  ;    You  can  be  trusted  ; 

tibi,  66.  2. 

2.  Nan  potest  no-  It  cannot  be  hurt  to  the    The   enemy  cannot 

ceri  hosti,  enemy ;  be  hurt ;  66.  7. 

3.  Utfigri  so  lei,      As  it  is  wont  to  be  done  ; 

or,  As  is  usual. 

69.  Verbs  usually  impersonal  are  sometimes  used  person- 
ally, and  have  their  subject  in  the  nominative,  {^  113,  Obs. 
1,);  as. 


LATIN    IDIOMS. 


31 


1.  Doleo  I  grieve,  (Impersonally  Dolet  mihi,)  It  grieves  me, 

2.  Candida  pax  homines  decet,     Candid  peace  becomes  men. 

3.  Ista  g  e  s  t  a  ml  n  a  nostras  hu-  These    arms  -become    my    shoul- 

meros   decent.  ders. 


Usage  of  Yideox,  ^^  I  seem.^" 

70.  Videor,  "I  seem,"  though  never  impersonal  in  Latin, 
is  often  rendered  impersonally  in  English  ;  and  the  dative 
following  it,  seems  properly  to  come  under  Rule  XXXIII, 
^  126,  to  denote  the  person  to  whom  any  thing  seems  or 
appears,  i.  e.,  by  whom  it  is  seen;  thus,  Videor  tibi  esse 
pauper,  I  seem  to  you,  (i.  e.,  I  am  seen  by  you,)  to  be  poor. 
Videor  mihi  esse  pauper,  I  seem  to  myself,  (i.  e.,  I  am  seen 
by  myself,)  to  be  poor;  or,  I  think  that  I  am  poor.  So  the 
following : 

1.  Videor  esse  liber, 

2.  Videor  mihi  esse  liber, 

3.  Videris  esse, 

4.  Videris  tibi  esse, 


5.  Videris  mihi  esse. 


6.   Tu,  ut  videris,  non  scribis, 


I  seem  to  be  free;  or,  It  seems  that 

I  am  free. 
I  seem  to  myself  to  be  free  ;  or, 

It  seems  to  me,  (or,  I  think)  that 

I  am  free. 
You  seem  to  be;  or,  It  seems  that 

you  are. 
You  seem  to  yourself  to  be;  or.  It 

seems  to  you,  (i.  e.,  you  think) 

that  you  are. 
You  seem  to  me  to  be;  or,  It  seems 

to  me,  (i.e.,  I  think)  that  you 

are. 
You,  as  you  seem,  (or,  as  it  seems) 

do  not  write. 


Obs.  The  third  person  singular  of  videor  followed  by  an 
infinitive,  wjth  its  subject  in  the  accusative,  or  by  a  depend- 
ent clause  after  ut,  or  quod,  may  be  said  to  be  used  imper- 
sonally; though  strictly  speaking,  that  infinitive  with  its 
accusative,  or  that  clause,  is  the  subject,  (See  No.  51,);  as, 

7.  Videtur  mihi  te  vaUre, 

8.  Illi  videtur  ut  valeat. 

9.  Videtur  sibi  valere, 


It  appears  to  me  that  you  are  well; 
strictly  rendered,  That  you  are 
well  appears  to  (or,  is  seen  by) 
me. 

It  appears  to  him,  (or,  he  thinks) 
that  he,  (another person)  is  well. 

It  appears  to  him,  (or,  he  thinks) 
that  he,  (himself)  is  well.  He 
seems  to  himself  to  be  well. 


32  mtnoDuctioN. 


Verbs. — hidicative  Mood. 

71.  Verbs  in  the  indicative  mood  are  translated  as  in  the 
paradigm  in  the  Grammar.  Care  must  be  taken,  however, 
to  notice  when  the  sense  requires  the  simple,  or  emphatic, 
or  progressive  form. 

72.  When  the  perfect  tense  expresses  a  past  action  or 
event  extending  to,  or  connected  with  the  present,  in  itself 
or  in  its  consequences,  it  is  used  definitely,  and  must  be 
rendered  by  the  auxiliaries,  have.,  hast,  has,  or  hath  ;  as, 

1.  Regem  v  idi  hodie,  I  have  seen  the  king  to  day. 

73.  When  the  perfect  tense  expresses  a  past  action  or 
event,  without  reference  to  the  present,  it  is  used  indefi- 
nitely, (Gr.  §  44,  III.)  and  cannot  be  rendered  by  have,  hast, 
has,  or  hath;  as, 

1 .  Regem  v  idi  nuper,  I  saw  the  king  lately. 

Subjunctive  Mood. 

The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  in  two  different  ways,  viz : 
subjunctively  and  potentially,  (Gr.  ^  42, 11.  and  §^  139-141.) 

Subjunctive  used  subjunctively. 

74.  This  mood  is  used  subjunctively,  but  for  the  most 
part  translated  as  the  indicative,  when  it  expresses  what  is 
actual  and  certain  though  not  directly  asserted  as  such. 
This  it  does, 

1st.  When  it  is  subjoined  to  some  adverb,  conjunction, 
or  indefinite  term  in  a  dependent  clause,  for  the  purpose  of 
stating  the  existence  of  a  thing,  (without  directly  asserting 
it,)  as  something  supposed,  takei^  for  granted,  or  connected 
with  the  direct  assertion,  as  a  cause,  condition,  or  modifying 
circumstance,  (^  140,  Obs.  4,) ;  as, 

1.  Ea  cumita  sint  discedam,      Since  these  things  are  so,  I  will 

depart. 

2.  Si  madeat,  Uii  is  wet. 

3.  Quum  CcBsar  redtret,  When    Csesar   returned — ivas  re- 

turning. 

4.  Ita  perterrUus  est  ut  mori-  He  was  so  frightened  that  he  died. 

retur, 

5.  Gratulor tibi quod  rediir  is,  I  am  glad  that  you  have  returned. 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  33 

6.  Siimperitav^rint,        If  they  have  commanded. 

7.  Si   reliquissem    iniqui    If  I  had  left  him,  &ic. 

dicer ent, 

8.  Quum    CcEsar  p  r  ofe  c  tu  s  When  Caesar  had  departed. 

e  s  s  et, 

Ohs.  In  the  first  of  the  above  examples  the  direct  asser- 
tion, is  discedam,  "  I  will  depart."  The  dependent  clause, 
ea  cum  ita  sint,  "since  these  things  are  so,"  expresses  the 
existence  of  certain  things  referred  to  without  directly  as- 
serting it,  but  taking  it  for  granted  as  a  thing  admitted  or 
supposed,  but  still  affecting  in  some  way  the  event  directly 
asserted.     This  holds  good  of  all  the  other  examples  above. 

*  The  dependent  clause  connected  by  ut,  or  uMy  "when  ; " 
dum,  "  whilst ;  "  priusquam,  "  before ; "  postquam,  "  after ;  " 
and  other  conjunctions,  (^  140,  Obs.  2  and  3,);  and  also  by 
quum  or  cum,  "when,"  (Obs.  4,)  sometimes  take  the  indica- 
tive mood. 

2d.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  subjunctively,  as  above, 
after  an  interrogative  word  used  indefinitely,  in  a  depend- 
ent clause,  or  in  what  is  called  the  indirect  question,  i.  e., 
an  expression  containing  the  substance  of  a  question  with- 
out the  form.  All  interrogative  words  may  be  used  in  this 
way,  (See  §  140.  5,) ;  thus, 

9.  Nescio    quis   sit — quid     I  know  not  tt'/io  he  is — what  is  do- 
fiat ,  ing. 

10.  JDoce  me  ub  i  sint  dii,  Tell  me  where  the  gods  are. 

11.  Nescio  uter    s  c  rib  e  r  et,     1  know  not  which  of  the  two  wrote. 

12.  Nescio     quid    s  c  r  iptum  1  know  not  what  was  written. 

e  s  set, 

12.  Scio  cui,  (a  quo'}  scrip-  I  know  to  whom  (by  whom)  it  was 

turn    esset,  written. 

13.  An  scis  quis  hoc  fe  c e  r  it?  Do  jonlinow  who  has  done  this '^ 

14.  jin   scis   a   quo    hoc  fac-  Do  you   know  by   whom   this  has 

turn  fu  &  r  it  ?  been  done  ? 

15.  Nemo  sciebat  quis  hcec  f  e-  None   knew   who  had  done  these 

c  is  s  et  ,  things. 

16.  Percunctdtus  quid  v  ell  et ,  Having  enquired  what  he  wished. 

Note.  The  direct  question  requires  the  indicative ;  as, 
Quis  fecit?  "  Who  did  it .?  "  The  indirect  requires  the  sub- 
junctive ;  as,  Nescio  quis  fecerit,  "I  know  not  Avho did  it." 

75.  This  mood  is  used  subjunctively,  and  usually  trans- 
lated as  the  indicative  in  a  relative  clause,  after  an  indefi- 
nite general  expression,  (<^  141i  I?.  I.)  anegatioUjOr  a  ques- 


34  INTRODUCTION. 

tion  implying  a  negation,  and  also  after  the  relative  in  ob- 
lique narration,  (^  141,  R.  VI.) ;  as, 

1.  Est   qui  di  c  at ,  There  is  one  who  says. 

2.  Nullus  est  qui  ne  g  et ,  There  is  no  one  who  denies. 

3.  Quis  est  qui  hoc  f  aciat  i        Who  is  there  that  does  this  ? 

4.  Antonius    inquit,    artem.    esse  Antonius  says  that  art  belongs  to 

edrum  rerum  quee  s  cian-      those  things  which  are  known, 
tur  , 

'       The  Subjunctive  used  Potentially. 

76.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  potentially;  1st,  in 
interrogative  sentences ;  and  2d,  to  express  a  thing  not  as 
actual  and  certain,  but  contingent  and  hypothetical,  (Gr# 
§  42,  II.  2,  and  Obs.  3.)  Thus  used  it  is  much  less  definite 
with  respect  to  time,  and  is  translated  with  some  variety ; 
as  follows: 

1.  Present,       by  may,  can,  shall,  will,  could,  would,  shoul^. 

2.  Imperfect,   by  might,  could,  would,  or  should. 

3.  Perfect,       by  may  have,   can    have,  must  have,  ^c. 

4.  Pluperfect,  by  might  have,  could  have,  would  have,  should  have, 

and  denoting  futurity,  should. 

The  most  usual  renderings  of  each  tense  are  the  follow- 
ing: 

77.  Present.  The  present  subjunctive  used  potentially 
expresses  present  liberty,  power,  will,  or  obligation,  usually 
expressed  by  the  English  auxiliaries,  may,  can,  shall,  will^ 
cmdd,  2vould,  should.  (§  45,  1.) 

You  may  go. 

Can  he  so  understand  it  ? 

Shall  (or  should)  the  insect  Panti- 

lius  discompose  me  ? 
Who  could  bear  those  men  ? 
If  you  were  here  you  would  think 

otherwise. 

Imperatively. 

6.  Sic  eat.  Thus  let  her  (or  him)  go. 

7.  Edmus,  Let  us  go. 

8.  Pugnetur,   (Impersonally,)  Let  it  be  fought. 

9.  Diifaciant,  May  the  gods  grant. 

78.  Imperfect.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  used  poten- 
tially, is  preceded  by  a  past  tense,  and  expresses  past  lib- 
erty, power,  will,  or  duty,  but  still  in  its  use  expresses  time 
very  indefinitely.     It   is  usually  rendered  by  the  English 


1. 

Licet  eas  , 

2. 

An  sic  int  ellig  at  ? 

3. 

Men'  mo  V  e  at  cimex    Panti- 

lius  ? 

4. 

QMsistos  ferat? 

5. 

Si  hie  sis,  aliter  s  entias  , 

LATIN    IDIOMS.  '  35 

auxiliaries,  7?iigh(.,  coidd,  ivould,  should,  sometimes  had, 
would  have,  should  hate;  as, 

1.  Legebat  utdisceret,  He  read  that  he  might  learn. 

2.  Quid  f  a  cer  em.?  Whs-X  could  I  do  ? 

3.  Iret  si  j  uber  es  ,  He  would  go  if  you  should  order  it. 

4.  Cur  V  enir  et ,  Why  should  he  come. 

5.  Rogave-runt  ut  V  enlr  et  y  They    entreated    that   he    would 

come. 

6.  Si  quis  dicer  et  f    nunquam,  If  any  one  had  said  it,  I  would  not 
putdrem,  have  thought  it. 

Note.  After  verbs  denoting  to  hinder,  forbid,  and  the  like, 
quo  mmus  with  the  subjunctive,  may  be  rendered  by  from 
and  the  present  participle,  (^  45,  II.  3,);  thus, 

7.  Impedlvit  quo  minus  iret,  He  hindered  him /roTU  gomg 
Obs.  An  action  or  state  w^hich  would,  or  would  not  exist, 

or  have  existed,  in  a  case  supposed,  but  the  contrary  of  which 
is  implied,  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  imperfect  or  pluper- 
fect subjunctive,  without  an  antecedent  verb  or  conjunction, 
(§  139,2,);  as, 

^.Scriherem,    si  nescesse  es-  I  would  write,  if  it  Avere  necessary. 

set, 
S.  S  crip  siss  em  ,    si    necesse  I  would  have  written,  had  it  been 

fuisset,  necessary. 

79.  Perfect.  The  perfect  subjunctive  properly  expresses 
wixat  is  supposed  to  be  past,  but  of  which  there  exists  uncer- 
tainty. Thus  used  it  is  cornmonly  rendered  by  the  auxilia- 
ries viay  have,  can  have,  ^c.  It  is  also  used  sometimes  in  a 
present  and  sometimes  in  a  future  sense,  with  much  variety 
of  meaning,  according  to  its  connection,  (^  45,  III.);  as, 

1 .  Fortasse  erravSrim,  Perhaps  I  may  have  erred. 

2.  Etsi  non  scripsSrit',  Though  he  cannot  have  written, 

3.  Ut  sic  dix  e  rim  ,  That  I  may  so  speak. 

4.  Citius  crediderim,  I  would  sooner  believe. 

5.  Facile  dix  S  r  im,  I  could  easily  tell. 

6.  Quasi  affuerim  ,  As  if  I  had  been  present. 

80.  Pluperfect.  The  pluperfect  (§  45,  IV.)  is  usually  ren- 
dered by  the  auxiliaries,  might  have,  could  have,  would  have, 
should  have,  as  in  the  paradigm  of  the  verb.  But  when  an 
action  is  related  as  having  been  future  at  a  certain  past 
time,  it  is  expressed  in  Latin  in  the  pluperfect  subjunctive, 
and  translated  should  ;  as,* 

1 .    Quodcunque  jussissetme  I  said  that  I  would  do  whatsoever 
facturum.  dixi,  he  should  order 


36  INTRODUCTION. 

2.  Promisisti    te    scripturum,  si  You  promised    that   thou   would 

rogavissem,  write,  if  I  should  desire  it. 

3.  Dum  convaluisset,  Until  he  should  get  well. 

81.  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  active,  with  quum,  in 
verbs  not  deponent,  is  used  instead  of  a  past  participle 
active,  (§  49,  8,)  and  may  be  rendered  by  the  compound  per- 
fect participle  in  English;  as, 

1.  Ceesar,  quumhcec  dixisset     Caesar  having   said  these  things; 

(literally,     Caesar,     when     he 
had  said  these  things.) 

82.  When  the  subjunctive  has  a  relative  for  its  subject, 
and  the  relative  and  antecedent  clause  involve  a  comparison, 
they  may  be  rendered  as  in  No.  40,  or  the  sense  w^ill  be 
expressed  if  we  render  the  relative  by  as,  and  the  subjunc- 
tive by  the  infinitive ;  thus, 

1 ,  Quis  tarn  esset  amens  qui  sem-  Who  would  be  so  foolish  as  to  live 

perviveret,  always. 

2.  Neque  tu  is  es  qui  nes  cias ,  You  are  not  such  a  one  as  not  to 

know. 

83.  When  the  relative  and  subjunctive  follow  such  adjec- 
tives as  dignus,  indignus,  ido7ieiis,  (§  141,  Obs.  2.)  and  the 
like ;  or  when  they  express  the  end  or  design  of  something 
expressed  in  the  antecedent  clause,  their  meaning  will  be 
expressed  as  in  No.  40,  or  by  the  infinitive  alone,  or  prece- 
ded by  the  phrase  "  in  order  to;"  thus, 

1.  Dignum  qui  secundus  ah  Ro-  Worthy  to   he  ranked  next  after 

mulo  numeretur,  Romulus. 

2.  Legdtos  miserunt  qui  eum  a  c-  They  sent  legates  to  accuse  (or,  in 

cus  dr  ent ,  order  to  accuse)  him. 

3.  Virgas     iis    dedit     qui  bus    He  gave  them  rods  to  drive,    (in 

a  g  S  r  ent ,  order  to  drive  ;  or,  so  that  with 

these  they  might  drive.) 

84.  The  subjunctive  with,  or  without  ut,  after  verbs  sig- 
nifying to  bid,  forbid,  tell,  allow,  hinder,  command,  and  the 
like,  (I  140,  1,  3d,  and  Obs.  5,)  may  be  rendered  by  the 
English  infinitive  preceded  by  the  subject  of  the  verb  in  the 
objective  case;  as, 

1.  Precor  venias,  I  pray  that  you  may  come;  i.  e., 

I  pray  you  to  come. 

2.  Die  V  eniat ,  TeM  her  to  come. 

3.  Sine  eat ,  Permit  him  to  go. 

4.  Non  patieris  ut  eant ,  You  will  not  suffer  them  to  go. 

5.  Non  pateris  ut  vescdmur,  You  do  not  suffer  us  to  eat. 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  37 

85.  When  several  verbs  in  the  same  mood  and  tense, 
have  the  same  nominative,  and  are  connected  in  the  same 
construction,  the  auxiliary  and  "  ^o,"  the  sign  of  the  infini- 
tive, in  the  translation  is  used  with  the  first  only,  and  under- 
stood to  the  rest ;  as, 

1.  Kt  vidisset  et  audivisset,  He    might    have    both  seen   and 

heard. 

2.  Et  visus  et  auditus  esset,  He  might  have  been  both  seen  and 

heard. 

3.  Cupimus  et  videre  et  audlre,       We  wish  both  to  see  and  hear. 

The  Iivfinitive  Mood. 

86.  When  the  infinitive  is  without  a  subject,  it  is  to  be 
considered  as  a  verbal  noun,  (§  144,)  and  translated  as  in 
the  paradigm  of  the  verb  ;  as, 

1.  Volo  s  crib  er  e  ,  I  wish,  to  write. 

2.  Dicitur  didi  c  is  s  e  ,  He  is  said  to  have  learned 

3.  Dicitur  iturus  esse,  He  is  said  to  be  about  to  go. 

4.  Dicitur  iturus  fu  is  s  e  ,  He  is  said  to  have  been  about  to  go. 

87.  When  the  verbs  possum,  volo,  ruolo,  inalo,  in  the  indi- 
cative or  subjunctive,  are  translated  by  the  English  auxilia- 
ries, can,  ivill,  will  not,  will  rather,  and  sometimes,  in  the 
past  tense,  by  could,  would.  Sec,  the  infinitive  following  is 
translated  without  to  before  it ;  as, 

1 .  Potest  fieri  ,  It  can  be  done. 

2.  Volo  ire,  I  will  go. 

3 .  Nolo  facere,  I  will  not  do  it. 

4.  Malo  fa  cere,  I  will  rather  do  it. 

5.  Ut  se  volucrem  facere  pellet,  That  he  would  make  her  a  bird. 

6.  Nihil  jam  defendi  potuit,  Nothing  could  now  be  defended. 

7.  Hoc  facere  non  potuit,    ■  He  could  not  do  this. 

8.  Nohte  timere,  Do  not /ear. 

88.  The  present  is  generally  translated  as  the  perfect 
without  "to,"  after  the  imperfect,  perfect  and  pluperfect 
tenses  of  possum,  volo,  twIo,  malo,  when  translated  could, 
would,  would  not,  would  rather;  and  with  "  to"  after  the 
same  tenses  of  deheo,  and  oportet,  translated  ought;  as, 

1.  Melius  fieri  non  potuit,  It  could  not  have  been  done  better. 

2.  Volui  di  c  er  e  ,  I  would  have  said. 

3.  Sume  r  e  arma  noluit,  He  would  not  have  taken  arms. 

4.  Maluit  au  g  6  r  e  ,  He  would  rather  have  encreased. 

5.  Quam  potuisset  edSre,  Than  he  could  have  caused. 

6.  Debuisti  mihi  ignos  c  er  e  ,     You  ought  to  have  pardoned  me. 

7.  Divldi  oportuit.  It  ought  to  have  been  divided. 

4 


38  .  INTRODUCTION.  n 

Note.  A  strictly  literal  translation  of  most  of  the  above 
sentences  would  not  express  the  precise  idea  intended  ;  thus, 
in  the  third  sentence,  "  He  would  not  have  taken  arms," 
and  "He  was  not  willing-  to  take  arms,"  manifestly  do  not 
mean  the  same  thing. 

89.  After  verbs  denoting  to  5ee,  hear,  feel ^  and  the  like, 
the  present  infinitive  is  often  translated  by  the  English  pre- 
sent participle ;  as, 

1.  Avdlvi  eum  di  ce  r  e  .  I  heard  him  saying. 

2.  Sur g  er  e  videt  lunam,  He  sees  the  moon  rising. 

3.  Terr  am  tremere  sensit,  He  felt  the  earth  trembling. 

Obs.  So  also  when  the  infinitive  alone,  or  as  part  of  a 
clause,  is  the  subject  of  another  verb  ;  as, 

4.  Mordri  periculosum  est,  Delaying  is  dangerous. 

5.  Mordri   periculosum  (esse)  They  think  that  delaying  is  dan- 
arbitrantur,  gerous. 

The  Infinitive  with  a  subject. 

90.  The  infinitive  with  its  subject  in  the  accusative, 
though  but  seldom,  is  sometimes  translated  in  the  same 
form  in  English  ;  as,  ^ 

1.  Cupio  te  venire,  I  wish  you  to  come. 

2.  Quos  dis  c  or  dar  e    nove-  Whom  he  hsid  known  to  differ. 

rat, 

3.  Ho  c  optimum  esse  judicdvit,  He  decided  this  to  be  the  best. 

4.  E  um  vocari  jussit,  He  ordered  him  to  be  called. 

91.  The  infinitive  with  a  subject,  usually  is,  and  always 
may  be,  translated  by  the  English  indicative  or  potential, 
according  to  the  sense  intended.  When  so  rendered,  its 
subject  must  always  be  translated  in  the  nominative;  and 
this,  if  not  a  relative,  is  usually  preceded  by  the  conjunction 
that,  {^  145,);  as, 

1.  Cupio  te  V  enlr  e  ,  ^    X  wish  that  you  woufd  come. 

2.  Dicit  me  s  crib  e  r  e,  He  says  that  I  write. 

3.  Eos  ivisse  putabat,  He  thought  that  they  had  gone. 

4.  Quern  nunquamrisisseferunt,  Who  they  say  never  laughed. 

5.  Rogdvit  quid  faciendum      He   asked  what  he  thought 

{esse)  putdret,  ought  to  be  done. 

92.  Both  the  Latin  and  the  English  infinitive,  by  their 
tenses,  represent  an  act,  &c.,  as  present,  past  or  future,  at 
the  time  of  the  governing  verb.  Hence,  when  the  one  is 
translated  by  the  other ;  that  is,  the  Latin  infinitive  by  the 
English  infinitive,  (Nos.  86  and  90,)  any  tense  of  the  one 


LATIN    IDIOMS. 


Will  be  correctly  translated  by  the  same  tense  in  the  other, 
(except  as  in  No.  83,)  no  matter  what  be  the  tense  of  the 
governing  verb;  as, 


1.  Pres.  jDicUur,      ^ 

Pres. 

Past. 

Future. 

2.  Past,  Dicebdtur,  > 

habere  ; 

habuisse ; 

habiturus  esse. 

3.  Fut.     Dicetur.      ) 

J 


1.  Pres.  He  is  said 

2.  Past,  He  was  said       ^  to  have;  to  have  had;  to  be  about  to  have. 

3.  Fut.    He  will  be  saic" 

93.  But  when  the  Latin  infinitive,  with  its  subject,  is 
translated  by  the  English  i?idicative  or  potential,  the  tense 
used  in  these  moods,  must  be  that  which  will  correctly  ex- 
press the  time  of  the  act  expressed  by  the  Latin  infinitive 
as  estimated,  not  from  the  time  of  the  governing  verb,  as  in 
Latin,  but  as  estimated  from  the  present.  That  is,  events 
present  at  the  same  time,  or  past  at  the  same  time,  will  be 
expressed  in  English  by  the  same  tense ;  an  event  repre- 
sented in  Latin  as  prior  to  the  present  time,  (perfect  infini- 
tive after  the  present  tense,)  will  be  expressed  by  the  Eng- 
lish imperfect  or  perfect  indefinite ;  and  an  event  represent- 
ed in  Latin  as  prior  to  a  past  event,  (perfect  infinitive  after 
a  past  tense,)  will  be  expressed  by  the  English  pluperfect ; 
thus : 

1.  Pres.  Dicutit  euni  venire,    They   say   that   he  is  coming,  or 

comes. 

2.  Past,  Dixerunt  eum  v  enir  e  ,  They  said  that  he  came. 

3.  Pres.  Dicunt  eum  venisse,  They  say  that  he  came. 

4.  Past,  Dixerunt  eum  venisse ,  They  said  that  he  had  come. 

5.  Past,  Caperunt  suspicdriillam  They  began   to  suspect  that  she 

venire,  came. 

Note.  The  infinitive  after  the  future  does  not  follow  this 
analogy,  but  is  always  translated  in  its  own  tense  ;  as, 
Pres.  Perf.  Future. 

6.  Dicent  eum  venire,  venisse,      v  ent  u  rum  esse. 
They  will  say  that  he  comes,     has  come,        will  come. 

94.  L  Present,  past,  and  future  time,  are  variously  ex- 
pressed as  follows  : 

1st.  Present  time  is  expressed  by  the  present  zense,  and 
sometimes  by  the  perfect  definite. 

2d.  Past  time  is  expressed  by  the  imperfect,  perfect  defi- 
nite and  pluperfect. — by  the  perfect  participle, — the 
present  infinitive  after  a  past  tense, — the  prese7it  tense 
used  to  express  a  past  event,  ^  44,  I,  3, — and  by  the  pre- 


40  INTRODUCTION. 

sent  participle,  agreeing  with  the  subject  of  the  govern- 
ing verb  in  any  of  these  tenses,  §  49,  5. 
3d.  Future  time  is  expressed  by  the  f^Uure,  and  future 
perfect, 

2.  The  infinitive  of  deponent  verbs,  is  translated  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  infinitive  active  in  the  following  ex- 
amples in  Nos.  95  to  100. 

3.  After  verbs  denoting  to  promise,  request,  advise,  com- 
mand, and  the  like,  implying  a  reference  to  something  fu- 
ture, the  present  infinitive,  with  its  subject,  is  usually  trans- 
lated as  the  future,  by  should,  or  ivould,  (See  No.  100,  1,2, 
3,  7,  8,  9,);  as,  Jussit,  eos  per  castra  duci.  He  ordered 
that  they  should  he  led  through  the  camp. 

4.  The  Latin  words  for  "  he  said,''''  "  saying,''''  or  the  like, 
introducing  an  oblique  narration,  are  often  omitted,  and  the 
infinitive  takes  the  form  of  translation  corresponding  to  the 
time  expressed  by  the  word  to  be  supplied. 

From  these  principles  are  deduced  the  following  direc- 
tions for  translating  the  infinitive  with  a  subject. 

Present  Infinitive  after  Present  or  Future  time. 

95.  Direct.  I.  When  the  preceding  verb  is  in  the  present, 
the  perfect  used  definitely,  ot  future  tense,  the  present  infin- 
itive is  translated  as  the  present ;  as. 

Active  Voice. 

1.  Dico  eum  I  auddr  e  ,  I  say  that  he  praises. 

2.  Dixi  eum  I  auddr  e  ,  I  have  said  that  he  praises. 

3.  Dicam  eum  I  auddr  e  ,  I  will  say  that  he  praises. 

Passive  Voice. 

4.  Dico  eum  I  auddr  i  ,    -  I  say  that  he  is  praised. 

5.  Dixi  eum  I  auddr  i  ,  I  have  said  that  he  is  praised.         \ 

6.  Dicam  eum  I  auddr  i  ,  I  will  say  that  he  is  praised. 

Present  Infinitive  after  Past  time. 

96.  Direct.  II.  When  the  preceding  verb  is  in  the  m- 
perfect,  perfect  indefinite,  or  pluperfect,  or  in  the  present  in- 
finitive after  a  past  tense,  the  present  infinitive  is  translated 
as  the  imperfect,  or  perfect  indefinite  ;  as, 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  41 

Presetit  Infinitive  Active. 

1.  IJicebam  eum  I  aud dr  e  ,  I  said  that  he  praised. 

2.  Dixi  eum  I  auddr  e  ,  I  said  that  he  praised. 

3.  Dixeram  eum  I  auddr  e  ,  I  had  said  that  he  praised. 

4.  CoRpi  dicere  eum  I  auddr  e  ,  I  began  to  say  that  he  praised. 

Present  Infinitive  Passive. 

5.  Dicebam  eum  I  auddr  i  ,  I  said  that  he  was  praised. 

6.  Dixi  eum  I  auddr  i  ,  I  said  that  he  was  praised. 

7.  Dixeram  eum  I  auddr  i  ^  I  had  said  that  he  was  praised. 

8.  CcBpi  dicere  eum  I  aud  dr  i  ,  I  began  to  say  that  he  was  praised. 

Exc.  I.  When  the  present  infinitive  expresses  that  which 
is  always  true,  it  must  be  translated  in  the  present,  after  any 
tense,  ^  44,  I.  1 ;  as 

9.  Doctus    erat    deum    gub  er-  He  had  been  taught  that  God  gov- 

ndremundum,  crns  the  world. 

Exc.  II.  When  the  present  infinitive  expresses  an  act 
subsequent  to  the  time  of  the  governing  verb,  it  is  transla- 
ted after  any  tense,  by  the  potential  with  should;  would;  as, 

10.  Jubet       ^  He  orders  ) 

11.  Jussit      yteire,  He  ordered  >  that  you  should  go. 

12.  Jusserat  )  He  had  ordered  ) 

Perfect  Infinitive  after  Present  or  Future  time. 

97.  Direct.  III.  When  the  preceding  verb  is  in  the  pre- 
sent,  perfect  definite,  oy  future  tense,  the  perfect  infinitive  is 
translated  as  the  imperfect  or  perfect  indefinite  ;  as, 

Active    Voice. 

1 .  Dico  evifi  I  audaviss  e  ,  I  say  that  he  praised. 

2.  JDixi eum  I  audaviss e ,  I  have  said  that  he  praised. 

3 .  Dicam  eum  laudaviss  e  ,        I  will  say  that  he  praised. 

Passive  Voice. 

4.  Dico  eum  lauddfum  esse,  I  say  that  he  was  praised. 

5.  Dixi  eum  I  auddtum  esse,     I  have  said  that  he  was  praised. 

6.  Die  am.  eum  I  auddtum  es  s  e  ,  I  will  say  that  he  was  praised. 

7.  Dico  eum    I  auddtum  fu-  I  sn.y  that  he  has  been  praised. 

iss e  , 

8.  Dixi  eum    I  auddtum  fu-  1  hdivesdiiithvLt  he  has  been  praised 

iss  e , 

9.  Dicam  eum  I  auddtum  fu-  I  will  say  that  he  has  been  praised 


42  mTRODIJCTIOlV. 

Perfect  Infinitive  after  Past  Tenses. 

98.  Direct.  IV.  When  the  preceding  verb  is  in  the  trri' 
'perfect^  "perfect  indefinite^  or  pluperfect^  or  in  the  present  in- 
finitive after  a  past  tense,  the  perfect  infinitive  is  translated 
as  the  pluperfect ;  as, 

Active  Voice 

1.  BicSbam  eum  I  and  avis  se  ,  I  said  that  he  had  praised. 

2.  Dixi  eum  I  audaviss  e  ,  I  said  that  he  had  praised. 

3.  Dixeram  eum  I  audaviss  e  ,  I  had  said  that  he  had  praised. 

4.  Ccepi     dicere    eum    I  auda-  I  began  to  say  that  he  had  praised. 

vis  se , 

Passive  Voice. 

5.  Dicebam     eum     lauddtum  I  said  that  he  had  been  praised 

esse, 

6.  Dixi  eum  lauddtum  esse  ,  I  said  that  he  had  been  praised. 

7.  Dixtram     eum    Z  a  w  d  a  i  m  m  I  had  said  that  he /lad  6een.^rawe<i, 

esse  ,       ' 

8.  Ccepi  dicP.re  eum   lauddtum  I  began  to  say  that  he  had  been 

esse,  praised. 

9.  Dicebam    eum     lauddtum  I  said  that  he  had  been  praised, 
fuis s  e, 

10.  Dixi   eum  I  auddtzim  fu-  I  said  that  he  had  been  praised. 

i s  se  , 

11.  Dixeram    eum    lauddtum  I  had  said  that  he  had  been  praised. 

fu  is  s  e  , 

12.  Capi dicere  eum  lauddtuml  began  to  say  that  he  had  been 

fuisse,  praised. 

Future  Infinitive  after  the.  Prese?it  Tense. 

99.  "When  the  preceding  verb  is  in  the  present,  or  perfect 
definite,  or  future  tense,  the  future  infinitive  with  esse,  is 
translated  as  the  future  indicative;  ^ndiVj'\\\i fvissehj would 
have,  or  should  have,  in  the  pluperfect  potential  iu  a  future 
sense,  and /ore,  iox  futuruin  esse,  ty  will  he. 

Active  Voice. 

1.  Dico      eum      I  aud  aturum  I  say  that  he  will  praise. 

esse, 

2.  Dixi      eum     laudaturum  I  have  said  that  he  will  praise. 

esse, 

3.  Dicam  eum    laudaturum  I  will  say  that  he  will  praise. 

esse, 

4.  Dico  eum  laudaturumfu-  I  say  that  he  would  have  praised, 

is  se  , 

5.  Dixi  eum  I  aud  at  a  rum  fu- I   have   said   that  he  would  have 

iss  e  ,  praised. 

6.  Dicam    eum    I  audaturum  I   will  say   that  he    would  have 

fu  isse ,  praised. 


1 


LATIN   IDIOMS.  43 

Passive  Voice. 

7.  Dico  eum  lauddtum  iri,        1  say  that  lie  will  be  praised. 

8.  Dixi  eum  lauddtum  iri,      '  I  have  said  that  he  twi/^  6e  praised. 
9     Dicam  eum  lauddtum  iri,    I  will  say  that  he  will  be  praised. 

Future  Infinitive  after  Past  Tenses. 
100.  Direct.  VI.  When  the  preceding  verb  is  of  the  im" 
perfect,  perfect  indefinite,  or  pluperfect,  the  future  of  the 
infinitive  with  esse,  is  rendered  by  loould  or  should;  and 
vfiih.  fuisse,  by  would  have,  and  should  have ;  and  fore  for 
futurum  esse  after  any  past  tense,  by  would  he;  as, 

Active  Voice. 

1.  Biclbam  eum  I  aud  at  urum  I  said  that  he  would  praise. 

esse, 

2.  Dixi  eum  I  aud  at  urum  ,  ifc.  I  said  that  he  would  praise. 

3.  Dixlram  eum  I  audaturum  I  had  said  that  he  would  praise^ 

4.  Bicebam.  eum  I  aud  at  iJ^ruml  said  that  he  would  have  praised, 

fu  i  s  s  e  , 

5.  I)ixi  eum  I  audaturujn  ,  4*c.  I  said  that  he  would  have  praised. 

6.  Dixeram  eum  I  aud  at  u  r  uml   had  said    that    he   would   have 

fuisse,  praised. 

Pai^sive  Voice.  rW^ 

7.  Dicebam  eum    lauddtum  I  said  that  he  would  be  praised.  ^' 

iri, 

8.  Dixi  eum  lauddtum  iri  ,  I  said  that  he  loould  be  praised. 

9.  Dixeram    cum    lauddtum  I  had  said  that  he  would  be  praised. 

iri, 

10.  Dicebam    (dixi)    eum  fore  I  said  that  he  would  be  safe. 

tutum, 

Usage  of  Fore. 
Obs.  Fore  is  used  hv  futurum  esse,  and,  with  a  subject 
after  present  tenses  .means  "  will  ie,"  after  past  tenses 
"  would  Je."  Both  of  them  when  followed  by  a  subjunctive 
with  ut  {^  145,  Obs.  6,)  after  a  present  tense,  may  be  trans- 
lated by  the  future  indicative  of  that  verb>  and  after  a  past 
tense,  by  the  imperfect  potential ;  as, 

11.  Credo  eumfo  r  e  tutum,  I  believe  that  he  will  be  safe. 

12.  Credebam,  or  credldi,  (credi-  I  believed,  (had  believed)  that  he 

deram)  eum  fore  tutum,  vmuldhe  safe. 

13.  Credo  fo  r  e  (or  futurum  esse)  I  believe  that  you  will  learn. 

ut  discas, 

14.  Credebam  or  credldi  (credide-  I  believed,  (had  believed)  thatyow 

ram)  fore  (ov  futurum  es-      would  learn. 
se)  ut  disceres, 


44  '  INTRODUCTION. 

Participles. 

101.  Participles  are  usually  translated  after  their  nouns, 
as  in  the  paradigms  of  the  verb;  thus, 

1.  Present  active,       Homo  c  aren  s  fraude,  A  man  wanting  guile. 

2.  Future  active,        Homo  scripturus,  A  xaau  about  to  write. 

3.  Perfect  passive,     Vita  bene  acta  ,  A  life  well  spent. 

4. ,      Ccesar  c  o  a  ctus,  Caesar  being  (or  hav- 

ing been)  compilled. 
i^.     (Deponent,)         Ccesar  r  e gres  sus  ,       Csesar  having  returned 

6.  Future  passive.     Mala  vitanda,  Evils   to    be    avoided, 

i.  e.,  which  ought  to 
be  avoided. 

Exc.  But  when  a  participle  is  used  as  an  adjective,  {^  49, 
3,)  it  is  translated,  like  the  adjective,  before  its  substantive  ; 
as, 

7.  T  igrin   ostendit  mansue-  He  exhibited  a  tamed  tiger. 

fa  ct  am  , 

8.  In  fervent  Ibus  ar  e  n  is  Standing  on  the  burning  sands. 

insistens, 

Future  Participle  Active. 

102.  When  the  Future  participle  active  is  used  to  ex- 
press a  purpose^  end,  or  design  of  another  action,  (^  146, 
Obs.  3,)  it  is  rendered  by  "  to,"  or  the  phrase  "  in  order  to," 
instead  of  "  about  to  ;"  as, 

1.  Pergit  consulturus   or  a-  He  goes  to  consult  (or,  in  order  to 

cula,  consult)  the  oracle. 

Obs.  The  present  participle  is  also  sometimes  used  in 
this  sense;  as, 

2.  Ventrunt  p  o  stul  ant  c  s  ci-  They  came  to  (or,  in  order  to)  ask 

bum,  food. 

Perfect  Participle  Passive. 

103.  As  the  Latin  verb  has  no  perfect  participle  in  the 
active  sense,  (except  in  deponent  verbs,)  its  place  is  usually 
supplied  by  the  perfect  participle  passive  in  the  case  abso- 
lute, {^  146,  Obs.  8,) ;  thus,  "  Caesar  having  consulted  his 
friends,"  rendered  into  Latin,  will  be,  Ccesar  a  raids 
"j  oil  suit  is,  literally,  "  Csesar,  his  friends  being  consulted. 
Hence, 

104.  When  the  action  expressed  passively  by  the  perfect 
participle  in  the  case  absolute,  or  agreeing  with  the  object 
of  a  verb,  is  something  done  by  the  subject  of  the  leading 


LATIN    IDIOMS.  45 

verb  in  the  sentence,  the  participle  is  rendered  more  in  ac- 
cordance-with  Eng-lish  idiom^  by  the  compound  perfect  ac- 
tive participle  in  English,  agreeing  with  the  subject  of  the 
verb,  and  followed  by  its  noun  in  the  objective  case,  (§  49, 
8,  and  ^  146,  Obs.  8,) ;  thus, 

1.  Ccesar,  his  d  i  c  t  i  s  ,  profectus  est,  translated  in  the 
Latin  idiom,       Caesar,  these  things  being,  said,  departed. 
English  idiom,  Caesar,  having  said  these  things,  departed. 

2.  Opereperacto,  ludemus, 

Latin  idiom,     Our  work  being  finished,  we  will  play. 
English  idiom,  Having  finished  our  work,  we  will  play. 

3.  Pythiam  ad  se  v  o  c  at  u  m  pecunid  instruxit, 

Latin  idiom,      He  supplied  with  money  Pythias  being  called  to  him. 
English  idiom,  Having  called  Pythias  to  him,  he  supplied  him  with 
•  money. 

105.  The  perfect  participle  of  deponent  verbs  having  an 
active  signification,  accords  with  the  English  idiom,  and  is 
best  translated  literally  ;  as, 

1.  Nadus  navicXilum,  Having  found  a  boat. 

2.  Cohort  at  us  exerdtum,        Having  exhorted  the  army. 

106.  When  the  perfect  participle  of  deponent  or  common 
verbs,  expresses  an  act  nearly  or  entirely  contemporaneous 
with  the  leading  verb,  it  may  be  translated  by  the  English 
present  participle  in  ing,  (^  48,  5,  Note,) ;  as, 

1.  Rex    hoc  /acinus  mirdtus  The  king,  admiring  this  act,  dis- 

juvenem  diudsit,  missed  the  youth. 

2.  Columba  d  e  I  ap  s  a  refert  sa-  The  dove  falling  brings  back  the 

gittam,  arrow. 

The  Future  Participle  Passive. 

107.  After  verbs  signifying  ^o  give,  to  deliver,  to  agree  or 
bargain  f 07',  to  have,  to  receive,  to  undertake,  and  the  like, 
the  participle  in  dus  generally  denotes  desig?i  or  purpose, 
and  is  rendered  simply  as  in  the  paradigm,  or  with  the 
phrase  "  in  order  to,"  prefixed,  (^  146,  Obs.  4,) ;  as, 

1.  Testamentum   tibi    tradit  I  e-  He  delivers  his  will  to  you  to  (or 

g  endum  ,  in  order  to)  be  read. 

2.  Jlttrilmit  nos  trucidandos  He  has  given  us  over  to  Cethegus 

Ceth'igo,  (in  order)  to  be  slain. 

108.  The  participle  in  d7is,  especially  when  agreeing  with 
the  subject  of  a  sentence  or  clause,  generally  denotes  pro- 
pritty,  necessity,  or  oUigafion^  and  is  rendered  variously,  as 


46  INTRODUCTION. 

the  tense  of  the  accompanying  verb  and  the  connection  te- 
quire,  (^  146,  Obs.  5,);  the  following  are  examples: 

1.  Legdtus  mitt  end  us  est,        An -ambassador  7nM.si  (ov  sJwuld) 

be  sent. 

2.  Legdtus  mittendus  erat  or  An  ambassador  had  to  be  sent. 

fu  i  t , 

3.  Legdtus  mittendus  erit,       An  ambassador  will  have  to  be  sent. 

4.  Legdtum  mittendum  esse,    That  an  ambassador  s/iot/Zd  6e  senit. 
5. mittendum  fu- ought   to    (or 

i  s  s  e  ,  should)  have  been  sent. 

6.  Dissimulanda  loquitur.  He  speaks  things  that  ought  to  be 

concealed. 

7.  Dissimulanda    loquebd-  He    spake  things   which  ought  to 

tur,  have  been  concealed. 

8.  Quce     dis  simul  a  n  d  a  Which  will  have  to  be  concealed. 

er  unt ,  • 

9.  Die,      quid     statuendum.  Say,  what   is  ^o   be    (or  lAust   be) 

sit  thought. 


Ablative  Absolute. 

109.  When  a  participle  stands  with  a  substantive  in  the 
ablative  absolute,  R.  LX.,  the  substantive  is  translated  with- 
out a  sign,  No.  9,  and  after  it  the  participle,  as  in  the  para- 
digm of  the  verb  ;  as, 

1.  Romulo  r  e  gnant  e  ,  Romulus  reigning. 

2.  Ilac  orationc  habit  a  ,  This  oration  being  delivered. 

3.  Ccesdre  V  ent  ur  o  ,  Csesar  (being)   about  to  come. 
A.  Prceceptis  tr  adendis  ,  Rules  being  to  be  delivered. 

5.  Bello   orto,  War  having  arisen. 

Note.  The  future  participles,  Ex.  8,  4,  are  seldom  used  in 
the  case  absolute. 

110.  When  two  nouns,— a  pronoun  and  a  noun, — a  noun 
or  a  pronoun  and  an  adjective,  are  used  in  the  ablative 
without  a  participle,  {^  146,  Obs.  10,)  they  are  translated  in 
the  nominative  without  a  sign,  and  the  English  participle 
"  bcing,^^  inserted  between  them;  as, 

1.  Adolescentulo  duce,  A  young  man  being  leader. 

2.  Mario  consule,  Marius  being  consul. 

3.  Me  suasore,  I  being  the  adviser. 

4.  Annibali  vivo,  .  Hannibal  being  alive. 

5.  Se  invito,  He  being  unwilling. 

Gerunds  and  Geru7idives. 

111.  The  gerund,  being  a  verbal  noun,  is  translated  in 


LATIN    IDIOBIS.  47 

the  same  manner  as  other  nouns  of  the  same  case,  and  at 
the  same  time  may  govern  the  case  of  its  own  verb,  ^  147 ; 
as, 

1.  N.     Petendum.  pacem,  Seeking  peace. 

2.  G.     -Petendi  pacem,  Of  seeking  peace. 

3.  i>.     Utendo  libris,  To  (or  for)  using  books 

4.  Ac.    Obliviscendu7ninjuridrum,  Forgetting  ininries. 

5.  Abl.  Parendo  magistratui,  By  obeying  the  magistrate, 

6.  Ahl.  Petendo  pacem,  With,  from,  i??,  6?/ seeking  peace. 

112.  Of  verbs  that  govern  the  accusative,  instead  of  the 
gerund  in  the  oblique  cases,  the  Latins  commonly  used  the 
participle  in  dus,  in  the  sense  of  the  gerund,  and  agreeing 
with  its  object  in  gender,  number  and  case;  the  case  being 
governed  by  the  same  word  that  would  have  governed  the 
gerund.  When  thus  used  it  is  called  a  gerundive.  (^  147,* 
R.  LXII.) 

Gerunds.  Gerundives. 

1 .  Ars  librum  I  e  g  endi ,  5.  .drs  lib  ri    I  e  g  endi. 

The  art  of  reading  a  book. 

2.  Utile  vulnera   cur  and  o  ,     6.   Utile  vulneribus  cur  andis 

Useful /or  healing  wounds. 

3.  Ad  litSras  s  c  r  ib  endum  ,7.  Ad  literas  scribendas, 

For  writing  a  letter. 

4.  De  captives    c  ommtit  an  •  8.  De  c  aptlv  i  s  co  mmtit  an  - 

do,  dis , 

Respecting  exchanging  captives. 

113.  When  the  gerand  is  the  subject  of  thQ  verb  est,  and 
governs  the  dative,  it  implies  necessity,  and  is  variously 
translated  into  the  English  idiom,  as  the  tense  of  the  verb 
requires,  (^  147,) ;  as, 

Latin  Idiom.  English  Idiom. 

1.  Legenduin  est  mihi,  I  must  read;  I  ought  to  read; 

Reading  is  to  me;  i.  e.,  I  should  read, 

2.  Legendum  erat  (fuit)  mihi.  1  had  to  read;  I  ought  to  have 

Reading  was  to  me;  read;  I  should  have  read. 

3.  Legendum  fucrat  mihi,  I  had  been  obliged  to  read. 

Reading  had  been  to  me; 

4.  Legendum  erit  mihi,  I  will  have  to  read;  It  will  be 

Reading  Vv^ill  be  to  me;  necessary  for  me  to  read. 

5.  Dicit  legendum  esse  mihi.  He    says  that   I  must   read — 

He  says  that  reading  is  to  me;  ought  to  read — should  read. 

6.  Dicit  legendum  fuisse  mihi,  He  says  that  I  had  to  read — 

He  says  that  reading  was  tome;      ought  to — or   should — have 

read. 
Obs.  The    dative    is    frequently  omitted,    and   generally 
when  it  denotes  persons  or  things,  in  a  general  or  indefinite 


48  INTRODUCTION. 

sense.     In  such  cases,  homzni^  homimhus^  nohis,  or  the  like, 
must  he  supplied  ;  as, 

7.  Vivendum  est  rede  (scil.ho7niivt-  Living  honestly,  is    viz  :  to  men  ; 

bus,)  i.  e.,  men      ought  to  live   hon- 

estly. 

8.  Dicit  vivendum  esse  rede,  (scil.  Ke   says  that  living   honestly   is, 

hommi,)  viz:  to   a   man;  i.  e.    a  man 

ought  to  live  honestly. 

Supines.  'i'     /^  - 

114.  The  Supines  are  rendered  without  variation,  as  in 
the  paradigm,  and  under  the  rules,  (^  148,)  ;  as, 

1.  jlbiit  d  e  ambuldtum  ,  He  has  gone  to  walk. 

2.  Facile  dictu  ,  Easy  to  tell,  or  to  be  told. 

Passive  Voice. 

115.  The  passive  voice,  in  the  indicative  mood,  is  trans- 
lated as  in  the  paradigms.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  sub- 
ject to  all  the  variety  of  construction  and  translation  used  in 
the  active  voice,  Nos.  74-84,  acting  on  the  verb  to  be,  which 
as  an  auxiliary  with  the  perfect  participle,  makes  up  the 
passive  form  of  the  verb  in  English. 

In  the  compound  tenses,  (^  53,  3,)  when  two  or  more 
verbs  in  a  sentence  are  in  the  same  tense,  and  have  the 
same  nominative,  or  are  in  the  same  construction,  the  verb 
sum  is  commonly  expressed  with  the  last  and  understood  to 
the  rest,  as  in  the  following  Ex.  1.  But  when  the  nomina- 
tive is  changed,  the  verb  "to  be"  should  be  repeated  as  in 
Ex.  2. 

1.  Nisus  a  Minoe  vidus  et  occisus  Ivisus   was   conquered  and  killed 

est,  by  Minos. 

2.  Tres   naves   capta,    decern  de-  Three  ships  U'ere  taken,  ten  sunk; 

merscB,  duo  millia  hostium  two  thousand  of  the  enemy  were 
capta,  tredecim  millia  occlsa  taken,  thirteen  thousand  killed. 
sunt. 

Passive  Voice  in  a  Middle  Sense. 

116.  The  Latin  passive  voice  is  often  used  to  represent 
its  subject,  not  as  acted  upon  by  another,  but  as  acting  on 
itself,  or  for  itself,  or  intransitively,  by  its  own  impulse  ;  and 
so  corresponds  in  sense  to  the  middle  voice  in  Greek.  Thus 
used,  it  is  best  translated  by  the  active  voice  foUow^ed  by 
the  reflexive  pronoun  as  an  object,  or  by  an   intransitive 


LATIN    IDIOMS. 


49 


verb  expressing  the  idea  intended, 'f's'  41,  Obs.  3.) 

lowing  are  examples. 

1.  Paludibus  abdlti  sunt 


The  fol- 


lerum  v  olut  entur 

3.  F  ertur  in  hostes, 

4.  Volutdti  super  poma, 

5.  C in gltur  armis, 

6.  St  ernuntur  tumulo, 

7.  Gallus  victus  o  c  cult  dtur 


They  concealed   themselves  in  the 

marshes. 
2.   Cum  omnes  in  omni  genere  see-  Since   all   give   themselves    up    to 

every  kind  of  wickedness. 
Rushes  against  the  enemy. 
Moiling  themselves  over  the  apples. 
Girds  himself  with  his  armor. 
Throw  themselves  on  the  grave. 
The  cock,  when  conquered,  hides 

himself. 

117.  The  verb  sum  governing  the  genitive  by  R.  XII.,  ^ 
108,  may  generally  be  translated  by  the  phrase  "  belongs 
to,"  "is  the  part,"  "is  the  property,"  &c.  See  explanation 
under  Rule;  as. 

It  belongs  to  the  king. 
The  flock  belongs  to  Meliboeus. 
Prudence  is  the  characteristic  of 
old  age. 

118.  The  verb  sum,  (also  desum,)  in  the  third  person, 
governing  the  dative  by  §  112,  Rule  II.,  may  generally  be 
translated  by  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  verb  "  to  have," 
with  the  Latin  dative  for  its  subject,  and  the  Latin  subject 
for  its  object;  as, 

Latin  Idiom. 


1.  E  st  regis, 

2.  Pecus  est  MelitcBi, 

3.  Prudentia  est  senectutis 


Er, 


1.  Liber  est  mihi, 

2.  Liber  erat  mihi, 

3.  L^er  fuit  mihi, 

4.  Liber  fuer at  mihi, 


A  book  is  to  me, 
A  book  was  to  me, 
A  book  was  (or  has 

been)  to  me, 
A  book  had  been  to 
me, 


Idiom. 


I  have  a  book. 

I  had  a  book. 

I  had,  or  have   had   a 

book. 
I  had  had  a  book. 


A  book  will  be  to  me,  I  will  have  a  book. 

Books  are  tome,  I  have  books. 

It  is  to  me,  I  have  it. 

A  book  is  not  to  me,  I  have  not  a  book. 


5.  Liber  erit  mihi, 

6.  Liber  sunt  mihi, 

7.  Est  mihi, 

8.  Liber  deest  mihi, 

119.  When  a  compound  verb,  rendered  by  the  simple 
verb  and  a  preposition,  is  followed  by  two  cases,  the  simple 
verb  with  the  immediate  object  (always  in  the  accusative,) 
is  usually  translated  first,  and  then  the  preposition  with  the 
remote  object. 

1.  Flumen  copias  transduxit ,  He  led  his  forces  across  the  river. 

2.  C  ir  cumddr  e    mcenia    op-  To  build  walls  around  the  city 

p"ido, 
3    Caput  deje  cit  saxo,  He  threw  the  head  downhom.  the 

rock. 


♦50  INTRODUCTION. 

120.  An  adverb,  ad^^rbial  phrase,  or  clause  expressing 
some  circumstance  in  translating,  may  often  be  arranged  in 
different  situations  in  a  sentence,  due  regard  being  paid  to 
the  sense  and  harmony  of  the  whole  ;  thus,  Mag7ia  dehemus 
suscipere  dum  vires  suppetunt,  may  be  arranged  variously 
for  translating,  as  follows : 

1.  Debemus  suscipere  magna,  dum  vires  suppetunt;  or, 

2.  Dum  vires  suppetunt,  debemus  suscipere  magna;  or, 

3.  Debemus,  dum  vires  suppetunt,  suscipere  magna. 

121.  The  negative  conjunction  ne,  is  variously  rendered 
lest,  lest  that,  that-not,  not;  and  after  verbs  signifiying  to 
fear,  forhid,  and  the  like,  it  is  translated  that,  while  ut  in 
the  same  situation,  means  that  not. 

1.  Ne    quis  eat,  Lest  (orthat  not)  any  one  msiy  go. 

2.  Orat  ne  seperdat,  She   entreats   that   lie  would  not 

destroy  her. 

3.  Egi  ne  interessem,  I   managed  that  I  should   7iot  be 

present. 

4.  Dum  n  e  veniat,  Provided  he  do  not  come. 

5.  Respondit  n  e  cogitata  quidem  He    replied    that    not    even    the 

latent.  thoughts  are  concealed. 

6.  Vereor  n  e  cadas,  I  am  afraid  thai  you  may  fall. 

7.  Timui  ut  veniret,  I  feared  that  he  would  not  come. 

Note  1.  But  when  the  fear  expressed,  refers  to  such  things 
as  we  wish,  ne  means  that-not ;  as.  Paves  n  e  ducas  illam, 
You  are  afraid    that   you  do    not    get  her  to  wife. 

Ne,  after  a  command  implying  a  negative,  or  prohibition, 
is  often  omitted  ;  as,  cave  titHbes,  take  care  that  you  do  7iot 
stumble. 

Note  2.  Ne  quidein,  (always  separate,)  is  an  emphatic  ne- 
gative, and  has  the  emphatic  word  between;  as,  ne  hoc 
quidem,  not  even  this;  ne  tuvi  quidem,  not  even  then. 

122.  When  a  verb  is  translated  into  English  by  the  aid 
of  an  auxiliary,  an  adverb,  or  clause  modifying  it,  will  often 
have  to  be  placed  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  verb,  (Eng. 
Gr.  ^  74,) ;  as, 

i.  Dixit  ne    oh    hoc  alios  con-  He  said  that  we  should  not  on  this 
temndmus,  account  despise  others. 

123.  Some  prepositions  are  variously  translated  according 
to  the  meaning  of  the  words,  or  the  case  with  which  they 
are  connected;  thus, 


LATIN   IDIOMS. 


1.  In  followed  by  an  accusative,  means  to,  into,  towards,  for.  agamat. 

&c.,  (§  136,  R.  L.) 

2.  In,  followed  by  the  ablative,  means  in,  upon,  among,  in.  xn  the 

case  of,  (§  136,  R.  LI.) 

3.  Inter,  referring  to  two,  means  between;  to  more  than  two,  among. 

4.  Suh  means  under,  at  the  foot  of,  close  up  to. 

5.  Prce  means  before,  in  comparison  ofj — sometimes,  more  than.' 

124.  When  the  following  conjunctions,  adjectives,  and 
adverbial  particles,  are  placed,  one  before  each  of  two  suc- 
cessive words  or  clauses,  the  first  is  commonly  translated 
differently  from  the  second,  and  usually  in  the  following 
manner,  (§149,  Obs.  5.) 

Both  and. 

Both  and. 


1.  Et  - 

2.  Que 

3.  Aut.  vel,  1  _ 

sive,  3 

4.  Nee  — 

5.  Neque  — 

6.  Sive.  seu  — 

7.  Turn  — 

8.  Cum  or  quum 


Jam 
Nunc 


11.  Simul 


12.  Modo, alias- 


-et, 

-  que, 
aut,   vel, 

sive, 

-  nee.      } 

-  neque,  ^ 

-  sive,  seu, 

-  turn. 

-  turn, 

■jam,    ) 
•  nunc,  $ 

-  simul, 
■modo,  alias. 


Either 

Neither 

Whether 
5  Not  only 
^Both 
5  Not  only 
l  Both 
5  Now 

(  At  one  time 
C  Not  only 
<  No  sooner 
(  As  soon  as 
At  one  time 
Sometimes 


nor. 

or. 

but  also. 

and. 

but  also. 

and. 

then. 

at  another. 

but  also. 

than. 

instantly. 

at  another 

sometimes. 


ut. 


Correspondirig  Conjunctive  Terms. 

an.  Whether or.    ^ 

Whether or. 

So  that;  so 

Such,  so  great 

Such,   of  such  a  kind  ■ 

As  soon as. 

As  long as. 

As  so. 


13.  Ne  an, 

14.  Utrum      an, 

15.  It  a,  sic,  tarn,  adeo 

16.  Talis,  tantus ut, 

17.  Is,  ejusmodi     ut, 

18.  Simul      ac,  or  aique 

19.  Tamdiu  quamdiu, 

20.  Ut  sic, 


that, 
that. 


Ne  is  frequently  omitted  with  the  first  word  or  clause,  and  must 
be  supplied  when  an  stands  with  the  second;  as, 
21.  Recte  an  per  per  am,  {Whether)  right  or  wrong. 


52  ACCENTUATION,  QUANTITY,  ETC. 

General  Rules  for  Accentuation. 

1.  Words  of.  two  syllables  have  the  accent  on  the  first  or 
penult ;  as,  'pd'-ter^  ?)iu'-sa,  au'-rum. 

2.  Words  of  more  than  two  syllables,  when  the  penult  is 
long,  have  the  accent  on  the  penult;  when  the  penult  is 
short,  they  have  the  accent  on  the  antepenult;  as,  a-mi'-cus^ 
dom'-i-nus. 

3.  When  the  enclitics,  que,  ve,  ne,  are  added  to  a  word 
the  two  words  are  considered  as  one,  and  it  is  accented  ac- 
cordingly; as,  pd'-ter,  pd-ter'-que;  dom'-i-nus,  dom-i-nus' .ve. 

General  Rules  for  the  Quantity  of  Syllables. 

1.  A  vowel  before  another  vowel,  is  short ;  as,  via,  Deus. 

2.  A  vowel  before  two  consonants,  or  a  double  consonant, 
is  long  by  position;  as,  ar??ia,fallo,  axis. 

3.  A  vowel  before  a  mute  and  a  liquid,  [l,  r,)  is  common, 
i.  e.  either  long  or  short ;  as,  voKicris,  or  volucris. 

4.  A  diphthong  is  always  long;  as,  aurum,  CcBsar. 
Note.  In  this  work  when  the  quantity  of  the  penult,  in  woras  of 

more  than  two  syllables,  is  determined  by  any  of  these  rules,  it  is 
not  marked,  otherwise  it  is  marked. 

Explanation  of  References. 

The  references  at  the  foot  of  each  page,  to  which  a  section  mark 
(  §  )  is  prefixed,  are  to  the  sections  and  their  subdivisions  in  the 
Grammar,  and  are  intended  chiefly  to  explain  the  construction. 

In  those  references  which  have  no  section  mark  prefixed,  the  first 
number  directs  to  the  same  number  in  the  preceding  Introduction, 
and  the  second,  to  the  example  under  that  number.  Thus  for  exam- 
ple, in  p.  53,  s  38,  8;  the  number  38  refers  to  Introduction  38, 
(p.  22,)  which  shows  how  the  relative  in  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence is  to  be' translated;  and  the  number  8  refers  to  example  8, 
Jl  quo  consUio,  &c.,  showing  that  the  relative  qua,  is  here  to  be  trans- 
lated "  this,"  and  Q?/a  de  causa,  ''for  this  cause."  These  references 
are  intended  to  explain  particular  phrases  and  idioms,  and  to  give 
an  example  of  the  mode  of  translating  them. 

The  references  made  by  figures  are  to  the  notes  on  the  text,  com- 
mencing p.  207,  where  it  will  be  observed  that  all  the  notes  belong- 
ing to  a  page  are  contained  in  one  paragraph,  at  the  beginning  of 
which  is  the  number  of  the  page  to  which  the  notes  refer. 

N.  B.  In  the  text  the  reference  letter  stands  after,  and  the  refer- 
ejice  figure  stands  before  the  word  or  words  to  which  they  respect- 
ively belong. 


1 


C.  JULII  C^SARIS  COMMENTARII 
DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 


BOOK    I. 


GENERAL    ARGUMENT, 
I.  General  description  of  Gaul — Chap.  1.     II.  The  war  with  the 
Helvetii— Chap.  2-29.     III.  War  with  Ariovistus— Chap.  30-54. 

1.  Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres,  iquaram''  unam 
incolunt  Belgas,  aliam  Aquitani,  tertiam,  2  qui  ipsorum  lin- 
gua Celtag,**  nostra  Galli,''  appellantur.  Hi  omnes  lingua," 
3institutis,*'  legibus  winter  se*^  difFerunt.  ^Gallos  ab  Aqui- 
tanis  Garumna  flumen,  a  Belgis  Matrona  et  Seqaana  divi- 
dit.  Horura''  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  propterea  quod 
a  ^cultu  atque  humanitate  Provinciae  longissTme  absunt, 
■^  mini  me  que  ad  eos  mercatores  saepe  commeant,  atque  ea, 
quae  ad  efFeminandos "  animos  pertinent,  important ;  proximi- 
que  sunt  Germanis,*  qui  trans  Rhenum  incolunt,  quibuscum 
continenter  bellum  gerunt:  qua^  de  causa  Helvetii  quoque 
reliquos  Gallos  virtute''  prascedunt,  quod  fero  quotidianis 
proeliis''  cum  Germanis  contendunt,  cum  aut  suis'  finibus 
®eos  prohibent,  aut  ^ipsi  in  i^eorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt. 
i^Eorum  una  pars,  quam  Gallos''  obtinere  dictum  est,  ini- 
tium  capit  a  flumine  Rhodano ;  continetur  Garumnd  flumi- 
ne,''  Oceano,  finibus  Belgarum ;  attingit  etiam  ab  Sequanis 
et  Helvetiis   flumen    Rhenum ;  ^^  vergit   ad  septentriones. 

»  §  107,  R.  X.  c  §  147^  R.  LXII,  &    h  §  129,  R. 
i'§103,  R.V.                       112,3.  i      31,3. 

c  §  128,  R.  t  §  111,  R.  ^  §  145,  R.  LVIII. 

d  §  28;  Obs.  5.  s     38,  8. 


54  DE   BELLO   GALLIdO. 

Belgee  i  ab  extremis  Galliss  finibus  oriuntur;  pertinent  ad 
inferiorem  partem  fluminis  Rheni ;  ^spectant  in  septentrio- 
nes  et  orientdm  solem.  Aquitania  a  Garumna  flumme  ad 
Pyrenseos  montes,  et  eam  partem  Oceani,  quae  est  3  ad  His- 
paniam,pertmet;  spectat  inter  occasum  solis  et  septentriones. 

2.  Apud  Helvetios  longe  nobilissimus  et  ditissimus  fuit 
Orgetorix.  Is,  Marco  Messala  et  Marco  Pisone  *  Consuii- 
bus,''  regni  cupiditate  "^  inductus,  conjuratidnem  nobilitatis 
fecit ,  et  6  civitati "  persuasit,  ut  de  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus 
copiis  exirent :  ^  perfacile^  esse  cum  virtQte  omnibus  praes- 
tarent/  totius  Gallia?  imperio  "^  ^potiri.  Id  hoc  facilius  eis"" 
■y  persuasit,  quod  undique  loci  ^  natura''  Helvetii  continentur : 
una  ex  parte  flumine  Rlieno,''  latissTmo ''  atque  altissimo,  qui 
agrum  Helvetium  a  Germanis  dividit :  altera  ex  parte, 
monte  ''  Jura  altissimo,''  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helvetios; 
tertia,  lacu  Lemanno,^  et  flumme'  Rhodano,  qui  Provinciam 
nostram  ab  Helvetiis  divTdit.  His  rebus  fiebat,*"  ut  et  minus 
late  vagarentur,^  et  minus  facile  finitimis'"  bellum  inferre 
possent : '  qua  de  causa  homines  bellandi"  cupidi  magno 
dolore''  afficiebantur.  ^  Pro  multitudme  autem  hominum, 
et  pro  gloria.  10 belli  atque  fortitudinis,  angustos  se  fines  ha- 
bere" arbitrabantur,  i^  qui  in  longitudinem  milliaP  passuum 
ducenta  et  quadraginta,  in  latitudinem  centum  et  octoginta 
patebant. 

3.  12  His  rebus  ^  adduc.ti,  et  auctoritate  Orgetorigis  per- 
moti,  constituerunt '^  ea,  quse  ad  isproficiscendum'"  pertine- 
rent,^  coniparare;'  jumentorum  et  i^carroruin  quam  maxi- 
mum" numerum  coemere ;  i^gementes  quam  maximas "  fa- 
cere,  ut  in  itinere  copia  frumenti  suppeteret; ""  cum  proxi- 


^     110,3. 

^     24. 

p  §  24,  5. 

^  §  129, R. 

■'  §  149,  R. 

q     54. 

c     63. 

fe     51. 

r  §  147,  Obs.  4. 

d§  140,  1,3d. 

1  §  140,  1,  4th. 

»§  141,  Obs.  8. 

^  §  98,  Obs.  6. 

n>§  123,  R. 

t  §  144,  R.  LVII.       • 

'  §  140,  Obs.  3. 

"§147    Obs.  2. 

u§  134,  Obs.  6,3(1. 

g§  121,  R.  XXVI. 

0      96,  1. 

T§  140,  1,  2d. 

LIBEH  I.    CAP.  IV.  6b 

mis  civitatlbus  pacem  et  amicitiam  confirmarc.  Ad  eas  res 
conficiendas '^  biennium  sibi  satis  esse ''  duxerunt ;  ^in  ter- 
tium  annum  profectionem  lege  confirmant.  Ad  eas  res  con* 
ficiendas'^  Drgetorix  deligitur.  Is  sibi*^  legationem  ad  civ- 
itates  suscepit.  In  eo  itinere  persuadet  Castico/  Catanlan* 
taledis  filio,^  Sequano,  cujus  pater  regnum  in  Sequanis  miil- 
tos  annos*^  obtinuerat,  et  a  senatu  Populi  Komani  amicus^ 
appellatus  erat,  ut  regnum  in  civitate  sua  Soccuparet,''  quod 
pater  ante  habuerat ;  itemque  Dumnorigi*^  iEduo,  fratri  "^  Di- 
vitiaci,  qui  eo  tempore '  ^  principatum  in  civitate  obtinebat,'' 
ac  maxime  plebi'  acceptus  erat,  ut  idem"'  conaretur''  per- 
suadet, eique '^  filiam  suam  in  matrimcmium  dat.  ^Perfa- 
cile"  factu"  esse,**  illis  "^  probat,  conata'"  perfieere,  propterea 
quod  ipse  suae  civitatis  imperium  obtenturus  esset :  non  esse 
dubium,  quin^  ^totius  Galliae  plurimum  Helvetii  posseht: 
se**  suis  copiis ""  supque  exercitu  illis*^  regna  conciliatiirum, 
confirmat.  Hac  oratione  adducti,  6  inter  se  iidem  et  jusju- 
randum  dant,  et,  regno  occupato,  per  tres  potentissimos  ac 
firmissimos  '''populos  totius  Galliae*  sese**  potiri  posse  ^  spe- 
rant. 

4.  9Ea  res  ut  est  Helvetiis*  per  lo  indicium  enunciata, 
moribus '  suis  Orgetorigem  ex  ^^  vinciilis  causam  dicere  coe- 
gerunt:  i2damnatum  poenam"  sequi  oportebat,  ut  igni  cre- 
maretur/  Die '  constittita  causes  dictionis,  Orgetorix  ad 
judicium  omnem  suam  ^^  familiam,  i^ad  hominum'"  millia 
decern,  undique  coegit ;  et  omnes  clientes,  obasratosque  suos, 
quorum  magnum  numerum  habebat,  eodem  conduxit :  per 
eos,  ne  cau'sam  diceret,"  se  eripuit.     Cum  civitas,  ob  eam 

*     112,  7.  i  §  131,  R.  XL.  r  §  129,  R~ 

*■     94,  3.  k  §  44, 11.  2.  •  §  121,  R.  XXVI. 

"=§123,  R.  '§111,  R.  Exc.  2. 

^     63.  m    19,  4.  t^  126,  R.  Ill 

•*  §  97,  R.  n  §  98,  Obs.  6.  «  §  113,  Exc.  III. 

.     '§131,  R.  XLI.  o      114^2.  v§  140,1.  4th. 

B§103,  R.  V.  p§140,3.  w§t24,  5. 

J»  §  140,  1,  3d.  q  §  145,  R.  LVIII.        ^  §  140,  1,  2d. 


56  DE  BELLO  GALLICO. 

rem  incitata,  armis  jus  suum  exsequi  conaretur,''  multitudi- 
uemque  hominum  ex  agrisimagistratus  cogerent,^  Orgetorix 
mortuus  est:  neq.ue  abest  suspicio,  ut "^  Helvetii  arbitrantur, 
2quin''  ipse  sibi  ^  mortem  consciverit. 

5.  Post  ejus  mortem  nihilo  miniis  Helvetii  id,  quod  con- 
stituerant,  facere  conantur,  ut  e  finibus  suis  exeant.^  XJbi 
jamse'  ad  eam  rem  paratos «  esse  arbitrati  sunt,  oppida 
sua  omnia,  numero  3  ad  duodecim,  vices  ad  quadringentos, 
reliqua  privata  aedificia  incendunt;  frumentum  omne,  |)raeter 
quod  ''  secum  portaturi  erant,  comburunt ;  ut,  domiim'  redi- 
tionis  spe  ^  snblata,  paratiores  ad  omnia  periciila  subeunda* 
essent :  "^  ^trium  mensium  molita  ^cibaria  sibi '^  quemque 
domo'  efferre  jubent.  Persuadent  Kauracis,*^  et  Tulingis, 
et  Latobrigis,  finitimis,  uti,  eOdem  ^usi  consilio,"  oppidis 
suis  vicisque  exustis,"  una  cum  iis  proficiscantur :  ^'''Boiosque, 
qui  trans  Rhenum  incoluerant,  et  in  agrum  Noiicum  transi- 
crant  Noreiamque  oppugnarant,  receptos"  ad  se,  socios^ 
sibi*^  adsciscunt. 

6.  Erant  omnmo  itinera  duo,  quibus  itineribus'^  domo 
exire  possent :  ^  unum""  per  Sequanos,  angustum  et  difficile, 
inter  montem  Juram  et  flumen  Rhodanum,^vix  qua  singuli* 
carri  ducerentur ;''  mons  autem  altissimus  impendebat,  ut 
facile  perpauci  prohibere  possent:"  alterum  per  ^Provin- 
ciam  nostram,  multo  facilius  atque  expeditius  ^^propterea 
quod  Helvetiorum  inter  fines,  et  Allobrogum,  qui  nuper  pa- 
cati  erant,  Ehodanus  fluit,  isque  nonnullis  locis''  ^M^ado 
transituri^^  Extremum  oppidum  Allobrogum  est,  proximum- 
que  Helvetiorum  finibuSj"^  Geneva.     Ex  eo  oppido  pons  ad 

=^§  140,  Obs.  4.  &  h     37,  2.    "^^  n     37,"^ 

§  44,  II.  2.  i  §  130,  4.  ••     19,  Sup.  iter. 

^  §  140,  3.  k  §  146,  LX.  &  109.  *     26,  2. 

c  §  140,  Obs.  1.  *  1      112,3.  t§  141,  Obs.  7,  & 

d§123,R.  «'§140,  l,2d.  §139,2. 

e§140,  1,  3d.  n  §  121,  R.  XXVI.  t>§  140,  1,  1st. 

f  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  0     104,  1,  &2.  v  §  136,  Obs.  5. 

6§103,  Obs.  2.  r§97,  Exp.  ^''§111,R. 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  VII.  57 

Helvetios  pertinet.  Allobroyibus  sese  vel  persuasuros,'' 
{quod  nonduil  i  bono  ammo  ^  in  Populum  Romanum  vide- 
rentur,^y  existimabant ;  vH'  vi  coacturos,'^  ut  per  suos  fines 
eos  ire  paterentur.*^  Omnibus  rebus  ad  profectionem  com- 
paratis,^  ^diem  dicunt,  qua  die*^  ad  ripana  Rhodani  omnes 
conveniant:^  is  dies  erat  ^ante  diem  qiiintum  Kalendas 
Aprilis,  4  Lucio  Pisone,  Aulo  Gabinio  Consulibus.^  \j 

7.  Csesari '  cum  id  nuntiatum  esset,''  eos  per  Provinciam 
nostram  iter  facere  conari,  maturat  ^  ab  urbe  proficisci,  et, 
quam  maximis'  potest  itineribus,  in  ^Galliam  ulteridrem 
contendit,  et  ad  Genevam  pervenit :  '^  Provinciee  ■"  toti  quam 
maximum '  militum  numerum  imperat  (erat  omnmo  in  Gal- 
lia ulteriore  legio  una);  pontem,  qui  erat  ^  ad  Genevg.m, 
jubet  rescindi."  Ubi  de  ejus  adventu  Helvetii  ^certiores 
facti  sunt,  legates  ad  eum  mittunt,  nobilissimos  civitatis,'' 
cujus  legationis  Nameius  et  Verudoctius  principera  locum 
obtinebant/  qiri  dicerent,^  io"gi})iq  esse  >•  in  animo,  sine  ullo 
maleficio  iter  per  Provinciam  facere,  propterea  quod  aliud 
iter  haberent '^  nullum:  rogare/ ut  ejus  i' volunlate  id  sibi 
facere  liceat."  *  Caesar,  quod  memoria  tenebat,  Lucium 
Cassium  Consulem  occisum,  exercitumque  ejus  ab  Helve- 
tiis  pulsum,  et  '2  sub  jugum  missum,  ^^concedendum "  non 
putabat :  neque  homines  inimico  ammo,*'  data  facultate  per 
Provinciam  itineris  faciundi,""  temperaturos  ab  injuria  et 
maleficio  existimabat.  Tamen,  ut  spatium  intercedere  pos- 
set,'^ dum  milites,  quos  imperaverat,  convenirent,  iegatis 
respondit,  "diem  se  ad  deliberandum  sumturum;  si  quid 
vellent,"  i^ante  diem  Idus  Aprilis  reverterentur."-' 

^     100,  1.  i  §  126,  R.  III.  "    '     51,  5.  ' 

^§  106,  R.  VII.  k     51,  2.  »     94,4. 

c  §  141,  Obs.  7.  1  §  134,  Obs.  6,  3d.  *  §  140,  1,  3d. 

d§140,  1,  2d.  "!§  123,  R.  &5,  1.  «     113,  Obs.  &  8. 

■  «»      304,  1.  n      90,  4.  V     112,  1. 

f§131,  R.XL.  »  §  107,  R.  X.  Exp.  ^§141,  Obs.  8. 

«§141,  R.  II.  P§102,  R.  I.  ^§140,2. 

^     110,2.  i§112,  R.II.  y     78,3. 


58  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

8.  Interea  ea  legione,  quam  secum  habebat,  militibusquc, 
qui  ex  Provincia  convenerant,  a  lacu  Lemanni^  ^  qui  in  flu- 
men  Rhodanum  influit,  2  ad  montem  Juram,  qui  fines  Se- 
quanorum  ab  Helvetiis  dividit,  Sn^illia''  passuum  decern 
novem  murum,  in  altitudinem  pedum''  sedecim,  fossamque 
perducit.  Eo  opere  perfecto,*^  praesidia  disponit,  ^castella 
communit,  quo  facilius,  si  ^se  invito  transire  conarentur,^ 
prohibere  possit.^  Ubi  ea  dies,  quam  constituerat  cum  le- 
giitis,  venit,  et  legati  ad  eum  reverterunt,  ^negat,  se^  more*^ 
et  exemplo  ^  Popiili  Romani  posse  iter  ulli  ^  per  Provinciam 
dare;  et,  si  vim*  facere  conentur,*^  prohibittirum '^  ostendit. 
Helvetii,  ea  spe'  dejecti,  ?  navibus  ^  junctis  ratibusque*  com- 
plurlbas  factis,  alii  vadis^  Rhodani,  ^quk  minima  altitudo 
fluminis  erat,  nonnunquam  interdiu,  ssepius  noctu,  si  ^per- 
rumpere  possent,*^  conati,  operis  munitione  ^  et  militum  con- 
cursu""  et  telis  repulsi,  hoc  conatu"  destiterunt. 

9.  Relinquebatur  una  per  Sequanos  via,  qua,^  Sequanis" 
invitis,  propter  angustias  ire  non  poterant.  His''  ciim  sua^ 
sponte  persuadere  non  possent,*^  legatos  ad  Dumnorigem 
jEduum  mittunt,  ut  eo  10  deprecatore  °  a  Sequanis  impetta- 
rent/  Dumnorix.  ^^  gratia*^  et  largitione  apud  Sequanos 
plurimum  poterat,  et  Helvetiis*  erat  amicus,  quod  ex  ea  civi- 
tate  Orgetorigis  filiam,  ^^in  matrimonium  duxerat;  et,  cu- 
piditate^  regni  adductus,,  i^novis  rebus*  studebat,  et  quam 
plurimas"  civitates  suo  sibi""  beneficio  habere  obstrictas  vo- 
lebat.  Itaque  rem  suscipit,  et  a  Sequanis  impetrat,  ut  per 
fines  suos  ire  Helvetios  patiantur;  obsidesque  uti  inter  sese 

'^  §  131,  R.  XLII.&  h  §  123,  R.  P     30,  2. 

§24,5.  i  §  15,  12.  q§140,  Obs.4. 

"  §  106,  R.  VI.  k  §  47,  Note    1.   and  ^  §  140,  1,  3d. 

^     104,  1,&109.  100,  1,  and  94,  2.  "^  §  111,  R. 

d§l40,  2.  1  §  136,  R.  LII.  t§ii2,  R.  V 

e  §  140,  1.  ">§  149,  R.  "  §  134,  Obs.  6,  3d. 

'  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  n  §  136,  Obs.  5,(ab.)  v  §  126,  R.  Ill 

g§129,  R.  «     110,5. 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  IX.  59 

dent,  perf icit :   ^  Sequani,^ne  itinere  Helvetios  prohibeant ;'' 
"*  Helve.tii,  ut#ine  maleficio  et  injuria  transeant.*" 

10.  ^  Cassari  renunciatur^  Helvetiis*"  esse  in  animo,  per 
agrum  Sequanorum  et  jiEdiiorum  iter  in  Santonum  fines 
facere,  qui  non  longe  a  Tolosatium  finibus  absunt,  qus3  civi- 
tas  est  in  Provincia.  Id  si  fieret,'^  ^intelligebat  magno  cum 
Provinciae  periculo  futurum,*  ut  homines  bellicosos,  Populi 
Romani  inimicos/  locis  ^  patentibus  maximeque  frumentariis 
finitimos  haberet.''     Ob  eas  causas  ei  munitioni/  quam  fe- 

gA.iCerat,  Tituni  Labienum  legatura  prcefecit :  ipse  in  Italiatn 
'»  magnis  itineribus  contendit,  daasque  ibi  legiones  conscrlbit, 
et  tres,  qu^  circum  Aquileiam  hiemabant,  ex  liibernis  edu- 
cit ;  et,  qua^proximum  iter  in  ulteriorem  Galliam  per  Alpes 
erat,  cum  his  quinque  legionibus  ire  contendit.  Ibi  Gen- 
trones,  et  Graioceli,  et  Caturiges,  locis  superioribus  occupa- 
tis,*"  itinere'  exercitum  prohibere  conantur.  Compluribus 
his  prceliis  pulsis,""  ab  Ocelo,  ^quod  est  citerioris  Provincial? 
extremuni,  in  fines  Vocontiorum  ulterioris  Provinciae  die 
septimo  ^  pervenit ;  inde  in  AUobrogum  fines  :  ab  Aliobro- 
gibus  in  Segusianos  exercitum  ducit.  Hi  sunt  extra  Provin- 
ciam  trans  Rhodanum  primi." 

11.  Helvetii  jam  per  angustias  et  fines  Sequanorum  suas 
copias  transduxerant,  et  in  iEduorum  fines  pervenerant, 
eorumque  agros  populabantur.  jEdui,  cum,  se°  suaque^  ab 
lis  defendere  non  possent,*!  legatos  ad  Csesarem  mittunt  '''ro- 
gatnm  '"  auxilium  :  "  ita  se  *  omni  tempore"'  de  Popiilo  Ro- 
mano meritos  esse,  ut  psene  in  conspectu  exercitus  nostri 
agri  vastari,  liberi  eorum  in  servitutem  abduci,  oppida  ex- 


^  §  140,  1,  2d. 

h     100,  Obs.  14. 

"     31. 

b     51,  2. 

■  §  123,  R. 

p     19,  (negotia.) 

c§  112,11.  11. 

k     104,  2. 

q  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

■d§  140,2. 

i  §  136,Obs.  5,  (in.) 

r       114,   1. 

«§  47,  Note  1. 

"§  131,  R.  XL. 

»  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  & 

f  §  97,  R. 

n     19,  (populi.) 

94,4. 

«§  111,  R. 

b 


60  DE    i5ELL0    GALLICO. 

pugiiari  not!  debuerint.'"'  Eodem  tempore  iEdui  Ambarri, 
1  necessarii  ^  et  consanguinei  iEduorum,  Cassarem  certiorem 
faciunt,  sese,*"  depopulatis  agris,'^  non  facile  ab  oppidis  vim 
hostium  prohibere :  item  Allobroges,  qui  trans  Rhodanum 
vicos  possessionesque  habebant,  fuga  se  ad  Csesarem  recipi- 
unt,  et  demonstrant,  ^sibi**  prseter  agri  solum  nihiP  esse 
reliqui/  Quibus^  rebus'*  adductus  Cassar,  non  expectan- 
dum''  sibi'  statuit,  dum,  omnibus  fortunis'^  sociorum  con- 
sumtis,  in  Santo nos  Helvetii  pervenirent. 

12.  3  Flumen  ^  est  Arar,  quod  per  fines  iEduorum  et  Se- 
quanorum  in  Rbodanum  infiuit,  ^  incredibili  lenitate,^  ita  ut 
ociilis,''  sin  utram  partem  fluat,'  judicari  non  possit.*  ^Id 
Helvetii  ratibus*"  ac  lintribus''  junctis  transibant.  Ubi  per 
exploratores  Ceesar  certior'"  factus  est,  tres  jam  copiarum 
partes"  Helvetios''  id  flumen"  transduxisse,"  quartam  vero 
partem"^  citra  flumen  Ararim  reliquam""  esse;  '^  de  tertia  vi- 
gilia  cum  legionibus  tribus  e  castris  profectus,  ad  eam  par- 
tem pervenit,  qu^  nondum  flumen  ^  transierat.  Eos  ^  im- 
peditos  et  inopinantes  aggressus,  magnam  eorum  partem 
concldit :  reliqui  fugss''  sese  mandarunt  atque  ^in  proximas^- 
sylvas  abdiderunt.  Is  pagus  appellabatur  Tigurinus  :  "^ 
nam  omnis  civitas  Helvetia  in  quatuor  pagos  divlsa  est.  Hie 
pagus  unuSjCum  domo""  exisset,®  patrum  nostrorum  memorial 
Lucium  Cassium  Consulem  interfecerat,  et  ejus  exercitum 
sub  jugum  miserat.  Ita,  sive"  casu,''  sive  consilio  Deorum 
immortalium,  quas^  pars  civitatis  Helvetian  insigncm  calami- 
tatem  Poptilo '^  Romano  intulerat,  ea  ^^  pi-^n^epg  ^v  p^gj^g^g 
persolvit.     Qua^  in  re  Caesar  non  solum  publicas,  sed  etiam 

'"^1140,  iTlst.  i  §  147,  &  113.  'I  §  123,  R. 

b  §  97,  R.  k  §  103,  R.  V.  »•  §  130,  4> 

c  §  145,  R.  LVIII.        1  §  140,  5.  «  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

d     109,  2.  "^§  103,  Obs.  2.  *  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (in.) 

e§  112.  R.  II.  n      119,  1.  "i      124,  6. 

f§106,  R.  VI.  o     98,2.  V     43^  Sc  37,  2d.  4. 

e     38.  P  §  136.  R.  LII.  ^-§  98,  Obs.  10. 


^  §  129,  R. 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  XIV.  61 

privatas  injurias  ultus  est,  quod  ejus  soceri  Lucii  Pisonis* 
avum,  Lucium  Pisoiiem  legatum,*  Tigurmi  eodem  proelio,^ 
quo  ^  Cassium,  ^  interfecerant. 

13.  Hoc  proelio  facto,  relfquas  copias  Helvetiorum  utscoii- 
sequi  posset,*^ ^pontem  in  Arare  faciendum'^  curat  atque  ita 
exercitum  transducit.  Helvetii,  repentlno  ejus  adventu* 
commoti,  cum  id,  quod  ipsi  di^bus  ^  viginti  segerrime  con- 
fecerapt,  ut  flumen  transirent,^  uno  ilium  die  ^  fecisse  intel- 
ligerent,"  legates  ad  eum  mittunt :  cujus  '  legationis  Divico 
princeps  fuit,  qui  bello  ^  ^Cassiano  dux  Helvetiorum  fuerat. 
Is%a  cum  Csesare  agit :  "  Si  pacem  Populus  Romanus  cum 
Helvetiis  faceret,^  in  earn  partem  ituros '  atque  ibi  futures  ^ 
Helvetios,"'  ubi  eos  Caesar  constituisset ^  atque  esse"  volu- 
isset :  ^  sin  bello  "^  persequi  perseveraret,''  reminisceretur  " 
et^veteris  incommodi  p  Popiili  Romani  et  pristmsB  virtutis  p 
Helvetiorum.  Quod  improviso  unum  pagum  adortus  esset,* 
cum  ii,  qui  flumen  transissent,^  suis  '•  auxilium  ferre  non 
possent,''  ne  ob  eam  rem  aut  sues  magno  opere  virtuti'^'^tri- 
bueret"  aut"  ipsos  despiceret :  se"  ita  a  pat ri bus  tnajoribus- 
que  suis  didicisse,  ut  magis  virtute,^  quam  dolo  *  aut  insidiis, 
niterentur/  ^Quare  ne  committeret,"  ut  is  locus,  ubi  consti- 
tissent,*^  ex  calamitate  Popiili  Romani  et  internecione  exer- 
citus  nomen  caperet,^  aut ""  memoriam  proderet." 

14.  ^His  Caesar  ita  respondit :  "  Eo  sibi"^  minus  "'  dubita- 
tionis  *  dari,  quod  eas  res,  quas  legati  Helvetii  commemo- 
r&«!seni,8  memoria  teneret :  "^  atque  eo  "  gravius  ferre,  quo  " 
minus  merito^  Populi  Romani  accidissent;  lOqui^  si  alicujus 

='§  97,  R.  ■  i     38.  "  r  §  149^  r. 

«>  §  136,  Obs.  5,  <i^.)  k  §  140,  2.  «§120,  Obs.  1. 

«=  §  140,  1,  2d.  1  §  47,  4,  Note  1.  <  §  140,  1,  3d. 

*     108,  4.  1-^.5  145,  R.  LVIII.        «  §  126,  R  III. 

.  «  §^  129.  R.  n     t^O  V  §  106,  R.  VIII. 

f  #  131.  R.  XLI.  o  §  140,  i,qd,&  Obs.  5.  ^^§  140,  6. 

s§141,  Obs.  8.  P§  108,R.XIV.&7, 1.^     22,  4,  or  44,  7. 

I' §  140.  Obs.  4.  q  §  123.  R.  &,  19.  y     39. 

6 


62  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

injuriag  sibi''  conscius  fuisset,''  i  non  faisse  °  difficile  ^  cavere, 
2sed  eo  deceptum,^  quod  neque  commissum  a  se  iutellige- 
ret/'  quare  timeret ;  *"  neque  sine  caus&  s  timendum  *f  putaret. 
4 Quod  si  veteris  contumelice^  oblivisci  vellet;  ^num'  etiam 
recentium  injuriarum,  quod  eo  *"  invito  iter  per  Provinciam 
per  vim  tentassent/  quod  jEduos,  quod  Ambarros,  quod  Al- 
lobrogas  vexassent/  memoriam  deponere  posse  ?  Qu6d  sua 
victoria  tam  insolenter  gloriarentur/  quodque  tarn  diu  se  im- 
pun6  tulisse  injurias  admirarentur/  eodem  ^  pertinere :  *"  * 
cons  u  esse  enim  Deos'  immortales,  quo  gravius  homines  ex  ^ 
commutatione  rerum  doleant,""  quospro  scelere  eorum  ulcisci 
velint,"  his  °  "^  secundiores  interd'um  res  et  diuturniOrem  im- 
punitatem  concedere.^  ^  Cum  ea  ita  sint,''  tamen,  si  obsides 
ab  iis  sibi  "■  dentur,''  uti  ea,  quae  polliceafitur,"  facturos  in- 
telligat,*  et  si  iEduis'  de  injuriis,  quas  ipsis"  sociisque  eo- 
rum intulerint,"  item  si  Allobrogibus  *  satisfaciant,''  sese' 
cum  iis  pacem  esse  facturum."  Divico  respondit :  "Ita 
Helvetios  a  majoribus "  suis  institutes  esse,  ut\  obsides  acr 
cipere,  noij  dare,  consuerint :  "'  ejus'rei  Populum  Romanum' 
esse  ^testem."     Hoc  response  dato,  discessit. 

15.  Postero  die ""  castra  ex  eo  loco  movent :  idem  facit 
CfEsar;  cquitatumque  omnem,  ad  numerum  quatuor  milli- 
um,  quem  ex  omni  Provincia  et  jEduis  atque  eorum  SQciis 
coactum '"  habebat,  prasmittit,  qui  videant,"-  quas  in  partes 
hostes  iter  faciant.^    Qui,^  lo  cupidius  ^"^  novissiirium  agmen 


^§111,R.  ^     110,5.  ^§140,  1,  2(, 

b  §  140,  2.  »  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  *  §  112,  J^.'ltll. 

c  §  51,  5.  *»§  140,  1.  "  §  l^Obs.  2. 

d  §  98,  Obs.  6.  n  §  141,  Obs.  8.  v><f^l,  R.  XL. 

e§47,  6.  o§i23,  R.    .  ^^'§  146,  R.  LIX. 

f  §  140,  6.  P  §  144,  R.  LVD-^  '^  §  1^1,  R.  II. 

g     113,  8,  (sibL)  q  §  140,  Obs^-ff  &  ^  §  140,  5. 

h  §  108,  R.  XIV.  &  7A,y^  ^     39.  5. 

7,  1.  r  §;o6.  R.  III.  ^^    22,  3. 


56,  3. 


LTB.  1.    CAP.  XVI.  63 

insectiti,  alicno  loco  cum  equitatu  Helvetioruni  proelium 
committunt ;  et  pauci  de  nostris  cadunt.  Quo  prcelio  sub- 
lati  Helvetii,  quod  quingentis''  equitibus  tantam  multitudi- 
nem  equitum  propuierant,  audacius  subsistere,  nonnunquam 
ex  1  novissimo  agmine  prcelio  *  nostros "  lacessere,  coeperunt. 
Cassar  suos  ^  a  pro&lio  continebat,  ac  2  satis  habebat  in  prs- 
sentia  hostem  raplnis,*^  pabulatiombus,*"  populationibusque, 
prohibere.  Ita  dies*^  circiter  quindecim  iter  fecerunt,  uti 
inter  novissimum  hostium  agnien  et  ^nostrumprimurn^  non 
amplius  ^  quinis  ^  aut  senis  millTbus  ^  passuum  interesset. 

16.  5  Interim  quotidie  Caesar  iEduos '^  frumentum,^  quod 
assent '  publioe  polliciti,  flagitare  :  ^  nam  propter  ^  frigora, 
quod  Gallia  ^  sub  septentriombus,  ut  ante  dictum  est,  posita 
est,  non  modo  frumenta  in  agris  matura  non  erant,  sed  ne 
pabiili  quidem'  satis  magna  copia  suppetebat :  eo  autem 
sfrumento,"'  quod  flumine ""  Arare  navibus '^  subvexerat, 
propterea  uti  minus  poterat,  quod  iter  ab  Arare  Helvetii 
avertefant,  a  quibus  discedere  noiebat.  Diem  ex  die  du- 
cere''  iEdui ;  ^  confenri,"  comportari,  adesse  dicerc."  Ubi 
10  se  diuti^s  duci  °  intellexit,  et  diern  instare,"  quo  die  p  fru- 
mentum  militibus  metiri  oporteret ;  "^  convocatis  eorum  prin- 
cipibus,  quorum  raagnara  copiam  in  castris  habebat,  in  his 
Divitiaco  ""  et  Lisco,  ^^  qui  summo  magistratu  *  priserat  (quern 
Ye'rgobretum  appellant  ^dui,  qui  creatur  annuus,"^  et  vitce 
necisque  in  suos  habct  potcstatem,)  graviter  cos  accusat, 
quod,  cum  neque  emi,"  neque  ex  agris  sumi  posset,"  tarn 
necessario  tempore,  tampropinquis  hostrbus,  ab  iis  non  sub- 
levetur;"*    prsesertim  cum   mapna    ex    parte    eorum    precT- 

'  »  §  129,  R.  r§uiobs.  8.  q  §  113,  Exc.  III. 

^  19,  (milinbus.)  ^  §  144,  Obs.  6.  '  ^  §  97,  R. 

<^§  13G;Obs.5,  (cf6.)  '      121,  Note  2.  =§112,  R.I. 

d  §  331,  R.  XLI.  >'  §  121,  R.  XXVI.  t  5  98,  Obs.  10. 

.    e  If),  (a;j,7)c:;.)  "  §  144,  R.  LVII.  "     87. 

f  '  24.  II.  ^'.  20,  1.  "      9fi,  6.^  V  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

s§  i20,  n.  .V     37,  Xc*   1,6.  --^  §  141,  Obs.  7. 


64  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

bus*  adductus  bellum  susceperit :  ^  multo*^  etiam  gravius, 
quod  sit  destitutus,*^  queritur. 

17.  Turn  demum  Liscus,  oratione''  Ccesaris  adductus, 
quod*'  antea  ^  tacuerat,  proponit :  "Esse  nonnullos,  quorum 
auctoritas  apud  plebem  2  plurimum  valeat ;  ^  qui  ^  privati 
plus  possint,  quam  ipsi  magistratus.  Hos  seditiosa  atque 
improba  oratione''  multitudinem  deterrere,  ne  frumentum 
conferant/  quod  prasstare  debeant/  Si  jam  principatum 
Gallic  obtinere  non  possint,''  Gallorum,  quam  Romanorum 
imperia  perferre,  satiilis  esse ;  neque  dubitare  debere,  quin, 
si  Helvetios  superaverint  "^  Romani,  una  cum  reliqua  Gallia 
iEduis '  libertatem  sint  erepturi.''  Ab  iisdem  nostra  con- 
silia,  qUfEque  in  castris  gerantur/  hostibus  ""  enunciari :  hos 
a  se  coerceri  non  posse.  Quin  etiam,  quod  4  necessario  rem 
coactus  Ca3sari'  enunciarit,'  intelligere  sese,  quanto  id  cum 
periculo  fecerit,"  et  ob  eam  causam,  quam  diu  potuerit,'  ta- 
cuisse." 

18.  Cessar  hac  oratione  *  Lisci  Dumnorigem,  Divitiaci 
fratrem,"  ^designari  sentiebat:  sed,  quod^pluribus''  prae- 
sentibus  eas  res  jactari  nolebat,  celeriter  concilium  dimittit, 
Liscum  retinet :  quoerit  ex  "^  solo  ea,  quce  in  conventu  dixe- 
rat.  Dicit  liberius  atque  audacii'is.  Eadem  secreto  ab  aliis 
quaerit ;  reperit  esse  vera.  "  Ipsum  esse  Dumnorigem,  sujii- 
ma  audacia,'!  magna  apudffplebem  propter  liberalitatem  gra- 
tia,'' cupidum  rerum  "■  novarum:  complures  annos^  portoria, 
reliquaque  omnia  ^duorum  vectigalia,  parvo  pretio  ^redem- 
ta  ^-liabere,  propterea  quod,  illo  licente,*"  contra  liceri  audeat ' 

^  §  129,  R.     .  •  '>  §  140,  2.  "  §  97,  R. 

»>§  140,Obs.4.&74.  i  §  123,  R.  p  §  146,  R.  LX.  &  9 

c§132,  Obs.  6.  k§  45,  i^&§  140,3.  q  §  107,R.VII.&6, 1 

d  §  141,  Obs.  7.  J  §  140,  6.  r  §  107,  R.  IX. 

e     37,2.  n.§i26.R.  III.  •§131,R.  XLI. 

t  f  §  140,  1,  3d,  &  77.  »  §  14(^5,  &74,  2d.  t  ^s  U6,  Obs.  1. 
^^«  §  141,  Obs.  8. 


^ 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  XIX.  .  '  65 


nemo.  His  rebus''  et  suara  rem  familiarem  auxisse,  et^facul- 
tatesadlargiendum  magnas  comparasse  :^  magnum numerum 
equitatus  suo  sumtu''  semper  alere**  et  circum  se  habere :  **  ne- 
que  soliim  domi,^  sed  etiam  apud  finitimas  civitates  largiter 
posse:  atque  hujus  potentias  causa  matrem  in  Biturigibus, 
homini^  iilic  nobilissimo,^  ac  potentissimo,  2  collocasse :  "^  ip- 
sura  ex  Helvetiis  uxorem  habere  :  ^  sororem  ex  matre  et  pro- 
pinquas  suas  nuptum"^  in  alias  civitates  collocasse  :*'  favere 
et  3  cupere  Helvetiis '  propter  eam  afFmitatem  :  odisse  etiam 
suo  nomine''  Caesarem  et  Romanos,  quod  eorum  adventu'' 
potentia  ejus  diminuta,''  etDivitiiicus  frater  in  anliqutim  lo- 
cum gratia?  atque  honoris  sit  restitutus."  •^Si  quid  accidat ' 
Romanis,"'  sumrnam  in  spem  per  Helvetios  regni  obtinendi" 
venire ;  iniperio  °  Populi  Romani  non  modo  de  regno,  sed 
etiam  de  ea,  quam  habeat,''  gratia  desperare.*^  Reperiebat 
etiam  ^  ii^q^iirendo  •'  Caesar,  quod  prcElium  equestre  adver- 
sum  paucis  ante  dieb«us ''  esset  factum,  initium  ejus  fugas 
factum  a  Dumnor^e  atque  ejus  equitibus  "  (nam  ^  equitatu,' 
quem  auxilio*  Cs3sari  *  iEdui  miserant,Dumn6rix  praserat), 
"  e5rum  fuga  reliquum  esse  equitatum  perterritum." 

19.  Quibus  ^  rebus  cognltis,  cum  ad  has  suspiciones  '^  cer- 
tissimsB  res  accederent,"  quud  per  fines  Sequanorum  Helve- 
tios transduxisset,"*  quod  obsides  inter  eos  dandos  curasset,*^ 
quod  ea  omnia  non  modo^injussu  suo ''  et  civitatis,  sed  etiam 
inscientibus  ipsis  fecisset,''  quod  a  magistratu  iEduorum  ac- 
cusaretur  :  satis  esse  causa3 '"  arbitrabatur,  quare  in  eum  aut 
ipse  animadverteret,''  aut  civitatem  animadvertere  juberet/ 

^§  129,  R.  i  §  112,  R.  V.  '§  112,  R,  I. 

^     98,  2,  &  94,  1,  2d.  "§140,6.  »  §  114,  R. 

c§  133,  R.  I  §  140,  2.  t      38,  3. 

d     96,  2,  &94,  1,  2d.  "'§"112,  R.  IV.  «  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

■     «§  130,  4.  n     112,  5.  V     29,  1. 

f  §  123,  R  0  §  136,  q|s.  5.  (sub)     ^^§  135,  R.  XLVI. 

^     24,  1.  p  §  147,  (I)s.  5.  ^  §  140,  5. 

h§  148,  Obs.  2.  «!§  131,  R.  XL. 


66  BE  BfiJ.LO  GAIrLlCO.  ^ 

His  omnibus  rebus  '^  unum  repugnabat,  quodDivitiaci  fratris 
summum  in  Populum  Eomanum  studium,  summam  in  se 
Woiuntateni)  egregiam  fidem,  justitiam,  temperantiam  cog- 
noverat:  nam,  ne''  ejus  suppiicio '^  Divitiaci  animum  offen- 
deret/  verebatur.  Itaque  priusquani  quicquam  conaretur,^ 
Divitiacum  ad  se  yocari  *^  jubetjet,  quotidianis  interpretibus 
rem  Otis,  per  Caium  Valerium  Procillum,  principem  Galliae 
provinciee,  familiarem  ^  suum,cui''  summam  omnium  rerum 
fidem  habebat,  cum  eo  colloquitur:  simul  2  commonef acit, 
quae  ipso  praesente  in  concilio  Gallorum  de  Dumnorige  sint' 
dicta,  et  ^ostendit,  qusB  separatim  quisque  de  eo  apud  se 
dixerit,'  petit. atque  hortatur,  lit  sine  ejus  offensione  animi 
veP  ipse  de  eo,  ^  causa  cognita,  statuat,^  vel  civitatem  statu- 
ere  jubeat.' 

20.  Divitiacus  multis  cum  lacrymis,  Csssarera  complexus, 
obsecrare  ccepit,  ^ne  quid  gravius"*  in  fratrem  statueret:' 
scire  se,  ilia  esse  vera,  nee  quenquam  ex  eo  plus,  quam 
se,  doldris  "  capere,  propterea  quod,  cum  ^  ipse  gratia  pluri- 
mum  domi  atque  in  reliqua  Gallia,  "^  ille  minimum  propter 
adolescentiam  posset,  per  se  crevisset;  quibus"  opibus^  ac 
nervis,  non  solum  ad  minuendam"*  gratiam,  sed  peene  ad 
perniciem  suam  uteretur  :  sese  tamen  et  amore  ^  fraterno 
et  existiraatione  vulgi  commoveri>  Qui)d  si  quid  "^ei'"  a 
Csesare  gravius  *"  accidisset,''  ciim  ^ipse  eum  locum  amiei- 
tia3  apud  eum  teneret,  neminem  existimaturum,^  non  sud 
voluntate  factum  ;  qua  ex  re  futurum,"  uli  totius  Gallia?,  ani- 
mi a  se  averterentur."  Haec  cum  pluribus  verbis  ilens  a 
CaBsare  peteret,""  Cajsar   ejus  dextram  prendit ;  consolatus 

»  §  112,  R.  V.  !>  §  123,  R.  P  §  121,  R;XX.  VI. 

b§  140,  Obs.  6.  i  §  140,5.  n     112,7. 

«§129,  R.  ^     124,3.  r§ii2,  R.  IV. 

d  §  140,  1.  •  §  140,  1,  3d  ^  §  140,  2,  &  80,  2. 

e  §  140,  4.  «    22.  §  '     100,  2. 

f     90,  4.  »  §  106,%.  Vin.  "     51. 

s  §  97,  R.  ^     38.  ^-     74,  1st,  a 


LIB.    I.    CAP.  XXII,  67 

rogat,  finem  orandi  facial:''  tanti''  ejus  apud  se  gratiam, 
esse  ostendit,  uti  et  reipublicas  injuriam  et  suum  dolorem 
ejus  voluntati  ac  precibus  condonet,''  Dumnorigem  ad  se 
vocat ;  fratrem  ^  adhibet ;  quae  in  eo  reprebendat,'*  ostendit ; 
quae  ipse  inteiligat,'^  quse  civitas  queratur/  proponit ;  monet, 
lit  in  reliquum  tempus  omnes  suspiciones  vitet ;  *  prseterita  ^ 
se  2  Divitiaco  ^  fratri  condonare  dicit.  Dumnorigi  ^  ^  custo- 
des  ponit,  ut,  quse  agat/  quibuscum  loquatur,'^  scire  possit.'' 

21.  Eodem  die  ab  exploratoribus  certior  factus,  hostes 
sub  monte  *  consedisse  '  millia^  passuum  ab  ipsius  castria 
octo  ;  qualis  esset  *^  natura  montis  et  qualis  in  circuitu  ascen- 
sus,  qui  cognoscerent,^  misit.  Renunciatum  est,  ^facileni 
esse,"'  De  tertia  ^vigilia,  Titum  Labienum,  "^legatum  pro 
Sprsetore,  cum  duabus  legionibus,  ^  et  iis  ducibus,  qui  iter 
cognoverant,  summum  jugum  montis  ascendere  jabet ;  quid 
sui  consilii  sit/  ostendit.  Ipse  de  quarta  vigilia  eodem  itin- 
ere,  quo  hostes  ierant,  ad  eos  contendit,  equitatumque  om- 
nem  ante  se  mittit,  Publius  Considius,  qui  rei  militaris  " 
peritissimus  habebatur,  et  in  exercitu  Lucii  Sullae,  et  postea 
*<*in  Marci  Crassi  fuerat,  cum  exploratoribus  prsemittitur. 

22.  11  Prima  luce,"  ciim  summus  ^  mons  a  Tito  Labieno 
teneretur,'^  ^2  ipse  ab  hostium  castris  non  longias  mille  et 
quingentis  passibus  abesset,''  neque,  ut  postea  ex  captivis 
comperit,  aut  ipsius  adventus,  aut  Labieni,  cognitus  esset;*" 
Considius,  i3  equo  *■  admisso,  ad  eum  accurrit :  dicit,  mon- 
tem,  quern  a  Labieno  occupari  voluerit,  ab  hostibus  teneri ;" 
id  se  a  Gallicis  armis  ^  atque  insignibus  cognovisse."     Cas- 


*§  140,  1,   3(i,  & 

g  §  123,  R. 

»§  131,  R.  XL. 

Obs.  5. 

"  §  140, 1.  2d. 

P§  98,Obs.  9,8c  17,2. 

»>§  106,  R.VII.  or 

i      98,2. 

n  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

§  122,  R.  XXVIII. 

k  §  132,  R.  XLII. 

r  §  146,  R.  LX. 

c  §  140,  1,  1st. 

>  §  141,  R.  11.  Obs. 

«     96,  6,  &  94,  1,  2d, 

d  §  140,  5,  &  74,  9, 

2,  4th. 

t  §  129,  Obs.  2. 

«=  §  140,  1,  3d. 

™    96,6.    ' 

«     98,  2,  &  94,  1,  2d. 

'      19. 

«  §  107,  R.  IX 

68  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

sar  suas  copias  in  proximum  collern  subdticit,''  aciem  in- 
struit.''  Labienus,  iit  erat  ei  ^  prceceptum  '^  a  Cassare  ne 
proelium  committeret,'^  nisi  ipsius  copiae  prope  hoslium  cas- 
tra  ^  visas  essent/  ut  undique  uno  tempore  in  hostes  impetus 
fieretjS  monte  occupato  nostros  expectabat  proBlioque  abstin- 
ebat.  "1  Multo  denique  die  per  exploratores  Caesar  cogno- 
vit, et  montem  a  suis  teneri,''  et  Helvetios  castra  movisse/ 
et  Considium,  timore  perterritum,  quod  non  vidisset/  2 pro 
viso  sibi  renunciasse.'  Eo  die,  ^quo''  consuerat  intervalio, 
hostes  sequitur,  et  millia  passuum  tria,  ab  eorum  castris 
castra  ponit. 

23.  Postridie  ejus  diei,^  quod  omnino  biduum  supererat, 
ciim  ^exercitu  frumentum  metiri  oporteret,"*  et  quod  a  Bi- 
bracte,  oppido  iEduorum  longe  maxTmo  et  copiosissimo,  non 
amplius  millibus"  passuum  octodecim  aberat,  ^rei"  frumen- 
tariae  prospiciendum  ^  existim^vit,  iter  ab  Helvetiis  avertit, 
ac  Bibracte''  ire  contendit.  Ea  res  per  fugitivos  Lucii 
JEmilii,  ^decurionis  equitum  Gallorum,  hostibus''  nuncia- 
tur.  Helvetii,  seu,'  quod  timore  perterritos  Eomanos  '''  dis- 
cedSre  a  se  existimarent,^  eo  magis,  quod  pridie,  superiori- 
bus  locis  occupatis,"  proslium  non  commovissent;*  sive  eo, 
quod  re ^  frumentaria  intercludi  posse  ^confiderent;^  com-, 
mutato"  consilio  atque  itinere  converso,"  nostros  a  novissimo 
agmtne  insequi  ac  lacessere  cceperunt. 

24.  Postquam  id  ^ariimum  advertit,  copias  suas  Cassar 
in  proximum  coUem  subducit,""  equitatumque,  ^^  qui  "sustin- 
eret^  hostium  impetum,  misit.    Ipse  interim  in  colle  medio'' 

=^§  44,  I.  3.  i      98,  2.  i§  130,  2. 

^  §  126.  R.  III.  k      37,2d.4,&Note  1.     >•     124,  6. 

c     51.  1  §  135,  R.  XL VI.  «  §  140.  Obs.  2. 

d  §  140,l,3d,&  121,3.  «'§  140,  Obs.  4.  &  t  §  136,  Obs.  5,(ab.) 

e  §  136,  Obs.  5.  (ad^)        §  113,  Exc.  III.  ^     104,  1. 

f  §  141,  Obs.  8.  "  §  120,  R.  &  6.  3.  v  §  141^  Qbs.  2.  4th 

g  §  140,  1,  2d.  °  §  112,  R.  V.  w§  98,  Obs.  9,  &  17 

^     96,  6.  P     113. 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  XXV.  D9 

triplicem  aciem  instruxit  legionum  quatuor  veteranHrum, 
ita,  uti  supra  se  in  summo  jugo  duas  legiones,  quas  in 
^  Gallia  citeriore  proxime  conscripserat,  et  omnia  auxilia  col- 
locaret ;  ac  totum  raonteni  hominibus ""  2  compleri,''  et  interea 
sarcinas  in  unum  locum  conferri,''  et  ^  eum  ab  his,  qui  in  su- 
periOre  acie  constiterant,  muniri''  jussit.  Helvetii,  cum  om- 
nibus suis  carris  sectiti,  impedimenta  in  unum  locum  contu- 
lerunt:  ipsi,  ^  confertissima  #cie,'=  rejecto '^  nostro  equitatu, 
phalange  facta/  ^sub  primam  nostram  aciem  successerunt. 
^5.  Cassar,  primum  ^suo,  deinde  omnium  ex  conspectu 
remotis  '^  equis,  ut,  aequjlto  omnium  "^  perictilo,  spem  fugse 
toUeret,  cohortatus  suos,  proelium  commisit.  Milites,  e  loco 
superiore  pilis  missis,*^  facile  hostium  phalangem  perfrege- 
ruiit.  Ea  disjecta,*  gladiis*"  destrictis  in  eos  impetum 
fecerunt.  Gallis^  magno  ad  pugnam  erat^impedimento,*^ 
quod,  pluribus  eorum  ^scutis*  uno  ictu  pilorum  transfixis 
et  colligatis,  ci!im  ferrum  se  inflexisset,'  neque  evellere,  ne- 
que,  sinistra  impedita,*  satis  ^  commode  pugnare  poterant; 
multi  ut,  diu  jactato  brachio,  prseoptarent '^  scutum  manu^ 
emittere,  et  ^Onudo  corpore  ^  pugnare.  Tandem  vulneribus 
defessi,  et  "  pedem  referre,  et  quod  mons  suberat  circiter 
mille  passuum,  eo  se^recipere  coeperunt.  Capto  monte*  et 
SLiccedentibus  nostris,*  Boii  et  Tulingi,  qui  hominum  milli- 
bus*"  circiter  quindecim  i^agmen  hostium  claudebant,  et  no- 
vissTmis  ^  prassidio  erant,  ex  itinere  nostros  latere  "'  aperto 
aggressi,  circumvenere :  et  id  conspicati  Helvetii,  qui  in 
montem  sese  receperant,  rursus  instare  et  proelium  redinte- 
grare  coeperunt.  Komani  conversa  signa  i3  bipartito  intulg- 
runt :  prima,  ac  secunda  acies,  ut  victis  ac  summotis  resis- 
teret ;  "  tertia,  ut  venientes  exciperet." 


^  §  126,  R.  V. 

f  §  129,  R. 

k§  140,1,  1st.  (ita.) 

^     94,3. 

s§  114,  R.  &8,  1. 

1  §  136,  R.  LII. 

«=  §  129,  R. 

h     51,  1. 

««§  136,  Obs.  5,  (ab) 

•J     104,  1. 

i  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

n§  140,  l,2d. 

•      109. 

70  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

26.  Ita  1  ancipiti  proelio"  diu  atque  acriter  pugnatum  est.*" 
Diutius  ctLUi  nostrorum  impetus  sustinere  non  possent,''  2 al- 
ter! ^  se,  ut  coeperant,  in  montem  receperunt ;  alteri  '^  ad  im- 
pedimenta et  carros  suos  se  contulemnt.  Nam  hoc  toto 
proelio,^  cum  ab  ^hora  septima  ad  vesperum  pugnatum  sit,'' 
■^aversum  hostem  videre  nemo  potuit.  ^  Ad  multam  noctem 
etiam  ad  impedimenta  pugnatum  est,  propterea  quod  pro 
vallo  carros  objecerant,  et  e  loco  superiore  in  nostros  '^'^eni- 
ente^tela  conjiciebant,^  et  nonnulli,  inter  carros  rotasque, 
*mataras  ac  tragiilas  subjiciebant  ^  nostrosque  vulnerabant.^ 
Diu  cum  esset  pugnatum,  impedimentis  ^  castrisque  nostri 
potiti  sunt.  Ibi  Orgetorigis  filia,  atque  unus  e  filiis'  captus 
est.  Ex  eo  proelio  circiter  millia  hominum  centum  et  tri- 
ginta  superfuerunt,  eaque  tota  nocte  ^  continenter  ierunt : 
nullam  parten^  noctis  itinere  intermisso,  in  fines  Lingonum 
die  quarto *"  pervenerunt,  cum,  et'  propter  vulnera  militum, 
et  propter  sepulturam  occisorum,^  nostri,  triduum  ^  morati, 
eos  sequi  non  potuissent.*"  Csesar  ad  Lingonas  literas  nun- 
ciosque  misit,  rie  eos  frumento,  neve  alia  re  juvarent :""  "^  qui 
si  juvissent,"  ^se  eodem  loco,  quo  Helvetios,habiturum.  Ipse, 
triduo  intermisso,  cum  omnibus  copiis  eos  sequi  coepit. 

27.  Helvetii  omnium  rerum  inopia  adducti,  legatos  de 
deditione  ad  eum  miserunt.  ^Qui,°  cT!im  eum  in  itinere  con- 
venissent,"  seque  ad  pedes  projecissent,  suppliciterque  loeuti 
flentes  pacem  petissent,  atque  eos  p  in  eo  loco,  quo  tum  es- 
sent,*^  suum  adventum  expectare  "■  jussisset,  paruerunt.  Eo 
postquan*  Csesar  pervenit,  obsides,  arma,  servos^  qui  ad  eos 
perfugissent,*  poposcit.     Dum  ea  conquiruntur,  et  conferun- 

a  §  129,  R.  s  §  44,  II,  2.  «-§  140,  2. 

b     65,5.  h§  121,  R.  XXVI.  o     39^5. 

c  §  140,  Obs.  4.  •  §  107,  Obs.  8.  p  §  145,  R.  LVIII. 

d     27,  Obs.  10.  t  §  131^  R.  XL.  q  §  141,  Obs.  8. 

« §  131,  R.  XLI.  &       1      124,  1.  r     94^  3. 

Exp.  '»§  140,  1,  3d.  s§  141,  R.  I. 


19,  (jnilUes.) 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  XXIX.  '    .    «  71 

tur,  nocte  intermissa,  circTter  hommum  millia  sex  ejus  pagi, 
qui  Verbigenus ''  appellatur  sive  timore  pertemti,  ne,  armis 
traditis,  supplicio  afficerentur,^  sive  spe  salutis  inducti,  quod, 
in  tanta  multitudine  dedititiorum,  suam  fugam "  aut  i  oc- 
cultari,'^  aut  ^omnlno  ignorari  posse  existimarent,^  Sprim^f 
nocte  ex  castris  Helvetiorum  egressi,  ad  Rhenum  finesque 
Germanorum  contenderunt. 

28.  Quod  s  ubi  Cassar  resciit,  4  quorum  per  fines  ierant, 
his,**  uti  conquirerent '  et  reducerent,  si  sibi  purgati  ^  esse 
vellent,*' imperavit :  reductos'  in  hostium  numero^  habuit : 
reliquos  omnes,  obsidibus,  armis,  perfiigis  traditis,  in  dedi- 
tidnem  accepit.  Helvetios,  Tulingos,  Latobrigos  in  fines 
suos,  unde  erdnt  profecti,  reverti ""  jussit;  et  qu6d,  omnibus 
fruclibus  amissis,  domi "  nihil  erat,  quo  famem  tolerarent," 
Allobrogibas  •*  imperavit,  ut  iis^  frumenti  copiam  facerent:' 
^ipsos*"  oppida  vicosque,  quos  incenderant,  restituere  jussit. 
Id  ea  maxime  ratione  "•  fecit,  quod  noluit,  eum  locum,*"  unde 
Helvetii  discesserant,  ^  vacare  ;"*  ne  propter  bonitatem  agro- 
rum  Germani,  g^  trans  Rhenum  incolunt,  e  suis  finibus  in 
Helvetiorum  fines  transirent,*'  et  finitimi''  Gallias  provinciae  "■ 
Allobrogibusque  essent.  ^Boios,  petentibus  jEduis,*"  quod 
egregid  virtute*  erant  cogniti,  ut  in  finibus  suis  collocarent,' 
concessit :  quibus  ^  illi  agros  dederunt,  quosque  postea  in 
parem  juris  libertatisque  conditionem,  atque^  ipsi  erant,  re- 
ceperunt. 

29.  In  castris  Helvetiorum  9  tabulae  repertas  sunt,  ^o  Uteris 
Graecis  confectae  et  ad  Csesarem  relatas,  quibus  "  in  tabiilis 
nominatim  i^  ratio  confecta  erat,  qui  numerus  domo  exisset' 


*  §  103,  R.  V.  h     63.          *  P  §  123,  R. 

"§140,1.  i§140,  1,  3d.  «i§129,  R. 

<•  §  145,  R.  LVIII.        k  §  140,  2.  r  §  m,  R. 

1     87,  6.  1      19,  (eos.)  '  §  106,  R.  VII. 

«  §  141,  Obs.  7.  «n     94^  3.  t  §  149^  Obs.  6. 

f      17,  1.  '         "§130,4.  "     37.  Note  1.  6. 

5     38,  4.  o  §  141^  R.  I.  V  §  140.  5. 


72 


DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 


eorum,  qui  arma  ferre  possent :  *  et  item  separatim  pueri, 
senes,  mulieresque.  Quarum  ^  omnium  rerum  summa  erat.* 
1  capitum  Helvetiorum  millia""  ducenta  et  sexaginta  tria, 
Tulingorum  millia  triginta  sex,  Latobrigorum  quatuorde- 
cim,  Rauracorum  viginti  tria,  Boiorum  triginta  duo  :  ex  his, 
qui  arma  ferre  possent,''  ad  millia  nonaginta  duo.  Summa 
omnium  ^  fuerunt  ad  millia  trecenta  et  sexaginta  octo.  Eo-  ^ 
rum,  qui  domum  redierunt,  2  censu  ^  habito,  ut  Cassar  impe- 
raverat,  repertus  est  numerus  inillium  centum  et  decern. 

30.  Eello^  Helvetiorum  confecto,  totius  fere  Gallioe  lega- 
ti,  principes  civitatum,  ad  Csesarem^^ratulatum^  convene- 
runt:  intelligere  sese,^  tametsi,  ^pro^^^^eteribus  Helvetio- 
rum injuriis  Popiili  Romani,  ab  iis  poena^bello  repetisset,'' 
tamen  eam  rem^  non  mini\s  ex  usu  terrse  Qallice,  quam 
Popiiii  Romani  accidisse :  propterea  quod  eo  consilio,  floren- 
tissTmis  rebus,  domos  suas  Helvetii  reliquissent,  uti  toti  Gal- 
lioe' bellum  inferrent,^  imperioque  potirentur,*"  locumqufedo- 
micilio '  ex  magna  copia  deligerent,''  quern  ex  omni  Gallic 
opportunissimum  ac  fructuosissimum  judicdssent;'  reliquas- 
que  civitates  stipendiarias  haberent."  Petierunt,  "  utl  sibi '" 
concilium  totius  Gallite  in  diem  certam  indicere,  idque  Cse- 
saris  voluntate  facere,  liceret:"  sese^  habere  quasdavn  res, 
quas  "ex  commtini  consensu  ab  eo  petere  vellent.*'  Ea  re 
permissd,  diem  concilio^  constitugrunt,  et  jurejurando,  ^ne^ 
quis  eiiunciaret,"nisi  quibus*'  commtini  consilio  mandatum 
esset,    inter  se  sanxerunt. 

31.  Eo  concilio  dimisso,  iidem  principes  civitatum,  qui 
ante  fuerant  ad  Csesarem,  reverterunt,  petieruntque,  uti  sibi 
secreto  de  sua '  omniumque  salute  cum  eo  agere  liceret."* 


>  §  141,  Obs.  3. 

s  §  145,  R.  LVIII. 

»§  113,  R. 

f     38. 

h  §  140,  3. 

»  §  140,  1,  3d. 

«  §  24,  5. 

i  §  123,  R. 

0  §  141,  Obs.  8. 

i     19. 

k  §  140,  1.  2d. 

p     121. 

•     109,  2. 

«  §  114,  R.  & 

q  §  126,  R.  III. 

'     114, 

Obg.  4,  (sibi.) 

'     29,  1. 

LIB.  1.    CAP.  XXXI.  73 

Ea  re  impetrata,"  sese''  omnes  flentes  Caesari*^  ad  pedes  pro- 
jecerunt :'  ^non  minus  se  '^  id  contendere  et  laborare,  ne  ea, 
quas  dixissent,*  enunciarentur/  quam  uti  ea,  quee  vellent,* 
impetrarent/  propterea  quod,  si  enunciatum  esset,^  summum 
in  cruciatum  se  ventures  viderent.'""  Locutus  est  pro  his 
Divitiacus  JEduus  : '  "  Galliae  totius  factiones*  esse  duas: 
2  harum  alterius  principatum  tenere  JEduos,**  alterius  Arver- 
nos.  3  Hi  cum  tantopere  de  potentatu  inter  se  multos  annos 
contenderent,''  factum  esse'  uti  ab  Arvernis  Sequanisque 
Germani  mercede  arcesserentun*"  ^fJorum  primo  circiter 
millia  ^  quindecim  Rhenum  "  transisse  :  posteaquam  agros, 
et  cuitum,  et  ^  copias  Galiorum  homines  feri  ac  barbari  ad- 
amassenft'*  transductos  plures  :  ^  nunc  esse  in  Gallia  ad  cen- 
tum et  viginti  millium  numerum  :  cum  his  ^duos*^  eorum- 
que  clientes  semel  atque  iterum  armis  contend isse;**  mag- 
nam  calamitatem  pulsos  accepisse,"  omnem  nobilitatem,  om- 
nem  senatum,  omnem  equitatum  amisisse."  Quibus  ^  proe- 
liis  calamitatibusque  fractos,  qui  et  sua  virtute,  et  Popiili 
Romani  hospitio  atque  amicitia,  plurimum  ante  in  Gallia 
potuissent,*"  coactos  esse  Sequanis  obsides  dare,  nobilissimos 
civitatis,''  et  jurejurando  civitatem  obstringere,  sese  neque 
obsides  repetituros/  neque  auxilium  a  Populo  Romano  im- 
ploraturos/  ^  neque  recusaturos,""  quo  minimis  perpetuo  sub 
illorum  ditione  atque  imperio  essent.*  ^XJnum  se  esse  ex 
omni  civitate  jEduorum,  qui  adduci "'  non  potuerit,''  ut  jura- 
ret,"  aut  liberos  suos  obsides  daret.!*^  Ob  eam  rem  se  '^  ex 
civitate  profugisse,"  et  Romam''  ad  senatum  venisse,  aux- 
ilium* postulatum,  quod  solus  neque  jurejurando"  neque 


=^     109. 

i      94,  4. 

'     100,  2. 

^     31,  1. 

^  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

•  §  140,  a. 

c§  110,  Obs.  1,  &2. 

1      51,4. 

t     87. 

<i  §  145,  R.  LVIII. 

«»§  140,  1,4th. 

u  §  140,  1,  3d 

«§  141,  Obs.  8. 

"  §  136,  R.  LII. 

'  §  130,  2. 

f  §  140,  1,  2d. 

0     98,  2. 

^     114,1. 

8§  140,2. 

P     38,  9. 

*  §  129,  JR. 

»»  §  140,  6. 

q§  107,R.X.&Exp. 

7 

I 


74  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

obsidibus^  teneretur/'  Sed  pejus  victoribus  Sequanis,'^  qukm 
j^duis  '^  victis,  accidisse:"^  propteiea  quod  Ariovistus,  rex  Ger- 
manorum,  in  eorum  finibus  consedisset,^  tortiamque  partem 
agri  Sequani,  qui  esset^  optimus  totiusGallisB,  occupavisset,^ 
et  nunc  de  altera  parte  tertia  Sequanos  decedere  juberet;** 
propterea  quod,  paucis  mensibus*^  ante,  Harudum  millia 
hominum  viginti  quatuor  ad  eum  venissent ;  ^  ^  quibus  ^  lo- 
cus ac  sedes  pararentur.^  sPuturum''  esse  paucis  annis*^  uti 
omnes  ex  Galliae  finibus  pellerentur,'  atque  omnes  German! 
Rhenum  transirent : '  3  neque  enim  conferendum  ^  esse  Gal- 
Itcum  cum  Germanorum  agro,  neque  banc  consuetudinem 
victus  cum  ilia  comparandam.''  Ariovistum  autem,  '^  ut  se- 
mel  Gallorum  copias  proelio  vicerit,^  quod  proelium '  factum 
sit''  ad  Magetobriam,  superbe  et  crudeliter  imperare,  obsi- 
des  nobilissimi  cuj  usque  liberos  poscere,  ^et  in  eos  omnia 
exempla  cruciatusque  edere,  si  qua  res  non  ad  nutum  aut 
ad  voluntatem  ejus  facta  sit:""  hominem  esse  barbarum, 
iracundum,  temerarium :  non  posse  ejus  imperia"  diutius 
sustineri.  ^Nisi  si  quid  in  Cassare  Populoque  Romano  sit 
auxilii,"  omnibus  Gallis  p  idem  esse  faciendum,  quod  Helve- 
tii  fecerint,''  '''  ut  domo  emigrent,'  aliud  domicilium,  alias 
sedes,  remotas  a  Germanis,  petant,'  fortunamque,  qua3cum- 
que  accidat,^  experiantur.'  "  Heec  si  enunciata  Ariovisto 
sint,"*  non  dubitare,  quin  de  omnibus  obsidibus,  qui  apud 
eum  sint,*  gravissimum  supplicium  sumat.''  Cssarem  vel 
auctoritate '^  sua''  atque  exercltijs,  vel  recenti  victoria,  vel 
nomine  Populi  Romani  deterrere  posse,  ne  major  multitudo 
Germandrum  Rhenum  transducatur,*  Galliamque  omnem  ab 
Ariovisti  injuria  posse  defendere." 

^  §  129,  R.  8  §  126,  R.  III.  n  §  145,  R.  LVIII. 

"§140,  6,  &  74.  h     51^5.  o  §  106,  R.  VIII. 

«  §  113,  R.  &  i  §  140,  1,  4th.  P  §  147,  R.  LXI. 

d     98,  2.  I'     108.  q  §  140,  3. 

•§141,  Obs.7.  1     37,  Note  1,6.  '     29,1. 

f  §  131   R.  XL.  «»§  140,  2,  &74, 1st.  »  §  140,  1. 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  XXXIII. -^  W  76 

82.  Hac  oratione  ab  Divitiaco  ^  habitat,  omnes,  qui  ade- 
rant,  magno  fietu  auxilium  a  Caesare  petere  cdeperunt.  Ani- 
raadvertit  Csesar,  unos''  ex  omnibus  Sequanos''  nihil  earum 
rerum  facere,''  quas  cetSri  facerent ;  **  sed  tristes,  capite  *  de- 
misso,  terram  intueri.  Ejus  rei  causa  quae  esset,'  miratus,* 
ex  ipsis  quaesivit."  Nihil  Sequani  respondere,*'  sed  in  eadeni 
tristitia  taciti '  permanere.  Cum  ab  iis  saepius  qusereret," 
neque  ullam  omnlno  vocem  2  exprimere  posset,''  idem  Divit- 
iacus  JEduus  respondit :  ^  "  Hoc  esse  miseriorem  graviorem- 
que  fortunam  SequanOrum,  ^prae'  reliquorum,  quod  soli 
ne  in  occulto  quidem  queri,  neque  auxilium  implorare  au- 
derent,'^  absentisque  Ariovisti  crudelitatem,  velut  si  coram 
adessef"  horrerent :  **  propterea  quod  reliquis  "  tamen  s  fugae 
facultas  daretur ;  Sequanis"  vero,  qui  intra  fines  suos  Ario- 
vistum  recepissent,*^  quorum  oppida  omnia  in  potestate  ejus 
essent,  ^  omnes  cruciatus  essent  perferendi.^" 

33.  His  rebus  cognitis,  Caesar  Gallorum  animos  verbis* 
confirmavit,  pollicitusque  est,  "^sibi*^  eam  rem  curae  futuram: 
magnam  se  habere  spem,  et  beneficio*  suo  et  auctoritate 
adductum  Ariovistum  finem  injuriis  facturum.*"  Hac  ora- 
tione habita,  concilium  dimisit ;  et  Secundum  ea  multas  res 
eum  hortabantur,  quare  sibi°  eam  rem**  cogitandam  ^  et  sus-' 
cipiendam  putaret ; '  in  primis  quod*  jiEduos,  fratres  consan- 
guineosque  saspenumero  ab  Senatu  appellatos,  in  servitute 
atque  in  ditione  videbat  Germanorum  teneri,^  eorumque 
obsides  esse  apud  Ariovistum  ac  Sequanos  intelligebat : 
quod'  in  tanto  imperio  Popiili  Eomani  turpissimum"    sibi* 

^     16,  4.  i  §  98,  Obs.  10.  P      108.  ^    ' 

b  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  >^-  §  140,  Obs.  4.  1  §  114,  fc  &  8. 

c     96,  2.  >  §  136,  Obs.  6.  '      100,  2. 

d§  141,  Obs.  8.  >"§140,  2.  »§140,  Obs.  2. 

e  §  129,  R.  »  §  126,  R.  III.  &  19.  t     37^  Note  3. 

f  §  140,  5.  o  §  126,  R.  XXXIII.  ^  §  103.  Obs.  2. 

8     106,1.  &Obs.  3.  v§ni,R. 


§  144,  Obs.  6. 


76  %  DE   BELLO    GALLICO. 

et  reipublicae  esse  arbitrabatur.  Paulatim  autem  Germanos 
consuescere  Rhenum  transire,  et  in  Galliam  magnam  eorum 
multitudinem  venire,  Popiilo  Romano  periculosum  videbat : 
neque  sibi^  homines  feros  ac  barbaros  temperaturos  **  existi- 
mabat,  quin,  cilm  omnera  Galliam  occupassent,''  ut  ante 
Cimbri  Teutonique  fecissent,^  in  Provinciam  exirent,*  atque 
inde  in  Italiam  contenderent ;  *  prsesertim  cum  Sequanos  a 
Provincia  nostra  Rhodanus  divideret/  Quibus^'  rebus'' 
quam'  maturrim^  loccurrendum  putabat.''  Ipse  autem  Ario- 
vistus  tantos  sibi  spiritus,  tantam  arrogantiam  sumserat,  ut 
ferendus  non  videretur.'' 

34.  Quamobrem  ^placuit  ei,  ut  ad  Ariovistum  legStos 
mitteret/  qui  ab  eo  postularent,""  uti  aliquera  locum  medium 
utriusque  colloquio.diceret:"  velle  sese  de  republica  3  et  sum- 
mis  utriusque  rebus  cum  eo  agere.  Ei  ]egationi°  Ariovis- 
tus  respondit:  4  Si  quid  ipsi  p  a  Cassare  opus  esset,  sese  ad 
eum  venturum  fuisse  j**  si  quid  *  ille  se  ■"  velit,  ilium  ^  ad  se 
venire  oportere.  Prseterea  se  neque  sine  exercitu  in  eas 
partes  GalliaB  venire  audere,  quas  Csesar  possideret ;  *  neque 
exercitum  ^gine  magno  commeatu  atque  emolimento  in 
unum  locum  contrahere  posse :  sibi  autem  mirum  videri," 
■^  quid  in  su^  Gallia,  quam  bello  vicisset,"  aut  Caesari,"  aut 
omnino  Populo  Romano"^  negotii''  esset." 

35.  His  responsis  ad  Csesarem  relatis,  iterum  ad  eum 
CsBsar  legatos  cum  his  mandatis  mittit :  "  Quoniam  tanto 
suo^  Popuiique  Romani  beneficio  affectus  (cum  in  consulatu 
suo  rex  atque  amicus  a  Senatu  appellatus  esset),  banc  sibi 

*     31,  Note.  k  §  140,  1,  1st.  70.  ^  §  136,  Obs.  5.  (a.) 

»'     100,  1.  1  §  140,  1,  4th.  *  §  113,  Exc.  III. 

c§  140,  Obs.  4.  »§  141^  R.  II.  Obs.  t§140,  6. 

d  §  141,  Obs.  8.  2,  4th.  "     70,  &  Obs. 

•§140,3.  «>§  140,  1,3d.  v§  141^  Obs.  7. 

t  §  140,  Obs.  3.  o     63.  ^§  112,  R.  II. 

«     38.  P§  111.  x§  107,  R.  VIII. 

>^  §  147,  &  113,  (st6i)  q     100,5.  \  7     29,1. 

i  §  134,  Obs.  6,  3d.  »  §  112,  R.  IV. 


LIB.    I.    CAP.  XXXVI.  77 

Populoque  Romano  ^  gratiam  referret,^  ut  in  colloquium  ve 
nire  invitatus  gravaretur,"  Sneque''  de  communi  re  3  dicen- 
dumsibi'*  ^t  cognoscendurh  putaret;''  haec*  esse,  quae  ab 
eo  postularefc :  "^  primum,  ne  4quam  hominum  multitudmem 
araplius  trans  Rhenum  in  Galliam  transduceret :  ^  deinde 
obsides,  quos  haberet^  ab  ^duis,  redderet,*^  Sequanisque 
permitteret,"  ut,  quos  illi  haberent,*^  voluntate  ejus  reddere 
illis  liceret ;  ^  neve  JEduos  *  injuria  lacesseret,^  neve  his  so- 
ciisve  eOrum  bellum  inferret  -J  si  id  ita  fecisset,''  sibi '  Pop- 
uloque Romano  perpetuam  gratiam^  atque  amicitiam  cum 
eo  fulurara:''  si  non  impetraret,"  sese  ^  (quoniam  Marco 
Messala,Marco  Pisone  Consulibus,  Senatus  censuisset,"  uti 
quicumque  Galliam  provinciam  '  obtineret,"  6  quod  commo- 
do"  reipublicee  facere  posset, '^  iEduos  ceterosque  amlcos 
Popiili  Romani  defenderet),^  sese  iEduorum  injurias  non 
neglecturum."  '' 

36.  Ad  haBC  Ariovistus  respondit :  "  Jus  esse  belli,  ut, 
qui"  vicissent,'"iis,'' quos  vicissent,^  quemadmodum  vellent,'' 
imperarent:  ^  '^item  Popiilum  Romanum^  victis^  non  ad  al- 
terius  praescriptum,  sed  ad  suum  arbitrium,  imperare  consu- 
^sse.""  Si  ipse  Popiilo  Romano  non  prsescriberet,''  quemad- 
modum suo  *  jure  uteretur;'^  non  ^oportere  sese  a  Popiilo 
Romano  in  suo  jure  impediri.  JEduos  *"  sibi,*  quoniam  belli 
fortunam  tentdssent''  et  armis  congressi  ac  superati  essent,*" 
'Stipendiarios  esse  factos.  Magnam  Caesarem  ^  injuriam  fa- 
cere,  qui  suo  adventu  vectigalia  sibi  deteriora  faceret." 
jEduis''  se  obsides  redditurum  non  esse,  neq^tie  iis,^  neque 
eorum  sociis''  injuria  bellum  illaitirum,  si  in  eo  manerent,^ 
quod  convenisset,*^  stipendiumqne  quotannis  penderent :   si 


*  §  140,  6. 

h  §  140,  2. 

p  §  112,  R.  V. 

b§  140,1. 

i  §  112,  R.  II. 

q  §  140,  5. 

«§93,  L 

^  §  100,  2. 

■•     98,  6. 

<>§  147,  &  113,  5. 

>  §  97,  R. 

'^     31,  Note. 

•§  145,  R.  LVIII. 

'»§  141,  R.  I. 

t  §  111,  R.            M 

f  §  141,  R.  VI. 

«  §  129,  R. 

^  §  141,  R.  III.    ^^ 

8§  140,  1,3d. 

«     37,3 

-  §  123.  R. 

78  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

id  non  fecissent,Honge  iis  ^  fraternum  nomen  Populi  EomS- 
ni  abfuturum.  sQ^od"  sibi  Csesar  denunciaret,  se  JEdub- 
rum  injurias  non  neglecttirum ;  neminem''  decum  sine  sua* 
pernicie  contendisse.^  Cum  vellet/ congrederetur  ;^  mtel- 
lecturum,  quid  invicti  Germani,  exercitatissimi  in  armis, 
qui  3  inter  annos  quatuordecim  tectum  non  subissent,^  ^  vir- 
ttite  possent." ' 

37.  Hsec  eodem  tempore  Csesari''  mandata  referebantur, 
et  legati  ab  iEduis  et  a  Treviris  veniebant :  ^  iEdui '  ques- 
tum,""  quod  Hartides,  qui  nuper  in  Galliam  transportati  es- 
sent,*'  fines  eorum  popularentur,*"  sese  ne  obsidibus  quidem 
datis  pacem  Ariovisti  redimere  potuisse :  ^Xreviri^  autem, 
pagos  centum  Suevorum  ad  ripas  Rheni  consedisse,  qui 
Rhenum  transire  conarentur ;  ^  iis ''  praeesse  Nasuam  et  Cim- 
beriura  fratres:  Quibus"  rebus  CcEsar  vehementer  commo- 
tus,  maturandum  '^  sibi  °  existimavit,  "^  ne,  si  nova  manus 
Suevorum  cum  veteribus  copiis  Ariovisti  sese  conjunxisset,P 
minus  facile  resisti  posset.''  Itaque  ^re  frumentaria,  quam" 
celerrime  potuit,  comparat^,*  magnis  itineribus  ad  Ariovis- 
tum  contendit. 

38.  Cum  9  tridui  viam "  processisset/  nunciatum  est  ei,*" 
Ariovistum*"  cum  suis  omnibus  copiis  ad  occupandum'  Ve- 
sontionem,  quod  est  oppidum  maximum  Sequanorum,  ^^  con- 
tendere," triduique  viam''  a  suis  finibus  processisse.^  Id  ne 
accideret,'^  magno  opere  sibi"  prsecavendum*"  Csesar  existi- 
mabat :  namque  omnium  rerum,  quas  ad  bellum  usui '"  erant, 
11  summa  erat  in  eo  oppido  facultas ;  idque  natura  loci  sic 
muniebatur,  ut  magnam  ^^ad  ducendum  bellum  daret"  fac- 

^  §  112,  R.  I.  i  §  140,  5.  >•  §  134,  Obs.  6,  3d. 

b     38,  Note.  11.  k  §  126,  R.  III.  '  §  104,  1. 

c  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  1  §  101,  Obs.  4  »      112,7. 

d     31,  Note.  ">§  148.  1.  "     96,  2. 

e     98,  2.  °     38.  ^  §  132,  R.  XLII. 

f§140,  Obs.  4.  0     113.  ^'^§  114,  R.  8c  Obs.  4. 

8  §  140,  6.  P  §  140,  2.  .     =^  §  140,  1,  1st 

J>  §  141,  Obs.  7.  1  §  140,  1,  2d.  *" 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  XXXIX* 


7^\j,jif^- 


ultatera,  propterea  quod  fluraen  Dubis  *  ut  circino  circum- 
ductum,  psene  totuin  oppidum  cingit:  reliquum  spatium, 
quod  est  ^non  amplius  pedum''  sexcentorum,  qua  flumeii 
intermittit,  mons  ^continet  magna  altitudine,''  ita  ut  radices 
ejus  montis  ex  utraque  parte  ripse  flummis  contingant.*' 
^Hunc*^  murus  circumdatus  arcem^  efficit  et  cum  oppido 
conjungit.  Hue  Csesar  magnis  nocturnis  diurnisque  itineri- 
bus  contendit,''  occupatoque  oppido,  ibi  prassidiuni  coliocat.'' 
39.  Dum  paucos  dies  ad  Vesontionem,  rei  frumentaricB 
commeatusque  causa,  moratur,  *ex  percutictatione  nostra- 
rum  vocibusque  G^Uorum  ac  mercatorum,'  qui  ingenti  mag- 
nitudme  ^  corporum  Germanos,  incredibili  virtute''  atque 
exercitatione  in  armis  esse  praedicabant/  saepenumero  sese,^ 
cum  eis  congressos,*'  ne  ^  vultum  quidem  atque  aciem  ocu- 
lOrum  ferre  potuisse,''  tantus  subito  timor  omnem  exercitum 
occupavit,  ut  non  mediocriter  omnium  mentes  animosquc 
perturbaret.*"  Hie '  primum  ortus  est  a  ^  TribQms  militum, 
praefectis  reliquisque,  qui,  ex  urbe  ami'eiiise  causa  Cassarem 
secuti,  non  magnum  in  re  militari  usum  habebant :  ^ quorum'' 
alius,'  alia'"  causa  illata,  quam  *^  sibi"  ad  proficiscendum 
necessariam  esse  dicerent,"  petebant,  ut  ejus  voluntate  dis- 
cedere  liceretr^  DonnuUi,  padore  adducti,  ut  timoris  suspi- 
cionem  vitarent,''  remanebant.  Hi  neque  ^  vultum  fingere, 
neque  interdum  lacrymas  tenere  poterant :  abditi  in  taber- 
naciilis,  aut  suum  "■  fatum  querebantur/  aut  cum  familiari- 
bus  suis  "■  commune  periciilum  miserabantur.*"  Vulgo  totis 
castris  testamenta  obsignabantur/  Horum  vocibus  ac  timOre 
paulatim  etiam  ii,'  qui  magnum  in  castris  usum  habebant, 
milites^  centurionesque,  quique  equitatu  praeerant,  pertur- 

*  §  106,  R.  VI.  Obs.  g  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  °  §  111,  R. 

3.  (spatio.)  ^     98,  2.   -»  <>§  141,  Obs.  7. 

»>§  106,R.VII.&6,1.  ■'      19,  (timor.)  p§  140,  1,  3d. 

.  c  §  140.  1,  1st.  •'§107,  R.X.  <i§140,  1,  2d, 

d  §  116,  Obs.  1.  »  §  102,  Obs.  5.  ^     30,  2. 

•§  44,  I,  3.  «»    25,  1,  and  »  §  97,  R. 
i  §44,  II.  1.                     §  98,  Obs.  11.  -  - 


I 


80  »E    BELLO    GALLICO. 

babantur.  ^  Qui''  se  ex  his  minils  timidos  exislimari  ^  vole- 
bant,  non  se  hostem  vereri,''  sed  angustias  itineris  et  mag- 
oitudinem  silvarum,  quae  intercederent  **  inter  ipsos  at  que 
Ariovistum,  aut  rem  frumentariam,%t  "^  satis  commode  sup- 
portari  posset,  timere''  dicebant.  Nonnulli  etiam  Coesari 
renimciabant,  ciim  castra  moveri  ac  signa  ferri  jussisset,^ 
non  fore  ^  dicto  audientes  milites,  nee  propter  timorem  sig- 
na laturos. 

40.  Hffic  cum  animadvertisset,  3  convocato  *^  consilio,  om- 
niumque  ordinum  ad  id  consilium  adhibitis^'  centuriombus, 
vehementer  eos  incusavit ;  "  primum,  quod,  aut  quam  in 
partem,  aut  quo  consilio  ducerentur,*"  *  sibi '  qujErendum  aut 
cogitandum  putarent/  Ariovistum,  se  "^  consiile,  cupidis- 
sime  Popiili  Romani  amicitiam  appetisse ; '  cur  hunc  tarn 
temere  quisquam  ab  officio  discessurum  judicaret?'^  s  Sibi  "* 
quidem  persuaderi,  cognitis  suis  ^postulatis  atque  asquitate 
conditionum  perspecta,  eum  neque  suam,"  neque  Popiili 
Romani  gratiam  repudiaturum.  Quod  si,  furore  atque  amen- 
tia impulsus,  bellum  intulisset,"  quid  tandem  vererentur  ?  •* 
aut  cur  de  ''^sua  virtute,  aut  de  ipsius  diligentia,  desperarent  ?  ^ 
8 Factum  ejus  hostis  periciilum  patrum  nostrorum  memoria, 
cum,  Cimbris  et  Teutonis  a  Caio  Mario  pulsis,  non  mino- 
rem  laudem  exercitus,  quam  ipse  imperator,  meritus  videba- 
tur  ;  P  factum  etiam  nuper  in  Italia  ^  servili  tumultu,  quos'' 
tamen  aliquid*"  usus  ac  disciplma,  quam  a  nobis  accepis- 
sent,  sublevarent.*^  Ex  quo  judicari  posset,*^  quantum  ha- 
beret ''  in  se  boni  constantia;  propterea  quod,  quos^  ali- 
quamdiu  inermos  sine  causa  timuissent,  hos  postea  armStos 


a     37,  (it.) 

s     104,1. 

»  §  29,  1. 

^     94,  3. 

h  §  140,  5. 

0  §  140,  2. 

c     96,  1. 

i        113. 

p§  141,  Obs.  5.  1st. 

d  §  140,  6. 

k      110,  2. 

q  §  99.  Obs.  2. 

"     121,  7,  and 

1      98, 2. 

r§  116,  Obs.  3. 

§  140,  Obs.  6. 

»>§  126,  R. 

m. 

•     43. 

'     80,  1. 

LIB.  I.    CAP.  XL.  81 

ac  victores  superassent.  Denique  hos*  es»e  eosdem,  quibus- 
cum  saepenumero  Helvetii  congressi,  noii  solum  in  ^suis,  sed 
etiain  in  illdrum  finibus,  plerumque  superarint,^  qui  tamen 
pares  esse  nostro  exercitu''  non  potuerint.  Si  2quos  advei- 
sura  proelium  et  fuga  Gallorum  commoveret/  hos,  si  quse- 
rerent,*^  reperire  posse,  diutumitate  belli  defatigatis  Gallis,^ 
Ariovistum,"  c6m  multos  menses  ^  castris  se  ac  paludibus 
tenuisset,  ^neque  sui  potestatem  fecisset,  desperantes  jam 
de  pugna  et  disperses  subito  adortum,  magis  ^ rationed  et 
consilio,  quam  virtute,^  vicisse.  Cui  ^  rationi '  contra  hom- 
ines barbaros  atque  imperitos  locus  fuisset,  hac,  ne  ipsum'' 
quidem  sperare,  nostros  exercitus*  capi  posse.  ^  Qui  "^  suum' 
timorem  in  rei  frumentariae  simulationem  angustiasque  itin- 
erum  conferrent,''  facere  arroganter,  ciim  aut  de  officio  im- 
peratoris  desperare,  aut  prsescribere  viderentur.*"  Haec  sibi" 
esse  curse ; "  frumentum  Sequanos,*  Leucos,  Lingonas  sub- 
ministrare ; "  jamque  esse  in  agris  frumenta  matura:  de 
itinere  ipsos*  brevi  tempore  judicattiros.''  ^Quod''  non 
fore  dicto  audientes  milites,^  neque^'signa  laturi  dicantur,** 
nihil  "■  se  ea  re  commoveri :  "^  scire  enim,  quibuscumque  ex- 
ercitus  dicto  audiens  non  fuerit,''  aut,  male  re^  gesta,  fortu- 
nam  defuisse  ;  aut,  aliquo  facinore  *  comperto,  avaritiam 
esse  conjunctam.  Siiam  innocentiam  perpetua  vita,  felici- 
tatem  Helvetiorum  bello,  esse  perspectam.*  ^Jtaque  se,* 
quod  in  longiorem  diem  collattirus  esset,*  repraesentaturum,^ 
et  proxima  nocte  de  quarta  vigilia  castra  moturum,  ut  quam 
primum  intelligere  posset,"  utrum  *  apud  eos  pudor  atque 
officium ,  an  timor  valeret."^  Quod  si  prseterea  nemo  sequatur," 

^  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  i  §  110,  R.  XV.  r  §  116,  Obs.  3. 

»•  §  140,  e:  k     37,  (eos.)  '      98,  6. 

e§  111,  R.  1      30,  2.  '  §  79,  8. 

d  §  140,  2.  «»§  140,  Obs.  4.  "  §  140,  1,  2d. 

.«      109,  2.  n  §  114,  R.  V      124,  14. 

f  §  131,  R.  XLI.  o     94,3.&96,Exc.  II.   ^-§  140,  5. 

K  §  129,  R.  p     100,  2.  ^  §  140,  2,  &  77  5. 

"     33.  1     3.S.  Note.  11.  v  §  39,  1. 


82  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

tamen  se  cum  sola  decima."  legione  iturum,  de  qua  non 
dubitaret;"  sibique  earn  i  prsetoriam  cohortem  "^  futuram." 
Huic  legioni''  Caesar  et  indulserat  prascipue,  et  propter  vir- 
tutem  2confidebat  maxime. 

41.  Hac  oratione  habita,  mirum  in  modum  conversss*^ 
sunt  omnium  mentes,  summaque  alacritas  et  cupiditas  belli 
gerendi^  innata*^  est,  Sprincepsque^  decima  legio,  per  tri- 
bunos^  militum,  ei  gratias  egit,  quod  de  se  optimum  judi- 
cium fecisset;*^  seque  esse  ad  bellum  gerendum  paratissi- 
mam  confirmavit.  Deinde  reliquse  legiones,  per  tribunos  ^ 
militum  et  primorum  ordinum  centuriones,  ^  egerunt,  uti 
Caesari ''  satisfacerent : '  se  neque  unquam  dubitasse,''  neque 
timuisse,  neque  de  summa  belli  suum  ^  judicium,  sed  impe- 
ratoris  "'  esse,  existimavisse.'*^  Eorum  ^  satisfactione  accep- 
ta,  et  itinere  ^exquisito  per  Divitiacum,^  quod  ex  aliis  ei " 
maximam  fidem  habebat,  ut  millium  amplius  quinquaginta 
circuitu  locis  apertis  exercitum  duceret,'  de  quarta  vigilia, 
ut  dixerat,  profectus  est.  Septimo  die,  cum  iter  non  inter- 
mitteret,"  ab  exploratoribus  ^  certior  factus  est,  Ariovisti  co- 
pias  a  nostrisP  millibus^  passuum  quatuor  et  viginti  abesse. 

42.  Cognito  Csesaris  adventu,  Ariovistus  legates  ad  eum 
mittit:  '''quod'"  antea  de  colloquio  postulasset,*  id  per  se  fieri 
iicere,  quoniam  propii!is  accessisset :  *"  seque  id  sine  periculo 
facere  posse  existimare.  Non  respuit  conditionem  Cfesar : 
jamque  eum  ad  sanitatem  reverti  arbitrabatur,  cum  id,  quod 
antea  petenti  denegasset,*  iiltro  polliceretur  ;°  raagnamque 
in  spem  veniebat,  pro  suis '  tantis  Populique  Eomani  in  eum 
beneficiis,  cognitis  suis'  postulatis,  ^  fore,"  uti  pertinacia  de- 

^  §  141,  Obs.  7.  h  §  112,  R.  III.  p      19,   (copiis.) 

^  §  114,  Obs.  2.  i  §  140,  1,  2d.  1  §  132,  R.  XLII. 

«§  112,  R.V.  k     98,  2.  r     43. 

d  §  44,  III,  Note.  1      29,  1.  •  §  140,  6. 

«     112,5.  »§108,  R.  XII.  t§  141,  Obs.  8. 

I  §  98,  Obs.  10.  »>  §  123,  R.  "  §  145,  Obs.  6,  & 

»  §  126,  Obs.  2.  °  §  140,  Obs.  4.  100,  14. 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  XLIII.  83 

sisteret.  Dies  colloquio  dictus  est,  ex  eo  die  quintus.  In- 
terim, cum  s£epe  ultro  citroque  legati  inter  eos  mitterentur,'' 
Ariovistus  postulavit,  ^ne  quern  peditem  ad  colloquium  Cae- 
sar adduceret : "  vereri*^,  ne  ^  per  insidias  ab  eo  circuraveni- 
retur:  urerque  cum  equitatu  venlret :  **  alia  ratione  se  non 
esse  venturum.  Caesar,  quod  neque  colloquium^  interposita 
causa  ^toUi*^  volebat,  neque  salutem  suam  Gallorum  equi- 
tatui*^  committere  audebat,  3  commodissimum ''  esse  statuit, 
"*  omnibus  equis'  Gallis  equitibus"*  detractis,  eo  legionarios 
milites  legionis  decimae,  cui  quam  maxime  confidebat,  im- 
ponere,'  ut  prassidium  quam  amicissimum,  ^si  quid  opus 
facto  esset,  haberet.""  Quod "  cum  fieret,''  non  irridicule 
quidam  ex  miJitibus"  decimsB  legionis  dixit:  "plus,  quam 
pollicitus  esset, P  Caesarem  ei  facere ;  poUicitum,  se  in  co- 
hortis  praetoriae  loco  decimam  legionem  habiturum,  ^nunc 
ad  equum  rescribere." 

43.  Planities  erat  magna,  et  in  ed  tumiilus  terrenus  satis 
grandis.  Hie  locus  aequo  fera  spatio**  ab  caslris  utrisque 
aberat.  Eo,  ut  erat  dictum,  ad  colloquium  venerunt.  Le- 
gionem Caesar,  quam  equis""  devexerat,  passibus^  ducentis 
ab  eo  tumtilo  constituit.  Item  equites  Ariovisti  pari  inter- 
vallo*'  constiterunt.  Ariovistus,  '''ex  equis  ut  colloqueren- 
tur  ^  et,  praeter  se,  denos  ^  ut  ad  colloquium  adducerent,''  pos- 
tulavit. ^Ubi  eo  ventum  est,*  Caesar,  initio  orationis,  sua 
Senatusque  in  eum  beneficia  commemoravit,  "  quod  rex  ap- 
pellatus  esset  a  Senatu,  quod  munera  amplissima  missa  : 
quam"  rem  et  paucis  "  contigisse,""  et  pro  magnis  hominum 
officiis  consufesse  tribui"  docebat :  "ilium,  cum  neque  aditum, 

'^  §  140,  Obs.  4.  h§98,  Obs.  6.  P§141,0bs.  8. 

f  §  140,  1,  3d.  >      109.  q  §  132,  R.  XLII. 

c     94,  4.  k  §  126,  R.  III.  r  §  129,  R. 

i  §  140.  Obs.  6,  &  1  §  144.R.LVII.Note.  «  §  24,  11,  &  26,  I. 

121,6.  "'§140,  1,  2d.  t      67,Note.  5. 

«  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  =38.  «     19,&  §  112,  R.IV. 

'     96,  Exc.  II.  11.  <•  §  107,  Obs.  8.  v     qs,  2. 
e§  123,  R. 


84  I)E  BELLO  GALLICO. 

neque  causam  postulandi  justam  haberet,  beneficio  ac  libe- 
ralitate  sua  ac  Senatus  ea  praemia  consecutum."  Docebat 
ctiam,  "  quam  veteres,  quamque  justae  causas  ^necessitudinis 
ipsis^  cum  jiEduis  intercederent,''  quas  Senatus  consulta, 
quoties,  quamque  honorif  ica  in  eos  facta  essent : "  ut  omni 
tempore  totius  Galliae  principatum  JEdui  tenuissent,*^  prius 
etiam  quam  nostram  amicitiam  appetissent :  ^  Populi  Roma- 
ni  hanc^  esse  consuetudinem,  ut  socios'^  atque  amicos  non 
modo  2sui  nihil  deperdere/  sed  gratia,  dignitate,  honore 
Sauctiores  velit*'  esse:  quod  vero  ad  amicitiam  Populi  Ro- 
mani  attulissent,  id  iis  *"  eripi,  quis  pati  possset?'-*^  Postu- 
lavit  deinde  eadem,  quae  legatis  in  mandatis  dederat,  "  ne 
aut  jEduis,  aut  eorum  sociis  bellum  inferret ;"  obsides  red- 
deret:  si  nullam  partem  Germanorum  domum*  remittere 
posset,''  at  ne  *quos  amplius  Rhenum  transire  pateretur.'"^ 

44.  Ariovistus  ad  postulata  Caesaris  pauca  respondit ;  de 
SU13  virtutibus  multa  praedicavit:  "Transisse'  Rhenum"' 
sese,  non  sua  sponte,  sed  ^rogatum"  et  arcessitum"  a  Gal- 
lis ;  non  sine  magna  spe,  magnisque  prasmiis,  domum  pro- 
pinquosque  reliquisse;'  sedes  habere**  in  Gallia,  ab  ipsis 
concessas  ;  "  obsides  ipsorum  voluntate  datos  ;  stipendium 
capere  °  jure  belli,  quod  victores  victis  p  imponere  consuerint ; 
non  sese  *  Gallis,  sed  Gallos  ^  sibi  bellum  intulisse  ;  omnes 
Galliae  civitates  ad  se  oppugnandum  venisse,'  ac  contra  se 
castra  habuisse ;  eas  omnes  copias  a  se  uno  praelio  fusas  ac 
superatas  esse ;  si  iterum  experiri  velint,''  iterum  paratum 
sese  decertare  ;  si  pace**  uti  velint,  iniquum  esse,  de  stipen- 
dio  recusare,  quod  sua  voluntate  ad  id  tempus  pependerint. 

^§112,R.  IV.  *£§  140,6.  >«§  136,  R.LII. 

^  §  140,  5.  h  §  126,  R.  III.  •»  .   101,  4. 

c  §  140,  1,  3d.  i  §  130,  4.  o     96,  2. 

d  §  140,  4,  k  §  140,  2.  P  §  123,  R.  &  19. 

•  §  145,  R.  LVIII.        '     98,  2.  i  §  121,  R.  XXVI. 

'     90. 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  XLIV.  85 

Amicitiam  Populi  Romani  sibi''  ornamento '*  et  prassidio, 
non  detrimento,  esse  oportere,  idqae  se  ea  spe  petisse.  Si 
per  Populum  Komanum  stipendium.  remittatur,''  et  dedititii 
subtrahantur,''  non  minus  libenter  sese  recusaturum  Populi 
Romani  amicitiam,  quam  appetierit.''  i  Quod  multitudineni 
Germanorum  in  Galliam  transducat,'^  id  se  sui  muniendi,^ 
non  Galliae.  impugnandae ''  causa  facere;  ejus  rei  testimo- 
nium ^  esse,^  quod,  nisi  rogatus,  non  venerit,''  et  quod  bel- 
lum  non  intulerit,''  2sed  defenderit.''  Se  priilis  in  Galliam 
venisse,  quiim  Populum  Romanum.''  Nunquam  ante  hoc 
tempus  exercitutn  Popiili  Romani  Galiice  piovincia3  fines'" 
egressum.  ^  Q^i^j  sibivellet?''  Cur  in  suas  possessiones 
veniret  ?  ''  Provinciam  suani  ^  banc  esse  Galliam,  sicut  illam 
nostram.  Ut  ipsi'  concedi  noii  oporteret,  si  in  nostros  fines 
impetum  faceret,^  sic  item  nos  esse  iniquos,  ^qui  in  suo  jure 
se  interpellaremus.''  ^  Quod  '  fratres  ^  a  Senatu  jEduos  appel- 
latos  diceret,''  non  se  tam  barbarum,'"  neque  tain  imperltum"' 
esse  rerum,"  ut  non  scirct,"  neque  bello  Allobiogum  proxi- 
mo jEduos  RomanisP  auxilium  tulisse,  neque  ipsos  in  his 
contentionibus,  quas  iEdui  secum  et  cum  Sequanis  habuis- 
sent,i  nuxilio""  Popiili  Romani  usos  esse.  Debere  se  suspi- 
cari,  simulata  Cajsarem  amicitia,  quod  exercitum  in  Gallia 
habeat,''  sui  opprimendi''  causa  habere.  Qui"  nisi  decedat** 
atque  exercitum  deducat ''  ex  his  regiombus,  sese  ilium  non 
pro  amico,  sed  pro  hoste  habiturum :  quod  si  eum  interfe- 
cerit,''  multis  "^  sese  nobilibus^  principibusque  Populi  Roma- 
ni gratum  esse  facturum;  id  se  ab  ipsis  per  eorum  nuntios 
compertum"  habere,  quorum     omnium  gratiam  atque  ami- 

'  »  §  114,  R.  h  §  120,  Obs.  2,  1st.      p  §  123,  R. 

»'§140,  2.  i  §  113,  R.  q§141,  Obs.  7. 

«  §  140,  6.  k  §  141^  R.  in.  r  §  121,  R.  XXVI. 

«».§  141,  Obs.  7.  I      38,  11,  Note.  '      39. 

*     112,  5.  «»§  103,  Obs.  2.  t  §  111^  R. 

'  §  103,  R.  V.  n  §  107,  R.  IX.  «  §  146,  Obs.  1 

8     51.  *  |.^40,  Ij  1st.  ^  Sup.  trans. 

8 


86  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

citiam  ejus  morte  redimere  posset.  Quod  si  decessisset,* 
ac  liberam  possessionem  Gallias  sibi**  tradidisset,  magno  se 
ilium  pr£emio  remuneraturum,  et,  qusecumque''  bella  geri 
vellet/  sine  ullo  ejus  labore  et  periciilo  confecturum." 

45.  Multa  ab  Csesare  *  in  earn  sententiam  dicta  sunt, 
quare  negotio  desistere  non  posset,"  et  "  neque  suam/  neque 
Popiili  Romani  consuetudinem'^  pati,  uti  optime  meritos  so- 
cios  desereret:''  neque  se  judicare,  Galliam  potiiis  esse 
^Ariovisti,'  quam  Popiili  Romani.'  Bello  superatos  esse 
Arvernos  et  Rutenos  ab  Q.  Fabio  Maximo,  quibus"  Pop- 
iilus  Romanus  ignovisset,^  neque  in  provinciam  redegis- 
set ; '  neque  stipendium  imposuisset.  Quod  si  antiquissi- 
mum  8  quodque  tempus  ^  spectavi  oportgret,""  Popiili  Romani 
justissimum*"  esse  in  Gallia  imperium  :  si  judicium*  Sena- 
tus  observari  oporteret,"  liberam "'  debere  esse  Galliam, 
quam  bello  victam  suis  legibus  "  uti  *  voluissset.'" 

46.  Dum  base  in  colloquio  geruntur,  CsBsari"  nunciatum 
est,  equites^  Ariovisti  ^propiiis  tumulum  accedere,''  et  adnos- 
tros  adequitare,P  lapTdes  telaque  in  nostros  conjicere.  Caesar 
loquendi  finem  facit  '^  seque  ad  suos  recipit,'*  suisque  ^  impe- 
ravit,  ne  quod  omnino  telum  in  hostes  rejicerent.''  Napi, 
etsi  sine  ullo  periciilo  legionis  delectse  cum  equitatu  prce- 
lium  ^  fore  videbat,  tamen  committendum ""  non  putabat,  ut, 
pulsis  hostibus,  dici  posset,^  eos  ^  ab  se  ^per  fidem  in  collo- 
quio circumventos.  Posteaquam  in  '''vulgus  militum  elatum 
est,  8 qua  arrogantia  in  colloquio  Ariovistus  usus  omni  Gallia 
Romanis  interdixisset,^  impetumque  in  nostros  ejus  equites 
fecissent  ^  eaque  res  colloquium  ut  diremisset :  *  multo  major 
alacritas  studiumque  pugnandi  majus  exercitu^injectum  est. 

»  §  140,  2.  g  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  »  §  121,  R.  XXVI. 

^  §  123,  R.  ^  §  140,  1,  3d.  °  §  126,  R.  III. 

c  §  99,  Obs.  7.  i  §  108,  R.  XII.  p     96,  2. 

d  §  140,  6.  k  §  112,  R.  V.  q  §  44,  I.  3. 

•  §  140,  5.  1  §  141,  Obs.  7o^'  '      113,  and  r. 

f     29,  1.  »§  103,  Obs.  4|p  •  §  140,  1, 1st. 


LIB  I.    CAP.  XLVIII.  '  87 

.47.  Biduo  post  Ariovistus  ad  Cgesarem  legates  mittit,'' 
velle  ^  se  de  his  rebus,  quae  inter  eos  agi  coeptae,  i  neque  per- 
fectae  essent,*"  agere  cum  eo :  uti  aut  iterum  colloquio  diem 
constitueret;^  aut,  si  id  minus  vellet,^  ex  suis  aliquem  ad 
se  mitteret.**  Colloquendi  Cassari  ^  causa  visa  non  est ;  et 
eo  magis,  quod  pridie  ejus  diei*  Germani  retineri  non  pote- 
rant,  Squin  ^  in  nostros '  tela  conjicerent.  Legatum  ex  suis  * 
sese  magno  cum  periculo  ad  eum  missurum,  et  hominibus 
feris  objecturum,  existimabat.  Comraodissimum  visum  est, 
Caium  Valerium  Procillum,  Caii  Valerii  Caburi  filium,' 
summa  virtute*"  et  humanitate  adolescentem '  (cujus  pater  a 
Caio  Valerio  Flacco  civitate  ™  donatus  erat),  et  propter  fidem 
et  propter  linguae  GallicaB  scientiam,  qud  multa  jam  Ariovis- 
tus longinqua  consuetudine  "  utebatur,  et  quod  in  eo  3  pec- 
candi  Germanis"  causa  non  esset,^  ad  eum  mittere,  et  Mar- 
cum  Mettium,  qui  hospitio  Ariovisti  usus  erat.  His"  man- 
davit,  ut,  quae  diceref  Ariovistus,  cognoscerent  ^  et  ad  se 
referrent.*^  Quos  *  cum  apud  se  in  castris  Ariovistus  con- 
spexisset,*  exercitu  suo  prassente,  conclamavit :  "Quid  ad  se 
venirent?'^  An"  ^speculandi  causa  ?  "  Conantes  dicere  pro- 
hibuit  et  in  catenas  conjecit. 

48.  Eodem  die  castra  promovit,et  millibus""  passuum  sex 
a  Caesaris  castris  sub  monte  consedit.  Postridie  ejus  diei  *f 
praeter  castra  Caesaris  suas  copias  transduxit,  et  millibus"" 
passuum  duobus  ultra  eum  castra  fecit,  eo  consilio,"  uti  fru- 
mento  commeatuque,  qui  ex  Sequanis  et  iEduis  supportare- 
tur,*"    Cassarem  intercluderet.^     Ex   eo    die  dies   continues 

»     94,  1,  2d,  &  4.  !>  §  140,  3,  &  78,  7,  p  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

»>     96,  2.  Note.  q  §  123,  R. 

«  §  140,  6.  •  i      19.  r  §  141^  Obs.  S. 

<!§  140,  1,3d.  k§  106,  R.  VII.  '  38. 

»  §  140,  2.  1  §  97,  R.  t  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

f     70.  »§126,  R.  V.  u  56,3d. 

«  §  135,  R.  XL VI.  n  §  129,  R.  v  §  i42,  R.  XLII. 
»§  112,  R.  IL 


88  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

quinque  Caesar  pro  castris  suas  copias  produxit,  et  aciem  in- 
structam  habuit,  ut,  si  vellet'  Ariovistus  proelio  contendere 
1  ei''  potestas  non  deesset.''.  Ariovistus  his  omnibus  diebus** 
exercitum  castris  continuit;  equestri  prcelio  quotidie  conten- 
dit.  Genus  hoc''  erat  pugnas,  quo  se  Germani  exercuerant. 
Equitum  millia  erant  sex :  totidem  numero  ^  pedites  velocis- 
sjini  ac  fortissimi ;  2  quos  ex  otnni  copia  singuli  singulos,^ 
suae  salutis  causa,  delegerant.  Cum  his  in  prseliis  versa- 
bantur,  ad  hos  se  equTtes  recipiebant :  hi,  si  quid  erat  du- 
rius,""  concurrebant :  si  qui,'  graviore  vuhiere  accepto,  equo 
deciderat,  circumsistebant :  ^  si  quo  erat  longius  prodeun- 
dum,""  aut  celerius  recipiendum, *"  tanta  erat  horum  exercita- 
tione  celeritas,  ut,  jubis'  equorum  sublevati,  ^cursum  adee- 
quarent."" 

49.  Ubi  eum  "  castris  se  tenere  CsBsar  intellexit,  ne  diu- 
tius  commeatu  prohiberetur,*"  uhra  eum  locum,  ^quo  in  loco* 
Germani  consederant,  circiter  passus^  sexcentos  ab  eis,  cas- 
tris '^  idoneum  locum  delegit,  acieque  triplici  instructa,  ad 
eum  locum  venit.  Primam  et  secundam  aciem  in  armis 
esse,""  tertiam  castra  munire  jussit.  Hie  locus  ab  hoste  cir- 
citer  passus  ^  sexcentos,  uti  dictum  est,  aberat.  Eo  circiter 
hominum  numero  sexdecim  millia  expedita  cum  omni  equi- 
tatu  Ariovistus  misit,  ^quae'  copiae  nostros  perterrerent '  et 
munitione  prohiberent.  .  Nihilo  secius  Caesar,  ut  ante  con- 
stituerat,  duas  acies  hostem  propulsare,''  tertiam  opus  perfi- 
cere  jussit.  Munltis  castris,  duas  ibi  legiones  relTquit  et 
partem  auxiliorum :  quatuor  reliquas  in  castra  majora  re- 
duxit. 

a  §  140,  2.  ^     22.  o     37,  7,  Note.  1. 

b  §  112,  R.  II.  i  §  35.  P  §  136,  R.  XLVIII. 

c§  140,  1,  2d.  k     113,  2.  q§  111,  R. 

<!§  131,R.  XLI.  '  §  129;  R.  '     90,4. 

e§103,R.  V.  «"§  140,  1,  1st.  "     40,4. 

f  §  128,  R.  XXXIV.     n  §  145,  R.  LVIII.        ♦  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4th. 

s     26. 


LIB.  I.    CAP.  LI,  89 

50.  Proximo  die,*  i  instituto  ^  suo,  Caesar  e  castris  utrisque 
copias  suas  eduxit ;  paulumque  ^a  majoribus  progressus, 
aciem  instruxit,  hostibusque*^  pugnandi  potestateni  fecit. 
Ubi  ne  turn  quidem  eos  prodire*^  intellexit,  circiter  meridiem 
exercitum  in  castra  reduxit.  Tum  demum  Ariovistus  par- 
tem suarum  copiarum,  quas  castra  minora  oppugnaret,^  misit: 
acriter  utrinque  usque  ad  vesperum  pugnatum  est.  Solis 
occasu  suas  copias  Ariovistus,  multis  et  illatis  et  acceptis 
vulneribus,*^  in  castra  reduxit.  Cum  ex  captivis  quasreret  ^ 
Ceesar,  quam  ob  rem  Ariovistus  proelio  non  decertaret,''  banc 
reperiebat  causam,  quod  apud  Germanos  ea  consuetudo  es- 
set,'  ut  matres  familiae  eorum  ^  sortibus  et  vaticinationibus 
declararent,''  utri^m  proelium  committi  -^ex  usu  esset,''  nee 
ne:  eas  ita  dicere,  ^  "  Non  esse'  fas,  Germanos  superare, 
si  ante  novam  lunam  proelio  contendissent.""' 

51.  Postridie  ejus  diei  Caesar  praesidio"  utrisque  castris, 
quod"  satis  esse  visum  est,  reliquit ;  ^omnes  alarios  in  con- 
spectu  hostium  '^  pro  castris  minoribus  constituit,  quod  minus 
multitudine  militum  legionariorum  pro  hostium  numero  va- 
lebat,  ut  8  ad  speciem  alariis  uteretur.P  Ipse,  triplici  in- 
structa  acie,  usque  ad  castra  hostium  accessit.  Tum  demum 
necessari6  Germani  suas  copias  castris  eduxerunt,  »  genera- 
timque  constituerunt  paribusque  intervallis  Harudes,  Mar- 
comanos,  Triboccos,  Vangiones,  Nemetes,  Sedusios,  Sue- 
vos,  omnemque  aciem  suam  "^  lo  rhedis  ^  et  carris  circumdedg- 
runt,  ne  qua  spes  in  fuga  relinqueretur.''  ii  Ed  mulieres  im- 
posuerunt,  quae  in  proelium  proficiscentes  milites  passis  cri- 
nibus  flentes  implorabant,  ne  se  in  servirutem  Romanis  tra- 
derent.' 


»§131,  R.  XL.  s§l40,  Obs.  4.  "  §  114,  R. 

"  §  129,  R.  h  §  140,  5.  o     37,  2  (id.) 

«=  §  123.  R.  &  63,  5.  i  §  141,  Obs.  7.  p  §  140,  1,  2d. 

"  §  96,  2.  k  §  140^  1^  1st.  q  §  30,  2. 

•  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4th.  151.  r  §  140,  1,  3d, 

'      109,  2.  m§  140,  2.  121,  2. 


9Q.,      '  I3E    BELLO    GALLtCO. 

52.  Cassar  ^  singulis **  legionibus"  singulos  legates  et  qaais- 
torem  prsEfecit,  uLi  eos  testes  sua)  quisque  virtutis  haberetr 
Ipse  a  dextro  cornu,  quod  earn  partem  ^minirne  firmam  hos- 
tiurn  esse  animum  adverterat,  proeiium  conimisit.  Ita  nos- 
tri  acriter  in  hostes,  signo  dato,  iinpetum  fecerimt,  itaque 
hostes  repente  celeriterque  procurrerunt,  ut  spatium  pila  in 
hostes  conjiciendi'^  non  daretur.""  Rejectis  pilis,^  cominus 
gladiis  pugnatum  est:  at  Germani,  celeriter  ex  consuetu- 
dine  sua  ^ phalange^  facta,  inipetus  gladiorum  exceperunt. 
Reperti  sunt  complures '  nostri  milites,  qui  in  phalangas  in 
siiTrent,'''  et  scuta  manibus  revellerent,**  et  desiiper  vulnera- 
rent/  Cum  hostiuui  acies  a  sinistio  cornu  pulsa  atque  in 
fugam  conversa  esset,  a  dextro  cornu  vehementer  multita- 
dine^'  suorum  nostrara  aciem  premebant.  Id  cijm  animad- 
vertisset*"  Publius  Crassus  adolescens,  qui  eqiiitatu  "^  praee- 
rat,  quod  *  expeditior  erat,  quam  hi  qui  inter  aciem  versa- 
bantur,  tertiam  aciem  laborantibus  nostris '  suhsidio'  misit. 

53.  Ita  proslium  restitutum  est,  atque  omnes  hostes  terga 
verterimt,  ^  neque  pritjs  fiigere  destiterunt,  quam  ad  flamen 
Rhenum  rnillia"'  passuum  ex  eo  loco  circiter  quinquaginta 
pervenerint."  Ibi  perpauci  aut,  viribus"  confisi,  transnat^re 
contenderunt,  aut,  lintribus  inventis,  sibi '^  saltitem  repere- 
runt.  6 In  his  fuit  Ariovistus,  qui,  naviculam  deligatam  ad 
ripam  nactus,"*  ea  profugit :  reliquos  omnes  consecuti  equa- 
tes nostri  interfecerunt.  Duas  fuerunt  Ariovisti  uxores,  una'' 
Sueva  natione,  quam  ab  domo  secum  eduxerat;  altera  Nor- 
ica,  regis  Vocionis  soror,''  quam  in  Gallia  "^duxerat,  a  fratre 
missam  :  utragque  in  ea  fuga  perierunt.  ^Dugg  fili^e  ■"  harum, 
altera  *■  occisa,  altera  "^  capta  est.     Caius  Valerius  Procillus, 


»     26. 

f     17. 

«»§  J36,  R.  XLVIII 

b  §  123,  R. 

?§  141,  Obs.  1. 

»  §  140,  4. 

<:§  140,  l,2d. 

h  §  129,  R. 

o§  112,  R.  V. 

d     112,  1. 

i  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

p     105,  1. 

-     109, & 

^  §  112,  R.  I. 

1  §  97,  R. 

§  146,  R.  LX. 

1  §  114,  R. 

r§  97,  Obs.  5. 

Llfi.  I.    CAT.  LIV.  91 

cum  a  cnstodibus  in  fuga  trinis  catenis"  vinctus  traheretur,** 
1  in  ipsum  Caesarera,  hostes  equitatu  ^  persequentern,  incidir. 
Quee*"  quidem  res  Cassari*^  non  minorem,  quam  ipsa  victo- 
ria,^ voluptatem  attulit ;  quod  hominem  honestissimum  pro- 
vincia?  Gallise,  suum  familiarem '^  et  hospitem,  ereptutn  « 
manibus  hostium,  sibi^  restitutum  videbat,  neque  ejus  ca- 
lamitate^  de  tanta  voluptate  et  gratulatione  quicquam  for* 
tuna  deminuerat.  Is,  se  prassente,''  de  se  ter  sortibus''  con- 
sultum'  dicebat,  utrum ''  igni  statim  necaretur,"  an  in  aliud 
tempiis  reservaretur :  sortium  ^beneficio''  se  esse'"  incolu- 
raem.  Item  Marcus  Metlius  repertus,et  ad  eum  reductus  est. 
54.  Hoc  prcelio  trans  Rhenum  niinciato,  Suevi,  qui  ad  ri- 
pas  Rheni  venerant,  domurn  "  reverti  ccsperunt :  quos  Ubii, 
qui  Sproximi"  Rhenum  incolunt,  perterritos  inseciiti,  mag- 
num ex  his  numerum  occiderunt.  Ccesar,  una  aestate  ^  duo- 
bus  maxiinis  bellis  confectis,  maturius  paulo,  quam  tempus 
anni  postulabat,  in  hiberna  in  Sequanos  exercitum  dedu^it : 
hibernis  ^  Labienum  prreposuit :  ipse  *  in  citeriorem  Galiiam 
^ad  conventus  agendos""  profectus  est. 

*  §  129,  R.  s  §  126,  R.  III.  «"    96.  2. 

b  §  140,  Obs.  4.  h     110,5.  n  §  130,  4. 

«     38,  2.  i  §  47,  6,  &  98,  2.         o  §  136,  Obs.  5.  (ad.) 

«J§123,  R.  I' §124,  14.  P§131,R.  XLI. 

"§  120,  Obs.  1.  >  §  140,  5,  q     112,  7. 


§  97,  R. 


BOOK    II. 

GENERAL  ARGUMENT. 
I.  Confederacy  of  the  Belgse.  Caesar's  wtir  with  them — Chap.  1-14. 
II.  War  with  the  Nervii— Chap.  15-28.  III.  War  with  the  Adui 
atici — Chap.  29-33,  IV.  Expedition  of  Publius  Crassus  into  Ar- 
morica — Chap.  34.  V.  Transactions  subsequent  to  the  reduction 
of  the  Belgse— Chap.  35. 

1.  1  Cum  esset  Caesar  in  citeriOre  Gallia  in  hibernis,  ita 
uti  supra  demonstravimus,  2  crebri  ad  eum  rumores  affere- 
bantur,  literisque  item  Labieni  certior  fiebat,  omnes  Belgas, 
quara  *"  tertiam  esse  Gallias  partem  ^  dixeramus,  contra  Pop- 
iilum  Romanum  conjurare,''  obsidesque  inter  se  dare:^ 
*conjurandi  has  esse  causas :  primiim,  quod  vererentur,'^ 
ne,*^  omni  pacata  Gallia,  ad  eos  exercitus  noster  adducere- 
tur:*  deinde,  quod  ab  nonnullis  Gallis  solicitarentur/  ^par- 
tim  qui,  utGermanos  diutius  in  Gallia  versari  noluerant,  ita' 
Popiili  Romani  exercitum  hiemare  atque  inveterascere  in 
Gallia  moleste  ferebant;  ^partim  qui  mobilitate  et  levitate 
animi  novis  '^imperils*"  studebant :  ^ab  nonnullis  etiam, 
quod  in  Gallia  a  potentioribus *''  atque  his  9 qui  ad''  condu- 
cendos  homines  facultates  habebant,  vulgo  regna  occupa- 
bantur,  qui  minus  facile  lo  eam  rem  in  imperio  nostro  con- 
sequi  poterant. 

2.  lis  nuntiis  literisque  commotus,  Csesar  duas  legiones 
in  citeriore  Gallia  novas  conscripsit,  et,  ^linita  sestate,  in 
interiorem  Galliam  qui  deduceret,'  Quintum  Pedium  lega- 
tum  misit.  Ipse,  cum  prinvum  pabiili  copia  esse  inciperet, 
ad  exercitum  venit :  ^s^at  negotium  Senonibus  reliquisque 
Gallis,  qui  finitimi  Belgis"  erant,  uti  ea,  quse  apud  eos  ge- 
rantur,*^  '^cognoscant,'  seque  de  his  rebus  certiorem  faciant.' 

*  §  99,  Obs.  4.  «  §  141,  Obs.  8.  '  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4th. 

»>     96,2.  f§112,  R.  V.  k§lll,  R. 

<=  §  140,  Obs.  6.  e     19,  (hominibus.)  '  §  140,  1,  3d. 

d  §  141,  Obs.  7.  >•     112,  7. 


l!b.  11.  CAP.  IV.  93 

Hi  conslanter  omnes  nunciaverunt,  maiius  cogi,  exercitum 
in  unum  locum  conduci.  Turn  vero  dubitandum  noa  existi- 
mavit,  1  quin  ad  eos  proficisceretur.''  Re  frumentaria  pro- 
visa,  castra  movet,  diebusque  circiter  quindecitn  ad  fines 
Belgarum  pervenit. 

3.  E6  cum  de  improviso  2celeriusque  omnium  opinione '' 
venisset,  Remi,  qui  proximi  GallioB  ex  Belgis'  sunt,  ad  eum 
legates,  Iccium  et  Antebrogium,  primos  civitati?,'^  miserunl, 
qui  dicerent,^  se  suaque  omnia  in  fidem  atque  in  potestatem 
Popiili  Romani  permittere :  "^  s^eque^  se  cum  Belgis  reli- 
quis  consensisse,  neque  contra  Populum  Romanum  omnino 
conjurasse:  paratosque  esse  et  obsides  dare,  et  imperata'' 
facere,  et  oppTdis  recipere,  et  frutncnto  ceterisque  rebus  ju- 
vare:  reiiquos  omnes  Belgas  in  armis  esse  :  Germanosque, 
qui  cis  Rhenum  incolunt,  sese  cum  his  conjunxisse  ;  lan- 
tumque  esse  eorum  omnium^furorem,  ut  ne  Suessiones  qui- 
dem,  fratres  consanguineosque  suos,  qui  eodem  jure'  et  eis- 
dem  legibus  utantur,''  unum  imperinm  unumque  nmgistra- 
tum  cum  ipsis  habeant,""  deterrere  potuerint,'  quin  cum  his 
consentirent."' 

4.  Cum  ab  ^  his  quasreret,  quas  civitates,  Squantieque  in 
armis  essent,"  ei  quid  in  bello  possent,  sic  reperiebat:  ple- 
rosque  Belgas  esse  ortos  ab  Germanis :  Rhenumque  ^ntiqui- 
tus  transductos,  propter  loci  fertilitatem  ibi  cousedisse,  Gai- 
losque,  qui  ea  loca  incolerent,  expulisse  ;  soiosque  esse,  qui, 
patrum  nostrorum  memoria,  orani  Gallia  vexata,  Teulonos 
Cimbrosque  intra  fines  suos  ingredi  prohibuerint."  Qua  ex 
re  fieri,  uti  earum  rerum  memoria  magnam  sibi  auctorita- 
tem,  magnosque  spiritus  in  re  militari  sumerent.''  De  uu- 
mero  eorum  "^  omnia  se  habere  explorata,'^  Remi  dicebant; 


'^§  140,  3. 

s     124, '5. 

78,  7,  Note. 

.»>§  120,  R. 

^     19,  (negotia.) 

"  §  140,  5. 

«§  107,  Obs,  8. 

'  §  121,  R.  XXVI. 

o§  141,  Obs.  7. 

d  §  107,  R.  X.  Exp. 

k§  141,  R.  IV. 

p  §  140,  1,  4th. 

•  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4th. 

1  §  140,  1,  1st. 

1  §  146,  Obs.  1    • 

f  §  145,  Obs.  3. 

>"§  140,3,  & 

94  DE    BELLO    GALLIco. 

propterea  quod  propinquitatibus  affinitatibusque  conjunct!, 
quantam  quisque  multitudmem  in  coinmuni  Belgarum  con- 
cilio  ad  id  bellum  pollicitus  sit,''  cognoverint.''  Plurimiim 
inter  eos  Bellovacos  et  virtute,''  et  auctoritate,*^  et  hominum 
numero,''  valere:  hos  posse  conficere  armata  millia  centum: 
pollicitos  ex  eo  numero  electa  millia  sexaginta,  totiusque 
belli  imperium  sibi  '*  postulare.  Suessiones  suos  esse  finiti- 
mos,  latissimos  feracissimosque  agros  possidere.  Apud  eos 
fuisse  regem  nostra  etiam  memoria  iDivitiacum,  totius  Gal- 
liae  potentissimum,  qui  cum "  magnaB  partis  harum  regionura, 
turn  ^  etiam  BrittaniaB,  imperium  obtinuerit : ''  nunc  esse  re- 
gem  Galbam:  ad  hunc,  propter  justitiam  prudentiamque, 
2  totius  belli  summam  omnium  voluntate  deferri :  oppida  ha- 
bere numero*"  duodecim,  polliceri  millia  armata  quinqua- 
ginta  :  totidem  ^  Nervios,  qui  maxime  feri  inter  ipsos  habe- 
antur  ^  ^  longissimeque  absint :  ^  quindecim  millia  Atreba- 
tes :  Ambianos  decem  millia  :  Morinos  viginti  quinque  mil- 
lia: Menapios  novem  millia:  Caletos  decem  millia:  Velo- 
casses  et  Veromanduos  totidem  :  Aduatiicos  viginti  novem 
millia,  Condrusos,  Eburones,  Caeraesos,  Psemanos,  qui  ^uno 
nomine  Germani  appellantur,^  arbitrari  ad  quadraginta 
millia. 

5.  Cassar,  Remos  cohortatas  ^ liberaliterque  oratione  pro- 
sectitus,  omnem  senatum,^  ad  se  convenire,  principumque 
liberos  obsides '  ad  se  adduci  jussit.  Quae''  omnia  ab  his' 
diligenter  6  ad  diem  facta  sunt.  Ipse,  Divitiacum  iEduum 
■7  magno  opere  cohortatus,  docet,  quanto  opere  rei  publicae 
communisque  salutis  intersit,''  manus  hostium  distineri,'" 
ne  8  cum  tanta  multitudine  uno  tempilore  confligendum  sit."  Id 
fieri  posse,  si  suas  copias  ^dui  in  fines  Bellovacorum  intro- 


'^  §  140,  5. 

f     19,  (mimes.) 

k     38. 

b  §  140,  6. 

e  §  141,  Obs.  5,  2d. 

1  §  126,  Obs.  2. 

c  §  128,  R. 

XXXIV. 

h     90,  4. 

«»     94,  3. 

•3  §  123,  R 

'  §  97,  R. 

»  §  140,  1,  2d. 

«     124,  8. 

LIB.  II.    CAP.  VLl,  95 

4ux6rint,'*  et  eorum  agros  popular!  coeperint.^  His  manda- 
tis,  eum  ab  se  dimittil.  Postquam  omnes  Belgarum  copias, 
in  unum  locum  coactas,  ad  se  venire''  vidit,  neque  jam 
longe  abesse  ab  his,  quos  miserat,  exploratoribus,''  et  ab  Ke- 
mis  cognovit,  flumen*^  Axonam,  quod  est  in  extremis  Eem5- 
rum  finibus,  exercitum**  transducere  maturavit,  atque  ibi 
castra  posuit.  iQuas^  res  et  latus  unum  castrorum  ripis 
fluminis  muniebat,  et  post  eum  quae  ^  essent  tuta  ab  hostibus 
reddebat,  et,  commeatus  ab  Remis  reliquisque  civitatibus  ut 
sine  periciilo  ad  eum  portari  posset,^  efficiebat.  In  eo  flu- 
mine  pons  erat.  Ibi  prassidium  ponit,  et  in  alterd  parte  flu- 
minis  Quintum  Titurium  Sabinum  legatum  cum  sex  ^co- 
hortibus  reliquit :  castra  in  altitudinem  pedum  duodecim 
vallo,"  fossaque  ^duodeviginti  pedum,'  munire  jubet. 

6.  Ab  his  castris  oppidum  Remorum,  nomine''  Bibrax, 
aberat  millia  passuum  octo.  Id  ex  itinere  magno  impetu  " 
BelgSB  oppugnare  coeperunt.  VEgra  eo  die '  sustentatum 
est.""  ^Qallorum  eadem  atque"  Belgarum  oppugnatio  est 
haec.  Ubi,  circumjecta  multitudine  hominum  totis  moenibus" 
undique  lapides  in  murum  jaci  coepti  sunt,  murusque  defen- 
soribusP  nudatus  est,  testudine  facta  portas''  succedunt  mu- 
rumque  subruunt.  ^Quod  turn  facile  fiebat.  Nam,  cum 
tanta  multitudo  lapides  ac  tela  conjicerent,  ^in  rnuro  consis- 
tendi  potestas  erat  nulli.'  Cum  finem  oppugnandi  nox  fe- 
cisset,  Iccius,  Remus,  summa  nobilitate  '  et  gratia  inter  suos, 
qui  tum  oppido  '''praeerat,  unus  ex  his  qui  legati  de  pace  ad 
Caesarem  venerant,  nuncios  ad  euni  mittit,"  nisi  subsidium 
sibi°  submittatur,  sese  diutius  sustinere  non  posse. 

7.  Eo  8  de  media  nocte  Caesar,  iisdem  ducibus  usus  qui 
nuncii  ab  Iccio  venerant,  Numidas  et  Cretas    .-^rgittarios,  et 

*     79.  s§  140,  1,  3d.  n  §  149,  Obs.  6. 

^     89,  3.  h  §  129,  R.  o  §  126,  R.  III. 

c  §  136,  Obs.  5,(ab.)     i  §  106,  R.  VII.  p  §  126,  R.  V. 

^     119,1.  "§128,  R.  q§112,  Obs.  4. 

'     38,2.  '§131,  R.XLI.  r§ii2,  R.  II. 

f  §99,Obs.l4th,(Zpca)«    66.  •     94,4. 


96  DK    BELLO    GALLICO.  '  ""  -.l 

funditores  Baleares,  subsidio  ^  oppidanis  mittit :  quorum  ad- 
ventu  et  Remis,''  cum.  spe  defensionis,  studium  propugnandi 
accessit,  et  liostibus ""  eadem  de  causa  spes  potiundi  '^  oppidi 
discessit.  Itaque,  paulisper  apud  oppidum  morati,^  agros- 
que  Reinorum  depopulati,^  omnibus  vicis  sedificiisque,  ^quo^^ 
adire  poterant,  incensis,  ad  castra  Cgesaris  omnibus  copiis 
coRtcnderunt,  ^et  ab^  ralUibus  ^  passu um  minus  duobus  cas- 
tra posuerunt;  quae  castra,  ut  fuino  atque  ignibus  sigrTificaba- 
tur,  amplius  millibus''  passuum  octo  in  latitudmem  patebant. 
8.  CcRsar  primo,  et  propter  multitudinem  hostium,  et 
propter  eximiam  opinionem  virtutis,  ^proelio  supersedere 
statuit ;  quotidie  tamen  equestribns  proeliis,  quid  bostis  vir- 
ttlte  posset,  et  quid  nostri  auderent,  ^  solicitationibus  peri- 
clitabatur.  Ubi  nostros  non  esse  inferiores  intellexit,  loco* 
pro  castris,  ad  aciem  instruendnm  natura  opportuno  atque 
idoneo  (quod  is  coll  is,  ubi  castra  posita  erant,  paulttlum  ex 
planitie  editus,  tantum"  advcrsus  in  latitudinem  patebat, 
quantum  loci'  acies  instructa  occupare  poterat,  atque  ^ ex 
utraque  parte  lateris  dejectus  habebat,  ^  et,  frontem  leniter 
fastigatus,  paulfitim  ad  planitiem  redibat),  ab  utroque  latere 
ejus  coUis  iransversam  fossam  obduxit  circitcr  passuum "> 
quadringentorura  ;  et  "^  ad  extremas  fossas  castella  constit- 
uit,  ibique  ^  tormenta  collocavit,  ne,  cum  aciem  instruxisset, 
hosies,  9  quod  tantum  multitudine  poterant,  ab  lateribus  pug- 
nantes''  suos  circumvenire  possent.''  Hoc  facto,  duabus  le- 
£:ion"ibus/  quas  proxTme  conscripserat,.  in  castris  relictis,  ut, 
^'^  si  qua  opus  esset,  subsidio  *"  duci  possent,'i  reliquas  sex 
legiones  pro  castris  in  acie  constituit.  Hostes  item  suas  co- 
pias  ex  castris  eductas  instruxerant. 


='§  n4,R.  &Obs.  1.       §  136,  R.  LIT.  «"§  128,  Exc. 

"  §  112,  R.  IV.  K  §  132,  Obs.  5.  "  §  106,  R.  VII. 

c§  136,Obs.  5,  (a&.)  »•  §  120,  R.  &  6,  3.  «      17,2. 

<!      112,5.  '§  136,  Obs.  5,  (in)  p     101,1. 

«     105,1.  k     44,  5.  q  §  140,  1,  2d. 

'  §  99,  Obs.  6,  &  1  §  106,  R.  VIII.  '     109,  2. 


LIB  II.    CAP.  X.  97 

9.  1  Palus  erat  non  magna  inter  nostrum  *  atque  hostium 
exercitam.  Hanc  si  nostri  transirent,  hostes  2  expectabant ; 
nostri  autem,  si  ab  illis  initium  transeundi  fieret,  ut  imped- 
1103*=  aggrederentur,''  parati  in  armis  erant.     Interim  proslio 

.equestri  inter  duas  acies  contendebatur.'*  Ubi  neutri  tran- 
seundi initium  faciunt,  ^secundiore  equitum  proelio  nostris,® 
Caesar  suos  in  castra  reduxit.  Hostes  protinus  ex  eo  loco 
ad  flumen  Axonam  contenderunt,  quod  esse  post  nostra  cas- 
tra ^demonstratum  est.  Ibi  vadis  ^  repertis,  partem  suarum 
copiarum  transducere  conati«unt,  eo  consil^j^j  ut,  si  possent,^ 
castellum,  cui "  praeerat  Quintus  Titurius  legatus,  expugna- 
rent,  pontemque  interscinderent;'  ^si  minus  potuissent,* 
agros  RemOrum  popularentur,'  qui  magno  nobis "  usui  ad 
belium  gerendum  erant,  commeatuque  nostros  prohiberent. 

10.  Caesar,  certior  factus  ab  Titurio,  omnem  equitatum, 
et  levis  armaturae'  Numidas,  funditores  "'  sagittariosque, 
pontern  transducit,  atque  ad  eos  contendit.  Acriter  in  eo 
loco  pugnatum  est.*^  Hostes  ^  impedltos  nostri  in  flamine 
aggressi,  magnum  eorum  numerum  occiderunt.  Per  eo- 
rum  corpora  reliquos,  audacissTme  transire  conantes,  multi- 
tudine  telorum  repulerunt ;  primos,  qui  transierant,  equitatu 
circumventos  interfecejinrt.  Hostes,  ubi  et  de  expugnando  " 
oppido,  et  de  fluniine  transeundo,"  spem  se  fefellisse  intel- 
lexerunt,  neque  nostros  in  locum  iniquiorem  progredi  pug- 
nandi  causa  viderunt,  atque  ipsos  res  frumentaria  deficere 
coepit,  concilio  convocato*^  constituerunt,  optimum  esse,  do- 
mum"  suam  quemque  reverti,  ut,  "^  quorum  in  fines  primiim 
Romani  exercitum  introduxissentj^  ad  eos  defendendos  un- 
dique  convenirent,''  et  potiiis  in  suis,  quam  in  alienis  finibus, 
decertarent,''  ^etdomesticis  copiis^  rei  frumentariae  uterentur.'* 


-     29,  1. 

8  §  140,  2. 

"     112,8. 

^  §  140,  1,  2d. 

h§  112,  R.  I. 

0  §  130,  4. 

<=     19,  ieos.) 

i  §  140,  1,  1st. 

p§  141,  Obs.  8. 

1     65. 

^§  114,  R. 

q  §  140,  1,  4th.     ^ 

«§  111,  &  19. 

»  §  106,  R.  VII. 

'  §  121,  R.  XXVI. 

'      109. 

m     119,  1. 
9 

98  DE  BELLO  GALLICO.  ^ 

Ad  earn  sententiam,  cum  reliquis  causis,  ^  haec  quoque  ratio  " 
eos  deduxit,  quod  Divitiacum  atque  iEduos  finibas  Bellova- 
corum  appropinquare''  cognoverant.     2  His  "^  persuaderi,  ut  ^ 
diutius  morarentur,^neque  suis  auxilium  ferrent,  non  poterat,.'^' 

11.  Ea  re  constituta,  secunda  vigilia ''  magno  cum  strepitu  V 
ac  tumultu  castris^  egressi,  ^nullocerto  ordine  neque  impe-  'Y 
rio,  ^ciim  sibi^  quisque  primum  itineris  locum  peteret,  etT^ 
domum  ^  pervenire  properaret,  fecerunt,  ut  consimilis  fugseTj 
profectio  videretur.'^     Hac  re"  statim^  Caesar,  per  specnlat5-(J) 
res  cognita,  ^insj^ias  veritus,  quod,  qua  de  causa  disced erent/  ^ 
nondum  perspexerat,  exercitum  equitatumque  castris^  con- 
tin  uit.     Prima  luce,'^  confirmata  re^  ab  exploratoribus,  om-    ) 
nem  equitatura,  qui  novissimum  agmen  moraretur,*^  prsemi- 
sit.     His  ^  Quintum  Pedium  et  Lucium  Aurunculeium  Cot- 
tam  legatos  prsefecit.     Titum  Labienum  legatum  cum  legi- 
ombus  tribus  subsequi  jussit.    Hi,  novissimos  adorti,  et  multa 
millia'  passuum  prosecuti,    magnam  multitudinem  eorum 
fugientium  conciderunt,  ^cum  ab  extremo  agmine,  ad  quos™ 
i^entum  erat,"  consisterent,"  fortiterque  impetum  nostrorum 
militum  sustinerent ;  °  prioresque  (quod  abesse  a  periciilo 
viderentur,  neque  ulla  necessitate  neque  imperio  contineren- 
tur),  exaudito  clamore,''    perturbatis  ordinibus,*"    omnes  in 
fuga  sibi  praesidium  ponerenf.°    Ita  sine  ullo  periculo,  ^  tan- 
tam''    eorum   multitudinem  nostri    interfecerunt,   quantum 
fuit  diei  spatium  :  sub  occasumque  solis  destiterunt,  seque 
in  castra,  ut  erat  imperatum,  receperunt. 

12.  Postridie  ejus  diei  Cassar,  priusquam  se  hostes  ex  ter- 
rore  ac  fuga  reciperent,""  in  fines  Suessionum,   qui  proximi  • 
Remis  erant,  exercitum  duxit,  et,  magno  itinere''  confecto,. 
ad  oppidum  Noviodunum  contendit.     Id  ex  itinere  oppug- 

^§  9672^  r§~126,  4.~~  °  §  67,  5,  Note, 

b  §  126,  R.  III.  '^     109.  °  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

c  §  140,  1,  3d.  i  §  140,  5.  p  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

d  §  131,  R.  XL.  k  §  ui,  Obs.  2,  4th.  1     44,  3. 

e  §  136,'  Obs.  5.  1  §  131,  R.  XLI.  '  §  140,  4. 

f  §  123,  R.  '"§  99,  Exc.  1. 


LIB.  II.    CAP.  XIV.  99 

nare  conatus,  quod  ^  vacuum  ab  defensoribus  esse  audiebat 
propter  latitudinem  fossse  murique  altitudinem,  paucis  de- 
fendentibus,  expugnare  non  potuit.  Castris  munitis,  2  vineas 
agere,  quaeque  ad  oppugnandum  usui''  erant,  comparare 
ccepit.  Interim  omnis  ex  fuga  Suessionum  multitude  in  op- 
pidum  proxima  nocfe  convenit.  Celeriter  vineis  "^  ad  oppi- 
dum  actis,  ^aggere  jacto,  ^turribusque  constitutis,  magnitu- 
dme '^  operum,  quae  neque  viderant  ante  Galli  neque  audie- 
rant,  et  celeritate  Romanorum  permoti,  legates  ad  Cseslrem 
de  deditiOne  mittunt,  et,  ^  petentibus  Eemis  ^  ut  conserva- 
rentur,*^  ^impetrant. 

^^  13.  Cassar,  obsidibus*'  acceptis,  primis*  civitatis  atque 
ipsius*^  Galbag  regis  duobusfiliis,  armisque  ^  omnibus  ex  op- 
pido  traditis,  in  deditionera  Suessiones  accepit,  exercitum- 
que  in  Bellovacos  duxit.  Qui^  cum  se  siiaque  omnia  in  op- 
pidum  Bratuspantium  contulissent,''  atque  ab  eo  oppido  Ca3- 
sar  cum  exercitu  circiter  millia  passuum  quinque  abesset, 
omnes  ^majores  natu,  ex  oppido  egressi,  manus  ad  Caesa- 
rem  tendere,  et  voce  significare  coeperunt,  sese  in  ejus  fidera 
ac  potestatem  venire,'  neque  contra  Populum  Romanum  ar- 
mis  contendere.  Item,  cum  ad  oppidum  accessisset,^  cas- 
traque  ibi  poneret,  pueri  mulieresque  ex  muro  ^passis  man- 
ibus,''  suo  more,''  pacem  ab  Romanis  ^  petierunt. 

14.  Pro  his  Divitiacus  (nam  post  discessum  Belgarum, 
dimissis  iEduorum  copiiS.^ad  eum  reverterat)  ^facit  verba  : 
Bellovacos'  omni  tempore iniOfi(je  atque  amicitia  civitatis 
JEduas  fuisse  : '"  impulses  a  suis  principibus,  qui  dicerent," 
JEduos,  a  Ceesare  in  servitutem  redactos,  omnes  indignita- 
tes  cenlumeliasque  perferre,'  ei  ab  iEduis  defecisse '"  et 
Populo    Romano    bellum    intulisse.'"'     Qui"  hujus   consilii 


»§  114,  Obs.  4. 

(ei 

) 

f     32. 

k  §  124,  Obs.  2. 

"»>      109, 2. 

?     39,  6. 

1  §  145,  R.  LVIII. 

c  §  129,  11. 

■"§  140,  Obs.  4.  & 

"•     98,2. 

d  5  140,  1,  3:1. 

74,  8. 

»  §  140,  6. 

'•5  97.  II.  ?;  I'.K 

>    r!«5, 2. 

-     37,  lst.(eo5.) 

100  D5    BfiLLO    GALLICO. 

principes  fuissent,  quod  intelligerent  quantam  calamitatem 
civitati  intulissent,*  in  Britanniam  profugisse.^  Petere  inon 
solum  Bellovacos,''  sed  etiampro  his  ^duos,*"  ut  sua  demen- 
tia ac  mansuetudine  in  eos  utatur.^  Quod  *  si  fecerit,  ^du- 
orum  auctoritatem  apud  omnes  Belgas  amplificaturum  ;  quo- 
rum auxiliis  atque  opibus,  si  quabella  inciderint/  sustentare 
consuerint."^ 

Il5.  Caesar,  honoris''  Divitiaci '^  atque  iEduorum  causd, 
sese  eos  in  fidem  recepttirum/  et  conservaturum,  dixit :  sed, 
quod  erat  civitas  magna  inter  Belgas  auctoritate,"  atque 
hominuni  multitudine  "^  praestabat,  sexcentos  obsides  popos- 
cit.  His  traditis,  omnibusque  armis  ex  oppido  collatis,  ab 
eo  loco  in  fines  Ambianorum  pervenit,  qui  se'  suaque  omnia 
sine  mora  dediderunt.  Eorum  fines  Nervii  attingebant: 
quorum  de  natura  moribusque  Caesar  cum^  quaereret,  sic  re- 
periebat :  "  Nullum  aditum  esse  ad  eos  raercatoribus : "' 
3 nihil  pati  vini,  reliquarumque  rerum  ad  luxuriam  pertinen- 
tium,  inferri,"  quod  his  rebus"  relanguescere  animos  et  re- 
mitti  virtutem  existimarent :  ^  esse  homines  feros,  magnse- 
que  virtutis  :.  P  ^jncrepitare  atque  incusare  reliquos  Belgas, 
qui  se  Popiilo  Romano  dedidissent,*'  patriamque  virtutem 
projecissent :  '^  ^  confirmare,  sese  neque  legatos  missuros,' 
neque  ullam  ^conditionem  pacis  accepturos."  * 

16.  Cum  per  eorum  fines  triduum  iter  fecisset,  invenie- 
bat  ex  captivis,  Sabim  flumen  ab  castris  suis  non  amplius 
millia""  passuum  decem  abesse:  trans  id  flumen  omnes  Ner- 
vios  consedisse,''  adventumque  ibi  Romanorum  "^  expectare, 
una  cum  Atrebatibus  et  Veromanduis,  finitimis  suis  (nam 
his*  utrisque  persuaserant,  uti  eandem  belli  fortunam  expe- 
rirentur) :  ^  expectari  etiam  ab  his  Aduatucdrum  copias,  at- 


'^  §  140,  5. 

s  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

n       90,  4. 

b     98,  2. 

h  §  106,  Obs.  2. 

0  §  129,  R. 

c  §  145,  R.  LVIII. 

i      100,  2. 

p  §  106,  R.  VII. 

1  §  140,  1,  3d. 

k  §  128,  R. 

q§  141,  R.  III. ' 

«•     37,  Note.  3,  &  38. 

1      31,  5,  Note. 

r  §  132,  R. 

f  §45,111.  2. 

««§  112,  R.  II. 

s      63,  3. 

^^ 


LIB.  II.    CAP.  XVHI.  101 

que  esse  in  itineie  :  ^mulieres,  quique^  per  astatem  ad  pug - 
nam  inutiles  viderentur,''  in  eum  locum  conjecisse,  quo  prop- 
ter paludes  exercitui ""  aditus  non  esset. 

17.  His  rebus  cogmtis,  exploratores  centurionesque  prae- 
mittit,  qui  locum  idoneum  castris  deligant.^  Ciimque  ex  de- 
dilitiis  Belgis  reliquisque  Gallis  complures,  Ccesarem  secQti, 
una  iter  facerent;*"  quidam  ex  his,  ut  pos.tea  ex  captivis  cog- 
nitum  est,  2  eorum  dierum  ^  eonsuetudme  ^  itineris  ^  nostiri 
exercitus  perspecta,  nocte  ad  Nervios  pervenerunt,  atque  iis" 
deraonstrarunt,  inter  singulas'  legiOnes  impedimentorum 
magnum  numerum  intercedere,  ^neque  esse  quicquam  ne- 
golii,''  ciim  prima  legio  in  castra  venisset,'  reliquseque  legia- 
nes  magnum  spaiium  "'  abessent,  banc  sub  sarcmis  adoriri :  " 
4 qua  pulsa,^  impedimentisque  direptis,'  futurum,  ut  reliquse 
contra  consistere  non  auderent.VfAdjuvabat  ^  etiam  eoriirn 
consilium  qui  rem  deferebant,  quod  Nervii  antiquitus,  cum 
equitatu''  nihil''  possent  (neque  enim  ad  hoc  tempus  ^ei  rei 
student,  sed,  quicquid"  possunt,  pedestribus^  valent  copiis), 
quo  facilius  finitimorum  equitatum,  si  praedandi  causa  ad 
eos  venisset,'  impedirent,"  teneris  aiboribus*"  "^  incisis  atque 
inilexis,  ^crebris  in  latitudinem  ramis*  et  rubis  sentibusque 
interjectis  effecerant,  ut  instar  *'  muri  has  sepes  munimenta 
prajberent ;  quo  non  modo"'  intrari,  sed  ne  perspTci  quidem 
posset.  His  rebus  cum  iter  agmmis  nostri  impediretur,  non 
omittendum  sibi  consilium  Nervii  aestimaverunt. 

18.  ®  Loci  natura  erat  hsec,  quem  '^  locum  nostri  castris  de- 
legerant.  Collis,  ab  summo  asqualiter  decllvis,adflumen  Sa- 
bim,  quod  supra  nominavimus,  vergebat.    Ab  eo  flumine  pari 

*     37,  1st.  i      26,  5.  '§  116,  Obs.  3. 

»>  §  141,  Obs.  7.  1^  §  106.  R.  VIII.  »      37,  8,Note.2.  &  >•. 

c§  112,  R.  II.  '     80,  3.  t  §  140,  2. 

J  §  141,  Obs.  2.  4th.     »"§  132,  R.  XLII.  "  §  140,  1. 

e  §  44,  II.  °  §  144,  R.  LVI.  V  §  136,  Obs.  5.  (ad) 

t     109,  2.  o  §  140,  1,  4th.  ^'§  134,  Obs.  5. 

K§106,  Obs.  2.  p     51.  ^     37,  6,  Note.  3 

h     63.  1  §  129,  R. 


102  DE   BELLO    GALLICO. 

acclivitate  cbllis  nascebatur,  adversus  huic*  et  contrarius, 
passus''  circiter  ducentos  linfima  apertus,  ab  saperiore  parte 
silvestris,  ut  non  facile  introrsus  perspici  posset.''  Intra  eas 
silvas  hostes  in  occulto'*  sese  continebant:  in  aperto  loco, 
2 secundum  flumen,  paucae  stationes  equitum  videbantur. 
Flummis  erat  altitudo  pedum  circiter  trium.* 

19.  Caesar,  equitatu  praemisso,  subsequebatur  omnibus  co- 
piii!Pi^  sed  ratio  ordoque  agmiais  ^  aliter  se  habebat,  ac  ^  Bel- 
gae  ad  Nervios  detulerant.  Nam,  quod  ad  hostes  appropin- 
quabat,  consuetudine  suaCassar  sex  legiones*expeditas  du- 
cebat:  post  eas  totius  exercitus  impedimenta  collocarat :  inde 
duas  legiones,  quas  proxime  conscriptee  erant,  totum  agmen 
claudebant,  praesidioque''  impedimentis''  erant.  Equitesnos- 
tri,  cum  funditoribus  sagittariisque  flumen  transgressi,  cum 
hostiura  equitatu  proelium  commiserunt.  Cum  se  illi  ^iden- 
tidem  in  silvas  ad  suos  reciperent,'  ac  rursus  ex  silvu  in  nos- 
trosvimpetum  facerent,'  neque""  nostri  longiiis,  quam  ^quem' 
ad  finem  porrecta  ac  loca  aperta  pertinebant,  cedentes  inse- 
qui  auderent:'  interim  legiones  sex,  quae  primai*"  venerant, 
opere  dimenso,  castra  munlre  coiperunt.  Ubi  prima  impedi- 
menta nostri  exercitus  ab  his,  qui  in  silvis  abditi  latebant, 
visa  sunt  C'  quod  tempus  inter  eos  committendi  proelii  conve- 
nerat),  ita,  ut  intra  silvas  aciem  ordinesque  constituerant, 
atque  ipsi  sese  confirmaverant,  subito  omnibus  copiis  ^  pro- 
volaverunt  impetumque  in  nostras  equites  fecerunt.  His 
facile  pulsis  ac  proturbatis,  incredibili  celeritate  ad  flumen 
dccucurrerunt,  ut  pa^ne  uno  tempore  et  ad  silvas,  et  in  flu- 
mine,  et  jam  sinmanibus  nostris  hostes  viderentur.*"  Ea- 
dcm  autem  celeritate  ^dverso  coUe  ad  nostra  castra,  atque 
eos,"  qui  in  opere  occupati  erant,  contenderunt. 

*  §  111,  R.  f  §  132,  Obs. 5, (cwm)  "  §  93,  1,  (and  not.) 

»  §  132,  R.  XLII.  s  §  149,  Obs.  6  i     37,  2d,  5,  Note.  1. 

c  §  140,  1,  1st;  (ita.)  h  §  114,  R.  m    93,  Obs.  10. 

«»  §  90,  6.  i  §  140,  Obs.  4,  &  «  §  149,  R.  &  Exp. 
«§132,  Obs.  3.                   74,3 


LIB,  II.    CAP,  XXI.  103 

20.  CsBsari ""  omnia  uno  tempore  erant  agenda :  ^  ^  vexillum 
proponendum,''  quod  erat  insigne,  cum  ad  arma  concurri 
oporteret :  signum  tuba  dandum :  ^  ab  opere  revocandi ''  mill- 
tes :  2  qui  paulo  longiias  *=  aggeris  petendi  causa  processerant, 
arcessendi :  ^  acies  instruenda,''  milites  cohortandi,''  signum 
dandum  : ''  quarum  ^  rerum  magnam  partem  temporis  brevi- 
tas,  et  3successus  et  incursushostium  impediebat.  His  difR- 
cultatibus^  duae  res  ^  erant  subsidio/  scientia  atque  usus 
militum,  quod,  superioribus  prceliis  exercitati,  quid  fieri 
oporteret,^  non  miniis  commode  ipsi  siW  preescribere,  quam 
ab  aliis  d6ceri  poterant ;  et  quod  ab  opere  ^  singulisque  * 
legionibus  ^  singulos '  legatos  Caesar  discedere,  nisi  munltis 
castris,  vetuerat.  Hi,  propter  propinquitatem  et  celeritatem 
hostium,  6  nihil  jam  Csesaris  imperium  spectabant,  sed  '''per 
se,  qusB^videbantur,  administrabant. 

21.  Csesar,  necessariis  rebus  imperatis,  ad  cohortandos 
milites,  ^  quara  ^  in  partem  fors  obtulit,  decurrit,  et  ad  legio- 
nem  decimam  devenit.  Milites  non  longiore  oratione '  co- 
hortatus,  quam  uti  su83  pristinge  virtutis  memoriam  retine- 
rent,""  neu"  i^perturbarentur "'  animo,  hostiumque  impetum 
fortiter  sustinerent ; "'  quod  non  longius  hostes  aberant,  quam 
quo  telum  adjici  posset,"  proelii  committendi  signum  dedit. 
Atque  in  alteram  partem  item  cohortandi  causa  profectus, 
pugnantibus  p  occurrit.  Temporis  tanta  fuit  "  exiguitas, 
hostiumque  tam  paratus  ad  dimicandum  animus,  ut  non  mo- 
do  ad  insignia  accommodanda,''  sed  etiam  ad  galeas  induen- 
das'i  scutisque  tegumenta  detrahenda  tempus  defuerit/ 
Quam  quisque  in  partem  ab  opere  casu  devenit,  quasque 
prima  signa  conspexit,  ad  hsec  constitit,  ne,  in  quserendo 
suos,  pugnandi  tempus  dimitteret.^ 

*  §  126,  Obs  3.  s  §  140,  5.  "  §  93,  1,  (and  not,) 

^     108,  2.  "^     63.  o  §  140,  5. 

c§120,  Obs.  5.  i     26,5.  p  §  112,  R.  IV.  &  19. 

•I     38.  k     37, 2d,  5.  Note.  1,  <i     112,7. 

"  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (in.)    i  §  129,  R.  '  §  140,  1,  1st. 

f  §  114,  Ob8.4,  nostri>^.  «"§  140,  1,  3d.  •  §  140,  1,  2d. 


104  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

22.  Instructo  exerc.itu,  magis  ut  loci  natura,  ^  dejectusque 
collis,  et  2necessitas  temporis,  quam  ut  lei  militaris  ratio 
atque  ordo  postulabat,  cum  diversis  locis  '^  legiones,  alise  alia 
in  parte,**  hostibus  resisterent,  sepibusque''  densissimis,  ut 
ante  demonstravimus,  interjectis  ^  prospectus  impediretur : '^ 
neque  *  certa  subsidia  coUocari,  neque  quid  in  quaque  parte 
opus  esset  provideri,  neque  ab  uno  omnia  imperia  adminis- 
trari  poterant.  Itaque,  *  in  tanta  rerum  iniquitate,  fortunae 
quoque  eventus  varii  sequebantur. 

23.  Legionis  nonae,  et  decimae  milites,  ut  ^  in  sinistra  parte 
acie  constiterant,  pilis  emissis/  cursu  ac  lassitudme"  ^exan- 
imatos,  vulneribusque  confectos,  Atrebates  C^nam  his  ea  pars 
obvenerat),  celeriter  ex  loco  superiore  in  flumen  compule- 
runt;  et,  transire  conantes  insectiti  gladiis,*^  magnam  partem 
eorum  impeditam  interfecerunt.  Ipsi  transire  flumen^  non 
dubitaverunt ;  et,  in  locum  iniquum  progressi,  rursus  regres- 
sos  ac  resistentes  hostes,  redintegrate  prcslio,''  ^  in  fugam 
dederunt.  Item  alia  in  parte  ^diversas  duae  legiones,  unde- 
cima  et  octava,  profligatis  Veromanduis,  quibuscum  erant 
congress!,  ex  loco  superiore  in  ipsis*  flummis  ripis  prcelia- 
bantur.  i^At  tum,  totis  fere  a  fronte,  et  ab  sinistra  parte, 
nudatis  castris,*"  cum  in  dextro  cornu  legio  duodecima,  et 
non  magno  ab  ea  intervallo  septima  constitisset,*^  omnes 
Nervii  conferti"ssimo  agmine,'^  duce  Boduognato,*"  qui  sum- 
mam  imperii  tenebat,  ad  eum  locum  contenderunt :  quorum 
pars  aperio  latere  legiones  circumvenire,  pars  ^^summum' 
castrorum  locum  petere,  coepit. 

24.  Eodem  tempore  equites  nostri,  i^levisque  armaturae™ 
pedites,  qui  cum  iis  una  fuerant,  ^^quos"  primo  hostium  im- 
petu''  pulses  dixeram,  cijm  se  in  castra  reciperent,^  i^adver- 


»  §  136,Obs.  5,  (in.) 

f      104,  1. 

J      17,  2. 

«>§  98,Obs.  11,&25. 

s  §  136,  R.  LII. 

«§  106,  R.  VII. 

«  §  129,  R. 

h     109,  2. 

n  §  145,  Obs.  2,  & 

•>  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

i      32,  6. 

91,4. 

"     124,  5. 

k     110,  1. 

LIB.  II.    CAP.  XXV.  W5 

sis  hostibus  occurrebaiit,  ac  rursus  aliani  in  partem  fugam 
peiebant:  et  i  calones,  qui  ab  ^decumana  poita,  ac  summo 
jugo  collis,  nostros*  victores  flumen  transisse^  conspexerant, 
prasdandi  causa  egressi,  cum  respexissent  et  hostes  in  nps- 
tris  castris  ^versari'^  vidissent, >  praecipltes '^  fugae  sese  man- 
dabant.  Simul  eorum,  qui  cum  impedimentis  veniebant, 
clamor  fremitusque  oriebatur,  aliique  aliam  ^  in  partem  per- 
territi  ferebantur.*^  Quibus  ^  omnibus  rebus  permoti  equites 
Treviri,  quorum  inter  Gallos  virtutis  opinio  est  singularis, 
qui  auxilii  causa  ab  civitate  missi  ad  Caesarem  venerant, 
cum  muitiludme  "^  hostium  castra*"  nostra  compleri,*"  legio- 
nes  '"^  premi ""  et  pasne  circumventas  teneri,  calones,*  equites, 
funditores,  Numidas,  sdiversos  dissipatosque,  in  omnes  par- 
tes fugere*"  vidissent,'  desperatis  nostris  rebus,  domum  con- 
tenderunt :  Romanos  "  pulsos "  superatosque,  castris  ^  impe- 
dimentisque  eorum  hostes  potitos,''  civitati  renunciaverunt. 
25.  Cassar,  ab  decimal  legiOnis  cohortatione  ad  dextrum 
corn u  pro fectus,  ubi  suos*^  ^ui-geri,'^  signisque  in  unum  lo- 
cum collatis  duodecimse  legionis  confertos  miiites'^  sibi""  ip- 
sos '  ad  pugnam  esse  impedimento  ;  "'  quartae  cohortis  omni- 
bus centurionibus  occisis,  signiferoque  interfecto,  signo 
amisso,  reliquarum  cohortium  omnibus  fere  centurionibus 
aut  vulneratis  aut  occisis,  in  his  ^  primopilo,  Public  Sextio 
Baciilo,"  fortissimo  viro,"  multis  gravibusque  vulneribus 
'®confecto,  ut  jam  se  sustinere  non  posset;"  reliquos*  esse 
tardiores,  et  nonnullos  ab  novissimis  desertos  ^  proelio  ^  ex- 
(ledere  ac  tela  vitare  ;  hostes  ^  neque  ^  a  fronte  ex  inferiore 
loco  ^^  subeuntes  intermittere,*^  et  ab  utroque  latere  instare  ;  '^ 
et  rem""  esse*^  in  angusto  vidit,  neque  ullum  esse  *"  subsidium, 
quod  submitti  posset:^  scnto  ab  novissimis  uni  militi''dg- 

^  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  s     38.  §  129,  R  >»  §  97,  R. 

»>     98,  2.  ^§  126.  R.  V.  »  §  140, 1,  1st.  (ita.) 

«     96,  2.  .  i  §  140,  Obs.  4.  p     101,  4. 

d  §  98,  Obs.  10  k  §  121,  R.  XXVI  «J  §  136,  R.  LII 

«§  98,Obs.  11,&25.  1     S3,  1.  '  §  126,  R.  III.&5,1 

f     116,3  «>§  114,  R  •  §  141,  R.  I 


106  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

tracto  (quod  ipse  eo  sine  scuto  venerat),  in  primam  aciera 
processit,  centurionibusque  nominatim  appellatis,''  reliquos 
cohortatus  milites,  ^  signa  inferre  et  manipiilos  laxare''  jus- 
sit,  quo  facilius  gladiis  *"  uti  possent.^  2  (jujug  adventu  spe 
illata  militibus,^  ac  redintegrate  ammo,  ciim  ^pro  se  quisque/ 
in  conspectu  imperatoris,  et  jam  in  extremis  suis  rebus,  ope- 
ram  navare  cuperent,^  paulum  hostium  impetus  tardatus  est. 

26.  Caesar  ciim  septimam  legionem,"  quae  juxta  constite- 
rat,  item  urgeri '  ab  hoste  vidisset,  tribunes  *"  militum  mon- 
uit,  ut  paulatim  sese  ^legiones  conjungerent,  et  conversa 
signa  in  hostes  inferrent.  Quo  facto,  cum  alius  *^  alii  subsi- 
dium  ferteat,^  neque  timerent  *ne'  aversi  ab  hoste  circumve- 
nirentur,  audacii!ls  r'esistere  ac  fortius  pugnare  coeperunt. 
Interim  milites  legionum  duarum,  quee  in  novissimo  agmine 
prsesidio  ""  impedimentis  fuerant,  prcelio  nunciato,  cursu  in- 
citato,  in  summo  colle  ab  hostibus  conspiciebantur.  Et  Ti- 
tus Labienus,  castris ""  hostium  potitus,  et  ex  loco  superiore, 
quce  res  in  nostris  castris  gererentur,"  conspicatus,  decimam 
legionem  subsidio ""  nostris  misit.  Qui,"  cum  ex  equitum 
et  calonum  fuga,  quo  in  loco  res  esset,"  quantoque  in  peri- 
ciilo  et  castra,  et  legiones,  et  imperator  ^  versaretur,''  cogno- 
vissent,^  '''  nihil  ad  celeritatem  sibi  reliqui  fecerunt. 

27.  Horum  adventu  tanta  rerum  commutatio  facta  est,  ut 
nostri,  etiam  qui  vulneribus  confecti  procubuissent,''  scutis ' 
innixi,  proelium  redintegrarent ; '  tum  calones,  perterritos 
hostes  conspicati,  etiam  inermes  armatis  •"  occurrerent;  equi- 
tes  vero,  ut  turpitudtnem  fugse  virtute  delerent,'  s  omnibuS 
in  locis  pugnse  se  legionariis  militibus  prasferrent.  At  hos- 
tes, etiam  in  extrema  spe  salutis,  tantam  virtutem  ^  prasstit- 

»     104,  1.  6  §  140,  Obs.  4.  °     39,  2. 

»>     90,  4,  (eos.)  ^  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  p  §  102,  Obs.  1. 

c  §  120,  R.  XXVI.  &  i      96,2.  1  §  141,  Obs.  3. 

7,  5.  k     63,  3.  '  §  112,  R.  IV. 

d  §  140,  1.  1  §  140,  Obs.  6.  *  §  140,  1,  1st. 

«>  §  126,  R.  III.  '"§114,  R.  t§140,  1,  2d. 

'  §  98.  Ex.  4    (illi.)  °  §  140,  6. 


LIB.  II.    CAP.  XXIX,  107 

erunt,  ut,  cum  primi  eorum  cecidissent,  proxirni  jacentibus 
insisterent,  atque  ex  eorum  corporibus  pugnarent :  his  de- 
jectis,  et  coacervatis  cadaveribus,  ^  qui'"  superessent,''  2utl 
ex  tumulo,  tela  in  nostros  conjicerent,''  et  pila  intercepta  re- 
mitterent :  *"  ut  non  nequicquam  tantag  virtutis  ^  homines  ju- 
dicari  deberet  ^  ausos  esse  ^  transire  latissimum  flumen,^  as- 
cendere  ahissimas  ripas,  subire  iniquissimum  locum  :^  quae 
facilia  ex  difficillimis  animi  magnitudo  3  redegerat. 

28.  Hoc  proelio  facto,''  et  ^  prope  ad  internecionem  gente 
ac  nomine  Nerviorum  redacto,^  majores  natu,  quos'  una 
cum  pueris  mulieribusque  in  «  aestuaria  ac  paludes  collectos^ 
dixeramus,  hac  pugna  nunciata,''  cum  victoribus  6  nihil  "  im- 
peditum,'  victis  nihil''  tutum '  arbitrarentur,  omnium,  qui 
supererant,  consensu  legatos  ad  Cjesarem  miserunt  seque  ei 
dediderunt;  et,  in  commemoranda ""  cintatis  calamitate,  ex 
sexcentis  ad  tres  senatores,  ex  hominum  millibus  sexaginta 
vix  ad  quingentos,  qui  arma  ferre  possent,"  sese  redactos 
esse'' dixerunt.  "^  Quos  Cassar,  ut  in  miseros  ac  supplices 
usus°  misericordia  videretur,^  diligentissTm^  conservavit, 
suisque  finibus  atque  oppTdis  uti  jussit,  et  finitfmis  ^  impe- 
ravit,  ut  ab  injuria  et  maleficio  se  suosque  prohiberent.** 

^9.  Aduatuci,  de  quibus  supra  scripsimus,  cum  omnibus 
copiis  auxilio  ■"  Nerviis  venirent,  hac  pugna''  nunciata,  ex 
itinere  domum  reverterunt;  cunctis  oppidis  castellisque  de- 
sertis  sua  omnia  in  unum  oppidum,  egregie  natura  munitum, 
contulerunt.  Quod*  cum  ex  omnibus  in  circuitu  partibus 
Saltissimas  rupes  despectusque  haberet,  una  ex  parte  leniter 
acclivis  aditus,  in  latitudinem  9 non  amplii!is  ducentorum  pe- 
dum, relinquebatur :  quem*  locum  duplici  altissimo  muro 
munierant ;  tum  magni  ponderis  ^  saxa  et  prasacutas  trabes 

"»     37,  (w.)  s§136,  R.  LII.  °  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

b§140,Obs.8.  h     109,2.  »§  145,  Obs.  3. 

«§140,  1,1st.  i  §  145,  Obs.  2.  p     63,3. 

d  §  106,  R.  VII.  ^  §  145,R.LVIII.  (esse)  i  §  140,  1,  3d. 

«§  140,  l,2d.  1  §  103,  R.  '  §  114,  R. 

f     98,  2,  &  94,  1, 2d.  «»     112,8.  •     38,l,(oppUum.) 


108  DE  BELLO  GALLICO. 

in  muro  collocarant.  Ipsi  erant  ex  Cimhris  Teutonisque  prog- 
nati ;  qui,  cAm  iter  in  provinciam  nostram  atque  Ttaliam  fa- 
cerent,  ^iis  impedimentis,'^  quae  secum  agere  ac  portare  non 
poterant,  citra  flumen  Rhenum  depositis  custodiae''  ex  suis 
ac  prsesidio  ^  sex  millia  hominum  reliquerunt.  Hi,  post  eo- 
rum  obitum,  multos  annos**  a  finitimis  exagitati,  ^ciYm  alias 
bellum  inferrent,  alias  illatum  defenderent,  consensu  eorum 
omnium  pace  facta,  hunc  sibi*  domicilio''  locum  delegg- 
runt. 

30.  Ac  primo  adventu*^  exercitiis  nostri  crebras  ex  oppido 
excursiones  faciebant,  parvulisque  proeliis  ^  cum  nostris  con- 
tendebant:  postea,  vallo  ^ pedum"  duodecim,  in  circuitu 
quindecim  millium,^  crebrisque  castellis*^  circummuniti,  op- 
pido ^  sese  continebant.  Ubi,  ^vineis  actis,^  aggere  exstructo, 
turrim''  procul  constitui  viderunt,  primuni  irridere'  ex  muro, 
atque  increpitare  '  vocibus,*^  ^  quo  tanta  machinatio  ab"  tanto 
spatio  institueretur '  ?  quibusnam  manibus,*^  aut  quibus  viri- 
bus,  prjfisertim  homines  tantiilas  stalurae'^  (nam  plerumque 
hominibus  Gallis,''  ^prse  magnitudme  corporum  suorum,  bre- 
vitas  nostra  contemtui  est),  tanti  oneris^  turrim '^  in  muros 
sese  collocare  confiderent  ? ' 

31.  Ubi  verb  ^  moveri,  et  appropinquare  moenibus"*  vide- 
runt, nova  atque  inusitata  specie*^  commoti,  legatos  ad  Cae- 
sarem  de  pace  miserunt,  qui,  ^  ad  hunc  modum  locuti :  "  Non 
se  existimare"  Romanes  sine  ope  divma  bellum  gerere,"  qui 
^tantae  altitudinis*  machinationes  tanta  celeritate  promo- 
vere,  '^et  ex  propinquitate  pugnare,  possent :  se  °  suaque 
omnia  eorum  potestati  permittere,"  dixerunt.  ^i"Unum 
petere"  ac  deprecari :  si  forte,  pro  sua  dementia  ac  mansue- 
tudine,  quam  ipsi  ab  aliis  audirent,^  statuisset,  Aduatiicos 

»§114,  R.  f§136,  Obs.  5.  '§140,5. 

»>§  131,R.  XLI.  s     109,2.  'n§112,  R.  IV. 

o§  131,  R.  XL.  ««§  15,  3.  »     96,2. 

d§129,  R.  i§144,  Obs.  6.  »     31. 

•  §  106,  R.  VII.  It  §  132,  Obs.  5.  p  §  141,  Obs.  7. 


LIB.  II.    CAP.  XXXIII.  109 

esse  conservandos,  ne  se  armis  despoliaret :  *  sibi  omnes  fere 
finitimos  ^  esse  inimicos,'^  ac  suae  virtuti  '^  invidere  ;  a  qui- 
bus  se  defendere,  traditis  armis,^  non  possent.*^  i  Sibi  '^  pree- 
stare,  si  in  eum  casum  deducerentur,*  quamvis  fortunam  a 
Popiilo  Komano  pati,  quam  ab  his  *'  per  cruciatum  interfici, 
inter  qiios  dominari  consuessent.'"" 

32.  Ad  haec  Cagsar  respondit :  "  Se  magis  consuetudine* 
sua,  quam  merito '  eomm,  civitatem  con'servaturum,''  si 
2prius,  quam  murum  aries  attigisset/  se  dedidissent: '  sed 
deditionis  nullam  esse  conditionem,*'  nisi  armis  traditis:  se" 
id,  quod  ^in  Nerviis  fecisset,*"  facturum,''  finitimisque  impera- 
turum,''  ne  quam  dedititiis"  Populi  Romani  injuriam  infer- 
rent."*  Re  nunciata  ad  suos,  "  qua;  imperarentur,  facere  '"* 
dixerunt.  Armorum  magna  multitudine^  de  muro  in  fossam, 
quae  erat  ante  oppTdum,  jacta,  sic  ut  prope  summam  ^muri 
aggerisque  altitudinem  acervi  armorum  adaequarent ;  et  ta- 
men  circiter  parte  ^  tertia,  ut  postea  perspectum  est,  celati  at- 
que  in  oppido  retenta,  portis^  patefactis,  eo  die  pace^  sunt  usi. 

33.  s  Sub  vesperum  Caesar  portas  claudi  "^  militesque  ex 
oppido  exire  '^  jussit,  ne  quam  noctu  oppidani  ab  militibus  in- 
juriam acciperenf  Illi,  anto  inito,  ut  intellectum  est,  con- 
silio,^  quod,  deditione^  facta,  nostros  praesidia  deducturos," 
ai]t  denique  indiligentius  servaturos,''  crediderant,  partim 
cum  his,  quae  retinuerant  et  celaverant,  armis,  partim  scu- 
tis  ex  cortice  factis  aut  viminibus  intextis,  quae  subito  (ut 
temporis  exiguitas  postulabat),  pellibus*  induxerant,  ^  tertia 
vigilia,^  qua  minime  arduus  ad  nostras  munitiones  ascensus 
videbatur,  omnibus  copiis"  repente  ex  oppido  eruptionem 
fecerunt.     Celeriter,    ut '  ante  Caesar  imperarat,    "^ignibus* 


*§  140,  1,  3d. 

h  §  126,  Obs.  2. 

p  §  121,  R.  XXVI 

b  §  145,  R.  LVIII. 

»  §  129,  R. 

q     90,  4. 

c  §  103,  Obs.  2. 

k     100,  2. 

r  §  140,  1,  2d,  & 

i§  112,  R.  IV.    - 

'      80,  1,  &2. 

121,  3. 

«     109,  2. 

«>§  140,  6. 

•  §  125,  R. 

f  §  141,  Obs.  7r 

"  §  123,  R. 

t  §  131,  R.  XL. 

«  §  140,  2. 

0     94, 3. 
10 

u  §  136,  Obs.  5,  cum. 

110  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

significatione  facta,  ex  proximis  castellis  e6  concursum  est,* 
pugnatumque ""  ab  hostibus  ^ita  acnter,  ut**  a  viris  fortibus, 
in  extretna  spe  saltitis,  inlquo  loco,  contra  eos,  qui  ex  vallo 
turribusque  tela  jacerent,''  pugnari  debuit,'^  ciim  in  una  vir- 
tute  pronis  spes  salutis  consisteret.*'  Decisis  2 ad  hominum 
millibus^  quatuor,  reliqui  in  oppidum  rejecti  sunt.  Postri- 
die  ejus  diei,  refractis  portis,*^  ciam  jam  defenderet®  nemo, 
atque  intromissis  militibus  nostris,  ^sectionem  ejus  oppidi 
universam  Cassar  vendidit.  Ab  his,  qui  emerant,  ^capitum 
numerus  ad  eum  relatus  est  millium  quinquaginta  trium. 

34.  Eodem  tempore  ^  a  Public  Crasso,  quern  cum  legione 
una  miserat  ad  Venetos,  Unellos,  Osismios,  Curiosolitas, 
Sesuvios,  Aulercos,  Rhedones,  qua)  sunt  maritimse  civitates 
*  Oceanumque  attingunt,  ^  certior  factus  est,  omnes  eas  civ- 
itates in  ditionem  potestatemque  Populi  Romani  esse  re- 
dactas.'' 

35.  His  rebus '^  gestis,  omni  Gallia^  pacata,  tanta  hujus 
belli  ad  barbaros  opinio  perlata  est,  uti  ab  his  nationibus, 
quae  trans  Rhenum  incolerent,'  mitterentur ''  legati  ad  Caesa- 
rem,  quas  se'  obsides  daturas,"*  imperata  facturas,  polliceren- 
tur  :  *  quas  "  legatiOnes  Caesar,  quod  in  Italiam  Illyricumque 
properabat,  inita  proxima  asstate"  ad  se  reverti  jussit.  Ipse 
in  Carnutes,  Andes,  Turonesque,  quas^  civitates  propinquae 
his  locis"*  erant,  ubi  helium  gesserat,  legionibus  ^  in  hiberna 
deductis,  in  Italiam  profectus  est,  oh  easque  res,  ex  Uteris 
Caesaris,  '''dies'"  quindecim  supplicatio  decreta  est,  quod* 
ante  id  tempus  accidit  nulli.^ 

________  ^  ^  ^^^^  R.  XL.  0  §  146,  Obs.  9. 

"  §  140,  Obs.  1.  "     98,  6.  P     37,  4,  &  Note.  1. 

«=  §  141,  Obs.  3.  '§  141,  Obs.  3.  q  §  111,  R. 

<«  §  113,  Obs.  1,  &  Jt  §  140,  1,  1st.  >•  §  131,  R.  XLI. 

88,  7.  »  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  »     37,  Note.  3,  9. 

«  §  140,  Obs.  4.  •»     100,  2.  t  §  m,  R.  IV.  &  19. 


109,  2. 


BOOK    III. 

GENERAL    ARGUMENT. 

I.  War  with  the  Nantuates,  Veragri,  and  Seduni — Chap.  1-6. 
11.  War  with  the  Veneti— Chap.  7-16.  III.  War  with  the  Unelli— 
Chap.  17-19.  IV.  Expedition  of  Crassus  into  Aquitania — Chap. 
20-27.  V.  Expedition  of  Caesar  against  the  Morini  and  Menapii — 
Chap.  28-g9. 

1.  Cum  in  Italiam  proficisceretur  Csesar,  Servium  Galbam 
cum  legiOne  duodecima,  et  parte  equitatus,  in  Nantuates, 
Veragros,  Sedunosque  misit,  qui  ab  finibus  Allobrogum,  et 
lacu  Lemanno,  et  flumine  Rhodano,  ad  surnmas''  Alpes  per- 
tinent. Causa  mittendi  fuit,  quod  iter'' per  Alpes,  ^  quo, 
magno  cum  periculo  2  magnisque  cum  portoriis,  mercatores 
ire  consuerant,  patefieri''  volsbat.  Huic*^  permisit,  si  opus 
esse  arbitraretur,  utl  in  eis  locis  legionem  hiemandi  causa 
coUocaret.*  Galba,  sec^mdis  aliquot  proeliis*^  factis,  castel- 
lisque  compluribus  eorum  expugnatis,  missis  ad  eum  undi- 
que  legatis,*^  obsidibusque  datis,  et  pace  facta,  constituit,  co- 
hortes  duas  in  Nantuatibus  collocare,  et  ipse  ^  cum  reliquis 
ejus  legionis  cohortibus  in  vico  Veragrorum,  qui  appellatur 
Octodurus,*'  hiemare:  qui*  vicus,  positus  in  valle^non  mag- 
na adjecta  planitie,  altissimis  montibus  undique  continetur. 
Cum3hic  in  duas  partes  flumine  divideretur,  alteram*  par- 
tem ejus  vici  Gallis "  concessit,  alteram,'  vacuam  ab  illis  re- 
lictam,  cohortibus  ad  hiemandum  attribuit.  ^Eum  locum  val- 
lo  fossaque  munlvit. 

2.  Cum  dies  hibernorum  complures  transissent,  frumen- 
tumque  eo  comportari''  jussisset,  subito  per  exploratoreg  cer- 
tior  factus  est,  ex  ea  parte  vici,  quam  Gallis  concesserat, 
omnes''  noctu  discessisse,""   montesque,  qui  impenderent,  a 


=^     17,  2. 

*  §  140,  1,  3d. 

-  §  38,  2. 

b  §  145.  R.  LVIII. 

'     109,  2. 

k  §  123,  R. 

c     94,  3. 

«     32,3, (constituit.) 

1      27,  10,  Obs. 

-1     63. 

"  §  103,  R. 

•"     98,  2. 

'■ij-f^f*!  t-,i»iPfM(M.-..»^  m  *w«tw 


112  DE    BELLO    GAlfKlCO. 

maxima  multitudme  Sedunorum  et  Veragrorum  teneri.*  Id 
aliquot  de  causis  acciderat,  ut  subito  Galli  belli  renovandi'* 
legionisque  opprimendsB*'  consilium  caperent  f  primum,  quod 
legionem,  ^neque  eam  plenissimam,  detractis  cohortibus 
duabus,  et  compluribus  ■*  Sgingillatim,  qui  commeatus  peten- 
di  causd  missi  erant,  absentibus,  propter  paucitatem  despi- 
ciebant:  turn  etiam,  quod,  propter  iniquitatem  loci,  cum  ipsi 
ex  montibus  in  vallem  ^decurrerent,*  et  tela  conjicerent,* 
4  ne  primum  quidem  posse  impetum  sustinere  ^  existimabant. 
®Accedebat,  quod  suos  ab  se  liberos  ^  abstractos*"  obsidum 
nomine  dolebant :  et  Romanos^  non  solum  itinerum  causa, 
sed  etiam  perpetuse  possessionis,  culmina  Alpium  occupare 
conari,  et  ea  loca  finitimae  provincise  adjungere,  ^sibi'  per- 
suasum  habebant. 

8,  His  nuntiis  acceptis,  Galba,  cum  neque  opus  hiberno- 
rum,  munitionesque  plene  essent  perfectse,  '''neque  de  fru- 
mento  reliquoque  commeatu  satis  esset  provisum,''  quod,  de- 
ditione  facta,  obsidibusque  acceptis,  ^  nihil  de  bello  timen- 
dum  existimaverat,  consilio  celeriter  convocato,  sententias 
exquirere  ccepit.  Quo'  in  consilio,  ciim  tantum  repentini 
periculi  praster  opinionem  accidisset,  ac  jam  omnia  fere  su- 
periora  loca  multitudine"*  armatdrum  completa  conspiceren- 
tur,  ^neque  subsidio  °  veniri,  neque  commeatus  supportari 
interclusis  itineribusP  possent,  prope  jam  desperata  salute, ^ 
nonnullsB  bujusmodi  sententiae  dicebantur,  ut,  impedimentisP 
relictis,  eruptione  facta,  iisdem  itineribus,"  quibus  ''  eo  per- 
venissent,  ad  salutem  contenderent."  lo  Majori  tamen  parti ' 
placuit,  hoc  ^  reservato  ad  extremum "  consilio,  interim  rei 
e^ventum  experiri  et*  castra  defendere. 

*  96,  2.  8  §  145,  R.  LVIII.         »  §  136,  Obs.  5.  cum. 
^     112,5.                       h     98,2.  p     109,2. 

«  §  140,  1,  4tli.  i  §  126,  R.  III.  q  §  129,  R. 

^     19,  (miimbus.)  fc     65.  r  §  113^  r. 

•  §  140,  Obs.  3,  &  1      38.  "19,  (casum.) 
§  45,  II.  1.  >"§  126,  R.  V.  t  §  149,  R. 

'97,7.  °§  140,1,1st. 


m\mm»9!m^vmmm»  '■■  'imJ^'' 


LIB.  III.    CAP.  VI.  113 

4.  Brevi  spatio  interjecto,  vix  ut  his  rebus,*"  quas  constit- 
uissent,''  ^  collocandis  *^  atque  administrandis'^  tempus  dare- 
tur,*^  hostes  ex  omnibus  partibus,  signo  dato,  decurrere,* 
lapides  Sgaesaque  in  vallum  conjicere:^  nostri  primo  ^inte- 
gris  viribus  fortiter  repugnare,^  neque  uUum  ^frustra  telum 
ex  loco  superiore  mittere  * :  ut  *  quaeque  pars  castrorum  nu- 
data  defensoribus  ^  premi  videbatur,  eo  occurrere,*  et  auxil- 
ium  ferre :  ^  ^  sed  hoc  superari,"  qu64  diuturnitate  pugnae 
hostes  defessi  proelio''  excedebant,  alii  integris  viribus  suc- 
cedebant :  quarum  rerum  a  nostris  propter  ^paucitatem  fieri 
nihil  poterat;  ac  '  non  modo'  defesso"  ex  pugna  excedendi, 
sed  ne  saucio "  quidem  ejus  loci,  ubi  constiterat,  relinquen- 
di,'  ac  sui  recipiendi,'  facultas  dabatur. 

6.  Cum  jam  amplius  horis™  sex  continenter  pugnaretur, 
ac  non  solum  vires,  sed  etiam  tela,  nostris"  deficerent,"  at- 
que hostes  acrius  instarent,  languidioribusquenostrisP  vallum 
scindere,  et  fossas  complere,  coepissent,"  resque  esset"  jam 
8 ad  extremum  perducta  casum,  Publius  Sextius  Baculus, 
primi  pili  centurio  *  quern*'  Nervico  proelio  compluribus  con- 
feetum  vulneribus  diximus,  et  item  Caius  Volusenus,  tribQ* 
nus  militum,  vir  et  consilii""  magni  et  virtutis,  ad  Galbam 
accurrunt,  atque  unam  esse  spem  salutis  docent,  si  eruptione 
facta,  extremum  auxilium  experirentur.  Itaque,  '^convocS- 
tis  centurionibus,  celeriter  milites  certiores  facit,  paulisper 
intermitterent  ^  proslium,  ac  tantummodo  tela  missa  excipe- 
rent,*  seque  ex  labore  reficerent;  post,  dato  signo,  ex  castris 
erumperent,*  atque  omnem  spem  salutis  in  virtute  ponerei^t.* 

6.  Quod  jussi  sunt,  faciunt ;  ac,  subit6  ^^  omnibus  portis 
eruptione  facta,  neque  cognoscendi,  quid  fieret,  neque  sui ' 

»§  114,  R,  (si6t.)  g§126,  R.  V.  "§112,  R.V. 

•'§  141,  Obs.  8.  '' §  136,  R.  LII.  o  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

c     112,6.  i  §  134,  Obs.  5.  1-      19,  &  110. 

d  §  140,  1,  1st,  (ita.)  k     19,&  §  126,R.III.  ^     91,  4. 

*  §  144,  Obs.  6.  J      112,  5.  '  §  106,  R.  VII. 

f  §  140,  Obs.  1.  «§  120,  R.  *  §  140,  Obs.  5. 


^/i^^'mmsm^^r^W^ 


114  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

colligendi,  hostibus  *  facultatem  relinquunt.  Ita  commulatd 
forttin^,''  eos,  qui  in  spem  potiundorum  "  castrorum  vene- 
rant,  undique  circumventos  interficiunt,  et,  i  ex  hominum 
raillTbus  amplius^  triginta,  quern  ^  numerum  barbarOrum  ad 
caslra  venisse  constabat,^  plus*^  tertia  parte  interfecta,  reli- 
quos  perterritos  in  fugam  conjiciunt,  ac  ne  in  locis  quidem 
superionbus  consistere  patiuntur.  Sic,  omnibus  hostium 
copiis  ^  3  fusis,  armiaque  extitis,  se  in  castra  munitionesqiie 
suas  recipiunt.  Quo  ^  proelio  facto,  quod  S3epii\s  fortunam 
tentare  Galba  nolebat,  atque  ^alio^  sese  in  biberna  consilio 
venis^''  meminerat,  aliis^  occurrisse''  rebus  viderat,  maxi- 
1113  frumenti  commeatusque  inopia  permotus,  postero  die* 
omnibus  ejus  vici  jEdificiis''  incensis,  in  Provinciam  reverti 
contendit ;  ac,  nuUo  hoste  prohibente,  aut  iter  demorante, 
incolumem  legionem  in  Nantuates,  inde  in  Allobrogas,  per-, 
duxit,  ibique  hiemavit. 

8.  His  rebus  ^  gestis,  cum  ^  omnibus  de  causis  Caesar  pa- 
catam  Galliam  existimaret,  superatis  Belgis,''  expulsis  Ger- 
inanis,  victis  in  Alpibus  Sedtinis,  atque  ita,  inita  iiieme,''  in 
Illyricum  profectus  esset,  quod  eas  quoque  nationes'^  adire, 
et  regiones  cognoscere,  volebat,  subitum  bellum  in  Gallia 
coortum  est.  Ejus  belli  hsec  fuit  causa.  Publius  Crassus 
adolescens  cum  legione  septimaproximus  ^mare'  Oceanum 
in  Andibus  hiemarat.  Is,  quod  in  his  locis  inopia  frumenti 
erat,''^prsBfectos  tribunosque  militum  complures  in  finitimas 
civitates,  frumenti  commeatusque  petendi'^  causa,  dimisit : 
quo  in  numero  erat  Titus  Terrasidius,  missus  in  Esubios ; 
Marcus  Trebius  Gallus  in  Curiosolitas ;  Quintus  Velanius, 
cum  Tito  Silio,  in  Venetos. 

8.  Hujus  est  civitatis  longe  amplissima  auctoritas  omnis 
orse  ■"  maritimce  regionum  earum ;  quod  et  naves  habent  Ve- 

»§123,  R.  .  «     37,  2d,  &  Note.  1.  '  §  131,  R.  XL. 

b     109,  2.  ^     38,  3.  ^  §  136,  R.  LII. 

c     112,5.  g§98,  Obs.  12.  '  §  136,  Obs.  5,(arf.) 

«»  §  120,  Obs.  3.  »•     98,  2.  •»§  107,  R.  X.  Exp. 


LIB.  in.  CAP.  tx.  lis 

neti  plurimas,  quibus  in  Britanniam  navigare  consuerunt,  et 
Jscientid^  atque  usu  nauticavum  rerum  reliquos''  antece- 
dunt,  et,  2  in  magno  impetu  maris  atque  aperto,  paucts  por- 
tubus  interjectis,  quos  tenent  sipsi,'^  omnes  fere,  qui  ^eo 
raari  uti  consuerant,  habent  ^vectigales.  Ab  iis  fit  initium 
retinendi'*  Silii  atque  Velanii,  quod  per  eos  suos  se  obsides, 
quos  Crasso  dedissent,  recuperaturos  ^  existimabant.  Horuin 
auctoritate  finitimi  adducti  (©utsunt  Gallorum  sublta '^  et 
repentina  consilia),  eadem  de  causa  Trebium  Terrasidium- 
que  retinent,  et,  celeriter  missis  legatis,^  per  suos  principes 
inter  se  conjurant,  nihil  nisi  communi  consilio  acturos,*"  eun- 
demque  ''omnis  fortunse  exitum  esse  latfiros;^  reliquasque 
civitates  solicitant,  \it  in  ea  libertate,  quam  a  majoribus  ac- 
ceperant,  permanere,  quam''  Romanorum  servitutem  per- 
ferre,  mallent.'  Omniora^  maritima  celeriter  ad  suam""  sen- 
tentiam  perducta,  communeni  legationem  ad  Publium  Cras- 
sum  mittunt,  '*  si  velit  »suos  recipere,  obsides  sibi  remittat.'* 
9.  Quibus  de  rebus  Caesar  ab  Crasso  certior  factus,  quod 
ipse"-'  aberat  longius,  ^  naves  interim  longas  '^dificari'  in  flu- 
mine  Ligeri,  quod  influit  in  Oceanum,  ^^remiges  ex  Provin- 
ci'a  institui,'  nautas  gubernatoresque  comparari'  jubet.  His 
rebus  ^  celeriter  administratis,  ipse,*"  cum  primiim  per  anni 
tempus  potuit,  ad  exercitum  contendit.  Veneti,  reliquEeque 
item  civitates,  cognito  Cae^aris  adventu,''  simul  quod,  quan- 
tum in  se™  factnus  admisissent,"  intelligebant  (legatos, 
quod  "  nomen  apud  omnes  nationes  sanctum  inviolatumque 
semper  fuisset,  retentos  ab  se  et  in  vincula  conjectos),  ''pro 
magnitudme  periciili  bellum  parare,  et  maxima  ea,  quae  ad 
usum  navium  pertinent,  providere  instituunt ;  '^hoc  majore 
spe,   quod  multum  natural  loci  confidebant.     '3  Pe(iestria 

»  §  128,  R.  s     109,  2.  «"§  28,  Foot  note,  t 

!>§  116,  Obs.  4.  i' §  149,  Obs.  1.  "§140,5. 

c     32,  3.  i  §  140,  1,  3d,  &  o     37,  2d,  4,  & 

1     112,  5.  §  137,  Obs.  1.  Note.  1. 

«     100,2.  k     30,  2.  p§  121,  Obs.  2. 

f  §  103,  Obs.  2.  '     90,  1. 


116 


DK    BELLO    GALLtCU. 


esse  itinera  concisa*  sestuariis,  i  navigationem  *^  impeditam* 
propter  inscientiamlocoriam  paucitatemque  portuumsciebant: 
^neque**  nostros  exercitus**  propter  frumenti  inopiam  diutius 
apud  se  morari  posse,  confidebant :  ac  jam,  ut  omnia  contra 
^opinionem  acciderent,""  tamen  se  '^  plurimum  navibus  pos- 
se :  ^  Romanos  "^  neque  ullam  facultatem  habere  ^  navium, 
nequeeorum  locorum,  ubi  bellum  gesturi  essent,*"  vada,  por- 
tus,  insulas  novisse :  ^  ac  ^longe  aliam  esse'  navigationem 
in  concluso  mari,  atque*"  in  vastissimo  atque  apertissimo 
Oceano,  perspiciebant.  His  initis  consiliis,  oppida  muniunt, 
frumenta  ex  agris  in  oppida  comportant,  naves  in  Venetiam, 
ubi  Ceesarem  primum  bellum  gestiiruni  '^  constftbat,  quam  ' 
plurimas  possunt,  cogunt.  Socios  sibi  ad  id  bellum  Osis- 
mios,  Lexovios,  Nannetes,  Ambiliatos,  Morinos,  Diablintes, 
Menapios  adsciscunt :  auxilia  ex  Britannia,  quss  contra  eas 
regiones  posita  est,  arcessunt. 

10.  s  Erant  has  difficultates  belli  gerendi,  quas  supra  os- 
tendimus  ;  sed  inulia"'  Caesarem  tamen  ad  id  bellum  incita- 
bant :  ^injuriae"  retentorum"  cquitum  Romanorum  ;  ^re- 
bellio  facta  post  deditionem  ;  defectio"  datis  obsidibus  ;  tot 
civitatum  conjuratio  ;"  in  primis,  ^  ne,  hac  parte  neglecta,  re- 
liquae  nationes  ^  idem"*  sibi  licere  arbitrarentur.  Itaque  cum 
intelligeret,  omnes  fere  Gallos  "^  lOnovis  rebus  *'  studere,'  et, 
ad  bellum  mobi liter  celeriterque  excitari,^  omnes  autem 
homines  11  natura  libertati ''  studere,  et  i^conditionera  ser- 
vitutis  odisse ;  priusquam  plures  civitates  conspirarent,''  par- 
tiendum*^  sibi*  ac  latius  distribuendum  exercitum  putavit. 

11.  Itaque  Titum  Labienum  legatum  in  Treviros,  qui  prox- 
imi  Rheno  flumini  sunt,  cum  equitatu  mittit.  Huic  mandat, 
Remos  reliquosque  Belgas  adeat,  atque  in  officio  contineat ; 


«     98,  2. 

s§  84,3. 

"  §  97,  R. 

S^  93,  \, (and— not.) 

h  §  149,  Obs.  6. 

<•  §  146,  Obs.  2.            *: 

c  §  140,  3. 

i      96,  Exc.  I.  9. 

p  §  11 3, Obs. 4. /acere 

d  §  145,  R.  LVIII. 

k     100,  2. 

q§112,  R.  V. 

«     96,  2. 

J  §  134,  Obs.  6,  3d. 

r  §  140,  4. 

f  §  140,  5,  &§79.  8. 

tn     19,  (negotia.) 

^  §  147,  R.  &  113.  5 

.!M  mmif9^  t>.ir^<^^nm. 


LIB.  III.    CAP.  XIII.  117 

Germanosque,  qui  ^auxilio''  a  Belgis  arcessTti  "^  dicebantur, 
si  per  vim  navibiis  flu  men  transire  conentur,  prohibeat.''  Pub- 
lium  Crassum  cum  cobortibus  legionariis  duodecim,  et  mag- 
no  numero  equitatus,  in  Aquitaniam  proficisci  jubet,  ne  ,ex 
his  nationibus  auxilia  in  Galliam  mittantur/  ac  tantse  nati- 
ones  conjungantur.'*  Quintum  Titurium  Sablnum  legatum 
cum  legionibus  tribus  in  Unellos,  Curiosolitas,  Lexoviosque 
mittit,  2 qui*  earn  raanum  distinendam  *^  curet.  Decimum 
Brutum  adolescentem  classi,  Gallicisque  navibus,  quas  ex 
Pictonibus  et  Santonis  reliquisque  pacatis  regionibus  con  ve- 
nire jusserat,  praeficit,  et,  cum  primum  possit,-  in  Venetos 
proficisci  jubet.     Ipse  eo  pedestribus  copiis  contendit. 

12.  Erant  ejusmodi  fere  3  situs  oppidorum,  ut,  posita  ^in 
extremis  lingiilis  promontoriisque,  neque  pedibus '  aditum 
haberent,''  «  cum  ex  alto  se  sestus  incitavisset,^  quod  bis  acci- 
dit  semper  horarum  viginti  quatuor  spatio,  neque  navibus,' 
quod,  rursus  ^minuente  aestu,  "^^  naves  in  vadis  afflictarentur.'' 
Ita  ^utraque  re'  oppidorum  oppugnatio  impediebatur ;  ac,  si 
quando  raagnitudine'  operis  forte  superati,  extruso  mari 
^aggere  '  ac  molibus,  atque  his  ferme  oppidi  mcembus  ™  adas- 
quatis,  suis  fortunis  °  desperSre  ccEperant,  magno  numero 
navium  ^^appulso,  cujus  rei  summam  facultatem  habebant, 
sua  deportabant  omnia,  seque  in  proxima  oppida  recipiebant. 
Ibi  se  rursus  iisdem  opportunitatibus '  loci  defendebant. 
Haec  eo  faciliiis  magnam  partem"  aestatis  faciebant,  quod 
nostraB  naves  tempestatibus'  detinebantur;  summaque  erat 
vasto  atque  aperto  mari,"^^magnis  aestibus,'  raris  ac  prope 
nullis  portubus,'  difficultas  navigandi. 

13.  Namque  ipsorum  naves  ad  hunc  modum  "^^  [nctse  ar- 
mataeque  erant.     Carinae^^liquanto  planiores,  quam  ^  nos- 

»§  114,  R.  &Obs.  4.  '      103,4.  ">§126,  R.  IIL        ' 

*•     92,  2.  s  §  140,  Obs.  4.  "  §  136,  Obs.  5. 

*e§  140,   1,3d.  »>§  140,  1,  1st.  o§131,R.  XLI. 

<!•§  140,  1,  2d.  i  §  123,  R.  p  §  149,  R.  Sup.  ro- 

«>§  141,  Obs.  2,  4th,  J' §  139,  2,  &  76,  2.  rlnte 

;  and  40.  i  §  129,  R. 


PI!l|fJ.J'fJl.l«,WWI*..l|pPi»,!JI'i!);j.fl|^JiipiXf^^ 


118  OE  BELLO  GALLICO. 

trarum  navium,  quo  faciliiis  vada  ac  decessum  cestus^excip- 
ere  possent : '^  prorae  admodurn  erectae,  atque  item  puppes, 
ad  magnitudinem  fluctuum  tempestatumque  accommodatse : 
naves  totse  factas  ex  robore,''  2  ad  quamvis  vim  et  contume- 
liam  perferendam: "  transtra  ^  pedalibus  in  latitudinem  tra- 
bibus ''  confixa  clavis  ferreis,  ^  digiti  poliicis  crassitudine  :  * 
anchorae,  pro  funibus,  ferreis  catenis  revinctse :  ^  pelles  pro 
velis,  alutasque  tenuiter  confectae,  sive  *"  propter  lini  inopiam 
atque  ejus  usus  inscientiam,  sive  eo/  quod  est  magis  verisi- 
mile,  quod  tantas  tempestates^  Oceani  tantosque  impetus 
ventorum  sustineri,''  ac  tanta  onera^  navium  ^regi*"  velis 
non  satis  commode,  arbitrabantur.  '^Cum  his  navibus  nos- 
trae  classi*  ejusmodi  congressus  erat,  ut  una  celeritate "  et 
pulsu  remorum  prsestaret,8reliqua,  pro  loci  natura,  pro  vi 
tempestatum,  iliis '  essent  aptiora  et  accomnlodatiora:  ^ne- 
que  enim  his  "'  nostras  rostro  "  nocere  poterant ;  tanta  in  eis 
erat  firmitudo :  neque  propter  altitu-dinem  facile  telum  adji- 
ciebatur;  et  eadem  de  causa  minus  commode  lOcopulis  ° 
continebantur.  Accedebat,  ut,  ciim  ^^saevlre  ventus  coepis- 
set  et  se  vento  dedissent,  et°  tempestatem  ferrent  faciliiis, 
et  "  in  vadis  consisterent  p  tutius,  et,  ab  aestu  derelictae,  nihil'' 
saxa  et  cautes  timerent :  quarum  rerum  omnium  nostris  na- 
vibus ""  '2  casus  erant  extimescendi. 

14.  Compluribus  expugnatis  oppidis,  Caesar,  ubi  intellexit, 
frustra  tantum  laborem^  sumi,  neque  hostium  fugam  ^  cap- 
tis  oppidis  reprimi,  i3 neque  his  noceri  posse,*  statuit  expec- 
tandum  classem.  Quae  ubi  convenit,  ac  primum  ab  hostibus 
visa  est,  circiter  ducentae  et  viginti  naves  eoram  ^^paratis- 
simae,  atque  omni  genere "  armorum  ornatissimag,  profec- 
tae    ex   portu,    nostris'    adversas    constiterunt :    neque   satis 

a  §  140,  1.  f  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  "  §  129,  R. 

b  §  128.  Obs.  2.  h     94^  3.  o     124,  1. 

c     112,7.  i§112,  R.  II.  P§  140,  1,4th. 

d  §  106,R.VII.  &6,1.  ^  §  128,  R.  n  §  122,  Obs.  6. 

«     124,  3.  I  §  lll.R.  '§  126,  Obs.  3. 

f  §  129,  R.  '"§112,  R.V.  •  §  113,  R.  &Obs.  1. 


pii.u)..jiiiiiiiliiiiipi^k«ii,.  m«^M  Mw^.jijfv^.'  'wsmifmmm''w 


LIB.  III.    CAP.  XV.  ^  119 

^Bruto,*  qui  classi^  prseerat,  vel  tribunis*  militum  centuri- 
onjbusqne,  quibus  '^  singulae  naves  erant  attributae,  constabat, 
quid  agerent,*^  aut  2  quara  ratidneni  pugnae,  insisterent.* 
Rostro "  enim  noceri  non  posse  ^  cognoverant ;  turribus  autem 
excitatis,  tamen  has  altitudo  puppium  ex  barbaris  navibus 
superabat;  ^  ut  neque  ex  inferiore  loco  satis  commode  tela 
adjici  possent,^  et  missa  ab  Gallis  ^gravius  acciderent.  Una 
erat  magno  usui""  res  praeparata  anostris,  ^falces'  prajacutaB, 
insertae  affixaeque  longuriis,*^  nonabsimili''  forma'  ^muraliuia 
falcium.""  His*  cum  funes,  qui  antennas  ad  malos  destina- 
bant,'^comprehensi  adductlque  erant,  navigio  remis'  incitato 
praerumpebantur.  Quibus"  abscissis,  antennas  necessario 
concidebant,  ut,  ciim  omnis  Galllcis  navibus  °  spes  in  velis 
armamentisque  consisteret,  his  ereptis,  omnis  usus  navium 
uno  tempore  eriperetur.*^  Reliquum  erat  certamen  positum 
in  virlute,  qua  nostri  milites  facile  superabant,  atque  eo  ma- 
gis,  quod  in  conspectu  Caesaris  atque  omnis  exercitus  res 
gerebatur,  ut  nullum  paulo  fortius  factum  ®  latere  posset :» 
omnes  enim  colles  ac  loca  superiora,  unde  erat  propinquus 
despectus  in  mare,  ab  exercitu  tenebantur. 

15.  Dejectis,  ut  diximus,  antennis,  ^ciimP  singiilas''  binae 
ac  tern ae  naves  circumsteterant,  milites  summa  vi "  i^tran- 
scendere  in  hostium  naves  contendebant.  Quod  "■  postquam 
barbari  fieri  animadverterunt,  expugnatis  compluribus  navi- 
bus, ciim  ei  rei*^  nullum  reperiretur  auxilium,  fuga^  salutem 
petere  contenderunt :  ac,  jam  conversis  in  eam  partem  navi- 
bus, 11  quo  ventus  ferebat,  tanta  subito  malacia  ac  tranquil- 
litas,  extitit,  ut  se  ex  loco  movere  non  possent.  Quae  quid- 
em  res  ad  negotium  conficiendum  raaxime  fuit  opporttina : 
.nam  singiilas*'  nostri  consectati  expugnaverunt,  ut  perpaucag 

»§113,  R.  8§140,  1,  2d.  «»§  111,  Obs.  2. 

''§112,  R.I.  »>§  114,  R.  &Obs.  4.  »     38,5. 

c  §  126,  R.  III.  i  §  97,  R.  o  §  110,  Obs.  1,  R. 

<3§  140,  5.  k     16,  2.  p§  140,  Obs.  3. 

•  §  129,  R.  1  §  106,  R.  VII.  or  1     26. 

§  128,  R.  '  §  145,  R.  &  38,  4. 


41  ,,jfiM'vm4iiim.»i^.fmm^'^m-m-^'^  -^  i.^fjfiipiii^pipvnipppillll 


120  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

ex  omni  numero,  noctis  interventu,  ad  terrain  pervenerint, 
ci^m  *  ab  hora  fere  quarta  usque  ad  solis  occasum  pugnaretur. 

16.  Quo''  proelio  bellum  Venetoram  totiusque  orae  mariti- 
maB  confectum  est.  Nam,  cum  omnis  juventus,  omnes  etiam 
*  g-ravioris  SBtatis,''  in  quibus  aliquid  consilii'^  aut  dignitatis 
fuit,  eo  convenerant;  turn,  navium  quod  ^  ubique  fuerat, 
unum  in  locum  cotigerant :  quibus^  amissis,  reliqui,  neque 
quo  se  reciperent^  neque  quemadmodum  oppida  defenderent,* 
habebant.  Itaque  se  suaque  omnia  Cassari  dediderunt.  2  In 
quoseo  gravius  Csesar  vindicandum''  statuit,  quo  diligentius 
inreliquum  tempus  a  barbaris  jus  legatorum  conservaretur.' 
Itaque,  omni  senatu*"  necato,  reliquos  ^sub  corona  vendidit. 

17.  Dum  hssc  in  Venetis  gerunlur,  Quintus  Titurius  Sa- 
binus  cum  iis  copiis,  quas  a  Caesare  acceperat,  in  fines  Unel- 
15rum  pervenit.  His  praserat  Viridovix,  ac  summam  imperii 
tenebat  earum  omnium  civitatum,  quae  defecerant,  ex  quibus 
exercTtum  magnasque  copias  coegerat.  ^Atque  his  paucis 
diebus"  Aulerci  Eburo vices,  Lexoviique,  senatu*^  suo  inter* 
fecto,  quod  auctores  belli  esse  nolebant,  portas  clauserunt 
seque  cum  Viridovice  conjunxerunt ;  magnaque  praeterea 
multitudo  undique  ex  Gallia  *perditorum  hominum  latronum- 
que  convenerant,  quos  spes  prasdandi,  studiumque  bellandi, 
ab  agricultura  et  quotidiano  labore  revocabat.  Sabinus  ido- 
neo'  omnibus  rebus  loco*"  castris  sese  tenebat,  ciim  Virido- 
vix contra  eum  duorum  millium  spatio  consedisset,  quotidie- 
que  productis  copiis*"  pugnandi  potestatem  faceret  ;'*  ut  jam 
non  solum  hostibus"  in  contemtionem  Sabinus  veniret,"  sed 
etiam  nostrorum  militum  vocibus  ^nonmhil  carperetur :  tan- 
tamque  opinionem  timoris  praebuit,  ut  jam  ad  vallum  cas- 
trorum  hostes  accedere  auderent.P    Id  ea  de  causa  faciebat. 

»  §  140,  Obs.  3.  f      109,  2.  •      16. 

b     38,  9,  &§129,  R.     g§140,  5  ">§  136,  Obs.  5,  (w.) 

c§106,  R.  VII.  ^     113,5.  "  §  110,  Obs.  1,  R. 

1  §  106,  R.  VIII.  i  §  140,  1.  o  §  140,  1,  2d. 

•  §  106,  Obs.  10.  k  §  131,  R.  XLI.  p  §  140,  1,  1st. 


jpippnippipp  pum  I  mmmmw^wWI^:  -  Mmm^   n  i  .vmf.m-Pim*^  w  i 


LIB.  III.    CAP.  XIX.  121 

qu6d  cum  tanta  multitudme  hostium,  prajsertim  ^eo'^  absente, 
qui  summam  imperii  teneret,^  nisi  aequo  loco,  aut  opportu- 
nitate  alTqua  data,  legato*"  dimicandum  non  existimabat. 

18.  2  Hac  confirmata  opinione  timoris,  idoneum  quendam 
hominem  et  callidum  delegit,  Galium,  ex  his,  quos  auxilii 
causa  secum  habebat.  Huic  ^  magnis  praemiis  pollicitationi- 
busque  persuadet,  uti  ad  hostes  transeat  ;^  et,  quid  fieri  velit,*" 
edocet.  Qui,^  ubi  pro  perfiiga  ad  eos  venit,  timorem  Ko- 
manorum  ^proponit:  "quibus  angustiis''  ipse  Cassar  a  Ve- 
netis  prematur,'"'  docet:  ^neque  longius  abesse,  quin  prox- 
ima  nocte  Sabinus  clam  ex  castris  exercitum  educat,'  et  ad 
CaBsarem  auxilii  ferendi  causa  proficiscatur.'"  Quod""  ubi 
audltum  est,  conclamant  omnes,  occasionem  negptii  bene 
gerendi  amittendam  non  esse,'  ^ad  castra  iri  oportere. 
Multae  res  ad  hoc  consilium  Gallos  hortabantur :  superi5- 
rum  dierum  Sabini  cunctatio,""  ^  perfiigaB  confirmatio,  inopia 
cibariorum,  cui  rei"  parum  diligenter  ab  iis  erat  provisum, 
spes  Venetici  belli,  et  quod  fere  libenter  homines  id,  quod 
volunt,  credunt.  His  rebus  ^  adducti,  non  prius  Viridovicem 
reliquosque  duces  ex  concilio  dimittunt,  quam  ab  his  sit" 
concessum,  arma  uti  capiant ''  et  ad  castra  contendant.  Qua 
re  concessa,  laeti,  ut  explorata  victoria,  sarmentis  virgultis- 
que  collectis,  "^  quibus ''  fossas  Romanorum  compleant,**  ad 
castra  pergunt. 

19.  Locus  erat  castrorum  editus,  et  paulatim  ab  imo  ac- 
clivis  circiter  passus  "■  mille.  Hue  magno  cursu  contende- 
runt,  ut  8  quam  minimum  spatii  *  ad  se  colligendos  armandos- 
que  Romanis  daretur,  ^  exanimatique  pervenerunt.  Sabinus, 
sues  hortatus,  cupientibus  signum  dat.  Impeditis  hostibus 
propter  ea,  quas  ferebant,  onera,  subito  duabus  portis  erup- 


»      110. 

6     39, 5. 

°§  113,  R. 

.»'§  141,  Obs.  8. 

«»  §  129,  R. 

0  §  140,  4. 

c§  147,  R.  &  113. 

'  §  140,  3. 

p§  140,  1,4th. 

<>§  123,  R.  &63. 

^     38. 

q  §  141,  Obs.  2.  4th. 

•  §  140,  1,  3d. 

1      108,  4. 

'  §  132,  R.  XLII. 

'  §  140,  5. 

m§97,R. 

n 

•  §  106,  R.  VIII. 

1^  ft».^Wflif.»!J^ypi|!!im.JlJJJ;^'LPIiLi|.  IWIIII  .  Jlll||iPPIWWi?pilflily|ipt|pilJJPv-,W' 


122  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

tionem  fieri  jubet.  Factum  est  opportunitate  loci,  hostium 
inscientia  ae  defatigatione,  virtQte  militum,  superiorum  pug- 
narum  exercitatione,  ut  ne  unum  quidem  nostrorum  impe- 
tum  ferrent,^  ac  statim  terga  verterent.  Quos''  impeditos 
^integris  viribus*"  milites  nostri  consectiti,  magnum  nume- 
rum  eorum  occiderunt ;  reliquos  equTtes  consectati,  paucos 
qui  ex  fuga  evaserant,  reliquerunt.  Sic,  uno  tempore,  et 
de  navali  pugna  2  Sabmus,  et  de  Sabini  victoria  Caesar  cer 
tior  factus  ;  civitatesque  omnes  se  statim  Titurio  dediderunt 
Nam,  ut''  ad  bella  suscipienda^  Gallorum  aiacer  ac  prom 
tus  est  animus,  sic  mollis  ac  Sminime  resistens  ad  calamita 
tes  perferendas  ^  mens  eorum  est. 

20.  Eodem  fere  tempore,  Publius  Crassus,  cum  in  Aqui 
taniam  pervenisset,  qu£e  pars,**  ut  ante  dictum  est,  et  regio 
num  latitudine,'  et  multitudine'  hominum,  *ex  tertia  parte 
GallioB  est  jestimanda,  cum  intelligeret  in  his  locis  sibi  ^  bel 
lum  gerendum,  ubi  paucis  ante  annis  Lucius  Valerius  Prae 
conlnus,  legatus,  exercitu  pulso,  interfectus  esset,'  atque  un 
de  Lucius  Manilius,  proconsul,  impedimentis  amissis  profu 
gisset,'  &non  mediocrem  sibi  diligentiam"*  adhibendam"  in 
telligebat.     Itaque  re  frumentaria  provisa,  auxiliis  equitatu 
que  comparato,"  multis  praeterea  viris  fortibus  Tolosa,P  Car 
casone,  et  Narbone,  quae  sunt  civitates  Galiiae  Provincise 
finitimse   his  regionibus,  nominatim  evocatis,    in  Sotiatum 
fines  exercUum  introduxit.    Cujus  adventu  cognito,  Sotiates 
magnis  copiis  coactis,  equitatuque,  ^quo  plurimum  valebant 
in  itinere  agmen  nostrum  adorti,  primum  equestre  proelium 
commiserunt :  deinde,  equitatu  suo  pulso,  atque  insequenti 
bus  nostris,  subito   pedestres   copias,    quas  in  convalle    in 
insidiis    collocaverant,  ostenderunt.     Hi,   nostros   disjectoa 
adorti,  prcelium  renovarunt. 


'^  §  140,  1, 

4th. 

f      124,  20. 

1  §  141,  Obs.  8. 

b       38. 

s      112,  7. 

«>§  145,  R. 

c  §  129,  R 

h     37. 2d,  4,  Note.  1. 

°      108,  4. 

^     105. 

J  §  128,  R. 

0  §  98,  Obs.  4. 

•     124,1. 

k  §  147,  R.  LXI. 

p  §  136,  R.  LIL 

p«^p^|ppipiiijjiiiiWjiinilillUippi4|,^V^ iwii,  ii.nim.|j|iiiiiti|i|jii4., 


LIB  III.    CAP.  XXIII.  123 

21.  Pugnatum  est  diu  atque  acriter,  ciim  Sotiates,  superi- 
oribus  victoriis  *  freti,  in  sua  ^  virtute  totius  Aquitanise  salti- 
tem  positam  putarent ; "  nostri  autem,  quid  sine  imperatore, 
et  sine  reliquis  legionibus,  adolescentiilo  duce/  efRcere  pqs- 
sent,  perspici  cuperent.''  Tandem,  confecti  vulneribus,  hos- 
tes  terga  vertere.^  Quorum  ^  magno  numero  interfecto, 
Crassus  ex  itinere  oppidum  Sotiatum  oppugnare  coepit.  Qui- 
bus  8  fortiter  resistentibus,  vineas  turresque  egit.  Illi,  alias 
eruptione  tentata,  alias  cuniciilis  ad  aggerem'vineasque  ac- 
tis  (icujus  rei**  sunt  longe  peritissimi  Aquitani,  propterea 
quod  multis  locis  apud  eos  ^asrarise  secturae  sunt),  ubi  dili- 
gentia  nostrorum  ^ nihil'  his  rebus  profici  posse ""  intellexe- 
xunt,  legatos  ad  Crassum  mittunt,  seque  in  deditionem  ut  re- 
cipiat  petunt.  Qua  '^  re  impetrata,  arma  tradere  jussi,  faciunt. 

22.  Atque,  in  ea  re  omnium  nostrorum  intentis  anlmis, 
alia  ex  parte  oppidi  Adcantuannus,  qui  summam  imperii  ten- 
6bat,  cum  sexcentis  devotis,  quos  illi  soldurios  appellant 
(*  quorum  haec  est  conditio,  uti  omnibus  in  vita  commodis ' 
una  cum  his  fruantur,""  quorum  se  amicitiae  °  dediderint ;  "  si 

-^-^luid  iis  per  vim  accidat,  aut  eundem  casum  una  ferant,"'  aut 
6sibi°  mortem  consciscant : ""  neque  adhuc  hominum  memoria 
,repertus  est  quisquam,  qui,  eo  interfecto,  cujus  se  amicitiae** 
;^devovisset,  mortem  recusaret),P  cum  iis  Adcantuannus, 
eruptionem  facere  conatus,  clamore  ab  ea  parte  munitionis 
sublato,  cum  ad  arma  miltres  concurrissent,*'  vehementerque 
ibi  pugnatum  esset,'^  repulsus  in  oppidum,  tamen  uti  eadem 
deditionis  conditione '  uteretur,'^  ab  Crasso  impetravit. 

23.  Armis  obsidibusque  acceptis,  Crassus  in  fines  Voca- 
tium  et  Tarusatium  profectus  est.  Tum  vero  ^barbiri  com- 
moti,  quod  oppidum,'  ^et  natura'  loci  et  manu*  munltum, 

*§  119,  R.  s     38,  &  109.  °§  141,  Obs.  8.         ' 

"     30,2.  M107,  R.  IX.  o§123,  R. 

c  §  140,  Obs.  4.  i  §  128,  Exc.  p  §  141,  Obs.  3. 

•*     lit),  1.  "^  §  145,  Obs.  3,  (se.)  q  §  140,  1,  3d. 

«  §  144,  Obs.  6.  '  §  121.  R.  XXVI.  r  §  145,  r. 

'     38.  ">§  140,  1,  1st.  «§129,  R. 


124  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

paucis  diebus,"  quibus''  eo  ventum  erat,**  expugnatum*'  cog- 
noverant,  legatos  quoquoversus  dimittere,  conjurare,  obsideS 
inter  se  dare,  copias  parare  cosperunt.  Mittuntur  etiam  ad 
eas  civitates  legati,  quEe  sunt  i  citerioris  Hispaniee,^  finitimae 
Aquitaniae:*  inde  auxilia  ducesque  arcessuntur.  Quorum^ 
adventu  magna  cum  auctoritate,  et  magna  cum  hommum 
multitudme,  bellum  gerere  conantur.  Duces  vero  ii  deligun- 
tur,  qui  una  cum  Quinto  Sertorio  omnes  annos^  fuerant, 
summamque  scientiam  rei  militaris  habere  existimabantur. 
Hi  consuetudine  Popiili  Romani  ^loca  capere,  castra  mu- 
nire,  commeatibus  nostros  intercludere  instituunt.  Quod  ^ 
ubi  Crassus  animadvertit,  suas  copias  propter  exiguitatem 
non  3  facile  didtici,''  hostem  et  vagari '  et  vias  obsidere '  et 
castris  satis  prassidii  relinquere,'  ob  eam  causam  minus  com- 
mode frumentum  commeatumque  sibi^  supportari;  ^  *  in  dies 
hostium  numerum  augeri;  non  cunctandum  existimavit, 
quin  pugna  decertaret.'  ^Hac  re  ad  consilium  delata,  ubi  om- 
nes 6idem  sentire'  intellexit,  posterum  diem  pugnse  constituit, 
24.  Prima  luce,  productis  omnibus  copiis,  ''' duplici  acie 
instittita,  ^auxiliis  in  mediam  aciem  conjectis,  quid  hostes 
consilii*"  caperent"  expectabat.  Illi,  etsi  propter  multitudi- 
nem,  et  veterem  belli  gloriam,  paucitatemque  nostrorum,  se 
tuto  dimicattiros  °  existimabant,  tamen  tutius  ^  esse  arbitra- 
bantnr,  obsessis  viis,  comineatu  intercluso,  sine  ullo  vulnere 
victoria  potiri :  et,  si  propter  inopiam  rei  frumentarisB  Roma- 
ni sese  recipere  coepissent,'^  impeditos  in  agmine  et  sub  sar- 
cinis,  inferiores  animo,*^  adoriri  cogitabant.  Hoc  consilio 
probato  ab  ducibus,  productis  Romanorum  copiis,  sese  cas- 
tris *  tenebant.  Hac  re  perspecta  Crassus,  ^  cum  sua  cunc- 
tatione  atque  opinione  timoris  hostes  nostros  milites  alacri- 

a  §  131,  R.  XLI.0bs.3.g  §  131,  R.  XLI.  "  §  140,  5. 

b     67,  5,  Note.  ^     94,3.  0     lOO,  1. 

c     98,  2.  i      96,  2.  P  §  98,  Obs.  6. 

d  §  108,  R.  XII.  k  §  126,  R.  III.  1  §  140,  2. 

e§lll,  R.  »§140,  3.  r§i28,R. 

f     38.  »§  106,  R.  VIII.  »  §  136.  Obs.  5,  (in.) 


LIB    IIL    CAP.  XXVI.  125 

ores  ad  pugnandum''  effecissent ;  **  atque  omnium  voces 
audirentur,"  expectari*-'  diiUius  non  oportere,  quin  "^  ad  castra 
iretur;*^  cohortatus  suos,  omnibus  cupientibus,  ad  hostium 
castra  contendit. 

25,  Ibi  cilim  alii''  fossas  complerent,''  alii^  multis  telis  con- 
jectis,  defensores  vallo*^  munitionibusque  depellerent,  auxili- 
aresque,  quibus^  ad  pugnam  non  multum  Crassus  confidS- 
bat,  lapidibus^  telisque  subministrandis,*  et  ad  aggeremces- 
pitibus  comportandis,  speciem  atque  opini5nem  pugnantium"* 
praeberent ;''  cum  item  ab  hostibus  ^  constanter  ac  non  timide 
pugnaretur,''  telaque  ex  loco  superiore  missa  non  frustra  ac- 
ciderent;''  equites,  circumitis  hostium  castris,  Crasso  renun- 
ciaverunt,  non  eadem  esse  diligentia  ab  ^decumana  porta 
castra'  munita,  facilemque  aditum  habere. 

26.  Crassus,  equitum  praefectos  cohortatus,  ut  magnis 
praemiis*'  pollicitationibusque  suos  excitarent,  quid  fieri  velit 
ostendit.  lUi,  ut  erat  imperatum,  eductis  quatuor  cohorti- 
bus,  quas,  praesidio ""  castris ""  relictas,  3  inrrita  ab  labore 
erant,  et  *longiore"  itinere''  circumductis,  ne  ex  hostium 
castris  conspici  possent,"  omnium  ociilis  mentibusque  ad 
pugnam  intentis,  celeriter  ad  eas,  quas  diximus,  munitiones 
pervenerunt,  atque,  his  proriitis,  prius  in  hostium  castris 
constiterunt,  quam  ^  plane  ab  iis  videri,*"  aut,  quid  rei  ^  ger- 
eretur,**  cognosci  "■  posset.  Turn  vero,  clamore  ab  ea  parte 
audito,  nostri  redintegratis  viribus,''  quod  *  plerumque  in  spe 
victoriae  accidere  consuevit,  acrius  impugnare  coeperunt. 
Hostes  undique  circumventi,  desperatis  omnibus  rebus,*  se 
per  munitiones  dejicere  et  fuga^  salutem  petere  ^intende- 
runt.     Quos"  equitatus  apertissimis   campis''  consectatus, 

*  §  147,  Obs.  4.  h  §  129,  R,  p  §  106,  R.  VIII. 

»»  §  140,  Obs.  4.  5  §  147.  R.  LXII.  i  §  140,  5. 

<=     67,  Note.  k     19^  (milUum.)  ^     87. 

d  §  140,  3.  '  §  145,  R.  LVIII.  »      37,  9,  Note.  3. 

« §  98,  Obs.  12.  '  «§114,  R.  t      109,2. 

'  §  136,  R.  LII.  n  §  120,  Obs.  5.  «     38. 

8§112,  R.  V.  oJMO.  1,  2d.  V  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (in.) 


•^mmmmm^m'' 


126  i3E   BELLO   GALLICO. 

ex  millium  quinquaginta  numero,  quas  *  ex  Aquitania  Can« 
tabrisque  convenisae "  constabat,  vix  quarta  parte  relictd 
^multa'^  nocte*^  se  in  castra  recepit. 

27.  Hac  audita  pugna,^  magna  pars  Aquitaniae  sese  Cras« 
so  ^  dedidit,  obsidesque  ultro  misit :  quo  *  in  numero  fuerunt 
Tarbelli,  Bigerriones,  Preciani,  Vocates,  Tarusates,  Elusa- 
tes,  Garites,  Ausci,  Garumni,  Sibuzates,  Cocosates.  P^ucse 
ultimse  natidnes,  anni  tempore  !i  confisae,  quod  hiems  sube- 
rat,  hoc  facere  neglexerunt. 

28.  Eodem  fere  tempore*^  Caesar,  etsi  prope  exacta  jam 
aestas  erat,  tamen,  quod,  omni  Gallia*  pacata,  Morini  Mena- 
pilque  ^supererant,  qui''  in  armis  essent,^  neque'  ad  eum 
unquam  legatos  de  pace  misissent,''  arbitratus,  id  bellum  ce- 
leriter  confici  posse,  eo  exercitum  adduxit:  3  qui  longe  alid 
ratione,  ac  reliqui"'  Galli,  bellum  agere  insti'tuSrunt.  Nam 
quod  intelligebant,  maximas  nationes,"  quae  prcelio  conten- 
dissent,"  pulsas  ^  superatasque  esse,''  ^  continentesque  silvas 
ac  paludes  habebant,  eo  se  suaque  omnia  contulerunt.  Ad 
quarum^  initium  silvarum  ci^m  Cassar  pervenisset,P  castra- 
que  munire  instituisset,''  neque'  hostis  interim  visus  esset,P 
dispersis  in  opere  nostris,'  subito  ex  omnibus  partibus  silvas 
evolavgrunt  et  in  nostros  "^  impetum  fecerunt.  Nostri  ^  ce- 
leriter  arma  ceperunt,  eosque  in  silvas  repulerunt,  et,  com- 
piuribus^  interfectis,  ^longius'"  impeditioribus  locis  secuti, 
paucos  ex  suis  deperdiderunt. 

29.  Reliquis  deincepsdiebus^  Caesar  silvas  caedere  insti- 
tuit,  et,  ne,  quis  ^inermibus  iraprudentibusque  militibus*  ab 
latere  impetus  fieri"*  posset,"  omnem  earn  '''materiam,  quae 


>  §  145,  R.  &  Obs.  2. 

h  §  121,  Obs.  2.             p  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

b     98,  2. 

i      109,2.                      q     19,2. 

c     17,1. 

^  §  141,  R.  V,  (soli.)     '     22,  1. 

d  §  131,  R.  XL. 

»  §  93,  1.                       •  §  131.  R.  XLI. 

•     109,  2. 

»  §  87,  6.                       t  §  126,  R.  III. 

t  §  123,  R. 

»  §  145,  R.                    «  §  140,  1,  2d 

s     38. 

0  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

lPPii^PIP.If  mi!4  Ji,f Hipipp^i  J.4  lil^piPPUpilMlUi 


LIB.  III.    CAP.  XXIX.  127 

erat  csesa,  iconversam  ad  hostem  collocabat,  et  pro  vallo  ad 
utnimque  latus  exstruebat.  Incredibili  celeritate  *  magno 
spatio''  paucis  diebus*"  ^confecto,  ci!im  jam  pecus  atque  *ex» 
trema'*  impedimenta  ab  nostris  tenerentur,*  ipsi'  densiores 

»^  silvas  peterent ;  ejusmodi  sunt  tempestates  consecutae,  iiti 
opus  necessario  intermitteretur,^  et,  continuatione  *  imbrium 
diutius  4  sub  pellibus  milites  contineri  ^  non  possent.^  Ita- 
que  vastatis  omnibus  eorum  agris,''  vicis  aedificiisque  in- 
censis,  Cassar  exercitum  reduxit,  et  in  Aulercis,  Lexoviis- 
que,  reliquis  item  civitatibus,  *  quae  proxime  bellum  fecerant, 

**  in  hibernis  collocavit. 


»  §  129,  R. 

<»     17,  2. 

8  §  140,  1,  Isf. 

^     109,  2. 

«  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

h     87, 6. 

c  §  131,  R.  XLI. 

'     32, 3. 

BOOK    IV. 

GENERAL   ARGUMENT. 

I.  War  with  the  Usipetes  and  Tenchtheri — Chap.  1-15.  II.  Caesar's 
bridge  over  the  Rhine,  and  his  crossing  into  Germany — Chap.  16- 
19.  III.  Csesar  passes  into  Britain. — A  battle — surrender  of  the 
Britains,  and  subsequent  revolt. — Chap.  20-36.  IV.  War  vv^ith 
the  Morini  and  Menapii — Chap.  37-38. 

1.  1  Ea,  qusB  secuta  est,  hieme,''  qui  fuit  annus  2Cneio  Pom- 
peio,''  Marco  Crasso  consulibus,  Usipetes  Germani,  et  item 
Tenchtheri,  magna  cum  muhitudine  hominum,  flumen  Rhe- 
num  transierunt,  non  longe  a  mari,  *quo  Rhenus  influit. 
Causa  transeundi  fuit,  quod,  ab  Suevis  complures  annos*= 
exagitati,  hello  premebantur  et  agricuhura'*  prohibebantur. 
Suevorum  gens  est  longe  maxima  et  bellicosissima  Germa- 
norum^  omnium.  Hi  centum  pagos  habere  dicuntur,  ex 
quibus  quotannis  singula  *  millia  armatorum  bellandi  causa 
ex  fmibus  educunt.  Reliqui,  ^qui  domi  manserint,^  se  at- 
que  illos  alunt.  Hi  rursus  invicem  anno  post  in  armis  sunt ; 
illi  domi  remanent.  Sic  neque  agricultura,  ^nec  ratio  atque 
usus  belli,  intermittitur.  Sed  privati  ac  separati  .agri  apud 
eos  nihil  est;  neque  longius  anno  ^  remanere  uno  in  loco  in- 
colendi  causa  licet.  Neque  multum  frumento,'  sed  ^maxi- 
mam  partem *"  lacte  atque  pecore'  vivunt,  multiimque  sunt  in 
venationibus ;  quae  res  et  cibi  genere,'  et  quotidiana  exerci- 
tatione,  et  libertate  vitae  (quod,  a  pueris  "J^nullo  officio'  aut 
disciplina  assuefacti,  nihil  omnino  contra  voluntatem  faci- 
ant),"*  et  vires  alit,  et  immani  corporum  magnitudine "  hom- 
ines efficit.     Atque  in  eam  °  se  consuetudinem  adduxerunt, 

=^  §  131,  R.  XL.  g  §  141,  R.  III.  ««§  140,  Obs.  2. 

b§  110,  Obs.  1,  &2.  h§i20,  R.  n  §  106,  R.  VII.  & 

«  §  131,  R.  XLI.  i  §  121,  Obs.  2.  6,  1. 

•J  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (a6.)  t  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (Se-  o  §  31,  Obs.  2,  & 

•§  106,  Obs.3,(^gns)  cundum.)  28,1. 

'     26,  1.  1  §  129,  R. 


,PJ1WIPJJ!!«»P  IJIIPI^, .    I     ll||fi.lJBW!iipi||i 


LIB.  IV.    CAP.  III.  129 

ut  locis  frigidissimis,  neque  vestitus,*  piaster  pelles,  habeant '' 
quicquam  (quarum  propter  exiguitatem  magna  est  corporis 
pars  aperta),et  laventur''  in  fluminibus. 

2.  Mercatoribus*=  est  ad  eos  aditus  magis  eo,  ^ut,  quae  bel- 
le ceperint,*^  quibus  vendant,*  habeant,^  quam  quo  ullam 
rem  ad  se  importari  desiderent : '^  quinetiam  sjumentis,^  qui- 
bus **  maxim^  Gallia  delectatur,  quaeque  impenso  parant  pre- 
tio,'  Germani  importatis  non  utuntur:  sed  quae  sunt  apud 
eos  nata,  parva  atque  deformia,  haec  ^  quotidiana  exercita- 
tione,  summi  ut  sint  '^  laboris/  efficiunt.  Equestribus  proR- 
liis  saBpe  ex  equis  desiliunt,  ac  pedibus ""  proeliantur ;  equos- 
que  eodem  remanere  vestigio"*  assuefaciunt ;  ad  quos  se 
celeriter,  clim  usus  est,  lecipiunt :  neque  eorum  moribus 
turpius  quicquam  aut  inertius  habetur,  quam  ephippiis  ^  uti. 
^Itaque  ad  quemvis  numerum  ephippiatorum  equitum, 
quamvis  pauci,  adire  audent.  Vinum  ad  se  omnino  impor- 
tari non  sinunt,  quod  ed  re  ad  laborem  ferendum  remollescere 
homines,  atque  effeminari,  arbitrantur. 

3.  5  Publice  maximam  putant  esse  laudem,  quam  latissime 
a  suis  finibus  vacare  agros:"  hac  re  Ssignificari,  magnum 
numerum  "  civitatium  suam  vim  sustinere  non  posse.  Ita- 
que,  una  ex  parte,  a  Suevis,  circiter  millia  passuum  sexcen- 
ta  agri  '''vacare  dicuntur.  ^Ad  alteram  partem  succedunt 
Uhii  (cflK)rum  fuit  civitas  ampla  atque  florens,  ^  ut  est  captus 
Germanorum),  et  paalo  quam  sunt  ejusdem  generis  ceteri 
humaniores;  propterea  quod  Ehenum  attingunt,  multumque 
ad  eos  mercatdres  ventitant,  et  ipsi  propter  propinquitatem 
Gallicis  sunt  moribus  assuefacti.  Hos  cum  Suevi,  multis 
saepe  bellis  experti,  propter  ^^  amplitudinem  gravitatemque 
civitatis,  finibus'*  expellere  non  potuissent,  tamen  vectigales 
sibi  fecerunt,ac  multo^  humiliores  infirmioresqueredegerunt. 

»§  106,  R.  Vm.  f  §  140,  1.  1  §  106,  R.  VII. 

»»§  140,  1,1st.  K§  121,  R.  XXVI.  »»§  136,Obs.  5,(m.) 

c§ll2,  R.  II.  »>  §  121,  Obs.  2.  n§i45^R. 

d  §  141,  Obs.  3.  i  §  133,  R.  o  §  136,  R.  LII. 

•  §  141,R.I.  &  Obs.l.  k  §  140,  1,  3d.  P  §  132,  R.  XLIII. 


130  DE  BELLO  GALLICO. 

4.  ^  In  eadem  causa  fuerunt  Usipetes  et  Tenchtheri,  quo* 
supra  dixTmus,  qui  compltires  annos''  Suevorum  vim  sustin- 
uerunt ;  ad  extremum  ^  tamen,  agris  '^  expulsi,  et  muitis  Ger- 
maniae  locis  ^  triennium  *"  vagati,  ad  Rhenum  pervenerunt : 
2quas^  regiones  Menapii  incolebant,  et  ad  utramque  ripam 
fluminis  agros,  aedificia,  vicosque  habebant ;  sed  tantsB  mul- 
titudinis  aditu  ^  perterriti,  ex  his  sedificiis,  quae  trans  flumen 
habuerant,  demigraverant,  et,  cis  Ehenum  dispositis  praesi- 
diis,*  Germanos  transire  prohibebant.  Illi,  omnia  experti, 
cum  neque  vi  ^  contendere  propter  inopiam  navium,  neque 
3  clam  transire  propter  custodias  Menapiorum,  possent,*"  re- 
verti  se  in  suas  sedes  regionesque  simulaverunt ;  et,  ^tridui 
viam  progressi,  rursus  reverterunt,  atque,  omni  hoc  itinere 
una  nocte  equitatu '  confecto,  inscios  inopinantesque  Mena- 
pios  oppresserunt,  qui,  de  Germanorum  discessu  per  explo- 
ratores  certiores  facti,  sine  metu  trans  Rhenum  in  suos  vicos 
remigraverant.  His^  interfectis,  navibusque  eorum  occu- 
patis,^  prinsquam  ea  pars  Menapiorum,  quae  citra  Rhenum 
quieta  in  suis  sedibus  erat,  certior  fieret,''  flumen  transie- 
runt,  atque,  omnibus  eorum  aedificiis  ^  occupatis,  ^reliquam 
partem''  hiemis  se  eorum  copiis  aluerunt. 

5.  His  de  rebus  Cassar  certior  factus,  et  ^infirmitatem 
Gallorum  veritus,'  quod  sunt  in  consiliis  capiendis  mobiles, 
et  novis  plerumque  rebus™  student,  '''nihil  his"  committen- 
dum  existiraavit.  ^Est  autem  hoc  Gallicae  consuetudmis," 
uti  et  viatores,  etiam  invitos,  consistere  cogant,^  et,  quod 
quisque  eorum  de  quaque  re  audierif  aut  cognoverit,  quas- 
rantjP  et  mercatores  in  oppidis  vulgus  circumsistat,^  quibus- 
que  ex  regionibus  veniant,''  quasque  ibi  res  cognoverint, 
pronunciare  cogant.P   His  rumoribus  atque  auditionibus  per- 

=^§  131,  R.XLI.  e     109,2.  ,  "§  112,  R.  V. 

b     19,  (iempus.)  ^  §  140,  Obs.  4.  »>  §  126,  R.  III. 

c§136,  R.  LII.  i  §  136,  Obs.  5,(a6.)  «>  §  108,  R. 

d  §  136,  Obs.  5, (in.)  ^  §  140,  4.  p  §  145,  Obs.  6. 

«     37,  2d,  4,  Note  1.  i      106,1.  q  §  140,  5. 
'  §  129,  R. 


LIB  IV.    CAP.  VII.  131 

moti,  de  ^summis  saepe  rebus  consilia  ineunt,  quorum''  eos 
3e  vestigio  poenitere  necesse  est,  3  cum  incertis  rumoribus'' 
serviant,''  et  plerique  ad  voluntatem  eorum  ficta  respondeant.*' 

6.  Qua  consuetudine  cognita,  Caesar,  ^ne  "^  graviori  hello'' 
occurreret,  maturius  quam  consuerat  ad  exercitum  proficis- 
citur.  E6  cum  venisset,  ea,  quae  fore  suspicatus  erat,  ^ facta  *^ 
cognovit ;  missas  ^  legationes  a  nonnullis  civitatibus  ad  Ger- 
manos,  invitatosque  ^  eos,  uti  ab  Rheno  discederent ;  *  om- 
niaque  quae  postulassent,''  ab  se  fore  parata.  Qua '  spe  ad- 
ducti  Germani  latius  jam  vagabantur,  et  in  fines  Eburonum 
et  Condrusorum,  qui  sunt  Trevirorum  clientes,  pervenerant. 
Principibus  Galliae  evocatis,  Csesar  ea  quas  cognoverat  6  dis- 
simulanda*"  sibi'  existimavit,  eorumque  animispermulsis  et 
confirmatis,  equitatuque  imperato,  bellum  cum  Germanis 
gerere  constituit. 

7.  Re  ""  frumentaria  comparata,  equitibusque  delectis,  iter 
in  ea  loca  facere  ccspit,  quibus "  in  locis  esse  Germanos  au- 
diebat.  A  quibus  ciim  paucorum  dierum  iter"  abesset,  le- 
gati  ab  his  venerunt,  quorum  haec  fuit  oratio :  "  Germanos  •* 
neque  priores  **  Popiilo  Romano  bellum  inferre,  neque  tamen 
recusare,"^  si  lacessantur,  quin  armis  contendant  ;*  qu63  Ger- 
manorum  consuetudo  haec  sit^  a  majoribus  tradita,  quicum- 
que  bellum  inferant,**  "^  resistere,  neque  deprecari :  haec  ta- 
men dicere,  venisse  ^  invitos,^  ejectos  domo."  Si  ^suam  gra- 
tiam  Romani  velint,  posse  eis  utiles  esse  amicos :  vel  sibi 
agros  attribuant,  vel  patiantur  9  eos  tenere  quos  armis  pos- 
sederint.""  Sese  unis  Suevis  lo  concedere,  quibus  ne  Dii  qui- 
dem  immortales  pares  esse  possint :  relTquum  quidem  i^in 
terris  esse  nemmem,  quem  non  superare  possint." 

*  §  113,  Ex.  II.  h  §  141^  obs.  8.  P  §  145,  R.  LVIII. 

"§  112,  R.  V.  i      38.  q§  98,  Obs.  10. 

<=  §  140,  Obs.  3.  k  §  108,  4.  -^     94,  3. 

d  §  140,  1,  2d.  1  §  126,  Obs.  3.  *  §  140,  3. 

«  §  112,  R.  IV  n,    109,  2.  '  §  140,  6. 

'     98,2.  a     37,  6,  Note.  1.        «•  §  136,  R.  LII. 

«  §  140,  1.  3d.  o     132,  R.  XLII.  ^  §  141,  Obs.  3. 


132  hE   BELLO    GALLICO. 

8.  1  Ad  haec  Caesar,  quas  visum  est,  respondit ;  sed  3  exi- 
tus  fuit  orationis :  "  Sibi  "■  nullam  cum  his  amicitiam  esse 
posse,  si  in  Gallia  reman6rent :  neque  3  verum  esse,  qui** 
suos  fines  tueri  non  potuerint,''  alienos  occupare :  ^  neque 
ullos  in  Gallia  vacare  agros  qui  dari,  tantae  praesertim  multi- 
tudini,'*  sine  injuria  possint.^  Sed  licere,  si  velint,  in  Ubi- 
orum  finibus  considere,  quorum  sint  ^  legati  apud  se,  et  de 
Suevorum  injuriis  querantur,*^  et  a  se  auxiliurn  petant :  hoc 
se  ab  iis  impetraturum."^ 

9.  Legati  haec  se  ad  suos  relaturos »  dixerunt,  et,  re  delib- 
erata,  post  diem  tertium  ad  Caesarem  reversuros :  interea  ne 
propiiis  se  ^  castra  moveret,'  petierunt.  Ne  id  quidem  ^  Cas- 
sar  ab  se  impetrari  posse  dixit:  cognoverat  enim,  magnam 
partem  equitatiis  ab  iis  aliquot  diebus '  ante  praedandi  fru- 
mentandlque  causa  ad  Ambivaretos  trans  Mosam  missam. 
Hos*"  expectari  equites,  atque  ejus  rei  causa  morarfi'"  inter- 
poni,  arbitrabatur. 

10.  Mosa  profluit  ex  monte  Vosego,  qui  est  in  finibus  Lin- 
gonum,  *et,  parte  quddam  ex  Rheno  recepta,  quae  appella- 
tur  Vahalis,"  insulam  efficit  Batavorum,  neque  longius  ab 
eo  miljibus  °  passuum  octoginta  in  Oceanum  transit.  Ehe- 
nus  autem  oritur  ex  Lepontiis,  qui  Alpes  incolunt,  et  longo 
spatio  p  per  fines  Nantuatium,  HelvetiOrum,  Sequanorum, 
Mediomatric5rum,Tribocorum,  Trevirorum  citatus*"  fertur;"" 
et,  ubi  Oceano'  appropinquat,  ^in  plures  diffiuit  partes,  mul- 
tis  ingentibusque  insulis  efiectis,  quarum  pars  magna  a  feris 
barbarisque  nationibus  incolitur  *  (ex  quibus  sunt,  qui  piscl- 
bus  "  atque  ovis  avium  vivere  existimantur),  ^multisque  cap 
itibus  in  Oceanum  influit. 

a  §  112,  R.  11.  h§  I36,0bs.5,(ad.)  p§  132,  R.  XLIiT 

b     37,  (COS.)  i  §  140,  1,  3d.  i  §  98,  Obs.  10. 

c§141,0bs.  3.  k      121,  Note.  2.  '■      116,4. 

d  §  126,  R.  III.  '  §  131.  R.  XLI.  ^  §  112,'R.  IV. 

e§  141,R.I.&0bs.  1.     »"§145,.R.  t  §  io2,  R.  II. 

f§  141.  Obs.  7.  n§103,R.  «§121,  Obs.  2. 

«  §  100,  2.  «  §  120,  R.  XXIV. 


LIB.  IV.    CAP.  XII.  133 

11.  Csesar  ciim  ab  hoste  non  amplii!is  passuum  duodecim 
millibus  abesset,  ut  erat  constitutum,  ad  eum  legati  rever- 
tuntur:  qui,*  in  itinere  congressi,  magnopere,  ne  longiiis 
progrederetur,''  orabant.  Cum  id  non  impetrassent,''  pet5- 
bant,  uti  ad  eos  equites,  qui  agmen  antecessissent,  praemit- 
teret,''  eosque  pugna*^  prohiberet ;  sibique  uti  potesiatem 
faceret,  in  Ubios  legates  mittendi:  quorum  ^  si  Principes  ac 
Senatus  i  sibi  jurejurando*^  fidem  fecissent,  ea  conditione,^ 
quae  a  Caesare  ferretur,  se  usuros  ostendebant:  ad  has  res 
conficiendas  sibi  tridui  spatium  daret.''  Haec  omnia  Csesar 
2  eodem  illo  pertinere''  arbitrabatur,  ut,  tridui  mora  interpo- 
sita,  equites  eorum,  qui  abessent,'  reverferentur :"  tatnen 
sese  non  longii^s  millibus  passuum  qualuor  aquationis  causa 
processurum  eo  die  dixit:  hue  post  ero  die'  quam  frequentis- 
simi  convenirent,"  ut  de  eorum  postulatis  cognosceret.''  In- 
terim ad  praefectos,  qui  cum  omni  equitatu  antecesserant, 
mittit,  qui"'  nunciarent,  ne  hostes  proelio  lacesserent,''  et,  si 
ipsi  lacesserentur,  3  gustinerent,  quoad  ipse  cum  exercitu 
propiilis  accessisset." 

12.  At  hostes,  ubi  primiim  nostros  equites  conspexerunt, 
quorum  erat  quinque  milliurn  numerus,  cum  ipsi  non  am- 
plius"  octingentos  equites  haberent,  quod  ii,  qui  frumentandi 
causa  ierant  trans  Mosam,  nondum  redierant,  nihil  timenli- 
bus  nostris,P  quod  legati  eorum  paulo  ante  a  Cassare  disces- 
serant,  atque  is  dies  induciis*"  erat  ab  eis  petltus,  impetu 
facto,  celeriter  nostros  perturbaverunt.  Rursus  resistentibus 
n()stris,P  consuetudine  sua  ^  ad  pedes  desiluerunt,  subfossis- 
que  equis,  compluribusque  nostris  dejectis,  reliquos  in  fugam 
conjecerunt,  atque  ita  perterritos  egerunt,  utnon  prius  fuga"" 
desistcrent,*  quam  in  conspectu  agminis  nostri  venissent. 
— ___  8§  121,  R.  XXVI.        n  §  140,  4.  ' 

»>  §  140,  1,  3d.  h     96,  2.  "  §  120,  Obs.  3 

«§140,Obs.  4.  '§  141,  Obs.  3.  p     109,1. 

•1  §  136,  Obs.  5,(a6.)  k  §  140,  i^  2d.  q  §  1 14,  R.  &  Obs.  4. 

*     39.  i§131,R.  XL.  '§  136,  Obs.  5,(«x.) 

'  §  129,  R.  «»§  141,  Obs.  2,  4th.  *  §  140, 1,  1st. 

12 


-**J^'iPtfWVS«WJ"l,c^l«ftP_ilJ^lilt»,JI 


134  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

In  eo  proelio  ex  equitibus  ^  nostris  interficiuntur  quatuor  et 
septuaginta,  in  his  vir  fortissimus,  Piso,  Aquitanus,  ^  am- 
plissimo  genere  ^  natus,  cujus  avus  in  civitale  sua  regnum 
obtinuerat,  amicus*"  ab  Senatu  nostro  appellatus.  Hie  cum 
fratri  ^  ^^Qtercluso  ab  hostibus  auxilium  ferret,^  ilium  ex  per- 
iciilo  ^  eripuit":  ipse,  equo  vulnerato  dejectiJs,  quoad  potuit, 
fortissime  restitit.  Ciim  circumventus,  multis  vulneribus 
acceptis,  cecidisset,^  atque  id  frater,  qui  jam  proelio^  exces- 
serat,  procul  animadvertisset,  incitato  equo  ^  se  hostibus  ^  ob- 
tiilit  atque  interfectus  est. 

13.  Hoc  facto  proelio,  Csesar  neque  jam  sibi""  legatos  '  au- 
diendos,""  neque  conditiones  accipiendas''  arbitrabatur  ab  his, 
qui  per  dolum  atque  insidias,  petlt^  pace,  ultro  bellum  intu- 
lissent : '  expectare  "  verb,  dum  hostium  copise  augerentur," 
cquitatusqae  reverteretur,  ^summae  dementise"  esse  ^  judi- 
cabat ;  et,  cognita  Gallorum  infirmitate,  quantum  jam  apud 
eos  hostes  uno  proelio  auctoritatis '^  essent  consecuti,  sentie- 
bat:  quibus""  ad  consilia  capienda  nihil'  spatii  dandum  exis- 
timabat.  His  constitutis  rebus,  et  consilio  cum  legatis  et 
qusestore  communicato,  ^  ne  quem  diem  pugnas  praslermit- 
teret,  opportunissima  res  accidit,  quod  postridie  ejus  diei* 
mane,  eadem  et  perfidia  et  simulatione  usi  Germani,  fre- 
quentes,  ^ omnibus  principibus  majoribusque  natu  adhibitis, 
ad  eum  in  castra  venerunt  ;  simul,  ut  dicebatur,  '''sui  pur- 
gandi  causa,  quod  ^  contra  atque  esset  dictum,  et  ipsi  petis- 
sent,  proelium  pridie  commisissent ;  simul  ut,  si  quid  pos- 
sent,  de  induciis  fallendo  impetrarent.  ^Quos'sibi  Caesar 
oblatos  gavisus,  illico  retineri  jussit ;  ipse  omnes  copias  cas- 
tris  eduxit,  equitatumque,  quod  recenti  proelio  perterritum 
esse  existimabat,  agmen  subsequi  jussit. 

>§  107,  Obs.  8.  g  §  136.  R.  Lll.  «>  §  140,  4. 

M119,  R.  &6,  5.  M  126,  Obs.  3.  «  §  108,  R. 

<=  §  103,  R.  i  §  145,   R.  (esse.)  v     94,  3. 

d  §  123,  R.  k      108,  4.  q  §  106,  R.  VIII. 

«§140,  Obs.  4.  i§  141,  Obs.  8.  r     39,&§126,  R.III. 

f  §  123,  Obs.  1.  «"§  144,  R.  LVI.  "  §  135,  XLVI. 


LIB.  IV.    CAP.  XVI.  135 

14.  Acie  triplici  instituta,  et  celeriter  octo  milHum*  itin- 
ere  confecto,  prius  ad  hostium  castra  pervenit,  quam,  quid 
ageretur,  ^.  Germani  sentlre  possent.*"  Qui/  omnibus  rebus 
subito  perterriti,  et  celeritate  adventus  nostri,  et  discessu  su- 
orum,  neque  consiiii  habendi  ^  neque  arma  capiendi '  spatio 
dato,  1  perturbantur,  copiasne  adversus  hostem  educere,  an 
castra  defendere,  an  fuga  salutem  petere,  prsestaret . "  Quo- 
rum^ timor  cum  fremitu  et  concursu  ^significaretur,  milites 
nostri,  ^pristini  diei  perfidia  incitati,  in  castra  irruperunt. 
Quorum ''  qui'  celeriter  arma  capere  potuerunt,  paulisper 
nostris  restiterunt,  atque-  inter  carros  impedimentaque  proe- 
lium  commiserunt:  at  reliqua  multitudo  puerorum  mulie- 
rumque  (nam  cum  omnibus  suis  domo  excesserant  Rlienum- 
que  transierant),  passim  fugere  ccBpit ;  ad  quos^  consectan- 
dos  C£esar  equitatum  misit. 

15.  Germani,  post  tergum  '^clamore  audito,  cum  suos  "^ 
interfici  viderent,  armis  abjectis,  signisque  militaribus  re- 
lictis,  se  ex  castris  ejecerunt :  et,  cum  ^ad  confluentem  Mo- 
sob  et  Rheni  pervenissent,  ^reliqua  fugji  desperaia,  magno 
numero  interfecto,  reliqui  se  in  flunien  prascipitaverunt,  at- 
que ibi  timore,'  lassitudine,'  vi  fluminis  oppressi,  perierunt. 
Nostri  ad  unum"*  omnes  incolumes,  perpaucis  vulneratis, 
'''ex  tanti  belli  timore,  cum  hostium  numerus  capitum  quad- 
ringentorum  et  triginta  millium  fuisset,  se  in  castra  recepe- 
runt.  Caesar  his,"  quos  in  castris  retinuerat,  ^discedendi 
potestatem  fecit :  illi  supplicia  cruciatusque  Gallorum  ver- 
iti,"  quorum  agros  vexaverant,  remanere  se  apud  eum  velle 
dixerunt.     His  "  Caesar  libertatem  concessit. 

16.  GermanTco  bello  confecto,  niultis  de  causis  Cajsar 
statuit,  sibi  Khenum  esse  transeundum  :  quarum  •'  ilia  fuit 
justissima,  quod,  cum  videret,  Germanos  tarn  facile  impelli^ 

*  §  106,  R.  YII.  f  il2,  1.  I  §  129,  R. 

''  §  140,  5.  3  39.  n>     19,  ihommem,) 

«§H0,  4.  h  39,8c§107,R.X.  -  §  123,  R. 

^     39,  5.  i  37,  (i?,)  0      loti,  1. 

«•      112,5.  t  i'j,  2,^v§  U:>,R.  V     38,&c§  107,R.X 


136  DK    BELLO    GALLICO. 

ut  in  Galliam  vemrent,"  ^suis  quoque  rebus''  eos  timere  vol- 
uit,  cum  intelligerent,  ^et  posse  et  audere  Popiili  Romani 
exercitum  Rhenum  transire.  ^  Accessit  etiara,  quod  ilia  pars 
equitatus  Usipetum  et  Tenchtherdrum,  quam  supra  com- 
memoravi,  prsedandi'^  frumentandique  causa  Mosam  trans- 
isse,  neque  proelio  ^  interfuisse,  post  fugam  suorum  se  trans 
Rhenum  in  fines  Sigambrorum  receperat  seque  cum  iis  con- 
junxerat.  Ad  quos^  ciim  Caesar  nuncios  misisset,  qui'^pos- 
tularent,  eos,  qui  sibi  *  Galliaeque  bellum  intulissent,  sibi  ^^ 
dederent,*"  responderunt:  *' Populi  Romani  imperium  Rhe- 
num' fimre :  si,  se  invito  Germanos  in  Galliam  transire  non 
CEquum  existimaret,  ^cur  sui*"  quicquam'  esse  imperii'  aut 
potestatis  trans  Rhenum  postularet  ?  "  "'  Ubii  autem,  qui  uni 
ex  Transrhenanis  ad  Csesarem  legatos  miserant,  amicitiam 
fecerant,  obsides  dederant,  magnopere  orabant,  "  ut  sibi^ 
auxilium  ferret,''  quod  graviter  ab  Suevis  premerentur  ; "  vel, 
si  id  facere  ^  occupationibus  reipublicae  prohiberetur,  exer- 
citum modo  Rhenum  transportaret : ''  id'  sibi"*  ad  auxilium 
spemque  reliqui  temporis  satis  futurum  :  tantum  esse  nomen 
atque  opinionem  ejus  exercitus,  Ariovisto  pulso,  et  hoc  no- 
vissimo  proelio  facto,  etiam  ad  ultimas  Germanorum  natio- 
nes,  uti  opinione"  et  amicitia  Populi  Romani  tuti^  esse  pos- 
sint."*  Navium  m^gnam  copiam  ad  transportandum  exerci- 
tum pollicebantur. 

17.  Caesar  his  de  causis,  quas  commemoravi,  Rhenum 
transire  decreverat;  sed  navibus  transire,  neque  satis  tutum 
esse**  arbitrabatur,  ^ neque  suas""  neque  Populi  Romani  dig- 
nitatis""  esse  statuebat.  Itaque,  etsi  summa  difficultas  faci- 
endi  pontis  '^  proponebatur,  propter  latitudinem,  rapiditatem, 
altitudinemque  fluminis,  tamen  id'  sibi*  contendendum,  aut 

^  §  140,  1,  1st.  e  §  123,  R.  »  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

b  §  112,  R.  XVII.  h  §  140,1,3d,  &  Obs. 5.  o  §  129,  R. 

c     112,  1.  i  §  145,  R.  P  §  103,  Obs.  6. 

d§112,  R.  I.  k§108,  R.  XII.  q     51,5. 

•     39,  9.  1  §  106,  R.  VIII.  '     29,  1. 

f  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4th.  '"§140,6.  »     113,  &§  147. 


PLAN  OF  THE  BIliDGE  MADE  OVEll  THE  RHINE  BY  GJiSAR, 

IN  TEN  DAYS. 


^^^^^^"sr^^^i] 


A.  Tignabina  sesquipedalia :  Two  piles  each  a  foot  and  a  half  thick,  joined  together 
at  the  distance  of  two  feet.  H.  One  of  the  piles  detached.  K.  Form  of  tiie  two  piles 
braced  together.  B.  Two  opposite  piles  similarly  joined  together,  and  at  the  distance 
of  forty  feet  down  the  river  from  the  other.  C.  Trabs  bipedalis:  Large  beam  two 
feet  square,  extending  from  the  upper  to  the  lower  piles.  I.  The  same  beam  detached. 
D.  Fihulcb  biruB :  Two  braces  fastening  each  pair  of  piles  together,  as  seen  at  !<.,  one 
on  each  side,  (titrimque) — the  one  below,  supporting  the  beam,  (frabs,)the  other  above  it. 
M.  Form  of  the  brace  detached.  E  E.  Maleries:  Timbers  laid  from  beam  to  beam, 
(.directa,)  lengthwise  of  the  bridge.  N.  Longurii :  Spars  laid  across  the  timbers 
O.  Cra/es;  Hurdles  laid  over  the  spars.  F.  Subliccb:  Stakes  sunk  in  the  river  as  but 
tresses,  and  fastened  iconjunctcn,)  to  each  lower  pair  of  piles.  G.  Alien  subliccB, :  Other 
stakes  driven  in  above  the  bridge,  and  separate  from  it,  as  a  fence  against  trunks  of  trees, 
&c.  sent  down  the  river. 


ip5»5iBpi|P?pP5pw^Pr^-  ^Wm-*?^-  9'"W!!W«*!'"«!?W 


LIB.  IV.  CAP.  xvin.  139 

aliter  non  transducendum  exercitum,  existimabat.  ^  Rationem 
pontis  hanc  instituit.  ^Tigna  bina*  sesquipedalia,  paulum 
ab  imo  praeacuta,  dimensa  ad  altitiidinem  fluminis,  interval- 
lo ''  pedum  duorum  inter  se  jungebat  ^  Hsec  ciim "  machina- 
tionibus*^  immissa  in  flumen  defixerat,  fistucisque*^  adge- 
rat,  *non  sublicas  modo"*  directa^  ad  perpendiculum,  sed 
prona  ^  ac  fastigata,  ut  secundum  naturam  fluminis  procum- 
berent ;  ^  5  iis «  item  contraria  bina,""  ad  eundem  modum  junc- 
ta,  intervallo''  pedum  quadragen^m,  ab  inferiore  parte,  con- 
tra vim  atque  impetura  fluminis  con  versa  statuebat.  ^fjaec 
utraque  insuper  bipedalibus  trabibus*"  immissis  quantum* 
eorum  tignorum  junctura  distabat,  binis  utrimque  fibiilis'' 
ab  extrema  parte,  distinebantur :  ^quibus^  disclusis  atque 
in  contrariam  partem  revinctis,  tanta  erat  operis  firmittido, 
atque  ^ea"*  rerum  natura,  ut,  ^quo"  major  vis  aquae  se  inci- 
tavisset,°  hoc"  arctiiis  illigata  tenerentur.^  ^^Haec  directa  ma- 
terie"  injecta  contexebantur,  et  lUonguriis''  cratibusque  con- 
sternebantur :  12  ac  nihilo  secius  sublicae  et  ad  inferiorem  par- 
tem fluminis  oblique  agebantur,  quae,""  ^^pro  pariete  subjectas, 
et  cum  omni  opere  conjunctae,  vim  fluminis  exciperent :  *■  i*  et 
alisB  item  supra  pontem  mediocri  spatio,^ut,  siarborum  trunci, 
sive  naves  i^dejiciendi  operis  essent*  a  barbaris  missse,his  de- 
fensoribus"*  earum  rerum  vis  minueretur,'neu  ponti"  nocerent. 
18.  Diebus""  decem,  i^quibus  materia  coepta  erat  compor- 
tari,  omni  opere  effecto,  exercitus  transducitur.  Caesar,  ^"^  ad 
utramque  partem  pontis  firmo  praBsidio  ^  relicto,  in  fines  Si- 
gambrorum  contendit.  Interim  a  compluribus  civitatibus 
ad  eum  legati  veniunt,*  quibus  "  pacem  atque  amicitiam  pe- 

*  26,  3.  i     46,  (tantum.)  &"     a  §  126,  R.  V. 

"  §  132,  R.  XLII.  k     110.  r  §  141^  obs.  2,  4th. 

c  §  140,  Obs.  3.  >  §  38,  &  109,  2.  "      19,  {suhUca.) 

d  §  129,  R.  «     124,  17,  &28.  t     81,  2,  &  140,  2. 

«  §  98,  Obs.  10.  "  §  132,  Obs.  6,  &  ^  §  112,  R.  V. 

'  §  140,  1,  2d,  22,  4,  Obs.  ^  §  131,  r.  xLI. 

«§111,  R.  «§141,  Obs.  8.  ^§44,1.3. 

*  109,  2.  p  §  140,  1,  1st.  ^  §  123,  R. 


140  DE  BELLO  GALLICO. 

tentibus  liberaliter  respondit,  obsidesque  ad  se  adduce  jubet, 
At  Sigambri,  ex  eo  tempore  quo"  pons  institui  ceeptus  est, 
fuga  comparata,  i  hortantibus  iis  *"  quos  ex  Tenchtheris  atque 
Usipetibus  apud  se  habebant,  linibus'^  suis  accesserant,  sua- 
que  omnia  exportaverant,  seque  ^in  solitudinem  ac  silvas 
abdiderant. 

19.  Caesar,  paucos  dies  ^  in  earum  finibus  moratus,  omni- 
bus vicis  sedificiisque  incensis,*^  frumentisque  succisis,*^  se  in 
fines  Ubiorum  recepit ;  atque  iis  auxilium  suum  pollicitus. 
si  ab  Suevis  premerentur,'''  haec  ab  iis  cognovit:  Suevos,  pos- 
teaquam  per  exploratores  pontem  fieri  comperissent,**  more* 
suo  concilio  habito,  nuncios  in  omnes  partes  dimisisse,  uti  do 
oppidis  demigrarent,''  liberos,  uxores,  suaque  omnia  jn  silvas 
deponerent,''  atque  omnes  qui  arma  ferre  possent'  unum  in 
locum  convenirent : "^  ^bunc  esse  delectum  medium""  fere  re- 
gionum  earum  quas  Suevi  obtinerent:  "  hic  Romanorum  ad- 
ventum  expectare  atque  ibi  decertare  constituisse."  Quod  '' 
ubi  Caesar  comperit,  omnibus  his  rebus  confectis,  quarum  re- 
rum  causa  transducere  exercitum  constituerat,  ut  Germanis 
metum  injiceret,""  ut  Sigatnbros  ^ulcisceretur,''  ut  Ubios  ob- 
sidione  liberaret,''  diebus*"  omnino  decem  et  octo  trans  Rhe- 
num  consumtis,  ^  satis  et  ad  iaudem  et  ad  utilitatem  profec- 
tum"  arbitratus,  se  in  Galliam  recepit,  pontemque  rescidit. 

20.  Exigua  parte  aestatis  reliqua,  Cagsar,  etsi  in  his  locis, 
quod  omnis  Gallia  ad  septentriones  vergit,  ^maturee  sunt 
hiemes,  tamen  in  Britanniam  proficisci  contendit,  quod,  om- 
nibus fere  Gallicis  bellis,''  hosttbus  nostris  "■  ^  inde  subminis- 
trata  auxilia  intelligebat :  et,  si  tempus  anni  ad  bellum  ge- 
rendum  deficeret,"  tamen  magno  sibi*  usui  fore  arbitrabatur, 
si  modo  insulam  adisset,  genus  hominum  perspexisset,  loca. 

»     90,  4.  s  §  140,  2.  n  §  140,  6. 

»^§  131,  R.  XL.  h  §  140,4.  »     98,  2. 

e     109,  1.  i  §  129,  R.  P     38,  4. 

1  §  136,  R.  Lll.  k  §  140,  1,  2d.  1  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (in.) 

•  §  131,  R.  XLI.  1  §  141,  Obs.  3.  ^  §  126,  R.  III. 

f      104,1.  n>§  97^  R.Exp.  ^  §  114;  R. 


LIB.  IV.    CAP.  XXI.  141 

portus,  aditus  cognovisset :  quae  omnia  fere  Gallis  erant  in- 
cognita. Neque  enim  ^  temere  praster  mercatores  illo  adit 
quisquam,  2  neque  iis  ipsis*  quicquam,  praeter  oram  inariti- 
mam  atque  eas  regiones  quae  sunt  contra  Gallias,  notum  e$t. 
Itaque,  evocatis  ad  se  undique  mercatoribus,  neque  quanta 
esset"  insiilae  magnitudo,  neque  quaB*^  aut  quantas*"  nationes 
incolerent,"  neque  Squem''  usum  belli  haberent,^  aut  qui- 
bus^  institutis  utcrentur,  neque  qui  essent  ad  majorum  na- 
vium  multitudinem  idonei*^  portus,  reperire  poterat. 

21.  Ad  haec  cognoscenda,  .priusquam  periculum  faceret, 
idoneum  esse  arbitratus"  Caium  Volusenum,  cum  navi  longa 
praemittit.  Hurc ''  mandat,  uti,  exploratis  omnibus  rebus,  ad 
se  quamprimi!im  revertatur:^  ipse  cum  omnibus  copiis  in  Mo- 
rinos  proficiscitur,  quod  inde  erat  brevissimus  in  Britanniam 
transjectus.  Hue  naves  undique  ex  finitimis  regionibus  et, 
quam**  superiore  sestate  ad  Veneticum  bellum  fecerat,  clas- 
sem  jubet  convenire,'  Interim,  consilio  ejus  cognito  et  per 
mercatores  perlato  ad  Britannos,  a  compluribus  ejus  insulae 
civitatibus  ad  eum  legati  veniunt,  qui  polliceantur "  obsides 
dare,  atque  imperio '  Popiili  Romani  obtemperare.  Quibus™ 
auditis,  liberaliter  pollicitus,  hortatusque  ut  •*in  ea  sententia 
permanerent,^  eos  domum  "  remittit,  et  cum  his  una  Com- 
mium,  quem  ipse,Atrebatibus  superatis,  regem  ibi  constitu- 
erat,  cujus  et  virtutem  et  consilium  probabat,  et  quem  sibi 
fidelem  arbitrabatur,  cujusque  auctoritas  in  iis  regionibus 
magni  °  habebatur,  mittit.  Huic  imperat,  quas  possit  adeat"* 
civitates,  ^horteturque^  ut  Popiili  Romani  ^fidem  sequantur;* 
seque  celeriter  eo  venturum  nunciet.^  Volusenus,  perspectis 
regionibus,  '^  quantum  ei  facultatis  dari  potuit,  ^qui  navi  egre- 
di  ac  se  barbaris  committere  non  auderet,"*  quinto  die  ad  Cse- 
sarem  revertitur;  quseque  ibi  perspexisset  renunciat. 

'  §  126,  R.  XXXIII.  '     63,  &  §  123,  R.  •  §  112,  R.  V. 

»>  §  140,  5.  s  §  140,  1,  3d.  »»    38,  &  109,  2. 

«     48,&§34,Obs.  1.  h     43.  "§130,4. 

d  §  103,  Obs.  2.  5     90,  4.  °  §  126,  R.  II. 

•     106,  1.  k  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4th.  p  §  141,  R.  III. 


142  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

22.  Dum  in  his  locis  Cassar  navium  parandaruni'^causa 
moratur,  ex  magna  parte  Morinorum  ad  eum  legati  vefterunt, 
qui  '^  se  1  de  superioris  temporis  consilio  excusarent,''  qu6d 
homines  barbari,  et  nostrae  consuetudinis  *^  imperiti,  bellum 
Populo  Romano  fecissent/  seqne  ea,  quae  imperasset,^  fac- 
turos  poUicerentur.''  Hoc  sibi''  satis  opportune  Csesar  acci- 
disse  arbitratus,  quod  neque  post  tergum  hostem  relinquere 
volebat,  neque  belli  gerendi,*  propter  anni  tempus,  facultatem 
habebat,  neque  2has  tantularum  rerum  occupationes^  sibi*" 
Britannise'  anteponendas  judicabat,  magnum  his''  obsidum 
numerum  imperat.  Quibus  adductis,  eos  in  fidem  recepit. 
3  Navibus  circiter  octoginta  onerariis  coactis  contractisque, 
quot'  satis  esse  ad  duas  transportandas  legiones  existimabat, 
quicquid  praeterea  navium  ""  longarum  habebat,  quaestori,  le- 
gatis,  praefectisque  distribuit.  Hue  accedebant  octodecim 
onerariae  naves,  quaB  ex  eo  loco  ab "  millibus  passuum  octo 
vento  tenebantur,  quo  minus  in  eundem  portum  pervenire 
possent."  Has  equitibus  distribuit;  reliquum  exercitum 
Quinto  Titurio  Sabino  et  Lucio  Aurunculeio  Cottae,  lega-tis, 
in  Menapios  atque  in  eos  pagos  Morinorum,  ab  quibus  ad 
eum  legati  non  venerant,  deducendum  p  dedit.  Publium 
Sulpitium  Rufum,  legatum,  cum  eo  praesidio  quod  satis  esse 
arbitrabatur,  portum  tenere  jussit. 

23.  His  constitutis  rebus,  nactus  idoneam  ad  navigandum'' 
tempestatem,  ^  tertia  fere  vigilia  ^solvit,  equitesque  in  ulter- 
iorem  portum  progredi,''  6  et  naves  conscendere,"^  et  se  sequi ' 
jussit:  a  quibus*  cCim  id  paulo  tardiiis  esset  administratum, 
ipse  ■'bora  diei  circiter  quarta  cum  primis  navibus  Britanni- 
am  attigit,  atque  ibi  in  omnibus  collibus  ^expositas  hostiuin 


»     112,  5. 

h  §  126,  Obs.  3. 

n  §  132,  Obs.  5. 

b  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4. 

i  §  126,  R.  III. 

0  §  140,  1. 

c  §  107,  R.  IX. 

k§  123,  R.  &5,  1. 

P     107,  1. 

d  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

»     46,  2. 

q     112,3. 

•§141,  Obs.  3. 

«§  106,  R.  VIII.  & 

r       90,  1. 

t  §  112,  R.  IV. 

Obs.  10. 

•     38. 

8  §  145, R. 

LIB  IV.    CAP.  XXV.  ]43 

copias  armatas  conspexit.  Cujus  loci  haec  erat  nattira :  i  adeo 
montibus  angustis  mare  continebatur,  uti  ex  locis  superiori- 
bus  in  littus  telum  adjici*  posset.  Hunc  ^ad  egrediendum 
nequaquam  idoneum  arbitratus  locum,  dum  reliquae  naves 
eo  convenirent,''  3  ad  horam  nonam  in  anchoris  expectavit. 
Interim  legatis^  tribunisque  militum  convocatis,  et  quae  ex 
Voluseno  cognosset,'^  et  quae  fieri  vellet,*^  ostendit,  *  monuit- 
que  (ut  rei  militaris  ratio,  maxime  ut  maritimae  res  postula- 
rent,^  ut  quae  celerem  atque  instabilem  motum  haberent),  ad 
nutum  et  ad  tempus  omnes  res  ab  iis  administrarentur.^ 
His "  dimissis,  et  ventum  et  aestum  uno  tempore  nactus  se- 
cundum, dato  signo,""  et  sublatis  anchoris,''  circiter  millia 
passuum  septem  ab  eo  loco  progressus,  aperto  ac  piano  littore^ 
naves  constituit. 

24.  At  barbari,  consilio "  Romandrum  cogniio,  praemisso  ^ 
equitatu,  ^et  essedariis,  quo  plerumque  genere '  in  prosliis  uti 
consuerunt,  reliquis  copiis  subsecuti,  nostros  navibus"  egredi 
fiprohibebant.  Erat  ob  has  causas  summa  difficultas,  quod 
naves,  propter  magnitudinem,  nisi  in  alto,  constitui ""  non  pot- 
erant;  ''militibus'  autem,  ignotis  locis,*'  impeditis  manibus,* 
magno  et  gravi  armorum  onere  oppressis,  simul  et  de  navibus 
desiliendum,'  et  in  fluctibus  consistendum,'  et  cum  hostibus 
erat  pugnandumi^  cum  illi  aut  ex  arido,  aut  paululum  in 
aquam  progressi,  ^  omnibus  membris""  expediti,  notissimis 
locis,^  audacter  tela  conjicerent,"  et  equos  ^insuefactos  inci- 
tarent."  Quibus  rebus  nostri  perterriti,  atque  hujus  omnino 
generis"  pugnaB  imperiti,  non  eadem  alacritate'  ac  studio, 
quo'  in  pedestribus  uti  prgeliis  consueverant,  utebantur. 

25.  Quod  ubi  Caesar  animum  advertit,  naves  longas, 
^Oquarum  et  species  erat  barbaris  ^  inusitatior,  et  motus  ad 
usum  expeditior,  paulum  removeri  ab  onerariis  navTbus,  et 


a     87,  1. 

f  §  140,  1,  3d. 

»  §  147,  &  113,2. 

"  §  140,  4. 

K§  136,  Obs.  5,  (in.) 

">§  128,  R. 

«=      109,  2. 

h  §  98,Obs.4.&109.2. 

n  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

d  §  140,  5. 

i  §  121,  R.  XXVI. 

0  §  108,  R.  IX 

•^  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

k  §  136,  R.  LII. 

P§111,  R. 

144  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

^remis  incitari,*  et  ad  latus  apertum  hostium  constitui,'  at- 
que  inde  fundis,  sagittis,  2  tormentis,  hostes  propelli ""  ac  sub- 
mo^'eri  jussit :  3  quae  res  magno  usui  ^  nostris  fuit.  Nam,  et 
navium  figtira,  et  remorum  motu,  et  inusitato  genere  tormen- 
torum  permoti,  barbari  constiterunt,  ^  ac  paulum  modo  pe- 
dem  retulerunt.  Atque,  nostris  militibus*^  cunctantibus, 
maxime  propter  altitudinem  maris,  Squi'*  decima?  legionis 
aquilam  ferebat,  contestatus^  Deos,  ut  ^e^^res  legioni '^  feli- 
citer  eveniret :  "  Desilite,"  inquit,  "  commilitones,  nisi  vultis 
aquilam  hostibus  prodere  :  ego  certe  meum  reipublicas  atque 
imperatori  officium  prsestitero."  Hoc  cum  "^  magna  voce 
dixisset,  ^ex  navi  se  projecit,  atque  in  hostes  aquilam  ferre 
coepit.  Tum  nostri,  cohortati  inter  se,«  ne  ^  tantum  dedecus 
admitteretur,  universi  ex  navi  desiluerunt :  hos  item  ex  prox- 
imis  navibus  ci\m  conspexissent,  subsecuti  hoslibus '  appro- 
pinquarunl. 

26.  Pugnatum  est  ab  utrisque  acriter ;  nostri  tamen, 
quod  neque  ordines  servare,''  neque  firmiter  insistere,"  ne- 
que  signa  subsequi''  poterant,  atque  alius  alia'  ex  navi,  qui- 
buscumque  "'  signis  occurrerat,  se  aggregabat,  magno  opore 
perturbabantur.  Hostes  vero,  notis  omnibus  vadis,  ubi  ex  lit- 
tore  aliquos  ^  singulares  ex  navi  egredientes  conspexerant, 
incitatis  equis  impedltos  adoriebantur :  plures  paucos  "  cir- 
cumsistebant :  alii  ab  latere  aperto  in  universos  tela  conji- 
ciebant.  ^oQuod"  ci!im  animum  advertisset  Csesar,  i^sca- 
phas  longarum  navium,  item  ^^speculatoria  navigia  militibus 
compleri*  jussit,  et,  quos  p  laborantes  conspexerat,  iis  sub- 
sidia  submittebat.  Nostri,  simul^  in  arido  constiterunt,  suis 
omnibus  consecutis,  in  hostes  impetum  fecerunt,  atque  eos 
in  fugam  dederunt,  neque  longii!is  prosequi  ^  potuerunt,  quod 

^     90,  4.  «  §  28,  Obs.  5.  «'     37,  7,  Note.  2,  & 

»'§114,  R.  »  §  140,  1,  3d,  &121.        §99,  Obs.  7. 

9     109,  1.  «  §  112,  R.  IV.  »  §  136,  R.  LII. 

*  37,3.  "     87,7.  o§38.7. 

•  105,2.  »  §  98,  Obs.  11.  &  p     43. 

?§112,  R.  XVII.  25,1.  q     124,18,(Sup.oc.) 


LIB.  IV.    CAP.  XXVIII.  145 

eqmtes  ^  cursum  tenere  atque  insiilam  capere  non  potuerant* 
Hoc  ununi  ad  pristinam  fortunam  Caesari  defuit. 

27.  Hostes  proelio  superati,  simul''  atque  se  ex  fugd  rece- 
perunt,  statim  ad  Cassarem  legates  de  pace  miserunt :  ob- 
sides  daturos,  quseque  imperasset''  sese  facturos,  polliclti 
sunt.  Una  cum  his  legatis  Commius  Atrebas  venit,  quern  *= 
2  supra  demonstraveram  a  Caesare  inBritanniam  prsemissum.* 
Hunc  illi  e  navi  egressum,  cum  ad  eos  3  oratoris  modo  im- 
peratoris  mandata  perferret,  comprehenderant,  atque  in  vin- 
ciila  conjecerant :  turn,  proBlio  facto,  remiserunt  et  in  peten- 
da^  pace  ejus  rei  ^culpam  in  multitudinem  contulerunt,  et 
propter  imprudentiam  ut  ignosceretur,  petiverunt.  Caesar 
questus,  quod,  cum  ultro-^in  continentem  legatis  missis  pa- 
cem  ab  se  petissent/  bellum  sine  causa  intulissent,*  ignos- 
cere  6  imprudentisB  "  dixit,  obsidesque  imperavit:  quorum 
illi  partem  statim  dederunt,  partem,  ex  longinquioribus  locis 
■^  arcessitam,'^  paucis  diebus  '  sese  daturos  dixerunt.  Interea 
suos  remigrare  in  agros  jusserunt,  principesque  undique 
convenire,  et  se  civitatesque  suas  Caesari  commendare  coe- 
perunt. 

28.  His  rebus  pace  confirmata,  «  post  diem  quartum,  quam 
est  in  Britanniam  ventum,''  naves  octodecim,  de  quibus®  su- 
pra demonstratum  est,  quae  equites  sustulerant,  ex  superiore 
portu  leni  vento  solverunt.  loQuas'  cum  appropinquarent 
Britanniae,  et  ex  castris  viderentur,  tanta  tempestas  subit6 
coorta  est,  ut  nulla  earum  *"  cursum  tenere  posset,"  sed  aliae 
eodem,  unde  erant  profectae,  r6ferrentur ;  aliae  ad  inferiorem 
partem  insiilse,  ''  quce  est  propius  solis  occasum,**  magno  sui 
cum  periciilo  dejicerentur :  12  quae  p  tamen,  anchoris  jactis 
ciim  fluctibus  complerentur,^  ^3  necessari6  adversa  nocte  in 
altum  provectae,  continentem  petierunt. 

»     124,  18.  '  §  140,  Obs.  4.  •      39,  6,  or  1. 

^     80,  1.  g  §  141,  Obs.  7.  ""§  107,  R.  X. 

c§  145,R.  &91,4.  h  §  112,  R.  V.  n§  140,  1,1st. 

"1     98,2.  i§131,R.  XLI.  «'§  136,Obs.5,  (ai.) 

«  §  147,  R.  LXII.  k     67,  5,  Note.  p  §  38. 

13 


146  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

29.  Eadem  nocte  accidit,  ut  essef'  luna  plena,  ^qui^  dies 
maritimos  sestus  maximos  in  Ocea.no  efficere  consuevit ; 
2nostrisque  *"  id  erat  incognitum.  Ita  uno  tempore  et  longas 
naves,  quibus*^  Caesar  exercitum  transportandum  curaverat, 
quasque  in  aridum  ^  subduxerat,  sGstus  complebat ;  et  onera- 
rias,  3quae  ad  anchoras  erant  deligatae,  tempestas  ^afflictabat; 
neque  ulla  nostris*"  facultas  aut  administrandi,  aut  auxiliandi, 
dabatur.  Compluribus  navibas^  fractis,  reliquse  cum  essent, 
funibus,^  anchoris,  reliquisque  armanientis  amissis,  ad  navi- 
gandum  in  utiles,  magna,  id  quGd""  necesse  erat  accidere, 
totius  exercitiis  perturbatio  facta  est :  neque  enim  naves 
erant  alise,  quibus  reportari  possent;'  et  omnia  deerant,  quae 
ad  reficiendas  eas  usui""  sunt,  et,  ^  qu^d  omnibus*'  constabat 
hiemari  in  Gallic  oportere,  frumentum  ^  his  in  locis  in  hie- 
mem  provisum  non  erat. 

30.  Quibus™  rebus^  cognitis,  principes  Britannias,  qui  post 
proelium  factum  ad  ea,  quae  jusserat  Caesar,  facienda  con- 
venerant,  inter  se  collocuti,  cum  equites"  et  naves  et  fru- 
mentum Romanis°deesseintelligerent,  et  paucitatem  militum 
ex  castrorum  exiguitate  cognoscerent,  quae  hoc  erant  etiam 
angustiora,  quod  sine  impedimentis  Caesar  legiones  trans- 
portaverat,  optimum  factu  **  esse  duxerunt,  rebellione  ^  facta, 
frumento"*  commeatiique  nostros  prohibere,  et  "^rem  in  hiemem 
producere,  quod,  iis  superatis,  aut  reditu''  interclusis,  nemi- 
nem  postea  belli  inferendi  causa  in  Britanniam  transiturum 
confidebant.  Ttaque,  rursus  conjuratione  ^  facta,  paulatim  ex 
castris  discedere,  ac  suos  clam  ex  agris  deducere  coeperunt. 

31. 'At  Caesar,  etsi  nondum  eorum  consilia  cognoverat, 
tamen  et  ^ex  eventu  navium  suarum,  ^et  ex  eo,  quod  obsides 
dare   intermiserant,    fore ""  id,"   quod  accidit,  suspicabatur. 

*  §  140,  1,  4th.  f  §  126,  R.  III.  "■    38,  3. 

"  §  99,  Exc.  1,  &  «     109,  2.  "  §  145,  R. 

37,  4.  "     37,  9,  Note.  3.  °  §  112,  R.  I. 

e§  111,  R.  '  §  141,  Obs.  1.  r     114,2. 

d§129,  R.  k§ii4,  Obs.  4.  q  §  136,Obs.  5,  (a6.)     j 

•  19,  ilocum.)  i§113,  R.  &19.  ^     100,12. 


LIB.  IV.    CAP.  XXXIII.  J147 

Itaque  i  ad  omnes  casus  subsidia  comparabat :  nam  et  fru- 
rnentum  ex  agris  quotidie  in  castra  conferebat,*  et,  quae  ''gra- 
vissime  afflictae  erant  naves,  earum'^  materia  atque  aere  ad 
reliquas  refieiendas  utebatur,  et,  quae  ad  eas  res  erant  usui,*^ 
ex  continenti  comportari  jubebat.  Itaque,  cum  id  summo 
studio  a  militibus  administraretur,  duodecim  navibus  amissis, 
2reliquis^  ut  navigari  commode  posset,  effecit. 

32.  3Dum  ea  geruntur,  legione  ex  consuetudine  una  fru- 
mentum  ^  missa,  quae  appellabatur  septima,  neque  ulla  ad 
id  teinpus  belli  suspiciOne  interposita,  cilim  pars  hominum 
in  agris  reman eret,  pars  etiam  in  castra  ventitaret,  ii,  qui 
pro  porlis  castrorum  ^  in  statione  erant,  Caesari  renunciarunt, 
pulverem  ^  majorem,  ^quam  consuetudo  ferret,""  in  ea  parte 
videri,  quam'  in  partem  l^gio  iter  fecisset.  Caesar  id,  quod 
erat,  suspicatus,  aliquid^  novi  a  barbaris  initum  "  consilii,  co- 
hortes,  quae  ^in  stationibus  erant,  secum  in  earn  partem  pro- 
ficisci,' duas  ex  reliquis  '''in  stationem  succedere,'  reliquas 
armari'  et  confestim  sese  subsequi '  jussit.  Cum  paul6  longiils 
a  castris  processisset,  suos^  ab  hostibus  premi,""  atque' aegre 
sustinere,  ^et,  conferta  legione,  ex  omnibus  partibus  tela*^ 
conjici,'"  animum  advertit.  Nam  ^quod,  omni  ex  reliquis 
partibus  demesso  frumento,  pars  una  erat  reliqua,  suspicati 
hostes,  hue  nostros  esse  ventures,  noctu  in  silvis  delituerant: 
tum  disperses,  deposTtis  armis,  in  metendo  "  occupatos,  subi- 
to  adorti,  paucis  interfectis,  reliquos  ^oincertis  ordinibus 
perturbaverant:  simul  equitatu*  atque  essedis*  circumde- 
derant. 

83.  11  Genus  hoc  est  ex  essedis  pugn^  :  primo  per  omnes 
partes  perequitant,  et  tela  conjiciunt,  atque  12 ipso"  terrore^ 
equorum,  et  strepitu  rotarum,  ordines  plerumque  perturbant; 


»  §  44,  II.  2.                  -  §  129,  R, 

^     98,  2. 

b     37,  6,  Note.  1.  &,    f  §  148,  R.  LXIII. 

1      90,  4. 

43.                             g  §  145, R. 

m     96,  6. 

e      19,  (navium.)          ^  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

«  §  147,  Obs.  5. 

«>§  114,  Obs.  4.             i      37,6,  Note.  1. 

"     32,  5. 

148  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

et  cum  se  inter  equitum  turmas  linsinuaverint,"  ex  essedis 
desiliunt,  et  pedibus  proeliantur.  sAurigae  interim  paulatim 
ex  proBlio  excedunt,  ^  atque  ita  curru  ^  se  collocant,  ut,  si  illi 
a  multitudme  hostium  premantur,*"  expeditum  ad  suos  recep- 
tum  habeant.*^  ^Ita  mobilitatem  equitum,  stabilitatem  pedi- 
tum,  in  proeliis  praestant:  ^ac  tantum  usu  quotidiano  et  ex- 
ercitatione  efficiunt,  uti,  in  declivi  ac  praecipiti  loco,  ^  inci- 
tatos  equos  sustinere, ''et  brevi^  moderari  ac  flectere,  et  per 
temonem  percuriere,  et  in  jugo  insistere,  et  inde  se  in  cur- 
Tus  citissime  recipere  consuerint.^ 

34.  Quibus  ^  rebus,^  perturbatis  nostris  novitate  pugnaB, 
tempore*'  opportunissimo  Caesar  auxilium  tulit:  namque  ejus 
adventu*  hostes  constiterunt,  nostri  se  ex  timore  receperunt. 
Quo  '^  facto,  ad  lacessendum  et  ad  committendum  proelium 
alienum  esse  tempus  arbitratus,'  suo  se  loco  ^  continuit,  et, 
brevi  tempore  intermisso,  in  castra  legiOnes  reduxit.  Dum 
hsBC  geruntur,  nostris  omnibus  occupatis,  qui  erant  in  agris, 
reliqui  discesserunt.  Secutae  sunt  ^  continuos  complures 
dies'"  tempestates,  quae"  et  nostros  in  castris  continerent," 
et  hostem  a  pugnd  prohiberent."  Interim  barbari  nuncios 
in  omnes  partes  dimiserunt,  paucitatemque  nostrorum  mili- 
tum  ^suis  praedicaverunt,  et,  i^quanta  praedae  faciendas,"  atque 
in  perpetuum  sui  liberandi,"  facultas  daretur,P  si  Romanos 
castris''  expulissent,  demoristraverunt.  His  rebus  celeriter 
magna  multitudme  peditatus  equitatGsque  coacta,  ad  castra 
Tenerunt. 

35,,  Caesar,  etsi  idem,'  quod  superioribus  diebus''  accide- 
rat,  fore  videbat,  ut,  si  essent  hostes  puisi,  celeritate  peri- 
ciilum  effugerent ;  ^  tamen  nactus  equites  circiter  triginta, 

*  §  140,  Obs.  3.  8  §  136,  Obs.  5  (in.)     "  §  141,  Obs.  3. 
*•§  136,Obs.5,  (cMm.)M  131,R.  XL.  o     312,5. 

•=  §  140,  2.  i  §  129,  R.  P  §  140,  5. 

«»  §  140,  1,  1st.  k     38,  5.  q  §  136,  R.  LII. 

•  19,  (tempore.)  »      106, 1.  r  §  145,  r.  &  19. 
'     38.  -§131,R.  XLI.  »§  145,  Obs.  6. 


LIB.  IV.    CAP.  XXXVII.  149 

quosComniius  Atrebas.de  quo  lante  dictum  est,''  secumtrans- 
portaverat,  legiones  in  acie  pro  castris  constituit.  Commis- 
so  proelio,  diutius  nostrorum  militum  impetum  hostes  ferre 
non  pbtuerunt,  ac  terga  verterunt.  Quos  **  tanto  spatio*^  se- 
cuti,  quantum'^  cursu^  et  viribus  efficere  potuerunt,  complu- 
res  ex  iis  occiderunt ;  deinde,  ^omnibus''  longe  lateque 
afflictis  incensisque,  se  in  castra  receperunt. 

36.  Eodem  die  legati,  ab  hostibus  missi  ad  Caesarem  de 
pace,  venerunt.  His^  Caesar  numerum  obsidum,  quem  an- 
tea  imperaverat,  duplicavit,  eosque  in  continentem  adduci'' 
jussit,  quod,  pvopiiiqua  ^  die  *  sequinoctii,  infirmis  navibus,* 
^hierni  ^  navigationem  subjiciendam'  non  existimabat.  Ipse, 
idoneam  lempestatem  nactus,  paulo  post  mediam  noctem 
naves  solvit,  quae  omnes  incoluines  ad  continentem  pervene- 
Tunt ;  sed  ex  his  oneraiise  duae  ^  eosdem,  quos  reliquae,'"  por- 
tus  capere  non  potuerunt,  et  paulo  infra  delatas  sunt. 

37.  6Quibus^  ex  navibus  cum  essent  expositi  milites  cir- 
citer  trecenti,  atque  in  castra  contenderent,  Morini,  quos 
Caesar,  in  Britanniam  proficiscens,  pacatos  reliquerat,  spe  * 
praedas  adducti,  prime  ''non  ita  magno  suorum  numero  cir- 
cumsteterunt,  ac,  ^si  sese  interfici  nollent,"  arma  ponere 
jusserunt.  Cum  illi,  ^  orbe  facto,  sese  defenderent,  celeriter 
ad  clamorem  hominum  circiter  millia  sex  con  venerunt. 
Qua''  re  nunciata,  Caesar  omnem  ex  castris  equitatum  suis" 
auxilio"  misit.  Interim  nostri  milites  impetum  hostium  sus- 
tinuerunt,  atque  ampliiis  horis^  quatuor  fortissimo  pugna- 
verunt,  et,  paiicis  vulneribus  acceptis,  complures  ex  iis  occi- 
derunt. Postea  vero  quam  equitatus  noster  in  conspectura 
venit,  hostes  abjectis  armis  lo  terga  verterunt,  magnusque 
e5rum  numerus  est  occisus. 

.     «     67,  Note,  (a  ?io6is.)  s§  123,  R.  «§  101,  Obs.  4,  (ce- 
^§38.                              h     90,4.  perunt.) 

c  §  132,  R.  XLII.  i  §  110,  1  n  §  140,  2. 

^     44,  3.  k  §  126,  R.  III.  o  §  114,  R. 

«  §  129,  R.  »      108,  4.  p  §  120,  B. 

^     19,  (negotiis.) 


150  »E    BELLO    GALLICO, 

38.  Caesar  postero  die  Titum  Labienum  legatum,  cum  iis 
legionibus,  quas  ex  Britannia  reduxerat,  in  Morinos,  qui  re- 
bellionem  fecerant,  misit.  Qui,'*  cwm  propter  siccilates  pa- 
llidum, quo  se  reciperent,''  non  haberent*"  (quo  perfugio** 
superiore  anno  fuerant  usi),  omnes  fere  in  potestatem  Labi- 
eni  venerunt.  At  Quintus  Titurius  et  Lucius  Cotta,  legati, 
qui  in  Menapiorum  fines  legiones  duxerant,  omnibus  eorum 
agris  vastatis,  frumentis  succisis,  sedificiis  incensis,  quod 
Menapii  se  omnes  ^  in  densissimas  silvas  abdiderant,  se  ad 
Caesarem  receperunt.  Caesar  in  Belgis  omnium  legionum 
hiberna  constituit.  Eo  duae  omnino  civitates  ex  Britannia 
obsides  miserunt ;  reliquae  neglexerunt.  His  rebus  gestis, 
ex  literis  Caesaris  dierum  *  viginti  supplieatio  a  Senatu  de- 
creta  est. 

*     39,  5.  <=  §  140,  Obs.  4.  •  §  io6,  R.  VII. 

»>  §  140,  5.  0  §  121,  R.  XXVI. 


BOOK    V. 

GENERAL    ARGUMENT. 

I.  Csesar^s  second  expedition  into  Britain — Chap  1-23.  II.  War 
with  Ambiorix — Chap.  24-54  III.  Insurrection  among  the  Tre- 
viri  repressed — Chap.  55-58. 

1.  1  Lucio  DoMiTio,  Appio  Claudio,  consulibus,  discedens 
ab  hibernis  Caesar  in  Italiam,  ut  quotannis  facere  consuerat, 
legatis  imperat,  quos  legiombus  prsefecerat,  uti,  Squampluri- 
mas''  possent,  hieme  **  naves  asdificandaa''  veteresque  refici- 
endas""  curarent.  Earum  modum  formamque  demonstrat. 
8  Ad  celeritatem  onerandi  subd uctionesque  paulo  facit  humil- 
iores,  quam  quibus  **  in  4  nostromari  uti  consuevimus  ;  atque 
id  eo^  magis,  quod  propter  crebras  commutationes  sestuum 
minus  magnos  ibi  fluctus  fieri  cognoverat  ;  ad  onera  et  ad 
multitudinem  jumentorum  transportandam  paulo  latiOres, 
quam  quibus^  in  reliquis  utimur  maribus.  Has  omnes 
^actuarias  imperat  fieri,  quam  ad  rem  multum  humilitas 
^adjiivat.  Ea,  qua  sunt  usui  'ad  armandas  naves,  ex  His- 
pania  apportari  jubet.  Ipse,  conventibus  Gallise  citerioris 
peractis,  in  Illyricum  proficiscilur,  quod  a  Pirustis  finitimara 
partem  Provinciae  incursiombus  vastari  audiebat.  E6  ci^m 
venisset,  civjtatibus '  milites  imperat,  certumque  in  locum 
convenire  jubet.  Qua^  re  nunciata,  Pirustae  legates  ad  eum 
mittunt,  qui ''  doceant,  nihil  earum  rerum  publico  factum 
consilio,  seseque  paratos  esse  demonstrant,  ^  omnibus  rati- 
onibus*  de  injuriis  satisfacere.  Accepta  oratione  eorum, 
CaBsar  obsides  imperat,  eosque  ad  certam  diem  adduci  ju- 
bet: nisi  ita  fecerint,  sese  bello  civitatem  persecuturum  de- 

•  §  134,  Obs.  6,  3d.       ^     37.  s     38,  5. 

«>  §  131,  R.  XLI.  e  §  132,  Obs.  6.  »•  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4tb. 

c     108, 4.  '  §  123,  R.  &  5.  1.        !  §  129,  R. 


lo2  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

iDonstrat.  His  ad  diem  adductis,  ut  imperaverat,  arbitros  inter 
civitates  dat,  i  qui  litem  asstiment^   poenamque  constituant.* 

2.  His  confectis  rebus  Sconventibusque  peractis,  in  cite- 
riorem  Galliam  revertitur,  atque  inde  ad  exercitum  proficis- 
citur.  E6  cum  venisset,  circuitis  omnibus  hibernis,  singu- 
lari  militum  studio,  in  summa  omnium  rerum  inopia,  circi- 
ter  sexcentas  ejus  generis,  cujus''  supra  demonstravimus, 
naves  et  longas  viginti  octo  invenit  3  instructas,  ^neque  mul- 
t.'m  abesse  ab  eo,  quin  paucis  diebus  deduci  possent.*'  Col- 
laudatis  militibus*^  atque  iis*^  qui  negotioprsefuerant,  quid  fie- 
ri velit,  ostendit,  atque  omnes  ad  portum  Itium  convenire  ju- 
bet,  quo  ex  porta  commodissTmum  in  Britanniam  ^transmis- 
sum''  esse  cognoverat,  circiter  millium  passu u m '^  triginta  a 
continenti.  Huic  rei  quod  satis  esse  visum  est  militum,*^ 
reliquit:  ipse  cum  legiombus  ^expedltis  quatuor  et  equiti- 
bus  octingentis  in  fines  Trevirorum  proficiscltur,  quod  hi 
neque  ad  concilia  veniebant,  neque  imperio  "^  parebant,  Ger- 
manosque  transrhenanos  solicitare  dicebantur. 

3.  Hsec  civitas  longrj  plurimiim  totius  Galliae  equitatu 
valet,  magnasque  habet  copias  peditum,  Khenumque,  ut  su- 
pra demonstravimus,  tangit.  In  ea  civitSte  duo'  de  princT- 
patu  inter  se  contendebant,  Indutiomarus  et  Cingetorix:  ex 
quibus  "^  alter,  simul  atque "^  de  Cassaris  legionumque  adventu 
cognitum  est,  ad  eum  venit :  se  suosque  omnes  in  officio  fu- 
turos,  neque  ab  amicitia  Populi  Romani  defecturos  confir- 
mavit;  quagque  in  Treviris  gererentur,'  ostendit.  At  Indu- 
tiomarus equitatum  peditatumque  cogere,"*  iisque,"*  qui  per 
setatem  in  armis  esse  non  poterant,  in  ^silvam  Arduennam 
abditis,  qusB  ingenti  magnitudine  per  medios  fines  Treviro- 
rum a  flumine  Fheno  ad  initium  Eemorum  pertmet,  bellum 
parare"'  instituit.     Sed  postea  quam  nonnuUi  principes  ex 

»§  141,  Obs.  2,  4th.  «§145,  R.  i      19,1. 

b  §  99,  Exc.  2.  f  §  106,  R.   VII.  k     124,  18. 

•^  §  140,  3.  g  §  lOe.R.VIII.Obs.lO.'  §  140,  5. 

«>     109,2.  h     112,  R.V.  '"§  144,  R.  LVII. 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  V.  1»53 

ea  civitate,  et  familiaritate  Cingetorigis  adducti  et  adventu 
nostri  exercitus  perterriti,  ad  Cajsarem  venerunt,  et  de  suis 
privatim  rebus  ab  eopetere  cceperunt,  ^quoniam  civitati  con- 
sulere  non  possent : '"^  Indutiomarus,  veritus ''  ne''  ab  omni- 
bus desereretur,  legates  ad  Caesarem  mittit  j"*  sese  idcirco 
ab  suis  discedere  atque  ad  eum  venire  noluisse,  quo  facilius 
civitatem  in  officio  contineret,  ne  omnis  nobilitatis  discessu 
plebs  propter  imprudentiam  ^laberetur.  Itaque  esse  civita- 
tem in  sua  potestate,  seque,  si  Caesar  permitteret,  ad  eum  in 
castra  venturum,  et  suas  civitatisque  fortunas  ejus  fidei 
3  perniissurum. 

4.  CsBsar,  etsi  intelligebat,  qua  de  causd  ea  dicerentur,® 
quaeque  eum  res  ab  instituto  consilio  deterreret,*"  tamen,  ne 
aestatem  in  Treviris  consumere  cogeretur/  omnibus  ad  Bri- 
tannicum  bellum  rebus  comparatis,  Indutiomarum  adsecum 
ducentis  obsidibus  venire^  jussit.  His  adductis,  in  iis  fiiio 
propinquisque  ejus  omnibus,  quos  nominatim  evocaverat, 
consolatus  ^  Indutiomarum  hortatusque  est,  uti  in  officio  per- 
maneret :  nihilo  tamen  secius,  principibus  Trevirorum  ad  se 
convocatis,  hos  singillatim  Cingetorigi  conciliavit :  quod 
cum'  merito  ejus  ab  se  fieri  intelligebat,  turn'  magni''  in- 
teresse  arbitrabatur,  ejus  auctoritatem  inter  suos  quamplu- 
rimiim  valere,  cujus  tarn  egregiam  in  se  voluntatem  perspex- 
isset.'  Id  factum  graviter  tulit  Indutiomarus,  ^suam  gra- 
tiam  inter  suos  minui;  et,  qui""  jam  ante  inimico  in  nos 
animo  fuisset,  ^multo  gravius  hoc  dolore  exarsit. 

5.  His  rebus  constittitis,  Caesar  ad  portum  Itium  cum  le- 
gionibus  pervenit.  Ibi  cognoscit,  quadraginta  naves,  quae 
in  Meldis  factae  erant,  terapestate  rejectas.  ^cursum  tenere 
non  potuisse,  atque  eodem,  unde  erant  profectaj,  levertisse: 
reliquas  paratas  ad  uavigandum  atque  omnibus  rebus  in- 


»  §  140,  Obs.  2. 

•^  §  140,  5. 

i      124,8. 

b     106,1. 

f  §  140,  1,2a. 

k  §  113,  Exc.  I. 

«§  140, Obs. 6,  8c  121. 

?      90,  4. 

1  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

•«     94,4,&§  115,  R. 

'■^    n.>,  1. 

»"§  141,  R.  III. 

154  DE    BELLO    GALLICO, 

structas  invenit.  Eodem  totius  Gallise  equitatus  convenit, 
numero''  millium  quatuor,  principesque  omnibus  ex  civitatT- 
bus :  ex  quibus  perpaucos,  quorum  in  se  fidem  perspexeral, 
relinquere  in  Gallia,  reliquos  obsidum  loco"  secnm  ducere, 
decreverat;  quod,  cum  ipse  abesset,  motum  Galliae  verebatur. 

6.  Erat  una  cum  ceteris  Dumnorix  ^duus,  de  quo  ab  no- 
bis lantea  dictum  est.  Hunc  secum  habere  in  primis  con- 
stituerat,  quod  eum  ^cupidum  rerum "  novarum,  cupidum 
imperii,  magni  animi,*^  magnas  inter  Gallos  auctoritatis,*"  cog- 
noverat.  Accedebat  hue,  quod  jam  in  concilio  ^duorum 
Dumnorix  dixerat,  sibi''  a  Cassare  regnum  civitatis  deferri: 
quod  ^  dictum  jEdui  graviter  ferebant,  neque  recusandi  aut 
deprecandi  causd  legatos  ad  Caesarem  mittere  audebant. 
3  Id  factum  ex  suis  hospitibus  Caesar  cognoverat.  Ille  om- 
nibus primo  precibus  *petere  contendit,  ut  in  Gallia  relin- 
queretur;  partim,  quod  insuetus  navigandi"  mare  timeret/ 
partim,  quod  religionibus  sese  diceret  impediri.  Postea- 
quam  id  obstinate  sibi**  negari  vidit,  omni  spe  impetrandi 
ademta,  principes  Galliae  solicitare,  sevocare  singiilos  hor- 
tarique  coepit,  uti  in  continenti  remanerent;^  metu  territare 
^non  sine  causa  fieri,  ut  Gallia,  omni  nobilitate  "  spoliaretur; 
id  esse  consilium  Ceesaris,  ut,  quos  in  conspectu  Galliae  in- 
terficere  vereretur,  hos  onines  in  Britanniam  transductos 
necaret-/  ^fijem  reliquis  interponere,  jusjurandum  poscere, 
ut,  7 quod'  esse  ex  usu  Galliae  intellexissent,  communi  con- 
silio  administrarent.  Haec  a  corapluribus  ad  Caesarem  de- 
ferebantur. 

7.  Qua*"  re  cognita,  Caesar,  Squod  tantum  civitati  jEduvT 
dignitatis  ""  tribuerat,  coercendum  '  atque  deterrendum,'  qui- 
buscumque  rebus  posset,  Dumnorigem  statuebat;  quod  ^  lon- 
gius    ejus  amenliam  progredi    videbat,  lo  prospiciendum,"" 

» §  136,  Obs.  5,  (<ie.)  «     38.  >      37,2. 

"  §  107,  R.  IX.  f  §  141,  Obs.  7.  k  §  106,  R.  VIII 

c§106,R.  VII.  g§140,  1,  3d.  '      108,4. 

«»  §  126,  R.  III.  h§i26,  R.  V.  «"     113,5. 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  VIII.  155 

'ne  quid*  sibi''  ac  rei  publicas  nocere  posset.  Itaque  dies'" 
circiter  viginti  quinque  in  eo  loco  commoratus,  quod  2  Corus 
Veritas  uavigationem  impediebat,  qui  magnam  partem'-'  om- 
nis  temporis  in  his  locis  flare  consuevit,  dabat  operam,  ut.  in 
officio  Dumnorigem  contineret,*^  nihilo  tamen  secius  omnia 
ejus  consilia  3  cognosceret :  "^  tandem,  idoneam  nactus  tem- 
pestatem,  milites  equitesque  conscendere  naves  jubet.  At, 
^omnium  impeditis  animis,  Dumnorix  cum  equitibus  ^du- 
orum  a  castris,  insciente  Caesare,  domum^  discedere  coepit. 
Qua  re  nunciata,  Caesar,  intermissa  profectione  atque  omni- 
bus rebus  postpositis,  magnam  partem  equrtatus  ad  eum  in- 
sequendum  mittit,  retrahique  ^  imperat :  si  vim  faciat  neque^ 
pareat,  interfici'^  jubet:  nihil  ^hunc"  se  absente  pro  sano 
facturum  arbitratus,  qui  praesentis  imperium  neglexisset.' 
fillle  enim  revocatus  resistere  ac  se  manu  defendere  suo- 
rumque  fidem  implorare  ccepit,  Scepe  clamitans,  "  liberum  se 
liberasque  civitatis "  esse."  Illi,  ut  erat  imperatum,  circum- 
sistunt  atque  hominem  interficiunt ;  at  jEdui  equites  ad  Cae- 
sarem  omnes  revertuntur. 

8.  His  rebus  gestis,  Labieno  in  continente  cum  tribus  le- 
gionibus  et  equitum  millibus  duobus  relicto,  ut  portus  tuere- 
tur'^  et  rem  frumentariam  provideret,'^  quaeque  in  Gallia 
gererentur'  cognosceret,**  ''' consiliumque  pro  tempore  et  pro 
re  caperet,*^  ipse  cum  quinque  legiombus  et  ^pari  numero 
equitum  quem  in  continenti  relinquebat,  solis  occasu""  na- 
ves solvit,  et,  leni  Africo  provectus,  media  circiter  nocte "" 
vento  intermisso,  cursum  non  tenuit,  et,  ^longiiis  delatus  asstu, 
orta  luce,  sub  sinistra  Britanniam  relictam  conspexit.  Turn 
mrsus,  aestus  commutationem  ^Osecutus,  remis  contendit,  ut 
eam  partem  insulae  caperet,^  qua  optimum  esse  egressum 
superiore    aestate    cognoverat.     Qui    in    re    admodum  fuit 

*§116,  Obs.  3.  •'§130,4.  i§]41,  R.  III. 

i'§ll2,  R.  V.  '     90,4.  k  §  108,  R.  XII. 

c§131,R.  XLI.  B  §  93,  1,  (and  no*.)  '§140,5. 

<i§140,  1.2d.  i'§i45^R.  «'§131,R.  XL. 


156  t)E    BELLO    GALLICO. 

militum  1  virtus  laudanda,  qui  2  vectoriis  gravibusque  navi- 
giis,  non  intermisso  remigandi  labore,  longarum  navium  cur- 
sum  adaequarunt.  3  Accessum  est""  ad  Britanniam  omnibus 
navibus*  meridiano  fere  tempore  ;  neque  in  eo  loco  hostis  est 
visus,  sed,  ut  postea  Cassarex  captivis  comperit,  cum"  mag- 
na) manus  eo  convenissent,''  multitudine  navium  perterrltae 
(qusB  4  cum  annotinis  privatisque,  quas  sui  quisque  commo- 
di'^  fecerat,  ampliiis  octingentis  uno  erant  visse  tempore),  a 
littore  discesserant  ac  se  in  superiora  loca  abdiderant. 

9.  Ca3sar,  exposito  exercitu  et  loco  castris  '^  idoneo  capto, 
ubi  ex  captivis  cogndvit,  quo  in  loco  hostium  copiae  conse- 
dissent,*  cohortibus  decem  ad  mare  relictis  et  equitibus  tre- 
centis,  qui*^  prsesidio  ^  navibus  essent,  de  tertia  vigilia  ad 
hostes  contendit,  eo  minijs  ^  veritus  navibus/'  quod  ^ in  littore 
molli  atque  aperto  deligatas  ad  anchoram  relinquebat;  et 
praBsidio^'  navibus  Quintum  Atrium  prsefecit.  Ipse,  noctu 
progressus  millia  passuum  circiter  duodecim,  hostium  copias 
conspicatus  est.  Illi,  equitatu'  atque  essedis  ad  flumen 
progressi,  ex  loco  superiore  nostros  prohibere  et  proelium 
committere  cogperunt.  Repulsi  ab  equitatu,  se  in  silvas  ab- 
diderunt,  locum  nacti,  egregie  et  natura  et  opere  munitum, 
quern  domestici  belli,  ut  videbatur,  causa  jam  ante  prsepa- 
raverant:  nam  crebris  arboribus  "^  succisis  omnes  introitus 
erant  ^praeclusi.  Ipsi  ex  silvis  rari  propugnabant,  nostrosque 
intra  munitiones  ingredi  prohibebant.  At  milites  legionis 
septimse,  ^  testiidine  ^  facta,  et  aggere  ad  munitiones  adjecto, 
locum  ceperunt  eosque  ex  silvis  expulerunt,  paucis  vulneri- 
bus  ^  acceptis.  Sed  eos  fugientes  longii^s  Cassar  prosequi 
vetuit,  et  quod  loci  naturam  ignorabat,  et  quod,  magna 
parte  digi  consumta  munitioni '  casirorum  tempus  relinqui 
volebat. 

^^     67,  5,  Note.  «  §  140,  5.  i  §  136,  Obs.5,(cw7n) 

"  §  140,  Obs.  3.  f  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4th.  ^      109,  2. 

c  §  106,Ohs.Z.(causd.)  s  §  114,  R.  »  §  110,  R.  XV. 
o§lll,  R.                      »>§  112,  R.  XVII. 


'    LIB.  V.    CAP.  XI.  157 

10.  Postridie  ejus  diei*  mane  ^tripartito  milites  equitesque 
in  expeditionem  misit,  ut  eos,  qui  fugerant,  persequerentur. 
His  aliquantum  itineris''  progressis,  cum  jam  extremi''  essent 
in  prospectu,  equites  a  Quinto  Atrio  ad  Caesarem  venerunt, 
qui*^  nunciarent,  ^superiore  nocte,  maxima  coorta  tempestate, 
prope  omnes  naves  ^afflictas*  atque  in  littore  ejectas  esse  ;* 
qu6d  neque  anchorse  funesque  "*  subsisterent/  neque  nautae 
gubernatoresque  vim  pati  tempestatis  possent :  ^  itaque  ^ex 
eo  concursu  navium  magnum  esse  ^incommodum  acceptum.* 

11.  His  rebus  cognitis,  Caesar  legiones  equitatumque  re- 
vocari  atque  itinere  desistere  jubet:  ipse  ad  naves  reverti- 
tur:  eadem  fere,  quae  ex  nuntiis  literisque  cognoverat,  "^co- 
ram perspicit,  sic  ut,  amissis  circiter  quadraginta  navibus, 
reliqusB  tamen  refici  posse  magno  negotio  viderentur.^  Ita- 
que ex  legionibus  fabros  delegit,  et  ex  continenti  alios  ar- 
cessiri  jubet ;  Labieno*"  scribit,  ut,  quam  plurimas  posset, 
iis  legionibus'  quae  sint "  apud  eum,  naves  instituat.  Ipse, 
etsi  8res  erat  multae  operae'  ac  laboris,  tamen  commodissimum 
esse  statuit,  omnes  naves  ^  subduci ""  et  cum  castris  una  mu- 
nitione  conjungi.  In  his  rebus  circiter  dies  decem  consti- 
mit,  ne  nocturnis  "  quidem  temporibus  ad  laborem  militum 
intermissis.  Subductis  navibus  castrisque  egregie  munitis,  ^. 
easdem  copias,  quas  ante,  praesidio  navibus  reliquit:  ipse 
eodem,  unde  redierat,  proficiscitur.  E6  cum  venisset,  ma- 
jores  jam  undique  in  eum  locum  copiae  Britannorum  conve- 
nerant,  lo  summa  imperii  bellique  administrandi  commtini 
consilio  permissa  Cassivellauno,"  cujus  fines  a  maritimis 
civitatibus  flumen  dividit,  quod  appellatur  Tamesis,  a  mari 
circiter  millia  passuum  octoginta.  Huic^  ii  superiore  tem- 
pore cum  reliquis  civitatibus  continentia  bella  intercesse- 

•  §  135,  R.  XL VI.        t  §  141^  obs.  7.  i  §  106,  R.  VII. 
»>§  106,  R.  VIII.           s  §  140,  1,  1st.  "»    94,3. 

«     Sup.  fugientium.     ^  §  123,  R.  »     121,  Note.  2. 

d  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4th.     i  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (ex.)    <>  §  126,  R.  III. 

•  9S,  2.  k  §  141,  Obs.  8.  p  §  112,  R,  IV. 

14 


158  /  DE   BELLO    GALLICO. 

rant:  sed  nostro  adventu  permoti  Britanni  hunc  toti  bello*^ 
imperioque  praefecerant. 

12.  Britanniae  pars  interior  ab  iis  incolitur,  ^quos''  natos 
in  insula  ipsa,memoria  proditum  dicunt :  maritima  pars  ab 
iis,  qui  praedae  ac  belli  inferendi  causa  ex  Belgis  transie- 
rant ;  qui  omnes  fere  iis  nominibus  civitatum  appellantur, 
quibus*"  orti  ex  civitatibus  eo  pervenerunt,  et  ^bello  illato 
ibi  remanserunt  atque  agros  colere  cosperunt.  Hominum 
est  infinita  multitudo,  ^creberrimaque  aedificia,  ^  fere  Galli- 
cis"^  consimilia:  pecorum  magnus  numerus.  Utuntur  aut 
aere,^  aut  ^taleis  ferreis,  ad  certum  pondus  examinatis,  pro 
nummo.  Nascitur  ibi  ^  plumbum  album  in  mediterraneis 
regionibus,  in  maritimis  ferrum  ;  sed  ejus  exigua  est  '''copia: 
aere ^  utuntur  importato.  ^Materia  cujusque  generis,  ut  in 
Gallia,  est,  praeter  fagum  atque  abietem.  Leporem  et  gal- 
linam  et  anserem  gustare,  fas  non  putant ;  haec  tamen  alunt 
^animi  voluptatisque  causa.  ^^Loca  sunt  temperatiora, 
quam  in  Gallia,  i^remissioribus  frigoribus.^ 

13.  Insiila  nattira  '^triquetra,  cujus  unum  latus  est  contra 
Galliam.  Hujus  lateris  alter  angiilus,  qui  est  ^^adCantium, 
quo  fere  omnes  ex  Gallia  naves  appelluntur,  ad  orientem 
solem ;  inferior  ad  meridiem  spectat.  Hoc  latus  tenet  cir- 
citer  millia  passuum  quingenta.  Alterum  vergit  i-*  ad  Hispa- 
niam  atque  occidentem  solem,  qua  ex  parte  est  Hibernia, 
i*dimidio  ^  minor,  ut  aestimatur,  quam  Britannia ; '  ^^  ged  pari 
spatio  ^  transmissus,  atque '  ex  Gallia,  est  in  Britanniam. 
In  hoc  medio  cursu  est  insiila,  quae  appellatur  i^Mona ;  com- 
plures  praeterea  minores  objectae  insulae  existimantur ;  de 
quibus*"  insiilis  nonnulli  scripserunt,  ^^(iies"*  continues  tri- 
ginta  sub  bruma,  esse  noctem,''  Nos  nihil  de  eo  perconta- 
tionibus  reperiebamus,  is  nisi  certis  ex  aqua  mensuris  brevio- 

»  §  123,  R.  «  §  121,  R.  XXVI.  i  §  120,  Obs.  2,  2d. 

b  §  145,  R.  &  91,  4.  '      110.  k  §  132,  R.  XLII. 

c     37,  6,  Note.  1.  s     19,  (latus.)  i  §  149,  Obs.  6. 

«i§lll.  R.  &19.  h  §  132,  R.  XLIII.  «•§  131,R.  XLI 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  XV. 


159 


res  esse,  quam  in  continente,  noctes  videbamus.  Hujus  est 
longitudo  lateris,  ut  fert  illorum  opinio,  i  septingentorum 
millium.*  Tertium  est  2  contra  septentriones,  cui  parti" 
nulla  est  objecta  terra;  sed  ejus  angulus  lateris  maxTme  ad 
Germaniam  spectat :  huic*=  millia'^  passuum  3  octingenta 
in  longitudinem  esse  existimatur.^  Ita  omnis  insiila  est  in 
circuitu  vicies  centum  millium  passuum. 

14.  Ex  his  omnibus  longe  sunt  ^humanissimi,  qui  Can- 
tium  incolunt,  quae  regio  est  maritima  omnis;  neque  multum 
a  Gallica  differunt  consuetudine.  Interiores  plerlque  fru- 
menta  non  serunt,  sed  lacte*^  et  carne  vivunt,  pellibusque^ 
sunt  vestiti.  Omnes  vero  ^se  Britanni  vitro  inficiunt,  quod 
coeruleum  efficit  colorem,  atque  hoc  horridiore  sunt  in  pug- 
na  aspectu:"  ^  capilloque' sunt  promisso  atque  omni  parte 
corporis  rasa,  praeter  caput  et  labrum  superius.  Uxores 
habent  ^deni  duodenique  inter  se  communes,  et  maxim^ 
fratres  cum  fratribus  parentesque  cum  liberis ;  sed,  si  qui 
sunt  ex  his  nati,  eorum  habentur  liberi,  ^  quo  ^  primum  vir- 
go  quaeque  deducta  est. 

15.  Equites  hostium  essedariique  acriter  proelio  cum  equi- 
tatu  nostro  in  itinere  conflixerunt,  9  tamen  ut  nostri  omnibus 
partibus  superiores  fuerint,  atque  eos  in  silvas  collesque 
compulerint :  sed  compluribus  interfectis,  cupidiiis'insecuti, 
nonnullos  ex  suis  amiserunt.  At  illi,  intermisso  spatio,  im- 
prudentibus  nostris  atque  occupatis  in  munitione  castrorum, 
subito  se  ex  silvis  ejecerunt,  impetuque  in  eos  facto,  qui 
erant  in  statione  pro  castris  collocati,  acriter  pugnaverunt : 
duabusque  i^submissis  cohortibus  a  Caesare,  atque  his  pri- 
mis  legionum  "  duarum,  ctim  has,  perexiguo  intermisso  loci 
spatio  inter  se,  ^^  constitissent,  novo  genere  pugnse  perterritis 
nostris,  per  medios  audacissime  perruperunt,  seque  inde  in- 

»§  132,  Obs.  3.  e     51.  i  §  136,  Obs.5,(cw»i) 

"  §  126,  R.  III.  f  §  121,  Obs.  2.  k  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (a.) 

c  §  112,  R.  II.  g  §  126,  R.  V.  I     22,  3. 

«»  §  145,  R.  !>  §  106,  R.  VII.  »»§  107,  R.  X. 


160  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

coliimes  receperunt.  Eo  die  Quintus  Laberius  Durus,  tri- 
bunus  militum,  interficitur.  Illi,  pluribus  immissis  cohorti- 
bus,  repelluntur. 

16.  Tcto  hoc  in  genere  pugnee,  ^  cum  sub  oculis  omnium 
ac  pro  castris  dimicaretur,  sintellectum  est,''  nostros^  prop- 
ter gravitatem  armaturae,  quod  neque  insequi  ^  cedentes  pos- 
sent,  neque  ab  signis  discedere  auderent,  miniis  aptos  esse 
ad  hujus  generis  hostem ;  equites''  autem  magno  cum  peri- 
ciilo  dimicare,*"  propterea  quod  illi  etiam  consulto  plerumque 
^cederent,'^  et,  cum  paulum  ab  legionibus  nostros  removis- 
sent,  ex  essedis  desilirent  ^et  pedibus^  dispari  proBlio  con- 
tenderent.  Equestris  autem  proslii  ratio  et  cedentibus  ^  et 
insequentibus  par  atque  idem  periculum  inferebat.  Acce- 
debat  hue,  ut,  nunquam  ^conferti,  sed  rari  magnisque  inter- 
vallis  ^  proeliarentur,*'  stationesque  dispositas  haberent,''  at- 
que "^  alios  alii  deinceps  exciperent,  integrlque  et  recentes 
defatigatis  succederent.*" 

17.  Postero  die  procul  a  castris  hostes  in  collibus  constit- 
erunt,  rarique  se  ostendere  et  ^lenius,  quam  pridie,  nostros 
equites  prcElio  lacessere  coeperunt.  Sed  meridie,  cilim  Ceb- 
sar  pabulandi  causa  tres  legiones  atque  omnem  equitatum 
cum  Caio  Trebonio  legato  misisset,  repente  ex  omnibus  par- 
tibus  ad  pabulatores  advolaverunt,  sic,  ^uti  ab  signis  legio- 
nibusque  non  absisterent:  Nostri,  acriter  in  eos  impetu 
facto,  repulerunt,  neque  finem  sequendi  fecerunt,  quoad  sub- 
sidio'conf  isi  equites,  cum  post  se  legiones  viderent,  praecip- 
ites  hostes  egerunt :  magnoque  eorum  numero  interfecto, 
neque  sui  coUigendi,  neque  consistendi,  aut  ex  essedis  de- 
siliendi  facultatem  dederunt.  Ex  h^c  fuga  protmus,  quas 
undique  convenerant,  auxilia  discesserunt :  lo^eque  post  id 
tempus  unquam  summis  nobiscum  copiis  hostes  contende- 
runt. 


*     51,  2.  d  §  140,  6.  s  §  132,  R.  XLII. 

b  §  145,  R.  «  §  129,  R.  ^  §  140,  1,  4th. 

c     96,  2.  f     19,  &  §  123,  R.        «  §  112,  R.  V. 


i|JJI4iiPi,!H4»iMi««IW|W  ■*"!lfiif^M^msr !W'ff«''M!»»-^W'^-^5W^"^ 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  XX.  161 

IS.  Caesar,  cognito  consilio  eornm,  ad  flumen  Tamesin 
in  fines  Cassivellauni  exercitum  duxit ;  quod*  flumen  uno 
omnlno  loco''  pedibus,  atque  hoc*"  aegre,  transiri  potest.  E6 
cum  venisset,  animadvertit,  ad  alteram  fluminis  ripam  mag- 
nas  esse  copias  hostium  instructas:  ripa  autera  erat  i  acutis 
sudibus'*  praefixis  munita;  ejusdem  generis  sub  aqua  defixse 
sudes  flumine^  tegebantur.  His  rebus  cognitis  a  captlvis 
perfugisque,  Cagsar,  praemisso  equitatu,  confestim  legiones 
subsequi  jussit.  Sed  ea*  celeritate  atque  eo^  impetu  mili- 
tes  ierunt,  ^cum  capite  solo  ex  aqua  exstarent/  ut  hostes  im- 
petum  legionum  atque  equitum  sustinere  non  possent,^  ripas- 
que  dimitterent  ac  se  fugse  mandarent. 

.  19.  Cassivellaunus,  ^ut  supra  demonstravimus,  omni  de- 
posita  spe  contentionis,  ^dimissis  amplioribus  copiis,  milli- 
bus  circiter  quatuor  essedariorum  relictis,  itinera  nostra  ser- 
vabat,  paululumque  ^ex  via  excedebat,  locisque''  impeditis 
ac  silvestrlbus  se§e  occultabat,  atque  iis  regiombus,''  quibus  ^ 
nos  iter  facturos  cognoverat,  pecora  atque  homines  ex  agris 
in  silvas  compellebat :  et,  ciim  equitatus  noster,  liberii\s  "^ 
prasdandi  vastandique  causa,  se  in  agros  effunderet,  omni- 
bus viis  *  notis  semitisque  essedarios  ex  silvis  emittebat,  et 
magno  cum  periculo  nostrorum  equitum  cum  iis  confligebat, 
atque  hoc  metu  latiiis''  vagari  prohibebat.  ^Relinquebatur, 
ut  neque  longius  ab  agmine  legionum  discSdi''  Ccesar  pate- 
retur,  et  tantum '  in  agris  vastandis  incendiisque  faciendis 
'hostibus"  noceretur,''  quantum  laboie'^  atque  itinere  legi- 
onarii  milites  efRcere  poterant. 

20.  Interim  Trinobantes,  prope  firmissima  earum  regio- 
num  civitas,  ex  qua  Mandubratius  adolescens,  Csesaris  fidem 
secutus,  ad  eum  in  continentem  Galliam  venerat  (cujus  pa- 
ter Imanuentius  in  ea  civitate  regnum  obtinuerat,  interfec- 

»     37,  6,  Note.  1.  «     28,  1.  i      109,  2. 

b  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (in.)  f§140,  Obs.  3.  ^  §  85,  3. 

«     19, loco,  Sup. (in.)  s  §  140,  1,  1st.  >  §  116,  Obs.  3. 

"»     129,  R.  h     22,  3.  ">     66,  7. 


lUSmnUliJIiHi-l.T-  '  -iWWItWIieillpww*-  i5!^,V^«?9!|W»*p>J.  )lH^L|»^JI)(JWPIif  .-PWIPIMPI 


162  DE   BELLO   GALLtCO. 

tusque  erat  a  Cassivellauno,  ipse  fuga  mortem  vitaverat), 
legates  ad  Csesarem  mittunt,  pollicenturque,  sese  ei  deditu- 
ros  atque  imperata  facturos:  petunt,  ut  Mandubratium  ab 
injuria  Cassivellauni  defendat,^  ^  atque  in  civitatem  mittat, 
qui  prassit  ^  imperiumque  obtineat.''  His''  Caesar  imperat 
obsides  quadraginta  frumentumque  exercitui,*^  Mandubra- 
tiumque  ad  eos  mittit.  Illi  imperata  celeriter  fecerunt,  ob- 
sides 2  ad  numerum  frumentaque  miserunt. 

21.  Trinobantibus  defensis  atque  ab  omni  militum  injuria 
3  probibitis,  Cenimagni,  Segontiaci,  Ancalites,  Bibroci,  Cassi, 
Jegationibus  missis  sese  Caesari  dedunt.  Ab  his  cognoscit, 
non  long^  ex  eo  loco  oppidum  Cassivellauni  abesse,  silvis* 
paludibusque  munitum,  quo*^  satis  magnus  hominum  pecoris- 
que  numerus  convenerit.  (4  Oppidum  autem  Britanni  vo- 
cant,  cum  silvas  impeditas  vallo  atque  fossa  munierunt,^  quo 
incursionis  hostium  vitandae  causa  convenire  consuerunt.) 
Ed  proficiscitur  cum  legionibus:  locum  reperit  egregie  na- 
ttira ^  atque  opere  munitum ;  tamen  hunc  duabus  ex  parti- 
bus  oppugnare  contendit.  Hostes,  paulisper  morati,  militum 
nostrorum  impetum  non  tulerunt,  seseque  alia  ex  parte  op- 
pidi  ejecerunt.  Magnus  ibi  numerus  pecoris  repertus,  mul- 
tique  in  fuga  sunt  comprehensi  atque  interfecti. 

22.  Dum  h£Ec  in  his  locis  geruntur,  Cassivellaunns  ad 
Cantium,  quod''  esse  ^ad  mare  supra  demonstravimus,  qui- 
bus '  regionibus "  quatuor  reges  praeerant,  Cingetorix,  Car- 
vilius,  Taximagulus,  Segonax,  nuncios  mittit,  atque  his  im- 
perat, utJ,  coactis  omnibus  copiis,  castra  navalia  de  improvi- 
so  ^  6  adoriantur  atque  oppugnent.  li  ci\m  ad  castra  venis- 
sent,  nostri,  eruptione  facta,  multis  eorum""  interfectis,  capto 
etiam  nobili  duce  Lugotorige,  suos  incolumes  reduxerunt. 
Cassivellaunus,  hoc  proelio  nunciato,  tot  detrimentis  accep- 

a  §  140,  1,  3d.  «  §  129,  R.  i      37,  1,  (regiones.) 

b  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4th.  f  §  136,  Obs.5,  (in.)  k  §  112,  R.  I. 

c  §  123,  R.  &  5,  1.  K  §  140,  Obs.  3.  i  §  90,  6. 

d  §  110,  R.  XV.  »>  §  145,  R.  &91.  »§  107,  R.  X. 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  XXIV.  163 

tis,  vastatis  finibus,  maxime  etiam  permotus  defectione  civ* 
itatium,  legates  per  Atrebatem  Cornmium  de  dediiione  ad 
Caesarem  mittit.  Caesar,  cum  statuissef  hiemem  in  conti- 
nenti  propter  repentinos  Gallias  ^  motus  agere,  neque  multum 
eestatis  superesset,  atque  id  facile  extrahi  posse  intelligeret, 
obsides  imperat,  et,  quid  in  annos  singiilos  vectigalis  "  Pop- 
ulo  Eomano  Britannia  penderet,''  constituit;  interdicit  atque 
imperat  Cassivellauno,  ne  Mandubratio,  neu  Trinobantibus 
bell  urn  faciat.*^ 

23.  Obsidibus  acceptis,  exercTtum  reducit  ad  mare,  naves 
invenit  ^refectas.  His  deductis,  quod  et^  Scaptivorum  mag- 
num numerum  habebat,  et  nonnullae  tempestate  deperierant 
naves,  duobus  ^  commealibus  exercitum  reportare  instituit. 
Ac  sic  accidit,  uti  ex  tanto  navium  numero,  tot  ^navigatio- 
nibus,  neque  hoc,  neqne  superiore  anno,*^  uUa  omnino  navis, 
quae  milites  portaret,^  6  desideraretur:  ^  at  ex  lis,  quae  inanes 
ex  continenti  ad  eum  remitterentur,'  et  '''prioris  commeatus 
expositis  militibus,  et  quas  postea  Labienus  faciendas  cura- 
verat  numero  sexaginta,  ^perpaucce  locum  caperent;''  reli- 
quae  fere  omnes  rejicerentur.""  Quas'  cum  aliquamdiu  Cae- 
sar frustra  expectasset,*  ne  anni  tempore  a  navigatione  ex- 
cluderetur,  quod  aequinoctium  suberat,  ^necessario  angus- 
tii!is  milites  coUocavir,  ac,  summa  tranquillitate  consecQta, 
secunda  inita  ciim  solvisset  vigilia,  prima  luce  terram  atti-. 
git,  omnesque  incoliimes  naves  perduxit. 

24.  10  Subductis  navibus,  concilioque  Gallorum  Samaro- 
brivae™  peracto,  quod  eo  anno  '^frumentum  in  Gallia  propter 
siccitates  angustius  provenerat,  coactus  est  a  liter,  ac  superi- 
oribus  annis,^  exercitum  in  hibernis  collocare,  legionesque 
12  in  plures  civitates  distribuere:  ex  quibus  unam  in  Morinos 
ducendam    Caio  Fabio  legato  dedit;   alteram  in   Nervios 

»  §  140,  Obs.  4.  «     124,  1.  i  §  141,  Obs.  3. 

"  §  106,  R.  VIII.  f  §  131,  R,  XL.  ^     Sup.  accUit  ut. 

«§140,  5.  e§  141,R.I.&0bs.l.  i      38. 

1  §  140,  1,  3d.  h  §  140,  1,  4th.  «"  §  130,  R.  XXXVI. 


164  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

Quintio  Ciceroni ;  tertiam  in  Essuos  Lucio  Roscio  ;  quartam 
in  Remis  cum  Tito  Labieno  in  confinio  Trevirorum  hiemare 
jussit ;  tres  in  Belgio  collocavit :  his  Marcum  Crassum, 
quasstorem,  et  Lucium  Munatium  Plancum  et  Caium  Trebo- 
nium,  legates,^  prsefecit.  Unam  legionem,  quam  proxime 
trans  Padum  conscripserat,  et  cohortes  quinque  in  Eburones, 
quorum  pars  maxima  est  inter  Mosam  ac  Rhenum,  qui  sub 
imperio  Ambiorigis  et  Cativolci  erant,  misit.  His''  militibus 
Quintum  Titurium  Sabinum  et  Lucium  Aurunculeium  Cot- 
tam,  legatos,""  praeesse  jussit.  Ad  hunc  modum  distribtitis 
legionibus,  facillime  inopiae*"  frumentariae  sese  ^mederi  posse 
cxistimavit :  atque  harum  '^  tamen  omnium  hiberna  (praeter 
earn,  quam  Lucio  Roscio  in  pacatissimam  et  quietissimam 
partem  ducendam  dederat),  2  millibus  passuum  centum  con- 
tinebantur.  Ipse  interea,  quoad  legiones  collocasset®  mu- 
nitaque  hiberna  cognovisset,  in  Gallia  morari  constituit. 

25.  Erat  in  Carnutlbus  ^summoloco*^  natus  Tasgetius, 
cujus  majores  in  sua  civitate  regnum  obtinuerant.  Huic 
Caesar,  pro  ejus  virttite  atque  in  se  benevolentia,  quod  in  om- 
nibus bellis  singulari  ejus  opera  fuerat  usus,  majorum  locum 
restituerat.  ^Tertium  jam  hunc  annum  ^  regnantem  inimi- 
ci  palam,  multis  etiam  ex  civitate  auctor^bus.  interfecerunt. 
Defertur  ea  res  ad  Cassarem.  lUe  veritus,  ^quod  ad  plures 
pertinebat,  ne''  civitas  eorum  impulsu  deficeret,  Lucium 
Plancum  cum  legione  ex  Belgio  celeriter  in  Carnutes  pro- 
ficisci  jubet,  ibique  hiemare ;  quorumque  opera  cognoverit 
Tasgietium  interfectum,  hos  comprehensos  ad  se  mittere. 
Interim  ab  omnibus  legatis  quaestoribusque,  quibus  legiones 
transdiderat,  certior  factus  est,  ^in  hiberna  perventum'  lo- 
cumque  hibernis  esse  munitum. 

26.  Diebus  circiter  quindecim,  quibus  in  hiberna  ventum 
est,*  initium  repentini  tumultus  ac  defectionis  ortum  est  ab 

»  §  97,  Obs.  2.  d     19,  (legionum.)        «§  131,  R.  XLI. 

»>  §  112,  R.  I.  «  §  140,  4.  h  §  140,Obs.6&121,6. 

c  §  112,  R.  V.  '  §  119,  R.  '     67,  5,  Note. 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  XXVII.  165 

Ambiorige  et  Cativolco  :  ^  qui*  cum  ad  fines  regni  sui  Sabi- 
no''  Cottasque  prassto  fuissent,  frumentumque  in  hiberna  com- 
portavissent,  Indutiomari  Treviri  nunciis  impulsi,  suos  con- 
citaverunt,  subitoque  oppressis  lignatoribus,  magna  manu 
castra  oppngnatum '^  venerunt.  CCim  celeriter  nostri  arma 
cepissent  vallumque  ascendissent,  atque,  und  ex  parte  His- 
panis  equitibus  emissis,  equestri  proelio  ^  supei'iores  fuissent, 
2  desperata  re,  hostes  suds  ab  appugnatione  reduxerunt.  Turn 
^suo  more  conclamaverunt,  uti  aliqui  ex  nostris^  ad  collo- 
quium prodirent;  habere  se,  quae  ^de  re  communi  dicere 
vellent,*^  quibus  rebus  controversias  ^minui  posse  sperarent.*" 
27.  Mittitur  ad  eos  colloquendi  causa  Caius  Arpineius, 
eques  Romanus,  familiaris  Quintii  Titurii  et  Quintus  Ju- 
nius ex  Hispanid  quidam,  qui  jam  ante  *missu  Caesaris  ad 
Ambiorigem  ventitare  consueverat :  apud  qiios  Ambiorix  ^ad 
hunc  modum  locutus  est:  "^''Sese  pro  Caesaris  in  se  benefi- 
ciis  Splurimum  ei  confiteri  debere,  quod  ejus  opera  stipen- 
dio^  liberatus  esset,^  quod  Aduatucis  finitimis  suis  pendere 
consuesset :  ^  quodque  ei  et  filius  et  fratris  filius  ab  Caesare 
remissi  essent,  quos  Aduatuci,  obsidum  numero  missos, 
apud  se  in  servitute  et  catenis  tenuissent : '^  neque  id,  quod 
fecerit  ^  de  oppugnatione  castrorum,  aut  judicio''  aut  volun- 
tate  sua  fecisse,'  sed  coactu''  civitatis;  ^^suaque  esse  ejus- 
modi  imperia,  ut  non  minus  haberet''  juris  in  se  multitudo, 
quam  ipse  in  multitudinem.  Civitati '  porro  banc  fuisse  belli 
causam,  quod  repentmae  Gallorum  conjurationi  resistere  non 
potuerit :  id  se  facile  ^^  ex  humilitate  suaprobare  posse,  quod 
non  adeo  sit  ^  imperitus  rerum,  ut  suis  copiis  ^  Popiilum  Ro- 
manum  se  superare  posse  conf  idat :  sed  ^2  esse  Galliae  com- 
mune consilium ;  omnibus  hibernis  Caesaris  oppugnandis 
hunc  esse  dictum  diem,  ne  qua  legio  alterae  legioni"'  subsidio 

*     39,  6.  e  §  107,  Obs.  8.  i  §  145.  Obs.  3. 

"  §  135,  R.  XL VII.  f  §  141,  Obs.  7.  k  §  140,  1,  1st. 

«§  148,  1.  g  §  126,  R.  V.  1  §  112,  R.  II. 

<»§128,R.  h§129,  R.  ">§  114.R. 


166  DE   BELLO   GALLICO. 

venire  posset :  *"  non  facile  G alios  Gallis''  negare  potuisse, 
praesertim  ci!im  de  recuperanda  commtini  libertate  consilium 
initum  videretur.  '  Quibus''  quoniam  pro  pietate  fiatisfece- 
rit,  habere  se  nunc  rationem  officii  pro  beneficiis  Caesaris ; 
monere,  orare  Titurium'^  2  pro  hospitio,  ut  suae  ac  militum 
saiuti  consulat :  magnam  manum  Germanorum  conductam 
Rhenum  transisse  ;  ^  banc  ^  affore  biduo.  ^  Ipsorum  esse 
consilium,  velintne^  prius,  quam  finitimi  sentiant,^  eductos 
ex  hibernis  milites  aut  ad  Ciceronem  aut  ad  Labienum  de- 
ducere,  quorum  alter'  millia  passuum  circiter  quinquaginta, 
alter'  paulo  amplius  ab  his  absit.  Illud  se  polliceri  et  jure- 
jurando  confirmare,  tutum  iter  per  fines  sues  daturum ; 
'^quod''  ciim  faciat,  et'  civitati  sese  consulere,  quod  hiber- 
nis levetur,  et'  Caesari  pro  ejus  meritis  gratiam  referre." 
Hac  oratione  habita,  discedit  Ambiorix. 

28.  Arpineius  et  Junius,  quae  audierint,  ad  legatos  defe» 
runt.  lUi,  repentlna  re  perturbati,  etsi  ab  hoste  ea  diceban- 
tur,  non  tamen  negligenda  existimabant  :  maximeque  hdc 
re  permovebantur,  quod,  civitatem  ignobilem  atque  humilem 
Eburonum  sua  sponte  Popiilo  Romano  bellum  facere  au- 
sam,^  vix  erat  credendum.™  Itaque  ad  consilium  rem  de- 
ferunt  magnaque  inter  eos  ^existit  controversia.  Lucius 
Aurunculeius  compluresque  tribuni  militum  et  primorum 
ordinum  centuriones  nihil  temere  agendum,""  neque  ex  hi- 
bernis injussu  Caesaris discedendum,""'  existimabant:  "quan- 
tasvis  magnas  etiam  copias  ^  Germanorum  ^  sustineri  posse 
munitis  hibernis,"  docebant :  '^  "  rem  esse  testimonio,"  quod 
primum  hostium  impetum,  multis  ultro  vulneribus  illatis,. 
fortissime  sustinuerint :  "  re  frumentaria  non  premi :  interea 
et  ex  proximis  hibernis  et  a  Caesare  conventura  subsidia 


»§  140,  l,2d. 

«     98,2. 

^     38,  4. 

b§  112,  R.V. 

f  §  145,  R,&  19. 

>      124,  1. 

c     39,&  §  112,R.III. 

g  §  140,  5. 

«     108. 

d  §  124,  R.  & 

h  §  140,  4. 

n§  114,  R.&0bs.4. 

§  116,  Exp. 

i      27,  10,  Obs. 

"  §  140,  6. 

mm 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  XXX.  167 

postremo,  "quid  esse  i levius  aut  turpius,  quam,  ^auctore 
hoste,*  de  summis  rebus  capere  coosilium?" 

29.  Contra  ea  Titurius,  ."  sero  facttiros,"  3  clamitabat, 
"cum  majores  hostium  manus,  adjunctis  Germanis,  conve- 
nissent:  aUt  cum  aliquid  calamitatis  in  proximis  hibernis 
esset  acceptum,  brevem  consulendi  esse  occasionem  :  ^  Cae- 
sarem''  arbitrari  profectum*"  in  Italiam  :  neque  aliter  Carnu- 
tes  interficiendi  Tasgetii  consilium  fuisse  capturos,  neque 
Eburones,  si  ille  adesset,  tanta  cum  contentione  nostri  ad 
castra  venturos  esse:  ^non  hostem  auctorem,  sed  rem  spec- 
tare  ;  subesse  Rhenum;  magno  esse  Germanis  dolOri  Ario- 
visti  mortem^  et  superiores  nostras  victorias:''  ^ardgre  Gal- 
liam,"  tot  contumeliis  acceptis  sub  Populi  Romani  imperium 
redactam,  superiore  gloria  rei  militaris  extincta."  Postre- 
mo, "  quis  hoc  sibi'^  persuaderet,^  '''sine  certa  re  Ambiori- 
gem  adejusmodi  consilium  descendisse  *"  ?  Suam  senten- 
tiam  in  utramque  partem  esse  tutam  :  ^si  nil  sit  durius, 
nuUo  periculo  ad  proximam  legionem  perventuros  ;  si  Gallia 
omnis  cum  Germanis  consentiat,  &  unam  esse  in  celeritate 
positam  salutem.  Cottse  quidem  atque  eorum,  qui  dissen- 
tirent,  consilium  quem  haberet*"  exitum?  In  quo  si  non 
^OprsEJsens  periciilum,  at  certe  longinqua  obsidione*^  fames 
esset  pertimescenda." 

80.  '1  Hac  in  utramque  partem  disputatione  habita,  cum  a 
Cotta  i2pnniisque  ordinibus  acriter  resisteretur,^  i3"Vincite," 
inquit,  "si  ita  vultis,"  Sabinus,  i^et  id  clariore  voce/  ut  magna 
pars  militum  exaudlret :  "neque  is  sum,"  inquit,  "qui''  grav- 
issime  ex  vobis  mortis  periculo  terrear :  is  hi  sapient,  et  si 
gravius  quid  acciderit,  abs  te  rationem  reposcent :  qui,'  si 
per  te  liceat,  perendino  die  cum  proximis  hibernis  conjuncti, 
communem  cum  reliquis  belli  casum  sustineant,  i^nec  re- 
jecti  et  relegati  longe  ab  ceteris  aut  ferro  aut  fame  intereant. 


«     110,  1. 

<»  §  123,  R. 

8     67. 

b  §  145,  R. 

«  §  140,  6. 

h  §  141,  Obs.  2,  2d,  &  40. 

c     98, 2. 

'  §  129,  R. 

i  §  141,  R.  III.  &  Exp. 

168  i>:e  bello  gallico. 

31.  1  Consurgitur ""  ex  consilio  ;  comprehend unt  Sutrum- 
que  et  orant,  "  ne  sua  dissensione  et  pertinacia  rem  in  sum- 
mum  periculum  deducant  :^  facilem  esse  rem,  seu  maneant,*^ 
seu  proficiscantur,'^  si  modo  unum  omnes  sentiant  ac  probent; 
contra  in  dissensione  nullam  se  saltitem  perspicere."  ^  Res 
disputatione  ad  mediam  noctem  perducitur.  Tandem  *  dat 
Cotta  permotus  manus ;  superat  sententia  Sabini.  ^  Pro- 
nunciatur/  prima  luce  ituros :  consumitur  vigiliis  reliqua 
pars  noctis,  ciim  sua  quisque  miles  circumspiceret,^  quid  se- 
cum  portare  posset,^  quid  ex  instrument©  hibernorum  relin- 
quere  cogeretur.*"  "^  Omnia  excogitantur,  quare  nee  sine  per- 
iculo  maneatur  et  languore  militum  et  ^  vigiliis  periculum 
augeatur.  Prima  luce  sic  ex  castris  proficiscuntur,  ^ut  qui- 
bus '"  esset  persuasum,^  non  ab  hoste,  sed  ab  homine  amicis- 
simo  Ambiorige  consilium  datum,''  longissimo  agmine'  max- 
imisque  impedimentis. 

32.  At  hostes,  posteaquam  ex  nocturno  fremitu  vigiliisque 
de  profectione  eorum  senserunt,  collocatis  insidiis  bipartite 
in  silvis  opportuno  atque  occulto  loco,  a "  millibus  passuum 
circiter  duobus,  Eomanorum  adventum  expectabant :  et, 
cum  10  se  major  pars  agminis  in  magnam  convallem  demi- 
sisset,  ex  utraque  parte  ejus  vallis  subito  se  ostenderunt, 
novissimosque  premere  et  primos  prohibere  ascensu  atque 
iniquissimo  nostris  '  loco  prcelium  committere  coeperunt. 

33.  Tum  demum  Titurius,  ^^ut  qui*^  nihil  ante  providisset, 
trepidare,""  concursare,  cohortesque  disponere  ;  ishga^  tamen 
ipsa  timide  atque  ut"  eum  omnia  deficere  viderentur:  quod" 
plerumque  iis^  accidere  consuevit,  qui  ^3  in  ipso  negotio  con- 
silium capere  coguntur.  At  Cotta,  qui^  cogitasset,  hsec 
posse  in  itinere  accidere,  atque  ob  eam  causam  profectionis 

a     67,  5.  Note.  f  §  126,  R.  III.  i  §  111,  R. 

»>§  140,  1,3d.  e§141,  Obs.  4.  «>§  144,  Obs.  6. 

c  §  140,  6.  i>     98,2.  »  §  140,  1,  2d,  (ita.) 

d     51,  2.  >  §  129,  R.  »     37,  9,  Note.  3. 

•  §  140,  5.  k  §  132,  Obs.  5.  p  §  112,  R.  IV. 


•^BH^PWIWPP 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  XXXV.  169 

1  auctornonfuisset,  nulla  in  re  communi  saluti''  deerat,  et  in 
appellandis  cohortandisque  militibus,  imperatoris ;  et  in 
pugna,  militis  officia  prasstabat.  Cumque  propter  longitu- 
dinem  agminis  2  minus  facile  per  se  omnia  obire,  et,  quid 
quoqueloco''  faciendum  esset,**  providere  possent,  ^jusserunt 
pronuntiare,  ut  impedimenta  relinquereni  atque^in  orbem 
consisterent.  Quod**  consilium  etsi  in  ejusmodi  casu  repre- 
hendendum  non  est,  tamen  ^incommode  accidit :  nam  et 
nostris  militibus*  spem  minuit,  et  hostes  ad  pugnam  alacri- 
ores  effecit,  quod  non  sine  summo  timore  et  desperatiOne 
id  factum  videbatur.  Prseterea  accidit,  quod^  fieri  necesse 
erat,  ut  ^vulgo  milites  ab  signis  discederent,''  "^quae  quisque 
eorum'*  carissima  haberet '  ab  impedimentis  petere  atque 
abripere  properaret,^  clamore  ac  fletu  omnia  complerentur.'' 

34.  At  sbarbaris''  consilium  non  defuit :  nam  duces  eorum 
tota  acie  pronuntiare  jusserunt,  "  ne  quis  ab  loco  discederet 
^illOrum"  esse  praedam,  atque  illis  reservari,  qua^cumque 
Romani  reliquissent :  proinde  omnia  in  victoria  posita  exis- 
timarent."  i^Erant  et  virtute  et  numero  pugnando '  pares 
nostri,  tamen  etsi  ab  duce  et  a  fortuna  deserebantur,  tamen 
omnem  spem  saltitis  in  virtute  ponebant,  et,  quoties  quaeque 
cohors  prof.urreret,  ab  ea  parte  magnus  hostium  numerus- 
cadebat.  Qua*^  re  animadversa,  Ambiorix  pronuntiari  jubet, 
ut  procul  tela  conjiciant,  neu  propius  accedant,  et,  quam  in 
partem  Romani  impetum  fecerint,  ^  cedant  (levitate  armo- 
rum  et  quotidiana  exercitatione  ^^nij^il  j^g  noceri  posse"'): 
rursus  se  ad  signa  recipientes  insequantur. 

35.  Quo  ^  praecepto  ab  iis  diligentissime  observato,  cum 
quaepiam  cohors  ex  orbe  excesserat  atque  impetum  fecerat, 
hostes  velocissime  refugiebant.  Interim  earn  partem  nudari 
necesse  erat  et  ab  latere  aperto  tela  recipi.     Rursus,  cum 

»§112,  R.  I.  e§123,  R.  i  §  141,  Obs.  8. 

b  §  140,  5.  f     37,  9,  Note.  3.  ^  §  108,  R.  XII. 

•^  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (in.)     «  §  107,  R.  X.  >  §  128,  R, 

«>     38.  h  §  140,  1,  4th.  "     66,  &  68,  2. 

15 


170  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

in  eum  locum,  unde  erant  progress!,  reverti  cosperant,  ct  ab 
lis,  qui  cesserant,  et  ab  iis,  qui  proximi*^  steterant,  circuin- 
"veniebantur;  sin  aatem  Uocum  teneie  vellent,  nee  virtuti'' 
locus  relinquebatur,  neque  ab  tanta  multitudine  conjecta  tela 
conferti  vitare  poterant.  Tamen  tot  incommodis  conflictati, 
multis  vulneribus  acceptis,  resistebant  et,  magna  parte  di€ii 
consumta,  cum  a  prima  luce  2  ad  horam  octavam  pugnare- 
tur,  nihil,  quod  ipsis*"  esset  indignum,  committebant.  Turn 
Tito  Balventio,'^  qui  superiore  anno  primum  pilum  duxerat, 
viro  forti  et  magnse  auctoritatis,  ^utrumque  femur  tragula 
transjicitur.  Quintus  Lucanius,  ejusdem  ordinis,''  fortissi- 
mo pugnans,  dum  circumvent©  filio*^  ^subvenit,  interficitur: 
Lucius  (Jotta,  legatus,  omnes  cohortes  ordinesque  adhortans, 
*in  adversum  os  funda  vulneratur. 

36.  His  rebus  permotus  Quintus  Tituriusf,  cum  procul 
Ambiorigem  suos  cohortantem  conspexisset,  interpretem 
suum,  Cneium  Pompeium,  ad  eum  mittit,  rogatum,*''  ut  sibi' 
militibusque  parcat.  Ille  appellatus  respondit :  "si  veiit 
secum  colloqui,  licere ;  sperare,  a  multitudine  impetrari 
posse,  quod''  ad  militum  salutem  pertineat ; '  6  ipsi . "  vero 
nihil  nocitum  iri,  inque  eam  rem  se '  suam  fidem  interpo- 
nere."  Ille  cum  Cotta  saucio  communicat,  "  si  videatur, 
pugna  ut  excedant  et  cum  Ambiorige  una  colloquantur : 
sperare,  ab  eo  de  sua  ac  militum  salute  impetrare  posse." 
Cotta  se  ad  armatum  hostem  iturum  negat  '  atque  in  eo 
constitit. 

37.  Sabinus,  quos  ^  in  prsesentia  tribunes  militum  circum 
se  habebat  et  primorum  ordinum  centuriones,  se  sequi  ju- 
bet,  et,  cum  propius  Ambiorigem""  accessisset,  jussus  arma 
abjicere,  imperatum  facit,  suisque,  ut  idem  faciant,  imperat. 
Interim,  dum  de  conditionibus  inter  se  agunt,  longiorque 

»  §  98,  Obs.  10.  *=  §  106,  R.  VII.  >  §  140,  6. 

"  §  126,  R.  III.  f  §  112,  Obs.  5,  2d.  ^     6«*?7. 

<=  §  119,  R.  6  §  148, 1.  1  §  145,  R. 

d  §  110,  Obs.  I.  h     37,  2.  «n§  136,  Obs.  5, (ad.) 


:.*•#./ 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  XXXIX.  171 

consulto  ab  Ambiorige  instituitur  sermo,  paulatim  circum- 
vcntus  interficitur.  Turn  vero  suo  more  ^  victoriam  concla- 
mant  atque  ululatum  tollunt,  impeiuque  in  nostros  facto, 
ordines  perturbant.  Ibi  Lucius  Cotta  pugnans  interficitur 
cum  rnaxima  parte  militum,  reliqui  se  in  castra  recipiunt, 
unde  er^nt  egressi :  ex  quibus  Lucius  Petrosidius  aquilifer, 
cum  magna  multitudme  hostium  premeretur,  aquilam  intra 
vallum  projecit,  ipse  pro  castris  fortissime  pugnans  occidi- 
tur.  2ini  aegr3  ad  noctem  oppugnationem  sustinent :  noctu 
3  ad  unum  ■' omnes,  desperata  salute,  se  ipsi ''  interficiunt. 
Pauci  ex  proelio  elapsi,  incertis  itineribus""  per  silvas  ad  Ti- 
tum  Labienum  legatum  in  hiberna  perveniunt  atque  eura 
de  rebus  gestis  certiOrem  faciunt. 

38.  Hac  victoria '^  ^sublatus  Ambiorix,  statim  cum  equi- 
tatu  in  Aduatucos,  qui  erant  ejus  regno '^  finitimi,  proficisci- 
tur;  neque  noctem  neque  diem  intermittit,  peditatumque  se 
subsequi  jubet.  P.e  demonstrata,  Aduatucisque  concitatis, 
postero  die  in  Nervios  pervenit,  hortaturque,  "  ne  sui^in^ 
perpetuum  liberandi  atque  ulciscendi  ^  Romanos,  pro  iis, 
quas  acceperint,'"  injuriis,  occasionem  dimittant:  interfectos 
esse'  legates  duo  magnamque  partem  exercitus  interisse"  ' 
demonstrat ;  ^  "  nihil  esse  negotii,  subito  oppressam  legio- 
nem,  quae  cum  Cicerone  hiemet,''  interf  ici ;  <»  se  ad  eamrem 
profitetur  adjutorem." '  Facile  hac  oratione  Nerviis  per- 
suadet. 

39.  Itaque,  confestim  dimissis  nunciis  ad  Ceutrones,  Gru- 
dios,  Levacos,  Pleumoxios,  Geidunos,  qui  omnes  sub  eorum 
imperio  sunt,  quam  maximas  manus  possunt,  cogunt,  et  de 
improviso  ad  Ciceronis  hiberna  ad  volant,  nondum  ad  eum 
fama  de  Titurii  morte  perlaia.  '^Huic  quoque  accidit,quod  "" 
fuit  necesse,  ut  nonnulli  militcs,  qui  lignationis  munitionis- 


a      19,   (homineai.) 

«      1 12,  5. 

i      9%  2,  &  94,  1,  2. 

b      33,  1. 

'■  §  00,  6. 

k  §  140,  6. 

c  §  129,  R. 

g      112,1. 

>  §  97, R. 

•»§  111,  R. 

'  §  Ul,  Obs.  7. 

«"     37,  9,  Notes.  • 

172  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

que  causa  in  silvas  discessissent,''  repentino  equitum  adveri- 
tu  interciperentur.''  His  circumventis,  magna  manu  Ebu- 
rones,  Nervii,  Aduatuci  atque  horum  omnium  socii  et  cli- 
entes,  legionem  oppugnare  incipiunt  :  nostri  celeriter  ad 
arma  concurrunt,  vallum  conscendunt.  ^  JEgre  is  dies  sus- 
tentatur,  quod  omnem  spem  hostes  in  celeritate  ponebanf, 
atque,  banc  adepti  "^  victoriam,  in  perpetuum  se  fore  victo- 
res*^  confidebant. 

40.  Mittuntur  ad  Cassarem  confestim  ab  Cicerone  literse, 
magnis  ^propositis  prsemiis,  si  pertulissent.  Obsessis  omni- 
bus viis,  missi  ®  intercipiuntur.  Noctu  ex  ea  materia,  quam 
munitionis  causa  comportaverant,  3  turres  admodum  centum 
et  viginti  excitantur  incredibili  celeritate  :  qusd^  deesse  ope- 
ri^  videbantur,  perficiuntur.  Hostes  posterodie,  multo  ma- 
joribus  copiis  coactis,  castra  oppugnant,  fossam  complent. 
Ab  nostris  eadem  ratione,*"  qua  pridie,  resistitur :  *  hoc  idem 
deinceps  reliquis  fit  diebus.  Nulla  pars  nocturni  temporis 
ad  laborem  intermittitur :  non  segris,''  non  vulneratis,  facul- 
tas  quietis  datur:  quaecumque'  ad  proximi  diei  oppugnatio- 
nem  opus  sunt,  noctu  comparantur :  multae  ^prseustae  sudes, 
magnus  muralium  pilorum  numerus  instituitur;  *  turres 
contabulantur,  pinnae  loricseque  ex  cratibus  attexuntur. 
Ipse  Cicero,  ^cum  tenuissima  valetudine™  esset,  ne  noctur- 
num  "quidem  sibi  tempus  ad  quietem  relinquebat,  ut°  ultro 
militum  concursu  ac  vocibus  '^sibi  ^  parcere  cogeretur. 

41,  Tunc  duces  principesque  Nerviorum,  qui  8  aliquem 
sermonis  aditum  causamque  amicitiee  cum  Cicerone  habe- 
bant,  colloqui  sese  velle  dicunt.  ^  Facta  potestate,  eadem, 
quas  Ambiorix  cum  Titurio  egerat,  commemorant,  "omnem 
esse  in  armis  Galliam,  Germanos  Rhenum  transisse,  Caesar- 

«§14!,R.  I.  f     37,2.  '      37,  8,  Note.  2. 

b  §  140,  1,  4th.  e  §  112,  R.  I.  «"§  106,  R.  VII. 

c     105,1.  h  §  129,  R.  n     121,  Note.  2. 

«»  §  103,  R.  »      67,  1.  0  §  140,  1,  1st,  (ita.) 

"     19,  (homines.)  ^  §  126,  R.  III.  &  19.  p  §  112,  R.  V. 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  XLIII.  173 

IS  reliquorumque  hiberna  oppugnari."  Addurit  5tiam  de 
Sabini  morte.  i  Ambiongem  ostentant  fidei  faciendce  causa : 
"  errare  ^  eos  "  dicunt,  "  si  quicqiiam  ab  his  prEesidii  sperent,'" 
qui  suis  rebus  "^  diffidant;*^  sese  tamen  ^hoc  esse  in  Cicero- 
nein  Populumque  Romanum  animp/  ut  nihil  nisi  hiberna 
recusent""  atque  banc  inveterascefe  consuetydinem  nolint:*" 
^licere  iilis^  incohimibus  per  se  ex  hibernis  discedere,  et, 
quascumque  in  paries  velint,  sine  metu  proficisci."  Cicero 
ad  haec  unum  modo  respondit.  "  Non  esse  consuetudinem 
Popiili  Romani,  ullam  accipere  ab  hoste  armato  conditia- 
neni:  si  ab  armis  discedere  velint,''  se*^  ^adjutore  utantur,^ 
legatosque  ad  Csesarem  mittant  -J  sperare,  <^pro  ejus  justitia, 
quae  petierint,*^  impetraturos." 

42.  Ab  hac  spe  repulsi  Nervii,  vallo''  pedum  undecim  et 
fossa  pedum  quindecim  hiberna  cingunt.  Haec  et  superid- 
runi  annorum  consuetuduie''  a  nostris  cognoverant,  et,  quos- 
dam  de  exercitu  nacti  captlvos,  ab  his  docebantur:  "^sed, 
nulla  ferramentorum  copia,'  quEe  sunt  ad  hunc  usum  idonea, 
gladiis''  cespitem  circumcidere,  manibus  ^  ^sagulisque  ^ter- 
ram  exhaurire  cogebantur.  Qua"  quidem  ex  re  hommum 
multitadocognosci  potuit :  nam  minus  horis  tribus  i^millium 
decern  in  circuitu  munitionem  perfecerunt :  reliquisque  die- 
bus  turres  ad  altitudinem  valli,  ^^  falces  testudinesque,  quas 
ildem  captivi  docuerant,  parare  ac  facere  cceperunt. 

43.  Septimo  oppugnationis  die,  maximo  coorto  vento, 
^2ferventes  fusili  ex  argilla'  glandes  fundis  et  '^fervefacta 
jacida  in  casas,  quse  more''  Gallico  stramentis  erant  tectae, 
jacere  cceperunt.  Hae  celeriter  ignem  comprehenderunt  et 
venti  magnitudme''  in  omnem  castrorum  locum  ^'^distulerunt. 
Hostes,  maximo  clamore"  insecuti,  quasi  parta  jam  atque 
explorata  victoria,  turres  testudinesque  ^^agere  et  scalis  val- 

*  §  140,  2.  e     66,  2.  '  i     110,  1. 

M112,  R.  V.  f  §  121,  R.  XXVI.  k     38. 

«=  §  141,  Obs.  3.  s  §  139,  2.  1  §  128,  Obs.  2. 

"  §  106,  R.  VII.  h  §  129,  R.  »  §  140.  1.  1st. 


17A  DE   BELLO    GALLICO. 

lum  as(!fendere  cceperunt.  At  tanta  militum  virtus  atqiie  ea* 
prsesentia  ammi  fuit,  ut,  cum  undique  flamma  torrerentur," 
maximaque  telorum  multitudine  premerentur,^  suaque  om- 
nia impedimenta  atque  omnes  fortunas  conflagrare  intelli- 
gerent''  non  modo  ^demigrandi  causa  de  vallo  decederet*" 
nemo,  sed  paene  ne  respiceret*"  quidem  quisquam;  ac  turn 
omnes  ^acerrime  fortissimeque  pugnarent.  Hie  dies  nos- 
tris'^  longe  gravissimus  fuit;  sed  tamen  hunc  habuit  even- 
tum,  ut  eo  die  maximus  hostium  numerus  vulneraretur''  at- 
que interficeretur,  ut*^  se  sub  ipso  vallo  constipaverant  ^  re- 
cessumque  primis*^  ultimi  non  dabant.  Paulum  quidem  in- 
tennissa  flamma,  et  quodam  loco  ^  ^  turri  ^  adacta  et  contin- 
gente  vallum,  tertiag  cohortis  centuriones  ex  eo,quo^  stabant,' 
loco  recesserunt  suosque  omnes  removerunt ;  nutu  *"  vocibus- 
que  hostes,  "si  introlre  vellent,'"  vocare  coeperunt,  ^  quorum 
progredi  ausus  est  nemo.  Turn  ex  omni  parte  lapidibus  ^ 
conjectis  ^deturbati,  turrisque  succensa  est. 

44.  Erant  in  ea  legione  fortissimi  viri  centuriones,  ''  qui 
jam  primis  ordinibus  '  appropinquarent,  Tito  Pulfio  et  Lucius 
Varenus.  Hi  perpetuas  controversias  inter  se  habebant, 
quinam  anteferretur,""  omnibusque  annis  de  loco  summis 
simultatlbus  "^  contendebant.  Ex  iis  Pulfio,  ciim  acerrime 
ad  inunitiOnes  pugnaretur,  *'  Quid  dubitas,"  inquit,  "  Va- 
rene  ?  aut  quern  locum  probandas  virtutis  tuse  «  spectas  ?  hie, 
hie  dies  de  nostris  controversiis  judicabit."  Usee  cum  dix- 
isset,^  procedit  extra  rnunitiones,  ^quaque  pars  hostium  con- 
fertissTma  visa  est,  in  earn  irrumpit.  Ne  Varenus  quidem 
tum  vallo  sese  continet,  sed  omnium  veritus  existimationem 
subsequi'tur.  Turn,  mediocri  spatio''  relicto,  Pulfio  pilum 
in  hostes  mittit  atque  unum  ex  multitudine  ^o  procurrentem 
transjicit,  quo  **  percusso  et  exanimato,   ^^hunc  scutis  prote- 

'^     28,1.  «§140,Obs.  1.  i  §  44,  II.  2. 

"  §  140,  Obs.  4.  '  §  123,  R.  &  19.  k  §  129,  R. 

«§140,  1,1st.  8  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (in.)  i  §  112,  R.  IV. 

d§lll,  R.  h     109,2.  n'§  140,6. 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  XLVI.  175 

gunt  hostes,  '  in  ilium  tela  universi  conjiciunt  neque  dant 
regrediendi  facujtatem.  Transfigitur  scutum  PulfiSni*  et 
veriitum  in  balteo  defigitur.  Avertit  hie  casus  vagmam  et 
gladium  educere  conanti''  dextram  moratur  manum;  impe- 
ditum*^  hostes  circumsistunt.  ^  Succurrit  inimicus  illi**  Va- 
renus  et  laboranti^  subvenit.  Ad  ^hunc  se  confestim  a  Pul- 
fione  omnis  multitude  convertit,  ^iHum  veruto  transfixum 
arbitrantur.  Occursat  ocius  gladio  cominusque  rem  gerit 
Varenus  atque,  uno  interfecto,  reliquos  paulum  propellit : 
dum  cupidius  instat,  ^in  locum  dejectusinferiorem  concidit. 
Huic  rursus  circumvento  fert  subsidium  Pulfio  atque  ambo 
in  colli  mes,  compluribus  interfectis,  summa  cum  laude  sese 
intra  munitiones  recipiunt.  Sic  fortuna  ^in  contentione  et 
certamine  utrumque  versa vit,  ut  alter  alteri  '^  inimicns  aux- 
ilio'  salutique  esset,  neque  dijudicari  posset,  uter  utri*f  vir- 
tute''  anteferendus  videretur. 

45.  ^  Quanto '  erat  in  dies  gravior  atque  asperior  oppug- 
natio,  et  maxime  quod,  magna  parte  militum  confecta  vul- 
neribus,  res  ad  paucitatem  defensorum  pervenerat,  tanto ' 
crebriores  literas  nuntilque  ad  Caesarem  mittebantur :  quo- 
rum pars  deprehensa  in  conspectu  nostrorum  militum  cum 
cruciatu  necabatur.  Erat  ^unus  intus  Nervius,  nomine 
Vertico,5loco  natus  honesto,  qui  a  prima  obsidione  ad  Cice- 
ronem  perfugerat,  suamque  eifidem  pr^stiterat.  Hie  lOservo'' 
spe  libertatis  magnisque  persuadet  prasmiis,  ut  literas  ad 
Caesarem  deferat.  Has  ille  in  jaculo  illigatas  efFert,  et, 
Gallus  inter  Gallos  sine  ulla  suspicione  versatus,  ad  Caesar* 
em  pervenit.  Ab  eo '  de  i^periciilis  Ciceronis  legionisque 
cognoscitur. 

46.  Caesar,  acceptis  Uteris  ishora  circiter  undecima  diSi, 
statim  nuncium  in  Bellovacos  ad  Marcum  Crassum  quaes- 

'^  §  110,  Obs.  1,  «§112,  R.  V.  i  §  132,R.  XLIII.  Obs. 

^     19,  (ei,)  &  >,  f  §  114,  R.  6,  &  44,  8,  &  47. 

c     19,  (eum.)  %  §  126,  R.  III.  "     63,  &§  123,  R. 

o§lll,R.  *§128,  R.  I     67,1. 


176  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

torem  mittit;  cuius  hiberna  aberant  ab  eo  millia  passuum  v< 
ginti  quinque.  Jubet  media  nocte  legioaem  proficisci,''  ce 
leriterque  ad  se  venire.  Exiit  cum  nuncio  Crassus,  Alte- 
rum  ^  ad  Caium  Fabium  legatum  mittit,  ut  in  Atrebatium 
fines  legionem  adducat,*^  ^  qua  sibi*^  iter  faciendum  sciebat. 
Scribit  Labieno,  2  si  reipublicse  commodo  facere  posset,  cum 
legione  ad  fines  Nerviorum  veniat :  *"  reliquam  partem  exer- 
citus,  quod  paulo  aberat  longius,  non  putat  expectandam  ;* 
equites  circiter  quadringentos  ex  proximis  hibernis  cogii. 

47.  Hora  circiter  tenia  ab  antecursoribus  de  Crassi  ad- 
ventu  certior  factus,  eo  die  millia '^  passuum  viginti  progre- 
ditur.  Crassum  SamarobriVce^  prasficit,  legionemque  ei*' 
attribuit,  quod  ibi  impedimenta  exercitus,  obsides  civitatum, 
^literas  publicas,  frumentumque  omne,  quod  eo  ^tolerandai 
hiemis  causa  devexerat,  relinquebat.  Fabius,  ut  imperatum 
erat,  non  ita  inultum  moratus,  in  itinere  cum  legione  oc- 
currit.  Labienus,  interitu  Sabmi  et  csede  cohortium  cog- 
nita,  ciam  omnes  ad  eum  Trevirorum  copifE  venissent,""  veri- 
tus,  ne,'  si  ex  hibernis  fugae  similem  profectionem  fecisset, 
hostium  impetum  sustinere  non  posset,  praesertim  quos  ^  re- 
centi  victoria  efferri  sciret,  literas  Caesari  remittit,  quanto 
cum  periculo  legionem  ex  hibernis  educturus  esset:'  ^rem 
gestam  in  Eburonibus  perscribit :  docet,  omnes  peditatds 
equitatusque  copias  Trevirorum  tria  millia  *"  passuum  longe 
ab  suis  castris  consedisse. 

48.  Caesar,  consilio  ejus  probato,  etsi,  ^opinione™  trium 
legionum  dejectus,  ad  duas  redierat,  tamen  unum  communis 
salutis  auxilium  in  celeritate  ponebat.  Venit  magnis  itin- 
eribus  in  Nerviorum  fines.  Ibi  ex  captivis  cognoscit,  quae 
apud  Ciceronem  gerantur,'  quantoque  in  periculo  res  sit.' 
Turn  cuidam^  ex  equitibus  Gallis  magnis  prsemiis  persuadet, 


»     90,  4. 

«     108,  4. 

i  §  140,  Obs.  6. 

*»     19,  (nuncium.) 

f  §  132,  R 

k§  145,  R.  &9I,  4. 
»  §  140,  5.^ 

c§  140,  1,  3d. 

g  §  123,  R. 

«     113,5. 

h  §  140,  Obs.  3. 

»"§  136,  R.LII. 

LIB.  V.    CAP.  XLIX.  177 

uti  ad  Ciceronem  epistolam  deferat.  Hanc  Graecis  conscrip- 
tam  Uteris  mittit,  ne,  intercepta  epistola,  nostra  ab  hostibus 
consilia  cognoscantur.^  i  Si  adire  non  possit,  monet,  ut  tra- 
giilarn  cum  epistola,  2  ad  amentum  deligata,  intra  munitio- 
iies  castrorum  abjiciat.''  In  Uteris  scribit,  se  cum  legionibus 
profectum  celeriter  affore :  hortatur,  ut  pristinam  virtutem 
retineat.  Gallus,  periculum  veritus,  ut  erat  praeceptum,  tra- 
gulam  mittit.  Hajc  ^  casu  ad  turrim  adhaesit,  neque "  ab 
nostris  biduo  animadversa;  tertio  die  a  quodam  milite  con- 
spicitur;  demta  ad  Ciceronem  defertur.  Ille  ^perlectam  in 
conventu  militum  recitat,  maximaque  omnes  lagtitia  afficit. 
Tum  fumi  incendiorum  procul  videbantur,  qusB  res  omnem 
dubitationem  advent6s  legionum  ^expiilit. 

49.  Galli,  re  cognit^  per  exploratores,  obsidionem  relin- 
quunt,  ad  Csesarem  omnibus  copiis  contendunt ;  eas  erant 
armatorum  circiter  millia  ^  sexaginta.  Cicero,  data  facul- 
tate,  Galium  ab  eodem  Verticone,  quem  supra  demonstrav- 
imus,  repetit ;  qui  literas  ad  Caesarem  referat;®  hunc*^  ad- 
monet,  iter  caute  diligenterque  faciat :  ^  perscribit  in  Uteris, 
hostes  ab  se  discessisse,  oranemque  ad  eum  multitudinem 
convertisse.  Quibus*"  Uteris  circiter  media  nocte  Caesar  al- 
latis  suos  facit  certiores,  eosque  ad  dimicandum  animo^con- 
firmat:  postero  die  luce  prima  movet  castra,  et  circiter  mil- 
lia '  passuum  quatuor  progressus,  trans  vallem  magnam  et 
rivum  multitudinem  hostium  conspicatur.  Erat  magni  peri- 
culi''  res,  cum  tantis  copiis  iniquo  loco'  dimicare.  Tum, 
quoniam  liberatum  obsidione  ""  Ciceronem  sciebat,  eoque 
omnino  remittendum  de  celeritate  existimabat,  consedit,  et, 
quam  aequissimo  potest  loco/  castra  communit.  Atque  heec, 
etsi  erant  exigua  perse,  vix  hominum''  millium  septem,  prae- 
sertim  nullis  cum  impedimentis,  ^tamen  angustiis  viarum 

»  §  140,  I,  2d.  «=  §  141,  Obs.  2  4th.      '  §  132.  R.  XLII. 

^  §  140,  1,  3d.  '  §  124,  R.  k  §  106,  R.  VII. 

c  §  93,  1.  «  §  140,  l,3d,&0bs.  5.  1  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (in.) 

i  §  136,  R.  XLVIII.  "38.  »"§  126,  R.  V. 


178  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

quam  maxime  potest,  contrahit,  eo  consilio,  ut  in  sumraam 
contemtionem  hostibus''  veniat.  Interim,  speculatoribus  in 
omnes  partes  dimissis,  explorat,  quo  commodissimo ''  itinera 
vallem  transire  possit. 

50.  Eo  die,  parviilis  equestribus  prcEliis  ad  aquam  factis, 
utrjque  sese  suo  loco  continent;  i  Galli,  quod  ampliores  co- 
pias,  quag  nondum  convenerant,  expectabant ;  Csesar,  si 
forte  timoris  simulatione  hostes  2  in  suum  locum  elicere  pos- 
set, ut  citra  vallem  pro  castris  proelio  contenderet;""  si  id 
efficere  non  posset,  ut,  exploratis  itineribus,  rnindre  cum 
periculo  vallem  rivumque  transiret.*"  Prima  luce  hostium 
equitatus  ad  castra  accedit,  prceliumque  cum  nostris  equili- 
bus  committit.  Caesar  consulto  equites  cedere,**  seque  in 
castra  recipere*^  jubet;  simul  ex  omnibus  partibus  castra 
altiore  vallo  muniri,*^  ^portasque  obstrui,  atque  in  his  ad- 
ministrandis  rebus  quam  maxime  concursari  et  cum  simula- 
tione timoris  agi  jubet. 

51.  Quibus  omnibus  rebus  hostes  invitati  copias  trans- 
ducunt,  aciemque  iniquo  loco  constituunt ;  nostris  vero 
^etiam  de  vallo  deductis,  propiiJS  accedunt,  et  tela  intra  mu- 
nitionem  ex  omnibus  partibus  conjiciunt;  praeconibusque " 
circummissis  pronuntiari  jubent,  "  seu  quis  Gallus  seu  Ro- 
manus  velit  ante  horam  tertiam  %d  se  transire,  sine  periculo 
licere ;  post  id  tempus  non  fore  potestatem:"  ^ac  sic  nos- 
tros  contemserunt,  ut  obstructis  in  speciem  portis  singiilis 
ordinibus  cespitum,  quod  '''ea  non  posse  introrumpere  vide- 
bantur,  alii  vallum  manu  scindere,  alii  fossas  complere  in- 
ciperent.  Tum  Caesar,  omnibus  portis  eruptione  facta  equi- 
tatuque  emisso,  celeriter  hostes  dat  in  fugam,  sic,  uti  omni- 
no  pugnandi  causa  resisteret  nemo;  magnumque  ex  eis  nu- 
merum  occidit,  atque  omnes  armis*^  exuit. 

52.  sLongiiis  prosequi  veritus,  quod  silvae  paludesque  in- 
tercedebant,  neque  etiam  parviilo  detrimento  ^  illorum  locum 

a  §  110,  Obs.  1.  c  §  140,  1,  2d.  «      109,  2. 

*>  §  98,  Obs.  10.  J     90,  4.  f  §  125,  R. 


LIB.  V.  Cap.  Liii.  179 

relinqui  videbat,  omnibus  suis  incolumibus  copiis  eodem  die 
ad  Ciceronem  pervenit.  Instittitas  turres,  testudines,  mu- 
nitionesque  hostium  admiratur :  iproducta  legione  Gognoscit, 
non  decimum  quemque  esse  relictum  militem  sine  vulnere. 
Ex  his  omnibus  judicat  rebus,  quanto  cum  pericuio  et 
quanta  cum  virtute  res  sint''  administratae  :  Ciceronem  2pro 
ejus  meritojegionemque  coUaudat :  centuriones  singillatim 
tribunosque  militum  appellat,  quorum  egregiam  fuisse  vir- 
tutem  testimonio  Ciceronis  cognoverat.  De  casu  Sabini  et 
Cottse  certiCis  ex  captivis  cognoscit.  Postero  die  concione 
habita  3  rem  gestam  proponit,  milites  consolatur  et  confir- 
mat :  quod  detrimentum  4 culpa  et  temeritate  legati  sit^  ac- 
ceptum,"hoc  ^  aequiore  animo  ferendum  docet,  6 quod,  bene- 
ficio  Deorum  immortalium  et  virtute  eorum  "^^expiato  incom- 
modo,  neque  hostibus  diutina  laetatio,  neque  ipsis  longior 
dolor  relinquatur.'' 

53.  Interim  ad  Labienum  per  Remos  incredibili  celeri- 
tare  de  victoria  Caesaris  fama  perfertur,  ut,  cum  ab  hibernis 
Ciceronis  abesset  millia  passuum  circiter  sexaginta,  eoque 
8  post  horam  nonam  diei  Csesar  pervenisset,  ante  mediam 
noctem  ad  portas  castrorum  clamor  oriretur,"*  quo  clamore 
significatio  victoriae  gratulatioque  ab  Remis  Labieno^  fieret. 
Hac  fama  ad  Treviros  perlata,  Indutiomarus,  qui  postero  die 
castra  Labieni  oppugnare  decreverat,  noctu  profugit,  copias- 
que  omnes  in  Treviros  reducit.  Caesar  Fabium  cum  legione 
in  sua  remittit  hiberna,  ipse  cum  tribus  legionibus  circum 
Samarobrlvam  ^  trinis  hibernis  hiemare  constituit ;  et,  quod 
tanti  motus  Gallias  extiterant,  totam  hiemem  ipse  ad  exer- 
citum  manere  decrevit.  Nam  illo  incommodo  de  Sabini 
morte  perlato,  omnes  fere  Galliae  civitates  de  bello  lOconsul- 
tabant,  nuncios  legationesque  in  omnes  partes  dimittebant, 
ef  liquid  reliqui  consilii*^  caperent^  atque  unde  initium  belli 
fieret,  explorabant,  nocturnaque  in  locis  desertis  ^^  concilia 

»  §  140,  5.  c     77,  5.  e  §  126,  R.  III. 

*>  §  140,  Obs.  2.  d  §  140,  1,  3d.  f  §  106.  R.  VIII 


180  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

habebant.  Neque  ullum  fere  totius  hiemis  tempus  sine  so- 
licitudine  Caesaris  intercessit,  iquin""  aliquem  de  conciliis 
ac  motu  Gallorum  nuncium  acciperet."  In  his  ab  Lucio  Ros- 
cio  legato,  quern  legio-ni  decimse  tertise  prsefecerat,  certior 
est  factus,  magnas  Gallorum  copias  earum  civitatum,  quae 
^ArmoricaB  appellantur,  oppugnandi  sui  causa  convenisse : 
neque  longii^is''  millia  passuum  octo  ab  hibernis  suis  abfuisse, 
sed  nuncio  allato  de  victoria  Csesaris,  discessisse,  adeo  ut  fu- 
gSB  similis  discessus  videretur. 

54.  At  Caesar,  principibus  cuj usque  civitatis  ad  se  evoca- 
tis,  alias  "^  territando,  cilim  se  scire,  quag  fierent,  denunciaret, 
alias  cohortando,  magnam  partem  Galliae  in  officio  tenuit. 
Tamen  Senones,  quae  est  civitas  in  primis  firma  et  magnse 
inter  Gallos  auctoritatis,  Cavarinum,  quern  Cossar  apud  eos 
legem  constituerat  (cujus  frater  Moritasgus,  adventu  in  Gal- 
liam  Caesaris,  cujusque  majores  regnum  obtinuerant),  inter- 
ficere  publico  consilio  conati,  cum  ille  prsesensisset  ac  pro- 
fugisset,  usque  ad  fines  insecuti  regno**  domoque  expule- 
runt:  et,  missis  ad  Caesarem  satisfaciendi  causa  legatis,  cum 
is  omnem  ad  se  senatum  venire  jussisset,  3  dicto  audientes 
non  fuerunt.  ^fantum^  apud  homines  barbaros  valuit,  esse 
repertos  aliquos  principes  belli  inferendi,  tantamque  omni- 
bus vpluntatum  commutatiOnem  ^  attiilit,  ut  prater  jEduos 
et  Remos,  quos  ^praecipuo  semper  horiore  Caesar  habuit, 
■^alteros  pro  vetere  ac  perpetua  erga  Populum  Romanum 
fide,  'J'alteros  pro  recentibus  Gallici  belli  officiis,  ^  nulla  fere 
civilas  fuerit  non  ^  suspecta  nobis.'  ^  Idque  adeo  baud  scio 
mirandumne  sit,  ciim.  compluribus  aliis  de  causis,  tum  max- 
ima,, 10  quod,  qui  virtute  belli  omnibus  gentibus  prasfereban- 
tur,  tantum  se  ejus  opinionis  deperdidisse,  ut  a  Populo  Ro- 
mano imperia  perferrent,  gravissime  dolebant. 

55.  Treviri  vero  atque  Indutiomarus  totius  hiemis  nullum 
tempus  intermiserunt,  quin*  trans  Rhenum  legatosmitterent, 

*  §  140,  3.  ^     124,  12.  «§  116,  Obs.  3.       ' 

»>  §  120,  Obs.  3.  d  §  136,  R.  LII.  f  §  134,  Obs.  3. 


LIB.  V.    CAP.  LVII.  181 

civitates  solicitarent,  pecunias  pollicerentur,  magna  parte 
exercitus  nostri  interfecta,  multo  minorem  superesse  dice- 
rent  partem.  Neque  tamen  ulli  civitati*  Germanorum  per- 
suader! potuit,  ut  Rhenum  translret,  cum  "  se  bis  expertos"  ** 
dicerent,  "  Ariovisti  bello  et  Tenchtherorum  transitu,  non. 
esse  amplius  fortunam  tentandam."  ^Hac  spe "  lapsus  Indu- 
tiomarus,  nihilo  minus  copias  cogere,  exercere,  a  finitimis 
equos  parare,  exiiles  damnatosque  tota  Gallia  ^  magnis  pras- 
miis  ad  se  allicere  coepit.  Ac  tantam  sibi  jam  iis  rebus  in 
Gallia  auctoritatem  comparaverat,  ut  undique  ad  eum  lega- 
tiones  concurrerent,^  gratiam  atque  amicitiam  publice  priva- 
timque  peterent. 

56.  Ubi  intellexit  ^ultro  ad  se  veniri,  altera  ex  parte  Se- 
nones  Carnutesque  conscientia  facinoris  instigari,  alterd 
Nervios  Aduatucosque  bellum  Romanis  parare,  neque  sibi  ^ 
voluntariorum  copias  defore,  si  ex  finibus  suis  progredi  cce- 
pisset :  armatum  concilium  indicit  (hoc  more  Gallorum  est 
initium  belli),  quo  lege  commtini  omnes  puberes  armati  con- 
venire  consuerunt;  qui*  ex  iis  novissimus  venit,  in  con- 
spectu  multitudinis  ^omnibjis  cruciatibus  affectus  necatur. 
In  eo  concilio  Cingetorigem,  ^alterius  principem''  factionis, 
generum  suum  (quern  supra  demonstravimus,  ^  Csesaris  se- 
cutum  fidem,  ab  eo  non  discessisse),  hostem  judicat,  bona- 
que  ejuspublicat.  His  rebus  confectis,  in  concilio  pronun- 
tiat,  arcessltum  se  a  Senonibus  et  Carnutibus  aliisque  com- 
pluribus  Galliae  civitatibus,  %uc  iter  facturum  *  per  fines  Re- 
morum,  eorumque  agros  populattirum,*  acpriiis,  quamidfa- 
ciat,  Labieni  castra  oppugnaturum:'  quae  fieri  velit,  prajcipit. 

57.  Labienus,  cum  et  loci  natura  et  manu  munitissimis 
castris  sese  teneret,  de  suo  ac  legionis  periciilo  nihil  time- 
bat;  ne  quam  occasionem  rei  bene  gerendae  dimitteret,  co- 
gitabat.     Itaque  a  Cingetorige  atque  ejus  propinquis  ora- 

«§  126,R.III.&68,2.    d  §  i36^obs.  5,(ex.)  s     37,3. 

•>     98,  2.  «  §  140,  1,  1st.  !»  §  97,  R. 

c§  136,  Obs.  5,(<ic.)     f§112,  R.  I.  «     94, 1, 2d,  &  100,2 
16 


182  DE   BELLO    GALLICO. 

tione  Indutiomari  cognita,  quam  in  concilio  habuerat,  nun- 
cios mittit  ad  finitimas  civitates,  equitesque  undique  evocat : 
iis''  certum  diem  conveniendi  dicit.  Interim  props  qiiotidie 
cum  omni  equitatulndutiomarus  i  sub  castris  ejus  vagabatur, 
alias''  ut  situm  castr5rum  cognosceret,'^  alias**  coUoquendi  aut 
territandi  causa  :  equites  plerumque  omnes  tela  intra  vallum 
conjiciebant.  Labienus  suos intra  munitiones  continebat,  tim- 
orisque  opinidnem,  ^quibuscumque"*  poterat  rebus,  augebat. 
58.  Cum  majore  in  dies  contemtione  Indutiornarus  ad* 
castra  accederet,  nocte  una,  3  intromissis  equitibus  omnium 
finitimarum  civitatum,  ^quos  arcessendos  curaverat,  tanta 
diligentia  omnes  suos  custodiis  intra  castra  continuit,  ut 
5  nulla  ratione  ea  res  enunciari  aut  ad  Treviros  perferri  pos- 
set.*^ Interim  ex  consuetudine  quotidiana  Indutiomarus  ad 
castra  accedit,  atque  ibi  magnam  partem  diei  consumit ; 
equites  tela  conjiciunt,  et  ^  magna  cum  contumelia  verborum 
nostros  ad  pugnam  evocant.  NuUo  ab  nostris  dato  response, 
ubi  visum  est,  sub  vesperum  '''  dispersi  ^  ac  dissipati  ^  disce- 
dunt.  Subito  Labienus  duabus  portis  omnem  equitatum 
emittit;  Sprgecipit  atque  interdlcit,  proterritis  hostibus  atque 
in  fugam  conjectis  (quod^  fore,  sicut  accidit,  videbat),  unum 
omnes  petant''  Indutiomarum ;  neu  quis  quem  prius  vulne- 
ret,''  quam  ilium  interfectum  viderit,  quod  ^mora  reliquorum 
spatium  nactum  ilium  effugere  nolebat :  magna  proponit 
iis,*  qui  occiderint,'  pra?mia :  submittit  cohortes  equitibus 
subsidio.  lo  Comprobat  hominis  consilium  forttina ;  et,  cihm 
unum  omnes  peterent,  in  ipso  fluminis  vado  deprehensus 
Indutiomarus  interficitur,  caputque  ejus  refertur  in  castra  :■ 
redeuntes  equites,  quos  possunt,  consectantur  atque  occi- 
dunt.  Hdc  re  cognita,  omnes  Eburonum  et  Nerviorum, 
quae  convenerant,  copiae  discedunt ;  pauloque  habuit  post  id 
factum  Caesar  quietiorem  Galliam. 

•  §  123,  R.  r  37, 7,  Note  2.  f     37,  9,  Note  3, 

•  124,  12.  •  §  136,  Obs.  7.  ,  •»  §  140,  1,  3d. 

•  §  140,  1,  2d.  f  §  98,  Obs.  10.  '  §  141^  Obs.  3 


BOOK    VI. 

GENERAL    ARGUMENT. 

I.  Commotions  throughout  nearly  all  Gaul  in  consequence  of  the 
overthrow  and  death  of  Tiberius — Chap.  1-8.  II.  Ca;sar's  expe- 
dition against  the  Suevi — Chap.  9-28.  III.  Punishment  of  Am- 
biorix  and  the  Eburones — Chap.  29-44. 

1.  MuLTis  de  causis  Caesar,  majorem  Galliae  motjim  ex- 
pectans,  per  Marcum  Silanum,  Cafum  Antistium  Reginum, 
Titum  Sextium,  legates,  i  dilectum  habere  instituit :  simul 
ab  Cnelo  Pompeio  proconsiile  petit,  2  quoniam  ipse  ad  urbem 
cum  imperio  reipublicae  causa  remaneret,*  quos  **  ex  Cisalplna 
Gallia  consulis  sacramento  rogavisset,*  ad  signa  convenire 
et  ad  se  proficisci  juberet:*^  magni'^  interesse  etiam  in  reli- 
quum  teinpus  ad  opinionem  Galliae  existimans,  tantas  videri 
Italiae  facultates,"  ut,  si  quid  esset  in  bello  detriment!  accep- 
tum,  non  modo  id  brevi  tempore  3sarciri,  sed  etiam  majoribus 
adaugeii  copiis  posset.*^  4  Quod  ^  cum  Pompeius  et  reipubli- 
cae et  amicitiae  tribuisset,''  celeriter  confecto  per  suos  dilectu, 
tribus  ante  exactara  hiemem  et  constitutis  et  adductis  legi- 
onibus,  duplicatoque  earum  cohortium  numero,  quas  cum 
Quinto  Titurio  amiserat,  et  celeritate  et  copiis  docuit,  quid 
Popiili  Romani  disciplina  atque  opes  possent.* 

2.  Interfecto  Tndutiomaro,  ^  ut  docuTmus,  ad  ejus  propin- 
quos  a  Treviris  imperium  defertur.  Illi  finitimos  Germanos 
solicitare  et  pecuniam  polliceri  non  desistunt :  cum  ab  prox- 
imis  impetrare  non  possent,  ulteriores  tentant.  Inventis 
nonnuUis  civitatibus,  jurejurando  inter  se  confirmant,  ^ob- 
sidibusque  de  pecunia  cavent:  Ambiorigem  sibi  societate 
et  foedere  adjungunt.     Quibus  rebus  cognitis,  Caesar,  cijm 


»  §  141,  Obs.  7. 

<^§  113,Exc.  I. 

5     38. 

•>     37,  (milUefi.) 

'  §  145,  R. 

h       81,   1. 

«  §  140,  1,  3d. 

'  §  140,  1,  1st. 

'•  §  140, 5- 

1S4  BE    BELLO    dALLICO. 

Tindique  bellum  parari  videret,  Nervios,*  Aduatucos,  Mena- 
pios,  adjunctis  Cisrhenanis  omnibus  Germanis,  esse''  in 
armis,  Senones*  ^ad  imperatum  non  venire,  et  cum  Carnuti- 
bus  finitimisque  civitatibus  consilia  communicare,  a  Trevi- 
lis  Germanos  *  crebris  legatiombus  solicitari ;  ^  maturius 
sibi*"  de  bello  cogitandum  putavit. 

3.  Itaque  ^nondum  hieme  confecta,  proximis  qua:tuor  co- 
actis  legionibus,  de  improvise  in  fines  Nerviorum  contendit, 
et  prii!is,  quam  illi  aut  convenire  aut  profugere  possent,** 
magno  pecoris  atque  hommum  numero  capto,  atque  ea  prae- 
da  militibus  ^  concessa,  vastatisque  agris,  in  deditionem  ve- 
nire atque  obsides  sibi  dare  coegit.  Eo  celeriter  confecto 
negotio,  rursus  in  hiberna  legiones  reduxit.  Concilio  Gal- 
liae  primo'  vere,  ^uti  instituerat,  indicto,  cum  reliqui,  prseter 
Senones,  Carntites,  Trevirosque,  venissent,  initium  belli  ac 
defectiOnis  hoc  esse  arbitratus,^  ut  4  omnia  postponere  vide- 
retur,  concilium  Lutetiam  Parisiorum  transfert.  Confines 
erant  hi  Senonibus,''  civitatemque  patrum  memoria  conjunx- 
erant;  ^sed  ab  hoc  consilio  abfuisse  existimabantur.  ^Hac 
re  pro  suggestu  pronunciata,  eodem  die  cum  legionibus  in 
Senones  proficiscitur,  magnisque  itineribus  eo  pervenit. 

4.  Cognito  ejus  adventu,  Acco,  qui  princeps  ejus  consilii 
fuerat,  jubet  in  oppida  multitudinem  convenire;  "'^conanti- 
bus,®  priusquam  id  effici  posset,*^  adesse  Romanos"  nuncia- 
tur;  necessario  ^sententia  desistunt,  legatosque  ^deprecandi 
causa  ad  CsBsarem  mittunt ;  adeunt  per  ^duos,  quorum  an- 
tiquTtias  erat  in  fide  civitas.  Libenter  Cassar  petentibus 
^duis  dat  veniam,  excusationemque  accipit ;  lOquod  testi- 
vum  tempus  instantis  belli,  nori  quaestionis*  esse  arbitraba- 
tur.  Obsidtbus  imperatis  centum,  hos  jEduis  custodiendos* 
tradit.  Eodem  Carnutes  legatos  obsidesque  mittunt,  usi 
deprecatoribus  Remis,    quorum  erant  in  clientela :   eadem 


»  §  145,  R. 

<^  §  140,  4. 

s     106,  1. 

b     96,  2. 

"  §  126,  R.  III. 

!»§   Ill,  R. 

«  §  147,  R.  LXI. 

r     17,1. 

i      107,  I. 

, 

LIB.  VI.    CAP.  VI.  185 

ferunt  responsa.     Peragit  concilium  Caesar,  equitesqtie  im- 
perat  civitatibus.* 

5.  Hac  parte  GalliaB  pacata,  *  totus  et  mente  et  ammo  in 
bellum  Trevirorum  et  Ambiorigis  insistit.  Cavarinum  curn 
equitatu  Senonum  secum  proficisci  jubet,  ^ne  quis  aut  ex 
hujus  iracundia,  aut  ex  eo,  quod  meruerat,  odio  civitatis, 
motus  existat.^  His  rebus  constitutis,  quod  3  pro  explorato 
habebat,  Ambiorigem  proelio  non  esse  concertaturum,  *reli- 
qua  ejus  consilia  animo''  circumspiciebat.  Erant  Menapii 
propinqui  Eburonum  finibus/  ^perpetuis  paludibus*"  silvis- 
que  muniti,  qui  uni  ex  Gallia  de  pace  ad  Caesarem  legatos 
nunquam  miserant.  Cum  iis  esse  hospitium  AmbiorTgi* 
sciebat:  item  per  Treviros  venisse  Germanis^  in  amicitiam, 
cognoverat.  Hasc  prius  ^illi^  detrahenda  auxilia  existima- 
bat,  quam  ipsum  bello  lacesseret;  ne,  desperaia  salute,  aut 
se  in  Menapios  abderet,  aut  '''cum  Transrhenanis  congredi 
cogeretur.  Hoc  inito  consilio,  totius  exercitus  impedimenta 
ad  Labienum  in  Treviros  mittit,  duasque  legiones  ad  eum 
proficisci  jubet :  ipse  cum  legionibus  expeditis  quinque  in 
Menapios  proficiscitur.  Ilii,  nulla  coacta  ^manu,  ^loci  prse- 
sidio''  freti,  in  silvas  paludesque  confugiunt,  suaque  eodem 
conferunt. 

6.  Caesar,  partitis  copiis  cum  Caio  Fabio  legato  et  Marco 
Crasso  qusestore,  celeriterque  '<>effectis  pontibus  ^^  adit  tri- 
partit6,  aedificia  vicosque  incendit,  magno  pecoris  atque 
homiiium  numero'  potitur.  Quibus  rebus  coacti  Menapii, 
legatos  ad  eum  pacis  petendae  causa  mittunt.  Hie,  obsidi- 
bus  acceptis  hostium  se  habiturum  numero  confirmat,  si  aut 
Ambiorigem,  aut  ejus  legatos,  finibus  suis  recepissent.  His 
confirmatis  rebus,  Commium  Atrebatem  cum  equitatu  cus- 
todis  loco  in  Menapiis  relinquit ;  ipse  in  Treviros  proficis- 
citur. 

»  §  123,  R.  &  5,  1.  'i§lll,R.  K§  126,  R.III.&5,1. 

"  §  140,  1,  2d.  «  §  112,  R.  II.  ^  §  119,  R. 

«=  §  129,  R.  f  §  110,  Obs.  1.  i  §  121,  R.  XXVI, 


186  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

7.  Dum  hsBC  a  Cassare  geruntur,  Treviri,  magnis  coactis 
peditatus  equitat^sque  copiis,  Labicnum  '^  cum  una  legione, 
quas  in  eorum  finibus  hiemabat,  adoriri  parabant :  jamque 
sib  eo  non  longiiis  bidui  via''  aberant,  cum  duas  venisse"  le- 
giones  missu  Csesaris  cognoscunt.  Positis  castris  a*^  milli- 
bus**  passuum  quindecim,  auxilia  Germanprum  expectare 
constituunt.  Labienus,  hostium  cognito  ^consilio,  speraas, 
temeritate^  eorum  fore  aliquam  dimicandi  facultatem,  pras- 
sidio  ^  cohortium  quinque  impedimentis  relicto,  cum  viginti 
quinque  cohortibus  magnoque  equitatu  contra  hostem  profi- 
ciscitur,  et,  mille  passuum  intermisso  spatio/  castra  com- 
munit.  Erat  inter  Labienum  atque  hostera  difficili  transitu  ^ 
iiumen  ripisque  prasruptis:  hoc  neque  ipse  transire  in  am- 
mo habebat,  neque  hostes  transituros  existimabat.  i  Au- 
gebatur  auxiliorum  quotidie  spes.  2  Loquitur  in  consilio  pa- 
lam,  "  quoniam  Germani  appropinquare  dicantur,*"  sese  suas 
exercit6sque  forttinas  3  in  dubium  non  devocaturum,  et  pos- 
ter© die  prima  luce  castra  moturum."  Celeriter  hsec  ad 
hostes  deferuntur,  ut'  ex  magno  Gallorum  equitatus  nume- 
ro  nonnullis  ^Gallicis  rebus  •"  favere  natura  cogebat.  Labi- 
enus noctu,  tribunis  militum  ^primisque  ordimbus  coactis, 
quid  sui  sit  consilii,  proponit,  et,  quo  facilius  hostibus  timo- 
ris  det'  suspicionem,  majore  strepitu^  et  tumultu,  quam 
Populi  Romani  fert  consuetudo,  castra  moveri  jubet.  His 
rebus  ^  fugae  similem  profectionem  eff icit.  Haec  quoque  per 
exploratores  ante  lucem,  in  tanta  propinquitate  castrorum, 
ad  hostes  deferuntur. 

8.  Vix  agmen  novissimum  extra  munitiones  processerat, 
cum  Galii,  cohortati  inter  se,  *'  ne  speratam  prasdam  ex 
manibus  dimitterent ;  ^longum  esse,  perterritis  Romanis, 
Germanorum  auxilium  expectare,  neque  suam  pati  dignita 

»  §  136,  R.  LII.  d  §  132,  Obs.  5.  h  §  140,  6. 

«>  §  132,  R.  XLII.  &  «  §  129,  R.  »  §  140,  Obs.  1. 

§  120,  Obs.  3.  '     109,  2.  1^  §  112,  R.  V 

c     &8,2,&94,  l,2d.  s§106,  R.VII.  i§  140,1,2(1 


LIB.  VI.    CAP.  IT.  187 

tern,  ut  tantis  copiis  tarn  exiguam  manum,*  prassertim  fugi- 
entem  atque  impeditam,adonri  non  audeant;"  flumen*  trans- 
ire  et  iniquo  loco''  prcelium-coramittere non  dubitant.  Quae* 
fore  suspicatus  Labienus,  ut  omnes  citra  flumen  eliceret, 
*  eadem  usus  simulatione  ^  itineris,  placide  progrediebatur. 
Turn,  pra&missis  paulum  impedimentis.  atque  in  tumulo  quo- 
dam  collocatis,  "Habetis,"  inquit,  "  milites,^  quam  petistis^ 
sfacultatem  :  hostem  impedlto  atque  iniquo  loco  ^  tenetis : 
Sprsestate  eandem  nobis '^  ducibusvirtutera,  quam  ssepenume- 
ro  imperatori  prasstitistis:  adesse  eum  et  haBc  coram  cer- 
nere,  existimate."  Simul  signa  ad  hostem  conrerti  ^  aciem- 
que  dirigi  jubet,  et,  paucis  turmis  ^prsesidio  "ad  impedi- 
menta dimissis,  reliquos  equites  ad  latera  disponit.  Celeri- 
ter  nostri  clamore  sublato  pila  in  hostes  immittunt.  Illi, 
ubi  Spraeter  spem,  quos''  fugere  credebant,  ^  infestis  signis' 
ad  se  ire  viderunt,  impetum  modo  ferre  non  potuerunt,  ac, 
primo  concursu'  in  fugam  conjecti,  proximas  silvas  petie- 
runt  :  quos"  Labienus  equitatu  consectatus,  magno  numero 
interfecto,  compluribus  captis,  paucis  post  diebus  civitaiem 
recepit :  nam  Germani,  qui  auxilio'  veniebant,  percepta 
Trevirorum  fuga,  sese  domum  contulerunt.  Gum  iis  pro- 
pinqui  Indutiomari,  qui  defectionis  auctores  fuerant,  comi- 
tati  eos,  ex  civitate  excessere.  '^Gingetorigi,  quem  ab  initio 
permansisse  in  officio  demonstravimus,  principatus  atque 
imperium  est  traditum. 

9.  Cassar,  postquam  ex  Menapiis  in  Treviros  venit,  dua- 
bus  de  causis  Rhenum  transire  constituit :  quarum  erat  al" 
tera,*"  quod  auxilia  contra  se  Treviris  miserant;  altera,"'  ^ne 
Ambiorix  ad  eos  receptum  haberet.  His  constitntis  rebus, 
paulum  supra  eum  locum,  quo  ante  exercitum  transduxerat, 
facere  pontem  instituit.    Nota  atque  instituta  ratione,  magno 

a§  116,  Obs.  4. 
"§  lae,  Obs.  5,  (in.) 
c§  145,  R.  &38. 
d  §  121,  R.  XXVI. 


«§  117. 

i  §  129,  R. 

f  §  123,  R 

k     38. 

s     90,  4. 

1  §  114,  Obs.  4,  (Ulis.) 

h     38,&91. 

n>     27,  10. 

188  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

militum  studio,  paucis  diebus  opus  efficitur.  Firmo  in  Tre- 
viris  prassidio  ad  pontem  relicto,  ne  quis  ab  iis  subito  motus 
oriretur,*  reliquas  copias  equitatumque  transducit.  Ubii, 
qui  ante  obsides  dederant  atque  in  deditionem  venerant, 
*  purgandi  sui  causa  ad  eum  legatos  mittunt,  qui  doceant,** 
*' neque  ex  sua  civitate  auxilia*"  in  Treviros  missa,**  ^neque 
ab  se  fidem  laesam:'^"  petunt  atque  orant,  "  ut  sibi  parcat,' 
3  ne  communi  odio  Germanorum  innocentes  pro  nonentibus 
pcEnas  pendant :  "  si  amplius  obsidum  ^  velit,  dare  pollicen- 
tur.  4  Cognita  Caesar  causa ^  reperit,  ab  Suevis  auxilia  missa 
esse:**  Ubiorum  satisfactionem  accipit ;  aditus  viasque  in 
Suevos  perquirit. 

10.  Interim  paucis  post  diebus  fit  ab  Ubiis  certior,  Suevos' 
omnes  unum  in  locum  copias  cogere,  atque  iis  nationibus,^ 
quae  sub  eorum  sint '  imperio,  denunciare,  uti  auxilia  pedi- 
tatus  equitatusque  mittant.^  His  cognitis  rebus,  rem  fru- 
mentariam  providet,  castris''  idoneum  locum  deligit,  Ubiis*' 
imperat,  ut  pecora  deducant ""  suaque  omnia  ex  agris  in  op- 
pida  conferant,  sperans,  bavbaros  atque  ^imperitos  homines,'' 
inopia  cibariorum  afflictos,  ad  iniquam  pugnandi  conditio- 
nem  posse  deduci: "  mandat,  ut  crebros  exploratores  in  Sue- 
vos mittant,*'  quaeque  apud  eos  gerantur,'  cognoscant.^  Illi 
imperata  faciunt,  et,  paucis  diebus  intermissis,  ^referunt, 
'*  Suevos*'  omnes,  posteaquam  certiores  nuncii  de  exercitu 
RomanOrum  venerint,  cum  omnibus  suis  sociorumque  copiis, 
quas  coegissent,'  penitus  ad  extremos  fines  sese  recepisse :  ^ 
silvam  esse  ibi  ^  infinita  magnitudine,  quae  appellatur'"  Ba- 
cenis:  hanc*^  longe  introrsus  pertinere,  et,  pro  nativo  muro 
objectam,  Cheruscos  ^ab  Suevis,  Suevosque  ab  Cheruscis, 
injuriis  incursionibusque  prohibere:  ad  ejus  initium  silvas 
Suevos*"  adventum  Romanorum  expectare  constituisse."* 

='§  140,1,  2d.  «=§140,  1,  3d.  «  §  140,  6. 

"  §  141,  Obs.  2,  4th.  f  §  106,  R.  VIII.  ^     87. 

<^  §  145,  R.  e     104,  1.  1  §  140,  5. 

J     98,2,  &'94, 1,  2d.  ^  §  123,  R.  •"§  ui,  Obs.  5,  Ist. 


LIB.  VI.    CAP.  XII.  189 

11.  Quoniam  ad  hunc  locum  perventum  est,*  non  ^  alie- 
num,  esse  videtur,''  de  Galliee  Germaniaeque  moribus,  et 
quo"  differant*^  eaenationes  inter  sese,  *proponere.  In  Gal- 
lia, non  solum  in  omnibus  civitatibus  atque  3  in  omnibus  pa- 
gis  partibusque,  sed  psene  etiam  in  singulis  *  domibus,  fac- 
tiones  sunt :  ^  earumque  factionum  principes  sunt,  qui  sum- 
mam  auctoritatem  eorum  judicio  habere  existimantur,  quo- 
rum ad  arbitrium  judicjjjimque  summa  omnium  rerum  con- 
siliorumque  redeat.*^  ^Idque  ejus  rei  causa  antiquitus  insti- 
tutum  videtur,  ne  quis  ex  plebe  contra  potentiorem  auxilii* 
egeret :  ^  suos  enim  ^  quisqu€  opprimi '  et  circumveniri  non 
patitur,  neque,  aliter  si  faciant,  ullam  inter  suos  habent  auc- 
toritatem. "^HaBc  eadem  ratio  est  in  summa  totius  Galliee : 
namque  omnes  civitates  in  partes  divisse  sunt  duas. 

12.  Cum  Caesar  in  Galliam^^venit,  alterius'^  factionis 
8  principes  erant  ^dui,  alterius  ^  Sequani.  Hi  cum  per  se 
minimis  valerent,  quod  summa  auctoritas  antiquitus  erat  in 
jEduis,  magnaeque  eorum  '  erant  clientelaB,  Germanos  atque 
Ariovistum  sibi  adjunxerant,  eosque  ad  se  magnis  ®jacturis 
poUicitationibusque  perduxerant.  "  Prceliis  verb  compluribus 
factis  secundis,  atque  omni  nobilitate  JEduorum  interfecta, 
i^tantum  potentia''  ajitecesserant,  ut  magnam  partem  clien- 
tium  ab  jEduis  ad  se  transducerent,  obsidesque  ab  iis  prin- 
cipum  filios  acciperent,  et  publico  jurare  cogerent,  nihil  se 
contra  Sequanos  consilii  inituros ;  et  partem  finitimi  agri, 
per  vim  occupatam,  possiderent :  Galliaeqiie  totius  principa- 
tum  obtinerent.  Qua  necessitate  adductus  Divitiacus,  aux- 
ilii  petendi  causa  Romam  ad  Senatum  profectus,  ^'infecta 
re  redierat.  Adventu  Cassaris  facta  commutatione  rerum, 
obsidibus  jEduis  redditis,  veteribus  clientelis  restitutis,  no- 
vis""  per  Caesarem  comparatis  (quod  hi,  qui  se  ad  '2e5x-um 

■»     67,  5,  Note.  «     £6, 5.  i      90. 

"51.  f  §  141,  Obs.  3.  k     27,  10. 

c  §  1,2S,  R.  s  §  121.  Exe.  1.  '  §  108,  R.  XII. 

i  §  140,  5.  *■  §  140,  1,  21.  '"     19,  {clienUlU.) 


190  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

amicitiam  aggregaverant,  meliOre  conditione  *  atque  sequi- 
ore  imperio  se^  uti  videbant),  ^reliquis  rebus *■  eorum,  gra- 
tia, dignitate  *^  amplificata,  Sequani  principatum  ^dimiserant. 
In  eorum  locum  Remi  successerant ;  3  quos  '^  quod  adaequare 
apud  Caesarem  gratia  intelligebatur,  ii,  qui  propter  ^veteres 
inimicitias  nullo  modo  cum  ^duis  conjungi  poterant,  ^se 
Remis  *  in  clientelam  dicabant.  Hos  illi  diligenter  tuebah- 
tur.  Ita  et  novam  et  repente  colle^tam  auctoritatem  tene- 
bant.  Eo  turn  statu '^  res  erat,  ut  longe  principes^  haberen- 
tur""  iEdui,  secundum  locum  dignitatis  Remi  obtinerent.*' 

13.  In  omni  Gallia  eorum  hominum,  qui^  aliquo  sunt  nu- 
mero'  atque  honore,'  genera  sunt  duo:  nam  plebes  paene 
servorum  habetur  loco/  quae  per  se  nihil  audet  et  nullo  ad- 
hibetur  consilio."  Plerique,  ciam  aut  "''asre '  alieno,  aut  mag- 
nitudine  tributorum,  aut  ir^uria  potentiorum  premuntur,  sese 
in  servitutem  dicant  nobilibus:*  ^in  hos  eadem  omnia  sunt 
jura,  qu33  dominis  "^  in  servos.  Sed  de  his  duobus  generi- 
bus  9  alterum  est  Druidum,  alterum  equitum.  ^o  mf  rebus  " 
divinis  intersunt,  sacrificia  publica  ac  privata  iiprocurant, 
religiones  interpretantur.  Ad  hos  magnus  adolescentium 
numerus  disciplinae  causa'  concurrit,  magnoque  ^^ij  g^nt 
apud  eos  honore.*^  Nam  fer^  de  omnibus  controversiis  pub- 
licis  privatisque  constituunt;  et,  si  quod  est°  admissum  fa- 
cinus,  si  caedes  facta,  si  de.  hasreditate,  si  ^e  finiTjus  contro- 
versia  est,**  iidem  decernunt ;  praemia  poenasque  constituunt : 
si  qui  aut  privatus  aut  publicus  eorum  i^decreto  ^  non  stetit, 
sacrifieiis  interdicunt.  Haec  poena  apud  eos  est  gravissima. 
i^Quibus  ita  est  interdictum,  ii  numero  impiorum  ac  sceler- 
atorum  habentur ;  iis  omnes  decedunt,  ^^aditum  eorum  ser- 
monemque  defugiunt,  ne  quid  ex  contagione  incommodi  ac- 

a  §  121,  E.  XXVI.         f  §  136^  Obs.  5, (in.)  i  §  129,  R. 

b§145,  R.  s§  103,  R.  &Obs.  2.  »§  112,  R.  II. 

c     109,2.  &§98,Obs.4.h§  140,  1,1st.  °§112,  R.  I. 

d     39,  &91.  i§106,  R.VII.  »§  140,  Obs.  2. 

•§123,  R.  k§126.  R.  III.  p§112,  R.  V. 


LIB.  VI.    CAP.  XIV.  191 

oipiant :  neque  iis  petentibus  jus  redditur,  neque  honosullus 
communicatur.  His  autem  omnibus  Diuidibus  praeest  unus, 
qui  isummam  inter  eos  habet  auctoritatem.  Hoc  mortuo, 
si  qui  ex  reliquis  excellit  dignitate,  succedit;  at,  si  sunt  plu- 
res  pares,  suffragio "  Druidum  deligitur,  nonnunquam  etiam 
armis*  de  principatu  contendunt.  Hi  certo  anni  tempore  in 
finibus  Carnutum,  ^quBS  regio  totius  Gallise  media  "^  habetur, 
considunt  in  loco  consecrate.  Hue  omnes  undique,  qui  con- 
troversias  habent,  conveniunt,  eorumque  decretis*"  judiciis- 
que  3  parent.  '^Disciplina  in  Britannia  reperta  atque  inde 
in  Galliam  translata  esse  existimatur :  et  nunc,  qui  ^  ^  dili- 
gentiiis  earn  rem  cognoscere  volunt,  plerumque  illo  discendi 
causa  proficiscuntur. 

14.  DruTdes  a  bello  abesse  consuerunt,  neque  tributa  una 
cum  reliquis  pendunt ;  ^  militias  vacationem  "^omniumque 
rerum  habent  immunitatem.  Tantis  excitati  ^praemiis,*  et 
sua  sponte*"  multi  in  disciplJnam  convenjunt,  et  a  parentibus 
propinquisque  mittuntur.  Magnum  ibi  numerum  versuum 
9  ediscere  dicuntur :  itaque  annos  nonnulli  vicenos*  in  dis- 
cipllna  permanent.  Neque  fas  esse  existimant,  '^ea  Uteris 
mandare,  cum  in  reliquis  fere  rebus,  publicis  privatisque 
rationibus,  GrsBcis  utantur*^  literis.  ^Hd  mihi  duabus  de 
causis  instituisse  videntur ;  quod  neque  in  vulgum  ^2disci- 
plinam  efferri  velint,  neque  eos,  qui  discant,^  literis  '^  confl- 
sos,  miniis  memorisE*'  studere  :  quod*"  fere  plerisque  accidit, 
ut  praesidio  literarum  diligentiam  in  perdiscendo  ac  memo- 
riam  remittant.*  ^3  In  primis  hoc  volunt  persuadere,  ^^  non 
interire  animas,  sed  ab  aliis  post  mortem  transire  ad  alios: 
atque  hoc'*  njaxTme  ad  virtutem  excitari  putant,  metu  mortis 
neglecto.  Multa  praeterea  de  sideribus  atque  eorum  motu,  de 
mundi  ac  terrarum  magnitudine,  de  rerum  natura,  de  Deorum 
immortalium  vi  ac  potestate  iMisputant  et  juventuti  traidunt. 

"~«  §  129,  R.  d     37,  (it.)  «  §  141,  Obs.  3. 

»  §  103,  R.  &  Obs.  2.    •     26,  1.  »>     37,  9,  Note  3. 

c  §  112,  R.  V.  f  §  140,  Obs.  3.  «  §  140,  1,  4th. 


192  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

15.  Alteram  genus  est  equitum.  Hi,  ^  cum  est  usus,  at- 
que  aliquod  bellum  incidit  (quod''  ante  Csesaris  adventum 
fere  quotannis  accidere  solebat,  uti  aut  ipsi''  injurias  infer- 
rent,  aut  illatas  propulsarent),  omnes  in  bello  ^versantur:. 
atque  eorum  ut  quisque  est  genere  ^  copiisque  amplissimus, 
ita  plurimos  circum  se  ^  ambactos  clientesque  habent.  Hanc 
unam  gratiam  potentiamque  noverunt. 

16.  Natio  est  omnium  Gallorum  admodum  -^dedita  religi- 
onibus/  atque  ob  eam  causam,  qui  sunt  afFecti  gravioribus 
morbis,  quique  in  proeliis  periculisque  versantur,  aut  pro 
victimis  homines  immolant,  aut  se  immolattiros  vovent,  ad- 
ministrisque  ad  ea  sacrificia  Druidibus  utuntur ;  quod,  pro 
vita  hominis  nisihommis  vita  reddatur,  non  posse  aliter  De- 
orum  immortalium  numen  placari  arbitrantur:  publiceque 
ejusdem  generis  habent  instituta  sacrificia.  Alii  immani 
magnitudine  ^  simulacra  habent,  quorum  ^  contexta  vimini- 
bus  membra  vivis  hominibus  ^  complent,  quibus  succensis, 
circumventi  flamma  exanimantur  homines.  Supplicia  eo- 
rum, qui  in  furto,  aut  in  latrocinio,  aut  aliqua  noxa  sint 
comprehensi,^  gratiora  Diis  ^  immortalibus  esse  arbitrantur : 
sed,  cum^ejus  generis  copia  deficit,  ad  innocentium  sup- 
plicia descendunt. 

17.  ^Deum  maxime  Mercurium  colunt :  hujus  sunt  pluri- 
ma  simulacra,  hunc  •*  omnium  inventorem  artium  ferunt, 
hunc*'  viarum  atque  itinerum  ducem,  hunc  "^  ad  quaestus  pe- 
cuniae mercaturasque  habere  vim  maximam  arbitrantur. 
Post  hunc,  sApollinem  et  Martem  et  Jovem  et  Minervam : 
de  his  eandem  fere,  quam  reliquae  gentes,'  habent  opinio- 
nem  ;  ApoUmem  ^  morbos  depellere,  Minervam  ^  operum 
atque  artificiorum  ^initia  tradere ;  Jovem  *"  imperium  ccsles- 
tium  tenere;  Martem^  bella  regere.  Huic,  cum  prcelio  di- 
micare  constituerunt,  ea,  quae  bello  ceperint,  plerumque  de- 

*     37,  9,  Notes.  dgnijR.  e  §  141,  Obs.  8. 

"     32,  3.  •  §  106,  R.  VII.  h  §  145.  R. 

«§128,  R.  '§125,  R.  i§101,  Obs.  4. 


LIB.  VI.    CAP.  XIX.  193 

Quae  superaverint,"  animalia  capta  immolant; 
reliquas  res  in  unum  locum  conferunt.  Multis  in  civitatibus 
harum  rerum  exstructos  tumiilos  loQis  ^  consecratis  conspi- 
cari  licet :  neque  ssepe  accidit,  ut,  neglecta  quispiam  relir 
gione,*^  aut  capta  "^  apud  se  Qccultare,aut  ^posita*  tollere 
auderet :  gravissimumque  ei  rei  ^  supplicium  cum  cruciatu 
constitutum  est. 

18.  Galli  se  omnes  ab  Dite  patre  prognatos  prsedicant, 
idque  ab  Druidibus  proditum  dicunt.  Ob  eam  causam, 
^spatia  omnis  temporis  non  numero  dierum,  sed  noctium, 
finiunt ;  dies  natales  et  mensium  et  annorum  initia  sic  ob- 
servant, ^ut  noctem  dies  subsequatur..*^  In  reliquis  vitae  in- 
stitutis,  hoc  ^  fere  ab  reliquis  differunt,  quod  suos  liberos, 
nisi  ci^m  adoleverint,  ut  munus  militias  sustinere  possint, 
*palam  ad  se  adlre  non  patiuntur;  filiumque  puerili  astate 
in  publico,  in  conspectu  patris   assistere,  turpe*'  ducunt. 

19.  Viri,  quantas  pecunias  ab  uxoribus  dotis  nomine  ac- 
ceperunt,  tantas  ex  suis  bonis,  ae&timatione  facta,  cum  doti- 
bus  communicant.  Hujus  omnis  pecuniae  ^conjunctim  ra- 
tio habetur,  '  fructusque  servantur :  uter  eorum  ^  vita  super- 
arit,  ad  eum  pars  utriusque  cum  fructibus  superiorum  tern- 
porum  pervenit.  Viri  in  uxores,  sicut  in  liberos,  vitae  ne- 
cisque  habent  potestatem :  et,  cum  pater  familiae,  illustriore 
loco  natus,  decessit,  ejus  propinqui  conveniunt,  et,  de  morte 
si  res  in  suspiciOnem  venit,  ^  de  uxoribus  in  servllem  modum 
quaestionem  habent,  et,  ^o  si  compertum  est,  igni  atque  om 
nibus  tormentis  excruciatas  interficiunt.  Funera  sunt  i^pro 
cultu  Gallorum  magnif  ica  et  sumtuosa ;  omniaque,  quas 
12  vivis  cordi '  fuisse  arbitrantur,  in  ignem  inferunt,  etiam 
animalia  :  ac  paulo  supra  hanc  memoriam  servi  et  clientes, 
quos  ab  iis  dilectos  esse  constabat,  justis  funeribus  confectis, 
una  cremabantur. 

*§  141,  Obs.  3.  d     19,  (animalia.)  s  §  128,  R. 

»>  §  136,  Obs.  5,  (in.)     «  §  126,  R.  III.  ^  §  98,  Obs.  6. 

«     109,  2.  f  §  140,  1,  Ist.  i  §  114,  R.  &19 

17 


194  D£    BELLO    GALLICO. 

20.  Quae  *  civitates  ^  commodius  suam  rem  publicam  ad- 
ministrare  existimantur,  habent  legibus ''  sanctum,  si  quis 
quid  de  republica  a  finitimis  rumore  ac  fama  acceperit,  uti 
ad  magistratum  deferat,*"  neve  cum  quo  alio  communicet:* 
quod  saepe  homines  temerarios  atque  imperltos  falsis  ru- 
moribus  terreri,  et  ad  facinus  impelli,  et  de  summis  rebus 
consilium  capere  cognitum  est.  Magistratus,  ^quse  visa 
sunt,  occultant ;  qusBque*^  esse  ex  usu  judicaverint,  multitu- 
dini  produnt.  De  republica  nisi  3  per  concilium  loqui  non 
conceditur. 

21.  Germani  multum  ab  hac  consuetudine  difTerunt:  nam 
neque  Druides  habent,  qui  rebus  divlnis  praesint,*  ^neque 
sacrificiis  *^  student.  Deorum  numero  eos  solos  ducunt, 
quos  cernunt,  et  ^  quorum  aperte  opibus  juvantur,  Solem  et 
6  Vulcanum  et  Lunam  :  reliquos  ne  fama  quidem  acceperunt. 
Vita  omnis  in  venationibus  atque  in  studiis  rei  militaris  con- 
sistit :  '''ab  parvulis  labori*^  ac  duritise^  student.  Qui  diu- 
tissime  sjjnpuberes  permanserunt,  maximam  inter  suos 
ferunt  laudem  :  hoc  ali  staturam,*'  ali  hoc  vires  ^  nervosque 
confirmari,  putant.  Intra  annum  vero  vicessimum  feminae 
notitiam  habuisse,  in  turpissimis  habent  rebus:  cujus  rei 
nulla  est  occultatio,  quod  et  promiscue  in  flumimbus  per- 
luuntur,  et  pellibus  aut  parvis  »  rhenonum  tegimentis  utun- 
tur,  magna  corporis  parte  nuda.  '. 

22.  Agriculturae*"  non  student;  majorque  pars  victus 
eorum  in  lacte,  caseo,  carne  consistit :  neque  quisquam  agri 
modum  certum  aut  fines  habet  proprios  ;  sed  magistratus  ac 
principes  in  annos  singulos  gentibus^'  cognationibusque 
hominum,  qui  una  coierint,  lo  quantum,*  et  quo  loco  visum 
est,  agri  attribuunt,  atque  anno  post  alio  translre  cogunt. 
11  Ejus  rei  multas  afferunt  causas ;  ne  assidua  consue- 
tudine   capti,    studium   belli    gerendi   agricultura   commu- 


*     37,  4,  (civmtes.) 
b  §  129,  R. 
c  §  140, 1,  3d. 

d§  141,  Obs.  3. 
"  §  141,  R.  II. 
f  §  112,  R.  V. 

e  §  145,  R. 
»>  §  123,  R. 
«  §  46,  1. 

LIB.  VI.    CAP.  XXIV.  195 

tent  ;*  ne  latos  fines  parare  studeant,''  potentioresque  humil- 
iores  possessionibus ''  expellant ;  *  ne  ^  accuratius  ad  frigora 
atque  aestus  vitandos*'  sedificent;*  ne  qua  oriatur^  pecuniae 
cupiditas,  qua  ex  re  factiones  dissensionesque  nascuntur ;  ut 
Sanimi  aequitale  plebem  contineant,  cum  suas  quisque  opes 
cum  potentissimis  aequari  videat.*^. 

23.  Civitatibus  ^  maxima  laus  est,  quam  latissimas  circum 
se  vastatis  finibus  solitudines  habere.  Hoc  ^proprium  virtu- 
tis  ^  existimant,  expulsos  agris  ^  finitimos  ^  cedere,  neque 
quenquam  ^  prope  audere  consistere :  simul  hoc  se  ^  fore  tu- 
tiores  arbitrantur,  repent inse  incursionis  timore '  sublato. 
Cum  bellum  civitas  aut  illatum  defendit,  aut  infert;  magis- 
tratus,  qui  ei  bello  ^  prsesint,'  ut  vitas  necisque  habeant  potes- 
tatem,  deliguntur.  In  pace  nullus  est  communis-magistra- 
tus,  sed  principes  regionum  atque  pagorum  inter  suos  ^jus 
dicunt,  controversiasque  minuunt.  Latrocinia  nuUam  habent 
infamiam,  quae  extra  fines  cujusque  civitatis  fiunt;  atque  ea 
juventutis  exercendae  "  ac  desidiae  minuendae  causa  fieri  prae- 
dicant.  Atque,  ubi  quis  ex  principibus  in  concilio  dixit, 
"  se  ducem  fore  ;  ^  qui  "  sequi  velint,  profiteantur ;°  "consur- 
gunt  ii,  qui  et  causam  et  hommem  probant,  suumque  auxil- 
ium  pollicentur,  atque  ab  muUitudine  collaudantur :  qui  ex 
lis  secuti  non  sunt,  in  desertorum  ac  proditorum  numero 
ducuntur,  omniumque  iis^  rerum  postea  fides  derogatur. 
Hospites  violare,  fas  non  putant;  qui"  quaque  de  causa  ad 
eos  venerint,  ab  injuria  prohibent,  sanctosque  habent;  iis 
omnium  domus  patent,  victusque  communicatur. 

24.  ^Acfuit  antea  tempus,  ciim  Germanos  Galli  virtute 
superarent,'ultro  bella  inferrent,  propter  hominum  muhitu- 
dinem  agrique  inopiam  trans  Rhenum  colonias  mitterent. 


*  §  140,  1,  2d.  f  §  107,  R.  IX.  I  §  141,R.ILObs.2,4th. 

^  §  136,  R.  LII.  g  §  136,  R.  LII.  »«     112,  5. 

c  §  98,Obs.2,&  112,7.  h  §  145,  R.  °  §  141,  Obs.  3. 

<»  §  140,  Obs.  3.  i      109,  2.  »  §    45,  i.  1. 

*§110,  Obs.  1.  k§ii2,  R.  I.  r§126,  R.  V. 


196  im   SELtO   GALLICO. 

Itaque  ea,  quas  fertilissima  sunt,  Germanias  loca  cirum  Her- 
cyniam  silvam  (quam^  Eratostheni  et  quibusdam  Graecis 
fama  notam  esse  video,  quam  illi  Orcyniam  appellant),  Vol- 
ca3  Tectosages  occupaverunt,  atque  ibi  consederunt.  Quae " 
gens  ad  hoc  tempus  iis  sedibus  sese  continet,  ^  summamque 
habet  justitise  et  bellicsB  laudis  opinionem:  nunc  quoque  in 
eadem  inopia,  egestate,  patientia,  qua  Germani,  permanent, 
eodem  victu*'  et  cultu  corporis  utuntur ;  ^Gallis^  autem  Pro- 
vincisB  propinquitas,  et  transmarinarum  rerum  notitia,  ^  mul- 
ta  ad  copiam  atque  usus  largitur.  Paulatim  assuefacti  su- 
perari,  multisque  victi  proeliis,  ne  se  quidem  ipsi "  cum  illis 
virttite  comparant. 

25.  Hujus  Hercyniae  silvse,  quae  supra  demonstrata  est, 
latittido  novem  dierum  iter^  ^expedito^  patet:  non  enim  ali- 
ter  sfiniri  potest,  neque  mensuras  itinerum  noverunt.  Ori- 
tur ab  HelvetiOrum  et  Nemetum  et  Rauracorum  finibus,  rec- 
taque  fluminis  Danubii  regione''  pertinet  ad  fines  Dacorum 
et  Anartium :  hinc  se  flectit  ^  sinistrorsus,  diversis  ab  flu- 
mine  regionibus,  multarumque  gentium  fines  propter  mag- 
nitudinem  attingit :  neque  quisquam  est  hujus  Germanise, 
qui  se  aut  adisse  ad  initium  ejus  silvae  dicat,'  ciim  dierum 
iter  ^  sexaginta  processerit,''  aut  quo  ex  loco  oriatur,'  accep- 
erit.  Multa  in  ea  genera*  ferarum  nasci  constat,  quae  reli- 
quis  in  locis  visa  non  sint : "'  ex  quibus,  quae  maxime  diife- 
rant  ab  ceteris  et ''memoriae"  prodenda"  videantur,  hsecsunt. 

26.  ®Est  bos  cervi  figura,Pcujus  a  media  fronte  inter  aures 
unum  cornu  existit,  excelsius  magisque  directum  his,  quae 
nobis  nota  sunt,  cornibus.  Ab  ejus  summo,  ^sicut  palmae, 
rami  quam  late  difFunduntur.  Eadem  est  femmae  marisque 
natura,  eadem  forma  magnitudoque  cornuum. 

a  §  145,  R.  ^  §  132,  R.  XLII.  '  §  140,  5. 

b     38,2.  g  §  112,  R.  XVII.  «»§  141,  Obs.3. 

c  §  121,  R.  XXVI.  h  §  129,  R.  n  §  126,  R.  III. 

<»  §  110,  R.  >  §  141,  R.  I.  o     108,6. 

•     33,  1.  ^  §  140,  Obs.  3.  p  §  106,  R.  VII. 


LIB.  VI.    CAP.  XXIX.  197 

27.  Sunt  item,  quae  appellantur  ^  Alces.*  Harum  est  con- 
similis  capreis'' figura  et  ^varietas  pellium ;  sed  magnitu- 
dme "  paulo  antecedunt,  mutil^eque  sunt  cornibus,''  et  crura 
sine  nodis  articulisque  habent ;  neque  quietis  causa  procum- 
bunt,  neque,  si  3  quo  afflictsB  casu  conciderint,  erigere  sese 
aut  sublevare  possunt.  His  '*  sunt  arbores  pro  cubilibus :  ^  ad 
eas  se  applicant,  atque  ita,  paulum  modo  reclinatae,  quietem 
capiunt :  quarum  ex  vestigiis  cum  est  animadversum  a  ve- 
natoribus,  quo  se  recipere  consuerint,^  omnes  eo  loco  aut  a 
radicibus  subruunt,  aut  accidunt  arbores  tantum,  ut  summa 
species  earum  stantium  relinquatur.  Hue  ciim  se  consue- 
tudine  reclinaverint,  « infirmas  arbores  pondere  affligunt,  at- 
que una  ipsse  concidunt. 

28.  Tertium  est  genus  eorum,  qui  ^Uri*  appellantur.  Hi 
sunt  magnitudine ""  paulo  infra  elephantos,  specie '  et  colore 
et  figura  tauri.  Magna  vis  eorum,  et  magna  velocitas :  ne- 
que homini,^  neque  ferae,  quam  conspexerint,  parcunt.  Hos 
studiose  foveis  ^'  captos  interficiunt.  Hoc  se  labore  ^  durant 
adolescentes,  atque  hoc  genere  ^  venationis  exercent ;  et,  qui 
plurimos  ex  his  interfecerunt,  relatis  in  publicum  cornibus, 
^  quae  sint  testimonio,'  magnam  ferunt  laudem.  Sed  assues- 
cere  ad  homines,  et  mansuefieri,  ^ne  parvCfli  quidem  excepti 
possunt.  Amplitudo  cornuum  et  figura  et  species  multi^m 
a  nostrorum  bourn  cornibus  differt.  Haec  studiose  conquisita 
ab  labris  argento*^  circumcludunt,  atque  in  9  amplissimis 
epiilis  pro  pociilis  utuntur. 

29.  10  Caesar,  postquam  per  Ubios  exploratdres  comperit, 
Suevos  sese  in  silvas  recepisse,'  inopiam  frumenti  veritus, 
quod,  ut  supra  demonstravimus,  minime  omnes  Germani 
agriculturae  student,  constituil,  non  progredi  longiis :  sed, 
ne  omnino  metum  reditus  sui  barbaris '"  tolleret,  atque  ut 

«  §  103,  R.  V.  «  §  140,  5. 

*     19,/orffiw,§lll,R.  f  §  106,  R.  VII. 

»  §  128,  R.  e     112,  R.  V.  . 

«»  §  112,  R.  II.  ''  §  129,  R. 


i        114, 

R.  &  Ob»,4. 

^  §  125, 

R. 

1      98,: 

2. 

»§  123, 

R. 

&19, 

198  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

eorum  auxilia  tardaret,  reducto  exercTtu,  partem  ultimam 
pontis,  quae  ripasUbiorum  contingebat,  in  longitudmem  pe- 
dum ducentorum  rescindit ;  atque  in  extremo  ponte  '^  turrim 
tabulatorum  ^  quatuor  constituit,  praesidiumque  cohortium  '' 
duodecim  pontis  tuendi  causa  ponit,  magnisque  eum  locum 
munitionibus  firmat.  Eiloco''  praesidioque  Caium  Volca- 
tium  Tullum  adolescentem  praefecit :  ipse,  cum  maturescere 
frumenta  inciperent,'*  ad  bellum  Ambiorigis  profectus  (per 
Arduennam  silvam,  quae  est  totius  Galliae  maxima,  atque  ab 
ripis  Rheni  finibusque  Trevirorum  ad  Nervios  pertinet,  mil- 
libusque^  amplius  *"  quingentis  in  longitudinem  patet),  Lu- 
ciuni  Minucium  Basilum  cum  omni  equitatu  praemittit,  ^  si 
quid  celeritate  itineris  atque  opportunitate  temporis  profi- 
cere  possit ;  monet,  ut  ignes  fieri  in  castris  prohibeat,^  ne 
qua  ejus  adventus  procul  significatio  fiat :  ^  sese  confestim 
subsequi '  dicit. 

30.  Basilus,  2ut  imperStum  est,  facit ;  celeriter  contraque 
omnium  opinionem  confecto  itinere,  multos  in  agris  inopi- 
nantes  deprebendit ;  eorum  indicio  ad  ipsum  Ambiorigem 
contendit,  quo  in  loco  cum  paucis  equitibus  esse  dicebatur. 
^Multum  cvim''  in  omnibus  rebus,  tum''  in  re  militari  potest 
forttina.  Nam  s'lcut  magno  accidit  casu,  ut  in  ipsum  incau- 
tum  atque  etiam  imparatum  incideret,'  priiisque  ejus  adven- 
tus ab  hominibus  videretur,  quam  fama  ac  nuncius  adven- 
tus afTerretur:"  sic  ^magnse  fuit  forttinaB,"  omni 'militari  in- 
struinento,"  quod  circum  se  habebat,  erepto,  rhedis  equisque 
comprehensis,  ipsum  effugere  mortem.  Sed  hoc  eo  factum 
est,  quod,  aedificio  circumdato  silvd  (ut  sunt  fere  domicilia 
Gallorum,  qui,  vitandi  aestus  causa,  plerumque  silvarum  ac 
fluminum  petunt  propinquitates),  comites  familiaresque  ejus 


^      17,  1. 

f  §  120,  Obs.  3. 

1  §  140,  1,  4th. 

b  §  106,  R.  VII. 

s  §  140,  1,  3d. 

">§  140,  4. 

0  §  123,  R. 

h  §  140,  1,  2d. 

n  §  108,  R.  XII. 

1  §  140,  Obs.  4. 

i     94,  3. 

0      109,  2. 

-  §  132,  R.  XLII. 

k      124,  7. 

LIB.  VI.    CAP.  XXXII.  199 

ano-usto  in  loco  paulisper  equitum  nostrorum  vim  sustmue- 
runt.  His  pugnantibus,  ilium  in  equum  quidam  ex  suis* 
intiilit:  fugientem  silvae  texerunt.  Sic  et  ad  subeundum 
periciilum,  et  ad  vitandum,  imultum  forttlna  valuit. 

31.  Ambiorix  copias  suas  ^judicione''  non  conduxerit,'^ 
qu6d  prcelio  dimicandum *^  non  existimdrit,  an**  3 tempore 
exclusus  et  repentlno  equitum  adventu  prohibitus,  ciim  reli- 
quum  exercitum  subsequi  crederet,  dubium  est:  ^sed  certe, 
diraissis  per  agros  nunciis,  sibi*  quemque  consulere  jussit : 
quorum  pars  in  Arduennam  silvam,  pars  in  continentes  pa* 
ludes  profiigit:  qui  proximi  Oceanum*^  fuerunt,  hi  insulis 
sese  occultaverunt,  quas  agstus  efficere  consuerunt :  multi, 
ex  suis  finibus  egressi,  se  suaque  omnia  ^  alienissimis  credi- 
dgrunt.  Cativol-cus,  rex  dimidias  partis  Eburonum,  qui  una 
cum  Ambiorige  consilium  inierat,  getate  jam  confectus,  cum 
laborem  aut  belli  aut  fugae  ferre  non  posset,  ^  omnibus 
precibus  detestatus  Ambiorigem,  qui*'  ejus  consilii  auctor 
fuisset,  "^  taxo,''  cujus  magna  in  Gallia  Germaniaque  copia 
est,  se  exanimavit. 

32.  Segni  Condrusique  ex  gente  et  numero  Germanorum, 
qui  sunt,  inter  Eburones  Trevirosque,  legatos  ad  Csesarem 
miserunt,  oratum,'  ne  se  in  hostium  numero  duceret,''  neve 
omnium  Germanorum,  qui  essent  citra  Ehenum,  ^unam' 
esse  causam  judicaret :"  nihil  se  de  hello  cogitavisse,  nulla 
Ambiorigi  auxilia  misisse.  Caesar,  explorata  re  ^quasstione 
captivorum,  si  qui  ad  eos  Eburones  ex  fuga  convenissent, 
ad  se  ut  reducerentur,"'  imperavit :  si  ita  fecissent,""  fines  eo- 
rum  se  violatQrum  negSvit.  Tum  copiis  in  tres  partes  dis- 
tribtitis,  impedimenta  omnium  legionum  Aduatucam  contulit. 
Id  castelli  nomen  est.  Hoc  fere  est  in  mediis  Eburonum 
finibus,   ubi  Titurius  atque  Aurunculeius  hiemandi    causa 

*§107,  Obs.  8.  «§112,  R.  V.  '  §  148,  R.  LXIII. 

"     124,  13.  (  §  136,  Obs.  5, (ad.)  ^  §  140,  1,  3d. 

c  §  140,  1,  4th.  g  §  141,  R.  III.  »  §  103,R.V.&Obs.2. 

•>     113,5.  '•§129,  R.  "•§  140,  2,  &80,  2. 


200  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

consederant.  Hunc  cum  reliquis  rebus  locum  probabat, 
turn,  quod  superioris  anni  raunitiones  Integra?  manebant,  ut 
militum  laborem  sublevaret.^  Praesidio''  impedimentis  le- 
gionem  quatuordecimam  reliquit,  unam  ex  iis  tribus,  quas 
proxime  conscriptas  ex  Italia  transduxerat.  Ei  legioni  *^  cas- 
trisque  Quintum  Tullium  Ciceronem  prseficit,  ducentosque 
equites  attribuit. 

33.  Partito  exercitu,  Titum  Labienum  cum  legiombus 
tribus  ad  Oceanum  versus,  in  eas  partes,  quas  Menapios  at- 
tingunt,  proficisci  jubet :  Caium  Trebonium  cum  pari  legi- 
onum  numero  ad  earn  regionem,  qua?  Aduatucis*^  adjacet, 
depopulandam^  mittit :  ipse  cum  reliquis  tribus  ad  flumen 
Sabim,  quod  influit  in  Mosam,  extremasque  Arduennae  par- 
tes ire  constituit,  quo  cum  paucis  equitibus  profectum  ^  Am- 
biorigem  audiebat.  Discedens,  ^  post  diem  septimum  sese 
reversurum,  confirmat;  quam  ad  diem  ei  legioni,^  quae  in 
praesidio  relinquebatur,  frumentum  deberi  sciebat.  Labie- 
num Treboniumque  hortatur,  si  reipublicEe  commodo''  fa- 
cere  possint,  ad  eam  diem  revertantur;'  ut,  rursus  commu- 
nic5,to  consilio,  exploratisque  hostium  rationibus,  aliud  belli 
initium  capere  possent.'' 

34.  Erat,  ^ut  supra  demonstravimus,  ^manus  certa  nulla, 
non  oppidum,  non  praesidium,  quod'  se  armis  defenderet; 
sed  omnes  in  partes  dispqrsa  multitudo.  Ubi  cuique ""  aut 
vallis  abdita,  aut  locus  silvestris,  aut  palus  impedita,  spem 
praesidii  aut  salutis  aliquam  offerebat,  consederat.  Haec  loca 
^vicihitatibus'"  erant  nota,  magnamque  res  diligentiam  re- 
quirebat,  non  in  summa  exercitus  tuenda  (nullum  enim  pote- 
rat  universis  ab  perterritis  ac  dispersis  periciilum  accidere), 
sed  in  singiilis  militibus  conservandis  ;  quae  tamen  ^  ex  parte 
res  ad  salutem  exercitus  pertinebat.     Nam  et  praedae  cupid- 

a§140,  1,1st.  «     112,7.  i  §  140,1,3d, &0bs.5,  (Mt.) 

b§114,  R.  f     98,2.  k  §140,1,  2d. 

c§123,  R.  B§  126,  R.  III.  1  §  141,R.  I. 

d§112,  R.  IV.  »'§i29,  R.  «"§  HI,  Obs.  1,4th 


LIB.  VI.    CAP*  XXXV.  Sftl 

has  multos  longids  evocabat,  et  silvse  incertis  occultisque 
itineribus  i  confertos  adire  prohibebant.  2  Si  negotium  con- 
fki*  stirpemque  hominum  sceleratorum  interfici''  vellet, 
dimittendse''  plures  manus  diducendique  erant  milites  :■  si 
continere  ad  signa  manipulos  vellet,  ut  3  instituta  ratio  et 
oonsuetudo  exercitus  Romani  postulabat,  locus  ipse  erat 
praesidio "  barbaris,°  neque  ex  occulto  insidiandi  et  dispersos 
eircumveniendi  singulis*^  deerat  audacia.  At  in  ejusmodi 
difficultatibus,  quantum*  diligentia  provideri  poterat,  provi- 
debatur;  ut  potius  *in  nocendo  aliquid  omitteretur,  etsi  om- 
nium animi  ad  ulciscendum  ardebant,  quam  cum  aliquo  mil- 
itum  detriment©  noceretur.  Caesar  ad  finitimas  civitates 
jauncios  dimittit,  omnes  ad  se  evocat  spe  praBdae,  ad  diripi- 
endos  EburOnes,  ut  potius  in  silvis  Gallorum  vita,  quam 
*  legionarius  miles,  periclitetur ;  ^  simul  ut,  magna  multitu- 
dme  circumfusa,  pro  tali  facinore,  stirps  ac  nomen  civitatis 
toUatur.^     Magnus  undique  numerus  celeriter  convenit. 

35.  HaBc  in  omnibus  Eburonum  partibus  gerebantur,  dies- 
que  ^appetebat  septimus,  quem  ad  diem  CaBsar  ad  impedi- 
menta legionemque  reverti  constituerat.  Hie,  quantum*^ 
in  bello  fortuna  possit  ^  et  "^quantos^  afferat''  casus,  cognosci 
potuit.  Dissipatis  ac  perterritis  hostibus,  ut  demonstravi- 
mus,  8 manus  erat  nulla,  quae  parvam  modo  causam  timoris 
afferret.'  Trans  Rhenum  ad  Germanos  pervenit  fama,  di- 
ripi"  Eburones,  atque  ultro  omnes  ad  praedam  evocari."  Co- 
gunt  equitum  duo  millia  Sigambri,  qui  sunt  proximi  Rheno,  \ 
quibus  receptos  ex  fuga  Tenchtheros  atque  Usipetes^  supra 
docuimus :  transeunt  Rhenum  navibus  ratibusque,  triginta 
millibus  passuum  infra  eum  locum,  ubi  pons  erat  perfectus 
prsesidiumque  ab  Caesare  relictum  :  primos Eburonum  fines' 
adeunt,  multos  ex  fuga  dispersos  excipiunt,  magno  pecoris 


a     94,  3. 

19,  1. 

h  §  140,  5. 

^     108,  2. 

«     46,  1. 

i  §  141,  R.  I. 

c§  114,11. 

f  §  140,  1,  2d. 

k      96,  6. 

«  §  112,  Obs.  1,  & 

K     48,  4. 

1  §  136,  R.  LII. 

202  DE    BELLO    GALLICO. 

numero,  cujus ''  sunt  eupidissimi  barbari,  potiuntur.  Invitati 
praeda,  longius  procedunt :  i  non  hos  palus,  in  bello  latrocin- 
iisque  natos,  non  silvse  morantur  :  quibus  in  locis  sit ''  Caesar, 
ex  captivis  quaerunt;  profectum  longius  reperiunt,  omnem- 
que  exercitum  discessisse  cognoscunt.  Atque  unus  ex  cap- 
tivis, "  Quid  vos,"  inquit,  "  banc  miseram  ac  tenuem  secta- 
mini  praedam,  quibus  licet  jam  esse  fortunatissimis?*^  Tri- 
bus  horis'^  Aduatiicam^  venire  potestis :  hue  omnes  suas 
fortunas  exercitus  Romanorum  contulit :  Spraesidii  tantum  est, 
ut  ne  murus  ^  quidem  cingi  possit,^  neque  quisquam  egredi 
extra  munitiones  audeat.''^  Oblata  spe,  Germani,  quam** 
nacti  erant  praedam,  in  occulto  relinquunt,  ipsi  Aduatiicam* 
contendunt,  usi  eodem  Muce,  cujus  haec  indicio'  cognoverant. 

36.  Cicero,  qui  per  omnes  superiores  dies  praeceptis  Cae- 
saris  summa  diligentia  milites  in  castris  continuisset,  ac  ne 
calonem*^  quidem  quemquam  extra  munitionem  egredi  pas- 
sus  ess^t,  septimo  die,  difFidens  de  numero  dierum  Caesarem 
fidem  servaturum,  quod  longius  eum  progressum  audiebat, 
neque  ulla  de  reditu  ejus  fama  afferebatur;  simul  eorum 
permotus  vocibus,  ^  qui  illius  patientiam  psene  obsessionem 
appellabant,  si  quidem  ex  castris  egredi  non  liceret ;  nullum 
ejusmodi  casum  expectans,  quo,  novem  oppositis  legiombus 
maximoque  equitatu,  dispersis  ac  paene  deletis  hostibus,  in 
millibus  passuum  tribus  pffendi  posset ;  quinque  cohortes 
frumentatum  in  proximas  segetes  mi&it,  quas  inter  et  castra 
unus  omnino  coUis  intererat.  Complures  erant  in  castris  ex 
legiombus  aegri  relicti ;  ex  quibus  ^  qui  hoc  spatio  dierum 
convaluerant,  circiter  trecenti  sub  vexillo  una  mittuntur: 
magna  praeterea  multitudo  calonum,  magna  vis  jumento- 
rum,  quae  in  castris  ^subsederat,  facta  potestate,  sequitur. 

37.  Hoc  ipso  tempore,  "^  casu  Germani  equites  interveni- 
unt,  protinusque  eodem  illo,  quo  venerant,  cursu  ab  decu- 

■"  *  §  107,  R.  IX.  J  §  131,  R.  XLI.  s  §  140,  1,  1st. 

b  §  140,  5.  •  §  130,  2.  h     37,  4. 

c  §  103,  Obs.  7.  '     121,  Note  2.  i  §  129,  R. 


LIB.  VI.    CAP.  XXXVIII.  2G3 

manS,  portd  in  castra  irrumpere  conantur:  nee  prius  sunt 
visi,  objectis  ab  ea  parte  silvis,  quam  castris  appropinqua- 
rent,  usque  eo,  ut,  i  qui*  sub  vallo  tenderent  mercatores,  re- 
cipiendi  sui  facultatem  non  haberent.  Inopinantes  nostri  re 
nova  perturbantur,  ac  vix  primum  impetum  cohors  in  sta- 
tione  sustinet.  Circumfunduntur''  ex  reliquis  hostes  partibus, 
si  quem*^  aditum  reperire  possent^  jiEgre  portas  nostri  tu- 
entur,  ^reliquos  aditus  locus  ipse  per  se  munitioque  defendit. 
Totis  trepidatur  castris,  atque  alius  ex  alio  causam  tumultus 
quasrit ;  neque  quo  signa  ferantur/  neque  quam  in  partem 
quisque  conveniat,''  provident.  Alius  capta  jam  castra^ 
pronunciat ;  alius,  delete  exercitu  atque  imperatore,  victores 
barbaros ^  venisse  contendit:  ^plerlqu^  novas  sibi  ex  loco  re- 
ligiones  fingunt,  Cottasque  et  Titurii  calamitatem,  qui  in  eo- 
dem  occiderint*^  castello,  ante  ociilos  ponunt.  Tali  timore 
omnibus  perterritis,  confirmatur  opinio  barbaris,^  ut  ex  cap- 
tive audierant,  nullum  esse  intus  praesidium.  Perrumpere 
nituntur,  seque  ipsi  *"  adhortantur,  ne  tantam  fortunam  ex 
manibus  dimittant.' 

38.  Erat  aeger  in  praesidio  relictus  Publius  Sextius  Bacil- 
lus, 4  qui  primum  pilum  ad  Caesarem  duxerat,  cujus  menti- 
onem  ^  superioribus  prosliis  fecimus,  ac  diem  "^  jam  quintum 
cibo'  caruerat.  Hic,difflsus  suae  atque  omnium  saluti,""  iner- 
mis  ex  tabernaciilo  prodit :  videt  imminere  hostes,  atque  in 
summo  esse  rem  *  discrimine  :  capit  arma  a  proximis  atque 
in  porta  consistit.  Consequuntur  hunc  centuriones  ejus  co- 
hortis  quae  in  statione  erat:  paulisper  una  proelium  susti- 
nent.  ^Jjelinquit  animus  Sextium,  gravibus  acceptis  vul- 
neribus  :  aegre  per  manus  tractus  servatur.  Hoc  spatio  in- 
terposito,  reliqui  sese  confirmant  tantum,  ut  in  munitionibus 
consistere  audeant,  speciemque  defensorum  praebeant. 

*     37,  4.  e  §  145,  R.  i  §  140,  1,  3d. 

^     116,  6.  f  §  141,  R.  III.  k  §  131,  R.  XLI. 

c  §  35,  (siquis.)  s  §  110,  Obs.  1.  »  §  121,  R.  XXV 

•J  §  140,  5.  h     33,  1.  n»§  112,  R.  V 


204  DE   BELLO    GALLICO. 

39.  Interim  confeCta  frumentatione,  milites  nostri  (^aro&- 
rem  exaudiunt ;  praecurrunt  equites,  quanto  sit  *  res  in  peri- 
culo,  cognoscunt.  Hie  vero  nulla  munitio  est,  quae  ^  perter- 
ritos  recipiat :  modo  conscripti,  atque  ^  usus  "  militaris  impe- 
riti,  ad  tribunum  militum  centurionesque  ora  convertunt: 
quid  ab  his  praecipiatur,*  expectant.  Nemo  est  -tam  fortis, 
quin  ^  rei  novitate  perturbetur.  Barbari,  signa  procul  con- 
spicati,  oppugnatione  *  desistunt :  redisse  primo  legiones  cre- 
dunt,  quas  longius  discessisse  ex  captivis  cognoverant : 
postea,  despecta  paucitate,  ex  omnibus  partibus  impetum 
faciunt. 

40.  Calones  in  proximum  tumulum  procurrunt :  hinc  ce- 
leriter  dejecti  se  in  signa  manipulosque  conjiciunt:  eo  ma- 
gis  timidos  perterrent  milites.  Alii,  ^cuneo  facto  ut  celeri- 
ter  perrumpant,*^  censent,  quoniam  tam  propinqua  sint  cas- 
tra;  et,  *si  pars  aliqua  circumventa  ceciderit,  at  reliquos 
servari  posse  confidunt:  alii,^  ut  in  jugo  consistant/  atque 
eundem  omnes  ferant*^  casum.  Hoc  veteres  non  probant 
milites,  quos  ^  sub  vexillo  una  profectos  docuimus,  Itaque 
inter  se '  cohortati,  duce  Caio  Trebonio,  equite  Romano,  qui 
eis  erat  prsepositus,  per  medios  hostes  perrumpunt,  incolu- 
mesque  ad  unum  omnes  in  castra  perveniunt.  Hos  sub- 
secuti  calones  equitesque  eodem  impetu  militum  virtute 
servantur.  At  ii,  qui  in  jugo  constiterant,  ^  nullo  etiam 
nunc  usu  rei  militaris  percepto,  neque  in  eo,  quod  probave- 
rant,  consilio  permanere,  ut  se  loco  superiore  defenderent, 
neque  eam,  quam  profuisse  aliis''  vim  celeritatemque  vide- 
rant,  imitari  potuerunt ;  sed,  se  in  castra  recipere  conati,  in- 
iquum  in  locum  demiserant.  Centuriones,  quorum '  non- 
nulli,  ex  inferioribus  ordinibus  reliquarum  legionum,  virtu- 
tis  causd,*"  in  superiores  erant  ordines  hujus  legionis  trans- 

»  §  140,  5.  «§  136,  R.  LII.  i  §  28,  Obs.  5. 

»§141,  R.  I.  '§140,  1,3d.  k  §  112,  R.  V.  1st. 

c  §  107,  R.  IX.  «  §  10 1, Ohs A, censent.  i  §  107,  R.  X. 

d§140;3.  h§  145;R.  &91,  4.       ''^§  129,  R. 


ff;pf?Pf'pwp 


LIB.  VI.    CAP.  XLUI.  205 

ducti  ne  ante  partam  rei  militaris  laudem  amitterent,*  for- 
tissime  pugnantes  conciderunt.  Militum  pars,  horum  vir- 
tute  submotis  hostibus,^  praeter  spem  incoliimis  in  castra 
pervenit;  pars  a  barbaris  circumventa  periit. 

41.  Germani,  desperatd  expugnatione''  castrorum,  quod 
nostros  jam  constitisse  *^  in  munitionibus  videbant,  cum  ea 
praeda,  quam  in  silvis  deposuerant,  trans  Rhenum  sese  rece- 
perunt.  Ac  tantus  fuit  etiam  post  discessum  hostium  terror, 
ut  «a  nocte,*^  cum  Caius  Volusenus  missus  cum  equitatu  ad 
castra  venisset,^  i  fidem  non  faceret/  adesse  cum  incolumi 
Cassarem  exercitu.  Sic  omnium  animos  timor  prasoccupav- 
erat,  ut,  ^pgene  alienata  mente,''  deletis  omnibus  copiis 
equitatum  tantiim  se  ex  fuga  recepisse,*"  dicerent/  neque, 
incolumi  exercitu,  Germanos  castra  oppugnaturos  fuisse  con- 
tenderent.     Quem^  timorem  Caesaris  adventus  sustulit. 

42.  Keversus  ille,  eventus  belli  non  ignorans,  *  unum, 
quod  cohortesL  ex  statione  et  prsesidio  essent''  emissae,  ques- 
tus,  4ne  minimo  quidem  casu '  locum  relinqui  debuisse, 
multum  fortunam  in  repenlino  hostium  ^dventu  potuisse  in- 
dicavtt;  mnlto  etiam  amplius,  quod  paene  ab  ipso  vallo  por- 
tisque  castrorum  barbaros  avertisset.  ^  Q^arum  =  omnium 
rerum""  maxime  admirandum  videbatur,  quod  Germani,  qui 
eo  consilio  Rhenum  trunsierant,  ut  Ambiorigis  fines  depopu- 
larentur,^  ad  castra  Romanorum  delati,  ^optatissimum  Am- 
biorTgi  beneficium  obtulerint.' 

43.  Caesar,  rursus,  "^ad  vexandos  hostes  profectus,  magno 
coacto  numero  ''  ex  finitimis  civitatibus,  in  ornnes  partes  di- 
mittit.  Omnes  vici  atque  omnia  aedificia,  quae  quisque  con- 
spexerat,  incendebantur:  praeda  ex  omnibus  locis  agebatur: 
frumenta  non  solum  a  tania  multitudine  jumentorum  atque 
hominum  consumebantur,  sed  etiam  anni  tempore  atque  im- 

*  §  140,  1,  2d.  <=  §  140,  Obs.  4.  «  §  126,  R.  III. 

»•     109,  2.  f  §  140,  1,  1st.  k  §  135,  R.  XLVII. 

«      98,2.  6     38.  >  §  140,  1,4th. 

*§131,  R.  XLI.  »»§i4o,  1,  3d. 

18 


206    ^  DE    BELLO    GALLICO.  ^^  *  ||- 

bribus  procubuerant;  ut,  si  qui  etiam  in  praesentia  se  occul- 
tassent,  tamen  iis,*  deducto  exercitu,  rerum  omnium  inopia 
pereundum  videretur.  Ac  saepe  in  eum  locum  ventum  est,'' 
tanto  in  omnes  partes  diviso  equitatu,  ut  modo  visum  *"  ab 
se  Ambiorigem**  in  fuga  captivi,  nee  plane  eiiam  abisse  *' 
ex  conspectu  contenderent,  ut,  spe  consequendi  illata  atque 
infinito  labore  suscepto,  qui  se  summam  ab  Caesare  gratiam* 
inituros  putarent,'^  ^peene  naturam  studio  vincerent,^  sem- 
perque  paulum  2  ad  summam  felicitatem  defuisse  viderStur,^ 
atque  3  ille  latebris  aut  saltibus  se  eriperet,^  et  noctu  occul- 
tatus  alias  regiones  partesque  peteret,^  non  majore  equitum 
prsesidio,  quam  quatuor,  quibus''  solis  vitam  suam  commit- 
tere  audebat. 

44.  Tali  modo  vastatis  regionibus,*  exercitum  Cgesar  dua- 
rum  cohortium  damno  Durocortorum''  Remorum  reducit, 
concilioque  in  eum  locum  Galliae  indicto,'  de  conjuratione 
Senonum  et  Carnutum  quaestionem  habere  instituit;  et  de 
Accone,  qui  princeps '  ejus  consilii  fuerat,  graviore  senten- 
tia'  pronunciata,  *more  majorum  sujpplicium  sumsit.  Non- 
nuUi  judicium  veriti  profugerunt ;  Squibus"'  cum  aqua"  at- 
que igni  °  interdixisset,  duas  legiones  ad  fines  Trevirorum, 
duas  in  Lingonibus,  sex  rellquas  in  Senonum  finibus  Agen-- 
dici  in  hibernis  collocavit ;  frumentoque  ^  exercitu''  proviso, 
ut  instituerat,  in  Italiam  ad  conventus  agendos  profectus  est. 

a§147,R.  f§141,R.  III.  1  §  103,  R.  V. 

b     67,  Note.  s  §  140,  1,  1st.  ■»§  112,  R.  IV. 

c     98,2.  h§123,  R.  "  §  136,  Obs.5,(a6.) 

d  §  145,  R.  i      109,  2.  °  §  15,  7. 

e  §  136,  R.  LII.  ^  §  130,  2.  P  §  126,  R.  III. 


i- 


207 


NOTES   ON   BOOK  I. 


Page  53. — l.  Qwarwwjsnpply^ar^mwj,  of  these  parts. — 2.  (li) 
qui  app ell antur  Celt ce  ipsoricm  lingua,  Galli nostra  (linguA,  incolunt*) 
tertiam  (partem). — 3.  /nsHfl/fw,  customs. — 4.  Infer  se, among  them- 
selves; from  each  other. — 5.  Arrange:  Flumen  Garumna  dividit  Gal- 
los  ah  Aquitdnis,  Mairona  et  S equina  (dividunl  Gallos)  a  Belgis. — 
6.  Cultu,  civilization,  mode  ol"  living — /iMwayiiM^c,  refinement,  men- 
tal culture. — 7.  Minlme  scepe,  least  often,  i.  e.  very  seldom. — S.  Eos, 
1.  e.  Germdnos. — 9.  Ipsi,  i.  e.  Helvelii. — 10.  ^orwrn  (finium)  of  those 
confines,  op  territories;  of  that  country. — 11.  Eorum,  of  them,  i.  e. 
of  the  three  general  divisions  of  Gaul. — 12.  Vergit  ad  Septentriones, 
it  inclines,  or  extends  towards  the  north. 

Jr.  54. — 1-  AbextriimisJinXbuSy  from  the  remotest,  or  most  distant 
confines  of  Gaul;  meaning  the  most  northern  limit  of  the  division 
then  inhabited  by  the  Celtse,  or  Gauls,  called  Gallia  propria,  and 
here  called  extremis,  because  farthest  distant  from  Rome. — 2.  Spec- 
tant,  &.C.,  they  look  tovrards — the  country  faces — the  northeast. — 

3.  Jld  Hispaniam,  at — next  to — Spain,  viz  :  the  Bay  of  Biscay. — 

4.  Consules,  See  Index. — 5.  Civitdti,  his  state: — Civitas  means  all 
the  people  living  under  one  government. — 6.  Fotlri  imperio,  to  ob- 
tain the  government. — 7.  Persudsit  id  eis  facilius  hoc,  he  persuaded 
them  to  that  measure  more  easily,  on  this  account. — 8.  Naturd  loci, 
by  the  nature  of  the  place,  or,  of  their  situation;  by  their  natural 
situation. — 9.  Pro  multitudlne  hominum,  for,  in  proportion  to,  the 
number  of  inhabitants;  in  proportion  to  the  population. — 10.  Belli 
atque  fortitudinis,  for  war  and  bravery. — 11.  Qui  paUbant,  which 
extended. — 12.  Adducti  his  rebus,  induced  by  these  circumstances. 
13.  Jld  proficiscendum,  for  their  departure.  14.  Carrorum  quain 
maximum  numerum,  as  great  a  number  of  wagons  as  possible. — 
15.  Sementes  qichn  maximas,  as  great  sowings  as  possible. 

i.  55. — I.  /'i  fer/iMm  a/mw?/),  against  the  third  year. — 2.  Occu- 
pdret,  that  he  should  take  possession  of: — The  imperfect  subjunc- 
tive here  follows  the  present   {pcrsnddet)  on  the    principle  stated, 


*  l.alin  words  ivA  in  Itci'ii  s,  or  ^n  ■li)=;fil  in  parontheses,  are  not  in  the  text,  !)at  are 
here  sni>.  lied,  to  h.',h".v  the  lUli  co.ni.'r n'Uini  \:1  iho  sentence. 


208  NOTES    ON    BOOK    1. 

\ 
§  137,  Obs.    1. — 3.  Principdtum,  the  highest  power  or  authority.— 

4.  Probat  illis,  perfaclle  esse  factu,  perfice.re  condta,  he  (Orgeto- 
rix)  assures  them  that  the  accomplishment  of  their  designs  would 
be  easily  done;  that  their  designs  would  be  easily  accomplished. — 

5.  Totius  Gallice,  i.  e.  civitatibus  totius  Gallice,  &,c.,  Of  the  states 
of  all  Gaul  the  Helvetii, — pdssent  (facere)  plur imum,  coMld  do  most, 
i.  e.  were  most  powerful. — 6.  Inter  se,  among  themselves,  to  each 
other,  mutually. — 7.  Per  tres—popalos,  viz:  the  Helvetii,  SequSni, 
and  ^dui. — 8.  Arrange:  Sperant  sese  posse  potiri  (imperio)  totius 
Gallics. — 9.  Ea  res,  this  design. — 10.  Per  indicium,  by  information. 
11.  Ex  vinculis,  Out  of  chains,  i.  e.  in  chains. — 12.  Arrange:  Op- 
portebat  pcenam  sequi  (Orgetongem)  damndtum,  ut  cremarttur  igni, 
it  behoved  this  punishment  to  follo\^,  overtake,  Orgetorix,  being 
condemned,  that  he  should  be  burned  with  fire. — 13.  Familiam, 
household — including  domestics,  slaves,  &c. — 14.  Ad  millia  decern, 
about  ten  thousand; — Ad,  with  a  Oiumeral,  signifies  about,  near,  or 
towards. 

P.  5Q. — 1.  Magistrdtuscogerent,  the  magistrates  (of  the  JEdxxi) 
were  collecting. — 2.  Quin  ipse,  but  that  he. — 3. Ad,  about. — 4.  Tri- 
um  mensium,  for  three  months. — 5.  Molita  cibaria,  ground  provis- 
ions, i.  e.  meal  or  flour. — 6.  Usi  eodem  consilio,  following  the  same 
counsel  or  design;  adopting  the  same  resolution.  l.Boiosque,  &c., — re- 
ceptos  ad  se,  &c,,  having  received  the  Boii,  &c.,  they  join  them  to 
themselves  as  allies;  Or,  they  receive,  and  join  to  themselves  as 
allies,  the  Boii,  &,c.  For  this  use  of  the  perfect  participle  see 
Idioms,  104. — 8.  Vix  qua,  scil.  via,  where,  or,  by  which  way. 9. 
Provinciam  nostram,  our  province;  the  Roman  province  in  the  bouth 
of  Gaul,  afterwards  called  Gallia  Narbonensis. — 10.  Propterea  quod, 
because;  literally,  on  this  account  that. — 11.  Isque  transitur  vado, 
and  it  is  crossed  by  a  ford,  i.  e.  it  is  fordable. 

Jr.  57. — I.  Bono  (Mlmo,  of  a  good  mind,  friendly  disposition, 
well  affected. — 2.  Diein,  see  Dies,  Index. — 3.  Ante  diem  qzdntum,  &c. 
The  fifth  before  the  Kalends  of  April,  i.  e.  the  28th  March.  See  Gr. 
App.  I.— 4.  Lucio  Pisone,  &c.,  that  was,  A.  U.  C.  696,  B.  C.  58.— 
5.  Urbe,  scil.  Roma. — 6.  Galliam  ulterior  em,  farther  Gaul,  i.  e.  Gaul 
beyond  the  Alps. — 7.  ProvincicB  toti,  Sec.  he  orders  as  many  soldiers 
as  possible  from  the  whole  province,  i.  e.  he  levies.  Sic: — For  ex- 
planation  of  this   construction   see    §123,    Exp. — 8.   Ad,   near  — 

9.  Facti  sunt  certiores,  were  made  more  certain;  were  informed. 

10.  Esse  sibi  in  animo,  that  they  had  it  in  design;  that  it  was  their 
intention;  literally,  that  it  was  in  the  mind  to  them. — 11.  Voluntdte, 
with  his  consent.     12.  Sub  jugmn  missum,  sent  under  the  yoke: — 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    I.  209 

Two  spears  were  set  upright  in  the  ground,  and  another  was  laid 
across  them  at  top,  forming  what  the  Romans  called  jugum.  Under 
this  they  who  were  admitted  to  surrender  upon  these  terms  were 
compelled  to  pass  unarmed,  nudi. — 13.  Concedendum  (esse  sibi,) 
that  he  ought  to  yield  to  their  request. — 14.  ^nte  diem  Idus  Aprjlis, 
i.  e.  the  12th  April^  see  App.  I. 

Jl  .  58. — 1.  Qui  injlumen — As  the  Rhone  flows  through  the  lake 
Lemanus,  and  of  course  out  of  it,  it  is  here  said  that  the  lake  flow9 
into  it.  2.  jid  montem  Juram,  to\^ards  mount  Jura. — 3.  Milliapas- 
suum  novem  decern,  nineteen  miles  in  length.  See  App.  VI.  Table  5. — 
4.  Castella  communit,  he  strongly  fortifies  castles,  or  redoubts. 
§  91,  Obs.  i.  5th. — 5.  Se  invito,  he  being  unwilling,  i.  e.  against  his 
will,  or  inclination. — 6.  Ne^t  se,  more,  &.c.  he  declares  that  he  can- 
not, consistently  with  the  custom,  8cc.  Negat  is  equivalent  to  dicit 
non. — 7.  Navibusjunctisratibusque,hc.,  some  by  means  of  boats  join- 
ed together,  and  numerous  rafts  being  made;  before  navlbus  supply 
Alii. — 8.  Qua  minima,  &c.,  where  the  depth  pC-the  river  was  least. 
9.  Perrumpere,  break  through,  force  a  passage. — 10.  Eo  depreca- 
tore,  he  being  intercessor:  by  his  mediaiicn. — 11.  Gratia  ct  largiti- 
one,  by  his  personal  influence  and  liberality — potcrat  facere  plurl- 
mum,  could  accomplish  a  very  great  deal. — 12.  In  matrimonium  dux- 
erat,  had  married j  literally,  had  led  into  matrimony.  Duccre  vxo- 
rem  (domum)  "to  marry,"  is  said  of  the  husband,  because  a  part 
of  the  ceremony  consisted  in  leading  the  wife  home  to  his  ^louse. 
Nature  (se)  viro,  "  to  marry,"  is  said  of  the  wife,  (literally,  "to 
veil  herself  to  her  husband,")  because  during  the  ceremony  she 
wore  a  flame-colored  veil. — 13.  Novis  rebus  studcbat,  desired,  wish- 
ed for,  new  things;  aimed  at,  plotted,  a  revolution  in  the  state. 

±.  59. — 1-  Scquani  (dent  obsides); — Helvetii  (dent  obsides). 
2.  Ne  prohibeant,  that  they  would  not  prevent,  or  hinder,  the  Hel- 
vetii from  (using)  this  route. — 3.  C<esdr%renunci(itur,  Intelligence 
is  brought  to  Casarj  §  126,  R.  III. — 4.  Intelligebat,  &c. — he  per- 
ceived it  would  be  very  dangerous  to  the  province — ut  haberct,  to 
hi|ve;  (literally,  that  it  should  have). — 5.  Proximum,  nearest,  i.e. 
shortest. — 6.  Quod  est  extr^mum  (oppTdum)  citerioris  Provinci<s, 
which  is  the  most  distant  town  (viz:  from  Rome,)  of  the  hither 
province,  i.  e.  of  Cisalpine  Gaul;  See  Index. — 7.  liogaium  auxilium, 
to  ask  assistance. 

P.  60. — 1.  Necessarii,  &c.,  friends  and  relations. — 2.  Sibi  pra- 
ter agri,  &c.  that  nothing  was  left  to  them  except  the  soil  of  their 
land;  except  a  desolate  country. — 3.  Flumen  est  Arar,   The  Arar 


^10  .  NOTES    ON    UOOK    1.        *"  ■       ' 

(now  the  Saone,)  is  a  river. — 4.  IncredihUilenitate,  with  surprising 
smoothness. — 5.  In  utram  partem,  into  which  part;  which  way;  in 
which  direction. — 6.  Id  translbant,  were  crossing  that; — lintrlbus, 
canoes,  small  boats. — 7.  Detertid  vigilid,  at  the  third  watch,  i.  e, 
midnight;  See  App.  I. — 8.  Impedltos,  encumbered  with  their  bag- 
gage. — 9.  In  proximas  silvas,  &c. ,  went  into  the  neighboring  forests 
and  hid  themselves: — This  expresses  the  force  of  the  accusative 
after  m. — 10.  Princeps  panas  persolvit,  first  suffered  punishment; 
§  98,  Obs.  10,  i.  e.  was  the  first  to  suff'er  punishment. 

'P.  61. — 1.  Arrange:  Tigurlni  interfecerunt  L.  Pisonem  legd- 
turn,  avum  L.  Pisonis  ejus  (i.  e.  Csesaris,)  soceri  eodem  proelio  quo 
Tigurlni  interfecerant  Cassium. — 2.  Conscqui,  come  up  with,  over- 
take.— 3.  Pontem  in  Ardrij  &.c.  that  a  bridge  should  be  made  over 
the  Arar. — 4.  Cassidno  bello,  in  the  war  with  Cassius;  See  Index, 
Casshis. — 5.  Ita  cum  Casdre  agU,  thus  speaks  with,  or  addresses 
Caesar: — This  address  of  Divico  is  in  the  form  of  oblique  narration; 
See  §  140,  6,  &  §  141,  E,.,  VI.,  with  explanation,  &c.— 6.  Veteris  in- 
comtnodi,  the  old  disaster;  alluding  to  the  defeat  of  Cassius. — 
7. — Tribuerat  quidquam  magnopere,  &c.,  should  ascribe  anything 
too  greatly  to  his  own  bravery. — 8.  Ne  committer et,  that  he  should 
not  cause;  bring  it  to  pass — aut  proderet,  &c.,  or  hand  down  to  pos- 
terity  the  memory  of  such  an  event. — 9. — Ccesar  respondit,  Ceesar 
replied.  All  that  follows  in  this  chapter  is  oblique  narration;  the 
the  verb  respondit  being  in.  the  perfect  indefinite,  the  leading  verb 
governed  by  it  iii  the  present  infinitive  is  translated  as  the  perfect 
indicative,  and  the  perfect  infinitive  as  the  pluperfect  indicative: 
See  Idioms,  IVos.  96,  98. — 10.  Qui  si,  if  they,  viz:  the  Roman  people. 

Jr.  62. — 1.  Nonfuisse,  &c.,  it  would  not  have  been  difficult  to 
guard  against  it;  the  subject  of  fuisse  is  cav&re,  and  strictly  render- 
ed is,  "that  to  guard  against  it  would  not  have  been  difficult." — 
2.  Sed  eo  deceptum  esse,  &c.,  but  that  they  (the  Roman  people)  had 
been  deceived  by  this,  because  they  did  not  think  anything  had  been 
done  by  them; — Supply  quidquam  before  commissum.  3.  Timendum 
(esse  sibi,)  that  they  should  fear. — 4.  (^od  si  vellet,  but  if,  even 
although,  he  were  willing. — 5.  Num  etiam— posse,  &c.?  ,€ould  he 
also  lay  aside,  &c.? — 6.  Eodem  pertinere,  were  to  the  same  effect; 
pertinere  has  for  its  subject  the  two  preceding  clauses. — 7.  Secundi- 
ores  res,  more  prosperous  things;  greater  prosperity. — 8.  Quum  ea 
sint  ita,  although  these  things  are  so;  although  this  is  the  case. — 
9.  Testem  ejus  rei^  a  proof  of  that  custom. — 10.  Cupidius,  too  ea- 
gerly,—        Alitno  loco,  in  a  disadvantageous,  or  unfavorable  place. 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    I.  211 

P.  63. —  1.  Novissimo  ngmtnej  the  rear,  t.  e.  the  "last  line" 
met  by  an  opposing  enemy. — 2.  Satis  habebat,  &c.,  considered  it 
sufficient  for  the  present. — 3.  Nostrum  primum  (agmen),  our  van. — 
4.  Quinis  aut  senis,  &c.,  five  or  six  miles  (each  day). — 5.  Flagitdre 
(for  Jlagitdbat,)  continued  to  importune — j)ublice,  in  the  name  of 
their  state. — 6.  Frigora,  the  coldj  the  coldness  of  the  climate. — 
7.  Sub  septentrionibus ,  under  the  northj  towards  the  north. — This 
must  be  understood  in  relation  to  Italy. — 8.  Frumento,  corn: — At 
this  time  not  meal  or  bread  was  served  out  to  the  Roman  soldiers, 
but  raw  corn,  which  they  themselves  prepared. — 9.  Conferri,  &c.. 
that  it  was  collecting,  bringing  in,  at  hand. — 10,  Diutius,  too  long; 
See  Idioms,  22. — 11.  Qui  summo,  &.c,,  who  was  invested  with  the 
office  of  chief  magistrate. 

P.  64. — 1.  Tacucrat,  had  concealed. — 2.  Valeat  plurimum,  is 
very  powerful;  has  great  influence. — 3.  Privdti,  though  private  in- 
dividuals. — 4,  Necessario  coactus,  compelled  by  necessity,  (Neces- 
sario  for  necessitate.) — 5.  Designdri,  was  meant. — 6.  Nolebat  eas 
res  jactdri,.muliis  presenlfbus,  he  was  unwilling,  he  did  not  wish, 
that  these  affairs  should  be  discussed,  so  many  being  present;  in 
the  presence  of  so  many. — 7-  Solo,  (Lisco,)  of  him  alone. — 8.  Re- 
dempta  habere,  &c.,  had  farmed  the  customs,  and  all  the  other  pub- 
lic revenues  of  the  ^dui:  Portoria  means  duties  on  exports  and  im- 
ports,— vectigalia  means  every  other  kind  of  tax  or  revenue.  Those 
who  '"farmed"  them  bought  them  at  the  lowest  price  they  could, 
from  the  government,  and  collected  them  for  their  own  use. 

P»  Q5. — 1.  Facultdtes  magnas  compardsse,  &c.,  had  acquired 
great  means  for  bestowing  presents,  namely,  for  the  purpose  of  ex- 
tending and  strengthening  his  influence.  ♦2.  Larglter  posse,  had 
great  influence — coUocdsse  (nuptum),  had  given  in  marriage. — 
3.  Cupere  (for  bene  velle),  wished  well  to. — 4.  Si  quid  (adversi)  aC' 
rldut,  if  any  thing  unfortunate  should  happen;  if  any  calamity  be- 
fel, — 5.  Inquirendo,  by  enquiry,  on  enquiring. — 6.  Equitdtu  (the 
old  dative  for  equitatui;  §  16,  Exc.  2  )  prceerat,  was  over,  or  com- 
manded the  cavalry, — 7.  Certissimce  res,  most  certain;  mos*  unques- 
tionable facts. — 8.  Injussu  suo,  &c  without  his  order  and  the  order 
of  the  state  (viz:  of  the  ^dui). 

JL  .  66. — 1.  Voluntdtera,  affection. — 2.  Commonefdcit,  re- 
minds him. — 3.  Ostendit,  shews  him. — 4.  Causa  cognlla,  the  cause 
being  tried  or  investigated. — 5.  Nequidgravius,  &c.  that  he  (Cajsar) 
should  not  determine  any  thing  too  severe;  that  he  should  not  pass 
too  severe    a    sentence.— 6.    IpKc,    he    himself    (viz:   Divitiacus). 


m 


212  NOTES    ON    BOOK    I. 

7-  Ille,  he  (i.  e.  Dumnorix).— 8.  Fraterno  amore,  by  brotherly  love; 
by  love  or  affection  for  his  brother. 

Jl  .  67. — 1.  Adhlhet,  brings  in— proponit,  lays  before  him. — 
2.  Divitidco  frg,tri,  to  his  brother,  i.  e.  at  the  request  of,  and  for 
the  sake  of  his  brother,  Divitiacus. — 3.  Custodes,  spies.— 4.  Conse- 
disse,  had  sat  down,  i,  e.  had  encamped. — 5.  Facilem  (ascensum) 
esse,  that  the  ascent  was  easy. — 6.  Vigilid;  See  Index;  also  Appendix 
to  Gr.  I. — 7.  See  Index,  Legdtus. — 8.  See  Index,  Prcstor — Legdtum 
prtBtore,  his  lieutenant  with  praetorian  powers. — 9.  Et  Us  ducibus, 
and  with  those  as  guides. — 10.  In  (exercitu)  M.  Crassi.~ll.  Pri- 
ma luce,  at  the  first  daylight;  at  the  dawn  of  day. — 12.  Ipse,  he  him- 
self (i.  e.)  Caesar). — 13.  Equo  admisso,  his  horse  being  put  to  it; 
spurred  up,  i.  e.  at  full  gallop. 

Jl  .  68. — 1.  Multo  die  ado,  much  of  the  day  being  past;  when 
much  of  the  day  was  past. — 2.  Pro  viso,  literally,  for  seen,  i.  e.  as 
if  it  had  actually  been  seen  by  him. — 3.  Quo  consuerat  intervallo, 
at  the  distance  at  which  he  had  been  accustomed  to  follow,  i.  e.  at 
the  usual  distance.  4.  Exercitu  (the  oM  dative  for  exercitui,)  fru- 
mentwn  metlri,  to  measure  out,  i.  e.  to  serve  out  corn  for  the  army. — 

5.  Rei  frumentarice  prospiciendum  (esse  sibi),  that  he  must  provide 
for  a  supply  of  corn. — 6.  Decurio,  See  Index. — 7.  Discedere,  were 
departing  from  them. — 8.  (Helvetii)  confiderent  (Romanos)  posse, 
&c. — 9.  Animum  advertit,  (same  as  animadvertit ,)  perceives;  §  44, 

1.  3. — 10.  Qui  sustineret  impttum,  to  sustain  the  charge. 

P.  69.— 1.  Citeriore  Gallia,  hither  Gaul;  the  north  of  Italy. 

2.  Compleri,  to  be  filled,  to  be  covered. — 3.  Eum,  it,  i.  e.  the  place 
in  which  the  baggage  was. — 4.  Confer Hssimd  acie,  &c.,  in  very  close 
array — phalange  facta,  a  phalanx  being  made.  The  German  pha- 
lanx consisted  of  a  very  close  body  of  men  with  'their  shields  held 
over  their  heads,  and  overlapping  so  as  to  form  a  shed  or  screen  like 
the  Roman  testudo,  to  defend  them  from  the  missiles  of  the  enemy. 
The  Macedonian  phalanx,  on  the  other  hand,  consisted  of  a  body  of 
men,  sixteen  deep  and   five  hundred  long — 5.  Sub,  close  up  to. — 

6.  Suo  (equo  remoto). — 7.  Periculo  omnium  (i.  e.  Imperatoris  et 
militum)  cequdto,  the  danger  of  all  being  equal;  all  being  exposed 
to  equal  danger. — S-  Scutum,  See  Index. — 9.  Satis  commode,  con- 
veniently enough;  with  sufficient  ease  or  readiness. — 10.  Nudo,  na- 
ked, unprotected: — Their  bodies  were  exposed  to  the  darts  of  the 
enemy,  from  having  thrown  down  their  shields. — 11.  Pcdcm  refcrre, 
to  retreat;  literally,  to  take  back  the  foot. — 12.  Claudebant  agmen, 
closed  up  the  rear, — 13.  Bipartito,  in  two  parties;  in  two  divisions. 


^■PPW^' 


WW 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    I.  213 

The  army  was  drawn  up  in  three  lines,  of  which  the  first  and  second 
lines,  forming  one  division,  made  head  against  those  who  had  been 
defeated  and  compelled  to  retreat,  i.  e.  the  Helvetians,  who  were 
now  returning  to  the  attack;  and  the  third  line  sustained  the  attack 
of  those  advancing  (ve^ientes,)  against  them,  the  fresh  troops,  i  e. 
the  Boii  and  the  Tulingi,  who  were  coming  up  in  the  rear. 

P.  70. — 1.  jincipUi  pralio,  in  doubtful  battle,  i.  e.  victory  in- 
clining to  neither  side.— 2.  AlUri,  the  one,  i.  e.  the  Helvetii — alteri, 
the  other,  i.  e.  the  Boii  and  the  Tulingi. — 3,  Ab  septimd  hora,  from 
the  seventh  hour,  i.  e.  one  o'clock  p.  m.;  See  Index,  hura. — 4.  jSver- 
sum.  turned  away;  who  had  turned  his  back;  retreating;  flying. — 

5.  Pugndtum  est  ad  multam  noctem,  It  was  fought  till  a  great  part 
of  the  night  was  past;  till  late  at  night. — 6.  Matdras  ac  tragulas, 
&c.  continued  throwing  lances  and  javelins  from  beneath. — 7.  Qui, 
sijuvissent,  for,  if  they  should  aid  them;  See  Idioms,  39. — 8,  Ar- 
range: Se  habiturumeos  (Ling6nQ.s) eddem  loco  quo  ille,  (Caesar,)  ha- 
beret  Helvctios. — 9.  Qui,  cum  convenissent,  and  they,  when  they 
had  met;  See  Ref. 

P.  71. — 1.  Occultdri,  be  concealed,  (viz:  from  Caesar). — 
2.  Omnlno  ignordri,  be  altogether  unknown;  remain  altogether  un- 
noticed.— 3.  Primdnocte,  at  the  beginning  of  the  night. — 4.  Arrange: 
Imperat  his  per  quorum  fines  ierant,  uti,  he. — 5.  Habuit,  &c.,  treated 
as  enemies;  i.  e.  either  put  them  to  death  or  sold  them  as  slaves. — 

6.  Ipsos,  them,  viz:  the  Helvetii,  Tulingi,  and  Latobrigi. — 7.  Va- 
edre,  to  be  empty;  to  be  uninhabited. — 8.  Arrange,  Concessit  ^duis 
petentibus,  ut  (iEdui)  collocdrent  Boios  in  suis  finlbus,  quod  (Boii) 
cogntti  erant  e'gregid  virtute:  quibus  (Scil.  Boiis)  illi  (-lEdui)  dcdb- 
runt  agros. — 9.  Tabulce,  lists;  literally,  tablets: — These  were  made 
of  wood  covered  with  wax,  on  which  the  Romans  were  accustomed 
to  write  with  the  stylus. — 10.  ConfectcB  Greeds  Uteris,  written  in 
Greek  letters. — 11.  jRafio,  an  account. 

P.  72. — 1.  CapUum,  literally,  *' of  heads,"  i.  e.  persons,  souls. 

2.  Censu  habito,  the  census  having  been  held;  the  number  having 
been  taken: — This  was  only  a  numbering  of  the  army,  and  conse- 
quently very  different  from  the  Roman  census;  See  Index,  Census. — 

3.  Gratuldtum,  to  congratulate  him: — After  gratuldtum  supply  di- 
rentes,  expressing  past  time;  See  Idioms,  94,  4,  and  1,  2d. — 4.  Pro 
veterlbus  injuriis,^hc.,  for  the  ancient  injuries  done  by  the  Helvetii 
to  the  Roman  people.  Here  two  genitives  are  governed  by  one 
noun,  the  one,  (Helvetiorum)  in  an  active  sense,  and  the  other  (Populi 
Romdni)  in  a  passive  sense;  §  106,  Obs.  1,  &  2. — 5.  iVTe  quis,  &c. 


214  NOTES    ON    BOOK    I. 

that  no  one  should  disclose  their  deliberations,  unless  those  to  whom 
this  charge  should  be  given  by  the  assembly  at  large. 

X  .  73. — 1.  Nomninus,  k.c.;  See  Note  3,  preceding  page.  The 
statement  of  the  chiefs,  and  of  Divitiacus  who  spoke  for  them,  it 
will  be  perceived,  is  given  in  the  form  of  oblique  narration — of 
course,  the  leading  verbs  are  in  the  infinitive  mood  governed  by 
dicentes,  or  dicens  expressing  past  time,  because  agreeing  with  the 
subject  of  verbs  in  the  perfect  tense.  Hence  the  present  infinitive, 
with  a  subject,  will  be  translated  in  the  perfect  indicative,  and  the 
perfect  infinitive,  in  the  pluperfect,  as  the  references  showj  and  also 
all  the  verbs  in  subordinate  clauses  are  in  the  subjunctive;  See 
§  140,  6,  and  §  141,  K.  VL,  &c.— 2.  Harum  (factionum)  &e.  that 
the  iEdui  were  at  the  head  of  one  of  these  factions,  and  the  Aver- 
ni  at  the  head  of  the  other. — 3.  Hi.cum  contenderent,  Sec;  since  these 
(the  iEdui  and  Averni)  had  contended  for  the  superiority. — 4.  Ho- 
rum,  of  the  latter,  (viz:  the  Germans). — 5.  Copias;  copia  in  the 
singular  means  "abundance,"  in  the  plural,  commonly  "  forces,"  but 
here,  great   abundance;  the  plural   form  rendering  it   emphatic. — 

6.  Neque  recusatnros  quo  minis  essent,  &c.  nor  refuse  to  be  forever 
under  their  sway  and  government;  Idioms,  78,  Note,  &  7. — 7.  Se 
unum,  that  he  alone  (Divitiacus). 

X.  74.~1.  Qwifews  ZocMs,  &c.  for  whom  a  settlement  and  habi- 
tations were  to  be  procured. — 2.  Futurum  esse,  that  it  would  be; 
that  the  consequence  in  a  few  years  would  be. — 3,  Ncque  enim,  &c., 
For  neither  was  the  Gallic  territory  to  be  compared  with  that  of 
the  Germans. — 4.  Ut  semel.  when  once,  i.  e.  as  soon  as. — 5.  Omnia 
exempla  cruciatusque,  all  manner  of  cruelties:  by  Hendiadys  (§  150, 

2,  2d,)  for  exempla  cruciaUium. — 6.  Nisi  si,  same  as  nisi,  unless. — 

7.  Ut,  namely,  that. 

X.  75. — 1.  iTaft^ia,  being  delivered. — 2.  ^.rprmcrg,  draw,  ex- 
tort.— 3.  Hoc,  on  this  account. — 4.  Free  (fortune)  reliquorum,  in 
comparison  with  the  fortune  of  the  rest;  or  simply,  than  the  rest. — 
5.  Fugce  facultas,  the  means  of  escape. — 6.  Omnes  crvcidtus,  all 
tortures,  i.  e.  all  kinds  of  torture. 7.  Earn  rem  futuram  (esse)  curm 
sihi,  that  that  thing  would  be  a  care  to  him;  that  he  would  attend  to 
that  matter. — 8.  Secundum  ea,  &c.,  besides  these  things,  many  cir- 
cumstances induced  him — quare  putdret,  to  think;  literally,  why  he 
should  think. 

X  .  76. — !•  Occurrendum,  &c.,  he  must  meet,  or  thwart,  as 
early  as  possible. — 2.  Flacuit  ei,  it  pleased  him,  i.  e.  he  resolved. — 

3.  Et  summis  utrisque  rebus,  matters  of  the  greatest  importance  to 

\ 


NOTES    ON    BOOK   I.  215 

both. — i.  Si  quid  ipsi,  &c,  if  any  thing  had  been  wanted  by  him 
from  Caasar,  i.  e.  if  he  had  waited  any  thing  from  Caesar. — 5.  Si 
quid  ille  se  velit,  if  he  (Cajsar,)  wished  any  thing  from  him(Ario- 
vistus). — 6.  Sine  magno  commedtu  atque  emolimento,  (better  than. 
emolumento,)  without  great  expense  and  trouble. — 7.  Arrange: 
Quid  negotii  esset  aut  Ccesdri,  &c. 

X  .  77. — 1.  Hanc  gratiam  referret,  he  should  make  this  return 
— ut  gravaretur,  that  he  grudged,  or,  was  reluctant. — 2.  Neque.  used 
conjunctively,  equivalent  to  et  non. — 3.  Dicendum  sibi  et  cognoscen- 
dun.,  he,  that  he  should  not  think  it  necessary  for  him  to  speak, 
and  inform  himself  about  a  matter  of  common  interest. — 4-  Ne  quam, 
&c.  (equivalent  to  ne  aliquam,)  that  he  should  not  lead  any,  &c. — 
5.  liyMria  literally,  with  injury,  i.e.  without  just  cause. — 6.  Quod, 
i.  e.  secundum  id  quod,  according  to  that  which,  i.  e.  as  far  as  (equiv- 
alent to  quantum)  he  could  do  it  consistently  with  the  interest  of  the 
republic. — 7.  Item,  in  like  manner. — 8.  Non  opportere  se  impedlri, 
that  he  ought  not  to  be  hindered. 

Jr.  78. — 1.  Longe  iis  abfuturum,  wo-uld  be  far  from  them.  i.  e. 
would  do  them  no  good.  2.  Quod  sibi,  &c.  as  to  what  Caesar  threat- 
ened to  him,  namely. — 3.  Inter,  during. — 4.  Virtute  (facere)  possent, 
could  eflfect  by  valor. — 5.  JEdui  (veniebant)  questum. — 6.  Treviri 
autem  (veniebant  questum). — 7.  Ne — minus  facile,  &c.,  lest — he 
(Ariovistus)  might  be  less  easily  resisted. — 8.  Re  frumentaria  com- 
pardtd,  having  provided  a  supply  of  corn;  Idioms,  104. — ^9.  Tridui 
viam,  a  journey  of  three  days. — 10.  Contendere,  was  hastening — 
processisse,  had  advanced — ad  occupandum  Vesontionem,  to  take  pos- 
session of  Vesonlio. — 11.  Summa  facultas ,  the  greatest  abundance. 
12:  jid  ducendum  bellum,  for  protracting  the  war. 

Jr.  ■7-9. — 1-  Ut  circlno  circumductum,  as  if  traced  around  it 
with  a  pair  of  compasses. — 2.  Non  amplius  (spatio),  not  more  than 
the  space. — 3.  Continet,  closes,  occupies. — 4.  Murus,  circumddtus 
hunc  (montem,)  efficit  arcem,  et  conjungit  (montem)  cum  oppido, 
a  wall,  thrown  around,  converts  this  mountain  into  a  cit^^l,  and 
connects  it  with  the  town. — 5.  Ex percunctatione,  he,  from  the  en- 
quiries of  our  men,  and  the  statements  of  the  Gauls. — 6.  Vultum  et 
aciem  oculorum,  their  look  and  the  fierceness  of  their  eyes. — 7.  Tri- 
■bunis, — prcefectis;  See  Index. — 8-  Quorum  alius,  &c.,  of  whom  one 
having  assigned  one  reason,  another,  another  reason,  which  they 
said  was  a  necessary  one,  (or  rendered  it  necessary,)  for  them  to 
to  return  home. — 9.  Fingere  vultum,  compose  their  countenance 


216  NOTES    ON    BOOJf    I. 

P.  80. — 1.  Qui,  i.  e.  a  5m,  those  who. — 2.  Dicfo  audiens,  obe- 
dient to  the  order: — Dicto  is  goveraed  in  the  dative  here  by  audiens; 
§  111,  R.:  both  words  together  commonly  signify  obedient,  and  gov- 
ern a  dative  by  the  same  rule;  as,  Duci  dido  audiens,  obedient  to 
the  general. — 3.  Consilio  convocdto,  a  council  (of  war)  being  called; 
or,  having  called  a  council  of  war. — 4.  Sibi  qutErendum,  that  they 
must  enquire,  i.  e.  that  it  was  their  business  to  enquire. — 5.  Sibi 
quidem  persuaderi.  that  he  was  even  persuaded. — 6.  Suis  postuldtis, 
&c.  his  demands  being  known,  and  the  fairness. — 7.  Sua,  their  own — 
ipsiu^,  his.-^.  Factum  (esse)  periculum,  that  trial  had  been  made. 
9.  Servili  tumultu,  (enuivalent  to  servorum  tumultu)  the  insurrection 
of  the  slaves. 

P.  81. — 1.  In  suis,  in  their  own,  (i.  e.  the  Helvetii) — illOrum. 
(i,  e.  Germanorum)  finibus,  in  their  territories. — 2.  ^uos,  for  ali- 
quos,  any. — 3,  Neque  sui  potestdtem  fecisset,  and  had  not  given  an 
opportunity  of  coming  to  an  engagement  with  him: — Facere  potes- 
tdtem sui,  means  to  allow  one's  self  to  be  approached.— -4.  Ratione 
et  consilio,  by  stratagem  and  cunning.— 5.  Qui,  i.  e.  ii  qui,  those 
who. — 6.  Quod  non  fore  dicto,  &c.,  As  to  this,  that  it  was  said  the 
soldiers  would  not  be  obedient  to  orders. — 7.  Scire  enim  quibuscum- 
que,  Sec,  for  he  knew,  to  whomsoever,  (i.  e.  in  all  cases  in  which; 
§  99,  Obs.  7,)  an  army  would  not  be  obedient,  that  either,  &c. — 
8.  Itdque  se,  quod,  &c.,  that  he  would  therefore  do  immediately  that 
which  he  was  going  to  put  off  to  a  more  distant  day. 

P.  82. — 1.  PrcBtoriam  cohortem,  a  body  guard. — 2.  Confidebut 
maxime,  trusted  most. — 3.  Princeps,  first. — 4.  Egerunt,  strove — 
before  se  neque,  supply  dicentes  or  dixerunt;  See  Idioms,  94,  4. — 
5.  Satisfactione,  their  apology,  excuse. — 6.  Exquislto,  heix\o  recon- 
noitred.— 7.  (Supply  5^1  dic^rent,)  quod,  &c.,  to  say  that  that  which, 
&c. — 8.  Fore  uti  desistiret,  that  he  would  desist;  See  Ref. 

P.  83. — 1.  Ne  quern  pedttem,  &c.  that  Caesar  should  not  bring 
any  infantry. — 2.  Tolli,  should  be  prevented,  thwarted. — 3.  Com- 
modissimum,  most  expedient. — 4,  Omnibus  equis,  &c.,  All  their  hor- 
ses being  taken  from  the  Gallic  cavalry,  to  mount  on  them,  (literal- 
ly, thereon). — 5.  Si  quid  opus,  &c.  if  there  should  be  any  need  of 
action;  §  118,  R.  XXII. — 6.  Nunc  rescribere  ad  equum,  he  now  en- 
rolled them  among  the  cavalry. — 7.  Ex  equis,  on  horseback — denos, 
ten  each. — 8.  Ubi  ventum  est  eo,  when  they  came  to  the  place  ap- 
pointed; See  Ref. 

P.  84. — 1.  Necessitudlnis,  &c.,  of  alliance  existed  between 
them  and  th^  ^dui. — 2.  Nihil  sui,  nothing  of  their  own. — ^3.  Jlucti 


,  NOTES    ON    BOOK    I.  217 

dres,  encreased,  farther  advanced. — 4.  Quos  amplius,  anymore. — 
5.  Rogdtum  et  arcessltum,  having  been  asked  and  sent  for. 

X  .  85. — 1-  Quod  multitudlnem  transducat,  as  to  his  leading, 
&c.,;  literally,  as  to  this  that  he  led;  See  Idioms,  38,  Note. — 2.  De- 
fenderit,  had  warded  it  oif. — 3.  Quid  sibi  vellet?  (Caesar)  What  did 
he  (Caesar)  want? — Here  sibi  refers  to  Caesar,  suas  to  Ariovistus. — 

4.  Hanc  Galliam,  &c.  That  this  Gaul  (viz:  Transalpine,)  belonged 
to  him  (Ariovistus) — Sicut  illam  nostram,  just  as  that  Gaul  (Cisal- 
pine) belonged  to  us.— 5.  Qui^  Since  we. — 6.  Quod  diceret,  as  to 
that  which  he  said;  or  since  he  said. — 7.  Sese  facturum  esse  gratum, 
that  he  would  do  an  agreeable  thing,  a  favor;  would  oblige. 

P.  86. — 1-  In  caTTi  sen^en^'aw,  to  this  effect. — 2.  E sse  Ariovisti y 
Sec,  belonged  to  Ariovistus,  rather  than  to  the  Roman  people.— 
3.  Quodque  tempus,  &c.,  if  all  ancient  time — the  most  ancient — the 
most  distant  period  ought  to  be  regarded. — 4.  Voluisset,  had  decreed. 

5.  Propins  (ad)  tumvlum. — 6.  Per  fidem,  by  relying  on  his  faith. — 
7.  Vulgus  milUum,  among  the  common  soldiers. — 8.  Qua  arrogantid 
usus,  &c.,  using  what  arrogance,  or  with  what  arrogance  Ariovistus 
had  interdicted  the  Romans  from  all  Gaul,  and  his  cavalry  had  made 
an  attack  on  our  men,  and  hov/  that  affair  had  broken  up  the  con 
ference: — These  subjunctives  are  all  in  the  same  construction,  con- 
taining an  indirect  question,  the  first  and  second  indicated  by  qud 
arrogantid,  and  the  third  by  ut;  §  140,  5. — 9.  Injectum  est,  was 
infused. 

P.  87.— 1-  Neque  perfects  essent,  and  had  not  been  completed: 
§  93,  1. — 2.  Quin  conjicerent,  from  throwing;  See  Ref. — 3.  In  eo 
peccandi.  &c.,  and  because  in  him  the  Germans  had  no  cause  of 
sinning,  of  committing  any  act  of  violence. — 4.  Causa  speculandi? 
for  the  sake  of  spying?  on  purpose  to  act  as  spies? 

P.  88. — 1.  Ei  potestas  nan  deesset,  an  opportunity  might  not 
be  wanting  to  him,  i.  e-  he  might  have  the  opportunity. — 2.  Quos 
ex  omni,  &.c. ,  literally,  whom  they  had  selected  from  the  whole  ar- 
my, each  horseman  one. — 3.  Si  quo,  &c.  if  they  had  to  advance  far- 
ther than  usual  in  any  direction, — 4.  Cursum  adcequdrent,  equalled 
their  speed.-5Qwo  in  loco,  &c.  in  which  the  Germans  had  encamped. 

6.  QucB  copice.  that  these  forces. 

P.  89. — 1.  Suo  institvto,  according  to  his  custom,  or  design.— 
2.  A  majoribus  (castris)  from  the  larger  camp. — 3.  SortUus  et  vatu 
einationibus,  by  lots  and  auguries. — 4.  Ex  usu  esset,  &c.,  whether 
or  not  it  would  be  of  advantage  that  the  battle  should  be  joined. — 

19 


218  NOTES    ON    BOOK    II. 

5.  Non  esse  fas,  that  it  was  not  the  will  of  the  gods. — 6.  AlarioSf 
the  auxiliaries: — So  called  from  their  being  in  general  placed  on  the 
wings  (a/<E)  of  the  army  when  in  the  order  of  battle. — 7,  Pro,  in 
front  of. — 8.  Ad  speciem,  for  show;  for  appearance. — 9,  Generdiim, 
by  nations. — 10.  Rhedis,  carriages, — carris,  baggage  wagons. — 
11.  Eb,  on  them. 

X.   90. — 1.  Singulis  legionibus,  &c. ,   placed  a  lieutenant  and 
quaestor  over  each  legion. — 2.  Minlme  fir  main,  least  firm,  weakest. 

3.  See  Note  4,  p.  69. — 4.  Expeditior,  more  disengaged;  more  at 
liberty. — 5.  Neque  destiterunt  fugSre,  nor  did  they  cease  to  fly;  dis- 
continue their  flight. — 6.  In  his,  among  these. — 7.  Quam  duxirat, 
whom  he  had  married. — 8.  Ducr  filice,  &c.  the  two  daughters  of 
these, — the  one  was  killed  and  the  other  taken  captive. 

P.   91. — 1.  In  ipsum  Ceesarem,  &c..  fell  in  with  Csesar  himself. 
2.  Beneficio,  by  the  favor. — 3.  Proximi,  next  to;  bordering  upon. — 

4.  In  citeriorem  Galliam,  into  hither  Gaul: — The  northern  part  of 
Italy,  or  that  part  of  Gaul  south  of  the  Alps,  was  called  Cisalpine, 
or  hither  Gaul,  from  being  on  this  side  of  the  Alps  with  regard  to 
Rome. — 5.  Ad  agendas  conventus,  to  hold  the  assizes,  or  courts  of 
justice: — This  was  usually  attended  to  in  the  winter,  when  military 
operations  could  not  be  carried  on. 


NOTES   ON   BOOK  II. 

Page  92. — l.  Cum  esset  Ceesar,  he: — The  time  here  indicated 
was  in  the  year  of  the  city  697,  and  57  years  B.  C. — 2.  Crebri  ru- 
mores,  frequent  reports.  3.  iJixerawMs,  we  had  said;  B.  I.  Ch.  1. — 
4.  Conjurandi,  of  the  conspiracy. — 5.  Partim  qui,  some  of  whom;  nt, 
as  on  the  one  hand— ita,  so,  on  the  other. — 6.  Partim  qui,  while 
others. — 7.  Novis  imperils  stndebat,  were  in  favor  of  a  change  of 
government. — 8.  Ab  nonnuUis  (solicitarentur). — 9.  Qui  ad  condu- 
cendos,  &c,,  who  had  the  means  for  hiring  troops. — 10.  Earn  rem  in 
imperio  nostra  consfqui  paterant,  could  accomplish  that  object  under 
our  government. — 11.  Inita  eestdte,  in  the  beginning  of  summer. — 
12.  Dat  negotium,  he  gives  a  commission,  he  directs. — 13.  Cognos- 
cant,  should  learn. 


NOTES  ON  BOOK  II.  2l9 

P.  93. — 1.  Quin  projicisceretur,  but  that  he  should  inarch; 
about  marching. — 2.  Celeriusque,  &c.,  and  sooner  than  the  expccta- 
tion  of  all,  (of  any  one,)  i.  e.  than  all  (or  any  one)  expected. — 
3.  Neque  se  consensisse,  that  they  had  neither  agreed;  approved  of 
the  design;  joined,  entered  into  the  confederacy. — 4.  Furorem,  in- 
fatuation.— 5.  «4^  his,  from  these,  viz:  the  ambassadors  from  the 
Remi. — 6.  Quantce,  hov*^  powerful. — 7.  Omnia  se  habere  explordta, 
that  they  had  all  things  fully  examined. 

P.  94. — 1-  i^m^iacMM,  Divitiacus — not  the -^duan. — 2.  Totius 
belli  summam,  the  direction  of  the  whole  war. — 3.  Longisslme  ab- 
sunt,  are  very  remote. — 4.  Qui  appellantur  uno  nomine  Germdni, 
who  are  called  by  one  name,  Germans — ad  quadraginta  m/Zia  about 
forty  thousand. — 5.  Liber aliter  prosecutus  orutione,  having  compli- 
mented them  highly  in  a  speech.^ — 6.  jid  diem,  by  the  day  appoint- 
ed.— 7.  Magno  opere,  i.  e.  magnopere,  greatly — quanta  opcre,  i.  e. 
quantopere,  how  much  it  concerned. — 8.  Ne  conjligendum  sit,  that  he 
might  not  have  to  contend. 

P.  95. — 1-  Quce  res,  this  position. — 2.  Cohortibus;  See  Gr. 
App.  V. — 3.  Duodeviginti  pedum,  (in  latitudlnem)  eighteen  feet 
broad. — 4.  Gallorum  eddem  atque,  &c.  of  the  Gauls  as  well  as  of 
the  Belgse. — 5.  Quod  tum,  &c.  this  was  then  easily  done.  6.  Poles- 
tas  consistendi  in  muro  erat  nulli,  the  power  of  standing  on  the  wall 
was  to  none;  no  man  was  able  to  stand  on  the  wall.  7.  Prceerat, 
was  over;  had  the  command  of;  was  governor  of. — 8.  De  media  noc- 
te,  soon  after  midnight. 

P.  96. — 1-  Qmos,  &c.,  which,  (viz:  villages  and  buildings,)  they 
could  reach. — 2.  Et  ab  miltibus  passuum  &c.,  at  less  than  two  miles 
distant  (viz:  castris,  from  the  camp). — 3.  Prcelio  supersedere,  to  de- 
fer a  battle. — 4.  SolicitationXbus  periclitabdtur,  trial  was  made  in 
skirmishes. — 5.  Ex  utrdque  parte,  &c.,  had  a  steep  descent  on  both 
sides;  literally,  had  descents  of  the  side  on  both  sides. — 6.  Et 
frontem  leniter  fastigdtus,  and  in  front  gently  sloping. — 7.  jld  ex- 
tremas  fossas ,  at  the  extremities,  or  ends  of  the  ditches. — 8.  Tor- 
menta,  military  engines,  viz:  the  Catapulta  and  the  Batista;  See 
Index. — ^9.  Quod  tantummultitudlne  poterat,  because  they  could  do 
so  much  by  their  great  number;  were  so  powerful,  or  strong,  in 
numbers. — 10.  <St  qua  opus,  &c.  if  it  should  be  needful  any  where. 

P.  97. — 1.  Non  magna  palus  erat,  there  was  a  small  morass. — 
2.  Expectdbant,  continued  waiting  to  see. — 3.  Secundiore  nostris^ 
being  more  favorable  to  our  men. — 4,  Demonstrdtum  est,  has  been 


220  .  NOTES    ON    BOOK    II. 

shewn}  See  Ch.  5. — 5.  Si  minus  potuissent,  if  they  could  not  do 
this; — ad  gerendum  helium,  for  carrying  on  the  war;  for  prosecuting 
the  war. — 6.  Impeditos,  embarrassed. — 7.  Quorum  in  fines,  into 
whose  soever  boundaries,  or  territory. — 8.  Et  domestlcis  copiis,  &c., 
and  enjoy  the  abundance  of  provisions  which  they  had  at  home. 

±.  98. — 1.  H<Bc  quoque  ratio,  this  consideration  also. — 2.  His 
persuaderi, — non  poterat,  these  could  not  be  persuaded;  See  Idioms, 
68,  1. — 3.  Nulla  certo  ordine,  in  no  fixed,  determined,  regular  order. 
4.  Cum  sibi  quisque,  &c.: — Since  each  one  sought  to  be  foremost  on 
the  route. — 5.  Jnsidias  verltus,  fearing  a  stratagem,  an  ambuscade, — 
qui  moraretur,  that  they  might  delay;  in  order  to  delay. — 6.  Cum 
(illi)  ab  extremo,  &c..  when  those  in  the  rear,  to  which  they  had 
come. — 7.  Tantam  maltitudtnem,  quantum,  &c.,  as  great  a  number 
as  the  length  of  the  day  allowed. 

Jr.  99. — 1.  Vacuum  ab  defensoribus,  em'pty,-an^roXecied'by  de- 
fenders.— 2.  Vineas  agere,  to  move  forward  the  vineee;  See  Index. — 
3.  jlggere  j ado,  a  monnd  being  thrown  up;  See  Index. — 4.  Turrl- 
busque  constitutis,  and  towers  being  erected  on  it;  See  Index,  Tur- 
ris. — 5.  Petentibus  Remis,  the  Remi  requesting  it;  at  the  request  of 
the  Remi. — 6.  Impetrant,  they  obtain  it;  viz:  that  they  should  be 
preserved. — 7.  Majores  natu,  greater  by  birth,  i.  e.  older,  more  ad- 
vanced in  age. — 8.  Passis  manibus,  with  extended  hands! — 9.  Facit 
verba;  literally,  makes  words,  i.  e.  speaks, — present  tense  for  the 
past;  §  44,  I.  3: — The  pupil  may  here  note  the  difference  between 
facer e  verba,  and  dare  verba, — the  first  means  "  to  make  a  speech;" 
the  last,  ''to  put  oif  with  words,"  i.  e.  "'to  deceive."  10.  In  fide, 
&c.,  under  the  protection,  and  in  the  friendship  of,  &c.,  i.  e.  had 
always  been  protected  and  befriended  by. 

X  .  100. — !•  Non  solum  Bellovdcos,  &c.,  that  not  only  the  Bel- 
lovaci  themselves,  but  also  the  ^dui  for  them,  entreated  that  he 
would  use. — 2.  Cum  qucereret,  when  he  enqiiired;  on  enquiry. — 
3.  Nihil  vini,  no  wine. — 4.  Increpitdre,  &c.,  that  they  inveighed 
against  and  accused. — 5.  Confirmdre,  asserted,  declared;  were  de- 
termined, it  was  their  fixed  resolution. — 6.  Conditionem,  offer,  pro- 
posal.— 7.  Expectdre,  were  expecting,  were  waiting. — 8.  Expec- 
tdri,  were  expected,  were  waited  for. 

P.  101. — 1.  Arrange:  Conjecisse,  mulieres  (et  homines)  qui 
viderentur  inutUes,  &c. — 2.  Edrum  dierum,  &c.,  the  custom  of  those 
days  in  respect  of  the  march: — Exercltus  is  governed  by  itineris. — 
3.  Neque  esse  quicquam,  &c.,  literally,  and  that  when  the  first  legion 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    II.  221 

had  come  into  the  camp,  &c.; — to  attack  this  legion  under  its  bag- 
gage would  be  a  matter  of  no  great  difficulty;  i.  e.  there  would  be 
no  great  difficulty  in  attacking,  &c,— 4.  Qua  (legione)  pulsd,  rell- 
quee  (legiones). — 5.  Ei  rei,  to  this  subject,  viz.  the  training  of  cav- 
alry.— 6.  Valeat  (efficere). — 7,  Incisis  atque  inflexis,  being  cut  in, 
and  bent  over. — 8.  Crebris  in  latitudinem,  &c.,  numerous  branches, 
and  briars,  and  thorns,  intervening  in  a  lateral  direction: — The 
young  trees  being  gashed  but  not  separated  from  the  root,  still  con- 
tinued to  grow,  and  when  bent  over,  their  branches  stood  out  in  a 
lateral  direction:  the  interstices  were  filled  with  briars  and  thorns, 
so  that  the  whole  formed  a  strong  and  impervious  barrier.— 9.  Loci — 
quern  locum,  of  the  place  which. 

X .  102. —  1.  Inflmd  (parte)  apertus,  &c.,  open,  clear  at  the 
bottom,  woody  towards  the  top. — 2.  Secundum  Jlumen,  along  the 
river, — Stationes  equttum,  troops  of  horse  on  guard. — 3.  AUter  se 
habebat  ac,  literally,  had  itself  otherwise  than;  i.  e.  was  different 
from  what. — 4.  Expeditas,  free  from  all  encumbrance,  i.  e.  without 
the  load  of  baggage  which  the  soldier  was  accustomed  to  carry, 
generally  amounting  in  all  to  sixty  pounds  besides  his  arms. — 
5.  Identidem,  from  time  to  tilne. — 6.  Qudm  quern  ad  finem,  i.  e,  ad 
finem  ad  quem,  to  the  limit  to  which;  as  far  as. — 7.  Quodtempus,  &c,, 
which  had  been  agreed  upon  as  the  time  of  joining  battle. — 8.  In 
mantbus,  close  at  hand. — 9.  Adverso  colle,  up  the  hill,  viz:  the  hill 
opposite  that  on  which  they  had  stood. 

P.  103. — 1.  Vexillum  proponendum,  the  standard  had  to  be 
displayed. — 2.  (li)  qui  processerant  paullo  longius  causa  pet endi  ag- 
geris,  (erant)  arcessendi,  those,  who  had  gone  to  a  greater  distance, 
in  order  to  fetch  materials  for  the  rampart  were  to  be  recalled. — 
3.  Successus  et  incursus,  the  near  approach  and  onset. — 4-  Erant 
subsidio,  were  of  advantage. — 5.  Singulisque  legion1,bus,  and  from 
their  respective  legions, — singulos  legdtos,  every  lieutenant. — 6.  Ni- 
hil, equivalent  to  non  or  nullum; — the  construction  is  quod  ad  nihil, 
did  not  now  at  all  wait  for  any  order  from  Caesar. — 7.  Per  se,  of 
themselves,  of  their  own  accord. — 8.  Videbantur  (illis),  seemed  to 
them  proper;  they  thought  best.— 9. Quam  in  partem,  into  whatever 
part. — 10.  Neu  perturb arentur  anlmo,  nor  be  agitated  in  their  minds. 
11.  Exiguitas,  the  shortness. 

P.  104. — 1.  Dejectus,  declivity. — 2.  NecessUas,  urgency. — 
3.  Prospectus  impediretur,  and  the  view  in  front  was  obstructed. — 
Neque  certa,  neither  with  certainty;  §  98,  Obs.  10*. — 4.  In  tantd  in- 
iquitdte  rervm,  in  s*.  ch  an  unequal  situation  of  affairs. — 5.  In  sinis- 


222  NOTES    ON    BOOK    II. 

tra  parte  acie,  on  the  left  part  of  the  line;  (acie)  an  old  form  of  the 
genitive  for  aciei;  §  17,  Exc.  If  acie  be  regarded  as  the  ablative,  it 
will  then  be  rendered  *'in  the  line  on  the  left  part." — 6.  Exanima- 
tos,  out  of  breath,  panting, — confectos,  spent,  exhausted. — 7.  Nam 
his  eapars  obvenerat,  that  party  had  fallen  to  their  lot;  had  been  ac- 
cidentally opposed  to  them. — 8.  Infugam  dederunt,  put  to  flight. — 
9.  Diversce  legiones,  other  legions,  different  from  those  mentioned 
before. — 10.  At  turn,  but  at  this  time. — 11.  Summum  locum  castro- 
rum,  literally,  the  top  of  the  place  of  the  camp,  i.  e.  the  summit  on 
which  the  camp  stood. — 12.  Levisque  armature  pedites,  foot  soldiers 
of  the  light  armor;  the  light  armed  infantry. — 13.  Quospulsos  (esse), 
who  had  been  routed. — 14.  Adversis  hostibus  occurrebant,  met  the 
enemy  in  front,  face  to  face. 

Jl  .  105. — 1.  Calories,  the  soldiers'  servants. — 2.  Decumand 
porta,  the  decuman  or  rear  gate  of  the  Roman  camp;— So  called  be- 
cause the  tenth  cohorts  were  situated  there. — 3.  Versdri,  were  ac- 
tively  engaged. — 4,  Manddbant  sese  prcecipites  fugce,  committed 
themselves  headlong  to  flight.— 5.  Diversos  dissipatosque,  scattered 
in  every  direction. — 6.  Urgeri,  were  overpowered. — 7.  Primopilo; 
See  Index,  Primopllus. — 8.  Confecto,  i.  e,  ita  confecto  ut. — ^9.  A 
f route. — in  front. — 10.  Subeuntes,  advancing. 

P.  106. — 1.  Signa  inferre,  to  carry  forward  the  standards; 
i.  e.  to  advance, — laxdre  manipulos,  to  extend  the  maniples. — 
2.  CujusadventUjhy  his  arriyail;  38. — 3.  Pro  se^msgwe,  they,  each  one 
for  himself;  i.  e.  to  the  best  of  his  ability. — 4.  Legiones  sese  conjun- 
gerent  et  inferrent  conversa  signa,  that  the  legions  (viz:  the  seventh 
and  twelfth,)  should  advance  with  the  standard  turned  two  ways; 
i.  e.  with  double  front. — 5.  Ne  aversi,  that  when  turned  away. — 
6.  Versaretur,  were. — 7.  Nihil  ad  celeritdtem,  &c.;  Arrange: /ece- 
runt  nihil  reliqui  esse  sibi,  they  caused  that  nothing  remaining  was 
to  them;  they  did  all  they  could  as  to  speed;  they  made  all  the  haste 
they  could. — 8.  Omnibus  in  locis,  &c.,  in  every  quarter  of  the  fight 
they  thrust  themselves  before  the  legionary  soldiers;  i.  e.  they  strove 
to  surpass  them  in  valor. — 9.   Frcestiterunt,  displayed. 

P.  107. — 1.  Qui  superessent,  those  who  survived. — 2.  Uti  ex 
tumulo,  as  if  from  an  eminence. — 3.  Redegerat,  had  rendered, — 
4.  Prope  ad  internecionem,  almost  to  extermination. — 5.  JEstuaria, 
&c.,  the  low  grounds  and  marshes. — 6.  Nihil  (esse)  impeditum,  that 
nothing  was  a  hindrance. — 7.  Quos  Gcesar,  &c.,  Csesar,  that  he 
might  appear  to  have  exercised  mercy  towards  the  unfortunate  and 
suppliants,  preserved  them,  &c.,  (39). — 8,   Altisaimas  rupes  despec- 


NOTES    ON   BOOK   H,  22(3 

tusque,  very  steep  rocks  and  commanding  views  of  the  country  be- 
low.— 9.  Non  amplius  (quiim  ad  mensuram)  ducentorum  pedum. 

P.  108. — 1.  lis  impedimentis ,  to  that  baggage. — 2.  Cum  (hi) 
alias  inferrent  bellum  (finitimis),  ali%s  defenderent  (bellum)  illdtum 
(sibi  a  finitimis),  when  they  at  one  time  made  war  on  their  neigh- 
bors, at  another  time  resisted  the  war  made  on  themselves  by  their 
neighbors;  when,  at  one  time  they  acted  on  the  offensive,  at  another 
time,    on   the  defensive. — 3.  Duodecim  pedum,   of  twelve    feet. — - 

4.  Vineis-f  See  Index. — 5.  Quo,  for  what  purpose? — 6.  Pra,  in  com- 
parison of. — 7.  Moveri  et  appropinqudre,  moving  and  approachingj 
See  Idioms,  89,  1. — 8.  ^d  hunc  modum,  after  this  manner. — 9.  TaU' 
tee  altitvdinis,  of  so  great  height. -^10.  Et  ex  propinquitdte,  he, 
and  fight  close  at  hand.— 11.  Unum  petere  ac  deprecdri,  that  they 
begged  and  earnestly  entreated  one  thing  (supply  eum)  from  him. 

Jr.  109. — 1.  Sibi pr (Est are,  that  it  was  better  for  them; — in  eum 
casum,  to  that  state. — 2.  Priisquam  aries,  &c.,  before  the  battering 
ram  should  touch  their  wall;  See  Index,  Aries. — 3.  In  Nerviis,  in 
the  case  of  the  Nervii. — 4.  31uri  aggerisque,  of  the  wall  (of  the 
town)    and  the  agger  of  the  Roman   camp;    See  Index,  .Agger. — 

5.  Sub  vesperum,  towards  evening. —  6.  Tertid  vigilid;  See  Appen- 
dix I.— 7.  IgnibuSf   by  sigaal  fires. 

P.  110. — 1.  Ita  acrtter  ut,  he,  as  fiercely  as  it  ought  to  have 
been  fought;  See  Idioms,  88,  7. — 2.  Ad  (used  adverbially)  about. — • 
3.  Sectidnem,  booty: — So  called,  because  divided  into  small  sections 
or  portions,  to  be  sold. — 4.  Capitum  numerus  millium.  &c.  the  num- 
ber  of    fifty-three   thousand   souls. — 5,  Ocednum,   the   Atlantic. — 

6.  Certior  f actus  est,  he  was  informed.— 7.  Dies  quindecim  supplied' 
tio  decreta  est,  a  thanksgiving  of  fifteen  days  was  decreed. 


NOTES   ON  BOOK  III. 

Page  111. — l.  Qmo  (Itlnere)  by  which  (road). — 2.  Cum  mag" 
nis  portoriis,  with  heavy  duties,  or  imposts^ — The  duty  levied  oh 
goods  in  harbor,  (inportu)  was  called  portorium.  This  term  was  after- 
wards extended,  as  here,  to  denote  the  duty  paid  for  liberty  to  carry 
goods  through  a  particular  country,  or  the  tax  paid  at  bridges.-— 
3.  Hie  vicus,  this  village, — 4,  Eum  locum,  this  part,  i.  e.  the  part 
of  the  village  in  which  the  cohorts  were  to  pass  the  winter. 


224  NOTES    ON    BOOK    11. 

P.  112. — 1.  Neque  earn,  plenisslmam,  and  that  not  very  full: 
See  Index,  Legio. — 2.  Singillatim,  individually, — 3.  Decurrerent, 
should  run  dow^n. — 4.  Ne  primum  quidem  posse,  &c.,  they  thought 
that  that  legion  could  not  withstand  even  the  first  onset: — With 
posse  supply  illam  legionem. — 5.  Accedthat,  to  this  was  added;  ano- 
ther reason  was. — 6.  Sibi  persudsum  habebat,  literally,  they  had  it 
persuaded  unto  themselves;  they  were  firmly  persuaded. — 7.  Neque 
satis provlsum  esset,  nor  had  it  been  sufficiently  provided;  nor  had  a 
sufficient  supply  been  provided. — 8.  Nihil  de  bellum  timendum,  he 
had  thought  that  nothing  was  to  be  feared,  i.  e.  that  he  had  nothing 
to  fear  concerning  the  war. — 9.  Neque  subsidio  ventri,  literally,  nei- 
ther could  it  be  come  to  them  with  assistance,  i.  e.  neither  could  as- 
sistance come  to  them. — 10.  Placuit  majori  parti,  it  pleased  the 
greater  part;  it  was  the  opinion  of  the  majority. 

P.  113. — 1.  Collocandis  aique  administrandis  (the  dative  of 
the  end  or  design,)  for  arranging  and  executing. — 2.  Gcesdque, 
and  javelins  (the  Gallic  iron  javelin). — 3.  Integris  viribus,  with 
fresh  strength. — 4.  Frustra,  in  vain,  without  eflfect — 5.  Sed  hoc 
(nostri)  superdri,  but  in  this  they  (our  men)  were  overcome,  were 
inferior. — 6.  Paucitdtem,  their  fewness. — 7.  Non  modo,  &,c..  an  op- 
portunity was  not  given  not  only  to  the  wearied.— 8.  Perducta  ad 
extremum  casum,  brought  to  an  extreme  case,  to  the  last  extremity. 
9.  Qicem  confectum  (esse),  &c.,  who,  we  have  said,  was  worn  out; 
See  Idioms;  96,  2,  &  94,  1st). — 10.  Convocdtis  centurionibus  celeri- 
ter  (per  eos)  milites,  &c.  the  centurions  being  called  together,  he 
quickly,  through  them,  directs  the  soldiers; — exciperent,  to  take  up. 
II.  Omnibus  portis,  from  all  the  gates  of  the  camp: — Of  these  there 
were  four;  See  Index,  Castra. 

P.  114. — 1.  Ex  (numtro)  honiinum  amplius  quam  milHbus  tri- 
ginta,  literally,  from  a  number  of  men  more  than  thirty  thousand; 
t.  e.  from  more  than  thirty  thousand  men. — 2,  (Parte)  plus  tertid 
parte,  &c.  literally,  a  part  more  than  the  third  part  being  slain.— 
3.  Fusis  &c.,  being  routed,  and  stripped  of  their  arms: — Here  exu- 
tis  agrees  with  copiis,  and  governs  armis  in  the  ablative,  by  §  126, 
R.  V. — 4.  Jtlio, — alius,  &c.,  with  one  view, — they  had  encountered 
things  very  different. — 5.  Ccesar  existimdret ,  de  omnibus  causis,  Csesar 
supposed,  from  all  reasons;  Caesar  had  every  reason  to  suppose.— 
6.  (Ad)  mare  Ocednum,  to  the  Atlantic  Ocean. — 7.  Prcefectos  tribu- 
nosque  militum;  See  Index,  Legio, 

P.  115. — 1.  Scientid  at  que  usu,  knowledge  and  experience. — 
2.  In  magna  impHu  maris  atque  aperto,  in  the  great  and  open  vio- 


JJOTES    ON    BOOK    II.  225 

lence,  forcCj  swell  (or  surge)  of  the  sea. — 3.  Ipsi,  (Veneti,)  they 
themselves,  (the  Veneti). — 1.  Consuerunt  uti,  are  accustomed  to 
use;  use  to  trade  in;  or  usually  trade  in. — 5.   Vectigdles,  tributary. 

6.  Ut  consilia  Gallorum,  since  the  designs  (resolves)  of  the  Gauls. 

7.  Omnis;  Accusative  plural  for  omnes,  the  subject  of  laturos  (esse), 

8.  Suos,  his  (Crassus')  countrymen;  §  28,Exc.; — stbi,  iothem,  (the 
Veneli)  the  main  subject  of  discourse. — 9.  Naves  longas,  ships  of 
war, — so  called  from  their  being  much  longer  than  the  ships  of  bur- 
den(nci;es  oner arice.)— ^10.  Remiges,  rowers, — institui,  to  be  raised. 

11.  Pro  magnitudine,  in  proportion  to  the  greatness. — 12.  Hoc  (fa- 
ciunt),  this  they  do. — 13.  Pedestria  itinera,  roads,  or  approaches  by 
foot;  i.  e.  by  land. 

P.  116. — 1.  Navigafionem,  access  by  sea. — 2.  Neque  nostras y 
&c. ,  and  they  were  confident  that  our  army  could  not,  &c.  Neque 
here  is  copulative,  and  means  "and  not." — 3.  Opiniunem,  the  ex- 
pectation.— 4.  Longe  aliarn  atque,  &c.  that  the  navigation  was  far 
other  in  a  confined  or  inland  sea  (such  as  the  Mediterranean,)  than, 
&c. — 5.  Hce  erant  difficultdtes,    such   were    the  difficulties,   &c. — 

6.  Injuries  retentorum  equituin  (the  genitive  passive;  §  106,  Ohs.  1.) 

7.  Rebellio,  a  renewal  of  hostilities, — defectio,  a  revolt,  a  refusal  of 
obedience. — S.  Ne  arbitrarentur ,  in  order  that  they  might  not  think; 
§  140,  1,  2d. — 9.  Idem  (facere)  sibi  licere,  that  to  do  the  same  thing 
would  be  permitted  to  them. — 10.  Novis  rebus  studere,  are  fond  of 
changes. — 11.  Natura  libertdti  stndere,  are  naturally  fond  of  liberty. 

12.  Conditionem  servitvtis,  a  state  of  slavery, 

P.  117. — 1.  ^uxilio  (sibi)  &c.,  who  were  said  to  have  been 
sent  for  by  the  Belgae  as  aid  to  themselves. — 2.  Qui  earn  manum,  &c., 
that  he  should  take  care  that  that  body  should  be  kept  apart. — 
3.  Situs,  the  situations. — 4.  In  extremis  lingfdis,  on  the  extreme 
points  or  tongues  of  land. — 5.  Ciim  ex  alto,  &c.,  when  the  tide  had 
flowed  in  from  the  deep;  i.  e.  when  it  was  full  tide,  or  high  water. 

6.  Minuente  (sese)  (Estu,  the  tide  ebbing,  or  when  the  tide  ebbs. — 

7.  Naves  in  vadis,  he. ,  the  ships  aground  on  the  shallow  places  would 
be  dashed  with  the  waves. — 8.  In  utraque  re,  in  either  case. — 9.  Jig- 
gere  ac  molibus,  by  a  mound  and  dams. — 10.  ^ppulso,  being  brought 
up. — 11.  Magnis  cestibua,  he,  on  account  of  the  great  tides,  and 
there  being  few  or  almost  no  harbors.  — 12.  Factee  armat^que  erant ^ 
were  built  and  equipped. — 13.  Aliquanto  planiores,  considerably 
flatter. 

P.  118.— 1.  ExcipcTP,  withstanl,  or  admit  of — 2.  J.d  quam- 
vis  vim.  for  calnrin;:;  any  violence  an  I  shock. — 3.  Pedalibus,  &c., 


226  NOTES    ON    BOOK    II. 

of  planks  a  foot  in  breadth. — 4.  DigUi  pollicis  crassitudine,  of  the 
thickness  of  one's  thumb;  i.  e.  an  inch  thick. — 5.  Pelles  pro  vilis, 
&c.,  for  sails  there  were  to  them  (i.  e.  they  had)  raw  hides  and  thin 
dressed  skins; — lini,  of  linen,  of  canvass. — 6.  Rcgi,  to  be  managed. 
7.  Cum  his  navibus,  &c.,  the  meeting  of  our  fleet  with  these  vessels 
was  of  such  a  nature,  that  the  former  had  the  advantage  in  swift- 
ness only,  and  the  sweep  of  the  oars. — 8.  Reliqua,  other  things. — 
9.  Neque  enim  his,  &c.  for  our  ships  could  not  hurt  them  with  the 
beak. — 10-  Copulis,  grappling  irons. — 11.  ScBvire,  to  blow  hard. — 
12,  Casus,  the  chances  or  dangers. — 13.  Neque  his  noceri posse,  and 
that  they  could  not  be  hurt. — 14.  ParatissXmce  atque,  &c,,  in  the 
best  order,  and  equipped  in  the  best  manner,  with  every  kind  of 
tackling. 

P.  119. — 1.  Bruto,  &c.,  nor  was  it  sufficiently  clear  to  Brutus. 
2.  Jlut  quam  rationem,  &c.,  or  what  mode  of  fighting  they  would 
adopt. — 3.  UtySothsLt. — 4.  GrariwsacciflJeren^,  fell  with  greater  force. 
6.  Falces  prceacutcB,  hooks  with  sharpened  edges  towards  the  points. 
6.  Muralium,  mural  hooks;  i.  e.  hooks  used  to  pull  down  the  walls 
in  a  siege;  or  their  defenders. — 7.  Comprehensi  adductique,  were 
grappled  and  pulled  towards  us. — 8.  Latere  posset,  could  escape  no- 
tice; could  pass  unnoticed,  or  unobserved. — 9.  Cum  singulas,  &c., 
when  two  or  three  of  our  ships  had  surrounded  each  one  of  the 
enemy's. — 10.  Transcendere  in  naves  hostium,  to  climb  over  into  the 
ships  of  the  enemy;  to  board  the  enemy's  ships. — 11.  Quo  ventus 
ferebat  (naves),  where,  to  M^hich  the  wind  carried  them  (the  ships); 
Singulas  nostri:  &c.,  our  men  having  pursued,  took  them  one  by  one. 

P.  120. — 1-  Gravioris  cetatis,  of  heavier,  i.  e.  of  more  ad- 
vanced age. — 2.  In  quos,  &c.,  on  these  Csesar  resolved  to  inflict 
severer  punishment,  on  this  account  that,  8cc. — 3.  Vendidit  reliquos 
sub  corona,  he  sold  the  rest  under  the  crown;  i.  e.  he  sold  the  rest 
for  slaves: — Prisoners  taken  in  war  wore  a  chaplet  (corona)  on 
their  heads  when  exposed  to  public  sale.  At  sales  by  auction  a 
spear  was  set  up;  hence,  vender e  sub  hasta,  to  sell  by  auction. — 
4.  Mque  his paucis  diebus,  and  within  these  few  days. — 5.  Perditd- 
rum  hominum,  of  ruined  men;  i.  g.  men  of  desperate  fortunes. — 
6.  Nonnihil  carparetur,  was  in  some  degree  carped  at,  railed  at: — 
Nihil  and  nonnlhil  in  such  sentences  may  be  considered  as  accusa- 
tives governed  by  quod  ad;  §  128,  Exc. 

P.  121. — 1-  -Eo  absente  qui  tenebat  summam  imperii,  he  being 
absent  who  held  the  supreme  command;  in  the  absence  of  the  com- 
mander in  chief. — 2.  Hdc  confirmata  opinione  timoris,  (the  enemy's) 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    Ilf.  227 

Opinion  of  his  fear  being  confirmed. — 3.  Proponit,  he  lays  before 
Urern,  tells  them  of. — 4.  Neque  longius  abesse,  &c.;  and  that  it  was 
not  farther  off,  but  that  on  the  next  night;  i.  e.  at  no  greater  dis- 
tance of  time  than  the  next  night. — 5.  Ad  castra  iri  oportere,  lite- 
rally, that  it  ought  to  be  gone  to  the  camp;  See  Idioms,  67.-^ 
6.  Perfagce  confirmatio,  the  assertion  of  the  deserter. — 7.  Quibus, 
with  which,  i.  e.  that  with  these. — 8.  Quam.  minimum  spatii,  as  little 
space  of  time  as  possible. — 9,  Exanimdti,  out  of  breath. 

P.  122. — 1.  Intigrisviribus,  with,  strength  still  fresh. — 2.  Sa- 
blnus  (factus  est  certior)  de,  &c. — 3.  Miiilme  resistens,  by  no  means 
firm. — 4.  Ex  tertid  parte,  as  the  third  part, — an  unusual  expression, 
and  probably  the  text  is  incorrect. — 5.  Non  mediocrem,  &c.,  that 
more  than  ordinary  diligence  must  be  used  by  him. — 6.  Quo  plurl- 
mum  valebant,  in  which  they  were  very  powerful. 

P.  123. — 1.  Cujus  rei,  &c.,  in  which  art  the  Aquitani  are  by 
far  the  most  expert. — 2.  ^rarice  sectum  copper  mines. — 3.  Nihil 
his  rebus  profici  posse,  that  they  could  be  profited  nothing  by  these 
things. — 4.  Quorum  hac  est  conditio,  the  condition  of  whom  (i.  e.  of 
whose  association)  is  this. — 5.  Sibi  mortem  consciscant,  or  make 
away  with  themselves. — 6.  Barbdri,  the  barbarians  (referring  to 
the  Vocates  and  Tarusates). — 7.  Et  natura  loci  et  manu,  both  by 
natural  situation  and  by  art. 

P.  124. — 1-  Citerioris  Hispanice;  See  Index. — 2.  Loca  capere, 
to  select  proper  ground. — 3.  Facile,  easily;  i.  e.  with  safety. — 
4.  In  dies,  every  day;  literally,  from  day  to  day. — 5.  Hdc  re  deldta 
ad  consilium,  this  matter  or  plan  being  laid  before  a  council  (of 
war). — 6.  Senttrc  idem,  thought  the  same  thing;  were  of  the  same 
opinion,  viz:  with  himself. — 7.  Dupllci  acie,  a  double  line: — The 
Romans  usually  drew  up  their  army  in  three  lines;  on  the  present 
occasion  only  two  were  formed,  probably  on  account  of  their  being 
inferior  in  number  to  the  enemy. — 8.  Auxiliis,  &c.,  the  aux- 
iliaries being  placed  in  the  centre, — their  usual  place  was  on  the 
wings. — 9.  Cum  sua  cunctatione,  &c..  when  the  enemy  had  by  their 
own  delay,  and  the  opinion  which  was  now  entertained  of  their  cow- 
ardice, made  our  soldiers  the  more  eager  for  battle. 

P.  125. — 1.  Constanter  et  non  tim'de,  steadily  and  boldly. 
2.  Decumdnd  porta,  at  the  decuman,  or  rear  gate;  See  Index,  C&S' 
tra. — 3.  Intrltce,  not  worn  out,  not  fatigued. — 4.  LongiOre  itinBre, 
by  a  longer  route  than  usual. — 5.  Posset  plane  videri  ab  iis,  it  could 
be  distinctly  seen  by  them. — 6.  Jntendtrunt,  strove. 


228  NOTES    ON    BOOK    IV. 

X  .  126. — 1.  Multd  node,  late  at  night, — or  multd  node  addj 
much  of  the  night  being  spent. — 2.  Supererant ,  (supply  soli,  evi- 
dently implied, — hence  the  subjunctive  following  qui;  §  141,  R.  V.) 
alone  remained,— 3.  Quilonge  alia  ratione  ac,  &c.,  and  they  resolv- 
ed to  prosecute  the  vs^ar  in  a  very  different  manner  from  the  rest  of 
the  Gauls. — 4.  Continentesque  silvas,  &c.,  and  because  they  had 
extensive,  uninterrupted  forests: — Before  continenies  supply  quod. 
o.  Longius,  too  far. — 6.  Iheririibus,  &,c.,  on  the  soldiers  unarmed. — 
7.  Materiam,  limber. 

Jr.  127. — 1.  Conversant,  &c.,  turned  towards,  facing,  the  ene- 
my.— 2.  Confedo,  being  cleared. — 3.  Extrejna,  the  last  of  tfec  bag- 
gage. — 4.  Sub  pelllbus,  literally,  under  skins;  i.  e.  in  their  tents: — 
The  tents  of  the  Roman  soldiers  were  covered  with  skins.  It  does 
not  appear  that  they  ever  used  canvass  for  that  purpose. — 5.  Qucz 
proxime,  &c.,  which  had  made  war  upon  him  last. 


NOTES  ON  BOOK  IV. 

P.  128. — 1.  Ea  hi&me,  &c..  the  winter  which  followed;  the 
next  or  following  winter. — 2.  Cneio  Pompeio,  &c.: — Before  Christ, 
55,  A.  U.  C.  699. — 3.  Quo  Rhenus,  &c.  where  the  Rhine  flows  into 
it:  near  the  mouth  of  the  Rhine. — 4.  Qui  domi  manserint,  since  or 
because  they  remain  at  home. — 5.  Nee  ratio  atque  usus  belli  inter' 
mittltur,  nor  are  the  art  and  practice  of  war  disused,  discontinued, 
forgotten. — 6.  Maximam  partem,  for  the  most  part;  See  Ref. — 
7.  Nullo  officio,  &c.,  they  are  trained  by  no  duty  or  discipline, 

Jl  .  129. — 1,  Ut  quce  bello  ceperint;  Arrange:  vt  habeant  (eos) 
quibus  vendant  (ea)  quee  ceperint  bello. — 2.  Jumentis  importdtis,  im- 
ported cattle. — 3,  Quotididnd  exercitatione  hcec  prava  atque  defor- 
mia  (jumenta)  quce  sunt  nata  apud  eos,  ut  (haec  juraenta)  sint  summi 
laboris: — Ut.  &c.  that  they,  (these  beasts)  are  capable  of  the  great- 
est labor,  i.  e.  of  enduring  the  greatest  labor. — 4,  Audent  adlre  ad 
quemvis  numerum,  they  dare  to  go  to  any  number;  they  have  courage 
to  advance  against,  to  attack,  any  number, — 5.  Publlce,  to  the  na- 
tion.— 6.  Significdri,  that  proof  is  given. — 7,  Vacdre,  to  be  empty, 
desolate,  uninhabited, — 8.  Ad  alteram  partem,  on  the  other  side,— 
9.  Ut  est  captus  Germanorum,  as  the  state  of  the  Germans  is;  i.  e  — 


\ 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    IV.  229 

considering  the  condition  of  the  Germans. — 10,  AmplitudHnem  gra- 
vitatemque  civitatis,  the  extent  and  populousness  of  their  state  (viz: 
the  Ubii. 

P.  130. — 1.  In  eddem  causa,  in  a  similar  case. — 2.  (In  regio- 
nes)  quas  regiones,  to  the  regions  which. — 3.  Clam,  privately,  unob- 
served.— 4.  Tridui  viam,  a  journey  of  three  days. — 5.  Reliquam 
partem  hUmis,  the  remaining  part  of  the  winterj  the  rest  of  the 
winter; — alutrunt,  maintained,  supported. — 6.  Injirmitdtem,  the 
fickleness. — 7.  Nihil  his  committendum  (esse),  that  nothing  should 
be  trusted  to  them. — 8,  Est  autem  hoc,  &c.,  for  this  belongs  to  Gal- 
lic custom;  this  is  one  of  the  customs  of  the  Gauls. 

P.  131. — 1-  De  summis  rebus,  &c.,  they  enter  into  designs, 
concert  measures,  respecting  the  most  important  affairs. — 2.  E  ves- 
tigia, literally,  out  of  the  footstep;  i.  e.  speedily,  instantly. — 3.  Cwn 
incertis  rumorlhus  serviant,  since  they  are  mere  slaves  to  uncertain 
rumors. — 4.  Ne  graviori  hello  occurreret,  that  he  might  not  meet 
with  a  more  formidable  war  (viz:  than  he  expected). — 5.  Facta 
(esse),  had  been  done  already. — 6.  Dissimulanda  sibi,  should  be 
concealed  by  him. — 7.  Resist^re  (iis),  to  resist  them  and  not  to  sue 
for  peace. — 8.  Suam  gratiam,  their  (the  Germans')  favor. — Sibi,  to 
them,  the  Germans. — 9.  Eos  (agros)  quos,  those  lands  which;  i.  e. 
such  lands  as;  See  Ref.— 10.  Concedere,  yielded,  acknowledged 
themselves  inferior  to. — 11.  In  terris,  upon  the  earth. 

Jr.  132. — 1.  Arrange:  C<Esar  respondit  ad  hcec,  quce  visum  est 
(ei  respondere). — 2.  Exitus,  the  conclusion. — 3,  Verum,  just,  rea- 
sonable, proper,  right: — Verus  has  this  sense  chiefly  when  joined  to 
the  verb  esse;  as  verum  est,  it  is  proper. — 4.  Neque  ullos  in  Gallia, 
&c.,  nor  were  there  any  lands  vacant  in  Gaul. — 5.  Et  parte,  &c.: — 
This  is  the  reading  of  the  Bipont  edition.  It  is  adopted  by  Anthon, 
and  is  manifestly  better  than  the  common  text. — 6.  In  plures  diffluit 
partes,  divides  into  several  branches. — 7.  Multis  capitibus,  by  many 
heads,  or  mouths. 

P.  133. — 1.  Sibi  jurejurando,  &c.  should  give  them  security 
by  an  oath. — 2.  Eodem  illo  pertinere,  tended  to  the  same  end: — Ed- 
dem and  illo,  here  used  adverbially,  are  properly  old  forms  of  the 
dative  from  idem  and  ille: — 3.  Sustinerent,  should  stand  their  ground. 

P.  134. — 1.  Amplissimo  gen^re  natus,  descended  from  a  very 
illustrious  family. — 2.  Intercluso,  intercepted. — 3.  Se  obtulit,  pre- 
sented himself;  rushed  against. — 4.  Summce  dementice  esse  judicdbat, 
he  judged  it  to  be  the  greatest  folly;  literally,  to  belong  to,  or  to  be 

20 


230  NOTES    ON    BOOK    IV. 

the  part  of,  the  greatest  folly. — 5.  iVie  quern  diem,  &c.,  not  to  If  / 
day  pass  without  a  battle. — 6.  Omnibus  principlhus,  &c.,  all  tl  ^r 
leading  men  and  elders  being  brought  alongj  literally,  being  taiien 
unto  them. — 7.  Sui  purgandi,  for  the  sake  of  clearing,  excusing 
themselves. — 8.  Contra  atque,  otherwise  than;  contrary  to  what 
had  been  said. — 9.  Quos  sibi  Ccesar,  &c.  Caesar  rejoicing  that  these 
had  been  cast  in  his  way. 

P.  135. — !•  Perturbantur,  &c.,  are  thrown  into  confusion,  so 
that  they  were  at  a  loss  whether  it  would  be  best,  &c. — 2.  Signifi' 
caretur,  was  discovered,  was  evident. — 3.  PrisUni  diei,  of  the  day 
before; — for  pridie. — 4.  Clamore,  a  shout  or  noise,  (either  of  the 
Roman  cavalry  attacking  those  with  whom  they  came  up  in  the 
rear, — or  the  wailing  of  those  attacked. — 5.  jid  confluent  em,  at  the 
confluence.— 6.  Reliqud  fugd  desperdta,  despairing  of  making  good 
their  flight  any  farther.— 7.  Ex  tanti  belli  timore,  &c.,  from  the 
alarm  of  so  great  a  war,  since  the  number  of  the  enemy  had  been 
about  four  hundred  and  thirty  thousand: — Before  capitum,  supply 
ad  numerum.—S.  Discedendi  potestdtem,  the  liberty  of  departing. 

P.  136. — 1.  Suis  quoque  rebus  eos  timere  voluit,  wished  they 
should  be  alarmed  for  their  own  possessions. — 2.  Et  posse  et  andere, 
had  both  the  power  and  the  courage. — 3.  Jlccessit  etiam,  it  was 
added  also;  i.  e.  another  reason  was. — 4.  Cur  sui  quicquam,  &c.. 
why  should  he  (Csesar)  demand  that  any  command  or  authority 
should  belong  to  him  beyond  the  Rhine? — 5.  Occupationibus  reipub- 
licce,  by  the  business  of  the  republic— 6.  Neque  sui  neque  Populi 
Romdni,  and  thought  that  it  became  neither  his  own  dignity  nor  that 
of  the  Roman  people. — 7.  Proponebdtur,  was  placed  before  him, 
was  manifest. 

P.  139. — 1-  Insfifmf,  &c.,  he  determined  on  this  plan  of  a 
bridge. — 2.  He  joined  together  at  the  distance  of  two  feet,  tigna 
bina,  beams,  or  piles,  two  by  two,  (or  in  pairs,)  sharpened  a  little  at 
the  lower  end,  and  measured,  (or  proportioned)  to  the  depth  of  the 
river. — 3.  H(BC  cum  machinationibus,  &c.,  when  he  had  fastened 
these  being  let  down  into  the  river  by  machines,  and  had  driven 
them  down  with  rammers  (fistucis). — 4.  Non  sublic(2,  &c.,  not  per- 
pendicularly after  the  manner  of  a  stake,  but  bending  forward  and 
sloping  (downward,  or  down  the  stream). — 5.  Us  item  contraria, 
&c.,  likewise  opposite  to  these,  at  the  distance  of  forty  feet  down 
the  river,  (a&  inferiore  parte  fluminis,)  he  placed  two  others  joined 
in  the  same  manner,  but  turned  (up  the  stream)  against  the  force 
and  current  of  the  river.— 6.  Hac  utraque  ins^per,  &c.,  both  these 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    IV.  23t 

(viz:  the  pair  above  and  the  pair  below,)  were  kept  apart  (or  from 
falling  towards  each  other,)  by  beams  let  in  from  above,  two  feet 
thick,  being  as  much  as  the  joining  of  these  piles  was  apart,  (i.  e. 
as  the  piles,  joined  by  the  braces,  were  apart,) — each  having  two 
braces,  one  on  each  side  near  the  end. — l.^uihus  disclusis,  &c., 
these  (pairs)  being  kept  apart,  and  (at  the  same  time,)  bound  to- 
gether in  the  contrary  direction. — 8.  Ea  rerum  natura,  such  the  na- 
ture of  the  materials. — ^9.  Quo  major  vis,  &c.,  literally,  by  how 
much  a  greater  force  of  water  urged  itself  on;  i.  e.  that  the  more 
the  force  of  the  current  pressed  on,  the  more  closely  were  they  held 
bound  together. — 10.  Hcec  (tigna,  i.  e.  beams  of  two  feet  square, 
reachiag  from  one  pair  of  piles  to  the  other  below  it,)  direcia  mate- 
rie,  &c.,  were  fastened  together  with  timbers  laid  lengthwise  (di- 
recta)  of  the  bridge;  i.  e.  from  beam  to  beam. — 11.  Longuriis,  &c., 
and  covered  over  with  long  poles  and  hurdles. — 12.  jIc  nihilo  secius, 
&c.,  and  besides  all  this,  piles  were  driven  in  obliquely  at  the  lower 
part  of  the  stream. — 13.  Pro  pariete,  for  a  buttress,  or  support. — 
14.  Et  alice  item,  and  likewise  others. — 15.  Dejiciendi  operis 
(causa),  for  the  sake  of  throwing  down  (destroying)  the  work, — the 
bridge. — 16.  (Ex)  Quibus  materia,  &c.,  after  the  days  in  which,  or, 
after  that  the  materials  had  been  begun  to  be  brought  together; — 
Quibus,  i.  e.  ex  diebus  quibus,  is  here  used  instead  of  the  more  com- 
mon expression,  postquam,  or  ex  (tempore)  quo; — See  also  B.  III. 
Chap.  23d.  and  Gr.  §  131,  Obs.  3d. — 17.  jld  utramque  partem,  at 
each  end. 

P.  140. — 1  lis  hortantlbus,  by  the  advice  of  those. — 2.  In 
solitudinem  ac  silvas  abdiderant,  had  gone  into  the  deserts  and  forests 
to  conceal  themselves; — This  rendering  gives  the  force  of  the  accu- 
cative  after  in,  which  is  evidently  a  better  reading  than  in  solitudl- 
ne,  &c.,  which  excludes  the  idea  of  going  to; — So  also,  in  silvas  de- 
poneret,  below.^ — 3.  Hunc  esse  delectum,  that  this  was  selected  as 
nearly  the  middle,  or  centre. — 4.  Ulcisceretur,  that  he  might  pun- 
ish.— 5.  Satis  et  ad  laudem  et  ad  utilitdtem  profectum,  that  enough 
had  been  done,  both  for  his  honor  and  for  utility,  (profectum  is  from 
proficio,  and  means  the  same  as  perfectum). — 6.  Matures,  early. — 
7.  Inde,  thence,  i.  e.  from  Britain. 

P.  141. — 1.  TemSre,  rashly,  without  good  reason. — 2.  Neque 
Us  ipsis  quicquam  notum  est,  nor  is  any  thing  known  even  by  them. 
3.  Quem  usum  belli,  &c.,  what  experience  they  had  in  war,  or  what 
customs  they  followed. — 4.  In  ed  sententid,  in  that  mind,  resolution. 
5.  Horteturque,  and  that  he  should  urge  them. — 6.  Fidem  sequantur, 


I 


232  NOTES    ON   BOOK   IV. 

to  embrace  the  alliance  j  literally,  should  follow  the  faith. — 7.  Quaiu 
turn  eifacultatis,  &c.,  as  far  as  opportunity  could  be  given;  literally, 
with  so  much  of  opportunity  as,  &c.;  See  Idioms,  46,  1. — 8.  Qui, 
since  he. 

Jr.   142. — 1.    -D«  superioris,   &c.,   for  their  past  conduct.— 

2.  Has  tantuldrum,  &c.,  these  engagements  in  such  trifling  affairs. 

3.  (Tot)  navibus  onerariis,  so  many  ships  of  burden,  &c., — quot,  asj 
See  Index,  Naves.— 4.  Tertid  fere  vigilid,  near  the  third  watch,  or 
midnight. — 5.  Solvit  (naves),  looses  his  ships,  sets  sail. — 6.  Con- 
acendere  naves,  to  go  on  board;  to  embark. — 7.  Hora  quartd,  the 
fourth  hour,  i.  e.  10  o'clock,  A.  M.j  See  Gr.  App.  1.^^—8.  Exposi- 
tas,  drawn  out,  displayed. 

Jr.  143. — 1.  ^deo  angustis,  so  steep. — 2.  ^d  egrediendum,  for 
disembarking,  for  landing. — 3.  ^d  nonam  horam,  till  the  ninth  hour, 
i.  e.  3  o'clock  P.  M. — 4.  Monuitque,  &c.,  and  warned  them  that  all 
things  should  be  done  at  a  beck,  and  in  a  moment,  as  the  principles, 
&c. — 5.  Et  essedariis.  and  the  essedarii,  i.  e.  those  who  fought  from 
the  essedum,  or  two  wheeled  chariot. — 6.  Prohibebant,  attempted 
to  hinder;  See  §  44.  II.  2. — 7.  Militibus — desiliendum,  &c.  the  sol- 
diers had  to  leap  down  from  the  ships. — 8.  Omnibus  membris  expe- 
diti,  having  the  free  use  of  all  their  limbs. — 9.  Insuefactos,  accus- 
tomed  to  such  exercise. — 10.  Quarum  et  species,  both  the  appearance 
of  which. 

X  .  144. — 1.  Remis  incitdri,  to  be  pushed  on,  rowed  briskly 
forward,  with  the  oars, — 2.  Tormentis,  engines  (for  throwing  heavy 
darts  or  stones,  namely,  the  balista  and  catapulta). — 3.  Qucb  res, 
this  expedient. — 4.  ^c  paulum  modo,  &c.  and  retreated  only  a  little, 
a  very  little. — 5.  Qui  (he),  who. — 6.  Ea  res,  that  thing  (viz:  which 
he  was  about  to  do). — 7.  Magnd  voce,  with  a  loud  voice. — 8.  Ex 
navi  se  projecit,  he  threw  himself  out  of  the  ship,  overboard. — 
9.  Singuldres,  one  by  one,  one  after  another. — 10.  Quod  cum  ant- 
mum,  vertisset,  i.  e.  Ciim  vertisset  antmum  ad  quod. — 11.  Scaphas  Ion- 
gdrum  navium,  the  boats  belonging  to  the  vessels  of  war. — 12.  Specu- 
laioria  navigia,  spy  vessels. 

P.  145. — 1.  Cwrswm  fenere,  hold  on  their  course; — atqueinsxi- 
lam  capere,  and  reach  the  island. — 2.  Supra,  viz:  Ch.  21. — 3.  Modo 
oratoris,  in  the  character  of  an  ambassador. — 4.  Culpam  contuU- 
runt,  laid  the  blame. — 5.  In  continentem,  to  the  continent,  i.e.  to 
Gaul — 6.  Imprudentia,  their  indiscretion.— 7.  Arccessitam  (esse), 
had  been  sent  for. — 8.  Post  diem  quartum,  after  the  fourth  day  i.  e., 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    IV.  233 

on  the  fourth  day  after. — 9.  SuprA;  See  Ch.  23, — sustuUrant,  had 
tjiken  on  board. — 10.  Quor  cum  appropinquarent ,  and  when  they 
were  drawing  near. — 11.  Quce  est  propius  solis  occdsuvi,  which  is 
more  to  the  west. — 12.  Quce,  these. — 13.  Necessario  adversd  nocte  in 
altumprovectcB,  from  necessity,  being  carried  out  to  sea  in  an  unfa- 
vorable, stormy,  night. 

P.  146. — 1.  (Dies)  qui  dies,  a  day  which  (viz:  the  day  of  the 
full  moon. — 2.  Nostris  id  incogmtum  erat,  to  our  men  this  (viz:  the 
great  rising  of  the  tide,)  was  unknown: — The  phenomena  of  the 
tides  were  but  little  known  to  the  Romans,  as  the  tides  in  the  Medi- 
terranean with  which  they  were  most  familiar,  are  scarcely  observ- 
able. — 3.  Quce  deligdtce  erant  ad  anchoras,  which  had  been  tied  to 
the  anchors;  which  had  been  riding  at  anchor. — 4.  Afflictdhat,  dash- 
ed violently  against;  drove  from  their  moorings. — 5.  Quod  omnibus 
constdbat.  because  it  was  evident  to  all. — 6.  His  in  locis,  in  these 
places  (viz:  in  Britain). — 7,  Rem  producere,  to  prolong  the  war. — 

8.  Ex  eventu  navium.  from  what  happened  to,  from  the  disaster  of, 
the  ships  (the  genitive  passive).— 9.  Et  ex  eo  quod.  &c.,  and  from 
this,  because  they  had  intermitted:  i.  e.  and  from  their  haying 
intermitted. 

P.  147. — 1.  Jd  omnes  casus,  fox  every  emergency;  against  all 
contingencies. — 2.  Retiquis  ut  navigdri,  that  it  could  be  navigated 
with  the  rest. — 3-  Dum  ea  geruntur,  whilst  these  things  are  carrying 
on,  doing;  during  these  transactions. — 4,  In  statione,  on  guard. — 
6.  Quam  consuetudo  ferret,  than  custom  brought;  i.  e.  than  was  usual. 
6.  In  staiion\bus,  on  guard. — 7.  In  statione  succedere,  to  succeed  on 
guard. — 8.  Et,  conferta  legione  tela,  &c.,  and  that  the  legion  being 
crowded  together,  weapons  were  hurled  upon  it  from  all  quarters. 

9.  Quod,  because,  inasmuch  as. — 10.  Incertis  ordinibus,  on  account 
of  not  knowing  their  ranks,  (They  had  been  scattered  about,  reap- 
ing, and  being  attacked  while  thus  employed,  they  could  not  find 
their  ranks. — 11.  Genus  hoc  est,  &c.,  the  manner  of  fighting  from 
the  chariots  was  this. — 12.  Ipso  terrdre  equorum,  by  the  very  terror 
occasioned  to  the  horses  (the  genitive  passive);  and  the  noise,  ro- 
tdrum,  of  the  wheels  (the  genitive  active);  §  106,  Obs.  1. 

P.  148. — 1.  Insinuaverint ,  when  they  have  wrought  them- 
selves in.— 2.  AurigcE,  the  charioteers,  or  drivers:— Each  chariot 
contained  a  driver  called  aurlga,  and  one  who  fought,  called  esse- 
darius. — 3.  Atque  ita  curru  se  collocant,  and  place  themselves  with 
the  chariot  in  such  a  situation.— 4.  Prcestant  mobilitdtcm  equltum, 
&c.,  they  perform,  unite  the  swiftness  of  cavalry  and  the  steadiness 


234  NOTES    ON    BOOK   V. 

of  infantry. — 5.  Ac  efficiunt  tantum.,  and  they  acquire  such  dexteri- 
ty. — 6.  Incitdtos  equas  sustinere,  to  rein  in  their  horses  when  at  full 
speed. — 7.  Et  brevi  (tempore),  and  in  a  moment. — 8.  Coniinuos 
plures  dies,  many  days  in  succession. — 9.  Suis  (civTbus),  to  their 
own  countrymen. — 10.  Quanta  facultas,  &c.,  how  favorable  an  op- 
portunity was  presented  of  getting  booty,  and  of  regaining  their 
independence  forever. 

P.  149.— 1.  Ante  dictum  est,  \iz:  Ch.  21,  &  27.— 2.  Omnibus 
affiictis  incensisque  longe  lateque,  having  destroyed  and  burned  every 
thing  far  and  wide;  See  Idioms,  104,  1. — 3.  Die  cequinoctii,  the 
equinox. — 4.  Hiemi  navigationem  subjiciendum,  that  his  voyage 
ought  to  be  exposed  to  a  storm  (viz:  the  equinoctial  storm). — 
5.  Eosdem  quos  rellquce  partus  capere,  to  make  the  same  harbor 
which  the  rest  made. — 6.  Quibus  ex  navibus ,&ic. ,  hQ.d.  been  landed 
from  these  ships- — 7.  Non  ita  magna,  with  not  so  great,  t.  e.  with 
no  very  great  number. — 8.  Si  nallent,  if  they  did  not  wish. — 9.  Or- 
be  facta,  forming  themselves  into  a  circle;  See  above.  Note  2. — 
10.  Verterunt  terga,  turned  their  backs;  fled. 

P.  150. — 1-  In  densisslmas  silvas  abdid^rant,  had  gone  into 
the  thickest  parts  of  the  forests  to  hide  themselves;  See  Note  2, 
page  140. 


NOTES   ON   BOOK  V. 

P.   151.— 1.  Lucia  Domitio,  i.  e.  A.  U.  C  ,  700,;  B.  C.  54.— 

2.  Quamplurimas  passent,  &c.,  that  as  many  new  ships  as  possible 
should  be  built,  and  old  ones  repaired.— 3.  Ad  celeritatem  anerandi, 
&c.,  for  despatch  of  lading  and  drawing  them  on  shore,  he  builds 
them  a  little  lower  than  those  which,  &c.— 4.  Nostra  mari,  in  our 
sea,  viz:  the  Mediterranean.— 5.  Actuarias,  light,  easily  driven; 
See  Index,  Naves. — 6.  Adjuvat  multim,  contributes  much,— 7.  Ad 
armandas,  for  equipping.— 8.  Omnibus  ratianibus.  in  every  proper 
way. 

P.  152.— 1-  Qui  litem  cestiment,  to  estimate  the  damage  (Idi- 
oms,  83,  2,)  and  fix  the  compensation.— 2.  Canventibus,  the  assizes. 

3.  Instructas,  got  ready  finished.— 4.  Neque  multum  abesset,  &c., 
nor  was  much  wanting  but  that  they  could  be  launched  in  a  few 


NOTES    ON   BOOK   V.  295 

days;  i.  e.  there  was  so  little  to  do  that  they  could,  &c. — 5.  Trans- 
missum,  &c.,  the  passage  across  into  Britain  was  the  most  conven* 
ient,  being  a  passage  of  about  thirty  miles. — 6.  Expeditis,  unincum* 
bered  with  baggage. — 7.  Alter,  the  one  (viz:  Cingetorix). — 8.  In 
silvam,  Sec,  having  gone  and  concealed  themselves  in  the  forest  of 
Arduenna;  See  Note  2,  p,  240. 

P.  153. — 1.  Civiidti  consuUre,  take  measures  for  the  state, 
for  the  common  good. — 2.  Laberetur,  should  fall  off,  revolt.— 
3.  Permissum  (esse)  would  give  up. — 4.  Suam  gratiam,  that  his  in- 
fluence.— 5.  Exarsit  multo  gravius  hoc  dolore,  he  was  much  more 
exasperated  at  this  affront. — 6.  Non  potuisse  ienere  cur  sum,  could 
not  keep  their  course;  could  not  proceed  on  their  voyage. 

P,  154. — 1-  Ant ea  dictum;  B.  I.  Ch.  3. — 2.  Cupidum  novdrum 
rerum,  fond  of  changes,  of  insurrections,  of  a  revolution  in  the 
state. — 3.  Id  factum,  this  fact. — 4.  Petere  contendit,  endeavored  to 
obtain, — religionibus,  religious  obligations. — 5.  Non  sine  causa  fieri, 
that  it  was  not  done  without  some  secret  motive;  that  Gaul  was 
stripped  of  all  her  nobility. — 6.  Fidem  reliquis  interponere,  that  he 
pledged  his  word  to  the  rest. — 7.  Quod  esse  ex  usu,  &c.,  whatever 
they  should  understand  to  be  for  the  interest  of  Gaul. — 8.  Quod 
tantum  dignitatis,  because  he  had  always  shewn  so  much  respect. — 
9.  Longius  progrSdi,  was  going  too  far. — 10.  Prospiciendum,  that  he 
ought  to  take  care. 

P.  155. — 1.  Ne  quid  sibi,  &c.  lest  he  (Dumnorix)  should  not 
be  able,  have  it  in  his  power,  to  do  any  injury  to  him  and  the  state. 
2.  Corus,  the  northwest  wind. — 3.  (Ut)  cognosceret,  that  he  should 
find  out.— 4.  Omnium  animis  impedltis,  the  jninds  of  all  being  en- 
gaged.— 5.  Hunc pro  sano,  that  he,  as  a  man  in  his  senses. — 6.  Ille 
enim,  but,  or  nevertheless  he. — 7.  Consiliumque  pro  tempore,  &c., 
and  that  he  might  take  measures,  (form  his  plans,)  according  to 
time  and  circumstances. — 8.  Pari  numero  equUum  quern,  &c.  with  a 
like  number  of  cavalry  which;  i.  e.  with  a  number  of  cavalry  equal 
to  that  which  he  left. — 9.  Longius  deldtus  sestu,  being  carried  down 
by  the  tide  farther  than  usual. — 10.  Secutus,  taking  advantage  of. 

P.   156. — ^l*   Virtus,  the  valor,  i.  e.  the  efforts,  the  exertions, 

2.  Vectoriisque  navigiis,  in  transports  and  heavy  laden  vessels. — 

3,  Accessum  est  (ab  illis)  ad,  they  (the  Romans)  reached,  arrived 
at. — 4.  Cum  annotlnis,  with  the  ships  of  the  previous  year. — 
6.  Veritus  navlbus,  fearing  for  the  ships, — instead  of  de  navibus. — 
6.  In  littore  molli  atque  aperto,  on   a  smooth   and  open  shore. — 


236  NOTES    ON   BOOK    V. 

7.  PrcEclusi,  blocked  up.— 8.  Testudine  facta,  et  aggere,  &c.,  a  tes- 
tudo  being  erected  and  a  mound  thrown  up  against  their  fortifi- 
cations. 

Jt  .  157. — 1.  Tripartltb,  in  three  divisions, — milUes,  the  foot 
soldiers,  the  infantry. — 2.  Superiore  node,  in  the  former  night.— 
3.  Affiictas  atque,  &c. — had  been  dashed  against  each  other,  and 
driven  on  shore. — 4.  SubsisUrent,  could  hold  out.— 5.  Ex  eo  concur- 
su,  from  that  rencounter  of  the  ships j  from  the  ships  running  foul 
of  one  another, — 6.  Incommodum,  injury,  damage. — 7.  Coram, 
openly,  with  his  own  eyes.— 8.  Mes,  a  work.— 9.  Subduct,  to  be 
drawn  on  shore.— 10.  Summa  imperii,  &c.  the  chief  command  and 
administration  of  the  war. — 11.  Superiore  tempore,  at  a  former 
period. 

jr.  158. — 1.  Quos  natos,  &c.,  -'who,  they  say  it  was  handed 
down  by  tradition,  were  born  on  the  island,"— an  opinion  prevalent 
among  many  ancient  nations  respecting  themselves. — 2.  Bello  illato, 
the  war  having  been  waged,  being  over. — 3.  Creberrima,  very  thick, 
close  together. — 4.  Fere  Gallicis  consimilia,  almost  like;  i.  e.  closely 
resembling  those  of  the  Gauls.— 5.  Taleis  ferrets  ad  certumpondus, 
&c  ,  pieces  of  iron  tried  by,  i.  e.  of,  a  certain  weight.— 6.  Plumbum 
album,  tin  (literally,  white  lead). — 7.  Copia,  the  quantity. — 8.  Ma- 
teria, wood,  timber. — 9.  Causa  anhni  voluptatisque,  for  the  sake  of 
amusement  and  pleasure. — 10.  Loca,  places,  climate. — 11-  Eemissi- 
oribus,  less  intense. — 12.  Triquetra,  triangular. — 13.  Ad  Cantium, 
in  Kent: — from  Land's  end  to  the  eastern  extremity  of  Kent,  is  about 
344  British  miles,  or  356  Roman  miles  in  a  straight  line.  It  would 
be  much  more  to  follow  the  irregularities  of  the  coast. — 14.  Ad 
Uispaniam: — This  statement  is  erroneous,  as  Spain  lies  to  the  south, 
;^ot  to  the  west  of  Britain. — 15.  Dimidio  minor,  less  by  one  half: — 
Great  Britain  is  computed  at  77,370  square  miles, — Ireland  at 
30,370. — 16.  Sed  pari  spatio  transmissus,  but  the  passage'  across  to 
Britain  is  the  same  distance  as  from  Gaul. — 17.  Mona,  the  Isle  of 
Man. — 18.  Dies  continuos.  Sec,  that  there  is  night  for  thirty  suc- 
cessive days  at  the  winter  solstice,  i.  e.  the  22d  December: — This  is 
not  true  in  fact,  unless  the  dark,  cloudy,  and  foggy  weather,  at  that 
season,  is  here  improperly  called  '^  night." — 19.  Nisi  certis  ex  aqua, 
&c.  but  we  perceived,  by  accurate  water  measures,  that  the  nights 
were  shorter  than  on  the  continent. — The  "  water  measure"  is  the 
Clypsedra,  or  water-clock, — an  invention  similar  to  the  sand-glass. 

X.  159. — 1.  Septingentorum  millium,  seven  hundred  miles: — 
The  true  length  of  the  western  coast  is  590  British  or  610  Boman 


NOTES    ON   BOOK    V,  237 

miles. — 2.  Contra  septentriones,  opposite  the  north. — This  is  not 
correct;  the  east  is  much  nearer  the  truth. — 3.  Octinginta  millia 
passuum,  eight  hundred  miles: — This  exceeds  the  true  estimate  230 
Boman  miles. — 4.  Humanissimi,  most  civilized. — 5.  Se  vitro  inficy 
unt,  stain  themselves  with  woad. — 6.  Capilloque  sunt  promisso,  and 
are  with,  i.  e.  they  have,  long  hair. — 7.  Deni  et  duodeni,  parties  of 
ten  and  twelve, — habent  uxores  communes  inter  se. — 8.  quo  primum 
virgo,  &c.,  by  whom  each  female,  when  a  virgin,  was  first  married. 
9.  (Ita)  tamen  ut,  in  such  a  way  however  that. — 10.  Submissis.  be- 
ing sent  to  their  aid, — atque  his,  and  these. — 11.  Constitissent,  had 
taken  their  ground. 

P.  160i — 1.  Cum,  since,  or  as;  §  140,  Obs.  3. — 2  Intellectum 
est  (a  nobis)  nostros,  we  perceived  (Idioms  67,)  that  our  men. — 
3.  Cedentes,  those  giving  way  — 4.  Cederent,  gave  way,  yielded. — 
5.  Pedibus  dispari pralio ,  on  foot,  in  an  unequal  contest;  i.  e.  with 
great  advantage  (against  us). — 6.  Conferti,  close,  in  a  close  body; 
— rari,  scattered  here  and  there  — 7.  ^lios  alii  deinceps  excipSrent, 
&c.,  and  they  continued  one  to  relieve  another  in  succession,  and 
the  vigorous  and  the  fresh  succeeded  (took  the  place  of)  those  fa- 
tigued.— 8.  Lenius,  with  less  spirit. — 9.  Uti  non  absisterent  ab,  that 
they  kept  not  far  from,  i.  e.  close  to,  &c. — 10.  Neque  posted  tempus, 
&c.,  nor  after  that  time  did  the  enemy  ever  engage  us  with  all  their 
forces;  nor  did  the  enemy,  after  that  time,  ever  come  to  a  general 
engagement  with  us. 

P.  161. — 1.  Acutis  sudibus  prcejixis,  with  sharp  stakes  fixed 
in  front. — 2.  Cum  capUe,  &c  ,  when  they  (the  soldiers)  were  above 
the  water  with  the  head  alone;  i.  e.  were  up  to  the  neck. in  the  wa- 
ter.— 3.  Ut  supra,  &c.;  Ch.  17. — 4.  Dimissis  ampliortbus  copiis,  the 
greater  part  of  the  forces  being  dismissed. — 5.  Ex  via  excedebat, 
withdrew  from  the  road. — 6.  Relinquebdtur,  &c.,  it  remained  that 
Caesar  did  not  suflfer; — discedi  (ab  militibus)  that  the  cavalry  should 
go;  Idioms,  67. — 7.  Hostibus  noceretur,  &c.,  that  the  enemy  were 
injured  by  laying  waste  their  lands  and  setting  fire  to  their  property, 
as  far  as  the  legionary  soldiers  could  eff'ect  it  in  the  midst  of  labor 
and  on  their  march,  i.  e.  on  a  laborious  march. 

P.  162. — 1.  -Atque  mittat  (eum,  i.  e.  Mandubratium,)  qui  prce- 
sit,  &c.,  and  send  him  (Mandubratius)  into  the  state  that  he  might 
rule  over  it,  and  hold  the  government. — 2.  jid  numerum,  to  the 
number, — imperdtum,  Tequirei, —frumentaque,  and  abundance  of 
corn: — "  Abundance  "  is  expressed  by  the  plural  term,  frumenta. — 
3.  Prohi^itis,  being  protected.— 4.   Vocant  oppidum,  call  it  a  town 


NOTES    ON    BOOK   V. 

5.  Ad  mare,  on  the  sea  shore;  Ch.  13. — 6.  Adoriantur  atque  oppug- 
nent,  should  attack  and  storm;  take  by  assault. 

X.  163. — 1.  Motus,  disturbances,  commotions,  insurrections, 
2.  Refectas,  repaired, — his  (navibus)  deductis  (in  mare),  these 
ships  being  brought  down  into  the  sea;  t.  e  being  launched. — 3.  Cap- 
tivorum,  of  prisoners. — 4.  Commeatibus,  embarkations. — 5.  Naviga- 
tionibus,  voyages,  trips. — 6.  Desideraretur,  was  missing,  lost. — 
7.  Et  prioris  commedtus,  both  those  of  the  previous  convoy, — et 
quas,  and  of  those  which. — 8.  PerpauccB  locum  caperent,  very  few 
reached  their  destination. — 9.  Necessario  angustius  milltes  collocavit, 
from   necessity  stowed   his   soldiers   more  closely  (than  usual) . — 

10.  Subductis  navibus  (in  aridum),  the  ships  being  drawn  on  shore. 

11.  Frumentum  proven^rat  angustius,  corn,  grain  had  (come  forth) 
been  produced  more  scantily;   the  crop  had  been   less   abundant.— 

12.  In  plures  civitdtes,  among  a  greater  number  of  states  than  usual. 

P.  164. — 1.  iVIerfert,  cure,  remedy. — 2.  MilUbuspassuum,  he, 
were  contained  within  the  space  of  a  hundred  miles: — (Probably  an 
error  as  to  the  extent.) — 3.  Natus  summo  loco,  descended  from  a 
very  noble  family;  of  very  noble  birth. — 4.  Tertium  jam  annum,  &c. 
killed  him,  (Tasgetius)  now  reigning  the  third  year,  many  belong- 
ing to  ihe  state  being  the  instigators. — 5.  Quod  ad  plures,  &c.,  be- 
cause it  pertained  to  more  than  one;  i.  e.  more  than  one  were  con- 
cerned in  it. — 6.  In  hiberna  perventum  (esse),  that  they  had  arrived 
at  winter  quarters;  literally,  it  had  been  come  by  them  to  winter 
quarters. 

P.  165. — 1-  Qui  cum  ad  fines,  &c.,  and,  when  they  had  met 
Sabinus  and  Cotta  at  the  borders  of  their  kingdom.— 2.  Desperdtd 
re,  having  despaired  of  success. — 3.  De  communi  re,  concerning 
their  common  interests. — 4.  Minui  posse,  could  be  adjusted;  lite- 
rally, diminished. — 5.  Missu  Ccesdris,  by  the  sending  of  Caesar;  i.  e. 
being  sent  by  Caesar. — 6.  Ad  hunc  modum,  to  this  purpose. — 7.  Sese, 
that  he  (Ambiorix):— This  speech  is  given  in  oblique  narration; 
§  141,  R.  VI.  Exp. — 8.  Plurimum  ei  debere,  that  he  was  under  very 
great  obligations  to  him.— 9.  De  oppugnatione  castrorum,  respecting 
the  attack  on  the  camp.— 10.  Sudque  esse,  &c.,  that  his  authority 
was  of  such  a  nature, — multitudo,  the  people. — 11.  Ex  humilitdte 
sua,  from  his  weakness,  slender  circumstances.— 12.  Esse  Galli<s 
commune  consilium,  kcT,  that  it  Was  the  purpose  of  the  whole  of 
Gaul,  that  this  day  had  been  appointed  by  them  for  attacking  (at 
once)  all  the  winter  quarters  of  Caesar;  so  that  no  legion  could 
bring  aid  to  another. 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    V.  239 

P.  166. — !•  Quibus  quoniam  pro  pietdte,  &c.,  since  he  had  done 
justice  to  them  so  far  as  affection  (to  his  country)  required,  that  he 
now  had  regard  to  the  claims  of  duty  for  the  kindnesses  of  Caesar 
to  him. — 2.  Pro  hospitio,  by  the  ties  of  friendship. — 3.  Ipsorum  esse 
consilium,  it  belonged  to  them  (Titurius  and  Cotta,)  to  consider,^— 
'velintne,  whether  they  should. — 4.  Quod  cum  facial,  since  he  was 
doing  this,  i.  e.  in  doing  this  he  consulted,  &c. — 5.  Existit,  arises. — 
6.  Sustineri,  could  be  withstood,  resisted. — 7.  Rem  esse  testimonio, 
that  fact  was  for  proof}  i.  e.  that  facts  proved  this. 

P.  167. — 1.  Levius  aut  turpius,  weaker  or  more  cowardly. — 
2.  Auctore  haste,  an  enemy  being  the  author;  on  the  information  of 
an  enemy. — 3.  Clamitahat,  kept  crying  out;  §  44,  II.  2. — 4.  C(Bsd- 
rem  arbitrariprofectum  in  Italiam,  that  he  supposed  that  Caesar  had 
gone  into  Italy. — 5.  Non  hostem  auctorem,  &c.,  that  he  did  not  look 
at  the  enemy's  being  the  adviser,  but  at  the  thing  itself. — 6.  Ardere, 
burned  with  resentment. — 7.  Sine  certd  re,  without  certain  informa- 
tion.— 8.  Si  nil  sit  durius,  if  nothing  occurred  more  difScult  than 
ordinary. — 9.  Unam  salutem,  their  only  security. — 10.  Preesens,  im- 
mediate.— 11.  Hdc  in  utramque,  Sec,  this  dispute  being  maintained 
on  both  sides. — 12.  Primisque  ordimbus,  and  the  chief  centurions. 
13.  J{incUe,  prevail,  carry  your  point: — This  is  spoken  in  the  direct 
discourse;  §  141,  R.  VI.  Exp. — 14.  Et  id,  and  that,  i.  e.  et  dixit  id. 
15.  Hi  (milites),  these  (referring  to  the  Roman  soldiers  within 
hearing,)  will  understand; — abs  te  rationem,  will  demand  satisfac- 
tion from  you  (Cotta);  will  call  you  to  account. — 16.  Nee  rejecti 
nee  relegdti,  &c.,  and  not  perish  with  either  the  sword  or  famine, 
as  if  forced  away  and  banished  far  from  the  rest. 

P.  168.— 1.  CoTisMrgWwr,  they  arise,  break  up. — 2.  Utrumque, 
both;  viz:  Cotta  and  Titurius. — 3.  Res  disputatiOne  ad  mediam  noc- 
tem,  the  affair  is  protracted  by  their  dispute;  i.  e.  the  subject  is  de- 
bated till  midnight. — 4.  Dat  manus,  gives  his  hands;  i.  e.  yields, — 
a  mode  of  expression  borrowed  from  the  form  of  making  a  surren- 
der by  stretching  forth,  or  holding  up  the  hands. — 5.  Pronunciatur , 
it  is  published;  orders  are  given, — vigiliis,  without  sleep. — 6.  Quid, 
i.  e.  spectans,  or  visurus  quid,  to  see  what. — 7.  Omnia  excogitantur, 
&c.,  every  reason  is  suggested  to  show, — quare,  why. — 8.  Vigiliis, 
want  of  sleep  — 9.  Ut  quibus  persudsum  esset,  since  they  were  per- 
suaded.— 10.  Se  demisisset,  had  gone  down. — 11.  Ut  qui,  since  he, 
or  because  he. — 12.  Hcec  tamen  ipsa  (fecit)  these  very  things  how- 
ever (he  did)  ,—atque  (ita)  ut,  and  so  that;  in  such  a  way  that.^ 
13.  In  ipso  negotio,  &c.,  to  deliberate  in  the  very  moment  of  action. 


240  NOTES    ON   BOOK   V. 

±.  169. — 1.  Aucior,  an  adviser. — 2.  Possent  minus  facUi 
oblre  omnia  per  se,  they  could  less  easily  perform  every  thing  them- 
selves; every  part  of  their  duty  could  not  be  performed  by  them  in 
person  (viz:  Cotta  and  Titurius.) — 3.  Jusserunt  (duces)  pronunciare 
(militibus) .— 4.  In  orbem  consisterent,  and  form  (Idioms,  85,)  them- 
selves into  a  circle. — 5.  Incommode  accidit,  it  proved  unfortunate. — 
6.  Vulgo,  every  where: — 7.  (Ut)  qu(B  quisque,  &c.  that  whatever 
things  any  one  of  them  considered  the  most  valuable,  these  he  has- 
tened, &c. — 8.  Consilium  non  defuit  barbaris,  prudence  was  not 
wanting  to  the  barbarians;  the  barbarians  were  not  deficient  in 
prudence,  skill.— 9.  Illorum  esse  prcedam,  &c.,  that  the  booty  be- 
longed to  them,  (the  Gauls)  and  that  whatever  the  Romans  should 
leave  would  be  reserved  for  them; (Idioms,  94,  3.) — 10.  Erant  et 
virtnte,  &c. ,  both  in  valor  and  number,  our  men  were  a  match  for 
them  in  fighting. — 11.  Cedant,  they  should  give  way  before  them. — 
12.  Nihil  iis  noceri  posse,  that  they  could  not  be  hurt:— For  nihil  see 
§116,  Obs.  3. 

Jr.  170. — 1.  Locum  tenere,  to  keep  his  place  (in  the  circle).— 
2.  Ad  horam  octdvam,  till  the  eighth  hour  (2  o'clock,  P.  M.) — 
3-  Uirumque  femur  tragiild  transigUur  Tito  Balventio,  each  thigh  is 
pierced  through  with  a  dart,  to  T.  Balventius,  a  brave,  &c.;  a  dart 
transfixes  both  the  thighs  of  T.  Balventius. — 4.  Subvenit,  is  bring- 
ing  aid;  is  endeavoring  to  rescue. — 5.  In  adversum  os,  full  in  the 
mouth. — 6.  Ipsi  vero  nihil  nocitum  iri,  but  that  he  should  not  be 
hurt;  that  no  harm  should  be  done  to  himself; — se  interponere,  that 
he  pledged. — 7.  Atque  in  eo  constitit,  and  pej^sisted  in  it. — 8.  In 
presentia  (tempora),  at  present. 

Jr.  171. — 1.  Victoriam  concldmant,  shout  victory. — 2.  Illi, 
they,  viz,  those  who  had  retreated  to  the  camp. — 3.  Ad  unum,  to  a 
man, — 4.  Subldtos,  being  elated. — 5.  Nihil  esse  negotii,  that  it  was 
an  easy  matter. — 6.  Se  projitetur,  he  ofiers  himself. — 7.  Huic  quo- 
que  accidit,  to  him,  to  this  officer  (Cicero)  it  happened. 

P.  172. — 1-  ALgre  is  dies  sustentdtur  (a  nostris),  that  day  is 
maintained  by  our  men  with  difficulty;  i.  e.  our  men  hold  out  that 
day  with  difficulty. — 2.  Propositis,  being  oflered. — 3.  Turres  admo- 
dum,  &c.,  one  hundred  and  twenty  towers  in  all,  altogether. — 
4.  Prceustce  sudes,  stakes  burned  at  the  end. — 5.  Turres  contabulan- 
fur,  towers  of  several  stories  are  raised; — pinnce  loricceque,  &c., 
battlements  and  parapets  are  constructed  of  interwoven  hurdles. — 
6.  Cum  esset  tenuisslma  valetudine,  though  he  was  in  a  very  feeble 
state  of  health. — 7.   Sibi  par  cere,   to  spare  himself. — 8.  AHquem 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    V.  241 

adltum  sermonis,  any  intimacy. — 9.  Facta,  potestdte,  leave  being 
given. 

J?.  173. — 1.  Ambiorigem  ostentant,  he,  for  the  sake  of  gam- 
ing credit,  they  ostentatiously  point  to  Ambiorix;  i.  e.  they  tell. of 
his  arrival. — 2.  E^s,  that  they;  viz:  Caesar  and  his  army. — 3.  Hoc 
animo,  of  such  a  disposition;  are  so  favorably  disposed. — 4.  Licere 
illis,  that  it  would  be  permitted  to  them  (the  Romans), — per  se,  by 
them  (the  Nervii). — 5.  Adjutore,  as  an  intercessor, — 6.  Pro  ejus 
justitid,  through  his  regard  for  justice. — 7.  Sed  nulla  ferramentorum 
copidj  but  there  being  no  quantity  (or  abundance)  of  iron  tools. — 

8.  SagwZis  (dim.  of  sagM/n) ,  short  cloaks. — 9.  T  err  am  exhaurlre,  io 
remove  the  earth. — 10.  MUHum  (passuum). — 11.  Falces  testudineS' 
que,   mural   hooks    and   sheds;    See    Index,  Vinece  and    Testudo.-^ 

12.  Ferventes  glandes  ex  fusili  argilld,  red  hot  balls  of  cast  clay. — 

13.  Fervefacia  jacula,  fiery  javelins. — 14.  Distulerunt ,  spread  the 
flames. — 15.  Agere,  advance. 

P.  174. — 1.  Demigrandi,  of  retiring  from  the  fight,  yield- 
ing— 2.  Acerrlme  fortissimeque,  with  the  greatest  ardor  and  bravery. 

3.  Recessumque  primis,  &c.,  and  the  last  (the  farthest  off)  did  not 
give  a  retreat,    (an  opportunity  of  retreating,)  to  the  foremost. — 

4.  Turri,   a   tower,    (of  the    enemy,) — vallum  (our)    rampart. — 

5.  Quorum,  of  whom;  viz:  the  enemy; — progredi,  to  come  forth; 
viz:  from  the  tower. — 6.  Deturhdti,  &c.,  they  were  dislodged  and 
the  tower  set  on  fire. — 7.  Qui  jam  primis  ordiriibus,  &c.,  who  were 
advancing  (rising)  to  the  first  ranks. — 8.  Spectas,  do  you  look  for. 

9.  Qudque,  and  where. — 10.  Procurrentem.,  running  forward  (to  en- 
gage him). — 11.   Hunc,  him  (the  wounded  enemy). 

X.  175. — 1-  In  ilium,  at  him  (Pulfio). — 2.  Succurrit  iniminis, 
&c.  Varenus,  though  his  rival,  runs  up  and  assists  him  in  danger.— 
3.  Hunc,  him,  (Varenus). — 4.  Ilium,  that  he  (Pulfio). — 5.  In  lo- 
cum dejectus,  &c.,  stumbling,  he  fell;  or,  he  stumbled  and  fell  into 
a  hollow  place. — 6.  In  contentione  et  certamine,  in  this  honorable 
rivalship  and  contest; — utrumque  versdvit,  &c.,  employed,  directed, 
both,  that  the  one,  though  the  rival,  alternately  brought  aid  and  se- 
curity to  the  other. — 7.  Quanto  gravior,  &c  ,  the  more  severe  and 
difficult, — tanto  crebriores,  the  more  frequently;  §  98,  Obs.  10. — 
8.  Unus  Nervius,  a  certain  Nervian. — 9.  Honesto  loco,  of  an  honor- 
able family. — 10.  Servo  (suo)  a  slave  of  his. — 11.  Periculis,  the 
great  danger  (literally,  the  dangers). — 12.  Undecimd  hard,  the 
eleventh  hour,  5  o'clock,  P.  M.;  see  Gr.  App.  I. 

21 


242  NOTES    ON    BOOK    V. 

P.  176. — 1.  Qua  sibi  iter  faciendum  sciebat,  where  he  knew 
he  would  have  to  pass. — 2.  Si  reipubltcee  commodo,  &c.  if  he 
could  do  it  with  advantage  to  the  state. — 3.  Literas  publicas,  the 
public  documents. — 4.  Toler^ndce  kiemis  cama,  for  the  sake  of  en- 
during the  winter;  for  a  winter  supply. — 5.  Rem  gestam,  the  things 
done,  the  course  pursued. — 6.  Opinione  dejectus,  disappointed  in  his 
expectation;  literally,  cast  down  from  his  expectation. 

P.  177. — 1.  Si  adlre  non  possit,  if  he  could  not  gain  access 
(to  the  camp) . — 2.  jid  amentum  deligdtd,  tied  to  the  thong,  or  strap: 
The  amentum  was  a  strap  fastened  to  the  middle  of  a  spear  or  jav- 
elin, by  means  of  which  it  was  thrown  with  greater  force. — 3.  Casti, 
by  chance. — 4.  Perlectam,  being  read  over;  after  he  had  read  it 
over  himself. — 5.  Expulit,  dispelled,  put  an  end  to. — 6.  Tamen  an- 
gustiis  vidrum,  nevertheless,  by  the  narrowness  of  the  ways  (or 
passages)  between  the  tents. 

P.  178.— 1.  Gain  (hoc  faciunt)  Ccssar  (hoc  facit).— 2.  In 
suum  locum,  to  his  own  ground;  i.  e.  ground  favorable  to  him. — 
3.  Portasque  obstrui,  &c.,  the  gates  to  be  blocked  up,  and  in  doing 
this,  that  ihey  should  run  to  and  fro  as  much  as  possible: — This 
was  designed  to  lead  the  enemy  to  believe  that  there  was  great  tre- 
pidation and  fear  in  the  camp. — 4.  Etiam  de  vallo  deductis,  &c., 
and  being  drawn  back,  even  from  the  rampart,  they  (the  enemy,) 
approach  nearer. — 5.  jid  se,  to  them,  viz:  from  the  Roman  camp. — 

6.  ^c  sic  nostras  contemstrunt,  and  to  such  a  degree  did  they  show 
their  contempt  of  us. — 7.  Ed  (vii),  in  that  way. — 8.  Longius,  too 
far. — 9.  Riorum,  of  them,  viz:  the  enemy. 

P.  179. — 1.  Legione productd,  &c.,  having  led  forth  the  legion; 
having  reviewed  the  legion,  he  finds;  (Idioms,  104,). — 2.  Pro  ejus 
7nerito,  according  to  his  merit;  as  he  deserved; — appellat,  he  ad- 
dresses by  name. — 3.  Rem  gestam  proponit,  he  lays  before  them 
(viz:  Cotta  and  Sabinus)  the  matter  as  it  took  place  — 4,  Culpa,  by 
the  misconduct. — 5.  Hoc,  on  this  account. — 6.  Quod,  seeing,  since. 

7.  Incommodo  expidto,  &c.,  the  loss  being  retrieved;  the  disaster 
having  been  remedied  by  the  kindness,  &c.— 8.  Post  horam  nonam, 
after  3  o'clock,  P.  M.;  See  Gr.  App.  I. — 9.  Tririis  hibernis,  in  three 
several  winter  quarters;  i.  e.  in  three  different  places. — 10.  Consul- 
tdbant,  were  consulting,  deliberating;  §  44,  II.  2. — 11,  Quid  con- 
siliireUqui  caperent,  &c.,  what  measures  the  rest  were  adopting, 
and  when  a  beginning  of  the  war  would  be  made. — 12,  Concilia, 
assemblies,  meetings. 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    V.  2^ 

P.  180. — 1.  Quin  aliquem,  &c.,  but  he  heard,  (that  he  did  not 
bear,)  some  intelligence. -r2.  Armorica,  states  lying  along  the  north 
of  Gaul,  now  Bretagne. — 3.  Dicto  aicdientes,  obedient: — In  this 
phrase  audientes  governs  dicto,  by  §  112,  R.  V.;  again,  the  words 
audientes  dicto,  together,  are  equivalent  to  obedientes,  and  often 
govern  another  dative  by  the  same  Rule;  as,  Nobis  dicto  obediens, 
obedient  to  us. — 4.  Tantum  ra/wi^, prevailed  so  much,-  had  so  much 
influence. — 5.  Attulit,  produced,  caused. — 6.  Prctcipuo  semper  ho- 
nore  habuit,  treated  always  with  special  honor. — 7.  Alteros, — alti- 
ros,  the  former, — the  latter. — 8.  Nulla  fere  civitas,  &c.,  almost 
every  state  was  suspected  by  us. — 9.  Idque  adeo,  Sec,  and  1  do  not 
know  whether  this  is  to  be  wondered  at. — 10.  Quod,  qui,  &c.,  be- 
cause they  grieved  most  bitterly  that  they  who  were  accustomed 
to  be  ranked  before  all  nations  in  valor,  had  lost  so  much  of  that 
reputation  that  they  should  endure  the  commands  of  the  Roman 
people. — Qui  has  for  its  antecedent  se  in  the  next  clause. 

Jl  .  181. — 1.  Lapsus  hdc  spe,  having  fallen  from  this  hope;  i.  c. 
being  disappointed  in  this  hope. — 2.  Ultro  ad  se  venlri  (ab  homini- 
bus,  67,  7,)  that  men  were  coming  to  him  of  their  own  accord. — 
3.  Omnibus  cruciattbus,  by  every  species  of  torture. — 4.  Alteriva 
factionis,  of  the  opposite  faction. — 5.  Secutuvi  Jidem.  Ccesdris,  hav- 
ing put  himself  under  the  protection  of  Caesar. — 6.  Hue,  to  them. 

X  .  182. — 1-  Sub  castris,  close  up  to  the  camp. — 2.  Quibuscum- 
que  poter at  rebus,  by  whatever  means  he  could. — 3.  Intromissis,  be- 
ing let  in  (to  the  Roman  camp). — 4.  Quos  arcessendos,  &c.,  who  he 
had  taken  care  should  be  sent  for. — 5.  Nulla  ratione,  in  no  way. — 
6.  Cum  magnd  contumelid,  with  great  insult  of  words;  with  most 
abusive  language. — 7.  Dispersi  ac  dissipdti  in  a  dispersed  and  scat- 
tered manner. — 8.  Prcecipit  at  que  interdlcit,  commands  and  forbids, 
— prcBcipit  has  for  its  object,  unum  omnes  petant  Indutiomdrum;  and 
interdlcit,  the  next  clause,  neu  quis,  &c. — 9.  Mora  reliquorum,  by 
the  delay  (of  pursuing)  the  rest. — 10.  Comprobat,  favors. 


NOTES  ON  BOOK  VI. 

X  .  183. — 1.  Dihctum  hablrc,  to  hold  a  levy;  to  raise  forces. — 
2.  Quoniam  ipse  ad  urban,  kc  ,  since  he  (Pompey)  remained  near 
the  city  with  military  comraaal,  on  account  of  the  republic   (The 


244  NOTES    ON    BOOK    VI. 

laws  did  not  allow  a  person  invested  with  military  powers. to  enter 
the  city,)  that  he  would  order  those  troops  which  he  had  raised  in 
Cisalpine  Gaul  (and  had  bound)  by  the  oath  of  fidelity  to  the  con- 
sul.— 3.  Sarciri,  &c.,  be  repaired,  but  even  be  more  than  compen- 
sated by  greater  forces. — 4.  Quod  cum  Pompeius,  &c.,  Pompey  hav- 
ing granted  this. — 5.  Ut  docuimus,  as  we  have  shewn. — 6.  Obsidi- 
busque  depecimid  cavent,  secure  the  payment  of  the  money  by  means 
of  hostages. 

Jr.  184. — 1.  'Ad  imperdtum,  to  the  thing  commanded^  i.  e.  to 
do  the  thing  commanded. — 2.  Nondum  hieme  confectd,  the  winter 
being  not  yet  ended,  i.  e.  before  the  end  of  winter. — 3.  Uti  institu- 
erat,  as  he  had  been  accustomed. — 4.  Omnia  every  thing  else. — 
6.  Sed  ah  hoc  consilio  ahfuisse  existimabantur,  but  were  supposed  to 
be  absent  from,  (not  concerned  in)  this  scheme  (plot) . — 6.  Hdc  re, 
&c,,  this  thing  (the  adjournment)  being  published  from  the  tribu- 
nalj  (an  elevated  place  formed  of  turf  or  other  material  heaped  up 
together,  suggestus). — 7.  Conanttbus,  &c.,  to  them  attempting  to  do 
this. — 8.  Sententid,  from  this  design. — 9.  Deprecandi,  of  excusing 
their  conduct. — 10.  Quod  astivum,  &c.,  because  the  summer  was 
the  time  for  prosecuting  the  war,  not  for  legal  investigations. 

Jr.  185. — 1.  Totus  et  mente  et  ammo,  wholly  with  his  mind  and 
soulj  i.  e.  with  his  whole  heart  and  soul. — 2.  Ne  quis  aut  ex  hujus 
iracundid.  &c.,  that  no  commotion  might  arise,  either  from  this 
man's  violent  temper,  or  from  that  hatred  on  the  part  of  the  state 
which  he  had  incurred  (in  consequence  of  having  been  made  king 
over  it  by  Caesar) . — 3  Pro  explordto,  for  certsiin. — 4.  Circumspici- 
ebat  ejus  (Ambiorigis)  reliqua  consilia  anXmo,  watched  his  other 
plans  in  his  mind  (t.  e.  with  attention). — 5.  Perpetuis  paludibus, 
continued,  uninterrupted  marshes. — 6.  Illi,  from  him  {AmMorix), — 
ipsum,  (Jmbiorix)  himself. — 7.  Congredi  cum  Transrhendnis,  to 
unite  with  those  beyond  the  Rhine. — 8.  Manu,  an  army. — 9.  Pr(e- 
sidio  loci,  to  the  protection  of  the  place,  the  strength  of  their  posi- 
tion.— 10.  Effectis,  erected,  built. — 11.  Adit  tripartito,  marches 
against  them  in  three  divisions. 

P.  186. — 1.  Augebdtur  (hostibus)  was  increased  to  the  ene- 
my. — 2.  Loquitur,  he  (Labienus)  speaks. — 3.  In  dubium  nan  devo- 
caturum,  would  not  endanger,  involve  in  doubt. — 4.  Galllcis  rebus, 
the  interest,  the  affairs  of  the  Gauls. — 5.  Primis  ordintbus,  the 
chief  centurions: — 6.  Longum  esse,  that  it  would  be  long,  too  long, 
too  late. 


NOTES    ON   BOOK   VI.  245 

X.  187. — 1.  Usus  eddem  simulatidne  itinSris,  practising  tho 
same  deception  respecting  his  march. — 2.  Facultdtem.,  opportunity. 
3.  Prccstdte,  display. — 4.  Prcesidio  ad  impedimenta  dimissis,  being 
detached  to  the  baggage  for  a  guard j  i.  e.  to  guard  the  baggage. — 
5.  Prceter  spem,  contrary  to  expectation. — 6.  Infestis  signis,  with 
hostile  standards. — 7.  Cingetortgi—traditum  est,  was  conferred  on 
Cingetorix;  See  B.  V.  Ch.  3.  and  56. — 8.  Ne  Amhiorix  ad  eos  recep- 
tum  haberet,  that  Ambiorix  might  not  have  a  retreat  to  them;  a 
place  of  refuge  among  them, 

P.  188. — 1.  Causri  purgandi  sui,  on  purpose  to  clear,  to  jus- 
tify themselves. — 2.  Neque  abs  sejidem  Icesam,  nor  had  their  promise 
been  violated  by  them. — 3.  xVe  communi  odio,  &c.,  lest  in  his  com- 
mon hatred  of  the  Germans. — 4.  Causa  cognltd,  on  enquiry. — 
5.  Imperltos  ignorant. — 6.  Referunt,  report — 7.  Infinltd,  of  vast 
extent, — 8.  jib  Suevis,  on  the  side  of  the  Suevi, 

P.   189. — 1.    Aliinum,   improper,    foreign    to    the  purpose.— 

2.  Proponere,  to   treat  of,  lay  before,    to  give  some  account  of. — 

3.  In  omnibus  pagis  pariibusque,  in  all  the  cantons  and  parts  of  can- 
tons.— 4,  Princlpes  edrum  factionum,  k.c.,  the  heads  of  these  fac- 
tions are  (persons)  who  in  their  opinion  are  considered  to  have  the 
greatest  interest,  on  whose  will  and  decision  all  their  most  impor- 
tant affairs  and  resolutions  hinge,  depend. — 5.  Idque  ejus  rei  causa, 
&c.,  and  this  custom  seems  to  have  been  instituted  from  early  times^ 
for  this  reason. — 6.  Quisque  non  patitur, — neque  habent,  each  leader 
(patron), — neither  do  they  have: — The  pupil  may  here  notice  the 
transition  from  the  singular,  patitur,  with  quisque,  to  the  plural,  lia- 
bent  /  §  102,  Obs.  5. — 7-  Hac  eddem  ratio  est,  &.C.,  this  same  princi- 
ple exists,  prevails,  in  the  government  of  all  Gaul. — 8.  Principes, 
chief,  at  the  head  of. — 9.  Jactiiris,  expenses,  gifts: — This  is  a  pure 
use  of  the  word,  which  denotes  a  present  loss  in  expectation  of  fu- 
ture benefit. — 10.  Tantum  potentid  antecessor  ant,  they  (the  Sequani) 
so  far  excelled  (the  jEdui)  in  power. — 11.  Re  infectd,  the  business, 
his  object,  being  accomplished. — 12.  Edrum  amicitiam  their  (the 
,^dui's)  friendship. 

P.  190. — 1.  Reliquis  rebus,  &c.,  here  the  participle,  amplifi- 
catd,  agrees  with  the  nearest  noun;  See  §  98,  Obs.  4. — 2.  Dimise- 
rant,  (for  amiserant,)  had  lost. — 3.  Quos  quod  adcequdre,  &c.,  and 
because  it  was  understood  that  they  (the  Remi)  equalled  the  -^dui 
in  Caesar's  favor;  i.  e.  had  an  equal  share  of  Caesar's  favor  with  the 
,ffidui;  stood  as  high  in  &c. — 4.  Vetires  inimicitias ,  ancient  feuds.-— 
5.  Dicdbant  se  Remis  in  clientelam,  gave  up  themselves  to  the  Re- 


246  NOTES    ON    BOOK    VL 

mi  for  protection;  put  themselves  under  the  protection  of  the  Remi, 
6.  AUquo  numero,  of  any  notej — genera,  classes. — 7.  Aere  alieno, 
by  debt,  literallyj  the  money  of  another. — 8.  In  hos  eddem,  &c., 
over  these  the  nobles  have  all  the  same  rights  as  masters  have 
over  their  slaves. — 9.  Alttrum  est  DruMuvi,  one  is  that  of  the  Dru- 
ids  (See  Index)— the  other,  that  of  the  knights.— 10.  Illi,  the  for- 
mer;— ad  hos,  to  the  latter. — 11.  Procurant^  have  charge  of. — 
12.  li  (Druides)  sunt  apud  eos  (adolescentes)  they  (the  Druids) 
are  in  great  honor  among  them,  viz:  their  pupils.— 13.  Non  stetit 
decreto,  &c.,  has  not  stood  by,  has  violated  their  decree, — they 
exclude  them  from  the  public  rites,  excommunicate  them. — 14.  li 
quibus  iia  interdictum  est,  those  vrho  are  thus  excommunicated  (Idi- 
oms, 66,). — 15.  Defugiunt  aditum  eorum,  &c.,  shun  their  company 
and  conversation. 

Jr.  191. — 1.  Habei  summam  uuciorUatem^  possesses  the  su- 
preme authority;  w^hose  authority  is  absolute.— 2.  Arrange:  Quaregio 
habetur  media  (regio)  totius  Gallice,  which  is  esteemed  the  middle, 
or  central  region  of  all  Gaul. — 3.  Parent,  obey,  abide  by,  acquiesce 
in. — 4,  Discipllna,  &c.  this  institution  is  thought  to  have  originated 
in  Britain. — 5.  Diligentim,  more  accurately. — 6.  Militice  vacatio- 
Hem,  exemption  from  military  service. — 7.  Immunit  at  em  wnnium  re- 
rum,  immunity,  privilege,  free  use,  enjoyment,  of  all  things;  all  im- 
munities.— 8.  Prcemiis,  rewards,  advantages,  privileges. — 9.  Edis- 
cere,  to  learn  hy  heart;  to  commit  to  memory. — 10.  Ea  Uteris  man- 
dare,  to  commit  these  things  to  writing. — 11.  Instituisse  id,  to  have 
instituted  this  custom. — 12.  Discipllnam  efferri,  that  their  doctrine 
should  be  spread  abroad. — 13.  In  primis  hoc  volunt,  &c.,  they  (the 
Druids)  in  particular  wish  to  inculcate  this  idea;  it  is  a  favorite 
maxim  of  the  Druids. — 14,  Animas  non  i7iterlre,  &c.,  that  souls  do 
not  die,  but  pass  from  one  body  to  another. — 15.  Disputant,  &c,, 
Ihey  reason  and  impart  their  reflections  to  the  young. 

P.  192. — 1.  Cum.  est  usu^,  when  there  is  need. — 2.  Versantur, 
are  engaged. — 3.  Ambactos,  retainers. — 4.  Dedlta  religionibus ,  given, 
addicted  to  religious  rites,  to  superstitions. — 5.  Contexta  viminibus, 
interwoven  with  twigs. — 6.  Ejus  g ener is (aocentium) ,  of  this  class 
of  offenders. — 7.  Deum  maxime  Mer curium  colunt,  they  (the  Gauls) 
worship  chiefly  the  god  Mercury;  t.  e.  Mercury  is  the  chief  or  favo- 
rite deity  of  the  Gauls: — Not  however  the  Mercury  of  the  Grecian 
mythology,  but  a  Gallic  deity. — 8.  (Colunt)  Apolllnem,  &c. — ^9.  Ini- 
tia,  the  beginnings,  the  first  knowledge. 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    Vi.  g|^ 

P.   193. — 1-   Qw«  «wjL>graferirr#,  &c.  they  sacrifice  the  captured 
animals  which  remain.— 2.  Poslta,  deposited  (in  sacred  places).— 

3.  Spatia  omnis  temporis,  all  their  periods  or  divisions  of  time. — 

4.  Ut  noctem  dies  subsequdtur,  that  the  day  follows  the  night;  i.  e, 
their  day  is  from  sunset  to  sunset  as  among  the  Jews. — 5.  Palam^ 
openly;  i.  e.  publicly,  in  public— 6.  Conjunctim  ratio  habetur,  a 
joint  account  is  kept. — 7.  Fructusque  servdtur,  and  the  interest  is 
laid  up. — 8.  Vita  superdrit ,  shaU  survive  the  other. — 9.  Habent 
questionem  de  uxortbus  in  servilem  modum.^  they  examine  their  wives 
by  torture,  after  the  manner  of  slaves;  like  slaves. — 10.  8%  comper- 
turn  est  J  if  any  discovery  is  made. — 11.  Pro  cultu,  considering  their 
mode  of  life. — 12.  Vivis  cordi  fuisse^  to  have  been  pleasing  to  them 
living. 

Jr.  194. — 1.  Commodius,  to  greater  advantage  than  others; 
more  judiciously, — 2.  Quce  visa  sunt,  what  seemed  proper  to  them; 
i.  e.  what  they  thought  proper. — 3.  Per  consilium,  through,  or 
during;  i.  e.  in  the  time  of  the  council. — 4.  Neque  student,  nor  do 
they  pay  attention  to. — 5.  Opibus  quorum,  &c.,  by  whose  power  they 
are  manifestly  benefited. — 6.  Vulcdnum,  fire. — 7.  Constltit,  is  spent 
8.  Impubires,  chaste. — 9.  Rhenonum,  of  deer's  hides. — 10.  Quan 
turn  et  quo  loco,  &c.,  as  much  land  as,  and  where  they  think  proper. 
11.  Afferunt  multas  causas  ejus  rei,  they  produce  many  reasons  for 
this  practice. 

P.  195. — 1.  .iccMra^iiis,  with  greater  care. — 2.  Animi  cequitdte. 
in  evenness  of  mind,  contentment. — 3.  Propriumvirtuiis,  peculiar  to. 
or  a  proof  of,  their  valor. — 4.  Dicunt  jus,  controversiasque  minuunt 
administer  justice  and  decide  controversies. — o.  Qui  velint  sequi pro- 
fiteantur,  let  those  who  wish  to  follow  signify  it,  give  their  names. 
6.  Ac  tempus  fuit  ant ea,  hnt  there  was  a  time  formerly. — 7.  Ultro 
bella  inferrent,  they  (the  Gauls)  without  provocation  brought  war: 
— Germdnis,Vi\}OU  the  Germans, 

P.  196. — 1.  Summam  opinionem,  a  very  high  character,  repu- 
tation for  justice,  and  military  glory. — 2.  Gallis  autem,  &c.,  the 
nearness  of  the  (Roman)  province  to  the  Gauls,  and  their  acquain- 
tance with  foreign  commodities. — 3.  Largltur  multa  ad  copiam  atque 
usus,  supplies  many  articles  of  luxury  and  convenience. — 4.  Expe- 
dlto,  to  a  traveller  without  baggage;  to  an  expeditious  traveller. — 
5.  Finlri,  be  measured. — 6.  Sinistrorsus ,  to  the  left  hand  (viz:  of 
the  Danube,)  stretches  northward  from  the  Danube. — 7.  Memories 
prodenda  videantur,  seem  worthy  to  be  handed  down  to  remem- 
brance.— 8.  Bosj  See  Index,  Bison. — 9.  Sicut  palmm,  like  palms. 


248  NOTES    ON    BOOK   VI. 

P.  197.— 1.  Mces,  elk;  See  Alee.— 2.  Varietas  pelHum,  the 
spots,  varied  color,  of  their  skins. — 3.  Si  afflictce  quo  casu  conciderint , 
if,  being  thrown  down  by  any  accident,  they  have  fallen. — 4.  Appli- 
cant se  ad  eas,  they  lean  themselves  against  these. — 5.  Infirmas,  being 
weakened  — 6.  Uri;  See  Urus. — 7.  Qucb  sunt  testimonio,  to  serve  as 
a  proof. — 8.  Neparvuli  quidem  excepti,  not  even  those  caught  young. 
9.  Amplissimis ,  their  most  splendid. — 10.  Ccesar: — Csesar  having 
finished  his  digression,  respecting  the  manners  of  the  Gauls  and 
Germans,  (Ch.  II — 28,)  here  resumes  his  narrative. 

P.  198. — ^^1-  Si  quid  celeritdte,  &c.,  to  see  if  he  maybe  able 
to  gain  any  thing  by  rapidity  of  march  and  favorable  opportunity. — 

2.  Ut  imperdtum  est,  as  was  ordered. — 3.  Fortuna  potest  (fac6re) 
multum,  &c.  fortune  can  do  much;  i.  e.  has  great  influence,  not  only, 
&c. — 4.  Magnce  fuit  fortuna,  it  was  a  piece  of  great  good  fortune. 

P.  199. — 1.  Multum  fortuna  valuit,  fortune  can  do  much,  has 
great  power  or  influence. — 2.  Judicio,  from  choice,  designedly. — 

3.  Exclusus  tempore,  prevented  by  want  of  time.— 4,  Sed  certe,  but 
it  is  certain. — 5.  Alienisstmis  to  total  strangers. — 6.  Omnibus  preci- 
bus,  with  every  sort  of  execration. — 7.  Taxo,  with  yew;  i.  e.  with 
a  decoction  of  the  leaves  or  berry,  both  of  which  were  regarded  as 
poisonous. — 8.  Causam  omnium  Germanorum  esse  unam,  that  the 
cause  of  all  the  Germans  was  one  and  the  same. — 9.  Questione  cap- 
tivorum,  from  an  examination  of  the  captives. 

P.  200.— 1.  Posf  (iic7nsej9«wiMm  (inchoa turn),  after  the  seventh 
day  was  begun;  i.  e.  on  the  seventh  day; — 2.  Ut  supra,  Ch.  31. — 
3.  Nulla  certa  manus,  no  regular  force. — 4.  Vicinitatibus,  to  the 
neighborhoods;  i  e.  to  the  people  in  the  neighborhood; — a  very  com- 
mon mode  of  speech  in  our  own  language. — 5.  Ex  parte,  partly, 
in  a  measure. 

P.  201.— 1.  Confertos,  in  large  parties.— 2.  Si  vellet,  if  he 
(Ca&sar)  wished. — 3*  Instituta  raHo,  established  discipline. — 4.  Ut 
potiiis  in  nocendo,  &c. ,  that  some  opportunity  of  injuring  the  enemy 
should  be  omitted^  rather  than  that  this  injury  should  be  inflicted 
with  any  danger  to  his  soldiers. — 5.  Legionarius  miles ,  the  legionary 
soldiery;  the  soldiers  of  the  legion;  i.  e.  the  regular  troops.— 6.  Ap- 
petebat,  was  drawing  near  — 7.  Quantos  casus  afferat,  how  great 
accidents  she  brings;  i.  e.  how  great  changes  she  brings  about. — 
8.  Manus  erat  nulla,  there  was  no  collected  body. — 9.  Supra  docu- 
««w«,  we  have  shewn  above;  B.  IV.  Ch.  16. 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    VI. 

P.  202. — 1-  Non  paltts  non  silvce  moranifwrAos,  Ice.,  h6  iharfeh, 
no  woods  hinder  these  men,  &c. — 2.  Tantum  prcesidii  ut  ne,  &c.,  so 
little  of  garrison  that  not  even  the  walls  could  be  surrounded  with 
men;  i.  e.  could  be  manned. — 3.  Duce,  guide, — indicio,  information. 
4.  Quiillius  paticntiam  pane  obsessionem,  &c.,  who  called  his  for- 
bearance almost  a  siege,  since  they  were  not  permitted  to  go  out  of 
the  camp. — 5.  Qui  convaluerant,  &c.,  those  who  had  recovered 
during  this  interval. — 6.  Subsiderat,  had  remained.— 7.  Casu,  by 
chance,  by  accident. 

X  .  203. — 1.  Mercatores  qui  sub  vallo  tendSrent,  the  suttlers 
who  pitched  their  tents  close  to  the  ramparts. — 2.  Rctlquos  aditus, 
and  other  places  of  entrance. — 3.  Plerlque  novas  sibi,  &c.,  most  of 
them  form  to  themselves  strange  superstitious  notions  from  the 
place;  and  they  place  before  their  «yes  the  disaster  of  Cotta  and 
Titurius,  since  they  were  overthrown  in  that  fort. — 4.  Qui  primum 
pilmn,  &c..  who  had  led  the  first  rank  with  Caesar;  t.  e.  who  had 
been  his  chief  centurion. — 5.  Superioribus  proeliis;  See  B.  II.  Ch. 
25,  and  B.  III.  Ch.  5. — 6.  Relinquit  animus  Sextium,  Sextius  faints. 

P.  204. — 1-  Imperiti  usus  militdris,  not  acquainted  with  the 
usages  of  war. — 2.  Cuneo  facto,  a  wedge  being  made;  being  drawn 
up  in  the  form  of  a  wedge. — 3.  Si,  if,  even  if: — at,  still,  yet. — 
4.  Nullo  usu  militdris  rei  percepto,  &c.,  no  experience  in  military 
affairs  being  yet  acquired. 

P.  205. — 1.  Non  facer  et  fidem,  he  did  not  gain  credit,  was  not 
believed. — 2.  Pane  aliendta  mente,  with  a  mind  almost  alienated;  de- 
void of  reason. — 3.  Questus  unum,  having  complained  of  only  one 
thing. — 4.  Locum  debuisse  relinqui,  ne  minimo  quidem  casu,  that  a 
place,  or  occasion,  ought  not  to  have  been  left,  for  even  the  smallest 
accident;  See  §  16,  Exc.  2. — 5.  Quarum  omnium  rerum  maxime,  fee., 
of  all  these  things  it  seemed  the  most  astonishing. — 6.  ObtuUrint 
optatissimum  beneficium  j9mbiortgi,  rendered  the  most  acceptable 
service  to  Ambiorix. — 7.  Ad  vexandos  hostes,  to  annoy  the  enemy, 

P.  206. — 1.  Pcene  naturam  studio  vinc^rent,  they  almost  over- 
came nature  by  exertion. — 2.  jld  summam  felicitdtem,  to  complete 
success. — 3.  Ille  eripPret,  &c.,  he  continued  to  snatch  himself  from 
them;  to  escape  from  them  by  the  aid  of  lurking  places  and  forests: 
4.  Sumsit  supplicium  more  majorum,  he  inflicted  punishment  accord- 
ing to  the  practice  of  their  ancestors. — 5.  Cum  interdixisset  quibus 
aqua  atque  igni,  when  he  had  interdicted  them  from  water  and  fire; 


250  NOTES    ON    BOOK   VI. 

i.  e.  had  banished  them: — This  was  the  Roman  judicial  mode  of  in- 
flicting the  sentence  of  banishment,  "  To  forbid  the  use  of  water 
and  fire*" — 6.  Frumento  proviso  exercitui,  having  provided  corn  for 
the  army. 

[end  op  notes.] 


251 


INDEX, 

HISTORICAL,  GEOGEAPHICAL  AND  ARCH^OLOGICAL, 

FOR  THE  FIRST  SIX  BOOKS  OF 
CiESAR'S  COMMENTARIES  ON  THE  GALLIC  WAR. 


Acco,  onis,  a  general  of  the  Gauls,  who  was  at  the  head  of  the  con- 
federacy formed  against  the  Senones,  Carnutes,  and  Treviri. 
Caesar,  by  the  rapidity  of  his  marches,  prevented  the  execution 
of  his  plans,  and  ordered  a  general  assembly  of  Gaul  to  inquire 
into  the  conduct  of  these  nations,  in  which  he  pronounced  sen- 
tence of  death  on  Acco,  who  was  instantly  executedj  B.  VI.  Ch. 
4,  and  44. 

Adcantuannus,  Adiomatus,  vel,  Adbuatus,  i,  the  chief  man,  for 
many  years,  among  the  Allobroges. 

Aduatuca,  ae,  f.  a  fort  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  country  possessed 
by  the  Eburones, — a  difTerent  place  from  Aduatucum,  the  capital 
of  the  Aduatuci,  now  called  Tongres,  with  which  it  appears  to 
have  been  confounded  by  Ptolemyj — A  small  part  of  the  town 
only  may  have  been  built  when  Csesar  was  in  that  country.  Hence 
he  mentioned  it  as  a  castle,  or  fort.  It  stood  near  the  river  Mosa, 
(Mcese,)  between  Liege  and  Maestricht. 

Aduatuci,  orum,  m.  a  people  of  Gallia  Belgica,  whose  country  lay 
on  the  west  bank  of  the  Mosa,  (Mcese,)  between  Namur  and  Liege. 

^dui,  orum,  (sing.  ^Eduus,  i.),  v.  Hedui,  orum, .  one  of  the  most 
powerful  and  wealthy  nations  of  Gallia  Celtica.  Their  territory 
lay  on  the  W.  of  the  Arar,  (Soane,)  between  that  river  and  the  Li- 
geris,  (Loire,)  a  little  to  the  N.  of  the  junction  of  the  former  with 
the  Rhodinus,  (Rhone. )  At  an  early  period  they  became  the  allies 
of  Rome,  to  which,  in  some  degree,  their  influence  among  the 
other  nations  of  Gaul  may  be  attributed.     See  SequSni. 

^milius,  i,  (Lucius) ,  an  officer  in  Caesar's  army,  who  commanded 
a  part  of  the  Gallic  cavalry. 


252  ^QUINOCTIUM ALPES. 

-^quinoctium,  i,  n.  (from  Mquus,  equal,  and  Nox,  night,)  the  Equi- 
nox, or  time  when  the  days  and  nights  are  equal,  all  over  the 
globe.  This  happens  twice  a  year,  on  22d  March,  and  22d  Sep- 
tember. The  former  is  called  the  Vernal,  the  latter  the  Autum- 
nal Equinox.  The  circle,  which  passes  through  the  place  of  the 
sun  at  these  two  periods  of  the  year,  has,  from  the  phenomenon 
above  mentioned,  received  the  name  of  the  Equinoctial,  or  Equi- 
noctial Line,  and  is  directly  over  the  Equator. 

Agendicum,  i,  n.  (now  Sens,)  the  chief  city  of  the  Senones,  a  brave 
and  powerful  people  of  Gaul,  who  inhabited  the  left  bank  of  the 
Sequana,  ^.Sevu).  It  stood  below  the  confluence  of  the  Vantte  and 
Icauna,  vel,  Itumna,  (Yonne,)  a  southern  branch  of  the  Seine. 

Agger,  is,  the  name  of  a  mound  raised  by  the  Romans  in  besieging 
cities.  It  was  composed  of  earth,  wood,  hurdles,  stone,  &c.  The 
agger  commenced  at  a  distance  from  the  walls,  gradually  advanced 
towards  the  town,  always  increasing  in  height,  till  it  equalled  or 
overtopped  the  walls.  This  mound  was  secured  by  towers  of 
different  stories,  (See  Tvrris,)  from  which  showers  of  missiles 
were  discharged  on  the  defenders  by  means  of  engines,  and  from 
which,  when  advanced  near  enough,  a  temporary  platform  or 
bridge  was  sometimes  thrown  to  the  top  of  the  wall,  on  which  the 
soldiers  marched  into  the  city. 

Ala,  SB,  the  wing  of  an  army,  pr-ope'rly  the  cavalry,  so  called  from 
being  placed  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  infantry.  In  the  plural 
this  term  is  often  used  to  designate  the  troops  of  the  allies,  which 
(both  infantry  and  cavalry,)  were  stationed  on  the  right  and  left 
of  the  Roman  army. 

Alarii,  orum,  those  belonging  to  the  ^la,  or  wings. 

Allobroges,  um,  (sing.  Allobrox,  ogis,)  a  people  of  Gaul,  whose 
country  lay  between  the  Isira,  (Isere,)  and  the  river  Rhodinus, 
(Rhone.)  They  bravely,  and  for  along  time,  resisted  the  power  of 
the  Roman  legions,  but  were  at  last  defeated  by  Pomtlnus.  Cicero 
ext6ls  them  for*?feheir  fidelity  to  his  countrymen,  of  which  they 
gave  a  remarkable  proof  in  Catiline's  conspiracy  (See  Sallust, 
B.  C.)  Horace  censures  them  for  their  love  of  novelty,  which 
seems  characteristic  of  the  inhabitants  of  that  country,  both  in 
ancient  and  modern  times.  Caesar  De  Bel.  Gal.  IV.  5.  The 
chief  town  of  the  Allobroges  was  Vienna,  (Vienne,)  on  the  left  bank 
of  the  Rhone,  13  miles  below  Lugdunum,  (Lyon.) 

Alpes,  ium,  a  chain  of  mountains  separating  Italy  from  Gaul  and 
Germany.  They  are  in  the  form  of  a  crescent,  and  extend  from 
the  Sinus  FlanatTcus,  (the  gulf  of  Quarnero,)  at  the  top  of  the 


AMBARRI ANCALITES.  253 

gulf  of  Venice,  to  Vada  Sabatia,  (Savona,)  on  the  gulf  of  Genoa, 
a  distance  of  600  miles.  They  have  been  divided  into  different 
portions,  the  principal  of  which  are  the  following:  1.  Alpes  Ma- 
ritlmce,  (or  Maritime  Alps,)  extending  from  the  vicinity  of  Nice 
to  Monte  Viso.  2.  Mpes  CottcB,  (or  Cottian  Alps,)  from  Monte 
Viso  to  Mont  Cenis.  3.  Mpes  Graice,  (or  Graian  Alps,)  between 
Mont  Iseran  and  Little  St.  Bernard.  4.  Alpes  Pennlnce,  (or  Pen- 
nine Alps,)  from  Great  St.  Bernard  to  the  sources  of  the  Rhone 
and  Rhine.  To  this  range  belongs  Mt.  Blanc,  14,676  feet  high. 
5.  jllpes  Rhceticce,  (or  Rhaetian  Alps,)  from  St.  Gothard  to  Mount 
Brenner  in  the  Tyrol.  6.  Mpcs  Noricce.  (or  Noric  Alps,)  from 
Mount  Brenner  to  the  head  of  the  river  Plavis.  7.  Mpes  CarnUa, 
sive  Julice,  (the  Carnic  or  Julian  Alps,)  from  the  head  of  the 
river  Plavis  to  the  confines  of  Illyricum.  Over  these  mountains 
there  are  several  passes,  of  which  the  principal  are,  that  over  the 
Great  St.  Bernard,  that  over  Mont  Simplon,  and  that  over  Mont 
St.  Gothard. 

Ambarri,  orum,  a  people  of  Gaul,  related  to  the  JEdni,  supposed  to 
have  lived  on  the  Arar,  (Saone,)  a  little  to  the  N.  of  its  Junction 
with  the  RhodSnug,  {Rhone.) 

Arabia num,  i,  n.  anciently  Samarobriva,  now  Amiens,  a  town  of  the 
Belgae. 

Ambiani,  orum,  the  inhabitants  of  Ambianum.  They  entered  into 
a  conspiracy  against  Caesar,  (B.  G.  II.  4,)  and  appear  to  have  held 
a  considerable  rank  among  the  Belgic  tribes. 

Ambiliati,  orum,  m.  a  nation  of  Gallia  Celtica  whose  geographical 
position  is  not  precisely  ascertained.  They  are  mentioned  (B.  G. 
III.  9,)  along  with  the  Osismii,  Lexovii,  Nannetes,&c.,  and  there- 
fore their  country  must  have  been  included  in  the  province  of  Bre- 
tagne  or  Normandy.     Some  editions  have  Ambiani. 

Ambiorix,  igis,  king  of  the  Ebur<5nes,  was  a  great  enemy  to  the  Ro. 
mans.  After  many  narrow  escapes,  he  at  last  evaded  the  pursuit 
of  Caesar's  men  who  followed  him  too  closely,  when  only  four  of 
his  attendants  remained. 

Ambivariti,  orum,  a  nation  of  Gaul,  between  the  Mosa,  (Meste,) 
and  the  Rhenus,  (Rhine,)  who  were  subject  to  the  .^dui.  B.  IV. 
Ch.  9.) 

Anartes,  ium,  et  Anarti,  v.  Anartii,  orum,  a  people  of  Dacia,  who 
inhabited  the  east  bank  of  the  river  Tibiscus,  (Teissk,  or  Teyss,) 
one  of  the  northern  branches  of  the  Danube.  Their  country  now 
forms  part  of  Hungary. 

Ancalltes,  ium,  a  people  of  South  Britain,  who  were  neighbors  to 

22 


254  ANDES — AQUILA. 

the  Trinobantes.  Some  have  thought  the  Atrebates  of  Ptolemy 
and  Antonine's  Itinerary,  the  same  with  the  Ancalites  of  Caesar. 
See  Horsley's  Brittania  Roraana,  p.  17,  and  Gale's  Anton.  Itiner. 
p.  105,  106. 

Andes,  ium,  ibus,  a  nation  of  the  Cekse  in  Ganl.  Their  territory 
lay  on  the  north  bank,  and  near  the  mouth,  of  the  river  Ligeris, 
{Loir  ^  J 

Annus,  i,  m.  a  year.     See  Gr.  App.  I. 

Antebrogius,  i,  m.  a  man  of  great  influence  amongst  the  Rhemi, 
who  was  sent  ambassador  to  Caesar  in  the  second  year  of  the  Gal- 
lic war. 

Antesignani,  orum,  {Ante  and  signum,)  a  name  given  to  the  soldiers 
who  fought  before  the  standards,  or  in  the  first  line,  as  those  who 
were  stationed  behind  the  standards  were  called  Postsigndni,  or 
Subsigndni. 

Antistius,  i,  (Caius  A.  Rheglnus),  one  of  Caesar's  lieutenants  in 
Gaul.  Caesar,  in  consequence  of  his  expecting  greater  commo- 
tions in  that  country,  gave  orders  in  the  sixth  year  of  the  war,  to 
Marcus  Silanus,  C.  Antistius  Rhegimis,  and  T.  Sextius,  to  levy 
troops.  We  find  him,  at  other  times,  appointing  this  lieutenant 
to  honorable  commissions. 

Antistius,  (See  Turpio.) 

Apollo,  inis,  the  son  of  Jupiter  and  Latona,  the  god  of  music,  me- 
dicine, augury,  painting,  poetry,  and  all  the  fine  arts.  ^  He  was 
born  at  the  same  birth  wilh  his  sister  Diana,  near  the  foot  of  Cyn- 
thus,  a  mountain  in  Delos,  an  island  in  Mare  ^geum,  (Archipel- 
ago.) Hence  he  was  called  Cynthius  and  Delius;  and  Diana,  Cyn- 
thia and  Delia.  Among  beasts,  the  wolf;  among  insects,  the 
grass-hopper;  among  birds,  the  cock,  the  crow,  the  swan,  and  the 
hawk;  and  among  trees,  the  palm,  the  olive,  and  the  laurel,  were 
sacred  to  Apollo.  He  was  represented  as  a  tall  beardless  young 
man,  of  handsome  shape,  holding  in  his  hand  a  bow,  hence  called 
Deus  Arcitenens,  or  a  lyre,  and  his  head  surrounded  with  rays  of 
light. 

Aquila,  86,  m.  an  eagle,  also  the  standard  of  a  Roman  Legion. 
From  the  second  consulship  of  Marius,  and  under  the  Emperors, 
the  standards  were  most  commonly  of  silver,  seldom  of  gold,  in 
the  form  of  an  eagle,  from  which  the  name  is  derived.  The  pre- 
ference was  given  to  the  former  metal,  according  to  Pliny,  because 
it  is  seen  at  a  greater  distance  than  the  latter.  But  though  the 
figure  of  the  Roman  ensigns  was  always  that  of  an  eagle,  they 
were  not  always  precisely  alike.    Sometin^es  they  resembled  an 


AQUI  LIFER AQUITANIA.  266 

eagle  in  a  standing  posture,  at  others,  with  outstretched  wings, 
which  was  the  most  common  form,  and  not  unfrequently  with  a 
turret  on  their  backs.  The  Roman  standard,  at  first,  was  a  bun- 
dle of  hay  fixed  to  a  pole,  Manipulus. — a  term  afterward  used  to 
denote  the  third  part  of  a  cohort,  then  of  wood,  sometimes  of  sil- 
ver, and  more  rarely  of  gold,  in  different  forms.  Marius,  during 
his  second  consulship,  introduced  into  the  Roman  army  the  eagle, 
which  continued  to  be  ensign  till  the  destruction  of  the  empire. 
The  merit  of  originality  does  not  belong  to  the  Romans,  for  we 
have  the  authority  of  Xenophon  to  maintain,  that  it  was  first  used 
as  a  military  standard  by  the  Persians. 

Aquilifer,  feri,  m.  standard-bearer,  whose  office  seems,  in  some  de- 
gree, to  correspond  to  that  of  ensign  with  us.  His  place  was  in 
the  first  line.  To  allow  the  standard  to  fall  into  the  hands  of  the 
enemy  was  reckoned  highly  disgraceful  to  the  whole  legion,  which 
is  still  the  case  in  modern  times,  but  particularly  to  the  person 
who  carried  it.  In  one  instance  recorded  by  Livy,  the  standard- 
bearer  was,  for  this  crime,  put  to  death.  But  the  centurions  suf- 
fered the  same  punishment  at  that  time,  and  the  army  was  deci- 
mated for  cowardice  and  treachery. — It  does  not  appear  from  Ro- 
man history,  that  recourse  was  had  to  such  severity,  unless  in  in- 
stances of  wilful  dereliction  of  duty,  proceeding  either  from  ui^- 
manly  timidity  or  treacherous  intention. 

Aquileia,  se,  f.  a  famous  seaport  belonging  to  the  Veneti  on  Mare 
Hadriaticum,  (Gulf  of  Venice.)  Strato  says  it  was  built  by  the 
Romans,  to  repel  the  inroads  of  the  barbarians,  when  their  terri- 
tory on  that  coast  did  not  extend  farther  north.  The  name  has 
been  thought  to  be  derived  from  an  eagle,  jlquila,  flying  over  the 
site  at  the  time  the  foundation  was  laidj  but  more  probably  from 
the  Roman  standard,  in  consequence  of  two  legions  having  been 
long  stationed  in  that  place.  From  its  splendor  and  magnificence, 
it  was  sometimes  called  Roma  Secunda.  Altilla,  king  of  the  Huns, 
after  a  long  and  obstinate  siege,  plundered  it,  A.  D.  452,  and  so 
completely  was  the  city  destroyed,  that  the  next  generation  could 
scarcely  discover  its  ruins.  Since  that  time,  a  few  fishermen's 
huts  point  out  the  place  near  which  it  stood.  Aquileia,  according 
to  Pliny,  was  at  the  distance  of  1500  paces  from  the  coast. 

Aquitania,  ae,  f.  one  of  the  three  principal  divisions  of  Gallia, 
(France,)  bounded  on  the  east  by  Provincia,  (Languedoc,  Pro- 
vence, and  Dauphine;  on  the  north  by  the  river  Garumna,  (Ga- 
ronne,) which  separates  it  from  Gallia  Celtica,  on  the  west  *bj 
OceSnus  Cantabricus,  (Bay  of  Biscay,)  and  on  the  south  by  Py. 


256  AQCriTANI ARIES. 

rensei  Montes,  {Pyrenees,  or  Pyrenean  Mountains,)  which  uivide 
Gallia  from  Hispania,  (Spain.)  As  Aquitania  was  much  less 
than  either  of  the  other  two  divisions,  Augustus  extended  its 
northern  boundary  to  the  river  Ligeris,  (Loire.) 

Aquitani,  orum,  (sing.  Aquitanus,  i,)  the  inhabitants  of  Aquitania. 

Arar,  aris,  m.  (Saone,)  a  smooth  flowing  river  of  Gajal,  which  takes 
its  rise  near  Mount  Vosegus,  (Vosge,)  runs  southward,  and  after 
receiving  several  streams,  falls  into  the  river  Rhodanus,  (Rhone,)' 
at  Lugdunum,  (Lyon,  or  Lyons.)     B.  I.  Ch.  12. 

Arduenna,  ae,  f.  Ardennes,  a  forest  of  Gaul,  the  largest  in  that 
country,  reaching,  according  to  Caesar,  from  the  Rhenus,  (Rhine,) 
to  the  territory  of  the  Remi,  upwards  of  fifty  miles  in  length. 
Others  make  th€  extent  of  this  forest  much  larger.  If  it  reached 
from  the  territory  of  the  Treviri  to  that  of  the  Remi,  it  would 
greatly  exceed  fifty  miles.  The  ground  is  now  in  many  places 
cleared,  and  cities  built  upon  it.  Strabo  says,  the  trees  of  this 
forest  were  not  of  a  great  height,  and  its  length  did  not  exceed 
forty  miles. 

Arecomici,  orum,  a  people  of  Gaul,  who  lived  on  the  Gallicus  Sinus, 
(Gulf  of  Lyons,)  to  the  west  of  the  river  Rhodanus,  (Rhone.)  See 
Volcae. 

Aries,  Stis,  m.  a  ram: — also  a  military  engine  for  battering  down 
walls.  It  is  said  to  have  been  first  used  by  the  Carthaginians  at 
the  siege  of  Gades,  (Cadiz.)  This  instrument  was  originally 
very  simple.  To  the  end  of  a  beam,  varying  in  length  and  thick- 
ness according  to  circumstances,  was  affixed  a  piece  of  iron  in  the 
form  of  a  ram's  head,  to  which  it  owes  its  name.  This  powerful 
engine  of  war  rested  on  the  arms  of  the  soldiers  who  worked  it. 
The  first  improvement  made  on  the  battering  ram,  was  to  suspend 
it  by  a  chain  or  a  rope  from  the  top  of  two  logs  of  wood,  having 
the  lower  ends  fixed  firmly  in  the  ground  at  a  considerable  dis- 
tance from  each  other,  and  terminating  in  a  point  at  the  upper, 
by  which  contrivance  the  men  who  wrought  it  were  wholly  re- 
lieved of  its  weight.  To  protect  them  from  the  destructive  wea- 
pons thrown  by  the  besieged,  a  shed  or  mantlet,  with  a  strong 
roof,  was  formed  around  it  The  whole  stood  on  wheels,  so  that 
the  besiegers  easily  moved  the  engine  at  pleasure.  It  does  not 
appear  from  ancient  history,  that  the  battering  ram  received  any 
important  improvement  after  the  one  just  stated.  The  discovery 
of  gunpowder  and  introduction  of  artillery  have  quite  superseded 
the  use  of  this  military  engine,  which  the  Romans  long  held  in 
great  esteem. 


ARIOVISTUS. 


257 


The  number  of  men  employed  at  once  in  working  the  ram,  and 
the  length  of  time  they  continued,  would  vary  according  to  the 
number  of  the  troops,  the  magnitude  of  the  beam,  the  thickness 
of  the  wall,  &c.  It  is  certain  that  in  some  instances,  upwards  of 
fifty  men  plied  on  each  side,  and  from  the  severity  of  the  labor, 
they  must,  ih  ordinary  cases,  have  been  frequently  relieved.  The 
following  wood  cut  represents  the  battering  ram  protected  by  the 
Testudo,  or  vineeB,  under  which  the  men  employed  in  working  it 
were  protected  from  the  missiles  of  the  enemy. 

ARIES. 


Ariovistus,  i,  king  of  the  Germans,  who  invaded  Gallia,  {France,) 
conquered  a  considerable  part  of  that  country,  and  subjected  the 
inhabitants  to  the  most  cruel  and  oppressive  treatment.  Csesar 
marched  up  to  his  very  camp,  compelled  him  to  fight,  and  gained 
such  a  complete  victory,  that  a  very  few  only,  among  whom  was 


258  AKBIORICiE    CIVITATES AULERCI. 

Ariovistus  himself,  escaped.  These  continued  th'eir  flighty  until 
they  reached  the  banks  of  the  Rhine,  which  they  crossed,  some 
by  swimming,  othexs  by  boats.  Ariovistus,  in  a  little  vessel,  got 
safely  to  the  other  side.  From  this  period  nothing  of  his  history 
is  known. 

Armorlcae  civitates,  Armoric  States,  namely,  those  of  the  Rhedones 
Namnetes,  Ven6ti,  Curiosolites,  Osismii,  Corisopiti,  Unelli,  Am- 
brincatui,  Bajocasses,  Viducasses,  and  Lexovii,  who  inhabited 
the  western  part  of  the  countries,  between  the  Ligeris,  (Loire,) 
and  the  Sequana,  (Seine.)  They  had  this  name  from  their  situa- 
tion on  the  sea  coast;  Armor  signifying,  in  the  language  of  the 
ancient  Gauls,  on  the  sea. 

Armorici,  orura,  the  inhabitants  of  Armor icse. 

Arpinius,  i,  (Caius,)  a  Roman  knight  whom  Caesar  sent  along  with 
Quintus  Junius  to  Ambiorix,  after  he  himself  had  declined  an 
interview  with  that  prince. 

Arverni,  orum,  a  people  of  Galliij  Celtica,  whose  territories  lay  be- 
tween the  sources  of  the  Eleaver,  (Allier,)  anADuranius,  (Dor- 
dogne,)  branches  of  the  Ligeris  and  Garumna.  From  the  nume- 
rous wars  which  they  had  carried  on  against  the  Romans,  Strabo 
infers  their  power  and  resources  must,  in  former  ages,  have  been 
very  great.  Like  the  Romans,  they  boasted  of  being  descended 
from  the  Trojans. 

Atrebates,  ium,  a  people  of  Gallia  BelgTca,  the  neighbors  of  the 
Morini  whose  country  lay  along  the  English  Channel,  opposite  to 
Dover. 

Atrius,  i,  (Quintus,)  an  officer  to  whom  Caesar  gave  the  command 
of  the  shipping,  which  had  carried  him  and  his  army  to  the  coast 
of  Britain. 

Atuatuci,  V.  Aduataci.  orum,  a  people  of  Belgic  Gaul,  '  hose  terri- 
tories  lay  between  the  rivers  Mosa,  (Mce.te,)  and  -ae  Scaldis, 
(Scheld,)  adjoining  to  those  of  the  Nervii  and  Toxar  ari.  Their 
capital  was  Atuatuca,  se,  f.  Tongres,  in  Brabant. 

Aulerci,  orum;  of  this  name  Caesar  mentions  four  nations  of  Gaul- 
Aulerci  Brannovices,  whose  territories,  (Morienne,)  were  adjoin- 
ing to  those  of  the  ^Edui,  Segusiani,  and  Ambivarltij  Aulerci  Ce- 
nomanni,  whose  country,  (Mans,)  lay  between  the  rivers  Sarta 
(Sarte,)  and  Laedus,  two  of  the  northern  branches  of  the  Loire 
Suindlnum,  vel,  Subdinium,  afterwards  Cenomanni,  on  the  Sarte 
was  their  chief  city;  Aulerci  Eburovlces  inhabited  the  lef' 
bank  of  the  Sequana,  (Seine,)  below  Lutetia,  (Paris.)  Their 
chief  town  was  Mediolanura,  afterwards  Eburovlces,  (Evreux.j 


AURUNCULEIUS— BALISTA.  259 

The  Aulerct  Diahlintes,  Diablltee,  et  Diaulltce,  lived  between  the 
two  last  mentioned  nations.  Neodunum,  afterwards  Diablintes^ 
(^Jublens,)  was  their  largest  town.  These  three,  probably,  form- 
ed but  one  people,  and  might,  with  more  propriety,  have  been  de- 
nominated tribes,  than  separate  or  distinct  nations. 

Aurunculeius,  i,  (Lucius  A.  Cotta)  one  of  Caesar's  lieutenants  in 
the  Gallic  War.  He  opposed  the  rash  measure  of  his  colleague, 
in  wishing  to  leave  their  winter  quarters,  at  the  deceitful  sug- 
gestion of  Ambiorix,  but  at  last  yielded  to  the  timidity  of  Titu- 
rius,  which  cost  him  his  life.  He  is  frequently  called  L.  Cotta, 
and  sometimes  Cotta.  * 

Ausci,  orum,  a  people  of  Aquitania  in  Gaul.  Their  capital  was 
Climberris,  v.  Climberrum,  Augusta,  and  at  a  latter  period,  Auci, 
{Auch,)  which  stood  on  the  west  branch  of  the  Ger,  one  of  the 
southern  branches  of  the  river  Garumna,  {Garonne.) 

Auxilia,  orum,  troops  sent  by  foreign  kings  and  states.  They  usu- 
ally received  pay  and  clothing  from  the  republic,  although  some- 
times they  were  supported  by  those  who  sent  them. 

Axona,  ae,  m.  (Jtine,  or  Aisne,)  a  river  of  Gaul,  which  Ausonius 
calls  Prceceps,  from  its  rapidity.  Its  source  was  in  the  territories 
of  the  Rhemi,  which  form  the  department  of  the  Meuse.  It  runs 
in  a  souihwest  direction,  joins  the  Isara,  {here,)  a  little  below 
Campaigne,  and  both  fall  into  the  Sequana,  (Seme,)  about  five 
miles  south  of  Pointoise. 


B. 


Bacenis,  is,  f.  a  forest  of  Germany,  forming  part  of  the  Hercynia 
Silva,  or  Black  Forest.  Caesar  says  it  was  of  prodigious  extent, 
{injinitce  magnitudinis,)  and  like  a  natural  wall,  prevented  the 
mutual  incursions  of  the  Suevi  and  Cherusci. 

Bacttlus;  See  Sextius. 

Baleares,  ium,  a  name  anciently  given  to  the  islands  of  Majorca  and 
Minorca  off  the  coast  of  Spain,  the  inhabitants  of  which  were 
celebrated  for  their  skill  in  the  use  of  the  sling. 

Balearis,  e,  adj.  of  or  belonging  to  the  Balearic  isles. 

Balista,  se,  (from  the  Greek  §aXXw  to  throw,)  a  species  of  military 
engine  used  by  the  Romans  for  throwing  darts,  arrows,  and  stones. 
These  were  of  different  sizes,  and  were  used  with  great  effect 
both  in  battles  and  sieges.    Stones  of  great  weight  were  often 


260 


NOTES    ON    BOOK    VI. 


thrown  by  these  engines  to  a  great  distance,  by  which  battle- 
ments were  thrown  down  and  whole  files  of  men  swept  from  the 
deepest  phalanx.  Their  effect  is  said  to  have  been  little  inferior 
in  sieges  to  that  of  artillery.  The  balista  used  for  throwing  darts 
or  javelins,  represented  in  the  following  wood  cut,  taken  from 
Folard's  commentary  on  Polybius,  resembled  in  its  operation  an 
immense  crossbow,  th^  two  ends  of Avhich  consisted  of  two  levers 
so  twisted  in  coils  of  ropes  as  to  acquire  a  powerful  spring.  The 
extreme  ends  were  united  by  a  strong  rope  which  was  drawn 
back  by  means  of  a  windlass  after  tbe  manner  of  a  bowstring, 
bringing  the  ends  of  the  leyer  back  and  closer  together,  thereby 
twisting  the  coils  of  ropes  to  their  greatest  tension.  When  thus 
drawn  back,  the  javeliA  or  dart  was  placed  in  the  shaft^  directed 
to  the  object  aimed  at,  and,  at  the  pleasure  of  the  operator,  let- 
ting go  the  rope,  was  hurled  with  prodigious  force  from  the  engine 
by  the  recoil  of  the  levers. 

BALISTA  FOR  THROWING  DARTS  AND  JAVELINS. 


The  balista  for  throwing  stones,  (represented  in  the  following 
wood  cut,)  consisted  of  a  strong  lever,  one  end  of  which  was 
made  fast  in  a  twist  of  ropes,  and  the  other  scooped  out  in  the 
form  of  ii  spoon,  for  containing  the  stone  &c.  to  be  thrown.  When 
unbent  the  lever  stood  perpendicular.  In  working  it,  the  end  of 
the  lever  was  brought  down,  by  means  of  a  windlass,  to  a  hori- 
zontal position,  by  which  the  ropes  were  twisted  to  their  greatest 
tensionj  the  stone  or  missile  was  laid  on  in  its  proper  place  and 
thrown  by  the  recoil  of  the  lever  to  a  great  distance,  often  with 
tremendous  effect.    Engines  of  both  kinds,  of  a  larger  size,  were 


BALVENTIUS BELG^. 


261 


more  commonly  called  Balistce,  those  of  a  smaller  size,  Catapul- 
tcB,  which  see 

BALISTA  FOR  THROWING  STONES  OR  OTHER  HEAVY  BODIES. 


Balventius,  i,  (Titus,  i,)  a  man  of  distinguished  courage,  who  had 
both  his  thighs  pierced  with  a  dart,  in  the  attack  which  Ambiorix 
made  upon  the  legions  which  he  hcid  deceitfully  persuaded  to 
leave  their  camp. 

Basilus;  See  Minucius. 

Batavia,  ae,  f.  v.  Insula  Batavorum,  (United  Provinces,)  often  called 
Holland,  from  its  being  the  largest  of  them;  a  country  at  the 
mouth  of  the  Rhine.  It  was  denominated  an  island,  from  being 
bounded  on  two  sides,  by  the  southern  and  northern  branches  of 
the  Rhine,  and  on  the  third  by  the  sea.     B.  IV.  Ch.  10. 

Batavi,  orum,  the  people  of  Batavia,  originally  a  branch  of  the 
Catti,  a  German  nation. 

Belgae,  arum,  a  people  originally  of  German  extraction,  who  inhab- 
ited the  third  division  of  Gaul,  which  was  bounded  on  the  south 
by  the  Matruna,  (Marne.)  and  the  Sequana,  (Seine;)  on  the  east 
and  north  by  the  Rhenus,  (Rhine,)  and  on  the  west  by  Fretum  Brit- 
tannicum,  (Englinh  Channel.)  Strictly  speaking,  Fretum  Brit- 
tanmcum,  v.  Galiicum,  was  confined  to  the  Straits  of  Dover,  but 
seems  ggjnc rally  to  have  had  a  more  extended  signification,  and  to 
have  ttel&ly  corresponded  to  the  modern  appellation,  the  English 
Channel.     Cj^sar  calls  it  Oceanas,  i.  e.  AUantTcus.  of  which  the 


262  BELGJE BODUOSNATUS. 

■;•#■>. 
English  Channel  and  the  German  Sea  form  only  a  very  small  part. 
In  the  division  of  Gaul  made  by  Augustus,  whose  object  was  to  ren- 
der the  different  provinces  more  equal  in  point  of  extent,  the 
countries  of  ihe  Helvetii  and  Sequani,  which  till  that  time  were 
included  in  Gallia  Celtica,  were  added  to  Gallia  Belgica.  Accord- 
ing to  Caesar,  the  Belgoe  were,  of  all  the  Gauls,  the  most  warlike; 
and  he  attributes  their  superiority  in  arms  to  their  being  stran- 
gers  to  luxury  and  refinement.     B.  I.  Ch,  1. 

Belgium,  i,  n.  is,  in  general,  used  by  Caesar  to  denote  a  part  of  Gal- 
lia Belgica,  not  the  whole  country.     See  Belgae. 

Bellovaci,  orum,  a  numerous  and  powerful  tribe  of  the  Belgae,  ad- 
joining the  Bellocassi.  Caleti,  Ambiani,  Veromandui,  and  Silva- 
nectes. 

Bibracte,  is,  n.  afterwards  Angustodunum,  i,  n.  {Autun,)  a  town  of 
the  ^dui,  upon  the  Arroux,  one  of  the  northern  branches  of  the 
Ligeris,  {Loire,)  towards  the  source  of  that  river.  At  this  town 
in  the  7th  year  of  the  Gallic  war  a  general  assembly  of  the  whole 
country  was  held,  to  choose  a  commander  in  chief,  on  whom  the 
uncontrolled  direction  of  all  their  military  operations  should  be 
conferred.  The  ^dui,  who  claimed  that  honor,  had  to  submit  to 
the  unanimous  election  of  Vercingetorix,  q.  v. 

Bibrax,  acis,  f.  (Bievre,)  a  town  of  the  Remi  on  the  Axona,  (Jlisne.) 

Bibroci,  orum,  a  British  nation,  inhabiting  what  now  forms  the 
N.  W.  part  of  Berkshire.  Their  chief  town  was  Bibracte,  (Bray.) 
At  the  time  Caesar  invaded  Britain,  they,  with  the  Cenomagni, 
Ancalltes,  and  Cassii,  seem  to  have  been  subject  to  Cassivel- 
launus. 

Bigerriones,  v.  Bigerrones,  ium,  a  people  of  Aquitania,  who,  with 
sevieral  other  adjoining  tribes,  surrendered  to  Crassus,  one  of 
Caesar's  lieutenants.  Their  territory  was  bounded  on  the  south 
by  the  Pyrenees,  and  was  nearly  at  equal  distances  from  the  Med- 
iterranean and  the  Bay  of  Biscay. 

Bison,  ontis,  v.  onis.  m.  a  buffalo,  a  kind  of  wild  ox,  of  which 
Caesar  has  given  the  best  description  to  be  found  in  the  writings 
of  the  ancients,  (B.  G.  VI.  25.)  The  natural  history  of  this  ani- 
mal is  unknown. 

Bituriges,  um,  a  nation  of  Gallia  Celtica,  on  the  west  side  of  the 
river  Ligeris,  (Loire.)  Their  chief  city,  Avaricum,  was  after- 
wards  called  by  the   name  of  its  inhabitants,  (now  Bourges.) 

Boduognatus,  i,  the  commander  of  the  Nervii,  at  the  tiflie  they  at- 
tacked the  Roman  army  under  Caesar.  >■ 


vHl  Ill|pi 


BOII — BKITANNIA.  263 

Boii,  orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Celtica,  who  came  originally  from 
beyond  tke  Rhine  and  settled  in  the  country  soxith  and  west  of  the 
iEdui  on  the  banks  of  the  Ligcr  and  Elaver, — a  territory  origin- 
ally belonging  to  the  ^dui,  but  which  they  gave  up  to  the  Boii 
with  the  consent  of  Caesar;  B.  I.  Ch.  28.  There  were  several 
tribes  of  the  Boii,  who  lived  in  different  parts  of  Gaul  and  Ger- 
many. In  the  latter  country  their  name  is  still  recognized  in  the 
districts,  Bavaria,  and  Bohemia,  in  the  German  language,  Boier- 
heim,  i.  e.  the  residence  of  the  Boii. 

Bratuspantium,  i,  n.  a  town  of  the  Bellovaci.  It  is  supposed  to 
have  stood  between  Csesaromagnus,  afterwards  Belvacus,  or  Bej- 
vacum,  (Beauvais,)  and  Samarobriva,  {Amiens.)  This  town  is 
not  mentioned  by  any  writer  after  the  commencement  of  the 
Christian  jEra. 

Britannia,  oe,  f.  Britain,  or  Great  Britain,  (anciently  called  Albion,) 
is  the  largest  island  in  Mare  Atlanticum,  (Atlantic  Ovean,)  be- 
longing to  Eurupa,  (Europe.)  That  part  of  th-e  Atlantic  which 
separates  Britain  from  France,  was  called  Fretum  Britannicum, 
(strictly  speaking.  Strait  of  Dover,)  but  its  signification  seems 
often  to  have  been  more  extensive,  and  to  have  corresponded 
nearly  with  the  modern  appellation,  English  Channel.  Oceanus 
Verginius,  (St.  George's  Channel,)  lies  between  Britain  and  Hi- 
bernia,  (Ireland.)  On  the  west,  Oceanus  Calydonicus,  (Scottish 
Sea,)  washed  the  west  and  northwest  parts  of  Scotland,  Oceanus 
Hyperboreus,  (Northern  Sea,)  the  northern  coast,  and  Oceanus 
Germanicus,  (the  German  Ocean, — which  is  more  properly  called 
a  sea,) — formed  its  boundary  on  the  east.  Cajsar's  account,  both  of 
the  'form  and  extent  of  this  island,  is  not  very  far  from  the  truth. 
But  of  the  characters,   manners  and  customs,   of  the  Britons,  a 

'  very  general  description  only  is  to  be  found  in  the  writings  of  the 
ancients.  Little  was  known,  to  the  Romans,  of  this  island  until 
the  invasion  of  Caesar.  This  commander  endeavored,  although 
ineffectually,  to  reduce  it.  After  a  long  interval,  Ostorius,  in  the 
reign  of  Claudius,  subjugated  the  southern  part;  and  Agricola, 
subsequently,  in  the  reign  of  Domitian,  extended  the  Roman  do- 
minion to  the  Frith  of  Forth  and  Clyde.  The  whole  force  of  the 
empire,  although  exerted  to  the  utmost  under  Severus,  could  not, 
however,  reduce  to  subjection  the  hardy  natives  of  the  highlands. 
Britain  continued  a  Roman  province,  until  A.  D.  426,  when  the 
troops  were  in  a  great  measure  withdrawn,  to  assist  Valentinian 
III.  against  the  Huns,  and  never  returned.  The  Britons  had  be- 
come so  enervated  under  the  Roman  yoke,  as  to  be  unable  to  repel 


264  BRITANNI — CiESAR. 

the  incursions  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  north.  They  invoked, 
therefore,  the  aid  of  the  Saxons,  by  whom  they  were  themselves 
subjugated,  and  compelled  at  last  to  take  refuge  among  the  moun- 
tains of  Wales. 

Britanni,  orum,  (sing.  Britannus,  i,)  et  Britones,  v.  Britt6nes,.um, 
(sing.  Britto,  onis,  v.  onis,)  the  people  of  Britania. 

Britannus,  et,  Britannlcus,  a  um,  adj.  of,  or  belonging  to  Britain. 

Brutus,  i,  (Declmus,  i,)  one  of  Caesar's  officers,  to  whom  he  gave 
the  command  of  his  fleet  in  the  Gallic  war,  with  which  he  defeat' 
ed  the  Venetians,  (B-  G.  III.  15,)  and  afterwards  the  people  of 
Marseilles,  in  two  engagements  during  the  civil  war. 


c. 


C.a;R^si,  orum,  a  nation  of  Gallia  Belgica,  who,  with  the  Condrflsl, 
Eburones,  and  Psemani,  went  imder  the  general  appellation  of 
Germans,  and  were  supposed  to  send  40,000  men  to  the  Belgic 
army,  which  was  raised  against  the  Roman  dominion  in  Gaul, 
(B.  G.  II.  4.)  Their  country  was  situated  between  that  of  the 
Treviri  and  the  river  Mosa,  {Meuse.) 

Caesar,  aris,  (Caius  Julius,)  the  first  distinguished  character  of  the 
Caesars,  was  the  son  of  Caius  Csesar  and  Aurelia  the  daughter  of 
Cotta.  He  was  born  in  the  sixth  consulship  of  Marius,  99  years 
B.  C.  He  lost  his  father  in  the  16th  year  of  his  age,  and  the  fol- 
lowing year  obtained  the  office  of  Flamen  Dialis,  {High  Priest  of 
Jupiter.)  He  procured  many  friends  by  his  eloquence,  and  after 
passing  through  the  different  offices  of  Quaestor,  Edile,  High 
Priest,  (Ponttfex  Maxlmus,)  &c.,  he  was  sent  as  governor  into 
Spain,  and  upon  his  return,  being  elected  Consul,  he  entered  into 
an  agreement  with  Pompey  and  Crassus,  that  nothing  should  be 
done  in  the  state  without  their  joint  concurrence.  This  was  called 
the  First  Triumvirate,  and  was  in  fact  a  conspiracy  against  the 
liberties  of  Rome. 

Previous  to  the  expiration  of  his  consulship,  he  obtained  from 
the  people  the  province  of  Cisalpine  Gaul  and  Illyricum,  with 
three  legions  for  five  years;  and  the  Senate,  at  the  desire  of 
Caesar,  added  Transalpine  Gaul  and  another  legion.  These  le- 
gions were  gradually  increased  to  thirteen. 

Caesar  set  out  for  Transalpine  Gaul  in  the  end  of  March,  B.C. 
57,  in  the  42d   year  of  his  age.     With  wonderful  conduct  and 


C^SAR.  1^ 

bravery  he  subdued  this  country  in  about  ten  years,  and  carried 
the  terror  of  his  arms  into  Germany  and  Britain,  till  then  un- 
known to  the  Romans.  The  account  of  these  wars  is  given  by 
Caesar  himself,  in  his  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  war,  in  seven 
bqoks.  These  Commentaries,  or  Journals,  were  composed  on  the 
spot  where  his  battles  were  fought.  The  purity  and  neatness  of 
his  style,  notwithstanding  the  rapidity  with  which  they  must  have 
been  written,  have  not  been  surpassed  by  any  Roman  writer. 
His  narrative  is  perspicuous,  simple,  and  natural.  It  is  at  once 
chaste  and  animated.  His  lucid  and  picturesque  description  pla- 
ces the  whole  scene  distinctly  before  the  reader,  who  accompanies 
him  in  all  his  marches,  and  is  a  witness  of  every  engagement. 
No  passage  occurs  in  all  his  writings,  which  the  most  illiterate  do 
not  understand,  and  the  most  polished  do  not  approve.  To  com- 
pose a  simple  narrative  of  his  campaigns,  for  the  amusement  of 
himself  and  his  friends,  seems  rather  to  have  been  his  object, 
than  to  give  a  specimen  of  his  talents  as  a  profound  historian,  or 
deep  politician.  Hence,  it  were  absurd  to  expect  in  the  Commen- 
taries, a  finished  history.  They  are  mere  outlines,  which  he  per. 
haps  entertained  the  hope  of  seeing  filled  up,  either  by  himself, 
or  by  some  other  hand. 

These  Commentaries  in  seven  books,  and  three  books  concern- 
ing the  civil  M'ar,  are  the  only  genuine  writings  of  Csesar  which 
now  remain.  Of  the  character  of  Caesar  as  a  general  and  histo- 
rian,  Dunlop,  in  his  History  of  Roman  Literature,  Vol.  II.  p.  171, 
&c.,  speaks  thus: 

"Though  the  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  War  comprehend 
but  a  small  extent  of  time,  and  are  not  the  general  history  of  a 
nation,  they  embrace  events  of  the  highest  importance,  and  detail, 
perhaps,  the  greatest  military  operations  to  be  found  in  ancient 
story.  We  see  in  them  all  that  is  great  and  consummate  in  the 
art  of  war.  The  ablest  commander  of  the  most  warlike  people 
on  earth  records  the  history  of  his  own  campaigns.  Placed  at 
the  head  of  the  finest  army  ever  formed  in  the  world,  and  one  de- 
voted to  his  fortunes,  but  opposed  by  prowess  only  second  to  their 
own,  he  and  the  soldiers  he  commanded  may  be  praised  almost  in 
the  words  in  which  Nestor  praised  the  heroes  who  had  gone  be- 
fore him;  for  the  Gauls  and  Germans  were  among  the  bravest 
and  most  warlike  nations  then  on  earth.  In  his  clear  and  scien- 
tific details  of  military  operations,  Caesar  is  reckoned  superior  to 
every  one,  except,  perhaps,  Polybius.  In  general,  too,  when  he 
speaks  of  himself,  it  is  without  alFectation  or  arrogance.  He  talks 
23  t 


266  g^sAR. 

of  Csesar  as  of  an  indifferent  person,  and  always  maintains  the 
character  which  he  has  thus  assumed;  indeed,  it  can  hardly  be 
conceived  that  he  had  so  small  a  share  in  the  great  actions  he  de- 
scribes, as  would  appear  from  his  own  representations.  With 
the  exception  of  the  false  colors  with  which  he  disguises  his  am- 
bitious projects  against  the  liberties  of  his  country,  every  thing 
seems  to  be  told  with  fidelity  and  candor." 

Respecting  the  future  history  of  this  illustrious  man  the  follow- 
ing notices  may  here  suffice.  After  the  conquest  of  Gaul,  Pom- 
pey,  having  become  jealous  of  Caesar's  power,  induced  the  Senate 
to  order  him  to  lay  down  his  command;  upon  which  Csesar  crossed 
the  Rubicon,  the  boundary  of  his  province,  and  led  his  army  to 
Rome,  Pompey  and  all  the  friends  of  liberty  fleeing  before  him. 
Having  subdued  Italy  in  sixty  days,  Caesar  entered  Rome,  and 
seized  upon  the  money  in  the  public  treasury.  He  then  went  to 
Spain,  where  he  conquered  the  partizans  of  Pompey,  and  at  his 
return  was  created  Dictator,  and  soon  after  Consul.  Leaving 
Rome  and  going  in  search  of  Pompey,  the  two  hostile  generals 
engaged  on  the  plains  of  Pharsalia.  The  army  of  Csesar  amount- 
ed to  22,000  men,  while  that  of  Pompey  amounted  to  45,000;  but 
the  superior  generalship  of  Csesar  prevailed,  and  he  was  victo- 
rious. Making  a  generous  use  of  his  victory,  Caesar  followed 
Pompey  into  Egypt,  where  he  heard  of  his  murder,  and  making 
the  country  tributary  to  his  power,  he  hastened  to  suppress  the 
reftnainder  of  Pompey's  party  in  Africa  and  Spain.  Thus  triumph- 
ing over  all  his  enemies,  he  was  created  perpetual  Dictator,  re- 
ceived the  names  of  Imperdtor  and  Pater  Patrice,  and  governed 
the  people  with  justice.  The  consequence,  however,  of  his  en- 
grossing all  the  powers  of  the  state  and  ruling  with  absolute  au- 
thority, engendered  a  spirit  of  opposition  and  general  disgust;  a 
conspiracy  was  formed  against  him  by  more  than  sixty  senators, 
the  chief  of  whom  were  Brutus  and  Cassias.  Accordingly,  on 
the  15th  of  March,  44  years  B,  C,  and  in  the  56th  jear  of  his 
age,  on  his  entrance  into  the  Senate  house,  he  was  stabbed,  and 
fell,  pierced  with  twenty-three  wounds,  at  the  foot  of  Pompey's 
statue. 

Of  Caesar's  intrepidity  as  a  soldier,  and  abilities  as  a  com- 
mander, the  armies  which  he  defeated  and  the  countries  which 
he  conquered  are  sufficient  proofs.  To  the  talents  of  a  consum- 
mate general  he  added  those  of  an  elegant  historian  and  a  persua- 
sive orator.    He  spoke  with  the  same  spirit  with  w^hich  he  fought, 


^^- 


CALETES CASSIVELATTNUS.  28^ 

and  had  he  devoted  himself  to  the  bar,  he  would  have  been  the 
only  man  capable  of  rivalling  Cicero. 

Caletes,  ium,  v.  Caleti,  orum,  a  people  of  Gaul,  whose  country  lay 
a  little  to  the  north  of  the  mouth  of  the  SequSna,  (Seine.) 

Cantabri,  orum,  (sing.  Cantaber,  ri,)  a  very  brave  and  warlike  peo- 
ple, who  inhabited  the  northern  part  of  Spain.  They  seem  to 
have  extended  from  the  mouths  of  Iberus,  (Ebro,)  to  the  shores 
of  the  Bay  of  Biscay,  which  was,  from  them,  called  Ocednus  Can- 
tdbricus.  The  term  is  often  used  to  denote  the  Spaniards  in  gen- 
eral. 

Cantium,  i,  n.  {Kent,)  a  district  of  England  which,  in  modern  limes, 
is  bounded  by  the  Strait  of  Dovel:,  (Fretum  Gallicum,  vel,  Britan- 
nicum)  on  the  east,  by  Sussex  on  the  south,  on  the  west  by  Surry, 
and  on  the  north  by  the  Thames,  (Tamesis,)  which  separates  it 
from  Essex.  But  the  sfticient  boundaries  of  Kent  are  not  precisely 
ascertained. 

CarcSiso,  onis,  f.  Carcasonne,  a  town  of  that  part  of  Provincia,  now 
called  Languedoc,  on  the  river  Atax,  {Aude.)  Here  are  preserv- 
ed  some  records  of  the  place,  written  upon  the  bark  of  trees. 

Carfulenus,  i,  an  officer  of  Caesar,  who  was  digpatched  to  attack  the 
highest  part  of  the  camp  of  the  Alexandrians,  which  he  carried. 
He  was  afterwards  killed- in  an  engagement  at  Mutina,  fighting 
against  Anthony. 

Carnutes,  um,  v.  ti,  orum,  a  powerful  nation  of  Gaul,  between  the 
rivers  Sequlna,  (Seine,)  and  Ligeris,  (Loire,)  south  of  Liftetia, 
(Paris.) 

Carvilius,  i,  one  of  the  four  kings  of  Cantium,  (Kent,)  who,  at  the 
command  of  Cassivelaunus,  made  an  attack  on  Caesar's  naval 
camp,  in  which  they  were  repulsed,  and  lost  a  great  number  of 
men. 

Cassi,  orum,  tht  hundred  of  Caishow,  a  British  nation,  supposed  to 
be  subject  to  Cassivelaunus  at  the  time  Caesar  invaded  Britain, 
who  submitted  to  that  conqueror 

Cassias,  i,  (Lucius,  i,)  a  Roman  consul,  who  was  killed  by  the 
Helvetii,  who  defeated  his  army  and  obliged  it  to  pass  under  the 
yoke. 

Cassivelaunus,  i,  one  of  the  British  kings,  whose  territories  lay  on 
the  north  bank  of  the  TamSsis,  (Thames,)  -towards  the  mouth  of 
that  river.  On  the  arrival  of  the  Roman  forces  in  Britain  under 
Caesar,  he  was,  by  common  consent,  appointed  Commander-in- 
chief.    After  making  some  attempts  to  check  the  progress  of  the 


^68  '  CASTICTXS — CASTRA. 

enemy,  he  was  obliged  to  submit,  and  accept  of  such  terms  as 
Caesar  chose  to  offer. 

Casticus,  i,  one  of  the  SequSni,  the  son  of  Gatamantaledis,  whom 
Orgetorix  persuaded  to  seize  on  the  sovereignty  of  the  state, 
which  his  father  had  formerly  held. 

Castra,  orum,  a  camp .  The  discipline  of  the  Romans  was  chiefly  con- 
spicuous in  their  marches  and  encampments.  They  never  passed 
a  night,  even  in  the  longest  marches,  without  pitching  a  camp,  and 
fortifying  it  with  a  rampart  and  ditch.  The  form  of  the  Roman 
camp,  till  later  ages,  was  square,  and  was  always  of  the  same 
figure.  It  was  surrounded  by  a  ditch,  usually  nine  feet  deep,  and 
twelve  feet  broad,  and  by  a  rampart  or  vallum,  composed  of  the 
earth  dug  from  the  ditch,  and  having  sharp  stakes  stuck  into  it. 
The  camp  had  four  gates,  one  on  each  side.  They  were  called 
porta  PRETORIA,  next  the  enemy;  Dejumana,  opposite  to  the 
former;  porta  Principalis  Dextra,  on  the  right  side  of  the  camp, 
at  one  end  of  the  main  street  called  Principia;  and  Principalis 

.  Sinistra,  on  the  left  side,  at  the  other  end.  The  camp  was  di- 
vided into  two  parts,  called  the  upper  and  lower,  by  the  main 
street  just  mentioned.  In  the  lower  part  the  troops  were  disposed 
in  the  following  order.  The  cavalry  were  in  the  middle;  on  both 
sides  of  them  were  the  triarii,  princlpes,  and  hastdti,  or  the  third, 
second,  and  first  Roman  ranks;  and  next  to  these,  on  both  sides, 
were  the  cavalry  and  foot  of  the  allies,  who  were  always  posted 
in  separate  places,  lest  they  should  form  any  plots  by  being  united. 
The  velites  commonly  occupied  the  empty  space  between  the  ram- 
parts and  tents,  which  was  200  feet  broad.  The  tents  were  cov- 
ered  with  leather  or  skins,  extended  by  means  of  ropes.  In  each 
tent  were  usually  ten  soldiers,  with  their  decanus  or  petty  officer 
who  commanded  them.  The  different  divisions  of  the  troops 
were  separated  by  intervals  called  ViiE.  Of  these  there  were 
five  longwise,  i.  e.  running  from  the  decuman  towards  the  preeto-ir, 
rian  side;  and  three  across,  one  in  the  lower  part  of  the  camp, 
called  quintana,  and  two  in  the  upper,  namely,  the  principia,  and 
another  between  the  prcetorium  and  the  praetorian  gate.  The  fol- 
lowing wood  cut  and  illustration  will  give  a  good  idea  of  its  shape 
and  arrangements. 


CASTRA. 


269 


GROUND  PLAN  OF  THE  ROxMAN  CAMP. 


Y//!iS'/\ 


35 

M 

12 

II 

9    8 

15 

14 

12 

II 

9    8 

15 

14 

,  rz 

"in 

9    a     r, 

15 

14 

12 

II 

0   8 

15 

14 

12 

II 

D    S 

IS 

14 

12 

.1 

3  a 

15 

14 

12 

11 

9   8 

15 

14C 

j2 
12 

^10 

II 

9   8   7 

15 

14 

8    8 

15 

14 

13 

II 

8-8 

8 

9 

11 

12 

12 

13 

14 

15 

s 

9 

14 

15 

S 

9 

.  " 

12 

14 

15 

8 

0 

)i 

12 

14 

15 

8 

9 

11 

12 

14 

15 

10 

IK 

a 

9 

11 

12 

13 

M 

15 

8 

9 

11 

12 

14 

15 

8 

9 
9 

11 

12 

14 

15 

11 

12 

14 

15 

8 

9 

11 

12 

14 

15 

I 


a 


1.  The  PrcBtorium,  or  general's  tent,   with  a   sufficient  space 
around  for  the  tents  of  his  suite. 

2.  Ground  behind  the  tents  of  the  Tribunes,  for  their  horses, 
baggage,  &c. 

3.  The  tents  of  the  Tribunes. 

4.  Ground  behind  the  tents  of  the  Prefects  of  the  Allies,  for 
their  horses,  baggage,  &c. 

5.  The  tents  of  the  Prcefects  of  the  Allies. 

6.  A  cross   street,   one  hundred   feet  wide,  called  Principia. 
(Vid.  Pkincipia.) 

7.  A  cross  street,  fifty  feet  wide,  on  both  sides  of  which  were 
the  tents  of  the  Roman  horse. 

8.  The  Horse  of  two  Roman  legions,  in  ten  turmse  or  troops 
each. 

9.  The  Triarii  of  two  Roman  legions  (Fiti.  Triakii),  in  ten 
maniples  each,  facing  on  two  different  streets. 


270  CASTRA. 

10.  Two  streets,  each  fifty  feet  wide,  between  the  Triarii  and 
Principes  of  two  legions. 

11.  The  Principes  of  two  Roman  legions  (Vid.  Principes),  in 
ten  maniples  each. 

12.  The  Hastdti  of  two  Roman  legions  {Vid.  Hastati),  in  ten 
maniples  each. 

13.  Two  streets,  each  fifty  feet  wide,  between  the  Hastati  of 
the  two  Roman  legions  and  the  Horse  of  the  Allies. 

14.  The  Horse  of  the  Allies,  wanting  the  Extraordinarii  {Vid. 
No.  25),  and  placed  in  two  different  parts  of  the  camp.  The  for- 
ces of  the  allies,  both  cavalry  and  infantry,  were  always  sepa- 
rated in  this  manner,  to  prevent  plotting,  as  remarked  above. 

15.  The  Infantry  of  the  Allies,  wanting  the  Extraordinarii,  and, 
like  the  horse,  placed  in  two  different  parts  of  the  camp. 

16.  The  Quintdna  (scil.  via),  a  street  fifty  feet  wide,  running 
across  the  camp,  between  the  fifth  and  sixth  maniples  of  each 
line.  Hence,  as  it  comes  after  the  fifth  maniple,  reckoned  from 
the  Principia,  it  received  the  name  of  Quintdna. 

17.  The  QucBstorium,  or  Quaestor's  tent. 

18.  The  tents  of  the  Legdti.  The  space  in  front  of  these  and 
the  Qucestorium  was  called  the  Forum,  where  things  were  sold,  &c. 

19.  Evocdti  Equites,  or  Veteran  Horse.     (Vid.  Evocati.) 

20.  Evocdti  Pedites,  or  Veteran  Foot. 

21.  Ahlecti  Equites  (Vid.  No.  25),  or  Horse  of  the  Consular 
life-guards. 

22.  Ablecti  Pedites,  or  foot  of  the  Consular  life-guards. 

23.  A  cross  street  one  hundred  feet  wide. 

24.  A  street  fifty  feet  wide. 

25.  Extraordinarii  Equites.  A  third  part  of  the  allied  horse, 
and  a  fifth  part  of  the  allied  foot,  were  selected,  and  posted  near 
the  consul,  under  the  name  of  Extraordinarii,  and  one  troop  of 
horse,  and  maniple  of  loot,  called  Ablecti,  or  Selecti,  to  serve  as 
his  life-guard. 

26.  Extraordinarii  Pedites. 

27.  Quarters  for  strangers  coming  to  the  camp. 

28.  A  space  two  hundred  feet  broad,  between  the  outermost 
tents  and  the  rampart. 

29.  Rampart,  or  Vallum. 

30.  Ditch,  usually  nine  feet  deep  and  twelve  feet  broad. 

31.  Porta  Principalis  Dextra. 

32.  Porta  Principalis  Sinistra. 


I 


CATAPDLTA CELT^  2^1 

33.  Porta  Decumdna  (i.  e.  Decimdna,  fvom.  decern,  ten,)  so  called 
because  all  the  tens  of  the  maniples  end  here. 

34.  Porta  Pretoria. 

35.  A  traverse  breastwork,  with  a  ditch,  opposite  to,  and  pro* 
tecting,  each  of  the  gates.    {Anthori's  Ccesar.) 

Catapulta,  a  military  engine  for  discharging  stones,  arrows,  and 
other  missiles.     (Fw^.  Balista.) 

Catamantaledes,  is,  a  nobleman  of  the  nation  of  the  Sequani,  who, 
for  many  years,  enjoyed  the  supreme  authority  over  that  people. 

Cativolcus,  i,  a  nobleman  of  the  nation  of  the  Eburones.  He  and 
Ambiorix,  at  the  instigation  of  Indutiomarus,  excited  the  people 
to  take  up  arms  against  the  Romans.  Having  made  an  unsuccess- 
ful attack  upon  the  Roman  camp  under  the  lieutenants,  Titu* 
rius  Sabinus,  and  L.  Aurunculeius  Cotta,  they  demanded  a 
conference,  in  which  Ambiorix  stated,  that  from  gratitude  to 
Caesar,  he  considered  himself  bound  to  inform  his  lieutenant,  that 
all  the  states  of  Gaul  had  agreed  to  attack  the  Roman  camp  in 
one  day,  that  a  great  body  of  Germans  had  passed  the  Rhine,  and 
that  no  time  was  to  be  lost  in  joining  Cicero  or  Labienus,  neither 
of  whom  were  fifty  miles  distant.  At  the  same  time,  he  gave  his 
solemn  promise,  that  they  should  have  a  secure  retreat  through 
his  territories.  This  artifice,  through  the  folly  or  cowardice  of 
Sabinus,  succeeded.  They  left  their  camp,  were  attacked  by  a 
powerful  army  under  Ambiorix  and  Cativolcus,  and  were  almost 
to  a  man  cut  in  pieces.  Csesar  afterwards  completely  routed 
them;  and  Cativolcus,  from  his  great  age,  being  unable  to  bear 
the  fatigues  of  war,  poisoned  himself  by  drinking  the  juice  of  the 
yew-tree. 

Caturiges,  gum,  a  people  of  Gaul,  who  lived  near  the  Alpes  Marit- 
imse,  at  the  S.  E.  extremity  of  Dauphine. 

Cavarinus,  i,  a  nobleman  whom  Csesar,  in  prejudice  of  his  brother 
Moritasgus,  the  reigning  sovereign,  appointed  king  over  his  coun- 
trymen, the  Senones,  an  honor  which  his  ancestors  had  long  en- 
joyed. The  Senones  formed  the  design  of  publicly  assassinating 
him,  but  having  received  intelligence  of  the  plot,  he  saved  his 
life  by  fleeing  to  the  camp  of  Csesar. 

Celtae,  arum,  the  most  powerful  and  numerous  of  ail  the  nations  of 
Gaul,  who  occupied  nearly  one-half  of  the  country,  and  from  whom 
that  division  was  called  Celtica.  Their  territories  were  bounded 
by  the  river  Garumna,  (Garonne,)  on  the  south;  the  SequSna, 
(^Seine,)  and  the  Matrona,  (Marne,)  on  the  north;  by  Mount  Jura 
on  the  east;  and  Mare  Atlanticum,  {Atlantic  Ocean,)  on  the  west. 


272  CENIMAGNl — CENSUS. 

Cenimagni,  orum,  an  ancient  people  of  Britain,  who,  with  the  Se- 
gontiaci,  Ancalites,  Bibroci,  and  Cassi,  followed  the  example  of 
the  Trinobantes,  and  submitted  to  Caesar.  These  nations  are 
supposed  to  have  inhabited  the  counties  of  Essex,  Middlesex,  Nor- 
folk, Hertford,  Buckingham,  Oxford,  and  Berkshire. 

Censor,  is,  a  Censor,  a  Roman  magistrate  whose  number  from  first 
to  last  was  uniformly  two.  They  were  appointed  (A.  U.  312,)  to 
take  an  account  of  the  number  of  the  people,  and  the  value  of  their 
fortunes,  and  superintend  the  public  morals.  They  were  chosen 
from  the  most  reputable  persons  of  consular  rank,  at  first  only 
from  the  patricians  but  afterwards  likewise  from  the  plebians. 
They  were  chosen  every  five  years,  but  continued  in  office  only 
a  year  and  a  half.  For  any  dishonorable  action  they  had  the  power 
to  erase  the  name  of  a  Senator  from  the  list,  deprive  an  eques  of 
his  horse  and  ring,  and  any  other  citizen  they  could  degrade  and 
deprive  of  all  the  privileges  of  a  Roman  citizen,  except  liberty. 
The  title  of  Censor  was  even  more  honorable  than  that  of  Con- 
sul, though  attended  with  less  povter.  No  one  could  be  elected  a 
second  time,  and  those  who  filled  it  were  remarkable  for  leading 
an  irreproachable  lifej  so  that  to  be  descended  from  a  censorian 
family  was  considered  a  distinguished  ornament  of  nobility. 

Census,  us,  m.  was  a  general  review  of  the  people,  estimating  their 
estates,  and  proportioning  their  share  of  the  public  taxes.  Every 
man  was  obliged  to  give  in  to  the  Censors  his  own  name,  resi- 
dence and  occupation,  his  wife's  name,  and  the  names  of  his 
children  with  their  ages,  the  number  of  his  slaVes,  and  a  minute 
and  accurate  account  of  his-  property.  The  goods  of  the  person, 
who  made  a  false  return,  were  confiscated,  and  he  himself,  after 
being  scourged,  was  sold  for  a  slave.  By  that  act  he  had,  in  the 
opinion  of  the  state,  deemed  himself  unworthy  of  the  privileges 
and  honors  of  a  Roman  citizen.  Servius  Tullius,  the  6th  king  of 
Rome,  appointed  the  Census,  in  order  to  ascertain  the  number  of 
men  able  to  bear  arms,  and  the  amount  of  the  whole  wealth  pos- 
sessed by  the  citizens,  and  consequently  what  sums  could  be  lev- 
ied from  them.  It  was  held  in  the  Campus  Martins,  where  the 
Censors,  seated  in  curule  chairs,  attended  by  their  clerks  and 
public  officers,  commanded  the  citizens  to  be  called  before  them, 
each  in  his  own  tribe.  If  nothing  immoral  or  improper  could  be 
charged  against  a  senator  or  knight,  they  passed  without  remark,- 
but  if  otherwise,  the  senators  were  expelled  the  senate,  and  the 
public  horse  taken  from  the  knight.  The  other  citizens  were  raised 
to  a  higher  tribe,  if  their  wealth  had  increased,  or  sunk  to  a  lower 


CENTURIO — CICERO.  273 

tribe,  if  diminished;  improper  conduct  deprived  them  of  their 
right  of  voting,  or  subjected  them  to  be  taxed  like  strangers.  A 
minute  register  of  the  whole  was  kept,  and  must  have  been  of 
great  advantage  to  the  whole  community,  as  determining  with 
precision  not  only  their  number,  but  also  their  wealth .  It  ought 
to  have  been  held  at  the  end  of  every  five  years;  but  it  is  mani- 
fest from  Roman  history,  that  this  period  was  not  pointedly  ob- 
served. At  the  end  of  this  survey  of  the  people  they  were  ordered 
to  attend  a  lustration,  called,  from  sacrificing,  a  sow,  a  sheep,  and 
abull,  Suovetaurilia.  The  precedency  at  this  sacrifice  was  de- 
cided by  lot,  and  he  on  whom  the  lot  fell  was  at  the  conclusion 
said  ''  lustrum  condere." 

Centurio,  onis,  f,  (from  centum,  a  hundred,)  a  centurion  or  com- 
mander of  a  hundred  men.  The  constitution  of  the  Roman  legion 
admitted  of  a  gradation  from  the  lowest  centurion  of  the  Hastati, 
up  to  the  first  of  the  Triarii,  who  was  called  Primipilus,  q.  v. 
To  the  first  captaincy,  the  meanest  common  soldier  might  aspire. 
Promotion  in  the  Roman  army  could  be  obtained  only  by  merit; 
appointments  by  purchase  were  unknown.  This  wise  regulation 
produced  the  happiest  effects.  Besides  each  cohort  having  six 
centurions,  and  consequently  each  legion  sixty,  opened  a  wide 
field  for  promotion,  and  suggested  numerous  excitements  to  valor 
and  heroism. 

Centrones,  urn  (B.  G.  I.  5,)  a  nation  of  Gaul  in  the  Alpes  Graiae, 
who,  along  with  the  Garoceli  and  Caturiges,  were  defeated  by 
Caesar  in  several  engagements.  There  was  another  tribe,  or 
horde,  of  this  name,  who  were  subject  to  the  Nervii,  a  nation  of 
Gallia  Belgica,  (B.  G.  Ch.  V.  38.) 

Cherusci,  5rum,  m.  a  nation  of  Germany,  between  the  rivers  Albis, 
(Elbe,)  and  the  Visurgis,  (Weser.) 

Cicero,  onis,  (Quintus  TuUius,)  the  brother  of  Marcus  TuUius 
Cicero,  the  celebrated  orator,  was,  after  the  expiration  of  his 
praetorship,  proconsul  of  Asia  for  three  years.  He  gained  con- 
siderable reputation  as  one  of  Caesar's  lieutenants  in  Gaul.  At 
the  commencement  of  the  civil  war,  he,  in  oppositiou  to  the  ad- 
vice of  his  brother,  attached  himself  to  Pompey.  After  Caesar 
had  defeated  the  republicans  at  Pharsalia,  both  Quintus  and  his 
son  solicited  the  favor  of  the  conqueror,  by  unjustly  imputing 
their  misconduct  to  the  orator.  So  far  was  Cicero  from  resenting 
this  injustice,  that  he  used  his  utmost  efforts  for  their  safety  and 
interest.  Both  perished  in  the  proscription  of  the  second  trium- 
virate. 


274  CIMBERIUS — CLEPSYDRA. 

Cimberius,  i,  the  brother  of  Nasua,  who  headed  the  100  cantons  of 
the  Suevi,  who  had  left  their  native  country,  and  encamped  on 
the  banks  of  the  river  Rhenus,  (Rhine,}  with  the  view  of  cross- 
ing  that  river,  and  settling  in  Gaul. 

Cimbri,  orum,  (sing.  Cimber,  ri,)  a  German  nation,  supposed  to  be 
descended  from  the  Asiatic  Cimmerians,  whose  country  was,  from 
them,  called  the  Chersonesus  Cimbrica,  (Jutland,)  which  now 
forms  part  of  the  kingdom  of  Denmark.  About  113,  B,  C.  the 
Cimbri,  leaving  their  territories,  which  were  both  narrow  and 
barren,  and  being  joined  by  the  TeutoneSj.a  neighboring  people, 
defeated  several  German  nations,  and  a  Roman  consul  with  his 
army,  who  had  been  sent  against  them.  They  invaded,  and  seem 
to  have  overrun,  a  great  part  of  Gaul;  and  being  strengthened  by 
the  accession  of  many  of  the  tribes  who  inhabited  that  country, 
marched  against  Rome.  After  slaughtering  the  whole  army  of 
Caepio  and  Mallius,  except  ten  men  and  two  generals,  C.  Marius 
marched  against  them,  slew  120,000  and  took  60,000  prisoners. 
Though  only  an  inconsiderable  people  in  the  days  of  Tacitus,  it 
is  manifest,  that  the  sagacity  of  that  profound  historian  was  ap- 
prehensive of  the  final  destruction  of  the  Roman  state  by  the 
hordes  of  Germany,  which  actually  happened  about  300  years 
after  his  death. 

Cingetorix,  igis,  a  nobleman  who  headed  that  party  in  the  state 
of  the  Treviri,  which  was  formerly  attached  to  Caesar.  In  con- 
sequence of  his  fidelity  to  the  Romans,  he  was,  by  means  of  his 
father-in-law,  Indutiomarus,  declared  a  public  enemy,  and  his 
estate  confiscated. 

Cingetorix,  igis,  one  of  the  four  kings  of  Cantium,  (Kent,)  who,  by 
order  of  Cassivelaunus,  made  an  attack  pn  Caesar's  naval  camp. 

Clepsydra,  se,  f.  an  instrument  contrived  to  measure  time  by  water. 
The  merit  of  this  invention  belongs  to  the  Egyptians,  as  well  as 
the  discovery  of  the  sun-dial. 

There  were  different  kinds  of  Clepsydrae  among  the  ancientsj 
which,  however,  were  all  constructed  on  this  principle,  that  the 
water  ran  through  a  narrow  passage  from  one  vessel  to  another, 
and  that  on  the  surface  of  the  water  in  the  lower  vessel,  to  the 
side  of  which  a  scale  of  hours  was  affixed,  floated  a  piece  of  cork, 
which  shewed  the  hour.  It  is  manifest  the  water  would  be  dis- 
charged with  a  rapidity  proportioned  to  the  quantity,  and  that,  of 
course,  it  ran  fastest  when  the  vessel  was  full,  and  gradually  be- 
came slower  as  the  less  water  remained.  Hence  if  the  upper 
vessel  discharged  its  water  in  twelve  hours,  and  the  under  one 


COCOSATES CONSUT..  276 

was  an  exact  cylinder  having  its  height  divided  into  144  equal 
parts,  the  water  in  the  first  hour  would  rise  twenty- three  of  the^e 
parts,  in  the  second  hour,  twenty-one,  in  the  third,  nineteen,  &c., 
and  the  last  or  twelfth  hour  only  one  part.  The  state  of  the  at- 
mosphere would  have  considerable  influence  on  the  clepsydra,  a 
defect  which  the  ingenuity  of  a  modern  French  philosopher,  Wil- 
liam Amontons,  has  completely  remedied.  By  means  of  several 
important  inventions  he  also  freed  it  from  other  less  inconvenien- 
ces to  which  it  was  subject;  and  rendered  it  a  very  accurate  di- 
visor of  time, 

Cocosates,  um,  ^people  of  Aquitania  in  Gaul,  whose  country  lay 
along  the  coast  of  OceSnus  Cantabricus,  (Bay  of  Biscay,)  to  the 
north  of  the  territories  of  the  Tarbelli.  Their  chief  town  was 
Cocosa. 

Clypeus,  i.  a  round  shield  of  a  smaller  size  than  the  Scutum,  which 
see. 

Cohors,  tis,  a  division  of  the  Roman  legion.     See  Legio. 

Comius,  i,  one  of  the  nation  of  the  Atrebates,  hence  called  Comius 
Atrfibas,  whom  Caesar  appointed  king  over  that  people  in  return 
for  his  important  services.  He  afterwards  fell  under  the  suspicion 
of  Labienus,  who  employed  C.  Volusenus  Quadra tus  to  kill  him 
in  an  interview.  This  perfidious  design  did  not  succeed.  But  in 
the  scuffle,  Comius  was  wounded  in  the  head.  He  was,  from  that 
period,  a  violent  enemy  to  the  Romans.  Being  at  last  defeated, 
he  was  obliged  to  submit  to  Antony,  which  he  did,  on  condition 
that  he  should  not  appear  before  any  Roman.  On  these  terms, 
Antony  granted  him  peace. 

Condrusi,  orum,  a  people  of  Belgic  Gaul,  who  lived  on  the  river 
Mosa,  (Mase,  or  Meuse,)  north  of  Silva  Arduenna. 

Considius  Longus,  (Caius,  i,)  a  partisan  of  Pompey,  who  was  at 
one  time  the  governor  of  Adrumetum.  He  committed  several 
acts  of  enormous  cruelty.  Considius  afterwards  commanded  at 
Tisdra  a  garrison  of  Gaetulians,  and,  on  hearing  of  the  defeat  of 
his  party,  fled  from  that  town  with  his  treasures.  Escaping  from 
these  barbarians  and  taking  the  road  for  Numidia,  he  was  pursu- 
ed by  them,  and  to  obtain  possession  of  his  money,  they  put  him 
to  death. 

Consul,  ulis,  a  consul;  the  ofiicial  title  of  the  two  chief  magistrates 
of  the  Roman  state.  They  were  first  created  after  the  expulsion 
of  the  kings,  A.  U.  244.  They  had  the  same  badges  as  the  kings, 
except  the  crown,  and  nearly  the  same  power.  In  time  of  war 
they  had  supreme  command ;  one  accompanied  the  army  as  com> 


276  COJ^SULARIS COTTA. 

mander-in-chief,  and  the  other  remained  at  Romej  or,  if  neces- 
sary, commanded  another  army,  leaving  the  government  in  charge 
of  the  Praetor.  They  levied  soldiers,  appointed  the  greater  part 
of  the  officers,  and  provided  what  was  necessary  for  their  support. 

When  any  dangerous  conjuncture  arose,  the  consuls  were  armed 
with  absolute  power  by  the  Senate,  which  solemnly  decreed  that 
they  should  take  care  that  the  republic  received  no  harm.  If  any 
serious  tumult  or  sedition  occurred,  they  called  the  citizens  to 
arms  by  proclaiming  '*  Let  those  who  wish  to  save  the  republic 
follow  me 5 "  and  this  was  usually  sufficient  to  check  it. 

The  authority  of  the  consuls  was  first  impair^  by  the  creation 
of  Tribunes  of  the  people,  and  afterwards  by  the  Emperors.  The 
office  however  was  retained,  and  the  consuls,  after  their  power 
was  gone,  were  still  employed  in  consulting  the  Senate,  adminis- 
tering justice,  managing  the  public  games  and  the  likej  and  the 
year  was  usually  characterized  by  their  names. 

At  first  the  consuls  were  chosen  from  the  Patricians  only,  but 
afterwards  from  the  Plebians  also.  They  were  elected  annually, 
and  to  be  a  candidate  it  was  necessary  to  be  forty-three  years  of 
age, — to  have  gone  through  the  inferior  offices  of  Qucestor,  ^dile, 
and  Prcetor, — and  to  be  present  in  a  private  station. 

Proconsul,  ulis,  a  proconsul,  a  person  invested  with  consular 
authority  for  the  government  of  a  conquered  country.  The  con- 
suls, at  the  expiration  of  their  offices,  were  generally  appointed 
proconsuls,  and  soon  after  quitted  the  city  to  take  charge  of  their 
province.  Their  powers,  though  subject  to  the  will  of  the  senate 
and  authority  of  the  people,  were  very  extensive.  They  had  the 
appointment  of  the  taxes  and  of  the  contributions  imposed  on  the 
country,  and  it  cannot  be  denied,  that  avarice  and  rapacity  too 
often  trampled  on  the  principles  of  justice  and  humanity.  To  the 
honor  of  the  Senate  it  must  be  mentioned,  that  they  frequently 
punished  acts  both  of  extortion  and  cruelty.  These  crimes,  how- 
ever, were  generally  very  flagrant  before  they  became  tht  subject 
of  prosecution. 

Proconsularis,  is,  e,  of  or  belonging  to  a  proconsul,  or  the  pro- 
consulship,  proconsular. 
Consularis,  e,  adj.  of  or  belonging  to  a  consul;  consular;  one  who 

had  been  a  consul;  a  man  of  consular  rank. 
Cotta,  ae,    (Lucius   Aurunculeius,)  a  lieutenant  in  Caesar's  army, 
who  suspected  the  stratagem  of  Ambiorix,  and  therefore  endeav- 
ored to  convince  his  colleague  Sablnus  of  the  impropriety  of  fol- 
lowing the  treacherous  advice  of  that  crafty  Gaul,  but  without 


cRASSus.  277 

effect.  Unwilling  that  any  enmity,  from  difference  of  opinion, 
should  exist  between  them,  he  at  last  yielded,  and  his  compliance 
cost  him  his  life.  Ambiorix,  at  the  distance  of  two  miles  from 
the  camp,  lay  in  ambuscade,  and  when  crossing  a  large  valley, 
made  a  furious  attack  on  the  Roman  forces,  in  which  Cotta,  after 
displaying  singular  bravery,  was  killed,  and  almost  the  whole  of 

^    the  two  legions. 

Crassus,  i,  (Marcus  Licinius,)  surnamed  Dives,  on  account  of  his 
prodigious  wealth,  was,  in  early  life,  very  poor,  but  by  traffick- 
ing in  slaves,  and  by  other  dishonorable  practices,  soon  acquired 
great  riches.  To  escape  the  cruelties  of  Cinna,  he  fled  to  Spain, 
where  he  had  formerly  passed  some  years  with  his  father,  when 
governor  of  that  country;  and  remained  eight  months  concealed 
in  a  cave.  On  hearing  of  Cinna's  death,  he  raised  2.500  men, 
for  whom  he  procured  shipping,  sailed  to  Africa,  and  attached 
himself  to  Metdlus  Pius.  The  friendship  of  Crassus  with  Me- 
tellus  was  not  of  long  continuance.  He  then  formed  an  alliance 
with  Sulla,  and  was  of  great  service  to  him  in  the  civil  war. 
The  military  talents  of  Crassus  were  greatly  inferior  to  those  of 
Pompey,  who,  on  that  account,  necessarily  stood  higher  in  the 
favor  of  Sulla.  Hence  the  enmity  of  these  two  powerful  citizenb, 
which  all- the  address  and  eloquence  of  Caesar  could  scarcely  sub- 
due. The  great  object  of  Crassus  seems  to  have  been  the  accu- 
mulation of  wealth.  Besides  buying  the  estates  of  the  proscrib- 
ed, he  had  recourse  to  other  base  and  scandalous  means  in  order 
to  increase  his  overgrown  fortune. 

Crassus  was  not  however,  destitute  of  bravery  or  generosit5% 
He  was  honored  with  an  ovation  for  putting  an  end  to  the  war 
with  SpartScus  by  a  decisive  engagement,  in  which  12,000  of  the 
slaves  were  killed.  He  used  frequently  to  lend  money  to  his 
friends  without  interest.  After  entertaining  the  populace  at 
10,000  tables,  giving  to  every  citizen  corn  to  support  him  for  three 
months,  and  consecrating  the  tenth  part  of  his  property  to  Hercu- 
les, he  was  worth  7,100  talents.  He  used  to  say  that  no  man, 
who  could  not  maintain  an  ar-my  ought  to  be  called  rich.  His 
slaves  whom  he  had  ingenuity  enough  to  employ  so  profitably  that 
they  not  only  defrayed  their  own  expenses,  but  added  greatly  to 
the  wealth  of  their  master,  were,  in  number,  equal  to  an  army. 

A  reconciliation  between  Crassus  and  Pompey  was,  at  last,  ef- 
fected by  Csesar.     The  iniquitous  combination  of  these  three  men 
to  destroy  the  liberties  of  their   fellow-citizens,  was  called  the 
first  triumvirate.     Less  solicitous  for  honor  than  riches,  Crassus, 
24 


278  CRETENSES DANUBIUS. 

in  this  division  of  the  empire,  chose  Syria  for  his  province,  in  ex- 
pectation of  making  large  additions  to  his  fortune.  Without  the 
authority  of  the  senate,  he  crossed  the  Euphrates  and  advanced 
against  that  country.  But  he  was  deceived  by  Agbarus,  an  Ara- 
bian, defeated  by  the  Parthians,  and  his  army  nearly  annihilated. 
He  then  fled  with  a  small  number  of  his  soldiers  to  Carrae,  a  town 
of  Mesopotamia,  and  was  prevailed  on  to  meet  Surena,  on  pre- 
tence of  negotiating  a  peatie,  where  he  was  treacherously  put  to 
death.  The  Parthians  cut  off  his  head,  and,  in  contempt  of  his 
avarice,  poured  melted  gold  into  his  mouth.  The  bond  of  union 
between  Pompey  and  Caesar,  which  had  been  greatly  weakened 
by  the  death  of  Julia,  was  finally  dissolved  by  that  of  Crassus. 
They  had  now  recourse  to  arms,  and  their  struggles  for  the  supe- 
riority terminated  in  the  final  extinction  of  Roman  liberty. 

Cretenses,  iura,  the  inhabitants  of  Creta,  se,  vel,  Crete,  es,  f.  a 
large  island  in  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  opposite  to  Mare  ^geum, 
{Archipelago.)  From  its  principal  city,  it  is  now  called  Candia. 
Cres,  Cretis,  m.  et  Cressa,  ae,  f.  a  native  of  Crete  or  Candia. 
Cretis,  Idis,  of  Crete  or  Candia,  with  relation  to  a  female,  or  to 
a  noun  feminine. 

Curiosolltse,  arum,  and  Curiosolltes,  um,  a  people  of  Gallia  Celtica, 
among  Armoricas  Civitates,  whose  country  was  afterwards  called 
Bretagne 


D. 


Daci,,  orum,  the  inhabitants  of  Dacia  a  country  corresponding  to 
the  modern  Wallachia,  Transylvania,  Moldavia,  and  that  part  of 
Hungary  which  lies  to  the  east  of  the  Tibiscus  or  Teiss;  B.  VI. 
Ch.  25. 

Danubius,  i,  the  Danube,  the  largest  river  in  Europe,  rises  in  the 
black  forest  in  Germany,  (according  to  Strabo  and  Pliny,  in  the 
mountain  Abnoba.)  runs  in  an  easterly  direction,  through  Austria, 
Germany,  Hungary,  part  of  Turkey  in  Europe,  and  discharges 
itself  into  Pontus  Euxinus,  (the  Black  Sea.)  The  ancieats  gave 
the  name  of  Ister  to  the  eastern  part  of  this  river,  after  its  junc- 
tion with  the  Savus,  (Save.)  Though  of  great  breadth  and  depth 
in  many  places,  it  is  not  generally  navigable  on  account  of  the 
cataracts.  Strabo,  Diodorus  Siculus,  Tacitus,  and  Pliny,  have 
given  descriptions  of  this  river  in  many  respects  different,  and  all 


BECUMANA DICTATOR.  279 

exceedingly  inaccurate.  With  the  whole  course  of  the  Danube  the 
Greeks  and  Romans  were  very  imperfectly  acquainted.  Their 
knowledge  of  the  countries  to  the  north  of  this  large  river,  was 
almost  wholly  obtained  by  vague  report  from  unlettered  barba- 
rians, and,  of  course,  very  incorrect. 

In  the  decline  of  the  Roman  empire,  it  became  better  known 
to  that  people,  in  consequence  of  almost  all  the  barbarous  nations, 
who  assailed  that  state,  commencing  hostilities  by  ravaging  the 
country  on  the  banks  of  the  Danube.  But  learning  had  sunk  with 
the  state,  and  no  minute  or  accurate  account  of  this  river  is  found 
in  classic  authors. 

Decumana  {porta),  the  rear  gate  of  the  Roman  camp,  (See  Castro) 
so  called  because  the  tens  of  the  maniples  were  stationed  there. 

Decurio,  Onis,  ra.  (from  decern,  ten,)  an  officer  of  the  cavalry  among 
the  Romans,  who  commanded  ten  men.  Each  Turma,  or  troop 
of  horse,  had  three  Decuriones,  and  each  Decurio  chose  a  subal- 
tern, who  was,  on  that  account,  called  Optio. 

Delectus,  us,  (from  deligo,  to  choose,)  a  military  term  to  denote 
the  levying  or  enrolment  of  soldiers.  The  consuls,  after  they  en- 
tered on  their  office,  appointed  a  day,  on  which  all  who  were  of 
the  military  age  (from  17  to  46,)  should  be  present  in  the  capitol. 
On  the  day  appointed,  the  consuls  seated  in  their  curule  chairs, 
assisted  by  the  military  or  legionary  tribunes,  held  a  levy,  unless 
hindered  by  the  tribunes  of  the  commons.  It  was  determined  by 
lot  in  what  order  the  tribes  should  be  called.  The  consuls  or- 
dered such  as  they  pleased  to  be  cited  out  of  each  tribe;  and  every 
one  was  obliged  to  answer  to  his  name  under  a  severe  penalty. 
They  were  careful  to  choose  those  first  who  had  what  were 
thought  lucky  names;  as,  Valerius,  Sablnus,  Statorius,  &c.  Their 
names  were  written  down  on  tables,  hence.  Scribe  re  milUes,  to  en- 
list, to  levy,  or  to  raise  soldiers. 

Diablintes,  ium,  et  Diablitae,  et  Dianlltae,  arum,  a  people  of  Gallia 
Celtica,  on  the  river  Meduana,  (Maine.)  Their  chief  town  was 
Neodunum,  afterwards  Diablintes,  now  Juhlens. 

Dictator,  oris,  ra.  a  Dictator,  an  extraordinary  Magistrate  at  Rome, 
who  possessed  absolute  authority  over  not  only  the  lives  and  for- 
tunes of  his  fellow  citizens,  but  even  over  the  laws  themselves. 
A  free  government  could  admit  of  such  an  officer  being  appoint- 
ed only  on  important  and  alarming  conjunctures.  We  find  from 
Roman  history  that  the  first  Dictator  was  chosen  during  the  wars 
with  the  Latins,  (499  B.C.)  and  that  his  appointment  was  a  con- 
sequence  of  the  plebeian?^  icfasing  to  enlist,  and  of  the  consuls 


280  DIES. 

being  unable  to  protect  the  state.  Unless  when  threatened  with 
imminent  danger,  either  from  domestic  sedition  or  foreign  wars, 
the  consuls  held  the  highest  office,  and  the  laws  set  bounds  to  their 
powers;  but  the  Dictator  knew  no  restriction.  Twenty-four  Lie- 
tors  preceded  him,  and,  whilst  he  remained  in  office,  the  functions 
of  the  other  magistrates,  with  the  exception  of  that  of  Tribunes 
of  the  people,  were  suspended.  He  proclaimed  war,  levied  for- 
ces, and  marched  against  the  enemy;  or  made  peace  or  disbanded 
them  whenever  he  pleased.  Execution  followed  his  decision, 
and  from  his  judgment  lay  no  appeal.  At  the  expiration  of  his 
office,  which  could  not  exceed  six  months,  he  might  be  called  to 
an  account  for  his  conduct;  but  few  instances  of  it  occur  in  the  an- 
nals of  Rome.  Bravery  does  not  extirpate  credulity,  nor  does 
greatness  of  mind  obliterate  the  fictions  of  ignorance.  Though 
a  nation  of  intrepid  warriors,  the  Romans  were  credulous  and 
superstitious.  Hence  to  avert  a  plague,  to  remove  some  dreadful 
calamity,  or  to  stop  the  progress  of  an  invading  enemy,  they  some- 
times named  a  Dictator  to  drive  a  nail  into  the  temple  of  Jupiter, 
which  trivial  and  absurd  ceremony  they  thought  possessed  these 
virtues.  They  sometimes  too  appointed  a  Dictator  to  hold  the 
comitia,  or  to  celebrate  public  festivals,  and  once  to  choose  Sena- 
tors.  But  for  these  purposes,  except  on  particular  occasions,  the 
state  had  seldom  recourse  to  the  election  of  that  magistrate. 
Dies,  ei,  m,  &  f.  a  day,  or  that  space  of  time  which  elapses  from 
the  first  appearance  of  light  in  the  morning,  till  the  return  of  dark- 
ness at  night.  It  is  more  generally  used  to  denote  the  time  the 
sun  is  visible,  or  above  the  horizon,  which  strictly  speaking  con- 
stitutes  a  solar  day.  The  term  has  frequently  a  more  extended 
signification,  and  includes  the  night.  This  forms  the  Astronomical 
day,  and  has  also  been  called  the  Natural  or  Civil  day.  It  ex- 
ceeds the  Siderial  day,  or  a  complete  revolution  of  the  earth  on 
its  axis,  by  three  minutes  and  fifty-six  seconds.  Diflferent  nations 
begin  the  day  at  diflferent  times.  Among  the  Romans  the  natural 
day  began  when  the  sun  first  appeared  above  the  horizon,  which 
was  called  the  first  hour,  and  ended  with  that  luminary  disappear- 
ing, which  was  the  twelfth  hour.  This  mode  of  dividing  that  space 
of  time  during  which  the  sun  is  visible  into  twelve  parts,  though 
still  followed  in  Turkey,  must  have  been  attended  with  great  in- 
convenience. The  hours  thus  varied  with  the  length  of  the  day 
and  those  of  the  night  were  subject  to  the  same  alteration.  Be- 
sides, the  hours  of  these  two  portions  of  time  could  be  equal  only 
twice  a  year,  viz;  at  the  Equinoxes,  (See  Hora.)     The  civil  day 


.i9m*li-}M.  Ji'SPWjpi'SflWSiSP'vw^itt'Sf'fw 


DIS DRUIDES,  2S1 

began  at  midnight,  when  the  third  watch  commenced.  With  us, 
and  most  of  the  nations  of  Europe,  the  day  is  reckoned  from  mid- 
night to  midnight.  The  Jews  began  their  day  at  sun-setting,  and 
like  the  Romans  divided  it  into  twelve  hours;  and  the  night  with, 
them  also  consisted  of  twelve  hours.  It  may  not  be  improper  to 
observe  that  astronomers  generally  compute  from  noon  to  noon, 
reckoning  in  a  numeral  succession  from  one  to  twenty-four  hours, 
and  not  by  two  twelves  agreeably  to  common  usage, 

Dis,  itis,  the  god  of  riches,  Pluto.  ^ 

Divico,  onis,  a  nobleman  of  great  influence  among  the  Helvetii,  who 
commanded  the  army  in  the  war  against  Cassius,  and  was  at  the 
head  of  the  embassy  sent  by  that  state  to  Caesar,  after  three- 
fourths  of  their  forces  had  crossed  the  Arar,  (Sad)ie,)  and  he  had 
attacked  and  killed  a  great  part  of  the  other  fourth. 

Divitiacus,  i,  a  nobleman  of  the  iEdui,  who  had  great  influence  with 
Caesar,  in  consequence  of  "his  steady  attachment  to  the  Romans. 

Druides,  um,  v.  Drutdae,  arum,  (a  term  of  doubtful  etymology), 
Druids,  the  priests  of  the  ancient  Britons,  Gauls,  and  Germans. 
Besides  supreme  authority  in  all  matters  of  religion,  their  power 
extended  to  all  public  and  private  difi^'erences,  and  what  is  of  much 
greater  consequence,  to  making,  explaining,  and  executing  the 
laws.  This  exorbitant  jurisdiction  was  necessarily  attended  with 
every  mark  of  power.  Tliey  were  exempted  from  taxes  and 
military  service,  and  their  persons  were  held  sacred  and  inviola- 
ble. Among  the  Gauls  there  were  only  two  classes  of  any  note, 
the  Druids  and  Equites,  of  which  that  of  the  Druids  was  the 
more  illustrious.  Their  authority  in  many  instances,  surpassing 
that  of  the  nobles,  it  is  not  surprising  that  they  were,  in  general, 
.  sons  of  the  first  families.  The  worship  and  sacrifices  of  these 
priests  were  performed  in  deep  groves,  chiefly  under  an  oak, 
which  was  their  favorite  tree.  It  was  reckoned  unlawful  to  com- 
mit any^of  their  doctrines  to  writing;  hence,  many  of  their  pecu- 
liar tenets  are  now  unknown.  It  is  generally  supposed  they  be- 
lieved in  the  immortality  of  the  soul,  and  also  the  metempsychosis. 
Of  natural  philosophy,  astronomy,  arithmetic,  and  botany,  it  can- 
not be  doubted  their  knowledge  was  very  considerable.  To  the 
study  of  rhetoric  they  paid  great  attention,  and  to  the  charms  of 
their  eloquence,  much  of  the  admiration  and  power  which  they 
enjoyed,  may  be  justly  ascribed.  Britain  was,  according  to  Caesar, 
the  great  school  of  the  Druids,  whose  chief  settlement  was  An- 
glesy,  called  Mona  by  Tacitus.  The  natives  of  Gaul  and  Ger- 
many, who  wished  to  be  thoroughly  versant  in  the  mysteries  of 


282  DUBIS — EQUITES. 

Druidism,  resorted  lo  this  island  to  complete  their  studies-  At 
•what  time  the  Druids  were  wholly  suppressed  in  Britain,  is  un- 
certain. But  from  the  introduction  of  Christianity,  their  power 
and  influence  began  to  decline.  It  is  worthy  of  remark,  that 
some  of  their  superstitious  doctrines,  and  modes  of  predicting  fu- 
ture events,  aje  not,  at  this  day,  entirely  forgotten  in  many  parts 
of  the  island. 

Dubis,  is,  m.  the  Doux,  a  river  of  Gallia,  (France,)  which  origi- 
nates in  a  sma#lake  near  mount  Jura,  and  after  a  southwest 
course  of  sixty  leagues,  falls  into  the  Arar,  (Saone^)  near  to  Ca- 
biUonum,  (Chalons.) 

Dumnorix,  igis,  one  of  the  jEdui,  and  brother  of  DivitiScus.  He 
persuaded  the  noblemen  of  Gallia,  (Frarice,)  not  to  go  with  Csesar 
into  Britain,  withdrew  privately  from  the  Roman  camp,  and  was 
killed  by  the  soldiers  who  were  sent  in  pursuit  of  him,  in  conse- 
quence of  his  obstinacy  in  refusing  to  return.  His  character  will 
be  found  in  B.  G.  I.  18. 

Durocortorum,  i,  n.  the  capital  of  the  Remi,  now  called  Rheims,  on 
the  Vesle,  one  of  the  branches  of  the  river  Axona,  (Aisne.) 


E. 


Eburones,  um,  (Eburones,  in  Greek),  a  people  of  Gallia  Belgica, 
whose  territories  lay  on  both  sides  of  the  river  Mosa,  (Mcese,  or 
Meuse,)  at  its  junction  with  the  Sabis,  (Sambre.)  On  their  being 
dispossessed,  they  were  succeeded  by  the  Tungri.  They  were 
under  the  vassalage  of  the  TrevTri.  Csesar  attempted  to  extir- 
pate this  nation;  but  this  barbarous  design,  even  from  his  own  ac- 
count, he  was  unable  to  carry  into  full  eflect. 

Eburovlces,  um,  a  people  of  Gallia,  (France,)  on  the^kft  bank 
of  the  Sequana,  (Seine.)  The  Lexovii  were  between  them  and 
the  sea.  Their  chief  city  was  at  first  called  Mediolanum,  and 
afterwards  Eburovlces,  now  Evreux. 

Elusates,  ium,  a  people  of  Aquitania,  who  lived  on  the  river  Atur, 
(Adour,)  whose  principal  city  was  Elusa,  as,  f.  (Euse.) 

Equites,  (from  equus  and  eo,)  cavalry.  Of  these  the  number  be- 
longing to  each  legion  was  300,  called  Justus  equitdtus,  or  ala. 
They  were  divided  into  ten  turvim,  or  troops  of  thirty  each;  and 
each  turma  into  three  dtcurice,  or  bodies  of  ten  men.  The  office 
of  the  EquTtes  at  first  was  to  serve  in  the  army.     They  were  s(» 


ERATOSTHENES PABroS. 

lected  both  from  the  patricians  and  plebians;  they  were  required, 
when  chosen,  to  be  18  years  of  age,  and  to  possess  a  fortune  of 
400  sestertia,  ($15,472.)  See  Gr.  App.  V. 

Eratosthenes,  is,  a  native  of  Cyrene,  (Cyrenseus,)  the  scholar  of 
Callimachus,  and  of  Aristo  of  Chios,  and  the  second  who  was  in- 
trusted with  the  Alexandrian  library,  devoted  his  time  to  criti- 
cism and  philosophy.  He  was  eminent  as  a  poet  and  mathemati- 
cian, but  more  distinguished  as  an  astronomer  and  geographer. 
He  died  in  the  year  194  B.  C.  in  the  82d  year  of  his  age.  B.  VI. 
Ch.  24. 

Essui,  orum,  supposed  to  be  also  called  Saii,  orum,  a  people  of  Gal- 
lia, whose  territories  lay  on  the  Olena,  (Orne,)  adjoining  to  the 
Diablintes  and  Aulerci  Eburones. 

Esubii,  orum.  This  word  occurs  only  in  B.  G.  III.  7,  where  the 
readings  are  very  different.  Some  copies  have  Esubios,  orEusu- 
bios,  and  others  Lexuvios.  The  Greek  has  Unellos,  to  which 
Dr.  Clarke,  in  a  note,  seems  to  give  the  preference,  although  he 
has  retained  Eusubios  in  the  text. 

Evocati,  (from  evoco,  to  call  out,)  veteran  soldiers,  who  had  served 
out  their  time  and  received  their  discharge,  but  who  were  some- 
times again  called  out  into  public  service.  This  class  were  highly 
respected,  and  were  exempted  from  the  drudgery  of  military  ser- 
vice to  which  the  other  soldiers  were  subjected. 

Excubiae,  arum,  watches  either  by  day  or  night.  Vigiliae,  watches 
by  night  only.  These  were  relieved  at  the  end  of  every  three 
hours;  hence  the  night,  from  sunset  till  sunrise,  was  divided  into 
four  watches,  called  the  first,  second,  third,  and  fourth.  See  Gr. 
App.  I. 

Exercitus,  us,  (from  exerceo,  to  exercise,)  an  army,  a  body  of  men 
trained  to,  or  exercised  in  military  service.  {Agmen,  from  ago, 
an  army  on  the  march,  or  in  marching  order.  Acies,  an  army 
drawn  up  in  a  line,  or  in  battle  array.)  A  consular  army  con- 
sisted of  two  Roman  legions,  (See  Legio,)  with  the  proper  num- 
ber of  cavalry,  and  two  legions  of  the  allies  with  their  cavalry, 
making  in  all  about  20,000  men,  or  in  the  time  of  Polybius, 
18,600. 

F. 

Fabius,  i,  (Caius,)  one  of  Caesar's  lieutenants. 
Fabius,  i,  (Quintus  Fabius  Maximus)  a  Roman  consul  who  defeated 
the  Averni  and  Ruteni. 


284  FUNDITORES GALLIA, 

Funditores,  um,  (^Lomfunda,  a  sling.)  Slingers,  a  class  of  warriors 
usually  joined  with  the  Velttes,  but  not  properly  a  part  of  them. 
They  were  armed  with  slings  and  stones,  or  bullets  of  lead,  which 
from  practice  they  threw  with  great  precision  and  with  so  much 
force  that  neither  buckler  nor  head-piece  could  resist  their  impe- 
tuosity. They  were  generally  obtained  from  the  Balearic  Isles, 
Achaia,  Crete,  Arabia,  &c.,  the  Baleai'ians  being  considered  the 
best.     See  Velttes. 


G. 

Galba,  86,  the  name  of  a  branch  of  the  Sulpicii,  v.  Sulpitii,  or,  ac- 
cording to  others,  the  surname  of  the  founder  of  that  tribe. 

Galba,  ae,  the  king  of  the  Suessiones  at  the  time  Csesar  invaded 
Gaul.  On  account  of  his  knowledge  and  love  of  justice,  he  was 
appointed  commander-in-chief  of  the  forces  raised  by  the  Belgian 
states,  against  the  power  of  Rome,  in  the  second  year  of  the  Gal- 
lic war. 

Galba,  se,  (Sergius)  was  the  son  of  C.  Galba,  and  grandson  of  Ser- 
vius,  or  Sergius  Galba,  a  celebrated  orator  and  the  first  distin- 
guished character  of  that  family.  He  held  the  rank  of  lieutenant 
in  Ca3sar's  army  during  the  Gallic  war,  and  afterwards  joined  the 
conspiracy,  which  the  Republican  party  formed  against  the  life 
of  that  ambitious  and  unprincipled  general. 

Galea,  a  helmet,  a  defensive  piece  of  armor,  made  of  brass  or  iron, 
which  came  down  to  the  shoulders  but  left  the  face  uncovered. 

Gallia,*  a2,  now  France,  (See  the  map,)  was  an  extensive  and  popu- 
lous country  of  Europe,  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  British 
Channel,  on  the  east  by  the  Rhine,  Mount  Jura  and  the  Alps,-  on 
the  south  by  the  Mediterranean  and  Spain;  and  on  the  west  by  the 
Atlantic  Ocean.  In  the  time  of  Cajsar  it  was  divided  into  three 
parts;  Gallia  BelgTca,  or  the  country  of  the  Belg^^  (now  Belgium) 
occupying  the  northern  part;  Gallia  Celtica,  or  the  country  of  the 
Celt^,  or  Celts,  by  far  the  largest,  and  occupying  the  middle  por- 
tion; and  Aquitania,  lying  between  the  G«rumna  (Garonne,) 
and  the  Pyrenees, — much  smaller  than  either  of  the  others.  Ad- 
joining Gaul  on  the  east,  and  separated  from  it  by  Mount  Jura, 

*  Caesar  does  not  use  this  term  always  in  precisely  the  same  sense.  Tn  B.  I.  Ch.  1, 
it  means  tlie  whole  of  Gaul  not  then  subject  to  the  Romans,-  aud  in  the  same  chapter 
it  is  used  to  denote  the  central  division,  or  that  possessed  by  the  Celts.  It  is  used  in  the 
same  restricted  sense,  B.  III.  Ch.  2. 


GALLI GARITES.  286 

lay  Helvetia,  (now  part  of  Switzerland,)  extending  from  Mount 
Jura  to  the  Rhine,  on  the  east;  and  from  Lake  Lemannus 
(Geneva)  and  the  Rhone  on  the  south,  to  the  Rhine  on  the  north. 
On  the  south  and  eastern  border  of  Gallia  lay  what  was  called 
Provincia,  the  Roman  Province.  (See  Provincia.)  Each  of  these 
great  divisions  contained  within  them  numerous  nations  or 'tribes, 
all  living  under  their  respective  kings  or  chiefs,  all  of  which  were 
finally  brought  under  subjection  to  the  Romans.  The  whole  of 
this  extensive  country  was  called  by  the  Romans  Gallia  Trans- 
alpina,  Gaul  beyond  the  Alps,  to  distinguish  it  from  the  northern 
part  of  Italy,  which  they  called  Gallia  Cisalplna. 

In  the  27th  year  before  the  Christian  sera,  and  twenty  years 
after  the  conquest  of  Gaul  was  completed  by  C.  Julius  Caesar, 
Augustus  Caesar  made  a  new  division  of  the  whole,  including 
Provincia  Romana  and  Helvetia,  into  four  grand  divisions,  in 
which  more  attention  was  paid  to  equality  in  the  extent  of  the 
provinces  than  to  the  nations  that  inhabited  them.  Aquitania 
was  extended  northward  and  eastward  to  the  Liger,  (Loire,)  Gal- 
lia BelgTca  on  its  eastern  border  was  extended  southward,  taking 
in  part  of  Gallia  Celtica,  and  the  whole  country  of  the  Helvetii. 
These  four  divisions  were  Gallia  Belgtca,  Gallia  Celtica,  Aquita- 
nia, and  Gallia  Narbonensis  (formerly  Provincia,  or  Provincia 
Romana) .  These  four  divisions  were  again  subdivided  into  sev- 
enteen provinces  in  all.  And  it  is  this  division  which  is  exhibited 
in  the  maps  of  ancient  geography  commonly  in  use.  In  the  map 
accompanying  this  work,  the  division  of  the  country  in  the  time 
of  Caesar,  and  the  names  by  which  these  divisions  were  then 
known,  have  been  preferred  as  more  suitable  for  such  a  work  as 
this. 

The  whole  country  of  Gaul  from  the  time  of  its  conquest  by 
Caesar,  47  years  B.C.,  remained  subject  to  the  Romans,  and  a 
part  of  their  vast  empire  for  five  hundred  and  fifty  years.  On 
the  final  dismemberment  of  that  empire,  Gaul  being  conquered 
by  the  Franks,  (or  Freemen,)  a  confederacy  of  warlike  nations 
bordering  on  the  Rhine,  was  from  them  called  France  about  the 
beginning  of  the  sixth  century. 

Galli,  orum,  the  Gauls,  or  the  inhabitants  of  Gaul.     Gallus,  i,  a 
Gaul;  one  of  the  inhabitants  of  Gaul. 

Gallus,  i,  (Marcus  Trebius.)  a  prefect  or  Tribune  of  the  soldiers, 
sent  by  P.  Crassus,  to  foragfe  among  the  Curiosolitae. 

Garites,  um,  a  people  of  Aquitania,  to  the  north  of  the  Ausci. 


286  GARUMNA GLADIUS. 

Garumna,  se,  m.  the  Garonne,  a  river  of  France,  which  rises  in  the 
valley  of  Arran,  to  the  south  of  St.  Bernard,  runs  with  rapidity 
N.  N.  E.  to  Tolosa,  (Toulouse,)  afterwards  N.  N.  W.  to  Guienne, 
and  falls  into  Oceanus  Cantabricus,  vol,  Mare  Aquitanicum,  (the 
Bay  of  Biscay.)  The  general  course  of  this  river,  which  extends 
to  si\)Out  250  miles,  is  northwest.  After  its  junction  with  the 
Duranius,  (Dordogne,)  below  Burdegalia,  (Bo'urdeaux,)  it  assumes 
the  name  of  Gironde.  According  to  Julius  Cajsar's  division  of 
Gaul,  the  Garonne  was  the  boundary  of  Aquitania,  and  separated 
that  district  from  Gallia  Celtica,  It  is  navigable  to  Toulouse, 
and  communicates  with  the  Mediterranean  by  means  of  the  Royal 
Canal,  about  180  miles  long,  made  through  Languedoc  by  Louis 
XIV. 

Geneva,  se,  f.  Geneva,  a  town  at  the  western  extremity  of  Lacus 
Lemannus,  (the  Lake  of  Geneva,)  on  the  south  bank  of  the  Rho- 
danus,  (Rhone.)  From  Geneva  towards  Mount  Jura,  Csesar  rais- 
ed a  mole  or  rampart  of  earth,  nineteen  miles  in  length. 

In  modern  times,  Geneva  is  a  considerable  city,  nearly  two 
miles  in  circumference,  and  contains  thirty  thousand  inhabitants 
Besides  being  neatly  built,  it  is  strongly  fortified,  and  remarkable 
for  its  beautiful  situation,  fine  walks,  and  delightful  prospects. 
Calvin  spent  the  latter  part  of  his  life  at  Geneva,  and  his  follow- 
ers have,  ever  since,  held  the  government  of  the  city. 

Germania,  se,  f.  Germany,  a  large  country  of  Europe,  bounded  on 
the  south  by  the  Danubius,  (Danube;)  on  the  east  by  the  Vistula, 
(Vistula;)  on  the  north  by  Codanus  Sinus,  vel.  Mare  SuevTcum, 
(the  Baltic  Sea;)  and  on  the  west  by  the  Rhenus,  (Rhine,)  and 
OceSnus  Germanicus,  (the  German  Sea.) 

Germanus,  i,  pi.  i,  orum,  the  people  of  Germany;  Germans. 

Getuli,  orum,  (sing.  Getulus,  i,)  the  inhabitants  of  Getulia,  or  Gae- 
tulia,  ae,  f.  Biledulgerid,  a  large  country  of  Africa,  to  the  south 
of  Mauritania  and  Numidia.  It  formed  part  of  the  kingdom  of 
Massinissa.  Sallust,  from  books  written  in  the  Punic  language 
which  belonged  to  Hiempsal,  gives  the  following  character  of  the 
Getuli  and  Libyes: — ''Africa  was  at  first  possessed  by  the  Getu- 
lians  and  Lribyans,  a  savage  and  untutored  people,  who  lived 
on  the  flesh  of  wild  beasts,  or  grass  of  the  field,  like  cattlej  sub- 
ject to  no  established  customs,  laws  or  government,  a  race  of 
wanderers,  who  had  no  settled  habitation,  and  who  lay  down  to 
rest  wherever  night  overtook  them." — Sal.  Bel.  Jug.  18. 

Gladius,  i,  a  sword.  The  Roman  sword  was  short,  straight,  and 
heavy,  both  for  cutting  and  thrusting.     It  was  worn  on  the  right 


,11    Hipp|9lU«..LWi.. 

GORDUNI — HERCYNIA.  2S7 

side,  so  as  in  drawing  not  to  interfere  with  the  shield.    The  lonjf 

sword  of  the  cavalry  was  curved,  and  was  worn  on  the  left  side. 
Gorduni,  orum,  a  people  of  the  northern  part  of  Gallia  Belgica, 

subject  to  the  Nervii,  whose  territories  lay  along  the  sea-coast, 

to  the  north  of  the  Morini. 
Graioceli,  orum,  an  ancient  nation  of  Gaul,  whose  territories  seAn 

to  have  been  adjacent  to  those  of  the  Centrones  and  Caturiges,  a 

people  who  lived  among  the  Alps. 
Grudii,  orum,  a  neighboring  nation  to  the  Gorduni.     Their  country 

was  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  mouths  of  the  Scaldis,  (Scheldt.) 


H. 

Harudes,  um,  a  people  of  Germania,  (Germany,)  on  the  north  bank 
of  the  Danubius,  (Danube,)  towards  the  source  of  that  river. 

Hastati,  drum,  the  name  given  to  the  first  rank  of  the  Roman  legion 
(See  Legio.) 

Helvetia,  se,  f.  Switzerland,  a  country  of  a  triangular  form,  bound- 
ed on  the  north  by  the  river  Rhenus,  (Rhine,)  and  Lacus  Brigan- 
tlnus,  (Lake  of  Constance,)  which  separate  it  from  Vindelicia  and 
Germania,  Germany;  on  the  south  by  the  Rhodanus,  (Rhone,)  and 
Lacus  Lemanus,  (the  Lake  of  Geneva,)  which  divides  it  from 
Provincia  Romana;  and  on  the  west  by  Mount  Jura  which  pro- 
tected them  from  the  Gauls.  Hence  it  is  manifest  that  Helvetia 
was  of  less  extent  than  Switzerland.  Caesar  (B.  G.  I.  1,)  seems 
to  consider  the  Helvetii  as  Gauls.  In  Lib.  I.  cap  24,  he  says, 
Helvetii — phalange  facta,  by  which  is  to  be  understood  simply, 
that  they  fought  in  close  order,  not  that  they  drew  up  their  troops 
precisely  in  the  form  of  the  Macedonian  Phalanx,  so  celebrated 
in  ancient  history. 

Helvetii,  orum,  the  people  of  Helvetia;  the  Helvetians. 

Hercynia,  se,  f.  a  very  extensive  forest  of  Germany,  the  breadth  of 
which,  according  to  Caesar,  was  nine  days  journey,  and  its  length 
exceeded  sixty.  It  extended  from  the  territories  of  the  Helvetii, 
Namnetes,  and  Rauraci,  along  the  Danubius,  (Danube,)  to  the 
country  of  the  Daci  and  Anartes;  then  turning  to  the  north,  it 
spread  over  many  large  tracts  of  land,  and  is  said  to  have  con- 
tained many  different  animals,  unknown  in  other  countries,  of 
which  Csesar  describes  two  or  three  kinds.  Since  the  other  for- 
ests of  Germany  were  only  branches  of  the  Hercynian,  some 
writers  have  considered  it  as  covering  nearly  the  whole  of  that 


wl*. 


2SS  HIBERNA— HISPANIA. 

extensive  territory.  As  the  country  became  more  inhabited, 
the  grounds  were  gradually  cleared,  and  few  vestiges  of  the  an- 
cient forest  remain  in  modern  times. 

Hiberna,  Orum,  winter  quarters.  The  wars  of  the  Romans  were 
prosecuted  chiefly  in  the  summer.  When  the  weather  and  the 
%tate  of  the  country  became  unfavorable  to  military  operations  the 
troops  were  withdrawn  from  the  field,  and  led  into  winter  quar- 
ters, (hiberna.)  These  were  strongly  fortified  and  furnished  with 
every  accommodation,  like  a  city,  containing  storehouses,  (arma- 
ria,) workshops,  (fabric^,)  an  infirmary,  (valetudinarium,)  &c. 
Hence,  from  them  many  towns  in  Europe,  and  particularly  in 
England,  are  supposed  to  have  had  their  origin.  This  appears 
to  be  indicated  by  the  terminations  cester,  or  Chester,  from  castra. 

Hiberni£i,  ae,  f.  Ireland,  a  considerable  island  in  Mare  Atlanticum, 
(the  Atlantic  Ocean).  It  is  washed  on  the  east  by  Oceanus  Ver- 
ginius,  (St.  George's  Channel,)  which  separates  it  from  Englandj 
on  the  north  by  Mare  Hibernicum,  (Irish  Sea,)  which  divides  it 
from  Scotland;  and  on  all  other  parts  by  Mare  Atlanticum,  (the 
Atlantic  Ocean,)  of  which  St.  George's  Channel,  and  the  Irish 
Sea,  form  but  very  small  parts. 

Hiberni,  orum,  the  inhabitants  of  Hibernia. 

Hispania,  as,  f.  Sjiaui,  a  large  country  of  Europe,  bounded  on  the 
south  by  Fretum  GadiUinum,  or  Herculeum,  (the  Strait  of  Gibral- 
tar^) on  the  east  by  the  Mediterranean,  which  was  known  among 
the  Romans  by  the  appellation  of  Nostrum  Mare,  and  among  the 
Greeks,  of  Mare  Internum;  on  the  north  by  the  Pyreneei  Montes, 
(Pyrenees,)  whicli  separate  it  from  Gallia,  (France,)  and  Oceinus 
Cantabricus,  (the  Bay  of  Biscay;)  on  the  west  by  Lusitania, 
(Portugal,  included  in  Hispania  Ulterior,)  and  Mare  Atlanticum, 
(the  Atlantic  Ocean,)  which  the  Greeks  called  Mare  Externum. 
Its  greatest  length,  from  east  to  west,  is  600  miles,  and  its  great- 
est breadth  550.  .  The  superficial  contents  of  this  country  are 
about  148,000  square  miles.  Spain,  including  Portugal,  was,  by 
the  Romans,  divided  into  two  parts,  Hispania  Citerior,  (Hither 
Spain,)  and  Hispania  Ulterior,  (Farther  Spain;)  hence,  duce  His- 
panice,  the  two  Spains,  or  Hispanice,  Spains.  The  former,  or 
northern,  comprehending  an  extent  of  country  equal  to  three- 
fourths  of  modern  Spain,  the  latter,  or  southern,  the  rest  of  the 
country.  These  two  divisions  were  sometimes  governed  by  pro- 
consuls, but  more  commonly  by  praetors. 

In  the  reign  of  Augustus,  Hispania  Citerior  was,  from  TarrSco, 
its  principal   city,  called    Tarraconensis,  and   Hispania  Ulterior 


HISPANI ILLYRICUM. 

was  divided  into  Lusitania  and  B<Bt%ca.  The  former  appellation 
was  4erived  from  the  Lusitani,  the  most  powerful  of  the  nations 
who  inhabited  that  country,  and  the  latter,  from  Baetis,  the  Gua- 
dalquivir, a  very  large  river,  which  watered  that  province, 

Hispani,  orum,  the  people  of  Hispania. 

Hora,  ae,  f.  an  hour.  Among  the  Romans  it  was  the  twelfth  part 
of  the  day.  The  first  hour  commenced  with  the  rising  of  the  sun, 
and  the  twelfth  ended  with  his  setting.  It  is  manifest  that  the 
portion  of  time  denominated  an  hour  by  them,  was  constantly 

,  changing,  and  was  of  equal  length  to  our  hour  only  at  the  equi- 
noxes. At  these  two  periods  of  the  year,  and  at  them  only,  their 
first  hour  corresponded  to  our  7  o'clock  in  the  morning j  the  sec- 
ond to  eight,  third  to  9,  fourth  to  10,  and  fifth  to  11;  but  their 
sixth  hour  or  noon  (meridies)  coincided  exactly  with  our  12 
o'clock  noon,  or  mid-day  throughout  the  whole  year.  Their  7th 
then  answered  to  our  1  in  the  afternoon,  8th  to  2,  9th  to  3,  10th 
to  4,  11th  to  5,  and  12th  to  6.  At  the  summer  solstice,  or  longest 
day,  the  sun  rises  at  Rome  a  few  minutes  past  4  o'clock,  and  sets 
the  same  number  of  minutes  before  8,  consequently  their  hour  is, 
at  that  time,  nearly  \  longer  than  ours,  and  at  the  winter  solstice 
it  will  be  as  much  shorter. 


Iccius,  i,  m.  one  of  the  ambassadors  whom  the  Rhemi  sent  to  Caesar 
in  the  second  year  of  the  Gallic  war. 

Iccius,  i,  {sc.  portus,)  a  harbor  in  the  country  of  the  Morini,  in  Gal- 
lia Belgica,  which,  according  to  some,  was  Boulogne,  and,  accord- 
ing to  others,  Vissant,  or  Calais.  Ptolemy  mentions  it  as  a  promon- 
tory, although  it  cannot  be  doubted  that  there  was  likewise  a 
CQgnominal  harbor.  From  his  description,  this  seems  to  be  the 
place  which  he  had  in  view.  It  could  not  be  Calais.  Caesar  set 
out  from  Iccius  Portus,  when  he  sailed  the  second  time  for  Britain. 

Idus,  uum,  f.  the  Ides,  one  of  the  divisions  of  the  Roman  month. 
In  March,  July,  and  October,  the  Ides  were  on  the  15th,  and  in 
the  other  months,  on  the  13th.  Like  the  Kalends,  and  Nones, 
the  Ides  were  reckoned  backwards.     (See  Gr.  App.  I.) 

lUyricum,  (Croatia,  Bosnia,  and  Slavonia,)  a  country  opposite  to 
Italy,  bordering  on  the  Adriatic.  It  was  bounded  on  the  south  by- 
Macedonia;  on  the  east  by  Moesia  and  Pannonia;  on  the  north  by 

25 


290  IMANUENTIUS JUGUM. 

Noricum;  and  on  the  west  by  Histia  and  Mare  Adriatlcum,  vel. 
Superum,  (the  Gulf  of  Venice.) 

Imanuentius,  i,  m.  a  Briton,  the  father  of  Mandubratius,  and  king 
of  the  Trinobantes.     He  was  killed  by  Cassivellaunus. 

Impedimenta,  orum,  baggagej  (from  impedio,  to  hinder.)  The  hea- 
vier baggage  of  the  Romans,  such  as  tents,  mills,  &c.  was  car- 
ried on  beasts  of  burden;  sometimes,  though  more  seldom,  on 
baggage  wagons,  (carri.)  Every  thing  else  was  carried  by  the 
soldiers  themselves,  each  of  whom  usually  carried  provisions  for 
fifteen  days,  usually  corn,  sometimes  dressed  food,  a  saw,  a  bas- 
ket, a  mattock  or  axe,  a  reaper's  hook  and  leathern  thong,  a 
chain,  a  pot,  usually  three  or  four  stakes,  sometimes  more,  I'or 
the  vallum,  amounting  in  all,  exclusive  of  armor,  to  60  pounds; 
and  under  this  load  they  commonly  marched  20  miles  a  day,  some- 
times more. 

Indutiomarus,  i,  a  chief  man  among  the  Treviri,  father-in-law  to 
Cingetorix,  who  attacked  Labienus,  but  was  repulsed,  and  slain. 

Italia,  86,  f.  Italy,  a  large  and  celebrated  country  of  Europe,  bound- 
ed on  the  south  by  Fretum  Siculum,  (the  Strait  of  Messina,) 
which  separates  it  from  Sicily;  on  the  northeast  by  Mare  Adri- 
aticum,  or  Superum,  (the  Gulf  of  Venice,)  which  divides  it  from 
Grsecia,  (Greece,)  now  part  of  Turkey  in  Europe.  The  Alpes, 
{Alps,)  form  the  boundary  between  Italy  and  Germany  on  the 
north;  and  on  the  southwest  it  is  washed  by  that  part  of  the  Med- 
iterranean, formerly  called  Mare  Tyrrhenum,  Tuscum,  or  Inferum, 
now  the  Tuscan  Sea.  The  Appeninus,  (jlppenines ,)  forms  a  ridge 
of  mountains  which  extends  from  the  Alps  to  Rhegium,  (Reggio,) 
the  whole  length  of  the  country.  The  sources  of  all  the  rivers 
in  Italy  are  found  in  these  mountains.  Roma,  (Rome,)  for  many 
years  the  seat  of  universal  empire,  was  the  capital  of  Italy. 
From  it,  the  inhabitants  of  Italy  were  frequently  called  Romani, 
a  name  originally  given  only  to  the  natives  of  that  city  and  its 
territory,  which  was  long  very  small. 

Itaii,  orum,  the  people  of  Italia;  Italians. 

Itius  Portus,  a  harbor  in  the  country  of  the  Morini,  from  which 
CsBsar  sailed  on  his  second  expedition  against  Britain.  Seelccius. 

J. 

JuGUM,  i,  a  yoke.  This  consisted  of  two  spears  or  pieces  of  wood 
set  upright  in  the  ground,  a  little  space  apart,  over  which  a  third 
was  iaid  across   the  top,    the  whole   resembling  the  Greek  IT. 


JUMENTA LEGATUS.  S91 

Under  this  frame  the  soldiers  of  conquered  armies  were  often 
obliged  to  pass  naked,  (nudi,)  i.  e.  without  their  armor,  which 
was  previously  laid  down. 

Jumenta,  orum,  beasts  of  burden,  (horses,  mules,  asses,  &c.)  used 
by  the  Romans  for  carrying  their  heavier  baggage.  (See  Impedi- 
menta.) 

Junius,  i,  (Quintus,  i,)  a  Spaniard  who  was  frequently  sent  by 
Gsesar  to  converse  with  Ambiorix. 

Jura,  86,  m.  a  chain  of  mountains  which,  extending  from  the  RhodS.- 
nus,  (Rhone,)  to  the  Rhenus,  (Rhine,)  separated  Helvetia,  (Swit- 
zerland,) from  that  part  of  Gallia  Celtica  which  the  SequSni  pos- 
sessed, now  called  Franche  Compte.  Vosegus,  (Vauge,)  is  a 
branch,  or  an  extension  of  Mount  Jura. 

Justus  equitatus,  the  complement  of  cavalry  attached  to  a  Legion; 
three  hundred  in  number,  exclusive  of  the  horsemen  of  the  allies 


K. 

Kalenda;,  or  Calendae,  arum,  f.  the  Kalends,  the  name  given  by  the 
Romans  to  the  first  day  of  every  month.  A  priest  was  appointed 
to  give  notice  to  the  people  of  the  change  of  the  moon,  or  when 
the  new  moon  was  first  visible.  This  term  appears  to  be  de- 
rived from  the  Greek  verb  xaksu,  I  call.     (See  Gr.  App.  I.) 


L. 


Laberius,  (Quintus,  L.  Durus,)  a  tribune  of  the  soldiers  in  Caesar's 
army.     He  was  killed  in  Britain,  B.  G.  V.  15. 

Labienus,  i,  (Titus,  i,)  one  of  Csesar's  lieutenants  in  the  Gallic 
war.  In  the  beginning  of  the  Civil  war  he  deserted  to  Pompey, 
escaped  from  the  battle  of  Pharsalia,  and  was  killed  in  that  of 
Munda. 

LatobrTgi,  orum,  a  people  who  appear  to  have  been  neighbors  of 
the  Helvetii  Rauraci  and  Tulingi,  but  of  whom  little  is  known 
with  certainty. 

Legatus,  i,  m.  a  lieutenant-general,  who  was  both  appointed  by, 
and  acted  immediately  under,  the  consul,  or  Commander-in-chief. 
The  number  of  these  officers  varied  in  proportion  to  the  great- 
ness or  importance  of  the  war.  Each  legion  had  at  least  one, 
often  two.     When  separated  from  the  main  army,  sent  into  win- 


292  LEGfith  -  * 

ter  quarters,  &c.  the  lieutenant-general,  being  the  deputy  of  the 
commander,  had  the  honor  to  be  the  highest  officer. 

At  their  first  institution,  the  Legati  were  counsellors  to  the 
governors  of  provinces,  and  decided  all  causes  of  minor  impor- 
tancej  but  held  no  military  rank.  Hence  the  word  primarily  de- 
noted an  Ambassador.  Their  admission  into  the  army  naturally 
resulted  from  that  place  of  intimacy  and  confidence.  Under  the 
emperors  the  term  became  a  common  appellation  for  all  invested 
with  the  highest  military  command  in  foreign  countries. 
Legio,  onis,  f,  a  legion,  or  body  of  soldiers  consisting  of  different  num- 
bers at  diflferent  times.  In  the  early  part  of  the  reign  of  Romulus, 
the  legion  contained  3,000  foot,  and  300  horse,  which  he,  on  the 
increase  of  the  citizens  by  the  admission  of  the  Sabines,  raised 
to  4,000.  To  that  number  1,000  was  added  during  the  war  which 
Hannibal  carried  on  in  Italia,  (Italy,)  about  216  years  B.C.  but 
a  reduction  of  500  had  taken  place  before  the  time  Polybius  wrote 
his  history.  Livy  states  that  the  legion  consisted  of  5,000  foot, 
and  Vegetius,  of  6,000  foot.  It  cannot  be  doubted  that  these  his- 
torians recorded  the  exact  number,  which  constituted  a  complete 
legion  in  their  respective  times.  The  legion  consisted  of  ten  co- 
horts, each  cohort  of  three  maniples,  and  each  maniple  of  two 
centuries;  and  in  the  order  of  battle  the  troops  were  drawn  up  in 
three  lines,  first  the  Hastdti;  second,  the  Principes;  and  third, 
the  Triarii.  Those  who  formed  the  first  line  were  called  Hastd. 
ti,  from  their  fighting  with  Hasta,  a  long  spear,  which  was  after- 
wards laid  aside  on  account  of  its  being  inconvenient.  They  were 
the  flower  of  the  Roman  youth.  The  second  line  consisted  of  the 
same  number  of  maniples,  but  of  men  more  advanced  in  life,  and 
of  greater  military  experience,  who  were  called  Principes,  proba- 
bly from  their  being  at  one  time  the  first  line.  Their  arms  were 
heavy.  The  Triarii  made  up  the  third  line,  and  seem  to  have 
been  a  body  of  reserve.  They  were  frequently,  from  Pilum,  a 
javelin,  called  Pildni,  and  the  Hastati  and  Principes,  Antepildni, 
from  being  stationed  before  them.  The  Velltes  generally  skir- 
mished before  the  lines,  sometimes  between  them,  and  appear  to 
have  been  what  the  moderns  call  Irregulars.  They  had  light  ar- 
mor, hence  called  expedlti,  levis  armaturcB,  &c.  The  archers  and 
slingers  were  attached  to  this  body.  According  to  that  historian, 
twenty  VelUes  seem  to  have  belonged  to  each  maniple.  They 
were,  in  battle,  not  formed  into  cohorts,  or  maniples,  but  fought 
in  such  parties  and  in  such  places  as  the  commander  judged  most 
advantageous. 


Ilfl^llilllililili   IIIUIPIPJI^J^IIJIL 


LEMANUS LEUCI.  293 

In  the  early  ages  of  the  Roman  state,  their  army  in  battle  order 
was  drawn  up,  like  the  Macedonian  phalanx,  in  a  continued  line. 
This  fact  rests  on  the  authority  of  Livy.  The  disposition  into 
three  lines,  and  arranging  in  maniples  at  some  distance  from  each 
other  seems  an  improvement  of  later  times.  When  the  Hastdti 
yielded  to  the  superior  force  or  bravery  of  the  enemy,  they  fell 
back  to  the  Principesj  who  filled  up  the  spaces  between  the  mani- 
ples, and  with  them  they  renewed  the  charge.  If  both  were 
forced  to  give  way,  the  Triarii  came  up,  and  a  third  attack  was 
made  on  the  enemy.  Hence,  ad  triarios  ventum  est,  it  is  come  to 
the  last  push,-  matters  are  in  the  utmost  danger.  The  cavalry 
fought  on  the  wings,  but  their  exact  form  or  position  is  not  cer- 
tainly known.  .  It  probably  did  not  differ  very  much  from  the 
practice  of  the  moderns.  If  after  the  whole  force  was  brought 
into  action  tlie  enemy  still  prevailed,  they  of  necessity  submitted 
to  a  defeat. 

All  the  cohorts  of  the  liegion  were  manifestly  on  an  equal  footing 
in  the  army  of  Caesar,  and  no  preference  seems  to  have  been 
either  acknowledged  or  claimed.  The  only  vestige  of  the  ancient 
division  was  the  officers  retaining  their  former  appellations,  as 
Primus  hastdtus,  Primus  pilus,  &c.  Caesar  frequently  kept  the 
third  line  as  a  body  of  reserve. 

Lemanus  (Lacus),  the  Lake  of  Geneva,  is  a  most  beautiful  expanse 
of  water,  in  the  form  of  a  crescent,  the  convex  side  of  which  is 
upwards  of  fifty-four  miles  long.  Its  hollow  side  is  towards 
Switzerland,  and  its  greatest  breadth  measures  about  twelve 
miles.  The  Rhodanus,  (Rhone,)  descending  from  the  Alps,  tra- 
verses the  whole  length  of  the  lake,  and  renders  the  water  at  its 
entrance  turbid,  on  account  of  the  quantity  of  earth  and  mud 
brought  down  from  these  steep  mountains.  Like  the  other  waters 
and  lakes  of  Switzerland,  for  nearly  an  hour  in  the  evening,  after 
the  sun  is  hid  behind  Mount  Jura,  it  shines  with  a  splendor  re- 
sembling burnished  gold,  by  the  reflection  of  the  solar  rays  from 
the  Glaciers. 

Leponti,  orum,  a  people  of  the  Alps,  near  the  source  of  the  Rho- 
danus, (Rhone,)  on  the  south  of  that  river. 

Levaci,  orum,  a  people  in  the  northern  part  of  Gallia  Belgjca,  on 
the  Scaldi§,  (Scheldt,)  between  the  Nervii  and  Grudii.  The  Cen- 
trones,  Grudii,  LevSci,  Pleumosii,  and  Gorduni.  were  vassals  of 
the  Nervii.     B.  G.  V.  39. 

Leuci,  orum,  a  Belgic  nation  who  lived  between  the  Mosa,  (Meuse,) 
and  the  Mosella,  (Moselle,)  near  the  source  of  that  river. 


m' 


294  LEXOVII — LUTETIA. 

Lexovii,  orura,  a  people  of  Gallia  Celtica,  whose  country  was 
bounded  on  the  north  by  the  SequSaa,  (Seine,)  and  on  the  west 
by  Fretum  Gallicum,  or,  Britannicum,  (the  English  Channel.) 

Liger,  eris,  or  Ligeris,  is^  m.  the  Loire,  a  large  river  of  Gaul,  which 
takes  its  rise  in  the  country  of  the  Helvii,  runs  N.  N.  W.  and  after 
a  course  of  200  miles,  falls  into  Oceanus  Cantabricus,  {Bay  of 
Biscay.)  According  to  the  division  of  Gaul  made  by  Augustus, 
the  Loire  was  the  northern  boundary  of  Aquitania. 

Lingones,  um,  a  people  of  Gaul  whose  territories  included  Mount 
Vosegus,  (Vauge,)  consequently  the  sources  of  the  rivers  Mosa, 
(Meuse,)  and  Matrona,  (Marne.)  Their  chief  town  was  Ando- 
madunum,  or  Andomatunum,  afterwards  Lingones,  now  Langres. 

Liscus,  i,  one  of  the  Supreme  magistrates  of  the  iEdui,  who  along 
with  DivitiScus  and  other  chiefs  of  that  nation,  was  in  Caesar's 
camp  in   the  Gallic  war,  and  informed'  him  of  the  conduct  and 

plans  of  Dumnurix. 

Lituus,  i,  a  clarion,  bent  a  little  at  the  end  like  an  augur's  staiT. 
It  was  used  for  the  cavalry.  The  ttiba  was  straight  and  employed 
by  the  infantry.  The  cornu  was  bent  almost  round.  The  buccina 
was  commonly  used  for  changing  the  watches. 

Lorica,  se,  a  coat  of  mail,  generally  made  of  leather,  covered  with 
plates  of  iron  in  the  form  of  scales,  or  iron  rings  twisted  within 
one  another  like  chains.  It  is  also  used  to  denote  a  battlement, 
or  defence  of  towers  and  walls,  constructed  of  stone  or  of  hurdles. 

Lucinius,  i,  (Quintus,  i,)  a  centurion  of  the  first  rank,  who  was 
killed  in  attempting  to  rescue  his  son  when  surrounded  by  some 
of  the  troops  of  Ambiorix,  after  that  king  had  treacherously  per- 
suaded Aurunculeius  Cotta  and  Q.  Titurius  Sablnus,  lieutenants, 
with  the  army  which  they  commanded,  consisting  of  one  legion 
and  five  cohorts,  to  leave  their  winter-quarters  among  the  Ebu- 
rones. 

Lugotorix,  igis,  one  of  the  four  kings  of  Kantium,  {Kent;)  some 
copies  read  Cingetorix  (B.  G.  V.  22), 

Lutetia,  te,  f.  Lutetia  the  capital  of  the  Parisii,  {Paris,  now  the 
capital  of  France,)  was  originally  a  fortress  on  a  small  island  in 
the  Sequana,  {Seine.)  There  are  two  other  islands  in  the  Seine 
at  Paris  covered  with  buildings,  and  connected  with  each  other 
and  the  town,  by  means  of  bridges,  Paris,  situated  in  a  plain  on 
both  sides  of  the  Seine,  is  of  a  circular  form,  and  upwards  of 
eleven  miles  in  circumference.  It  contains  many  stately  edifices, 
and  the  finest  collections  of  medals,  statues,  and  paintings,  in  the 


MAGETOBRIA— MAK£  NOSTflUM.  ^^ 

world.  Every  thing  excellent  in  Rome,  and  in  the  other  cities  of 
Italy,  has  been  conveyed  to  Paris  to  enrich  these  collections  and 
to  adorn  the  city. 

M. 

Magetobhia,  SB,  f.  a  city  of  Gallia,  (France,)  at  which  Ariovistus 
defeated  the  combined  forces  of  the  Gauls.  This  victory  put  the 
country  under  his  dominion. 

Mandubratius,  i,  one  of  the  nation  of  Trinobantes,  who,  on  his 
father's  being  killed  by  Cassivellaunus,  fled  from  Britain  to  Geesar 
then  in  Gaul,  who  took  him  and  the  state  under  his  protection. 

Manilius,  (Lucius,  i,)  a  proconsul,  who  was  obliged  to  fly  from 
Aquilania,  with  the  loss  of  all  his  baggage. 

Manilius,  i,  (Tusculus,)  one  of  the  conspirators  against  Cassius 
Longlnus,  Propraetor  of  Farther  Spain. 

Manipulus,  i,   (See  Legio.) 

Marcomani,  or  Marcomanni,  orum,  a  people  of  Gerraania,  {German 
ny,)  whose  territories  were  bounded  on  the  west  by  the  Rhenusy 
(Rhine,)  and  on  the  south  by  the  Danubius,  (Danube,)  corres- 
ponding to  part  of  the  modern  Circle  of  Swabia.  They  after- 
wards expelled  the  Boii,  and  took  possession  of  their  country^ 
now  called  Bohemia. 

Mare  Nostrum,  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  to  which  the  Romans  gave 
this  name,  from  its  bounding  their  native  country,  Italia,  (Italy,) 
on  three  sides.  By  the  Greeks  it  was  called  Mare  Internum;  and 
the  Mlantic  Ocean,  Mare  Externum.  In  Scripture,  this  collection 
of  water  is  denominated  the  Great  Sea,  vt^hich,  though  of  small 
extent,  when  compared  with  the  Pacific  Ocean,  kc.  is  the  largest 
inland  sea  in  the  world.  The  modern  appellation  is  manifestly 
derived  from  its  situation,  being  wholly  surrounded  by  land,  ex- 
cept the  narrow  strait  of  Gibraltar,  which  connects  it  with  the 
Atlantic  Ocean. 

The  length  of  the  Mediterranean  is  about  2,300  miles,  and  its 
breadth  varies  from  900  to  300  miles.  Tides  are  scarcely  known 
in  this  sea,  except  in  the  Gulf  of  Venice,  and  on  the  coast  of  Tri' 
poll.  There  is  a  constant  influx  into  the  Mediterranean,  both 
from  the  Atlantic  and  Pontus  Euxinus,  (the  Black  Sea.)  That 
part  of  it  which  is  east  of  the  Archipelago,  or  of  the  island  Can- 
dia,  is  called  the  Levant. 

The  principal  islands  in  the  Me/iiterranean,  are  the  Baleares, 


# 


296  MATRONA— MKTTIUS. 

(Majorca  a.nd  Minorca,)  Sardinia,  (Sardinia,)  Corsica,  (Corsica,) 
Sicilia,  (Sicily,)  separated  from  Italia,  (Italy,)  by  Fretum  Sicii- 
lum,  (the  Strait  of  3Iessina,)  Melita,  (Malta,)  and  Creta,  (Can- 
dia.)  In  the  Levant,  besides  some  other  islands  of  less  extent, 
are  Rhodos,  (Rhodes,)  and  Cyprus,  (Cyprus.) 

Matrona,  ae,  f  the  Marne,  a  river  of  Gallia,  (France,)  which  form- 
ed part  of  the  ancient  boundary  betvv^een  Gallia  Belgica  and  Gal- 
lia Celtica.  It  takes  its  rise  at  Sangres,  runs  northw^est  to  Cha- 
lons, then  westvv^ard,  passes  by  Meaux,  becomes  navigable  at 
Vitry,  and  at  Charenton,  a  liltle  above  Paris,  falls  into  the  Se- 
quana,  (Seine,)  after  a  course  of  about  ninety-two  leagues. 

Mediomatrlces,  um,  vel.  i,  Grum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Belgica,  be- 
tween the  Mosella,  (Moselle,)  and  the  Rhenus,  (Rhine.)  The 
Treviri  were  their  neighbors  on  the  north.  Their  chief  town 
was  Divodurum,  afterwards  Mediomatrici,  now  Metz.  At  one 
period  they  were  a  powerl'ul  nation,  and  possessed  a  very  exten- 
sive country.  But  the  conquest  of  Gallia,  (France,)  by  the  Ro- 
mans, destroyed  their  power,  and  confined  them  to  a  narrow  ter- 
ritory. 

Meldi,  orum,  a  people  whose  country  was  included  between  the 
rivers  Matrona,  (Marne,)  and  Sequtina,  (Seitie.)  The  modern 
town,  Meaux,  is  of  some  note,  and  contains  6,000  inhabitants. 
The  Meldi  mentioned  B.  Y.  5,  were  a  Belgic  tribe  living  on  the 
Scaldis  (Scheldt.) 

Menapii,  orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Belgica,  whose  territory  was  se- 
parated from  Insula  Batavurum,  (Holland,)  by  theMosa,  (Meuse.) 
The  Toxandri  were  their  neighbors  on  the  south. 

Mensis,  is,  m.  a  month;  a  term  originally  employed  to  denote  that 
portion  of  time  which  elapses  between  two  successive  changes  of 
the  moon.     (See  Gr.  *App.  I.) 

Messala,  ae,  (Marcus,)  a  noble  Roman  who  was  consul  with  Marcus 
Puppius  Piso,  in  the  60th  year  B.C. 

Mettius,  i,  (Marcus,  i,)  a  man  allied  to  Ariovistus  by  the  rights  of 
hospitality,  whom  Caesar  joined  in  commission  with  C.  Valerius 
Procillus,  on  an  embassy  to  that  king.  As  soon  as  they  entered 
his  camp,  without  suffering  them  to  speak,  Ariovistus  commanded 
both  to  be  put  in  irons.  He  thrice  drew  lots  to  determine  whether 
they  should  be  burned  alive  upon  the  spot,  or  reserved  for  another 
time.  The  lots  being  always  favorable,  their  lives  were  preserv- 
ed. After  the  defeat  of  Ariovistus,  Caesar  himself  in  the  pursuit 
fell  in  with  Procillus,  and  Mettius  was  likewise  recovered  and 
brought  back  to  the  Roman  camp. 


wmucius — NAKBO.  297 

Minucius,  i,  (Lucius  M.  Basilus,)  one  of  Caesars  officers.  To  C. 
Fabius,  and  L.  Minucius  Basilus,  he  gave  the  joint  command  of 
two  legions,  which  were  stationed  among  the  Rhemi. 

Mona,  ae,  f.  the  Isle  of  Man.  an  island  in  the  Irish  Sea,  nearly  equi- 
distant from  England,  Scotland,  and  Ireland.  It  is  thirty  miles 
long,  and  eight  broad.  The  soil  is  fertile,  the  air  salubrious,  and 
the  inhabitants  live  in  general  to  a  great  age.  The  sovereignty 
of  this  island  formerly  belonged  to  the  Dukes  of  Athol;  but  it 
was  sold  in  1765  to  the  crown.  Tacitus  and  others  call  Anglesy, 
Mona,  but  Caesar  is  more  correct. 

Morini,  orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Belgica,  whose  country  lay  along 
the  coast  opposite  to  Cantium,  (Kent.) 

Moritasgus,  i,  the  king  of  the  Senones,  at  Caesar's  arrival  in  Gallia, 
(France.) 

Mosa,  ae,  f.  the  McBse,  or  Meuse,  a  river  of  Gallia,  (France,)  rising 
a  little  to  the  west  of  Mount  Vosegus,  (Vauge,)  runs  north,  passes 
a  number  of  celebrated  towns,  receives,  at  Namur,  the  Sabis, 
(Samhre,)  joins  the  Vahalis,  (Wahal,  or,  Waal,)  below  the  island 
of  Bommel,  and  falls  into  the  German  Sea.  The  course  of  this 
river,  which  extends  to  IGO  leagues,  is  north. 

Munatius,  i,  (Lucius  M.  Plancus),  one  of  Caesar's  lieutenants,  who, 
with  Caius  Trebonius,  had  the  command  of  three  legions  which 
were  settled  in  Belgium,  during  the  winter. 

Musculus,  a  species  of  moveable  shed  or  peat-house  on  wheels, 
shaped  like  an  arched  wagon,  usually  sent  before  the  large  tow- 
ers to  prepare  the  way  for  their  advance,  by  cutting  down  trees, 
filling  up  ditches,  removing  obstructions,  and  making  a  smooth 
and  solid  road  even  up  to  the  enemy's  walls. 

N. 

Nameius,  i,  a  nobleman  of  the  Helvetii,  who,  with  Verudoctius, 
was  at  the  head  of  the  embassy  which  that  nation  sent  to  Caesar, 
to  request  permission  to  march  through  the  Roman  province. 

Namnetes,  or,  Nannetes,  um,  a  people  of  Gallia  Celtica,  who  lived 
on  the  north  bank  of  the  Ligeris,  (Loire,)  where  it  falls  into  the 
sea. 

Nantuates,  um,  a  people,  whose  country  lay  on  the  south  of  Lacus 
Lemanus,  (the  Lake  of  Geneva.) 

Narbo,  onis.  f.  Narbonne,  a  town  of  Provincia,  to  the  south  of  the 
river  Atax,  (the  ./^ //</?,). near  the  sea-coast,  which  afterwards  gave 
name  to  th^l  divisicn  ol"  Gailia,  (France,)  called  Naibonensis. 


298 


NASUA NAVES. 


Nasua,  ae,  the  brother  of  Cimberius,  who  commanded  the  100  Can- 
tons of  the  Suevi,  who  had  encamped  on  the  bank  of  the  Rhenus, 
(Rhine,)  with  the  design  of  crossing  that  river. 

Naves,  ium,  (sing,  navis,)  ships.  The  kind  of  ships  used  by  the 
Romans  were  chiefly  two,  viz:  Naves  Longce,  ships  of  war,  and 
Naves  Onerari^,  ships  of  burden.  The  Naves  longse  were  so 
called  because  they  were  of  a  longer  shape  than  the  others.  They 
were  commonly  impelled  by  oars,  and  were  distinguished  by  a 
helmet  at  the  mast  head.  They  were  also  ranked  as  biremes,  tri- 
remes, quadrevies,  and  quinquiremes ,  according  as  they  had  two, 
three,  four,  or  five  rows  or  tiers  of  oars.  According  to  the  gene- 
rally received  opinion,  these  rows  or  tiers  ran  from  the  prow  to 
the  stern,  as  exhibited  in  the  following  wood  cuts,  taken  from 
antiques,  the  first  of  which  has  one  row  and  the  second  two. 
Over  these  were  erected  decks  on  which  sometimes  towers  were 
constructed,  from  which  the  enemy  might  be  more  conveniently 
and  successfully  assailed. 

NAVES  LONG^. 


The  Naves  Onerarice,  or   ships  of  burden,  were   broader  and 
rounder  than  the  vessels  of  war.     They  were  impelled  by  sails 


rs-STTOJ^ 


and  distinguished  by  a  basket,  (corbis,)  suspended  from  the  mast 
headj  whence  they  were  sometimes  called  corbttce. 

Naves  ActuaricB  were  ships  contrived  for  lightness  and  expedi- 
tion. They  had  but  one  bank  of  oars,  or  at  most  two,  on  each 
side.  They  were  of  different  kinds,  distinguished  by  different 
names;  as,  Celoces,  Lembi,  PhasUi,  &c.,  but  the  most  remarkable 
were  the  Naves  Liburna,  a  kind  of  light  gallies  used  by  the 
Liburni. 

Nemetes,  um,  a  people  of  Gallia  BelgTca,  probably  a  tribe  of  the 
Germans,  on  the  west  bank  of  the  river  Rhenus,  (khine,)  be- 
tween the  Triboci  and  Vangiones.  Their  principal  city  was  No- 
viomagus,  (Spire.) 

Nervii,  orura,  a  powerful  and  warlike  nation  of  Gallia  Belgjca, 
whose  country  lay  on  both  sides  of  the  Scaldis,  {Scheldt,  near  the 
source  of  that  river,  afterwards  Hainaidt,  and  Nord.  They  re- 
volted and  attacked  the  Roman  troops  under  Csesar;  but  were  to- 
tally routed.  Their  mode  of  defence  against  the  attacks  of  cav- 
alry was  simple  and  effectual.  The  different  readings  B.  G.  Lib. 
II.  17,  are  numerous,  yet  the  idea  conveyed  by  all  is  not  very  ma- 
terially different.  In  the  place  where  the  Nervii  wished  to  raise 
a  barrier,  they,  probably  at  a  considerable  distance  from  each 
other,  half  cut  two  rows  of  young  trees,  so  that  they  continued 
to  grow,  bent  them  longitudinally,  and  gave  their  branches  a  late- 
ral direction.  The  middle  space  between  these  rows  was  planted 
or  filled  up  with  briers  and  thorns,  which  intermixing  with  the 
trees  that  formed  the  outside  of  the  fence,  rendered  the  whole  so 
close  and  impervious,  that  it  not  only  stopped  the  progress,  but 
even  the  view  of  the  invaders. 

After  ramis  the  common  text  has  enatis,  which  Oudendorp  and 
others  reject  as  a  mere  gloss,  unnecessary  to  the  sense.  It  is  also 
wanting  in  the  best  MSS. 

Nonas,  arum,  f.  the  Nones,  the  second  division  of  the  Roman  month; 
so  called,  it  is  supposed,  because  from  that  day  to  the  Ides  nine 
days  intervened.     In  the  months  of  March,  May,  July,  and  Octo- 

.  ber,  the  Nones  fell  on  the  seventh,  and  in  the  other  months  on 
the  fifth.     (See  Gr.  App.  I.) 

Norela,  ae,  f.  a  city  of  Noricum,  the  capital  of  the  Taurisci.    B.  I.  5. 

NorTcum,  i,  n.  or  Noricus  ager,  a  large  country  of  Germany,  be- 
tween Italia,  (Italy,)  and  the  Danubius,  (Danube).  It  compre- 
hended the  greater  part  of  Austria,  all  Saltzburg,  Stiria,  and  Ca- 
rinthia.     Their  chief  city  w^as  Noreia,  which  was  besieged  by  the 


300  NORICI OCISMH. 

Boii,  in  the  inroad  which  they  had  made  upon  Noricum,  before 
they  entered  into  alliance  with  the  Helvetii. 

Norici,  Orum,  the  people  of  Noricum. 

Noviodunum,  i,  n.  (B.  G.  II.  15.)  a  town  of  the  Suessiones,  (Sot- 
sons,  or  Noyons.)  Another  of  the  ^Edui,  (B.  G.  VII.  55,)  now 
Nevers,  on  the  banks  of  the  Ligfiris,  {Loire)..  And  a  third  be- 
longed to  the  Bituriges,  (B.  G.  VII.  14,)  now  Neuvy  or,  Neufry, 
about  twenty  miles  west  from  Nevers. 

Numidia,  se,  f.  Algiers,  a  country  of  Africa,  bounded  on  the  north 
by  the  Mediterranean;  on  the  west  by  Mauritania,  {Morocco  and 
Fez;)  on  the  south  by  Gsetulia;  and  on  the  east  by  Africa  Propria, 
{Tunis.) 

Numidae,  arum,  and,  Nomades,  um,  the  inhabitants  of  Numidia, 
described  by  Sallust,  in  the  Jugurthan  war,  as  faithless,  unsteady, 
and  fond  of  revolutions  in  the  state. 


o. 

1 

OcELUM,  i,  n.  Oux,  or  Exilles,  a  town  on  the  frontiers  of  Gallia 
Cisalpina,  Citerior,  or  Togata,  in  Alpes  Graise. 

Octodurus,  i,  (Octodorus,  in  Greek,)  Martigny,  a  town,  or  village, 
of  the  Veragri,  {Vicus  Veragrorum,  Csesar,  B.  G.  III.  1,)  on  the 
Drance,  near  its  junction  with  the  Rhodanus,  {Rhone,)  at  a  con- 
siderable distance  above  the  entrance  of  the  latter  into  Lacus 
Lemanus,  (the  Lake  of  Geneva.) 

Orcynia,  se,  f  a  name  given  by  Eratosthenes,  and  some  other 
Greeks,  to  Hercynia  Silvaj  which  see. 

Orgetorix,  Tgis,  was,  according  to  Coesar,  the  richest  and  most  noble 
of  the  Helvetii.  Prompted  by  a  love  of  power,  he  formed  a  con- 
spiracy among  the  nobles,  and  persuaded  the  people  to  quit  their 
country.  When  his  ambitious  views  were  discovered  by  the 
state,  he  was  obliged  to  answer  to  the  charges  preferred  against 
him.  Orgetorix,  by  means  of  his  vassals  and  debtors,  rescued 
himself,  from  the  hands  of  his  judges,  and  escaped.  But  whilst 
the  state  was  endeavoring  to  support  its  authority  by  force,  he 
died,  as  was  suspected,  by  his  own  hands. 

Osismii,  orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Celtica,  one  of  the  nations  which 
went  under  the  general  name  of  Civitates  Armoricce.  Their  coun- 
try afterwards  formed  part  of  the  province  of  Bretagne.  It  is 
now  called  Finisterre. 


PADUS — PETROSIDIUS.  301 


Padtjs,  i,  m.  the  Po,  the  largest  river  of  Italy,  anciently  called  Eri- 
danus.  The  northern  branches  of  the  Po,  descending  from  the 
Alps,  render  it  largest  in  the  warmest  months  of  summer,  by  the 
melting  of  the  snow  towards  the  summit  of4;hese  lofty  mountains. 
It  disembogues  into  Mare  Adriaticum,  or  Hadriaticum,  (the  Gulf 
of  Venice,)  by  seven  mouths,  of  which  two  were  formed  by  na- 
ture, the  other  five  by  art. 

Ptemani,  orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Belgica,  on  the  east  bank  of  the 
Mosa,  (Meuse.)  They  had  the  Cserajsi  on  the  south,  the  Treviri 
on  the  east,  and  Silva  Arduenna  on  the  north. 

Paludamentum,  i,  the  military  robe  or  cloak  of  the  Roman  com- 
mander; sometimes  also  worn  by  the  chief  officers.  It  was  of  a 
scarlet  color,  bordered  with  purple.  The  elevation  of  this  upon 
a  spear  above  the  Prsetorium,  or  general's  tent,  was  often  the  sig- 
nal given  for  commencing  battle. 

Parisii,  orum,  the  inhabitants  of  Lutelia,  from  whom  it  was  after- 
wards called  Parisii,  now  Paris,  the  capital  of  France.  (See 
Lutetia.) 

Passus,  us,  a  pace,  (two  steps,)  was  reckoned  nearly  equal  to  five 
feet.  (See  Gr.  App.  VI.  5,)  Of  these  125  made  a  stadium,  ^nd 
1000  made  a  mile;  hence,  mille  passuum,  a  mile. 

Pedius,  i,.  (Quintus)  a  grandson  of  one  of  Julius  Caesar's  sisters, 
was  one  of  his  lieutenant-generals  in  the  Gallic  war,  and  appoint- 
ed in  his  will  co-heir  with  Octavius,  who  had  Pedius  for  his  col- 
league in  his  first  consulship.  He  passed  a  law,  from  him  called 
Lex  Pedia,  declaring  the  death  of  Julius  Caesar  to  have  been  mur- 
der, and  subjecting  the  assassin  to  capital  punishment. 

Peligni,  orum,  a  people  of  Italy,  whose  country  lay  between  the 
sources  of  the  rivers  Sagrus,  (Sangro,)  and  Aternus,  (Pescara,) 
both  of  which  fall  into  the  Gulf  of  Venice. 

Petrosidius,  i,  (Lucius,  i,)  a  standard  bearer  of  the  army  which, 
under  the  command  of  Q.  Titurius  Sablnus  and  Lucius  Auruncu- 
leius  Cotta,  wintered  among  the  Eburones.  These  troops  were, 
in  consequence  of  a  stratagem  of  Ambiorix,  attacked  by  him  oa 
disadvantageous  ground  two  miles  from  the  camp,  and  almost 
wholly  cut  off.  Petrosidius  having,  with  a  few  of  his  men,  re- 
turned to  the  camp,  threw  his  standard  within  the  rampart,  and 
was  killed  fighting  with  great  bravery  before  the  fortifications. 
26 


302  PICTONES PR^TOR. 

Pictones,  um,  a  people  of  Gallia  Celtica,  on  the  south  bank  of  the 
Ligeris,  (Loire,)  where  it  falls  into  the  sea. 

Pilani.   (See  Legio.) 

Pirustse,  arum,  a  people  of  Illyricum,  on  the  east  coast  of  Mare 
Hadriaticum,  (the  Guff  of  Venice.) 

Piso,  onis,  (Lucius  Calpurnius,  i,)  Caesar's  father-in-law,  who  was 
consul  with  A.  Gabinius  Paulus,  in  the  year  of  the  city  696.  In 
their  consulship,  Cicero  was  banished  from  Rome,  and  Clodiua 
was  supported  by  Piso,  in  procuring  that  disgraceful  sentence, 
(B.  G.  1.6.) 

Piso,  onis,  (Lucius,  i,)  the  grandfather  of  Piso  above  mentioned, 
Avas  a  lieutenant  of  Cassius,  both  of  whom  lell  iu  an  engagement 
with  the  Helvetii,  (B.  G.  I.  12.) 

Piso,  unis,  surnamed  from  his  country,  Aquitanus,a  nobleman  of 
Aquitania,  whose  father  had  been  supreme  magistrate  in  that 
country,  and  called  Friend  by  the  Romans,  (B.  G.  IV.  12.) 

PlancuSji,  (L.  Munatius,  i,)  a  lieutenant  in  Caesar's  army,  to  whom 
he  gave  the  joint  command  with  C$  Trebonius,  of  three  legions 
cantoned  in  Gallia  Belglca.  After  the  death  of  Julius  Caesar,  L. 
Munatius  Plancus  joined  Antony  and  LepTdus.  With  the  latter 
he  was  consul.     He  is  said  to  have  founded  Lugdunum,   (Lyons.) 

Pleumosii,  orura,  a  people  of  Gallia  Belglca,  supposed  to  have  lived 
on  the  Scaldis,  (Scheldt,)  near  the  place  where  the  city  Tournay 
now  stands. 

Pluteus,  i,  a  kind  of  moveable  gallery  on  wheels,  in  form  resembling 
the  Musctilus,  (which  see,)  but  used  chiefly  to  protect  the  archers 
stationed  in  it,  in  order  to  clear  the  walls  with  their  arrows,  and 
so  facilitate  the  approach  of  storming  parties  and  the  erection  of 
scaling  ladders. 

Pompeius,  i,  (Cneius,)  a  Roman  who  was  well  skilled  in  the  lan- 
guage of  the  Gauls,  and  acted  as  interpreter  to  Quintus  Titurius. 
After  the  credulity  of  that  lieutenant  had  placed  himself  and  his 
men  at  the  mercy  of  Ambiorix,  he  sent  Cneius  Pompeius  to  the 
king  of  the  Eburones,  begging  him  to  spare  their  lives.  (See 
Titurius) 

Praeconinus,  i,  a  lieutenant  who  was  himself  killed,  and  his  army 
defeated  at  Apollonia. 

Praefectus,  i,  an  officer  who  commanded  t-he  allies,  and  who  in  the 
extent  of  his  command  resembled  the  legionary  tribune.  The 
commander  of  the  cavalry  of  a  legion  was  called  prafectus  alee. 

Praetor,  oris,  m.  a  Praetor j  (from  Free  and  eo,)  literally,  one  who 
goes  before.     In  the  early  ages  of  the  Roman  State,  this  term  is 


PRETORIA    COHORS REMI.  303 

supposed  by  some  to  have  been  a  general  appellation  of  all  the 
Roman  Magistrates,  afterwards  of  the  general  of  the  armyj  even 
the  Emperors  were  ambitious  to  include  it  among  their  other 
titles.  But  the  word  commonly  denoted  a  Roman  judge  who  ad- 
ministered justice  both  among  his  fellow-citizens,  and  also  among 
the  foreigners  who  resided  in  Rome.  In  dignity  the  Praetor  rank- 
ed next  to  the  Consul.  He  had  power  to  alter  laws,  repeal  them, 
and  enact  new  at  pleasure. 

Praetoria  cohort;.  Praetorian  cohort,  a  select  band  of  troops  forming 
the  general's  body  guard. 

Preciani,  orum,  a  people  of  Aquitania,  who  are  supposed  to  have 
lived  at  the  foot  of  the  Pyrenaei  Montes,  (Pyrenees,)  near  Mare 
-Cantabrieum,  (the  Bay  of  Biscay.) 

Primopilus,  i,  (sometimes  primus  pilus,)  the. chief  centurion  of  the 
legion.  This  name  belonged  to  the  first  centurion  of  the  first 
maniple  of  the  Triarii.  He  was  entrusted  with  the  eagle  or  main 
standard  of  the  legion j  in  pay  he  ranked  among  the  equites,  and 
had  a  place  in  the  council  of  war  with  the  consul  and  tribunes. 

Provincia  Romana,  the  Roman  Province;  that  part  of  Transalpine 
Gaul  in  the  possession  of  the  Romans  previous  to  the  conquests 
of  Caesar.  It  extended  along  the  shore  of  the  Mediterranean, 
from  the  Pyrenees  to  the  Alps,  and  was  bounded  on  its  northwest 
side  by  the  Mount  Cebenna,  (or  Cevennes,)  and  on  the  north,  east- 
ward, by  the  Ambani,  Sequari,  and  Helvetii.  In  the  new  division 
of  Gaul  afterwards  made  by  Augustus,  its  boundaries  remained 
as  before,  but  as  all  Gaul  was  now  become  a  Roman  Province  it 
ceased  to  be  distinguished  by  that  name,  and  was  called  Narbo- 
nensis,  from  Narbo  its  principal  city.     (See  Narbo.) 

Pulfio,  onis,  (Titus,  i,)  a  Roman  centurion  of  distinguished  valor, 
who,  to  decide  a  dispute  with  L.  Varenus  respecting  superiority 
of  courage,  rushed  forth  from  the  camp,  when  attacked  by  the 
Nervii,  and  displayed  great  bravery  without  the  fortifications. 
Nor  was  his  rival  for  military  fame,  inferior  to  him  either  in 
bravery  or  generosityj  B.  V.  Ch.  44.     (See  Varenus.) 

R. 

Rauraci,  orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Celtica.  on  the  northern  extrem- 
ity  of  Mount  Jura.  The  Rhenus,  (Rhine,)  was  their  boxmdary 
on  the  east.  "^ 

Remi,  orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  BelgTca,  whose  country  lay  to  the 
north  of  the  Matrona,  (Manic).  Their  chief  town  was  Durocor- 
trrum.  now  Rheiim. 


304  RHEDONES ROMA. 

RhedoneSj  um,  a  people  of  Gallia  Cellica.  The  Rhedones  were 
one  of  those  nations  reckoned  among  the  Civitdtes  ArmoficoR. 
Their  country  is  now  called  Bretagne. 

Rhenus,  i,  m.  the  Rhine,  a  celebrated  river  of  Europe,  which 
takes  its  rise  in  Mount  Adula,  (-S^.  Gothard.)  in  the  country  of 
the  Grissons,  passes  Lacus  Brigantlnus,  (Lake  of  Constance,) 
and  continues  to  run  nearly  west  about  75  miles,  when  it  reaches 
Basti.  On  leaving  this  city,  it  takes  a  northerly  direction  and  be- 
comes the  boundary  between  France,  or  the  Netherlands,  and 
Germany,  till  it  divides  into  two  branches,  which,  with  the  Ger- 
man Sea,  formed,  what  was  anciently  called,  Insula  Batavorura, 
(Holland,  or  the  United  Provinces.)  After  a  course  of  600  miles, 
and  receiving  several  rivers  on  both  banks,  the  Rhine  discharges 
itself  into  that  part  of  Mare  Atlanticum,  (the  Atlantic  Ocean,) 
called  Oceanus  Germanicus,  (the  German  Sea.) 

Rhodanus,  i.  m.  the  Rhone,  a  large  and  rapid  river  of  Europe, 
which  has  its  source  in  Mount  la  Fourche,  near  St.  Gothard,  in 
the  canton  of  Uri,  not  more  than  two  leagues  south  from  that  of 
the  Rhenus,  (Rhine,)  passes'Lacus  Lemanus,  (the  Lake  of  Gene- 
I'a,)  five  leagues  below  which  it  disappears  between  two  rocks 
for  a  considerable  way,  rises  again,  flows  with  great  rapidity  in 
a  southern  direction,  and  discharges  itself  by  three  mouths  into 
that  part  of  the  Mediterranean  formerly  called  Gallicus  Sinus, 
(the  Gulf  of  Lyons.)  The  course  of  the  Rhone  is  about  400 
miles,  during  which  it  falls  5,400  feet.  In  Strabo's  time  it  was 
navigable  a  good  way  up;  but  its  mouths  are  now  so  full  of  rocks 
brought  down  from  the  mountain  by  its  impetuous  current,  that 
no  ship  can  enter  them.  The  Rhone  is  largest  in  summer,  and  is 
at  its  greatest  height  soon  after  the  longest  day.  This  is  most 
probably  occasioned  by  the  heat  of  the  Sun  melting  part  of  the 
snow  on  the  Alps  during  the  summer  months. 

Roma,  ae,  f.  Rome,  one  of  the  most  celebrated  cities  of  antiquity, 
stood  on  the  banks  of  the  Tiber,  about  fifteen  miles  from  the  sea. 
Romulus,  from  whom  the  name  is  derived,  laid  the  foundation  of 
this  city  on  Mons  Palatinus,  15th  April,  753  B.  C.  From  a  very 
small  beginning  it  gradually  increased,  until  its  circumference, 
according  to  Pliny,  was  not  less  than  twenty  miles.  After  the 
lapse  of  many  years,  Rome  became  the  capital  of  Italia.  (Italy,) 
and,  at  the  commencement  of  the  Christian  Era,  the  known  world 
was  in  subjection  to  that  gigantic  power.  It  was  divided  into 
twenty-four  regions  or  wards,  had  seven  great,  and  thirteen  smaller 
aqueducts,  thirty-seven  gates,  and  six  hundred  and  forty-four  tow 


ROSCIUS SAMAROBKIVA.  305 

ers  on  the  walls.  To  ascertain  its  population  when  in  the  height 
of  power,  is  perhaps  impossible;  but  it  could  not  fall  much  be- 
low four  millions. 

Iloscius,  i,  (Lucius,  i,)  a  lieutenant,  to  whom  Caesar  gave  the  com- 
mand of  the  third  legion,  which  he  was  to  march  into  the  territo- 
ries of  the  Essui. 

Rufus,  i,  (P.  Sulpicius,  i,)  one  of  Ceesar's  lieutenants,  to  whom  he 
gave  the  charge  of  the  port  in  Gallia,  {France,)  from  which  he 
sailed  for  Britannia,  {Britain,)  and  a  garrison  sufficient  to  pro- 
tect it  during  his  absence. 

Ruteni,  orum,  a  people  of  Aquitania,  on  the  river  Tarnis,  {Tame.) 

Rutilus,  i,  (M.  Sempronius,  i,)  an  officer  of  Caesar,  who  had,  with 
T.  Labienus,  the  joint  command  of  the  two  legions  which  that 
general  ordered  to  march  into  the  territories  of  the  Sequani. 


s. 

Sabinus,  i,  (Caius  Calvisius,)  an  officer  in  Caesar^s  army,  whom  he 
sent  into  -^tolia,  inGraecia,  {Greece,)  with  five  cohorts  and  a  few 
men. 

Sabinus,  i,  (Q..  Titurius,  i,)  a  lieutenant  in  Caesar's  army.  He,  and 
L.  Aurunculeitts  Cotta,  had  the  command  of  the  troops  which 
were  stationed  among  the  Menapii,  and  in  other  parts  of  Gallia 
Belglca.  When  in  their  quarters  on  the  frontiers  of  the  Eburo- 
nes,  the  artful  stratagem  of  Ambiorix,  king  of  that  tribe,  to  cut 
off  these  lieutenants  and  their  two  legions  succeeded,  through  the 
credulity  and  obstinacy  of  Sabinus.  A  few  of  the  private  sol- 
diers escaped  the  sword  of  the  Gauls.  (See  Cotta.)  This  officer 
is  sometimes  called  simply  Titurius,  or,  Sabinus. 

Sabis,  is,  m.  the  Sambre,  a  river  of  Gallia  Belglca,  which  has  its 
rise  in  what  is  now  called  picardy,  runs  northeast  and  falls  into 
the  Mosa,  {Meuse,)  near  Namur. 

Sagittarii,  orum,  archers;  men  who  fought  with  bows  and  aj-rows, 
attached  to  the  velites.  (See  Legio.)  The  best  archers  were  the 
Cretans.  The  Romans  did  not  use  the  bow  in  the  early  times  of 
the  republic,  and  when  introduced  they  had  scarcely  any  archers 
except  those  of  the  auxiliary  troops. 

Samarobrlva,  se,  f.  (i.  e.  the  bridge  of  the  Samara,)  Amiens,  a  town 
of  Gallia  Belglca,  on  the  south  bank  of  the  river  Samara,  {Somme.) 
It  was  afterwards  called  Ambianum,  from  its  inhabitants;  hence 
the  present  name 


303  SANTOKES- — SEtitJAlNA. 

Santones,  um,  a  people  of  Gallia  CellTca,  to  the  north  of  the  river 
Carantonus,  (Charente.)  Their  chief  town  was  Mediolanum,  after- 
wards Santones,  now  Samtes. 

Scaldis,  is,  the  Scheld,  or  the  Scheldt,  a  river  of  Gallia  BelgTca, 
which  takes  its  rise  about  fifteen  miles  south  of  Cametracum, 
(Cambray,)  in  the  province  of  Picardy,  runs  north,  and  dividing 
into  two  branches,  falls  into  the  German  Sea.  Cajsar  erroneously 
makes  it  a  branch  of  the  Mosa,  (Meuse,)    (B.  G.  VI.  33.) 

Scorpiones,  a  species  of  military  engine  foi  throwing  darts  and  jav- 
elins, similar  to  the  Balista,  or  probably  only  another  name  for 
the  same.   (See  Balista.) 

Scutum,  i.  m.  a  shield;  a  part  of  the  defensive  armor  of  the  Roman 
infantry,  which  they  wore  on  their  left  arms  to  protect  their  bodies 
against  the  arrows,  darts,  and  other  missile  weapons  thrown  by 
the  enemy.  It  consisted  of  thin  pieces  of  wood  joined  by  plates 
of  iron,  and  covered  with  thick  skin  or  hide.  The  most  common 
form  was  oval,  extending  to  four  feet  in  length  and  two  and  a  half 
in  breadth.  When  a  soldier  had  not  his  shield  he  w^as  said  to 
fight  nudo  corpore. 

Seduni,  orum,  a  nation  of  Helvetia,  (Switzerland,)  on  the  north 
bank  of  the  Rhodiinus,  (Rhone,)  above  Lacus  Lemanus,  (the 
Lake  of  Geneva.) 

Sedusii,orum,  a  nation  of  Germany,  on  the  northeast  bank  of  the  Rhe- 
nus,  (Rhine.)  Their  country  was  watered  by  the  Moenus,  (Maine.) 
^  Scgonax,  acis,  one  of  the  four  king*'  who  reigned  in  Cantium,  (Kent,) 
yr        at  the  time  Caesar  invaded  Britain. 

Segontiaci,  orum,  a  British  nationon  the  south  of  the  river  Tame- 
sis,  (Thames.)  They  appear  to  have  been  subject  to  Cassivel- 
launus,  at  the  time  Ccesar  attempted  to  add  this  island  to  the  Ro- 
man empire.   (B.  V.  Ch.  21.) 

Segusiani,  Orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Celtica,  to  the  west  of  the  Rho- 
danus,  (Rhone.)  Their  country  was  traversed  by  the  Ligeris, 
(Loire,)  towards  the  source  of  that  river. 

Senones,  um,  a  warlike  nation  of  Gallia  Celtica,  who  lived  on  the 
Sequana,  (Seine,)  about  70  miles  above  Paris. 

Septimius,  i,  (Lucius,  i,)  a  tribune  of  the  soldiers,  sent  along  with 
Achillas,  by  Ptolemfsus  king  of  Egypt,  to  murder  Pompey,  in 
whose  army  he  had  formerly  been  a  centurion. 

Sequana.  se,  the  Seine,  a  river  of  Gallia,  (France,)  has  its  source 
near  Nevers  inBourgogne,  runs  in  a  northwest  direction,  and  falls 
into  that  part  of  the  Atlantic  called  Fretum  Britannicum,  (the 
British  Channel,)  at  Havre  de  Grace.  The  course  of  this  beauti- 
ful and  picturesque  river  extends  to  250  miles.  Paris,  the  capital 
of  France,  originally  a  fort  on  a  small  island  in  the  Seine,  above 
120  miles  from  the  sea,  now  stands  on  both  sides  of  this  river, 
over  which  there  are,  in  that  city,  12  bridges. 

Sequana,  ae,  f.  a  district  of  Gallia,  (France,)  bounded  on  the  east 
by  Mons  Jura,  (Mount  Jura,)  which  separated  it  from  the  coun- 
try of  the  Helvetii;  on  the  north  by  Mount  Vosegus,  (Vauge,) 
which  divided  it  from  that  of  the  Leuci;  on  the  west  by  the  coun- 
try of  the  Mdui  and  Lingones;  and  on  the  south  by  that  of  the 
Ambarri  and  Allobrciges. 


SEQUANI TARUSATES.  307 

Sequani  orum,  (sing.  SequSnus,  i,)  the  people  of  SequSna.  This 
nation  headed  one  of  the  factions  of  the  Gallic  states,  and  the 
\^dui  the  other. 

Sesuvii,  oruoi,  (or  Sesovii,)  one  of  the  Armoric  states  in  Gaul,  the 
situation  of  which  is  not  known. 

Sextius,  i,  (Publius  S.  Baculus,)  a  centurion  of  the  first  rank  in 
Caesar's  army,  in  the  Gallic  wars. 

Sextius,  i,  (Titus,  i,)  one  of  the  three  lieutenants  whom  Caesar 
sent  to  augment  his  army,  in  the  sixth  year  of  the  war  in  Gallia, 
(France.) 

Sibutzates,  um,  a  people  of  Aquitania,  whose  country  lay  along  the 
Atur,  {Jtdour.)     Of  their  history  nothing  is  known. 

Sigambri,  orum,  a  German  nation,  who  lived  on  the  east  bank  of 
the  Rhine,  to  the  south  of  the  river  Rura,  (Roir.) 

Silanus,  i,  (Marcus,  i.)  one  of  Caesar's  lieutenants,  whom  he  order- 
ed to  levy  troops  for  the  war  in  Gallia,   (France.) 

Silius>  i,  (Titus,  i,)  an  offi^cer  whom  P.  Crassus  sent  to  the  Veneti, 
to  procure  grain  and  forage  with  Velanius.  But  the  Veneti,  seiz- 
ed them  in  expectation  of  regaining  their  hostages  by  this  measure. 

Sotiates,  ium,  a  people  of  iVquitania,  whose  country  extended  along 
the  Garumna,  (Garonne.)  Their  territories  formed  part  of  what 
was  afterwards  called  Novempopulana,  bounded  by  the  Garonne, 
Pyrenees,  and  Bay  of  Biscay. 

Suessiones,  Suessones,   um,  a  people  of  Gallia  Belgica,  whose  coun- 
try was  bounded  on  the  south  by  the  Matrona,   (Marne.)     Al- 
though a  brave  and  powerful  nation,  they  were  obliged  to  submit    ijp 
to  the  arms  of  Caesar. 

Suevi,  orum,  a  nation  of  Germania,  (Germany^)  who  inhabited  a 
large  tract  of  country,  Suevia,  ae,  f.  lying  between  the  Albis, 
Elbe,  and  the  Vistula,  (Vistula,)  on  the  northern  side  of  Silva, 
Hercynia.     They  made  many  inroads  on  the  Roman  territories. 

Sulpitius,  i,  (Publius,  i,)  one  of  Caesar's  lieutenants.  Q.  TuUius, 
Cicero,  and  P.  Sulpitius,  were  stationed  among  the  JEdui,  at  Ca- 
billo,  v.  Cabillonum,  (Chalons,)  and  Matisco,  (Mascon,)  on  the 
Arar,  (Saone.)  These  two  officers  were  entrusted  with  the  care 
of  provisions. 

T. 

Tamesis,  or  Thamesis,  is,  m.  the  Thames,  one  of  the  largest  rivers 
of  England,  rises  in  Cotswold  hills  in  the  western  extremity  of 
Gloucestershire,  runs  eastward,  and  after  passing  through  Lon- 
don, falls  into  tlie  German  Sea.  With  respect  to  commerce,  this 
is  the  first  river  in  the  world.  It  is  navigable  about  130  miles, 
and  the  tide  flows  up  as  far  as  Richmond  in  Surrey,  which  taking 
the  course  of  the  river,  is  70  miles. 

Tarbelli.  orum,  a  people  of  Aquitania,  whose  country  extended 
along  the  sea-coast,  from  the  Pyrenaei  Montes,  (Pyrenees,)  to  the 
territories  of  the  Cocosates. 

Tarusates,  ium,  a  people  of  Aquitania.  The  Tarbelli  were  be- 
tween t*^em  and  the  Bay  of  Biscay. 


.% 


^v 


303 


TASGETIUS TIGURIISUS    FAGUS. 


Tasgetius,  i,  a  nobleman  of  the  nation  of  the  Carnutes,  whose  fore- 
fathers had  possessed  the  sovereignty  of  that  state. 

Taximagulus,  i,  one  of  the  four  kings  who  reigned  over  Cantium. 
(Kent.)  They  seem  to  have  all  been  under  the  power  of  Cassi- 
vellaunus. 

Tectosages,  um,  and  Tectosagi,  orum,  a  very  valiant  people  of  Gal- 
lia, a  branch  of  the  Volcse,  near  the  Pyrenees.   (See  Voices.) 

Tenchteri,  orum,  a  people  of  Germany,  on  the  river  Rhenus,  (Rhine,) 
south  of  the  Sigambri. 

Terrasidius,  i,  (Titus,  i,)  one  of  Cgesar's  lieutenants,  whom  he  sent 
into  the  country  of  the  Esubii. 

Testudo,  inis,  f.  I.  A  w^ooden  tower  used  by  the  Romans  for  pro- 
tecting the  soldiers  when  employed  in  undermining  the  walls  of 
a  town,  or  in  battering  them  with  the  ram,  (See  Aries.)  It  was 
erected  of  wood,  and  covered  with  hides,  earth,  or  any  other  kind 
of  substance  which  is  with  difficulty  set  on  fire. 

II.  When  the  soldiers  of  a  company  advanced  to  an  assault, 
they  frequently  stood  close  together,  and  formed  a  shade  or  screen 
of  their  shields,  to  protect  their  bodies  against  the  missile  wea- 
pons, tTirown  by  the  enemy  from  the  walls.  This  defence  they 
also  called  Testudo,  from  the  resemblance  which  the  locked  shields 
had  to  the  shell  or  covering  of  the  tortoise,  (See  the  following 
wood  cut,)  but  it  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  tower  or  man- 
telet just  described. 

TESTUDO. 


Tigurlnus  Pagus,  one  of  the  four  cantons  or  districts,  into  which 
Helvetia    (Switzerland,)  is  divided  according  to  Caep-r,  compre- 


TIGURINI TURRIS.  309 

bending  the  modern  cantons  Zurich,  Schwitz,  Schaffhausen,  and 
the  lands  of  the  Mbey  of  St.  Gal. 

Tigurini,  Orum,  the  people  of  Pagus  Tigurinus. 

Titus,  i,  a  common  prsenomen  among  the  Romans. 

Titurius,  i,  (Quintus  T.  Sablnus,)  one  of  Caesar's  lieutenants,  often 
called  simply,  Titurius,  killed  by  Ambiorix.   (See  Aurunculeius.) 

Tolusa,  86,  Thoulouse,  or  Toulouse,  a  town  of  Aquitania,  beautifully 
situated  on  the  north  bank  of  Garumna.  Tolosa  was  one  of  the 
most  flourishing  cities  of  Gaul,  afterwards  the  residence  of  a  Ro- 
man colony,  and,  at  a  later  period,  the  metropolis  of  the  Visogoths. 

Tolosates,  ium,  the  inhabitants  of  Tolosa. 

Trebius,  i,  (Marcus  T.  Gallius,)  an  officer  sent  by  Caesar  to  the 
Curiosolilse,  to  procure  provisions. 

Treviri,  orum,  or  (sing.  Trevir,  iri,)  a  nation  of  Gallia  Belgica, 
between  the  Mosella,  (Moselle,)  andSilva  Arduenna.  Their  chief 
city,  Augusta  Trevirorum,  now  Triers,  or  Treves,  stands  on  the 
east  bank  of  the  Moselle,  over  which  it  has  a  large  bridge. 

Tribuni,  orum,  (sing.  Tribunus,  i,)  militum.  Tribunes  of  the  soldiers; 
officers  in  the  Roman  army,  who  had  the  command  of  a  division 
of  a  legion.  To  take  care  of  the  works  and  camp,  to  conHnuni- 
cate  the  watchword  to  the  guards,  and  to  give  judgment  in  certain 
cases,  formed  the  duty  of  the  military  tribunes.  Romulus  first 
appointed  the  tribunes,  to  whom  he  gave  that  name  from  their 
being  only  three  in  number,  one  out  of  each  tribe.  But  afterwards, 
each  legion  had  six  tribunes.  The  right  of  nomination  belonged 
first  to  the  kings,  then  to  the  consuls,  or  dictators,  and,  at  a  later 
period,  to  the  people. 

Trinobantes,  um,  a  nation  of  ancient  Britain,  inhabiting  the  coun- 
ties now  called  Essex  and  Middlesex.  Cassivellaunus  was  their 
king  at  the  time  Caesar  invaded  this  island. 

Tulingi,  drum,  a  people  of  Germany,  between  the  rivers  Danubius, 
(Danube,)  and  Rhenus,  (Rhine.) 

Turunes,  um,  or,  i,  orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Celtica,  on  the  banks 
of  the  river  Loire,  about  140  miles  from  the  sea.  Their  name  is 
perpetuated  by  the  modern  appellation  of  the  country,  Touraine, 
and  their  city  Tours,  anciently  Turones. 

Turris,  is,  a  tower.  The  towers  used  in  the  Roman  military  works 
were  of  two  kinds,  the  fixed  ind  the  moveable.  The  fixed  tow- 
ers were  erected  on  the  agger,  or  mound,  and  were  raised  suffi- 
ciently high  to  overlook  and  command  the  enemy's  raniparts,  and 
from  them  showers  of  arrows,  darts,  and  other  missiles  were 
thrown  by  means  of  various  engines.  The  moveable  towers  (See 
wood  cut,  next  page,)  were  pushed  forward  on  rollers  or  wheels 
fixed  below.  To  prevent  them  from  being  set  on  fire  they  were 
covered  with  raw  hides  and  pieces  of  coarse  woollen  cloth.  They 
were  of  immense  size,  sometimes  forty  or  fifty  feet  square,  and 
higher  than  the  walls,  or  even  the  towers  of  the  city.  When 
brought  up  against  the  walls,  a  place  was  seldom  able  to  stand 
out  long.  Sometimes  they  were  provided  with  a  species  of  drop 
or  platform,  which  being  let  down  reached  from  the  tower  to  the 
top  of  the  wall  and  formed  a  species  of  bridge  by  which  the  as- 
kailants  took  possession  of  the  walls. 


310 


UBII VALERIUS. 

TURRIS. 


u. 

Ubii,  orum,  a  people  of  Germany,  whose  territories  were  on  the 
Rhine  opposite  to  the  Sigambri. 

Unelli,  orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Celtica,  on  the  northwest  of  what 
is  now  called  Normandy.  Their  country  was  bounded  on  three 
sides  by  the  sea.  Their  chief  town  was  Coriallum,  (Gouril.)  Off 
the  coast  of  the  Unelli,  lay  the  islands  of  Cgesarea,  (Jersey,)  Sar- 
nia,  (Guernsey ,)  and  Reduua,  (Alderney ,)  which  have  long  been 
in  possession  of  the  British. 

Usipetes,  um,  or  Usipii,  orum,  a  people  of  Germany,  on  the  rigltt 
bank  of  the  Rhenus,  (Rhine.) 

V. 

Vahalis,  is,  m.  Wahal,  or,  Waal,  the  left  branch  of  the  Rhenus. 

(Rhine.)     It  joins  the  Mosa,  (Meuse,)  at  the  island  of  Voorn,  and 

falls  into  the  German  sea  below  the  Breil. 
Valerius,  i,  (Caius  V.  Caburus,)  a  chief  man  among  the  Gauls  in 

Provincia,  whose  original  name  appears  to  have  been  Caburus. 


VALERIUS — VERTIGO.  311 

On  being  made  a  Roman  citizen,  by  C.  Valerius  Flaccus,  he,  as 
was  usual,  took  the  name  of  his  patron. 

Valerius,  i,  (Gaius,  V.  Flaccus,)  a  noble  Roman,  who  conferred  the 
freedom  of  the  city  on  C.  Valerius  Caburus. 

Valerius  i,  (Caius  V.  Procillus,)  the  son  of  C.  Valerius  Caburus, 
was  the  chief  man  in  Provincia.  Csesar,  on  account  of  his  know- 
ledge of  the  Gallic  language,  sent  him  and  M.  Mettius  to  hold  an 
interview  with  Ariovistus,  king  of  Germany.  The  German  king 
imprisoned  them  both,  but  they  were  afterwards  rescued  by  the 
Romans  during  the  flight  of  their  army. 

Vallum,  the  ramparts  of  a  Roman  encampment,  composed  of  the 
earth  dug  out  from  the  ditch,  and  having  sharp  stakes  stuck  into 
it  to  keep  it  together.   (See  Castra.) 

Vangiones,  um,  a  people  of  Gallia  Belgica,  on  the  west  bank  of 
the  Rhenus,  {Rhine.)  They  were  originally  from  Germany,  and, 
at  one  time,  had  probably  lands  on  both  sides  of  that  river.  Their 
chief  town  was  Borbetomagus,  now  Worms. 

Velanius,  i,  (Quintus,  i,)  sent  by  Csesar  with  Silius  to  procure  corn 
from  the  Venfiti,  who  detained  them  in  order  to  receive  the  hos- 
tages which  they  had  given  to  that  general, 

Velauni,  orum,  a  small  tribe  in  Gallia  CeltTca,  on  the  sources  of  the 
Ligeris.  Their  chief  city  was  Anderitium,  now  Javoli,  or  Javoux. 

VelTtes,  light-armed  troops.  They  were  equipped  with  bows,  slings, 
seven  javelins  or  spears  with  slender  points  like  arrows,  so  that, 
when  thrown,  they  bent,  and  could  not  easily  be  returned  by  the 
enemy;  a  Spanish  sword,  having  both  edge  and  point;  a  round 
buckler  (par ma,)  about  three  feet  in  diameter,  made  of  wood  and 
covered  with  leather;  and  a  helmet  or  casque  for  the  head,  gene- 
rally made  of  the  skin  of  some  wild  beast.  When  the  army  was 
drawn  up  in  order  of  battle ,  the  velites  were  placed  in  the  spaces  or 
intervals  between  the  maniples,  or  else  on  the  wings.    (See  Legio.) 

Velocasses.   (See  Bellocasses.) 

Veneti,  orum,  a  nation  in  the  west  part  of  Gallia  Celtica,  whose 
chief  town  was  Venetia.  Their  country  lay  on  the  sea  coast, 
northwest  from  the  mouth  of  the  Liger,  (Loire.) 

Veragri,  orum,  a  people  who  lived  in  that  part  of  Provincia,  now 
called  Dauphine,  on  the  south  bank  of  the  Rhodanus,  (Rhone,) 
above  Lacus  Lemanus,  (the  Lake  of  Geneva.) 

Verbigcuus,  i,  (sc.  pagus,)  or,  Urbigenus,  one  of  the  four  divisions 
of  Helvetia,  (Switzerland,)  included  the  cantons  of  Friburg  and 
Bern,  with  the  districts  of  Neufchatel  and  Vallengin. 

Vergobretus,  i,  the  title  of  the  supreme  magistrate  among  the  iEdui, 
who  was  created  yearly,  and  had  the  power  of  life  and  death  over 
his  countrymen. 

Veromandui,  orum,  a  people  of  Gallia  Belgica,  between  the  Nervii 
and  Suessiones.  Their  chief  town  was  Augusta  Veromanduorum, 
(St.  Quentin,)  on  the  right  bank  of  the  Samara,  (Somme.)  Like 
most  of  the  other  nations  of  Gallia  Belgica,  they  were  originally 
from  Germany. 

Vertico.  onis,  a  nobleman  of  the  Nervii,  who  was  in  Cicero's  camp, 
when  attacked  by  the  Eburones,  and  prevailed  on  a  slave  to  carry 
a  letter  to  C?esar,  communicating  information  of  that  event. 


312  VEBUDOCTIITS VOLUSENFS. 

Verudoctius,  i,  one  of  the  Helvelii.  He  and  Nameius  were  at  the 
head  of  the  embassy  sent  to  Caesar,  requesting  permission  to 
march  through  Provincia, 

Vesontio,  onis,  f.  Besancon,  the  chief  town  of  the  Sequani.  on  the 
east  bank  of  the  river  Dubis,  (Doux.) 

Vigilia,  86,  f.  a  watch,  the  time  a  Roman  soldier  remained  on  guard 
during  the  night.  Of  these  there  were  four,  each  three  hours 
long.    (See  Gr.  App.  I. 

VinesB,  arum,  f.  a  shed,  used  by  the  Romans  for  protecting  the  sol- 
diers in  besieging  towns.  It  consisted  of  four  upright  posts,  upon 
which  was  fixed  a  roof  of  hurdle  or  wicker-work.  Above  the 
hurdles  were  spread  raw  hides,  a  little  earth,  &c.  to  protect  it 
from  fire.  The  size  of  the  vineae  diff"ered  according  to  circum- 
stances. The  whole  rested  upon  wheels,  so  that  this  mantelet 
would  be  easily  moved,  and  under  it  the  besiegers  either  worked 
the  ram,  (See  Aries,)  or  tried  to  undermine  the  walls.  (See 
Pluteus.) 

Virdomarus,  one  of  the  -<Edui,  more  distinguished  by  political  influ- 
ence, than  by  noble  birth.  Caesar,  at  the  request  of  Divitiacus, 
raised  him  to  the  highest  dignity  in  the  state. 

Viridovix,  icis,  the  leading  man  among  the  Unelli,  who  headed  a 
powerful  army  in  an  attack  on  Sablnus,  one  of  Caesar's  lieuten- 
ants stationed  among  them,  who  defeated  Viridovix  by  an  artful 
stratagem. 

Vocates,  ium,  a  p^eople  of  Aquitania,  supposed  by  some  to  be  the 
same  with  Vasates,  whose  territories  lay  on  the  south  bank  of  the 
Garonne,  about  ninety  miles  from  the  mouth  of  that  river.  Their 
chief  town  was  Cossio. 

Vocio,  onis,  king  of  the  Norici,  to  whose  sister  Ariovistus  was 
married. 

Vocontii,  orum,  a  nation  of  Gaul,  on  the  banks  of  a  small  stream 
called  Druna,  (Drome,)  which  falls  into  the  Rhod^lnus,  (Rhone,) 
about  100  miles  from  the  mouth  of  that  river.  Their  chief  town 
was  Dia,  Die. 

Vosegus,  i,  or  Vogesus,  m.  Vauge,  is  a  branch  of  Mount  Jura, 
stretching  in  a  northern  direction,  in  which  are  the  sources  of 
the  Arar,  (Saone.)  the  Mosa,  (Meuse,)  and  the  Mosella,  (Moselle.) 

VolcatiusTullus,VolcatiiTulli,  an  officer,  who,  according  to  Caesar, 
sustained,  at  Dyrrachium,  (Durazzo,)  with  three  cohorts,  the 
charge  of  a  whole  legion. 

Volcae,  arum,  a  numerous  and  powerful  nation  of  Gaul,  between 
the  Garumna,  (Garonne,)  and  the  Rhodanus,  (Rhone,)  divided 
into  the  Arecomici,  and  Tectosages,  q.  v. 

Volusenus,  i,  (Caius,  i,)  an  officer  whom  Caesar  sent  with  a  galley 
to  survey  the  coast  of  Britain  opposite  Gaul,  and  to  acquire  as 
correct  information  as  he  could,  respecting  the  harbors  and  land- 
ing places,  previously  to  his  sailing  against  that  island. 


[the  end.] 


BULLIONS' 

SERIES  OF  GRAMMARS, 

ENGLISH,  LATIN  AND  GREEK, 

ON  THE  SAME  PLAN, 

FOR  THE  USE  OP 

CoUegres,  Academies  &  Common  (Schools. 

(Published  by  Pratt,  Woodford  &  Co.,  N.  Y.) 

In  preparing  this  series,  the  main  object  has  been,  First: 
To  provide  for  the  use  of  schools  a  set  of  class  books  on 
this  important  branch  of  study,  more  simple  in  their  ar- 
rangement, more  complete  in  their  parts,  and  better  adapted 
to  the  purposes  of  public  instruction,  than  any  heretofore  in 
use  in  our  public  Seminaries :  and  Secondly,  to  give  the 
whole  a  uniform  character  by  following,  in  each,  substan- 
tially, the  same  arrangement  of  parts,  using  the  same 
grammatical  terms,  and  expressing  the  definitions,  rules, 
and  leading  parts,  as  nearly  as  the  nature  of  the  case 
would  admit  in  the  same  language ;  and  thus  to  render  the 
study  of  one  Grammar  a  more  profitable  introduction  to  the 
study  of  another  than  it  can  be,  when  the  books  used  dif- 
fer so  widely  from  each  other  in  their  whole  style  and  ar- 
rangement, as  those  now  in  use  commonly  do.  By  this 
means,  it  is  believed,  much  time  and  labor  will  be  saved, 
both  to  teacher  and  pupil, — the  analogy  and  peculiarities 
of  the  different  languages  being  constantly  kept  in  view,  will 
show  what  is  common  to  all,  or  peculiar  to  each, — the  confu- 
sion and  difficulty  unnecessarily  occasioned  by  the  use  of 


elementary  works,  differing  widely  from  each  other  in  lan- 
guage and  structure  will  be  avoided, — and  the  progress  of 
the  student  rendered  much  more  rapid,  easy  and  satis- 
factory. 

These  works  form  a  complete  series  of  elementary 
books,  in  which  the  substance  of  the  best  Grammars  in 
each  language  has  been  compressed  into  a  volume  of 
convenient  size,  handsomely  printed  on  a  fine  paper, 
neatly  and  strongly  bound,  and  at  a  moderate  price. 
The  whole  series  is  now  submitted  to  the  judgment  of 
a  discerning  public,  and  especially  to  teachers  and  su- 
perintendents of  schools,  and  seminaries  of  learning  through- 
out the  United  Slates. 

The  following  notices  and  recommendations  of  the 
works  separately,  and  of  the  series,  both  from  individual? 
of  the  highest  standing  in  the  community,  and  from  the 
public  press,  will  furnish  some  idea  of  the  plan  pro- 
posed, and  of  the  manner  in  which  it  has  been  executed 

I.  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR 

Comprising  the  substance  of  the  most  approved  English  Grammars 
extant — with  copious  exercises  in  Parsing  and  Syntax.  Fifth  edition 
with  an  Appendix,  of  various  and  useful  matter,  pp.  216,  12  mo.  New- 
York,  Robinson,  Pratt  &  Co. 

This  work,  on  tlje  plan  of  Murray's  Grammar,  has  been  prepared  with 
much  care,  and  with  special  reference  to  the  wants  of  our  Common 
Schools.  It  comprises  in  a  condensed  form,  and  expressed  in  plain  and 
perspicuous  language,  all  that  is  useful  and  important  in  the  works  of 
the  latest  and  best  writers  on  this  subject, — an  advantage  possessed  in  an 
equal  degree  by  no  similar  work  now  in  use.  It  is  the  result  not  only 
of  much  study  and  careful  comparison,  but  of  nearly  twenty-five  years 
experience  in  the  school  room,  during  which,  the  wants  of  the  pupil 
and  the  character  of  books  best  adapted  to  those  wants,  have  been  care- 
fully noted  ;  and  its  adaptation  to  the  purpose  of  instruction  has  now  been 
thoroughly  tested  and  approved  in  some  of  the  best  schools  in  this  coun- 
try.    It  is  beautifully  printed  on  a  fine  strong  paper,  neatly   and  firmly 


k>und,  and  forms  one  of  the  most  complete,  useful,  and  economical  school 
books  ever  offered  to  the  public.     The  following  are  a  few  extracts  from, 

NOTICES  AND  RECOMMENDATIONS. 

The  undersigned  have  great  satisfaction  in  recommending  to  the  pub- 
lie,  "  The  Principles  of  English  Grammar,"  by  Prof.  Bullions,  of  the 
Albany  Academy.  Proceeding  upon  the  plan  of  Murray,  he  has  availed 
himself  of  the  labors  of  the  most  distinguished  grammarians,  both  at 
home  and  abroad ;  and  made  such  a  happy  use  of  the  helps  afforded  him, 
that  we  know  of  no  wdrk  of  the  kind,  in  the  same  compass,  which  is 
equal  to  it  in  point  of  merit.  Among  its  many  excellencies,  it  is  not  the 
least,  that  Prof.  B.  has  given  a  practical  illustration  of  every  principle 
from  the  beginning  to  the  end  ;  and  the  possession  of  his  Grammar  en- 
tirely  supersedes  the  necessity  of  procuring  a  separate  volume  of  Exer- 
cises on  the  Rules  of  Syntax.  In  a  word,  we  can  truly  say,  in  the  lan- 
guage of  the  author,  ♦'  that  there  is  nothing  of  much  importance  in 
Murray's  larger  Grammar,  or  in  the  works  of  subsequent  writers,  that 
will  not  be  found  condensed  here." 

John  Ludlow,  Alonzo  CarrTENTON, 

Isaac  Ferris,  J.  M.  Garfield, 

Alfred  Conkling,  Robert  McKee. 

T.  Romeyn  Beck. 
Albany,  October  8,  1842. 

[An  Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  of  the  Al. 
bany  Female  Academy. '\ 
At  a  meeting  of  the  trustees  of  the  Albany  Female  Academy,  held  on 
the  third  instant,  the  book  committee  reported,  that  they  had  examined 
Professor  Bullions'  English  Grammar,  recently  published  in  this  city : 
and  that  in  their  opinion,  it  contains  all  that  is  useful  in  the  most  im- 
proved treatises  now  in  use,  as  well  as  much  valuable  original  matter : 
that  from  the  copious  exercises  in  false  syntax,  it  will  supersede  the  ne- 
cessity  of  a  separate  volume  on  that  subject ;  and  recommend  that  it 
should  be  used  as  the  text  book  in  this  institution. 

On  motion,  it  was  resolved,  that  the  report  of  the  committee  be  ac- 
cepted, and  the  treatise  on  English  Grammar ;  by  the  Rev.  Peter  Bul- 
lions, adopted  as  the  text  book  in  this  academy. 

An  Extract  from  the  Minutes. 

A.  Crittenton,  Secretary  of  the 
Board  of  Trustees,  and 
Principal  of  the  Academy. 
Albany,  October  13,  1834. 

Sing.  Sing,  November  1,  1834. 
Dear  Sir — I   have  examined  your  English  Grammar  with  no  small 
degree  of  satisfaction  ;  and  though  I  am  not  in  the  habit  of  recommend- 
ing books  in  this  manner,  I  am  constrained  in  this  case  to  say,  I  think 
you  have  conferred  another  important  favour  on  the  cause  of  education. 


Hie  great  defects  of  most  of  the  English  grammars  now  in  use,  particu- 
larly in  the  omission  of  many  ^  necessary  definitions,  or  in  the  want  of 
perspicuity  in  those  given,  and  also  in  the  rules  of  construction,  are  in  a 
great  measure  happily  supplied.  I  am  so  well  pleased  with  the  result  of 
your  labors,  that  I  have  adopted  it,  (as  I  did  your  Greek  Grammar)  for 
both  our  institutions.  Yours  respectfully, 

Nathaniel  S.  Prime,  Principal  of 
Rev.  p.  Bujxions,  Mt.  Pleasant  Academy, 


The  undersigned  hold  the  responsibility  of  recommendation  as  an  im 
portant  one — often  abused,  and  very  frequently  used  to  obliged  a  per- 
sonal friend,  or  to  get  rid  of  an  urgent  applicant.  They  further  appeal 
to  their  own  conduct  for  years  past,  to  show  that  they  have  only  occa. 
sionally  assumed  this  responsibility  ;  and  therefore  fQel  the  greater  confi. 
dence  in  venturing  to  recommend  the  examination,  and  the  adoption  of 
the  Rev.  Dr.  Bullions'  English  Grammar,  as  at  once  the  most  concise 
and  the  most  comprehensive  of  any  with  which  they  are  acquainted ;  as 
furnishing  a  satisfactory  solution  of  nearly  all  the  difl&culties  of  the  Eng> 
lish  language  ;  as  containing  a  full  series  of  exercises  in  false  syntax, 
with  rules  for  their  correction ;  and  finally,  that  the  arrangement  is  in 
every  way  calculated  to  carry  the  pupil  from  step  to  step  in  the  success- 
fui  acquisition  of  that  most  important  end  of  education,  the  knowledge 
and  use  of  the  English  language.  GIDEON  HAWLEY, 

T.  ROMEYN  BECK, 

March  1,  1842.  JOHN  A.  DIX. 


A  cursory  examination  of  the  English  Grammar  of  Dr.  Bullions,  has 
satbfied  me,  that  it  has  just  claims  on  public  favour.  It  is  concise  and 
simple  ;  the  matter  is  well  digested  ;  the  exercises  excellent,  and  the  ty- 
pographical execution  worthy  of  all  praise.  The  subscriber  takes  plea- 
sure in  recommending  it  to  the  notice  of  Teachers,  and  of  all  persons 
interested  in  education.  ^      ALONZO  POTTER. 

Union  College,  Sept.  6,  1842. 

The  English  Grammar  of  the  Rev.  Dr.  Bullions,  appears  to  me,  to  be 
the  best  manual  which  has  appeared  as  yet.  With  all  the  good  points 
of  Murray,  it  has  additions  and  emendations,  which  I  cannot  but  think 
would  have  commended  themselves  to  Murray  himself,  and  if  I  were  a 
teacher  of  English  Grammar,  I  would  without  hesitation  prefer  it  to  any 
other  book  of  the  kind,  JAMES  W.  ALEXANDER, 

Professor  of  Belles  Leitres,  College  of  N.  J. 

Princeton,  Aug.  15,  1842 

Extract  of  a  letter  from  Rev.  Benjamin  Hale,  D.D.,  President  of  Ge 

neva  College  N.  Y. 

Rev.  Dr.  Bullions. — Dear  Sir— I  have  lately  procured  a  copy  of  your 

English  Grammar,  and  given  it  such  attention  as  my  time  has  permitted, 

aud  I  do  not  hesitate  to  express  my  conviction,  that  it  is  entitled  to  higher 


M 


confidence  than  any  other  English  Grammar  m  use  among  us,  and  my 
wish,  that  it  may  come  into  general  use.  I  have  seen  enough  to  satisfy 
me,  that  you  hav^Wiligently  consulted  the  best  sources,  and  combined 
your  materials  with  discrimination  and  judgment.  We  have,  as  a  facul- 
ty,  recommended  it  by  placing  it  on  the  list  of  books  to  be  used  by  can- 
didates in  preparation  for  this  college.  I  have  personally  recommended 
it,  and  will  continue  to  recommend  it,  as  I  have  opportunity. 

Very  respectfully,  dear  sir,  your  friend,  &c. 
BENJAMIN  HALE. 
Geneva  College,  July  13,  1842. 


Extract  of  a  letter  from  Rev.   Cyrus  Mason,  D.D.,  Rector  of  the  Grammar 
School  in  the  University  of  New-  York. 

University,  New-York,  June  \^th,  1842. 
Rev.  Dr.  Bullions. — Dear  Sir — At  the  suggestion  of  the  late  Mr. 
Leckie,  head  classical  master  in  the  Grammar  School,  we  began  to  in- 
troduce your'grammars  at  the  opening  of  the  present  year.  We  have 
made  use  chiefly  of  the  Greek  and  English  Grammar.  The  result  thus 
far  is  a  conviction  that  we  have  profited  by  the  change,  which  I  was 
very  slow  to  make  ;  and  I  doubt  not  that  our  farther  experience  will  con- 
firm the  good  opinion  we  entertain  of  your  labors  in  this  department  of 
learning.     Wishing  you  a  large  reward,  I  remain,  very  truly  yours, 

C.  MASON,  Rector. 

NOTICES  FROM  THE  PUBLIC  PRESS. 

From  a  Report  presented  to  the  Jefferson  Co.  Asso- 
ciation OF  Teachers,  on  the  English  Grammars  now  in 
usCf  the  merits  of  each,  and  the  best  7nethod  of  teaching 
them.  By  the  Rev.  J.  R.  Boyd,  Principal  of  Black  Ri- 
ver Institute. 

"  2.  The  Grammar  by  Prof.  Bullions  of  the  Albany  Aca- 
demy, is  constructed  on  the  same  plan  as  that  of  Brown  j 
and  while  it  is  not  so  copious  in  its  exercises,  nor  so  full  in 
its  observations  upon  the  language,  yet  it  is  far  more  simple 
in  its  phraseology,  more  clear  in  its  arrangement,  more  free 
perhaps  from  errors  or  things  needing  improvement,  and  at 
the  same  time  contains  all  that  is  necessary  to  be  learned  in 
gaining  a  knowledge  of  the  structure  of  our  language.  The 
Rules  of  Syntax  and  observations  under  them,  are  expressed 
generally  in  the  best  manner.  The  Verb  is  most  vividly  ex- 
plained, and  that  portion  of  the  work  contains  much  not  to 
be  found  in  other  grammars,  while  it  judiciously  omits  a 
great  deal  to  be  found  in  them,  that  is  unworthy  of  insertion. 
"  It  is  excellent  upon  Prosody,  and  upon  Poetic  Diction 


6  <*    * 

and  gives  an  admirable  summary  of  directions  for  correct 
and  elegant  writing,  and  the  different  form|/)f  composition. 
The  typography  of  the  book  cannot  be  too  highly  commended 
— a  circumstance  that  greatly  affects  the  comfort  and  improve- 
ment of  the  learner. 

"This  grammar  is  equally  well  adapted  to  the  beginner 
and  to  the  advanced  scholar.  The  course  of  instruction 
which  Prof.  B.  recommends  in  the  use  of  his  grammar, 
seems  wisely  adapted  to  secure  in  the  readiest  manner  the 
improvement  of  the  pupil.  The  book  is  not  so  large  as  to 
appal  the  beginner,  nor  so  small  as  to  be  of  little  use  to  those 
advanced.  On  the  whole,  in  my  judgment,  no  work  has  yet 
appeared,  which  presents  equally  high  claims  to  general  use. 
It  is  copious  without  redundancy — it  is  well  printed,  and 
forms  a  volume  pleasing  to  the  eye.  It  is  lucid  and  simple, 
while  in  the  main,  it  is  philosophically  exact. — Among  the 
old  Grammars,  our  decided  preference  is  given  to  that  of 
Prof.  Bullions." 

[From  the  Albany  Argus.] 

Principles  of  English  Grammar. — This  work  besides  containing  a 
full  system  of  grammar,  is  rendered  more  immediately  useful  for  acade- 
mies and  common  schools,  by  containing  copious  examples  in  good  gram, 
mar  for  parsing,  and  in  bad  grammar  for  correction;  and  all  of  these  are 
arranged  directly  under  the  rule  to  which  they  apply.  Thus,  instead  of 
two  books,  which  are  required,  (the  grammar  and  the  exercises,)  the 
learner  finds  both  in  one,  for  a  price  at  least  not  greater  than  the  others. 

[From  the  Newburgh  Journal.] 
Bullions'  English  Grammar. — It  is  not  one  of  the  smallest  evils  con- 
nected with  our  present  system  of  common  school  education,  that  our 
schools  are  flooded  with  such  a  variety  of  books  on  elementary  subjects, 
not  only  differing  in  arrangement,  but  frequently  involving  absurd  and 
contradictory  principles.  And  to  no  subject  are  these  remarks  more  ap- 
plicable, than  to  English  Grammar.  And  until  some  one  elementary 
work  of  an  approved  character  shall  be  generally  introduced  into  our 
common  schools,  we  despair  of  realizing  a  general  proficiency  in  this 
important  branch  of  education,  It  is  with  pleasure,  therefore,  that  we 
witness  the  inci'easing  popularity  of  "  Bullions'  English  Grammar." 
From  a  familiar  acquaintance  with  the  work,  from  the  publication  of 
the  first  edition,  we  have  no  hesitation  in  pronouncing  it  the  best  Gram- 
mar with  which  we  are  acquainted.  The  perspicuity  of  its  definitions, 
the  correctness  of  its  principles,  the  symmetry  of  its  arrangements,  as 
well  as  the  neat  and  accurate  form  in  which  it  is  presented,  and  withal 
the  cheapness  of  the  work,  are  so  many  recommendations  to  its  general  use. 


M 


[From  the  Albany  Evening  Journal.] 

Professor  Bullions'  English  Gia»nmar  is  obviously  the  fruit  of  sound 
and  enlightened  judgment,  patient  labor  and  close  reflection.  It  partakes 
o£  the  character  both  of  an  original  work  and  of  a  compilation.  Fol- 
lowing the  principles  of  Murray,  and  adopting  in  the  main  the  plan  of 
Lennie,  the  most  distinguished  of  his  successors,  the  aim  of  the  author, 
as  he  states  in  his  preface,  has  been  to  correct  what  is  erroneous^  to  re- 
trench  what  is  superfluous  or  unimportant,  to  compress  what  is  prolix,  to 
elucidate  what  is  obscure,  and  to  determine  what  is  left  doubtful,  in  the 
books  already  in  use.  In  laboring  to  accomplish  this  excellent  design,  he 
has  contrived  to  condense,  in  very  perspicuous  language,  within  the 
compass  of  a  small,  handsomely  printed  volume,  about  200  pages,  and 
costing  but  50  cents,  all  that  is  requisite  in  this  form  to  the  acquisition 
of  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  grammar  of  our  language.  It  contains 
so  great  a  number  of  exercises  in  parsing  and  syntax,  judiciously  inter- 
spersed, as  to  supersede  the  necessity  of  separate  manuals  of  exercises 
now  in  use.  Among  other  highly  useful  things  to  be  found  in  this  book, 
and  not  usually  met  with  in  works  of  this  nature,  are  some  very  valua. 
ble  critical  remarks,  and  a  pretty  long  "  list  of  improper  expressions," 
which  unhappily  have  crept  into  use  in  different  pai-ts  of  our  country. 
Under  the  head  of  Prosody,  the  author  has,  it  is  believed,  given  a  bet- 
ter explanation  of  the  principles  of  English  versification,  than  is  to  be 
found  in  any  other  work  of  this  nature  in  this  country.  In  short,  I 
hazard  the  prediction  that  this  will  be  found  to  be  decidedly  the  plainest, 
most  perfect,  and  most  useful  manual  of  English  grammar  that  has  yet 
appeared.  Z. 

EXTRACTS  FROM    LETTERS. 

The  following,  are  extracts  from  letters  from  County  Su- 
perintendents of  Common  Schools  in  the  State  of  New-York, 
to  whom  copies  of  the  work  had  been  sent  for  examination. 
From  Alexander  Fonda,  Esq.  Dep.  Supt.  of  Com.  Schools,  Schenectady  Co, 

Schenectady,  March  30,  1842. 

Dear  Sir — I  acknowledge  the  receipt  of  a  copy  of  your  English 
Grammar,  left  upon  my  office  desk  yesterday  afternoon.  When  in  your 
city  some  three  weeks  since,  I  was  presented  with  a  copy  by  S,  S.  Ran- 
dall, Esq. ;  from  the  examination  I  was  enabled  to  give  it,  and  from  the 
opinion  expressed  in  relation  to  it,  by  one  of  Ae  oldest  and  most  ex- 
perienced teachers  of  this  county,  to  whom  I  presented  it,  as  well  as 
from  the  knowledge  I  possessed  by  reputation  of  its  author,  I  had  before 
I  received  the  copy  from  you,  determined  to  introduce  it  as  far  as  I  was 
able,  as  a  class  book  in  the  schools  of  this  county. 
From  Chauncey  Goodrich,  Esq.  Dep.  Supt.  of  Com.  Schools,  Onondaga  Co 

Canal,  June  24,  1842. 

Dear  Sir — Your  favor  of  the  1st  instant  has  just  come  to  hand.  The 
Grammar  referred  to  has  been  received  and  examined.  I  am  fully  sa- 
tisfied of  its  superior  merits  as  a  grammar  for  common  schools,  over  any 


other  work  I  have  seen.     I  shall  take  the  earliest  measures  for  its  mtry 
duction  into  the  schools  under  my  supervision. 

From  RoswELL  K.  Bourne,  Esq.  Dep.  Supt.  of  Com.  Schools,  Chenango  G»- 

Piicher,  June  30.  1842. 
Dear  Sir — Some  time  since  I  received  a  copy  of  a  work  on  English  gram- 
mar,  by  the  Rev.  Peter  Bullions,  D.D.  for  which  I  am  much  obliged.  I 
have  given  the  book  as  close  an  examination  as  circumstances  would 
permit.  The  book  is  well  got  up,  and  exhibits  the  thorough  acquaint- 
ance of  the  author  with  his  subject.  I  think  it  well  calculated  for  our 
common  schools. 

From  Garnsey  Beach,  Esq.  Dep.    Supt.  of  Common  Schools,  Putnam  Co. 

Patterson,  July  2,  1842. 
Dear  Sir — Yours  of  the  first  ult,  was  received  on  Thursday  last.     As 
it  respects  your  Grammar  I  have  carefully  examined  it,  and  without  en- 
tering into  particulars,  I  consider   it  the   best  I  have   ever  seen,  and  as 
such,  I  have  recommended  it  to  the  several  schools  under  my  care. 
From  O.  VV.  Randall,  Esq.  Dep.  Supt.  of  Common  Schools,  Oswego  Co. 

Phoenix,  July  2,  1842. 
Mr.  P.  Bullions, — Dear  Sir — I  have  for  the  last  two  weeks  devoted 
some  considerable  time,  in  perusing  your  system  of  English  Grammar, 
and  in  reply  to  yours,  requesting  my  views  of  the  work,  I  can  cheer- 
fully say,  that  its  general  arrangment,  is  admirably  adapted  either  to  the 
novice  or  adept.  The  §  27th  and  §  28th  on  verbs,  with  the  attendant  remarks, 
are  highly  important,  and  essential  to  the  full  completion  of  any  system 
of  grammar.  The  work  taken  together  is  remarkable  for  simplicity, 
lucidity  and  exactness,  and  is  calculated  not  only  to  make  the  correct 
grammarian,  but  also  a  correct  prosodian.  Whatever  may  be  its  fate  in 
the  field,  it  enters  with  a  large  share  of  merit  on  its  side,  and  with  full 
as  fair  prospect  of  success  as  any  work  extant. 

From  W.  S.  Preston,  Esq.  Dep.   Supt.  of  Com  ScJiools,  Suffolk  Co.  JV.  Y. 

Patchogue,  L.  I.  July  6,  1842, 
Prof.  P.  Bullions, — Dear  Sir — Some  time  since  I  received  a  copy  of 
your  English  Grammar,  for  which  I  am  much  obliged.  I  have  devoted 
as  much  time  to  its  perusal  as  circumstances  would  permit,  and  can  say 
of  it,  that  I  believe  it  claims  decided  prr  rerence  over  the  Grammars  ge- 
nerally used  in  schools  throughout  this  country,  and  indeed  I  may  say, 
over  the  many  works  o#that  science  extant. 

From  James  Henry,  Esq.   Den.    Supt.  of  Common   Schools,  Herkimer  Co, 

Little-Falls,  July  11,  1842. 

Prof.  Bullions, — Sir — I  have  read  with  as  much  attention  as  my  avo. 
cations  would  allow,  the  work  you  had  the  kindness  to  send  me,  upon 
English  Grammar,  and  so  far  as  I  am  capable  of  forming  an  opinion  of 
the  merits  of  your  book,  I  concur  generally  in  the  views  expressed  in 
the  extract  from  the  report  of  M     Boyd,  as  contained  in  your  circular. 


9 

From  D.  H.   Stevens,  Dep.   Supt,  of  Common  Schools,  FranJdin  Co.  N,  Y. 

Moira,  Aug.  27,  1842. 

Rev.  P,  Bullions, — Dear  Sir — On  Wednesday  the  24th  instant,  the 
committee  determined  upon  a  series  of  books,  and  I  have  the  happmess 
to  inform  you,  that  your  English  Grammar  will  be  reported  on  the  first 
Wednesday  in  October,  at  the  next  meeting  of  the  Association,  as  the 
most  brief,  perspicuous  and  philosophical  work,  upon  that  subject  within 
our  knowledge. 

From  R.  W.  Finch,  Esq.  Dep.  Svpt.  of  Common  Schools.  Steuben  Co.  N.  ¥• 

Bath,  Sept.  11,  1842. 

Dear  Sir — Having  at  length  given  your  English  Grammar  a  careful 
perusal ;  and  having  compared  it  with  all  the  modern  works  on  the  sub- 
ject, which  have  any  considerable  claims  to  merit,  I  am  prepared  to  make 
a  more  enlightened  decision,  and  one  that  is  satisfactory  to  myself.  The 
work  has  my  decided  preference. 

From  J.  W.  Fairfield,  and  Cyrus  Curtiss,  Esqrs.  Dep.    Superintendents 
of  Common  Schools,  Hudson,  N,  Y. 

Hudson,  Sept.  15,  1842. 

Rev.  P.  Bullions, — Sir — ^We  have  examined  a  copy  of  your  English 
Grammar,  with  reference  to  the  introduction  of  the  same  into  our  pub- 
lic schools,  and  we  take  pleasure  in  saying  that  the  examination  has 
proved  very  satisfactory.  We  cannot,  without  occupying  too  much 
space,  specify  the  particular  points  of  excellence  which  we  noticed  in 
the  arrangement  of  the  different  parts,  the  clearness  of  expression  and 
illustration,  and  the  precise  adaptation  of  the  Rules  of  Syntax,  to  the 
principles  previously  laid  down.  It  is  sufficient  to  say,  that  we  believe 
it  to  be,  in  all  the  requisites  of  a  good  school  book,  superior  to  any  other 
English  Grammar  which  has  come  under  our  observation. 

II.  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  LATIN  GRAMMAR,  &c. 

This  work  is  upon  the  foundation  of  Adam's  Latin  Grammar,  so  long 
and  so  well  known  as  a  text  book  in  this  country.  The  object  aimed  at 
was  to  combine  with  all  that  is  excellent  in  the  work  of  Adam,  the  im- 
portant results  of  subsequent  labors  in  this  field, — to  correct  errors  and 
supply  defects, — to  bring  the  whole  up  to  that  point  which  the  present 
state  of  classical  learning  requires, — and  to  give  it  such  a  form  as  to  ren- 
der it  a  suitable  part  of  the  series.    The  following  notices  are  furnished. 

From  Rev.  James  W.  Alexander,  Prof.  Belles  Lettres  in  the  College  of 
New-Jersey. 

Princeton,  N.  J.  Aug.  15,  1842. 
'  1  have  examined  with  some  care  the  Latin  Grammar  of  the  Rev.  Dr. 
Bullions.  It  is,  if  I  may  hazard  a  judgment,  a  most  valuable  work, 
evincing  that  peculiar  apprehension  of  the  pupil's  necessities,  which 
nothing  but  long  continued  practice  as  an  instructor  can  produce.  Among 
our  various  Latin  Grammaxs,  it  deserves  the  place  which  is  occupied  by 
the  best ;  and  no  teacher,  as  I  think,  need  hesitate  a  moment  about  in 
troducing  it 


10 

[From  the  Biblical  Repertory,  or  Princeton  Review,  Jan.  1842.j 
The  Principles  of  Latin  Grammar,  &c. — This  completes  the  series 
proposed  by  the  learned  author,  who  has  now  furnished  us  with  an  Eng- 
lish, a  Latin,  and  a  Greek  Grammar,  which  have  this  peculiar  recom- 
mendation that  they  are  arranged  in  the  same  order,  and  expressed  in 
the  same  terms,  so  far  as  the  differences  of  the  languages  permit.  Tho 
basis  of  this  manual  is  the  well  known  Grammar  of  Adam,  an  excellent  , 
summary,  but  at  the  same  time  one  which  admitted  of  retrenchment,  ad- 
dition, and  emendation,  all  which  have  been  ably  furnished  by  Dr.  Bul- 
lions. We  have  not  made  a  business  of  perusing  the  work  laboriously, 
but  we  have  looked  over  the  whole  and  bestowed  particular  attention  on 
certain  parts  ;  and  therefore  feel  at  liberty  to  recommend  it  with  great 
confidence,  especially  to  all  such  teachers  as  have  been  in  the  habit  of 
using  Adam's  Grammar. 

III.  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  GREEK   GRAMMAR,  &c. 

The  object  of  this  publication  was  to  provide  a  comprehensive  manual 
of  Greek  Grammar,  adapted  to  the  use  of  the  younger,  as  well  as  to  the 
more  advanced  class  of  students  in  our  schools  and  colleges,  and  espe- 
cially of  those  under  the  authoi-'s  own  care.  To  this  end,  the  leading 
principles  of  Greek  Grammar  are  exhibited  in  rules  as  few  and  brief  as 
possible,  so  as  to  be  easily  committed  to  memory,  and  at  the  same  time 
80  comprehensive  and  perspicuous,  as  to  be  of  general  and  easy  application. 

The  following  notices  of  this  work,  from  different  sources,  will  show 
the  estimate  formed  of  it  by  competent  judges. 

Bullions'  Greek  Grammar. — We  have  examined  the  second  edition 
of  Dr.  Bullions'  Greek  Grammar,  and  consider  it,  upon  the  whole,  the 
best  grammar  of  the  Greek  language  with  which  we  are  acquainted 
The  parts  to  be  committed  to  memory  are  both  concise  and  comprehen 
sive  ;  the  illustrations  are  full  without  prolixity,  and  the  arrangement  na- 
tural and  judicious.  The  present  edition  is  considerably  reduced  in  size 
from  the  former,  without,  as  we  apprehend,  at  all  impairing  its  value. 

It  discovers  in  its  compilation  much  labor  and  research,  as  well  as 
sound  judgment.  We  are  persuaded  that  the  general  use  of  it  in  our 
grammar  schools  and  academies  would  facilitate  the  acquisition  of  a 
thorough  knowledge  of  the  language.  Judicious  teachers  pursuing  the 
plan  marked  out  by  the  author  in  his  preface,  would  usually  conduct 
their  pupils  to  a  competent  knowledge  of  the  language  in  a  less  time  by 
several  months  than  by  the  systems  formerly  in  use.  We  therefore  give 
it  our  cordial  recommendation.  ELIPHALET  NOTT,       , 

R.  PROUDFIT,  ^ 

Union  College,  December  19,  1840.        ALONZO  POTTER.         "^ 

Extract  of  a  letter  from  Rev.  Daniel  D.  Whedon,  A.M.  Professor  of  An- 
cient Languages  and  Literature,  in  the  Wesleyan  University,  Middleton,  Ct. 
Wesleyan  University,  March  29,  1842. 
Rev.  Dr.  Bullions, — Dear  Sir — Although  I  have  not  the  honor  of 


11 

your  personal  acquaintance,  I  take  the  liberty  of  addressing  to  you  my 
thariKs  for  your  excellent  Greek  Grammar.  Noth  with  standing  many 
persona],  urgent,  and  interested  appeals  in  favor  of  other  grammars — and 
our  literary  market  seems  to  abound  with  that  kind  of  stock — the  in- 
trinsic superiority  of  your  manual  over  every  rival,  induced  me,  after  I 
saw  your  last  edition,  to  adopt  it  in  the  Greek  department  of  the  Wes- 
leyan  University,  and  the  success  of  my  present  Freshman  class,  amply 
justities  the  course. 

Extractcf  a  letter  from  Henry  Bannister,  j^.M.  Principal  of  ike  Academy 
^  in  Fairfield,  N.   Y. 

Fairfield  Academy,  May  12,  1842. 

Rev.  Doct.  Bullions, — Sir — Sometime  since  I  received  your  English 
and  Greek  Grammar,  of  each,  one  copy ;  and,  if  it  is  not  too  late,  I 
would  now  return  you  my  sincere  thanks.  I  have  not  found  in  any  work, 
suitable  for  a  text  book  in  schools,  an  analysis  of  the  verb  so  strictly 
philosophical,  and  at  the  same  time  so  easy  to  the  learner  to  master  and 
to  retain  when  mastered,  as  that  contained  in  your  work.  The  editorial 
observations  on  government,  and  indeed  the  whole  matter  and  arrange- 
ment of  the  Syntax,  especially  commend  your  work  to  general  use  in 

schools.  

[From  the  Princeton  Review,  for  Jan.  1840.] 

It  is  with  pleasure  we  welcome  a  second  edition  of  this  manual,  which 
we  continue  to  regard  as  still  unsurpassed  by  any  similar  work  in  our 
language.  The  typography  and  the  quality  of  the  paper  are  uncommon- 
ly  good.  We  observe  valuable  additions  and  alterations.  For  all  that  we 
can  see,  everything  worth  knowing  in  Thiersch  is  here  condensed  into  a 
tew  pages.  We  have  certainly  never  seen  the  anatomy  of  the  Greek 
verb  so  neatly  demonstrated.  The  Syntax  is  full,  and  presents  the  lead- 
ing facts  and  principles,  by  rules,  so  as  to  be  easily  committed  to  mem- 
ory. To  learners  who  are  beginning  the  language,  and  especially  to 
teachers  of  grammar  schools,  we  earnestly  recommend  this  book. 


[From  the  New- York  Observer.] 
Bullions'  Principles  of  Greek  Grammar,  &.c.  2d  edition.  With 
pleasure  we  hail  the  second  edition  of  this  valuable  work,  and  are  happy 
to  find  that  the  revision  which  it  has  undergone  has  resulted  in  decided 
improvements.  Formed,  as  it  is,  on  the  basis  of  that  most  symmetrical 
of  all  modern  grammars.  Dr.  Moor's  Greek  Grammar,  which  its  learned 
author  never  lived  to  complete.  It  is  now  made  to  embrace  not  only  the 
general  rules,  but  all  the  minutia  essential  to  a  critical  knowledge  of 
that  ancient  and  elegant  language.  One  of  the  chief  excellencies  of  this 
model,  and  one  that  is  fully  retained  in  this  grammar,  is  to  be  found  in 
the  simplicity,  perspicuity,  conciseness,  and  yet  fulness  of  the  definitions 
and  rules  for  the  various  modifications  of  the  language.  The  sense  is 
clearly  expressed,  while  scarcely  a  particle  is  used  that  could  have  been 
dispensed  with.  We  have  no  hesitation  in  expressing  the  opinion,  that 
Dr.  B.  has  produced  the  most  complete  and  useful  Greek  grammar  that 
b  to  be  found  in  the  English  language. 


12 
RECOMMENDATIONS   OF  THE  SERIES. 

Frmi  the  Rev.  John  Ludlow;,  D.D.  Provost  of  the  University  of  Perm, 
No  one  I  think  can  ever  examine  the  series  of  Grammars  published  by 
Dr.  Bullions,  without  a  deep  conviction  of  their  superior  excellence. 
When  the  English  Grammar,  the  first  in  the  series,  was  published  in 
1834.  it  was  my  pleasure,  in  connexion  with  some  honored  individuals, 
in  the  city  of  Albany,  to  bear  the  highest  testimony  to  its  worth  ;  that 
testimony,  if  I  mistake  not,  received  the  unanimous  approval  of  all 
whose  judgment  can  or  ought  to  influence  public  opinion.  I  have  seen, 
with  great  gratification,  that  the  2d  and  3d  in  the  series,  the  Latin  and 
Greek,  have  met  with  the  same  favorable  judgement,  which  I  believe  to 
be  entirely  deserved,  and  in  which  I  do  most  heartily  concur. 

From  the  Hon.  Alfred  Conkling,  Judge  of  the  United  States  Court  in  the 
Northern  District  of  New-  York,  published  in  the  Cayuga  Patriot. 
Bullions'  Series  of  Grammars. — By  the  recent  publication  of  «♦  The 
Principles  of  Latin  Grammar,"  this  series  of  grammars  (English,  Latin, 
and  Greek,)  is  at  length  completed.  To  their  preparation,  Dr.  Bullions 
has  devoted  many  years  of  the  best  portion  of  his  life.  In  the  composi- 
tion  of  these  books,  he  has  shown  an  intimate  acquaintance  with  the  works 
of  his  ablest  predecessors;  and  while  upon  the  one  hand,  he  has  not  scru- 
pled freely  to  avail  himself  of  their  labors,  on  the  other  hand,  by  studi- 
ously avoiding  all  that  is  objectionable  in  them,  and  by  re-modelling,  im- 
proving, and  illustrating  the  rest,  he  has  unquestionably  succeeded  in  con- 
structing the  best — decidedly  the  very  best — grammar,  in  each  of  the 
three  above  named  languages,  that  has  yet  appeared.  Such  is  the  deli- 
berate  and  impartial  judgment  which  has  been  repeatedly  expressed  by 
the  most  competent  judges,  respecting  the  English  and  Greek  grammars ; 
and  such,  I  hesitate  not  to  believe,  will  be  the  judgment  formed  of  the 
Latin  grammar.  But  independently  of  the  superiority  of  these  works 
separately  considered,  they  possess,  collectively,  the  great  additional  re- 
commendation of  having  their  leading  parts  arranged  in  the  same  order, 
and,  as  far  as  properly  can  be  done,  expressed  in  the  same  language.  An 
acquaintance  with  one  of  them,  therefore,  cannot  fail  greatly  to  facilitate 
the  study  of  another,  and  at  the  same  time,  by  directing  the  attention  of 
the  student  distinctly  to  the  points  of  agreement  and  of  difference  in  the 
several  languages,  to  render  his  acquisitions  more  accurate,  and  at  the 
same  time  to  give  him  clearer  and  more  comprehensive  views  of  the 
general  principles  of  language.  The  importance  of  using  in  academies 
and  schools,  of  the  United  States  none  but  ably  written  and  unexcep 
tionable  school  books,  is  incalculable  ;  and  without  intending  unnecessa- 
nly  to  depreciate  the  labors  of  others,  as  a  friend  of  sound  education,  I 
cannot  refrain  from  expressing  an  earnest  hope  of  seeing  this  series  of 
grammars  in  general  use.  They  are  all  beautifully  printed  on  very  good 
paper,  and  are  sold  at  very  reasonable  prices. 


-f-T^jf 


^m 


-^ 


VB  35669  -^_ 

/' 

;V      ...^^^^^^^^iL 

1 

i 

18^5 
Blue 

// 5776^9 

.sSsi'ikVS'U.-- 


•^ 


